=encoding utf8

=head1 NAME

ffmpeg - ffmpeg media converter

=head1 SYNOPSIS


ffmpeg [I<global_options>] {[I<input_file_options>] -i F<input_url>} ... {[I<output_file_options>] F<output_url>} ...


=head1 DESCRIPTION


B<ffmpeg> is a universal media converter. It can read a wide variety of
inputs - including live grabbing/recording devices - filter, and transcode them
into a plethora of output formats.

B<ffmpeg> reads from an arbitrary number of input "files" (which can be regular
files, pipes, network streams, grabbing devices, etc.), specified by the
C<-i> option, and writes to an arbitrary number of output "files", which are
specified by a plain output url. Anything found on the command line which
cannot be interpreted as an option is considered to be an output url.

Each input or output url can, in principle, contain any number of streams of
different types (video/audio/subtitle/attachment/data). The allowed number and/or
types of streams may be limited by the container format. Selecting which
streams from which inputs will go into which output is either done automatically
or with the C<-map> option (see the Stream selection chapter).

To refer to input files in options, you must use their indices (0-based). E.g.
the first input file is C<0>, the second is C<1>, etc. Similarly, streams
within a file are referred to by their indices. E.g. C<2:3> refers to the
fourth stream in the third input file. Also see the Stream specifiers chapter.

As a general rule, options are applied to the next specified
file. Therefore, order is important, and you can have the same
option on the command line multiple times. Each occurrence is
then applied to the next input or output file.
Exceptions from this rule are the global options (e.g. verbosity level),
which should be specified first.

Do not mix input and output files -- first specify all input files, then all
output files. Also do not mix options which belong to different files. All
options apply ONLY to the next input or output file and are reset between files.

Some simple examples follow.


=over 4


=item *

Convert an input media file to a different format, by re-encoding media streams:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.avi output.mp4



=item *

Set the video bitrate of the output file to 64 kbit/s:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.avi -b:v 64k -bufsize 64k output.mp4



=item *

Force the frame rate of the output file to 24 fps:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.avi -r 24 output.mp4



=item *

Force the frame rate of the input file (valid for raw formats only) to 1 fps and
the frame rate of the output file to 24 fps:
	
	ffmpeg -r 1 -i input.m2v -r 24 output.mp4


=back


The format option may be needed for raw input files.



=head1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION


The transcoding process in B<ffmpeg> for each output can be described by
the following diagram:

	
	 _______              ______________
	|       |            |              |
	| input |  demuxer   | encoded data |   decoder
	| file  | ---------> | packets      | -----+
	|_______|            |______________|      |
	                                           v
	                                       _________
	                                      |         |
	                                      | decoded |
	                                      | frames  |
	                                      |_________|
	 ________             ______________       |
	|        |           |              |      |
	| output | <-------- | encoded data | <----+
	| file   |   muxer   | packets      |   encoder
	|________|           |______________|
	
	


B<ffmpeg> calls the libavformat library (containing demuxers) to read
input files and get packets containing encoded data from them. When there are
multiple input files, B<ffmpeg> tries to keep them synchronized by
tracking lowest timestamp on any active input stream.

Encoded packets are then passed to the decoder (unless streamcopy is selected
for the stream, see further for a description). The decoder produces
uncompressed frames (raw video/PCM audio/...) which can be processed further by
filtering (see next section). After filtering, the frames are passed to the
encoder, which encodes them and outputs encoded packets. Finally, those are
passed to the muxer, which writes the encoded packets to the output file.


=head2 Filtering

Before encoding, B<ffmpeg> can process raw audio and video frames using
filters from the libavfilter library. Several chained filters form a filter
graph. B<ffmpeg> distinguishes between two types of filtergraphs:
simple and complex.


=head3 Simple filtergraphs

Simple filtergraphs are those that have exactly one input and output, both of
the same type. In the above diagram they can be represented by simply inserting
an additional step between decoding and encoding:

	
	 _________                        ______________
	|         |                      |              |
	| decoded |                      | encoded data |
	| frames  |\                   _ | packets      |
	|_________| \                  /||______________|
	             \   __________   /
	  simple     _\||          | /  encoder
	  filtergraph   | filtered |/
	                | frames   |
	                |__________|
	


Simple filtergraphs are configured with the per-stream B<-filter> option
(with B<-vf> and B<-af> aliases for video and audio respectively).
A simple filtergraph for video can look for example like this:

	
	 _______        _____________        _______        ________
	|       |      |             |      |       |      |        |
	| input | ---> | deinterlace | ---> | scale | ---> | output |
	|_______|      |_____________|      |_______|      |________|
	


Note that some filters change frame properties but not frame contents. E.g. the
C<fps> filter in the example above changes number of frames, but does not
touch the frame contents. Another example is the C<setpts> filter, which
only sets timestamps and otherwise passes the frames unchanged.


=head3 Complex filtergraphs

Complex filtergraphs are those which cannot be described as simply a linear
processing chain applied to one stream. This is the case, for example, when the graph has
more than one input and/or output, or when output stream type is different from
input. They can be represented with the following diagram:

	
	 _________
	|         |
	| input 0 |\                    __________
	|_________| \                  |          |
	             \   _________    /| output 0 |
	              \ |         |  / |__________|
	 _________     \| complex | /
	|         |     |         |/
	| input 1 |---->| filter  |\
	|_________|     |         | \   __________
	               /| graph   |  \ |          |
	              / |         |   \| output 1 |
	 _________   /  |_________|    |__________|
	|         | /
	| input 2 |/
	|_________|
	


Complex filtergraphs are configured with the B<-filter_complex> option.
Note that this option is global, since a complex filtergraph, by its nature,
cannot be unambiguously associated with a single stream or file.

The B<-lavfi> option is equivalent to B<-filter_complex>.

A trivial example of a complex filtergraph is the C<overlay> filter, which
has two video inputs and one video output, containing one video overlaid on top
of the other. Its audio counterpart is the C<amix> filter.


=head2 Stream copy

Stream copy is a mode selected by supplying the C<copy> parameter to the
B<-codec> option. It makes B<ffmpeg> omit the decoding and encoding
step for the specified stream, so it does only demuxing and muxing. It is useful
for changing the container format or modifying container-level metadata. The
diagram above will, in this case, simplify to this:

	
	 _______              ______________            ________
	|       |            |              |          |        |
	| input |  demuxer   | encoded data |  muxer   | output |
	| file  | ---------> | packets      | -------> | file   |
	|_______|            |______________|          |________|
	


Since there is no decoding or encoding, it is very fast and there is no quality
loss. However, it might not work in some cases because of many factors. Applying
filters is obviously also impossible, since filters work on uncompressed data.


=head2 Loopback decoders

While decoders are normally associated with demuxer streams, it is also possible
to create "loopback" decoders that decode the output from some encoder and allow
it to be fed back to complex filtergraphs. This is done with the C<-dec>
directive, which takes as a parameter the index of the output stream that should
be decoded. Every such directive creates a new loopback decoder, indexed with
successive integers starting at zero. These indices should then be used to refer
to loopback decoders in complex filtergraph link labels, as described in the
documentation for B<-filter_complex>.

Decoding AVOptions can be passed to loopback decoders by placing them before
C<-dec>, analogously to input/output options.

E.g. the following example:

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT                                        \
	  -map 0:v:0 -c:v libx264 -crf 45 -f null -            \
	  -threads 3 -dec 0:0                                  \
	  -filter_complex '[0:v][dec:0]hstack[stack]'          \
	  -map '[stack]' -c:v ffv1 OUTPUT


reads an input video and

=over 4


=item *

(line 2) encodes it with C<libx264> at low quality;


=item *

(line 3) decodes this encoded stream using 3 threads;


=item *

(line 4) places decoded video side by side with the original input video;


=item *

(line 5) combined video is then losslessly encoded and written into
F<OUTPUT>.


=back




=head1 STREAM SELECTION


B<ffmpeg> provides the C<-map> option for manual control of stream selection in each
output file. Users can skip C<-map> and let ffmpeg perform automatic stream selection as
described below. The C<-vn / -an / -sn / -dn> options can be used to skip inclusion of
video, audio, subtitle and data streams respectively, whether manually mapped or automatically
selected, except for those streams which are outputs of complex filtergraphs.


=head2 Description

The sub-sections that follow describe the various rules that are involved in stream selection.
The examples that follow next show how these rules are applied in practice.

While every effort is made to accurately reflect the behavior of the program, FFmpeg is under
continuous development and the code may have changed since the time of this writing.


=head3 Automatic stream selection


In the absence of any map options for a particular output file, ffmpeg inspects the output
format to check which type of streams can be included in it, viz. video, audio and/or
subtitles. For each acceptable stream type, ffmpeg will pick one stream, when available,
from among all the inputs.

It will select that stream based upon the following criteria:

=over 4


=item *

for video, it is the stream with the highest resolution,

=item *

for audio, it is the stream with the most channels,

=item *

for subtitles, it is the first subtitle stream found but there's a caveat.
The output format's default subtitle encoder can be either text-based or image-based,
and only a subtitle stream of the same type will be chosen.

=back


In the case where several streams of the same type rate equally, the stream with the lowest
index is chosen.

Data or attachment streams are not automatically selected and can only be included
using C<-map>.

=head3 Manual stream selection


When C<-map> is used, only user-mapped streams are included in that output file,
with one possible exception for filtergraph outputs described below.


=head3 Complex filtergraphs


If there are any complex filtergraph output streams with unlabeled pads, they will be added
to the first output file. This will lead to a fatal error if the stream type is not supported
by the output format. In the absence of the map option, the inclusion of these streams leads
to the automatic stream selection of their types being skipped. If map options are present,
these filtergraph streams are included in addition to the mapped streams.

Complex filtergraph output streams with labeled pads must be mapped once and exactly once.


=head3 Stream handling


Stream handling is independent of stream selection, with an exception for subtitles described
below. Stream handling is set via the C<-codec> option addressed to streams within a
specific I<output> file. In particular, codec options are applied by ffmpeg after the
stream selection process and thus do not influence the latter. If no C<-codec> option is
specified for a stream type, ffmpeg will select the default encoder registered by the output
file muxer.

An exception exists for subtitles. If a subtitle encoder is specified for an output file, the
first subtitle stream found of any type, text or image, will be included. ffmpeg does not validate
if the specified encoder can convert the selected stream or if the converted stream is acceptable
within the output format. This applies generally as well: when the user sets an encoder manually,
the stream selection process cannot check if the encoded stream can be muxed into the output file.
If it cannot, ffmpeg will abort and I<all> output files will fail to be processed.


=head2 Examples


The following examples illustrate the behavior, quirks and limitations of ffmpeg's stream
selection methods.

They assume the following three input files.

	
	
	input file 'A.avi'
	      stream 0: video 640x360
	      stream 1: audio 2 channels
	
	input file 'B.mp4'
	      stream 0: video 1920x1080
	      stream 1: audio 2 channels
	      stream 2: subtitles (text)
	      stream 3: audio 5.1 channels
	      stream 4: subtitles (text)
	
	input file 'C.mkv'
	      stream 0: video 1280x720
	      stream 1: audio 2 channels
	      stream 2: subtitles (image)



=head4 Example: automatic stream selection

	
	ffmpeg -i A.avi -i B.mp4 out1.mkv out2.wav -map 1:a -c:a copy out3.mov

There are three output files specified, and for the first two, no C<-map> options
are set, so ffmpeg will select streams for these two files automatically.

F<out1.mkv> is a Matroska container file and accepts video, audio and subtitle streams,
so ffmpeg will try to select one of each type.For video, it will select C<stream 0> from F<B.mp4>, which has the highest
resolution among all the input video streams.For audio, it will select C<stream 3> from F<B.mp4>, since it has the greatest
number of channels.For subtitles, it will select C<stream 2> from F<B.mp4>, which is the first subtitle
stream from among F<A.avi> and F<B.mp4>.

F<out2.wav> accepts only audio streams, so only C<stream 3> from F<B.mp4> is
selected.

For F<out3.mov>, since a C<-map> option is set, no automatic stream selection will
occur. The C<-map 1:a> option will select all audio streams from the second input
F<B.mp4>. No other streams will be included in this output file.

For the first two outputs, all included streams will be transcoded. The encoders chosen will
be the default ones registered by each output format, which may not match the codec of the
selected input streams.

For the third output, codec option for audio streams has been set
to C<copy>, so no decoding-filtering-encoding operations will occur, or I<can> occur.
Packets of selected streams shall be conveyed from the input file and muxed within the output
file.


=head4 Example: automatic subtitles selection

	
	ffmpeg -i C.mkv out1.mkv -c:s dvdsub -an out2.mkv

Although F<out1.mkv> is a Matroska container file which accepts subtitle streams, only a
video and audio stream shall be selected. The subtitle stream of F<C.mkv> is image-based
and the default subtitle encoder of the Matroska muxer is text-based, so a transcode operation
for the subtitles is expected to fail and hence the stream isn't selected. However, in
F<out2.mkv>, a subtitle encoder is specified in the command and so, the subtitle stream is
selected, in addition to the video stream. The presence of C<-an> disables audio stream
selection for F<out2.mkv>.


=head4 Example: unlabeled filtergraph outputs

	
	ffmpeg -i A.avi -i C.mkv -i B.mp4 -filter_complex "overlay" out1.mp4 out2.srt

A filtergraph is setup here using the C<-filter_complex> option and consists of a single
video filter. The C<overlay> filter requires exactly two video inputs, but none are
specified, so the first two available video streams are used, those of F<A.avi> and
F<C.mkv>. The output pad of the filter has no label and so is sent to the first output file
F<out1.mp4>. Due to this, automatic selection of the video stream is skipped, which would
have selected the stream in F<B.mp4>. The audio stream with most channels viz. C<stream 3>
in F<B.mp4>, is chosen automatically. No subtitle stream is chosen however, since the MP4
format has no default subtitle encoder registered, and the user hasn't specified a subtitle encoder.

The 2nd output file, F<out2.srt>, only accepts text-based subtitle streams. So, even though
the first subtitle stream available belongs to F<C.mkv>, it is image-based and hence skipped.
The selected stream, C<stream 2> in F<B.mp4>, is the first text-based subtitle stream.


=head4 Example: labeled filtergraph outputs

	
	ffmpeg -i A.avi -i B.mp4 -i C.mkv -filter_complex "[1:v]hue=s=0[outv];overlay;aresample" \
	       -map '[outv]' -an        out1.mp4 \
	                                out2.mkv \
	       -map '[outv]' -map 1:a:0 out3.mkv


The above command will fail, as the output pad labelled C<[outv]> has been mapped twice.
None of the output files shall be processed.

	
	ffmpeg -i A.avi -i B.mp4 -i C.mkv -filter_complex "[1:v]hue=s=0[outv];overlay;aresample" \
	       -an        out1.mp4 \
	                  out2.mkv \
	       -map 1:a:0 out3.mkv


This command above will also fail as the hue filter output has a label, C<[outv]>,
and hasn't been mapped anywhere.

The command should be modified as follows,
	
	ffmpeg -i A.avi -i B.mp4 -i C.mkv -filter_complex "[1:v]hue=s=0,split=2[outv1][outv2];overlay;aresample" \
	        -map '[outv1]' -an        out1.mp4 \
	                                  out2.mkv \
	        -map '[outv2]' -map 1:a:0 out3.mkv

The video stream from F<B.mp4> is sent to the hue filter, whose output is cloned once using
the split filter, and both outputs labelled. Then a copy each is mapped to the first and third
output files.

The overlay filter, requiring two video inputs, uses the first two unused video streams. Those
are the streams from F<A.avi> and F<C.mkv>. The overlay output isn't labelled, so it is
sent to the first output file F<out1.mp4>, regardless of the presence of the C<-map> option.

The aresample filter is sent the first unused audio stream, that of F<A.avi>. Since this filter
output is also unlabelled, it too is mapped to the first output file. The presence of C<-an>
only suppresses automatic or manual stream selection of audio streams, not outputs sent from
filtergraphs. Both these mapped streams shall be ordered before the mapped stream in F<out1.mp4>.

The video, audio and subtitle streams mapped to C<out2.mkv> are entirely determined by
automatic stream selection.

F<out3.mkv> consists of the cloned video output from the hue filter and the first audio
stream from F<B.mp4>.

=head1 OPTIONS


All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
unit prefixes, for example: 'K', 'M', or 'G'.

If 'i' is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending 'B' to the SI unit
prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
'KB', 'MiB', 'G' and 'B' as number suffixes.

Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.

Options that take arguments support a special syntax where the argument given on
the command line is interpreted as a path to the file from which the actual
argument value is loaded. To use this feature, add a forward slash '/'
immediately before the option name (after the leading dash). E.g.
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -/filter:v filter.script OUTPUT

will load a filtergraph description from the file named F<filter.script>.



=head2 Stream specifiers

Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.

A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
separated from it by a colon. E.g. C<-codec:a:1 ac3> contains the
C<a:1> stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.

A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
of them. E.g. the stream specifier in C<-b:a 128k> matches all audio
streams.

An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, C<-codec copy>
or C<-codec: copy> would copy all the streams without reencoding.

Possible forms of stream specifiers are:

=over 4


=item I<stream_index>

Matches the stream with this index. E.g. C<-threads:1 4> would set the
thread count for the second stream to 4. If I<stream_index> is used as an
additional stream specifier (see below), then it selects stream number
I<stream_index> from the matching streams. Stream numbering is based on the
order of the streams as detected by libavformat except when a stream group
specifier or program ID is also specified. In this case it is based on the
ordering of the streams in the group or program.

=item I<stream_type>B<[:>I<additional_stream_specifier>B<]>

I<stream_type> is one of following: 'v' or 'V' for video, 'a' for audio, 's'
for subtitle, 'd' for data, and 't' for attachments. 'v' matches all video
streams, 'V' only matches video streams which are not attached pictures, video
thumbnails or cover arts. If I<additional_stream_specifier> is used, then
it matches streams which both have this type and match the
I<additional_stream_specifier>. Otherwise, it matches all streams of the
specified type.

=item B<g:>I<group_specifier>B<[:>I<additional_stream_specifier>B<]>

Matches streams which are in the group with the specifier I<group_specifier>.
if I<additional_stream_specifier> is used, then it matches streams which both
are part of the group and match the I<additional_stream_specifier>.
I<group_specifier> may be one of the following:

=over 4


=item I<group_index>

Match the stream with this group index.

=item B<#>I<group_id> B<or i:>I<group_id>

Match the stream with this group id.

=back


=item B<p:>I<program_id>B<[:>I<additional_stream_specifier>B<]>

Matches streams which are in the program with the id I<program_id>. If
I<additional_stream_specifier> is used, then it matches streams which both
are part of the program and match the I<additional_stream_specifier>.


=item B<#>I<stream_id> B<or i:>I<stream_id>

Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).

=item B<m:>I<key>B<[:>I<value>B<]>

Matches streams with the metadata tag I<key> having the specified value. If
I<value> is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
value.

=item B<disp:>I<dispositions>B<[:>I<additional_stream_specifier>B<]>

Matches streams with the given disposition(s). I<dispositions> is a list of
one or more dispositions (as printed by the B<-dispositions> option)
joined with '+'.

=item B<u>

Matches streams with usable configuration, the codec must be defined and the
essential information such as video dimension or audio sample rate must be present.

Note that in B<ffmpeg>, matching by metadata will only work properly for
input files.

=back



=head2 Generic options


These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.


=over 4



=item B<-L>

Show license.


=item B<-h, -?, -help, --help [>I<arg>B<]>

Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
options are shown.

Possible values of I<arg> are:

=over 4


=item B<long>

Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.


=item B<full>

Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.


=item B<decoder=>I<decoder_name>

Print detailed information about the decoder named I<decoder_name>. Use the
B<-decoders> option to get a list of all decoders.


=item B<encoder=>I<encoder_name>

Print detailed information about the encoder named I<encoder_name>. Use the
B<-encoders> option to get a list of all encoders.


=item B<demuxer=>I<demuxer_name>

Print detailed information about the demuxer named I<demuxer_name>. Use the
B<-formats> option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.


=item B<muxer=>I<muxer_name>

Print detailed information about the muxer named I<muxer_name>. Use the
B<-formats> option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.


=item B<filter=>I<filter_name>

Print detailed information about the filter named I<filter_name>. Use the
B<-filters> option to get a list of all filters.


=item B<bsf=>I<bitstream_filter_name>

Print detailed information about the bitstream filter named I<bitstream_filter_name>.
Use the B<-bsfs> option to get a list of all bitstream filters.


=item B<protocol=>I<protocol_name>

Print detailed information about the protocol named I<protocol_name>.
Use the B<-protocols> option to get a list of all protocols.

=back



=item B<-version>

Show version.


=item B<-buildconf>

Show the build configuration, one option per line.


=item B<-formats>

Show available formats (including devices).


=item B<-demuxers>

Show available demuxers.


=item B<-muxers>

Show available muxers.


=item B<-devices>

Show available devices.


=item B<-codecs>

Show all codecs known to libavcodec.

Note that the term 'codec' is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.


=item B<-decoders>

Show available decoders.


=item B<-encoders>

Show all available encoders.


=item B<-bsfs>

Show available bitstream filters.


=item B<-protocols>

Show available protocols.


=item B<-filters>

Show available libavfilter filters.


=item B<-pix_fmts>

Show available pixel formats.


=item B<-sample_fmts>

Show available sample formats.


=item B<-layouts>

Show channel names and standard channel layouts.


=item B<-dispositions>

Show stream dispositions.


=item B<-colors>

Show recognized color names.


=item B<-sources> I<device>B<[,>I<opt1>B<=>I<val1>B<[,>I<opt2>B<=>I<val2>B<]...]>

Show autodetected sources of the input device.
Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
	
	ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4



=item B<-sinks> I<device>B<[,>I<opt1>B<=>I<val1>B<[,>I<opt2>B<=>I<val2>B<]...]>

Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
	
	ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4



=item B<-loglevel [>I<flags>B<+]>I<loglevel> B<| -v [>I<flags>B<+]>I<loglevel>

Set logging level and flags used by the library.

The optional I<flags> prefix can consist of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<repeat>

Indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed to the first line
and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be omitted.

=item B<level>

Indicates that log output should add a C<[level]> prefix to each message
line. This can be used as an alternative to log coloring, e.g. when dumping the
log to file.

=back

Flags can also be used alone by adding a '+'/'-' prefix to set/reset a single
flag without affecting other I<flags> or changing I<loglevel>. When
setting both I<flags> and I<loglevel>, a '+' separator is expected
between the last I<flags> value and before I<loglevel>.

I<loglevel> is a string or a number containing one of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<quiet, -8>

Show nothing at all; be silent.

=item B<panic, 0>

Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
an assertion failure. This is not currently used for anything.

=item B<fatal, 8>

Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
cannot continue.

=item B<error, 16>

Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.

=item B<warning, 24>

Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.

=item B<info, 32>

Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
warnings and errors. This is the default value.

=item B<verbose, 40>

Same as C<info>, except more verbose.

=item B<debug, 48>

Show everything, including debugging information.

=item B<trace, 56>


=back


For example to enable repeated log output, add the C<level> prefix, and set
I<loglevel> to C<verbose>:
	
	ffmpeg -loglevel repeat+level+verbose -i input output

Another example that enables repeated log output without affecting current
state of C<level> prefix flag or I<loglevel>:
	
	ffmpeg [...] -loglevel +repeat


By default the program logs to stderr. If coloring is supported by the
terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
can be disabled setting the environment variable
B<AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR>, or can be forced setting
the environment variable B<AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR>.


=item B<-report>

Dump full command line and log output to a file named
C<I<program>-I<YYYYMMDD>-I<HHMMSS>.log> in the current
directory.
This file can be useful for bug reports.
It also implies C<-loglevel debug>.

Setting the environment variable B<FFREPORT> to any value has the
same effect. If the value is a ':'-separated key=value sequence, these
options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
contain special characters or the options delimiter ':' (see the
``Quoting and escaping'' section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).

The following options are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<file>

set the file name to use for the report; C<%p> is expanded to the name
of the program, C<%t> is expanded to a timestamp, C<%%> is expanded
to a plain C<%>

=item B<level>

set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see C<-loglevel>).

=back


For example, to output a report to a file named F<ffreport.log>
using a log level of C<32> (alias for log level C<info>):

	
	FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output


Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
appear in the report.


=item B<-hide_banner>

Suppress printing banner.

All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
this information.


=item B<-cpuflags flags (>I<global>B<)>

Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you're doing.
	
	ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
	ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
	ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...

Possible flags for this option are:

=over 4


=item B<x86>


=over 4


=item B<mmx>


=item B<mmxext>


=item B<sse>


=item B<sse2>


=item B<sse2slow>


=item B<sse3>


=item B<sse3slow>


=item B<ssse3>


=item B<atom>


=item B<sse4.1>


=item B<sse4.2>


=item B<avx>


=item B<avx2>


=item B<xop>


=item B<fma3>


=item B<fma4>


=item B<3dnow>


=item B<3dnowext>


=item B<bmi1>


=item B<bmi2>


=item B<cmov>


=back


=item B<ARM>


=over 4


=item B<armv5te>


=item B<armv6>


=item B<armv6t2>


=item B<vfp>


=item B<vfpv3>


=item B<neon>


=item B<setend>


=back


=item B<AArch64>


=over 4


=item B<armv8>


=item B<vfp>


=item B<neon>


=back


=item B<PowerPC>


=over 4


=item B<altivec>


=back


=item B<Specific Processors>


=over 4


=item B<pentium2>


=item B<pentium3>


=item B<pentium4>


=item B<k6>


=item B<k62>


=item B<athlon>


=item B<athlonxp>


=item B<k8>


=back


=back



=item B<-cpucount> I<count> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Override detection of CPU count. This option is intended
for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you're doing.
	
	ffmpeg -cpucount 2



=item B<-max_alloc> I<bytes>

Set the maximum size limit for allocating a block on the heap by ffmpeg's
family of malloc functions. Exercise B<extreme caution> when using
this option. Don't use if you do not understand the full consequence of doing so.
Default is INT_MAX.

=back



=head2 AVOptions


These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
B<-help> option. They are separated into two categories:

=over 4


=item B<generic>

These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
AVCodecContext options for codecs.

=item B<private>

These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.

=back


For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
an MP3 file, use the B<id3v2_version> private option of the MP3
muxer:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3


All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
should be attached to them:
	
	ffmpeg -i multichannel.mxf -map 0:v:0 -map 0:a:0 -map 0:a:0 -c:a:0 ac3 -b:a:0 640k -ac:a:1 2 -c:a:1 aac -b:2 128k out.mp4


In the above example, a multichannel audio stream is mapped twice for output.
The first instance is encoded with codec ac3 and bitrate 640k.
The second instance is downmixed to 2 channels and encoded with codec aac. A bitrate of 128k is specified for it using
absolute index of the output stream.

Note: the B<-nooption> syntax cannot be used for boolean
AVOptions, use B<-option 0>/B<-option 1>.

Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
removed soon.


=head2 Main options



=over 4



=item B<-f> I<fmt> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Force input or output file format. The format is normally auto detected for input
files and guessed from the file extension for output files, so this option is not
needed in most cases.


=item B<-i> I<url> B<(>I<input>B<)>

input file url


=item B<-y (>I<global>B<)>

Overwrite output files without asking.


=item B<-n (>I<global>B<)>

Do not overwrite output files, and exit immediately if a specified
output file already exists.


=item B<-stream_loop> I<number> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set number of times input stream shall be looped. Loop 0 means no loop,
loop -1 means infinite loop.


=item B<-recast_media (>I<global>B<)>

Allow forcing a decoder of a different media type than the one
detected or designated by the demuxer. Useful for decoding media
data muxed as data streams.


=item B<-c[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<codec> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-codec[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<codec> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Select an encoder (when used before an output file) or a decoder (when used
before an input file) for one or more streams. I<codec> is the name of a
decoder/encoder or a special value C<copy> (output only) to indicate that
the stream is not to be re-encoded.

For example
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -c:v libx264 -c:a copy OUTPUT

encodes all video streams with libx264 and copies all audio streams.

For each stream, the last matching C<c> option is applied, so
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -c copy -c:v:1 libx264 -c:a:137 libvorbis OUTPUT

will copy all the streams except the second video, which will be encoded with
libx264, and the 138th audio, which will be encoded with libvorbis.


=item B<-t> I<duration> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

When used as an input option (before C<-i>), limit the I<duration> of
data read from the input file.

When used as an output option (before an output url), stop writing the
output after its duration reaches I<duration>.

I<duration> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

-to and -t are mutually exclusive and -t has priority.


=item B<-to> I<position> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Stop writing the output or reading the input at I<position>.
I<position> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

-to and -t are mutually exclusive and -t has priority.


=item B<-fs> I<limit_size> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the file size limit, expressed in bytes. No further chunk of bytes is written
after the limit is exceeded. The size of the output file is slightly more than the
requested file size.


=item B<-ss> I<position> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

When used as an input option (before C<-i>), seeks in this input file to
I<position>. Note that in most formats it is not possible to seek exactly,
so B<ffmpeg> will seek to the closest seek point before I<position>.
When transcoding and B<-accurate_seek> is enabled (the default), this
extra segment between the seek point and I<position> will be decoded and
discarded. When doing stream copy or when B<-noaccurate_seek> is used, it
will be preserved.

When used as an output option (before an output url), decodes but discards
input until the timestamps reach I<position>.

I<position> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.


=item B<-sseof> I<position> B<(>I<input>B<)>


Like the C<-ss> option but relative to the "end of file". That is negative
values are earlier in the file, 0 is at EOF.


=item B<-isync> I<input_index> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Assign an input as a sync source.

This will take the difference between the start times of the target and reference inputs and
offset the timestamps of the target file by that difference. The source timestamps of the two
inputs should derive from the same clock source for expected results. If C<copyts> is set
then C<start_at_zero> must also be set. If either of the inputs has no starting timestamp
then no sync adjustment is made.

Acceptable values are those that refer to a valid ffmpeg input index. If the sync reference is
the target index itself or I<-1>, then no adjustment is made to target timestamps. A sync
reference may not itself be synced to any other input.

Default value is I<-1>.


=item B<-itsoffset> I<offset> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set the input time offset.

I<offset> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

The offset is added to the timestamps of the input files. Specifying
a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are delayed by
the time duration specified in I<offset>.


=item B<-itsscale> I<scale> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Rescale input timestamps. I<scale> should be a floating point number.


=item B<-timestamp> I<date> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the recording timestamp in the container.

I<date> must be a date specification,
see B<the Date section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.


=item B<-metadata[:metadata_specifier]> I<key>B<=>I<value> B<(>I<output,per-metadata>B<)>

Set a metadata key/value pair.

An optional I<metadata_specifier> may be given to set metadata
on streams, chapters or programs. See C<-map_metadata>
documentation for details.

This option overrides metadata set with C<-map_metadata>. It is
also possible to delete metadata by using an empty value.

For example, for setting the title in the output file:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -metadata title="my title" out.flv


To set the language of the first audio stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -metadata:s:a:0 language=eng OUTPUT



=item B<-disposition[:stream_specifier]> I<value> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Sets the disposition for a stream.

By default, the disposition is copied from the input stream, unless the output
stream this option applies to is fed by a complex filtergraph - in that case the
disposition is unset by default.

I<value> is a sequence of items separated by '+' or '-'. The first item may
also be prefixed with '+' or '-', in which case this option modifies the default
value. Otherwise (the first item is not prefixed) this options overrides the
default value. A '+' prefix adds the given disposition, '-' removes it. It is
also possible to clear the disposition by setting it to 0.

If no C<-disposition> options were specified for an output file, ffmpeg will
automatically set the 'default' disposition on the first stream of each type,
when there are multiple streams of this type in the output file and no stream of
that type is already marked as default.

The C<-dispositions> option lists the known dispositions.

For example, to make the second audio stream the default stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -c copy -disposition:a:1 default out.mkv


To make the second subtitle stream the default stream and remove the default
disposition from the first subtitle stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -c copy -disposition:s:0 0 -disposition:s:1 default out.mkv


To add an embedded cover/thumbnail:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mp4 -i IMAGE -map 0 -map 1 -c copy -c:v:1 png -disposition:v:1 attached_pic out.mp4


Not all muxers support embedded thumbnails, and those who do, only support a few formats, like JPEG or PNG.


=item B<-program [title=>I<title>B<:][program_num=>I<program_num>B<:]st=>I<stream>B<[:st=>I<stream>B<...] (>I<output>B<)>


Creates a program with the specified I<title>, I<program_num> and adds the specified
I<stream>(s) to it.


=item B<-stream_group [map=>I<input_file_id>B<=>I<stream_group>B<][type=>I<type>B<:]st=>I<stream>B<[:st=>I<stream>B<][:stg=>I<stream_group>B<][:id=>I<stream_group_id>B<...] (>I<output>B<)>


Creates a stream group of the specified I<type> and I<stream_group_id>, or by
I<map>ping an input group, adding the specified I<stream>(s) and/or previously
defined I<stream_group>(s) to it.

I<type> can be one of the following:

=over 4



=item B<iamf_audio_element>

Groups I<stream>s that belong to the same IAMF Audio Element

For this group I<type>, the following options are available

=over 4


=item B<audio_element_type>

The Audio Element type. The following values are supported:


=over 4


=item B<channel>

Scalable channel audio representation

=item B<scene>

Ambisonics representation

=back



=item B<demixing>

Demixing information used to reconstruct a scalable channel audio representation.
This option must be separated from the rest with a ',', and takes the following
key=value options


=over 4


=item B<parameter_id>

An identifier parameters blocks in frames may refer to

=item B<dmixp_mode>

A pre-defined combination of demixing parameters

=back



=item B<recon_gain>

Recon gain information used to reconstruct a scalable channel audio representation.
This option must be separated from the rest with a ',', and takes the following
key=value options


=over 4


=item B<parameter_id>

An identifier parameters blocks in frames may refer to

=back



=item B<layer>

A layer defining a Channel Layout in the Audio Element.
This option must be separated from the rest with a ','. Several ',' separated entries
can be defined, and at least one must be set.

It takes the following ":"-separated key=value options


=over 4


=item B<ch_layout>

The layer's channel layout

=item B<flags>

The following flags are available:


=over 4


=item B<recon_gain>

Wether to signal if recon_gain is present as metadata in parameter blocks within frames

=back



=item B<output_gain>


=item B<output_gain_flags>

Which channels output_gain applies to. The following flags are available:


=over 4


=item B<FL>


=item B<FR>


=item B<BL>


=item B<BR>


=item B<TFL>


=item B<TFR>


=back



=item B<ambisonics_mode>

The ambisonics mode. This has no effect if audio_element_type is set to channel.

The following values are supported:


=over 4


=item B<mono>

Each ambisonics channel is coded as an individual mono stream in the group

=back



=back



=item B<default_w>

Default weight value


=back



=item B<iamf_mix_presentation>

Groups I<stream>s that belong to all IAMF Audio Element the same
IAMF Mix Presentation references

For this group I<type>, the following options are available


=over 4


=item B<submix>

A sub-mix within the Mix Presentation.
This option must be separated from the rest with a ','. Several ',' separated entries
can be defined, and at least one must be set.

It takes the following ":"-separated key=value options


=over 4


=item B<parameter_id>

An identifier parameters blocks in frames may refer to, for post-processing the mixed
audio signal to generate the audio signal for playback

=item B<parameter_rate>

The sample rate duration fields in parameters blocks in frames that refer to this
I<parameter_id> are expressed as

=item B<default_mix_gain>

Default mix gain value to apply when there are no parameter blocks sharing the same
I<parameter_id> for a given frame


=item B<element>

References an Audio Element used in this Mix Presentation to generate the final output
audio signal for playback.
This option must be separated from the rest with a '|'. Several '|' separated entries
can be defined, and at least one must be set.

It takes the following ":"-separated key=value options:


=over 4


=item B<stg>

The I<stream_group_id> for an Audio Element which this sub-mix refers to

=item B<parameter_id>

An identifier parameters blocks in frames may refer to, for applying any processing to
the referenced and rendered Audio Element before being summed with other processed Audio
Elements

=item B<parameter_rate>

The sample rate duration fields in parameters blocks in frames that refer to this
I<parameter_id> are expressed as

=item B<default_mix_gain>

Default mix gain value to apply when there are no parameter blocks sharing the same
I<parameter_id> for a given frame

=item B<annotations>

A key=value string describing the sub-mix element where "key" is a string conforming to
BCP-47 that specifies the language for the "value" string. "key" must be the same as the
one in the mix's I<annotations>

=item B<headphones_rendering_mode>

Indicates whether the input channel-based Audio Element is rendered to stereo loudspeakers
or spatialized with a binaural renderer when played back on headphones.
This has no effect if the referenced Audio Element's I<audio_element_type> is set to
channel.

The following values are supported:


=over 4


=item B<stereo>


=item B<binaural>


=back



=back



=item B<layout>

Specifies the layouts for this sub-mix on which the loudness information was measured.
This option must be separated from the rest with a '|'. Several '|' separated entries
can be defined, and at least one must be set.

It takes the following ":"-separated key=value options:


=over 4


=item B<layout_type>



=over 4


=item B<loudspeakers>

The layout follows the loudspeaker sound system convention of ITU-2051-3.

=item B<binaural>

The layout is binaural.

=back



=item B<sound_system>

Channel layout matching one of Sound Systems A to J of ITU-2051-3, plus 7.1.2 and 3.1.2
This has no effect if I<layout_type> is set to binaural.

=item B<integrated_loudness>

The program integrated loudness information, as defined in ITU-1770-4.

=item B<digital_peak>

The digital (sampled) peak value of the audio signal, as defined in ITU-1770-4.

=item B<true_peak>

The true peak of the audio signal, as defined in ITU-1770-4.

=item B<dialog_anchored_loudness>

The Dialogue loudness information, as defined in ITU-1770-4.

=item B<album_anchored_loudness>

The Album loudness information, as defined in ITU-1770-4.

=back



=back



=item B<annotations>

A key=value string string describing the mix where "key" is a string conforming to BCP-47
that specifies the language for the "value" string. "key" must be the same as the ones in
all sub-mix element's I<annotations>s

=back



=back


E.g. to create an scalable 5.1 IAMF file from several WAV input files
	
	ffmpeg -i front.wav -i back.wav -i center.wav -i lfe.wav
	-map 0:0 -map 1:0 -map 2:0 -map 3:0 -c:a opus
	-stream_group type=iamf_audio_element:id=1:st=0:st=1:st=2:st=3,
	demixing=parameter_id=998,
	recon_gain=parameter_id=101,
	layer=ch_layout=stereo,
	layer=ch_layout=5.1,
	-stream_group type=iamf_mix_presentation:id=2:stg=0:annotations=en-us=Mix_Presentation,
	submix=parameter_id=100:parameter_rate=48000|element=stg=0:parameter_id=100:annotations=en-us=Scalable_Submix|layout=sound_system=stereo|layout=sound_system=5.1
	-streamid 0:0 -streamid 1:1 -streamid 2:2 -streamid 3:3 output.iamf


To copy the two stream groups (Audio Element and Mix Presentation) from an input IAMF file with four
streams into an mp4 output
	
	ffmpeg -i input.iamf -c:a copy -stream_group map=0=0:st=0:st=1:st=2:st=3 -stream_group map=0=1:stg=0
	-streamid 0:0 -streamid 1:1 -streamid 2:2 -streamid 3:3 output.mp4



=item B<-target> I<type> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Specify target file type (C<vcd>, C<svcd>, C<dvd>, C<dv>,
C<dv50>). I<type> may be prefixed with C<pal->, C<ntsc-> or
C<film-> to use the corresponding standard. All the format options
(bitrate, codecs, buffer sizes) are then set automatically. You can just type:

	
	ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -target vcd /tmp/vcd.mpg


Nevertheless you can specify additional options as long as you know
they do not conflict with the standard, as in:

	
	ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -target vcd -bf 2 /tmp/vcd.mpg


The parameters set for each target are as follows.

B<VCD>
	
	<pal>:
	-f vcd -muxrate 1411200 -muxpreload 0.44 -packetsize 2324
	-s 352x288 -r 25
	-codec:v mpeg1video -g 15 -b:v 1150k -maxrate:v 1150k -minrate:v 1150k -bufsize:v 327680
	-ar 44100 -ac 2
	-codec:a mp2 -b:a 224k
	
	<ntsc>:
	-f vcd -muxrate 1411200 -muxpreload 0.44 -packetsize 2324
	-s 352x240 -r 30000/1001
	-codec:v mpeg1video -g 18 -b:v 1150k -maxrate:v 1150k -minrate:v 1150k -bufsize:v 327680
	-ar 44100 -ac 2
	-codec:a mp2 -b:a 224k
	
	<film>:
	-f vcd -muxrate 1411200 -muxpreload 0.44 -packetsize 2324
	-s 352x240 -r 24000/1001
	-codec:v mpeg1video -g 18 -b:v 1150k -maxrate:v 1150k -minrate:v 1150k -bufsize:v 327680
	-ar 44100 -ac 2
	-codec:a mp2 -b:a 224k


B<SVCD>
	
	<pal>:
	-f svcd -packetsize 2324
	-s 480x576 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 25
	-codec:v mpeg2video -g 15 -b:v 2040k -maxrate:v 2516k -minrate:v 0 -bufsize:v 1835008 -scan_offset 1
	-ar 44100
	-codec:a mp2 -b:a 224k
	
	<ntsc>:
	-f svcd -packetsize 2324
	-s 480x480 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 30000/1001
	-codec:v mpeg2video -g 18 -b:v 2040k -maxrate:v 2516k -minrate:v 0 -bufsize:v 1835008 -scan_offset 1
	-ar 44100
	-codec:a mp2 -b:a 224k
	
	<film>:
	-f svcd -packetsize 2324
	-s 480x480 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 24000/1001
	-codec:v mpeg2video -g 18 -b:v 2040k -maxrate:v 2516k -minrate:v 0 -bufsize:v 1835008 -scan_offset 1
	-ar 44100
	-codec:a mp2 -b:a 224k


B<DVD>
	
	<pal>:
	-f dvd -muxrate 10080k -packetsize 2048
	-s 720x576 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 25
	-codec:v mpeg2video -g 15 -b:v 6000k -maxrate:v 9000k -minrate:v 0 -bufsize:v 1835008
	-ar 48000
	-codec:a ac3 -b:a 448k
	
	<ntsc>:
	-f dvd -muxrate 10080k -packetsize 2048
	-s 720x480 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 30000/1001
	-codec:v mpeg2video -g 18 -b:v 6000k -maxrate:v 9000k -minrate:v 0 -bufsize:v 1835008
	-ar 48000
	-codec:a ac3 -b:a 448k
	
	<film>:
	-f dvd -muxrate 10080k -packetsize 2048
	-s 720x480 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 24000/1001
	-codec:v mpeg2video -g 18 -b:v 6000k -maxrate:v 9000k -minrate:v 0 -bufsize:v 1835008
	-ar 48000
	-codec:a ac3 -b:a 448k


B<DV>
	
	<pal>:
	-f dv
	-s 720x576 -pix_fmt yuv420p -r 25
	-ar 48000 -ac 2
	
	<ntsc>:
	-f dv
	-s 720x480 -pix_fmt yuv411p -r 30000/1001
	-ar 48000 -ac 2
	
	<film>:
	-f dv
	-s 720x480 -pix_fmt yuv411p -r 24000/1001
	-ar 48000 -ac 2

The C<dv50> target is identical to the C<dv> target except that the pixel format set is C<yuv422p> for all three standards.

Any user-set value for a parameter above will override the target preset value. In that case, the output may
not comply with the target standard.


=item B<-dn (>I<input/output>B<)>

As an input option, blocks all data streams of a file from being filtered or
being automatically selected or mapped for any output. See C<-discard>
option to disable streams individually.

As an output option, disables data recording i.e. automatic selection or
mapping of any data stream. For full manual control see the C<-map>
option.


=item B<-dframes> I<number> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the number of data frames to output. This is an obsolete alias for
C<-frames:d>, which you should use instead.


=item B<-frames[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<framecount> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Stop writing to the stream after I<framecount> frames.


=item B<-q[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<q> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-qscale[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<q> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Use fixed quality scale (VBR). The meaning of I<q>/I<qscale> is
codec-dependent.
If I<qscale> is used without a I<stream_specifier> then it applies only
to the video stream, this is to maintain compatibility with previous behavior
and as specifying the same codec specific value to 2 different codecs that is
audio and video generally is not what is intended when no stream_specifier is
used.



=item B<-filter[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<filtergraph> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Create the filtergraph specified by I<filtergraph> and use it to
filter the stream.

I<filtergraph> is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
the stream, and must have a single input and a single output of the
same type of the stream. In the filtergraph, the input is associated
to the label C<in>, and the output to the label C<out>. See
the ffmpeg-filters manual for more information about the filtergraph
syntax.

See the B<-filter_complex option> if you
want to create filtergraphs with multiple inputs and/or outputs.


=item B<-reinit_filter[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<integer> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

This boolean option determines if the filtergraph(s) to which this stream is fed gets
reinitialized when input frame parameters change mid-stream. This option is enabled by
default as most video and all audio filters cannot handle deviation in input frame properties.
Upon reinitialization, existing filter state is lost, like e.g. the frame count C<n>
reference available in some filters. Any frames buffered at time of reinitialization are lost.
The properties where a change triggers reinitialization are,
for video, frame resolution or pixel format;
for audio, sample format, sample rate, channel count or channel layout.


=item B<-filter_threads> I<nb_threads> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Defines how many threads are used to process a filter pipeline. Each pipeline
will produce a thread pool with this many threads available for parallel processing.
The default is the number of available CPUs.


=item B<-pre[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<preset_name> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Specify the preset for matching stream(s).


=item B<-stats (>I<global>B<)>

Print encoding progress/statistics. It is on by default, to explicitly
disable it you need to specify C<-nostats>.


=item B<-stats_period> I<time> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Set period at which encoding progress/statistics are updated. Default is 0.5 seconds.


=item B<-progress> I<url> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Send program-friendly progress information to I<url>.

Progress information is written periodically and at the end of
the encoding process. It is made of "I<key>=I<value>" lines. I<key>
consists of only alphanumeric characters. The last key of a sequence of
progress information is always "progress".

The update period is set using C<-stats_period>.



=item B<-stdin>

Enable interaction on standard input. On by default unless standard input is
used as an input. To explicitly disable interaction you need to specify
C<-nostdin>.

Disabling interaction on standard input is useful, for example, if
ffmpeg is in the background process group. Roughly the same result can
be achieved with C<ffmpeg ... E<lt> /dev/null> but it requires a
shell.


=item B<-debug_ts (>I<global>B<)>

Print timestamp/latency information. It is off by default. This option is
mostly useful for testing and debugging purposes, and the output
format may change from one version to another, so it should not be
employed by portable scripts.

See also the option C<-fdebug ts>.


=item B<-attach> I<filename> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Add an attachment to the output file. This is supported by a few formats
like Matroska for e.g. fonts used in rendering subtitles. Attachments
are implemented as a specific type of stream, so this option will add
a new stream to the file. It is then possible to use per-stream options
on this stream in the usual way. Attachment streams created with this
option will be created after all the other streams (i.e. those created
with C<-map> or automatic mappings).

Note that for Matroska you also have to set the mimetype metadata tag:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -attach DejaVuSans.ttf -metadata:s:2 mimetype=application/x-truetype-font out.mkv

(assuming that the attachment stream will be third in the output file).


=item B<-dump_attachment[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<filename> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Extract the matching attachment stream into a file named I<filename>. If
I<filename> is empty, then the value of the C<filename> metadata tag
will be used.

E.g. to extract the first attachment to a file named 'out.ttf':
	
	ffmpeg -dump_attachment:t:0 out.ttf -i INPUT

To extract all attachments to files determined by the C<filename> tag:
	
	ffmpeg -dump_attachment:t "" -i INPUT


Technical note -- attachments are implemented as codec extradata, so this
option can actually be used to extract extradata from any stream, not just
attachments.

=back



=head2 Video Options



=over 4


=item B<-vframes> I<number> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the number of video frames to output. This is an obsolete alias for
C<-frames:v>, which you should use instead.

=item B<-r[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<fps> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Set frame rate (Hz value, fraction or abbreviation).

As an input option, ignore any timestamps stored in the file and instead
generate timestamps assuming constant frame rate I<fps>.
This is not the same as the B<-framerate> option used for some input formats
like image2 or v4l2 (it used to be the same in older versions of FFmpeg).
If in doubt use B<-framerate> instead of the input option B<-r>.

As an output option:

=over 4


=item B<video encoding>

Duplicate or drop frames right before encoding them to achieve constant output
frame rate I<fps>.


=item B<video streamcopy>

Indicate to the muxer that I<fps> is the stream frame rate. No data is
dropped or duplicated in this case. This may produce invalid files if I<fps>
does not match the actual stream frame rate as determined by packet timestamps.
See also the C<setts> bitstream filter.


=back



=item B<-fpsmax[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<fps> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Set maximum frame rate (Hz value, fraction or abbreviation).

Clamps output frame rate when output framerate is auto-set and is higher than this value.
Useful in batch processing or when input framerate is wrongly detected as very high.
It cannot be set together with C<-r>. It is ignored during streamcopy.


=item B<-s[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<size> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Set frame size.

As an input option, this is a shortcut for the B<video_size> private
option, recognized by some demuxers for which the frame size is either not
stored in the file or is configurable -- e.g. raw video or video grabbers.

As an output option, this inserts the C<scale> video filter to the
I<end> of the corresponding filtergraph. Please use the C<scale> filter
directly to insert it at the beginning or some other place.

The format is B<wxh> (default - same as source).


=item B<-aspect[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<aspect> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Set the video display aspect ratio specified by I<aspect>.

I<aspect> can be a floating point number string, or a string of the
form I<num>:I<den>, where I<num> and I<den> are the
numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. For example "4:3",
"16:9", "1.3333", and "1.7777" are valid argument values.

If used together with B<-vcodec copy>, it will affect the aspect ratio
stored at container level, but not the aspect ratio stored in encoded
frames, if it exists.


=item B<-display_rotation[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<rotation> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Set video rotation metadata.

I<rotation> is a decimal number specifying the amount in degree by
which the video should be rotated counter-clockwise before being
displayed.

This option overrides the rotation/display transform metadata stored in
the file, if any. When the video is being transcoded (rather than
copied) and C<-autorotate> is enabled, the video will be rotated at
the filtering stage. Otherwise, the metadata will be written into the
output file if the muxer supports it.

If the C<-display_hflip> and/or C<-display_vflip> options are
given, they are applied after the rotation specified by this option.


=item B<-display_hflip[:>I<stream_specifier>B<] (>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Set whether on display the image should be horizontally flipped.

See the C<-display_rotation> option for more details.


=item B<-display_vflip[:>I<stream_specifier>B<] (>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Set whether on display the image should be vertically flipped.

See the C<-display_rotation> option for more details.


=item B<-vn (>I<input/output>B<)>

As an input option, blocks all video streams of a file from being filtered or
being automatically selected or mapped for any output. See C<-discard>
option to disable streams individually.

As an output option, disables video recording i.e. automatic selection or
mapping of any video stream. For full manual control see the C<-map>
option.


=item B<-vcodec> I<codec> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the video codec. This is an alias for C<-codec:v>.


=item B<-pass[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<n> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Select the pass number (1 or 2). It is used to do two-pass
video encoding. The statistics of the video are recorded in the first
pass into a log file (see also the option -passlogfile),
and in the second pass that log file is used to generate the video
at the exact requested bitrate.
On pass 1, you may just deactivate audio and set output to null,
examples for Windows and Unix:
	
	ffmpeg -i foo.mov -c:v libxvid -pass 1 -an -f rawvideo -y NUL
	ffmpeg -i foo.mov -c:v libxvid -pass 1 -an -f rawvideo -y /dev/null



=item B<-passlogfile[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<prefix> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Set two-pass log file name prefix to I<prefix>, the default file name
prefix is ``ffmpeg2pass''. The complete file name will be
F<PREFIX-N.log>, where N is a number specific to the output
stream


=item B<-vf> I<filtergraph> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Create the filtergraph specified by I<filtergraph> and use it to
filter the stream.

This is an alias for C<-filter:v>, see the B<-filter option>.


=item B<-autorotate>

Automatically rotate the video according to file metadata. Enabled by
default, use B<-noautorotate> to disable it.


=item B<-autoscale>

Automatically scale the video according to the resolution of first frame.
Enabled by default, use B<-noautoscale> to disable it. When autoscale is
disabled, all output frames of filter graph might not be in the same resolution
and may be inadequate for some encoder/muxer. Therefore, it is not recommended
to disable it unless you really know what you are doing.
Disable autoscale at your own risk.

=back



=head2 Advanced Video options



=over 4


=item B<-pix_fmt[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<format> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Set pixel format. Use C<-pix_fmts> to show all the supported
pixel formats.
If the selected pixel format can not be selected, ffmpeg will print a
warning and select the best pixel format supported by the encoder.
If I<pix_fmt> is prefixed by a C<+>, ffmpeg will exit with an error
if the requested pixel format can not be selected, and automatic conversions
inside filtergraphs are disabled.
If I<pix_fmt> is a single C<+>, ffmpeg selects the same pixel format
as the input (or graph output) and automatic conversions are disabled.


=item B<-sws_flags> I<flags> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Set default flags for the libswscale library. These flags are used by
automatically inserted C<scale> filters and those within simple
filtergraphs, if not overridden within the filtergraph definition.

See the B<ffmpeg-scaler manual> for a list
of scaler options.


=item B<-rc_override[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<override> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Rate control override for specific intervals, formatted as "int,int,int"
list separated with slashes. Two first values are the beginning and
end frame numbers, last one is quantizer to use if positive, or quality
factor if negative.


=item B<-vstats>

Dump video coding statistics to F<vstats_HHMMSS.log>. See the
B<vstats file format> section for the format description.


=item B<-vstats_file> I<file>

Dump video coding statistics to I<file>. See the
B<vstats file format> section for the format description.


=item B<-vstats_version> I<file>

Specify which version of the vstats format to use. Default is C<2>. See the
B<vstats file format> section for the format description.


=item B<-vtag> I<fourcc/tag> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Force video tag/fourcc. This is an alias for C<-tag:v>.


=item B<-force_key_frames[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<time>B<[,>I<time>B<...] (>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-force_key_frames[:>I<stream_specifier>B<] expr:>I<expr> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-force_key_frames[:>I<stream_specifier>B<] source (>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


I<force_key_frames> can take arguments of the following form:


=over 4



=item I<time>B<[,>I<time>B<...]>

If the argument consists of timestamps, ffmpeg will round the specified times to the nearest
output timestamp as per the encoder time base and force a keyframe at the first frame having
timestamp equal or greater than the computed timestamp. Note that if the encoder time base is too
coarse, then the keyframes may be forced on frames with timestamps lower than the specified time.
The default encoder time base is the inverse of the output framerate but may be set otherwise
via C<-enc_time_base>.

If one of the times is "C<chapters>[I<delta>]", it is expanded into
the time of the beginning of all chapters in the file, shifted by
I<delta>, expressed as a time in seconds.
This option can be useful to ensure that a seek point is present at a
chapter mark or any other designated place in the output file.

For example, to insert a key frame at 5 minutes, plus key frames 0.1 second
before the beginning of every chapter:
	
	-force_key_frames 0:05:00,chapters-0.1



=item B<expr:>I<expr>

If the argument is prefixed with C<expr:>, the string I<expr>
is interpreted like an expression and is evaluated for each frame. A
key frame is forced in case the evaluation is non-zero.

The expression in I<expr> can contain the following constants:

=over 4


=item B<n>

the number of current processed frame, starting from 0

=item B<n_forced>

the number of forced frames

=item B<prev_forced_n>

the number of the previous forced frame, it is C<NAN> when no
keyframe was forced yet

=item B<prev_forced_t>

the time of the previous forced frame, it is C<NAN> when no
keyframe was forced yet

=item B<t>

the time of the current processed frame

=back


For example to force a key frame every 5 seconds, you can specify:
	
	-force_key_frames expr:gte(t,n_forced*5)


To force a key frame 5 seconds after the time of the last forced one,
starting from second 13:
	
	-force_key_frames expr:if(isnan(prev_forced_t),gte(t,13),gte(t,prev_forced_t+5))



=item B<source>

If the argument is C<source>, ffmpeg will force a key frame if
the current frame being encoded is marked as a key frame in its source.
In cases where this particular source frame has to be dropped,
enforce the next available frame to become a key frame instead.


=back


Note that forcing too many keyframes is very harmful for the lookahead
algorithms of certain encoders: using fixed-GOP options or similar
would be more efficient.


=item B<-apply_cropping[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<source> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Automatically crop the video after decoding according to file metadata.
Default is I<all>.


=over 4


=item B<none (0)>

Don't apply any cropping metadata.

=item B<all (1)>

Apply both codec and container level croppping. This is the default mode.

=item B<codec (2)>

Apply codec level croppping.

=item B<container (3)>

Apply container level croppping.

=back



=item B<-copyinkf[:>I<stream_specifier>B<] (>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

When doing stream copy, copy also non-key frames found at the
beginning.


=item B<-init_hw_device> I<type>B<[=>I<name>B<][:>I<device>B<[,>I<key=value>B<...]]>

Initialise a new hardware device of type I<type> called I<name>, using the
given device parameters.
If no name is specified it will receive a default name of the form "I<type>%d".

The meaning of I<device> and the following arguments depends on the
device type:

=over 4



=item B<cuda>

I<device> is the number of the CUDA device.

The following options are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<primary_ctx>

If set to 1, uses the primary device context instead of creating a new one.

=back


Examples:

=over 4


=item I<-init_hw_device cuda:1>

Choose the second device on the system.


=item I<-init_hw_device cuda:0,primary_ctx=1>

Choose the first device and use the primary device context.

=back



=item B<dxva2>

I<device> is the number of the Direct3D 9 display adapter.


=item B<d3d11va>

I<device> is the number of the Direct3D 11 display adapter.
If not specified, it will attempt to use the default Direct3D 11 display adapter
or the first Direct3D 11 display adapter whose hardware VendorId is specified
by B<vendor_id>.

Examples:

=over 4


=item I<-init_hw_device d3d11va>

Create a d3d11va device on the default Direct3D 11 display adapter.


=item I<-init_hw_device d3d11va:1>

Create a d3d11va device on the Direct3D 11 display adapter specified by index 1.


=item I<-init_hw_device d3d11va:,vendor_id=0x8086>

Create a d3d11va device on the first Direct3D 11 display adapter whose hardware VendorId is 0x8086.

=back



=item B<vaapi>

I<device> is either an X11 display name, a DRM render node or a DirectX adapter index.
If not specified, it will attempt to open the default X11 display (I<$DISPLAY>)
and then the first DRM render node (I</dev/dri/renderD128>), or the default
DirectX adapter on Windows.

The following options are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<kernel_driver>

When I<device> is not specified, use this option to specify the name of the kernel
driver associated with the desired device. This option is available only when
the hardware acceleration method I<drm> and I<vaapi> are enabled.

=item B<vendor_id>

When I<device> and I<kernel_driver> are not specified, use this option to specify
the vendor id associated with the desired device. This option is available only when the
hardware acceleration method I<drm> and I<vaapi> are enabled and I<kernel_driver>
is not specified.

=back


Examples:

=over 4


=item I<-init_hw_device vaapi>

Create a vaapi device on the default device.


=item I<-init_hw_device vaapi:/dev/dri/renderD129>

Create a vaapi device on DRM render node F</dev/dri/renderD129>.


=item I<-init_hw_device vaapi:1>

Create a vaapi device on DirectX adapter 1.


=item I<-init_hw_device vaapi:,kernel_driver=i915>

Create a vaapi device on a device associated with kernel driver B<i915>.


=item I<-init_hw_device vaapi:,vendor_id=0x8086>

Create a vaapi device on a device associated with vendor id B<0x8086>.

=back



=item B<vdpau>

I<device> is an X11 display name.
If not specified, it will attempt to open the default X11 display (I<$DISPLAY>).


=item B<qsv>

I<device> selects a value in B<MFX_IMPL_*>. Allowed values are:

=over 4


=item B<auto>


=item B<sw>


=item B<hw>


=item B<auto_any>


=item B<hw_any>


=item B<hw2>


=item B<hw3>


=item B<hw4>


=back

If not specified, B<auto_any> is used.
(Note that it may be easier to achieve the desired result for QSV by creating the
platform-appropriate subdevice (B<dxva2> or B<d3d11va> or B<vaapi>) and then deriving a
QSV device from that.)

The following options are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<child_device>

Specify a DRM render node on Linux or DirectX adapter on Windows.

=item B<child_device_type>

Choose platform-appropriate subdevice type. On Windows B<d3d11va> is used
as default subdevice type when C<--enable-libvpl> is specified at configuration time,
B<dxva2> is used as default subdevice type when C<--enable-libmfx> is specified at
configuration time. On Linux user can use B<vaapi> only as subdevice type.

=back


Examples:

=over 4


=item I<-init_hw_device qsv:hw,child_device=/dev/dri/renderD129>

Create a QSV device with B<MFX_IMPL_HARDWARE> on DRM render node F</dev/dri/renderD129>.


=item I<-init_hw_device qsv:hw,child_device=1>

Create a QSV device with B<MFX_IMPL_HARDWARE> on DirectX adapter 1.


=item I<-init_hw_device qsv:hw,child_device_type=d3d11va>

Choose the GPU subdevice with type B<d3d11va> and create QSV device with B<MFX_IMPL_HARDWARE>.


=item I<-init_hw_device qsv:hw,child_device_type=dxva2>

Choose the GPU subdevice with type B<dxva2> and create QSV device with B<MFX_IMPL_HARDWARE>.


=item I<-init_hw_device qsv:hw,child_device=1,child_device_type=d3d11va>

Create a QSV device with B<MFX_IMPL_HARDWARE> on DirectX adapter 1 with subdevice type B<d3d11va>.


=item I<-init_hw_device vaapi=va:/dev/dri/renderD129 -init_hw_device qsv=hw1@I<va>>

Create a VAAPI device called B<va> on F</dev/dri/renderD129>, then derive a QSV device called B<hw1>
from device B<va>.


=back



=item B<opencl>

I<device> selects the platform and device as I<platform_index.device_index>.

The set of devices can also be filtered using the key-value pairs to find only
devices matching particular platform or device strings.

The strings usable as filters are:

=over 4


=item B<platform_profile>


=item B<platform_version>


=item B<platform_name>


=item B<platform_vendor>


=item B<platform_extensions>


=item B<device_name>


=item B<device_vendor>


=item B<driver_version>


=item B<device_version>


=item B<device_profile>


=item B<device_extensions>


=item B<device_type>


=back


The indices and filters must together uniquely select a device.

Examples:

=over 4


=item I<-init_hw_device opencl:0.1>

Choose the second device on the first platform.


=item I<-init_hw_device opencl:,device_name=Foo9000>

Choose the device with a name containing the string I<Foo9000>.


=item I<-init_hw_device opencl:1,device_type=gpu,device_extensions=cl_khr_fp16>

Choose the GPU device on the second platform supporting the I<cl_khr_fp16>
extension.

=back



=item B<vulkan>

If I<device> is an integer, it selects the device by its index in a
system-dependent list of devices.  If I<device> is any other string, it
selects the first device with a name containing that string as a substring.

The following options are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<debug>

If set to 1, enables the validation layer, if installed.

=item B<linear_images>

If set to 1, images allocated by the hwcontext will be linear and locally mappable.

=item B<instance_extensions>

A plus separated list of additional instance extensions to enable.

=item B<device_extensions>

A plus separated list of additional device extensions to enable.

=back


Examples:

=over 4


=item I<-init_hw_device vulkan:1>

Choose the second device on the system.


=item I<-init_hw_device vulkan:RADV>

Choose the first device with a name containing the string I<RADV>.


=item I<-init_hw_device vulkan:0,instance_extensions=VK_KHR_wayland_surface+VK_KHR_xcb_surface>

Choose the first device and enable the Wayland and XCB instance extensions.

=back



=back



=item B<-init_hw_device> I<type>B<[=>I<name>B<]@>I<source>

Initialise a new hardware device of type I<type> called I<name>,
deriving it from the existing device with the name I<source>.


=item B<-init_hw_device list>

List all hardware device types supported in this build of ffmpeg.


=item B<-filter_hw_device> I<name>

Pass the hardware device called I<name> to all filters in any filter graph.
This can be used to set the device to upload to with the C<hwupload> filter,
or the device to map to with the C<hwmap> filter.  Other filters may also
make use of this parameter when they require a hardware device.  Note that this
is typically only required when the input is not already in hardware frames -
when it is, filters will derive the device they require from the context of the
frames they receive as input.

This is a global setting, so all filters will receive the same device.


=item B<-hwaccel[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<hwaccel> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Use hardware acceleration to decode the matching stream(s). The allowed values
of I<hwaccel> are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Do not use any hardware acceleration (the default).


=item B<auto>

Automatically select the hardware acceleration method.


=item B<vdpau>

Use VDPAU (Video Decode and Presentation API for Unix) hardware acceleration.


=item B<dxva2>

Use DXVA2 (DirectX Video Acceleration) hardware acceleration.


=item B<d3d11va>

Use D3D11VA (DirectX Video Acceleration) hardware acceleration.


=item B<vaapi>

Use VAAPI (Video Acceleration API) hardware acceleration.


=item B<qsv>

Use the Intel QuickSync Video acceleration for video transcoding.

Unlike most other values, this option does not enable accelerated decoding (that
is used automatically whenever a qsv decoder is selected), but accelerated
transcoding, without copying the frames into the system memory.

For it to work, both the decoder and the encoder must support QSV acceleration
and no filters must be used.

=back


This option has no effect if the selected hwaccel is not available or not
supported by the chosen decoder.

Note that most acceleration methods are intended for playback and will not be
faster than software decoding on modern CPUs. Additionally, B<ffmpeg>
will usually need to copy the decoded frames from the GPU memory into the system
memory, resulting in further performance loss. This option is thus mainly
useful for testing.


=item B<-hwaccel_device[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<hwaccel_device> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

Select a device to use for hardware acceleration.

This option only makes sense when the B<-hwaccel> option is also specified.
It can either refer to an existing device created with B<-init_hw_device>
by name, or it can create a new device as if
B<-init_hw_device> I<type>:I<hwaccel_device>
were called immediately before.


=item B<-hwaccels>

List all hardware acceleration components enabled in this build of ffmpeg.
Actual runtime availability depends on the hardware and its suitable driver
being installed.


=item B<-fix_sub_duration_heartbeat[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]>

Set a specific output video stream as the heartbeat stream according to which
to split and push through currently in-progress subtitle upon receipt of a
random access packet.

This lowers the latency of subtitles for which the end packet or the following
subtitle has not yet been received. As a drawback, this will most likely lead
to duplication of subtitle events in order to cover the full duration, so
when dealing with use cases where latency of when the subtitle event is passed
on to output is not relevant this option should not be utilized.

Requires B<-fix_sub_duration> to be set for the relevant input subtitle
stream for this to have any effect, as well as for the input subtitle stream
having to be directly mapped to the same output in which the heartbeat stream
resides.


=back



=head2 Audio Options



=over 4


=item B<-aframes> I<number> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the number of audio frames to output. This is an obsolete alias for
C<-frames:a>, which you should use instead.

=item B<-ar[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<freq> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Set the audio sampling frequency. For output streams it is set by
default to the frequency of the corresponding input stream. For input
streams this option only makes sense for audio grabbing devices and raw
demuxers and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer options.

=item B<-aq> I<q> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the audio quality (codec-specific, VBR). This is an alias for -q:a.

=item B<-ac[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<channels> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Set the number of audio channels. For output streams it is set by
default to the number of input audio channels. For input streams
this option only makes sense for audio grabbing devices and raw demuxers
and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer options.

=item B<-an (>I<input/output>B<)>

As an input option, blocks all audio streams of a file from being filtered or
being automatically selected or mapped for any output. See C<-discard>
option to disable streams individually.

As an output option, disables audio recording i.e. automatic selection or
mapping of any audio stream. For full manual control see the C<-map>
option.

=item B<-acodec> I<codec> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Set the audio codec. This is an alias for C<-codec:a>.

=item B<-sample_fmt[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<sample_fmt> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Set the audio sample format. Use C<-sample_fmts> to get a list
of supported sample formats.


=item B<-af> I<filtergraph> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Create the filtergraph specified by I<filtergraph> and use it to
filter the stream.

This is an alias for C<-filter:a>, see the B<-filter option>.

=back



=head2 Advanced Audio options



=over 4


=item B<-atag> I<fourcc/tag> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Force audio tag/fourcc. This is an alias for C<-tag:a>.

=item B<-ch_layout[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<layout> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Alias for C<-channel_layout>.

=item B<-channel_layout[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<layout> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Set the audio channel layout. For output streams it is set by default to the
input channel layout. For input streams it overrides the channel layout of the
input. Not all decoders respect the overridden channel layout. This option
also sets the channel layout for audio grabbing devices and raw demuxers
and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer option.

=item B<-guess_layout_max> I<channels> B<(>I<input,per-stream>B<)>

If some input channel layout is not known, try to guess only if it
corresponds to at most the specified number of channels. For example, 2
tells to B<ffmpeg> to recognize 1 channel as mono and 2 channels as
stereo but not 6 channels as 5.1. The default is to always try to guess. Use
0 to disable all guessing. Using the C<-channel_layout> option to
explicitly specify an input layout also disables guessing.

=back



=head2 Subtitle options



=over 4


=item B<-scodec> I<codec> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Set the subtitle codec. This is an alias for C<-codec:s>.

=item B<-sn (>I<input/output>B<)>

As an input option, blocks all subtitle streams of a file from being filtered or
being automatically selected or mapped for any output. See C<-discard>
option to disable streams individually.

As an output option, disables subtitle recording i.e. automatic selection or
mapping of any subtitle stream. For full manual control see the C<-map>
option.

=back



=head2 Advanced Subtitle options



=over 4



=item B<-fix_sub_duration>

Fix subtitles durations. For each subtitle, wait for the next packet in the
same stream and adjust the duration of the first to avoid overlap. This is
necessary with some subtitles codecs, especially DVB subtitles, because the
duration in the original packet is only a rough estimate and the end is
actually marked by an empty subtitle frame. Failing to use this option when
necessary can result in exaggerated durations or muxing failures due to
non-monotonic timestamps.

Note that this option will delay the output of all data until the next
subtitle packet is decoded: it may increase memory consumption and latency a
lot.


=item B<-canvas_size> I<size>

Set the size of the canvas used to render subtitles.


=back



=head2 Advanced options



=over 4


=item B<-map [-]>I<input_file_id>B<[:>I<stream_specifier>B<][:>I<view_specifier>B<][?] |> I<[linklabel]> B<(>I<output>B<)>


Create one or more streams in the output file. This option has two forms for
specifying the data source(s): the first selects one or more streams from some
input file (specified with C<-i>), the second takes an output from some
complex filtergraph (specified with C<-filter_complex>).

In the first form, an output stream is created for every stream from the input
file with the index I<input_file_id>. If I<stream_specifier> is given,
only those streams that match the specifier are used (see the
B<Stream specifiers> section for the I<stream_specifier> syntax).

A C<-> character before the stream identifier creates a "negative" mapping.
It disables matching streams from already created mappings.

An optional I<view_specifier> may be given after the stream specifier, which
for multiview video specifies the view to be used. The view specifier may have
one of the following formats:

=over 4


=item B<view:>I<view_id>

select a view by its ID; I<view_id> may be set to 'all' to use all the views
interleaved into one stream;


=item B<vidx:>I<view_idx>

select a view by its index; i.e. 0 is the base view, 1 is the first non-base
view, etc.


=item B<vpos:>I<position>

select a view by its display position; I<position> may be C<left> or
C<right>

=back

The default for transcoding is to only use the base view, i.e. the equivalent of
C<vidx:0>. For streamcopy, view specifiers are not supported and all views
are always copied.

A trailing C<?> after the stream index will allow the map to be
optional: if the map matches no streams the map will be ignored instead
of failing. Note the map will still fail if an invalid input file index
is used; such as if the map refers to a non-existent input.

An alternative I<[linklabel]> form will map outputs from complex filter
graphs (see the B<-filter_complex> option) to the output file.
I<linklabel> must correspond to a defined output link label in the graph.

This option may be specified multiple times, each adding more streams to the
output file. Any given input stream may also be mapped any number of times as a
source for different output streams, e.g. in order to use different encoding
options and/or filters. The streams are created in the output in the same order
in which the C<-map> options are given on the commandline.

Using this option disables the default mappings for this output file.

Examples:


=over 4



=item I<map everything>

To map ALL streams from the first input file to output
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 output



=item I<select specific stream>

If you have two audio streams in the first input file, these streams are
identified by I<0:0> and I<0:1>. You can use C<-map> to select which
streams to place in an output file. For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:1 out.wav

will map the second input stream in F<INPUT> to the (single) output stream
in F<out.wav>.


=item I<create multiple streams>

To select the stream with index 2 from input file F<a.mov> (specified by the
identifier I<0:2>), and stream with index 6 from input F<b.mov>
(specified by the identifier I<1:6>), and copy them to the output file
F<out.mov>:
	
	ffmpeg -i a.mov -i b.mov -c copy -map 0:2 -map 1:6 out.mov



=item I<create multiple streams 2>

To select all video and the third audio stream from an input file:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:v -map 0:a:2 OUTPUT



=item I<negative map>

To map all the streams except the second audio, use negative mappings
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -map -0:a:1 OUTPUT



=item I<optional map>

To map the video and audio streams from the first input, and using the
trailing C<?>, ignore the audio mapping if no audio streams exist in
the first input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:v -map 0:a? OUTPUT



=item I<map by language>

To pick the English audio stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:m:language:eng OUTPUT



=back



=item B<-ignore_unknown>

Ignore input streams with unknown type instead of failing if copying
such streams is attempted.


=item B<-copy_unknown>

Allow input streams with unknown type to be copied instead of failing if copying
such streams is attempted.


=item B<-map_metadata[:>I<metadata_spec_out>B<]> I<infile>B<[:>I<metadata_spec_in>B<] (>I<output,per-metadata>B<)>

Set metadata information of the next output file from I<infile>. Note that
those are file indices (zero-based), not filenames.
Optional I<metadata_spec_in/out> parameters specify, which metadata to copy.
A metadata specifier can have the following forms:

=over 4


=item I<g>

global metadata, i.e. metadata that applies to the whole file


=item I<s>B<[:>I<stream_spec>B<]>

per-stream metadata. I<stream_spec> is a stream specifier as described
in the B<Stream specifiers> chapter. In an input metadata specifier, the first
matching stream is copied from. In an output metadata specifier, all matching
streams are copied to.


=item I<c>B<:>I<chapter_index>

per-chapter metadata. I<chapter_index> is the zero-based chapter index.


=item I<p>B<:>I<program_index>

per-program metadata. I<program_index> is the zero-based program index.

=back

If metadata specifier is omitted, it defaults to global.

By default, global metadata is copied from the first input file,
per-stream and per-chapter metadata is copied along with streams/chapters. These
default mappings are disabled by creating any mapping of the relevant type. A negative
file index can be used to create a dummy mapping that just disables automatic copying.

For example to copy metadata from the first stream of the input file to global metadata
of the output file:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.ogg -map_metadata 0:s:0 out.mp3


To do the reverse, i.e. copy global metadata to all audio streams:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -map_metadata:s:a 0:g out.mkv

Note that simple C<0> would work as well in this example, since global
metadata is assumed by default.


=item B<-map_chapters> I<input_file_index> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Copy chapters from input file with index I<input_file_index> to the next
output file. If no chapter mapping is specified, then chapters are copied from
the first input file with at least one chapter. Use a negative file index to
disable any chapter copying.


=item B<-benchmark (>I<global>B<)>

Show benchmarking information at the end of an encode.
Shows real, system and user time used and maximum memory consumption.
Maximum memory consumption is not supported on all systems,
it will usually display as 0 if not supported.

=item B<-benchmark_all (>I<global>B<)>

Show benchmarking information during the encode.
Shows real, system and user time used in various steps (audio/video encode/decode).

=item B<-timelimit> I<duration> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Exit after ffmpeg has been running for I<duration> seconds in CPU user time.

=item B<-dump (>I<global>B<)>

Dump each input packet to stderr.

=item B<-hex (>I<global>B<)>

When dumping packets, also dump the payload.

=item B<-readrate> I<speed> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Limit input read speed.

Its value is a floating-point positive number which represents the maximum duration of
media, in seconds, that should be ingested in one second of wallclock time.
Default value is zero and represents no imposed limitation on speed of ingestion.
Value C<1> represents real-time speed and is equivalent to C<-re>.

Mainly used to simulate a capture device or live input stream (e.g. when reading from a file).
Should not be used with a low value when input is an actual capture device or live stream as
it may cause packet loss.

It is useful for when flow speed of output packets is important, such as live streaming.

=item B<-re (>I<input>B<)>

Read input at native frame rate. This is equivalent to setting C<-readrate 1>.

=item B<-readrate_initial_burst> I<seconds>

Set an initial read burst time, in seconds, after which B<-re/-readrate>
will be enforced.

=item B<-vsync> I<parameter> B<(>I<global>B<)>


=item B<-fps_mode[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<parameter> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Set video sync method / framerate mode. vsync is applied to all output video streams
but can be overridden for a stream by setting fps_mode. vsync is deprecated and will be
removed in the future.

For compatibility reasons some of the values for vsync can be specified as numbers (shown
in parentheses in the following table).


=over 4


=item B<passthrough (0)>

Each frame is passed with its timestamp from the demuxer to the muxer.

=item B<cfr (1)>

Frames will be duplicated and dropped to achieve exactly the requested
constant frame rate.

=item B<vfr (2)>

Frames are passed through with their timestamp or dropped so as to
prevent 2 frames from having the same timestamp.

=item B<auto (-1)>

Chooses between cfr and vfr depending on muxer capabilities. This is the
default method.

=back


Note that the timestamps may be further modified by the muxer, after this.
For example, in the case that the format option B<avoid_negative_ts>
is enabled.

With -map you can select from which stream the timestamps should be
taken. You can leave either video or audio unchanged and sync the
remaining stream(s) to the unchanged one.


=item B<-frame_drop_threshold> I<parameter>

Frame drop threshold, which specifies how much behind video frames can
be before they are dropped. In frame rate units, so 1.0 is one frame.
The default is -1.1. One possible usecase is to avoid framedrops in case
of noisy timestamps or to increase frame drop precision in case of exact
timestamps.


=item B<-apad> I<parameters> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Pad the output audio stream(s). This is the same as applying C<-af apad>.
Argument is a string of filter parameters composed the same as with the C<apad> filter.
C<-shortest> must be set for this output for the option to take effect.


=item B<-copyts>

Do not process input timestamps, but keep their values without trying
to sanitize them. In particular, do not remove the initial start time
offset value.

Note that, depending on the B<vsync> option or on specific muxer
processing (e.g. in case the format option B<avoid_negative_ts>
is enabled) the output timestamps may mismatch with the input
timestamps even when this option is selected.


=item B<-start_at_zero>

When used with B<copyts>, shift input timestamps so they start at zero.

This means that using e.g. C<-ss 50> will make output timestamps start at
50 seconds, regardless of what timestamp the input file started at.


=item B<-copytb> I<mode>

Specify how to set the encoder timebase when stream copying.  I<mode> is an
integer numeric value, and can assume one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<1>

Use the demuxer timebase.

The time base is copied to the output encoder from the corresponding input
demuxer. This is sometimes required to avoid non monotonically increasing
timestamps when copying video streams with variable frame rate.


=item B<0>

Use the decoder timebase.

The time base is copied to the output encoder from the corresponding input
decoder.


=item B<-1>

Try to make the choice automatically, in order to generate a sane output.

=back


Default value is -1.


=item B<-enc_time_base[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<timebase> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Set the encoder timebase. I<timebase> can assume one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0>

Assign a default value according to the media type.

For video - use 1/framerate, for audio - use 1/samplerate.


=item B<demux>

Use the timebase from the demuxer.


=item B<filter>

Use the timebase from the filtergraph.


=item B<a positive number>

Use the provided number as the timebase.

This field can be provided as a ratio of two integers (e.g. 1:24, 1:48000)
or as a decimal number (e.g. 0.04166, 2.0833e-5)

=back


Default value is 0.


=item B<-bitexact (>I<input/output>B<)>

Enable bitexact mode for (de)muxer and (de/en)coder

=item B<-shortest (>I<output>B<)>

Finish encoding when the shortest output stream ends.

Note that this option may require buffering frames, which introduces extra
latency. The maximum amount of this latency may be controlled with the
C<-shortest_buf_duration> option.


=item B<-shortest_buf_duration> I<duration> B<(>I<output>B<)>

The C<-shortest> option may require buffering potentially large amounts
of data when at least one of the streams is "sparse" (i.e. has large gaps
between frames – this is typically the case for subtitles).

This option controls the maximum duration of buffered frames in seconds.
Larger values may allow the C<-shortest> option to produce more accurate
results, but increase memory use and latency.

The default value is 10 seconds.


=item B<-dts_delta_threshold> I<threshold>

Timestamp discontinuity delta threshold, expressed as a decimal number
of seconds.

The timestamp discontinuity correction enabled by this option is only
applied to input formats accepting timestamp discontinuity (for which
the C<AVFMT_TS_DISCONT> flag is enabled), e.g. MPEG-TS and HLS, and
is automatically disabled when employing the C<-copyts> option
(unless wrapping is detected).

If a timestamp discontinuity is detected whose absolute value is
greater than I<threshold>, ffmpeg will remove the discontinuity by
decreasing/increasing the current DTS and PTS by the corresponding
delta value.

The default value is 10.


=item B<-dts_error_threshold> I<threshold>

Timestamp error delta threshold, expressed as a decimal number of
seconds.

The timestamp correction enabled by this option is only applied to
input formats not accepting timestamp discontinuity (for which the
C<AVFMT_TS_DISCONT> flag is not enabled).

If a timestamp discontinuity is detected whose absolute value is
greater than I<threshold>, ffmpeg will drop the PTS/DTS timestamp
value.

The default value is C<3600*30> (30 hours), which is arbitrarily
picked and quite conservative.


=item B<-muxdelay> I<seconds> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the maximum demux-decode delay.

=item B<-muxpreload> I<seconds> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the initial demux-decode delay.

=item B<-streamid> I<output-stream-index>B<:>I<new-value> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Assign a new stream-id value to an output stream. This option should be
specified prior to the output filename to which it applies.
For the situation where multiple output files exist, a streamid
may be reassigned to a different value.

For example, to set the stream 0 PID to 33 and the stream 1 PID to 36 for
an output mpegts file:
	
	ffmpeg -i inurl -streamid 0:33 -streamid 1:36 out.ts



=item B<-bsf[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<bitstream_filters> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Apply bitstream filters to matching streams. The filters are applied to each
packet as it is received from the demuxer (when used as an input option) or
before it is sent to the muxer (when used as an output option).

I<bitstream_filters> is a comma-separated list of bitstream filter
specifications, each of the form
	
	<filter>[=<optname0>=<optval0>:<optname1>=<optval1>:...]

Any of the ',=:' characters that are to be a part of an option value need to be
escaped with a backslash.

Use the C<-bsfs> option to get the list of bitstream filters.

E.g.
	
	ffmpeg -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb -i h264.mp4 -c:v copy -an out.h264

applies the C<h264_mp4toannexb> bitstream filter (which converts
MP4-encapsulated H.264 stream to Annex B) to the I<input> video stream.

On the other hand,
	
	ffmpeg -i file.mov -an -vn -bsf:s mov2textsub -c:s copy -f rawvideo sub.txt

applies the C<mov2textsub> bitstream filter (which extracts text from MOV
subtitles) to the I<output> subtitle stream. Note, however, that since both
examples use C<-c copy>, it matters little whether the filters are applied
on input or output - that would change if transcoding was happening.


=item B<-tag[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<codec_tag> B<(>I<input/output,per-stream>B<)>

Force a tag/fourcc for matching streams.


=item B<-timecode> I<hh>B<:>I<mm>B<:>I<ss>B<SEP>I<ff>

Specify Timecode for writing. I<SEP> is ':' for non drop timecode and ';'
(or '.') for drop.
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mpg -timecode 01:02:03.04 -r 30000/1001 -s ntsc output.mpg




=item B<-filter_complex> I<filtergraph> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Define a complex filtergraph, i.e. one with arbitrary number of inputs and/or
outputs. For simple graphs -- those with one input and one output of the same
type -- see the B<-filter> options. I<filtergraph> is a description of
the filtergraph, as described in the ``Filtergraph syntax'' section of the
ffmpeg-filters manual. This option may be specified multiple times - each use
creates a new complex filtergraph.

Inputs to a complex filtergraph may come from different source types,
distinguished by the format of the corresponding link label:

=over 4


=item *

To connect an input stream, use C<[file_index:stream_specifier]> (i.e. the
same syntax as B<-map>). If I<stream_specifier> matches multiple
streams, the first one will be used. For multiview video, the stream specifier
may be followed by the view specifier, see documentation for the B<-map>
option for its syntax.


=item *

To connect a loopback decoder use [dec:I<dec_idx>], where I<dec_idx> is
the index of the loopback decoder to be connected to given input. For multiview
video, the decoder index may be followed by the view specifier, see
documentation for the B<-map> option for its syntax.


=item *

To connect an output from another complex filtergraph, use its link label. E.g
the following example:

	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv \
	  -filter_complex '[0:v]scale=size=hd1080,split=outputs=2[for_enc][orig_scaled]' \
	  -c:v libx264 -map '[for_enc]' output.mkv \
	  -dec 0:0 \
	  -filter_complex '[dec:0][orig_scaled]hstack[stacked]' \
	  -map '[stacked]' -c:v ffv1 comparison.mkv


reads an input video and

=over 4


=item *

(line 2) uses a complex filtergraph with one input and two outputs
to scale the video to 1920x1080 and duplicate the result to both
outputs;


=item *

(line 3) encodes one scaled output with C<libx264> and writes the result to
F<output.mkv>;


=item *

(line 4) decodes this encoded stream with a loopback decoder;


=item *

(line 5) places the output of the loopback decoder (i.e. the
C<libx264>-encoded video) side by side with the scaled original input;


=item *

(line 6) combined video is then losslessly encoded and written into
F<comparison.mkv>.


=back


Note that the two filtergraphs cannot be combined into one, because then there
would be a cycle in the transcoding pipeline (filtergraph output goes to
encoding, from there to decoding, then back to the same graph), and such cycles
are not allowed.


=back


An unlabeled input will be connected to the first unused input stream of the
matching type.

Output link labels are referred to with B<-map>. Unlabeled outputs are
added to the first output file.

Note that with this option it is possible to use only lavfi sources without
normal input files.

For example, to overlay an image over video
	
	ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex '[0:v][1:v]overlay[out]' -map
	'[out]' out.mkv

Here C<[0:v]> refers to the first video stream in the first input file,
which is linked to the first (main) input of the overlay filter. Similarly the
first video stream in the second input is linked to the second (overlay) input
of overlay.

Assuming there is only one video stream in each input file, we can omit input
labels, so the above is equivalent to
	
	ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex 'overlay[out]' -map
	'[out]' out.mkv


Furthermore we can omit the output label and the single output from the filter
graph will be added to the output file automatically, so we can simply write
	
	ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex 'overlay' out.mkv


As a special exception, you can use a bitmap subtitle stream as input: it
will be converted into a video with the same size as the largest video in
the file, or 720x576 if no video is present. Note that this is an
experimental and temporary solution. It will be removed once libavfilter has
proper support for subtitles.

For example, to hardcode subtitles on top of a DVB-T recording stored in
MPEG-TS format, delaying the subtitles by 1 second:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.ts -filter_complex \
	  '[#0x2ef] setpts=PTS+1/TB [sub] ; [#0x2d0] [sub] overlay' \
	  -sn -map '#0x2dc' output.mkv

(0x2d0, 0x2dc and 0x2ef are the MPEG-TS PIDs of respectively the video,
audio and subtitles streams; 0:0, 0:3 and 0:7 would have worked too)

To generate 5 seconds of pure red video using lavfi C<color> source:
	
	ffmpeg -filter_complex 'color=c=red' -t 5 out.mkv



=item B<-filter_complex_threads> I<nb_threads> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Defines how many threads are used to process a filter_complex graph.
Similar to filter_threads but used for C<-filter_complex> graphs only.
The default is the number of available CPUs.


=item B<-lavfi> I<filtergraph> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Define a complex filtergraph, i.e. one with arbitrary number of inputs and/or
outputs. Equivalent to B<-filter_complex>.


=item B<-accurate_seek (>I<input>B<)>

This option enables or disables accurate seeking in input files with the
B<-ss> option. It is enabled by default, so seeking is accurate when
transcoding. Use B<-noaccurate_seek> to disable it, which may be useful
e.g. when copying some streams and transcoding the others.


=item B<-seek_timestamp (>I<input>B<)>

This option enables or disables seeking by timestamp in input files with the
B<-ss> option. It is disabled by default. If enabled, the argument
to the B<-ss> option is considered an actual timestamp, and is not
offset by the start time of the file. This matters only for files which do
not start from timestamp 0, such as transport streams.


=item B<-thread_queue_size> I<size> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

For input, this option sets the maximum number of queued packets when reading
from the file or device. With low latency / high rate live streams, packets may
be discarded if they are not read in a timely manner; setting this value can
force ffmpeg to use a separate input thread and read packets as soon as they
arrive. By default ffmpeg only does this if multiple inputs are specified.

For output, this option specified the maximum number of packets that may be
queued to each muxing thread.


=item B<-sdp_file> I<file> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Print sdp information for an output stream to I<file>.
This allows dumping sdp information when at least one output isn't an
rtp stream. (Requires at least one of the output formats to be rtp).


=item B<-discard (>I<input>B<)>

Allows discarding specific streams or frames from streams.
Any input stream can be fully discarded, using value C<all> whereas
selective discarding of frames from a stream occurs at the demuxer
and is not supported by all demuxers.


=over 4


=item B<none>

Discard no frame.


=item B<default>

Default, which discards no frames.


=item B<noref>

Discard all non-reference frames.


=item B<bidir>

Discard all bidirectional frames.


=item B<nokey>

Discard all frames excepts keyframes.


=item B<all>

Discard all frames.

=back



=item B<-abort_on> I<flags> B<(>I<global>B<)>

Stop and abort on various conditions. The following flags are available:


=over 4


=item B<empty_output>

No packets were passed to the muxer, the output is empty.

=item B<empty_output_stream>

No packets were passed to the muxer in some of the output streams.

=back



=item B<-max_error_rate (>I<global>B<)>

Set fraction of decoding frame failures across all inputs which when crossed
ffmpeg will return exit code 69. Crossing this threshold does not terminate
processing. Range is a floating-point number between 0 to 1. Default is 2/3.


=item B<-xerror (>I<global>B<)>

Stop and exit on error


=item B<-max_muxing_queue_size> I<packets> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

When transcoding audio and/or video streams, ffmpeg will not begin writing into
the output until it has one packet for each such stream. While waiting for that
to happen, packets for other streams are buffered. This option sets the size of
this buffer, in packets, for the matching output stream.

The default value of this option should be high enough for most uses, so only
touch this option if you are sure that you need it.


=item B<-muxing_queue_data_threshold> I<bytes> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

This is a minimum threshold until which the muxing queue size is not taken into
account. Defaults to 50 megabytes per stream, and is based on the overall size
of packets passed to the muxer.


=item B<-auto_conversion_filters (>I<global>B<)>

Enable automatically inserting format conversion filters in all filter
graphs, including those defined by B<-vf>, B<-af>,
B<-filter_complex> and B<-lavfi>. If filter format negotiation
requires a conversion, the initialization of the filters will fail.
Conversions can still be performed by inserting the relevant conversion
filter (scale, aresample) in the graph.
On by default, to explicitly disable it you need to specify
C<-noauto_conversion_filters>.


=item B<-bits_per_raw_sample[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<value> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Declare the number of bits per raw sample in the given output stream to be
I<value>. Note that this option sets the information provided to the
encoder/muxer, it does not change the stream to conform to this value. Setting
values that do not match the stream properties may result in encoding failures
or invalid output files.



=item B<-stats_enc_pre[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<path> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-stats_enc_post[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<path> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-stats_mux_pre[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<path> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Write per-frame encoding information about the matching streams into the file
given by I<path>.

B<-stats_enc_pre> writes information about raw video or audio frames right
before they are sent for encoding, while B<-stats_enc_post> writes
information about encoded packets as they are received from the encoder.
B<-stats_mux_pre> writes information about packets just as they are about to
be sent to the muxer. Every frame or packet produces one line in the specified
file. The format of this line is controlled by B<-stats_enc_pre_fmt> /
B<-stats_enc_post_fmt> / B<-stats_mux_pre_fmt>.

When stats for multiple streams are written into a single file, the lines
corresponding to different streams will be interleaved. The precise order of
this interleaving is not specified and not guaranteed to remain stable between
different invocations of the program, even with the same options.


=item B<-stats_enc_pre_fmt[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<format_spec> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-stats_enc_post_fmt[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<format_spec> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>


=item B<-stats_mux_pre_fmt[:>I<stream_specifier>B<]> I<format_spec> B<(>I<output,per-stream>B<)>

Specify the format for the lines written with B<-stats_enc_pre> /
B<-stats_enc_post> / B<-stats_mux_pre>.

I<format_spec> is a string that may contain directives of the form
I<{fmt}>. I<format_spec> is backslash-escaped --- use \{, \}, and \\
to write a literal {, }, or \, respectively, into the output.

The directives given with I<fmt> may be one of the following:

=over 4


=item B<fidx>

Index of the output file.


=item B<sidx>

Index of the output stream in the file.


=item B<n>

Frame number. Pre-encoding: number of frames sent to the encoder so far.
Post-encoding: number of packets received from the encoder so far.
Muxing: number of packets submitted to the muxer for this stream so far.


=item B<ni>

Input frame number. Index of the input frame (i.e. output by a decoder) that
corresponds to this output frame or packet. -1 if unavailable.


=item B<tb>

Timebase in which this frame/packet's timestamps are expressed, as a rational
number I<num/den>. Note that encoder and muxer may use different timebases.


=item B<tbi>

Timebase for I<ptsi>, as a rational number I<num/den>. Available when
I<ptsi> is available, I<0/1> otherwise.


=item B<pts>

Presentation timestamp of the frame or packet, as an integer. Should be
multiplied by the timebase to compute presentation time.


=item B<ptsi>

Presentation timestamp of the input frame (see I<ni>), as an integer. Should
be multiplied by I<tbi> to compute presentation time. Printed as
(2^63 - 1 = 9223372036854775807) when not available.


=item B<t>

Presentation time of the frame or packet, as a decimal number. Equal to
I<pts> multiplied by I<tb>.


=item B<ti>

Presentation time of the input frame (see I<ni>), as a decimal number. Equal
to I<ptsi> multiplied by I<tbi>. Printed as inf when not available.


=item B<dts (>I<packet>B<)>

Decoding timestamp of the packet, as an integer. Should be multiplied by the
timebase to compute presentation time.


=item B<dt (>I<packet>B<)>

Decoding time of the frame or packet, as a decimal number. Equal to
I<dts> multiplied by I<tb>.


=item B<sn (>I<frame,audio>B<)>

Number of audio samples sent to the encoder so far.


=item B<samp (>I<frame,audio>B<)>

Number of audio samples in the frame.


=item B<size (>I<packet>B<)>

Size of the encoded packet in bytes.


=item B<br (>I<packet>B<)>

Current bitrate in bits per second.


=item B<abr (>I<packet>B<)>

Average bitrate for the whole stream so far, in bits per second, -1 if it cannot
be determined at this point.


=item B<key (>I<packet>B<)>

Character 'K' if the packet contains a keyframe, character 'N' otherwise.

=back


Directives tagged with I<packet> may only be used with
B<-stats_enc_post_fmt> and B<-stats_mux_pre_fmt>.

Directives tagged with I<frame> may only be used with
B<-stats_enc_pre_fmt>.

Directives tagged with I<audio> may only be used with audio streams.

The default format strings are:

=over 4


=item B<pre-encoding>

{fidx} {sidx} {n} {t}

=item B<post-encoding>

{fidx} {sidx} {n} {t}

=back

In the future, new items may be added to the end of the default formatting
strings. Users who depend on the format staying exactly the same, should
prescribe it manually.

Note that stats for different streams written into the same file may have
different formats.


=back



=head2 Preset files

A preset file contains a sequence of I<option>=I<value> pairs,
one for each line, specifying a sequence of options which would be
awkward to specify on the command line. Lines starting with the hash
('#') character are ignored and are used to provide comments. Check
the F<presets> directory in the FFmpeg source tree for examples.

There are two types of preset files: ffpreset and avpreset files.


=head3 ffpreset files

ffpreset files are specified with the C<vpre>, C<apre>,
C<spre>, and C<fpre> options. The C<fpre> option takes the
filename of the preset instead of a preset name as input and can be
used for any kind of codec. For the C<vpre>, C<apre>, and
C<spre> options, the options specified in a preset file are
applied to the currently selected codec of the same type as the preset
option.

The argument passed to the C<vpre>, C<apre>, and C<spre>
preset options identifies the preset file to use according to the
following rules:

First ffmpeg searches for a file named I<arg>.ffpreset in the
directories F<$FFMPEG_DATADIR> (if set), and F<$HOME/.ffmpeg>, and in
the datadir defined at configuration time (usually F<PREFIX/share/ffmpeg>)
or in a F<ffpresets> folder along the executable on win32,
in that order. For example, if the argument is C<libvpx-1080p>, it will
search for the file F<libvpx-1080p.ffpreset>.

If no such file is found, then ffmpeg will search for a file named
I<codec_name>-I<arg>.ffpreset in the above-mentioned
directories, where I<codec_name> is the name of the codec to which
the preset file options will be applied. For example, if you select
the video codec with C<-vcodec libvpx> and use C<-vpre 1080p>,
then it will search for the file F<libvpx-1080p.ffpreset>.


=head3 avpreset files

avpreset files are specified with the C<pre> option. They work similar to
ffpreset files, but they only allow encoder- specific options. Therefore, an
I<option>=I<value> pair specifying an encoder cannot be used.

When the C<pre> option is specified, ffmpeg will look for files with the
suffix .avpreset in the directories F<$AVCONV_DATADIR> (if set), and
F<$HOME/.avconv>, and in the datadir defined at configuration time (usually
F<PREFIX/share/ffmpeg>), in that order.

First ffmpeg searches for a file named I<codec_name>-I<arg>.avpreset in
the above-mentioned directories, where I<codec_name> is the name of the codec
to which the preset file options will be applied. For example, if you select the
video codec with C<-vcodec libvpx> and use C<-pre 1080p>, then it will
search for the file F<libvpx-1080p.avpreset>.

If no such file is found, then ffmpeg will search for a file named
I<arg>.avpreset in the same directories.



=head2 vstats file format

The C<-vstats> and C<-vstats_file> options enable generation of a file
containing statistics about the generated video outputs.

The C<-vstats_version> option controls the format version of the generated
file.

With version C<1> the format is:
	
	frame= <FRAME> q= <FRAME_QUALITY> PSNR= <PSNR> f_size= <FRAME_SIZE> s_size= <STREAM_SIZE>kB time= <TIMESTAMP> br= <BITRATE>kbits/s avg_br= <AVERAGE_BITRATE>kbits/s


With version C<2> the format is:
	
	out= <OUT_FILE_INDEX> st= <OUT_FILE_STREAM_INDEX> frame= <FRAME_NUMBER> q= <FRAME_QUALITY>f PSNR= <PSNR> f_size= <FRAME_SIZE> s_size= <STREAM_SIZE>kB time= <TIMESTAMP> br= <BITRATE>kbits/s avg_br= <AVERAGE_BITRATE>kbits/s


The value corresponding to each key is described below:

=over 4


=item B<avg_br>

average bitrate expressed in Kbits/s


=item B<br>

bitrate expressed in Kbits/s


=item B<frame>

number of encoded frame


=item B<out>

out file index


=item B<PSNR>

Peak Signal to Noise Ratio


=item B<q>

quality of the frame


=item B<f_size>

encoded packet size expressed as number of bytes


=item B<s_size>

stream size expressed in KiB


=item B<st>

out file stream index


=item B<time>

time of the packet


=item B<type>

picture type

=back


See also the B<-stats_enc options> for an alternative way
to show encoding statistics.



=head1 EXAMPLES



=head2 Video and Audio grabbing


If you specify the input format and device then ffmpeg can grab video
and audio directly.

	
	ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp -f video4linux2 -i /dev/video0 /tmp/out.mpg


Or with an ALSA audio source (mono input, card id 1) instead of OSS:
	
	ffmpeg -f alsa -ac 1 -i hw:1 -f video4linux2 -i /dev/video0 /tmp/out.mpg


Note that you must activate the right video source and channel before
launching ffmpeg with any TV viewer such as
E<lt>B<http://linux.bytesex.org/xawtv/>E<gt> by Gerd Knorr. You also
have to set the audio recording levels correctly with a
standard mixer.


=head2 X11 grabbing


Grab the X11 display with ffmpeg via

	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -video_size cif -framerate 25 -i :0.0 /tmp/out.mpg


0.0 is display.screen number of your X11 server, same as
the DISPLAY environment variable.

	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -video_size cif -framerate 25 -i :0.0+10,20 /tmp/out.mpg


0.0 is display.screen number of your X11 server, same as the DISPLAY environment
variable. 10 is the x-offset and 20 the y-offset for the grabbing.


=head2 Video and Audio file format conversion


Any supported file format and protocol can serve as input to ffmpeg:

Examples:

=over 4


=item *

You can use YUV files as input:

	
	ffmpeg -i /tmp/test%d.Y /tmp/out.mpg


It will use the files:
	
	/tmp/test0.Y, /tmp/test0.U, /tmp/test0.V,
	/tmp/test1.Y, /tmp/test1.U, /tmp/test1.V, etc...


The Y files use twice the resolution of the U and V files. They are
raw files, without header. They can be generated by all decent video
decoders. You must specify the size of the image with the B<-s> option
if ffmpeg cannot guess it.


=item *

You can input from a raw YUV420P file:

	
	ffmpeg -i /tmp/test.yuv /tmp/out.avi


test.yuv is a file containing raw YUV planar data. Each frame is composed
of the Y plane followed by the U and V planes at half vertical and
horizontal resolution.


=item *

You can output to a raw YUV420P file:

	
	ffmpeg -i mydivx.avi hugefile.yuv



=item *

You can set several input files and output files:

	
	ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -s 640x480 -i /tmp/a.yuv /tmp/a.mpg


Converts the audio file a.wav and the raw YUV video file a.yuv
to MPEG file a.mpg.


=item *

You can also do audio and video conversions at the same time:

	
	ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -ar 22050 /tmp/a.mp2


Converts a.wav to MPEG audio at 22050 Hz sample rate.


=item *

You can encode to several formats at the same time and define a
mapping from input stream to output streams:

	
	ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -map 0:a -b:a 64k /tmp/a.mp2 -map 0:a -b:a 128k /tmp/b.mp2


Converts a.wav to a.mp2 at 64 kbits and to b.mp2 at 128 kbits. '-map
file:index' specifies which input stream is used for each output
stream, in the order of the definition of output streams.


=item *

You can transcode decrypted VOBs:

	
	ffmpeg -i snatch_1.vob -f avi -c:v mpeg4 -b:v 800k -g 300 -bf 2 -c:a libmp3lame -b:a 128k snatch.avi


This is a typical DVD ripping example; the input is a VOB file, the
output an AVI file with MPEG-4 video and MP3 audio. Note that in this
command we use B-frames so the MPEG-4 stream is DivX5 compatible, and
GOP size is 300 which means one intra frame every 10 seconds for 29.97fps
input video. Furthermore, the audio stream is MP3-encoded so you need
to enable LAME support by passing C<--enable-libmp3lame> to configure.
The mapping is particularly useful for DVD transcoding
to get the desired audio language.

NOTE: To see the supported input formats, use C<ffmpeg -demuxers>.


=item *

You can extract images from a video, or create a video from many images:

For extracting images from a video:
	
	ffmpeg -i foo.avi -r 1 -s WxH -f image2 foo-%03d.jpeg


This will extract one video frame per second from the video and will
output them in files named F<foo-001.jpeg>, F<foo-002.jpeg>,
etc. Images will be rescaled to fit the new WxH values.

If you want to extract just a limited number of frames, you can use the
above command in combination with the C<-frames:v> or C<-t> option,
or in combination with -ss to start extracting from a certain point in time.

For creating a video from many images:
	
	ffmpeg -f image2 -framerate 12 -i foo-%03d.jpeg -s WxH foo.avi


The syntax C<foo-%03d.jpeg> specifies to use a decimal number
composed of three digits padded with zeroes to express the sequence
number. It is the same syntax supported by the C printf function, but
only formats accepting a normal integer are suitable.

When importing an image sequence, -i also supports expanding
shell-like wildcard patterns (globbing) internally, by selecting the
image2-specific C<-pattern_type glob> option.

For example, for creating a video from filenames matching the glob pattern
C<foo-*.jpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -f image2 -pattern_type glob -framerate 12 -i 'foo-*.jpeg' -s WxH foo.avi



=item *

You can put many streams of the same type in the output:

	
	ffmpeg -i test1.avi -i test2.avi -map 1:1 -map 1:0 -map 0:1 -map 0:0 -c copy -y test12.nut


The resulting output file F<test12.nut> will contain the first four streams
from the input files in reverse order.


=item *

To force CBR video output:
	
	ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -b 4000k -minrate 4000k -maxrate 4000k -bufsize 1835k out.m2v



=item *

The four options lmin, lmax, mblmin and mblmax use 'lambda' units,
but you may use the QP2LAMBDA constant to easily convert from 'q' units:
	
	ffmpeg -i src.ext -lmax 21*QP2LAMBDA dst.ext



=back



=head1 SYNTAX


This section documents the syntax and formats employed by the FFmpeg
libraries and tools.



=head2 Quoting and escaping


FFmpeg adopts the following quoting and escaping mechanism, unless
explicitly specified. The following rules are applied:


=over 4


=item *

B<'> and B<\> are special characters (respectively used for
quoting and escaping). In addition to them, there might be other
special characters depending on the specific syntax where the escaping
and quoting are employed.


=item *

A special character is escaped by prefixing it with a B<\>.


=item *

All characters enclosed between B<''> are included literally in the
parsed string. The quote character B<'> itself cannot be quoted,
so you may need to close the quote and escape it.


=item *

Leading and trailing whitespaces, unless escaped or quoted, are
removed from the parsed string.

=back


Note that you may need to add a second level of escaping when using
the command line or a script, which depends on the syntax of the
adopted shell language.

The function C<av_get_token> defined in
F<libavutil/avstring.h> can be used to parse a token quoted or
escaped according to the rules defined above.

The tool F<tools/ffescape> in the FFmpeg source tree can be used
to automatically quote or escape a string in a script.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Escape the string C<Crime d'Amour> containing the C<'> special
character:
	
	Crime d\'Amour



=item *

The string above contains a quote, so the C<'> needs to be escaped
when quoting it:
	
	'Crime d'\''Amour'



=item *

Include leading or trailing whitespaces using quoting:
	
	'  this string starts and ends with whitespaces  '



=item *

Escaping and quoting can be mixed together:
	
	' The string '\'string\'' is a string '



=item *

To include a literal B<\> you can use either escaping or quoting:
	
	'c:\foo' can be written as c:\\foo


=back




=head2 Date


The accepted syntax is:
	
	[(YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD)[T|t| ]]((HH:MM:SS[.m...]]])|(HHMMSS[.m...]]]))[Z]
	now


If the value is "now" it takes the current time.

Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
interpreted as UTC.
If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
year-month-day.



=head2 Time duration


There are two accepted syntaxes for expressing time duration.

	
	[-][<HH>:]<MM>:<SS>[.<m>...]


I<HH> expresses the number of hours, I<MM> the number of minutes
for a maximum of 2 digits, and I<SS> the number of seconds for a
maximum of 2 digits. The I<m> at the end expresses decimal value for
I<SS>.

I<or>

	
	[-]<S>+[.<m>...][s|ms|us]


I<S> expresses the number of seconds, with the optional decimal part
I<m>.  The optional literal suffixes B<s>, B<ms> or B<us>
indicate to interpret the value as seconds, milliseconds or microseconds,
respectively.

In both expressions, the optional B<-> indicates negative duration.


=head3 Examples


The following examples are all valid time duration:


=over 4


=item B<55>

55 seconds


=item B<0.2>

0.2 seconds


=item B<200ms>

200 milliseconds, that's 0.2s


=item B<200000us>

200000 microseconds, that's 0.2s


=item B<12:03:45>

12 hours, 03 minutes and 45 seconds


=item B<23.189>

23.189 seconds

=back




=head2 Video size

Specify the size of the sourced video, it may be a string of the form
I<width>xI<height>, or the name of a size abbreviation.

The following abbreviations are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<ntsc>

720x480

=item B<pal>

720x576

=item B<qntsc>

352x240

=item B<qpal>

352x288

=item B<sntsc>

640x480

=item B<spal>

768x576

=item B<film>

352x240

=item B<ntsc-film>

352x240

=item B<sqcif>

128x96

=item B<qcif>

176x144

=item B<cif>

352x288

=item B<4cif>

704x576

=item B<16cif>

1408x1152

=item B<qqvga>

160x120

=item B<qvga>

320x240

=item B<vga>

640x480

=item B<svga>

800x600

=item B<xga>

1024x768

=item B<uxga>

1600x1200

=item B<qxga>

2048x1536

=item B<sxga>

1280x1024

=item B<qsxga>

2560x2048

=item B<hsxga>

5120x4096

=item B<wvga>

852x480

=item B<wxga>

1366x768

=item B<wsxga>

1600x1024

=item B<wuxga>

1920x1200

=item B<woxga>

2560x1600

=item B<wqsxga>

3200x2048

=item B<wquxga>

3840x2400

=item B<whsxga>

6400x4096

=item B<whuxga>

7680x4800

=item B<cga>

320x200

=item B<ega>

640x350

=item B<hd480>

852x480

=item B<hd720>

1280x720

=item B<hd1080>

1920x1080

=item B<2k>

2048x1080

=item B<2kflat>

1998x1080

=item B<2kscope>

2048x858

=item B<4k>

4096x2160

=item B<4kflat>

3996x2160

=item B<4kscope>

4096x1716

=item B<nhd>

640x360

=item B<hqvga>

240x160

=item B<wqvga>

400x240

=item B<fwqvga>

432x240

=item B<hvga>

480x320

=item B<qhd>

960x540

=item B<2kdci>

2048x1080

=item B<4kdci>

4096x2160

=item B<uhd2160>

3840x2160

=item B<uhd4320>

7680x4320

=back




=head2 Video rate


Specify the frame rate of a video, expressed as the number of frames
generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
I<frame_rate_num>/I<frame_rate_den>, an integer number, a float
number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation.

The following abbreviations are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<ntsc>

30000/1001

=item B<pal>

25/1

=item B<qntsc>

30000/1001

=item B<qpal>

25/1

=item B<sntsc>

30000/1001

=item B<spal>

25/1

=item B<film>

24/1

=item B<ntsc-film>

24000/1001

=back




=head2 Ratio


A ratio can be expressed as an expression, or in the form
I<numerator>:I<denominator>.

Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
want to exclude those values.

The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.



=head2 Color


It can be the name of a color as defined below (case insensitive match) or a
C<[0x|#]RRGGBB[AA]> sequence, possibly followed by @ and a string
representing the alpha component.

The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
represents the opacity value (B<0x00> or B<0.0> means completely
transparent, B<0xff> or B<1.0> completely opaque). If the alpha
component is not specified then B<0xff> is assumed.

The string B<random> will result in a random color.

The following names of colors are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<AliceBlue>

0xF0F8FF

=item B<AntiqueWhite>

0xFAEBD7

=item B<Aqua>

0x00FFFF

=item B<Aquamarine>

0x7FFFD4

=item B<Azure>

0xF0FFFF

=item B<Beige>

0xF5F5DC

=item B<Bisque>

0xFFE4C4

=item B<Black>

0x000000

=item B<BlanchedAlmond>

0xFFEBCD

=item B<Blue>

0x0000FF

=item B<BlueViolet>

0x8A2BE2

=item B<Brown>

0xA52A2A

=item B<BurlyWood>

0xDEB887

=item B<CadetBlue>

0x5F9EA0

=item B<Chartreuse>

0x7FFF00

=item B<Chocolate>

0xD2691E

=item B<Coral>

0xFF7F50

=item B<CornflowerBlue>

0x6495ED

=item B<Cornsilk>

0xFFF8DC

=item B<Crimson>

0xDC143C

=item B<Cyan>

0x00FFFF

=item B<DarkBlue>

0x00008B

=item B<DarkCyan>

0x008B8B

=item B<DarkGoldenRod>

0xB8860B

=item B<DarkGray>

0xA9A9A9

=item B<DarkGreen>

0x006400

=item B<DarkKhaki>

0xBDB76B

=item B<DarkMagenta>

0x8B008B

=item B<DarkOliveGreen>

0x556B2F

=item B<Darkorange>

0xFF8C00

=item B<DarkOrchid>

0x9932CC

=item B<DarkRed>

0x8B0000

=item B<DarkSalmon>

0xE9967A

=item B<DarkSeaGreen>

0x8FBC8F

=item B<DarkSlateBlue>

0x483D8B

=item B<DarkSlateGray>

0x2F4F4F

=item B<DarkTurquoise>

0x00CED1

=item B<DarkViolet>

0x9400D3

=item B<DeepPink>

0xFF1493

=item B<DeepSkyBlue>

0x00BFFF

=item B<DimGray>

0x696969

=item B<DodgerBlue>

0x1E90FF

=item B<FireBrick>

0xB22222

=item B<FloralWhite>

0xFFFAF0

=item B<ForestGreen>

0x228B22

=item B<Fuchsia>

0xFF00FF

=item B<Gainsboro>

0xDCDCDC

=item B<GhostWhite>

0xF8F8FF

=item B<Gold>

0xFFD700

=item B<GoldenRod>

0xDAA520

=item B<Gray>

0x808080

=item B<Green>

0x008000

=item B<GreenYellow>

0xADFF2F

=item B<HoneyDew>

0xF0FFF0

=item B<HotPink>

0xFF69B4

=item B<IndianRed>

0xCD5C5C

=item B<Indigo>

0x4B0082

=item B<Ivory>

0xFFFFF0

=item B<Khaki>

0xF0E68C

=item B<Lavender>

0xE6E6FA

=item B<LavenderBlush>

0xFFF0F5

=item B<LawnGreen>

0x7CFC00

=item B<LemonChiffon>

0xFFFACD

=item B<LightBlue>

0xADD8E6

=item B<LightCoral>

0xF08080

=item B<LightCyan>

0xE0FFFF

=item B<LightGoldenRodYellow>

0xFAFAD2

=item B<LightGreen>

0x90EE90

=item B<LightGrey>

0xD3D3D3

=item B<LightPink>

0xFFB6C1

=item B<LightSalmon>

0xFFA07A

=item B<LightSeaGreen>

0x20B2AA

=item B<LightSkyBlue>

0x87CEFA

=item B<LightSlateGray>

0x778899

=item B<LightSteelBlue>

0xB0C4DE

=item B<LightYellow>

0xFFFFE0

=item B<Lime>

0x00FF00

=item B<LimeGreen>

0x32CD32

=item B<Linen>

0xFAF0E6

=item B<Magenta>

0xFF00FF

=item B<Maroon>

0x800000

=item B<MediumAquaMarine>

0x66CDAA

=item B<MediumBlue>

0x0000CD

=item B<MediumOrchid>

0xBA55D3

=item B<MediumPurple>

0x9370D8

=item B<MediumSeaGreen>

0x3CB371

=item B<MediumSlateBlue>

0x7B68EE

=item B<MediumSpringGreen>

0x00FA9A

=item B<MediumTurquoise>

0x48D1CC

=item B<MediumVioletRed>

0xC71585

=item B<MidnightBlue>

0x191970

=item B<MintCream>

0xF5FFFA

=item B<MistyRose>

0xFFE4E1

=item B<Moccasin>

0xFFE4B5

=item B<NavajoWhite>

0xFFDEAD

=item B<Navy>

0x000080

=item B<OldLace>

0xFDF5E6

=item B<Olive>

0x808000

=item B<OliveDrab>

0x6B8E23

=item B<Orange>

0xFFA500

=item B<OrangeRed>

0xFF4500

=item B<Orchid>

0xDA70D6

=item B<PaleGoldenRod>

0xEEE8AA

=item B<PaleGreen>

0x98FB98

=item B<PaleTurquoise>

0xAFEEEE

=item B<PaleVioletRed>

0xD87093

=item B<PapayaWhip>

0xFFEFD5

=item B<PeachPuff>

0xFFDAB9

=item B<Peru>

0xCD853F

=item B<Pink>

0xFFC0CB

=item B<Plum>

0xDDA0DD

=item B<PowderBlue>

0xB0E0E6

=item B<Purple>

0x800080

=item B<Red>

0xFF0000

=item B<RosyBrown>

0xBC8F8F

=item B<RoyalBlue>

0x4169E1

=item B<SaddleBrown>

0x8B4513

=item B<Salmon>

0xFA8072

=item B<SandyBrown>

0xF4A460

=item B<SeaGreen>

0x2E8B57

=item B<SeaShell>

0xFFF5EE

=item B<Sienna>

0xA0522D

=item B<Silver>

0xC0C0C0

=item B<SkyBlue>

0x87CEEB

=item B<SlateBlue>

0x6A5ACD

=item B<SlateGray>

0x708090

=item B<Snow>

0xFFFAFA

=item B<SpringGreen>

0x00FF7F

=item B<SteelBlue>

0x4682B4

=item B<Tan>

0xD2B48C

=item B<Teal>

0x008080

=item B<Thistle>

0xD8BFD8

=item B<Tomato>

0xFF6347

=item B<Turquoise>

0x40E0D0

=item B<Violet>

0xEE82EE

=item B<Wheat>

0xF5DEB3

=item B<White>

0xFFFFFF

=item B<WhiteSmoke>

0xF5F5F5

=item B<Yellow>

0xFFFF00

=item B<YellowGreen>

0x9ACD32

=back




=head2 Channel Layout


A channel layout specifies the spatial disposition of the channels in
a multi-channel audio stream. To specify a channel layout, FFmpeg
makes use of a special syntax.

Individual channels are identified by an id, as given by the table
below:

=over 4


=item B<FL>

front left

=item B<FR>

front right

=item B<FC>

front center

=item B<LFE>

low frequency

=item B<BL>

back left

=item B<BR>

back right

=item B<FLC>

front left-of-center

=item B<FRC>

front right-of-center

=item B<BC>

back center

=item B<SL>

side left

=item B<SR>

side right

=item B<TC>

top center

=item B<TFL>

top front left

=item B<TFC>

top front center

=item B<TFR>

top front right

=item B<TBL>

top back left

=item B<TBC>

top back center

=item B<TBR>

top back right

=item B<DL>

downmix left

=item B<DR>

downmix right

=item B<WL>

wide left

=item B<WR>

wide right

=item B<SDL>

surround direct left

=item B<SDR>

surround direct right

=item B<LFE2>

low frequency 2

=back


Standard channel layout compositions can be specified by using the
following identifiers:

=over 4


=item B<mono>

FC

=item B<stereo>

FL+FR

=item B<2.1>

FL+FR+LFE

=item B<3.0>

FL+FR+FC

=item B<3.0(back)>

FL+FR+BC

=item B<4.0>

FL+FR+FC+BC

=item B<quad>

FL+FR+BL+BR

=item B<quad(side)>

FL+FR+SL+SR

=item B<3.1>

FL+FR+FC+LFE

=item B<5.0>

FL+FR+FC+BL+BR

=item B<5.0(side)>

FL+FR+FC+SL+SR

=item B<4.1>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC

=item B<5.1>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR

=item B<5.1(side)>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+SL+SR

=item B<6.0>

FL+FR+FC+BC+SL+SR

=item B<6.0(front)>

FL+FR+FLC+FRC+SL+SR

=item B<3.1.2>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+TFL+TFR

=item B<hexagonal>

FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC

=item B<6.1>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC+SL+SR

=item B<6.1>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+BC

=item B<6.1(front)>

FL+FR+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR

=item B<7.0>

FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+SL+SR

=item B<7.0(front)>

FL+FR+FC+FLC+FRC+SL+SR

=item B<7.1>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR

=item B<7.1(wide)>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC

=item B<7.1(wide-side)>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR

=item B<5.1.2>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+TFL+TFR

=item B<octagonal>

FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC+SL+SR

=item B<cube>

FL+FR+BL+BR+TFL+TFR+TBL+TBR

=item B<5.1.4>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+TFL+TFR+TBL+TBR

=item B<7.1.2>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR+TFL+TFR

=item B<7.1.4>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR+TFL+TFR+TBL+TBR

=item B<7.2.3>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR+TFL+TFR+TBC+LFE2

=item B<9.1.4>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC+SL+SR+TFL+TFR+TBL+TBR

=item B<hexadecagonal>

FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC+SL+SR+WL+WR+TBL+TBR+TBC+TFC+TFL+TFR

=item B<downmix>

DL+DR

=item B<22.2>

FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC+BC+SL+SR+TC+TFL+TFC+TFR+TBL+TBC+TBR+LFE2+TSL+TSR+BFC+BFL+BFR

=back


A custom channel layout can be specified as a sequence of terms, separated by '+'.
Each term can be:

=over 4


=item *

the name of a single channel (e.g. B<FL>, B<FR>, B<FC>, B<LFE>, etc.),
each optionally containing a custom name after a '@', (e.g. B<FL@Left>,
B<FR@Right>, B<FC@Center>, B<LFE@Low_Frequency>, etc.)

=back


A standard channel layout can be specified by the following:

=over 4


=item *

the name of a single channel (e.g. B<FL>, B<FR>, B<FC>, B<LFE>, etc.)


=item *

the name of a standard channel layout (e.g. B<mono>,
B<stereo>, B<4.0>, B<quad>, B<5.0>, etc.)


=item *

a number of channels, in decimal, followed by 'c', yielding the default channel
layout for that number of channels (see the function
C<av_channel_layout_default>). Note that not all channel counts have a
default layout.


=item *

a number of channels, in decimal, followed by 'C', yielding an unknown channel
layout with the specified number of channels. Note that not all channel layout
specification strings support unknown channel layouts.


=item *

a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
C<AV_CH_*> macros in F<libavutil/channel_layout.h>.

=back


Before libavutil version 53 the trailing character "c" to specify a number of
channels was optional, but now it is required, while a channel layout mask can
also be specified as a decimal number (if and only if not followed by "c" or "C").

See also the function C<av_channel_layout_from_string> defined in
F<libavutil/channel_layout.h>.


=head1 EXPRESSION EVALUATION


When evaluating an arithmetic expression, FFmpeg uses an internal
formula evaluator, implemented through the F<libavutil/eval.h>
interface.

An expression may contain unary, binary operators, constants, and
functions.

Two expressions I<expr1> and I<expr2> can be combined to form
another expression "I<expr1>;I<expr2>".
I<expr1> and I<expr2> are evaluated in turn, and the new
expression evaluates to the value of I<expr2>.

The following binary operators are available: C<+>, C<->,
C<*>, C</>, C<^>.

The following unary operators are available: C<+>, C<->.

Some internal variables can be used to store and load intermediary
results. They can be accessed using the C<ld> and C<st>
functions with an index argument varying from 0 to 9 to specify which
internal variable to access.

The following functions are available:

=over 4


=item B<abs(x)>

Compute absolute value of I<x>.


=item B<acos(x)>

Compute arccosine of I<x>.


=item B<asin(x)>

Compute arcsine of I<x>.


=item B<atan(x)>

Compute arctangent of I<x>.


=item B<atan2(y, x)>

Compute principal value of the arc tangent of I<y>/I<x>.


=item B<between(x, min, max)>

Return 1 if I<x> is greater than or equal to I<min> and lesser than or
equal to I<max>, 0 otherwise.


=item B<bitand(x, y)>


=item B<bitor(x, y)>

Compute bitwise and/or operation on I<x> and I<y>.

The results of the evaluation of I<x> and I<y> are converted to
integers before executing the bitwise operation.

Note that both the conversion to integer and the conversion back to
floating point can lose precision. Beware of unexpected results for
large numbers (usually 2^53 and larger).


=item B<ceil(expr)>

Round the value of expression I<expr> upwards to the nearest
integer. For example, "ceil(1.5)" is "2.0".


=item B<clip(x, min, max)>

Return the value of I<x> clipped between I<min> and I<max>.


=item B<cos(x)>

Compute cosine of I<x>.


=item B<cosh(x)>

Compute hyperbolic cosine of I<x>.


=item B<eq(x, y)>

Return 1 if I<x> and I<y> are equivalent, 0 otherwise.


=item B<exp(x)>

Compute exponential of I<x> (with base C<e>, the Euler's number).


=item B<floor(expr)>

Round the value of expression I<expr> downwards to the nearest
integer. For example, "floor(-1.5)" is "-2.0".


=item B<gauss(x)>

Compute Gauss function of I<x>, corresponding to
C<exp(-x*x/2) / sqrt(2*PI)>.


=item B<gcd(x, y)>

Return the greatest common divisor of I<x> and I<y>. If both I<x> and
I<y> are 0 or either or both are less than zero then behavior is undefined.


=item B<gt(x, y)>

Return 1 if I<x> is greater than I<y>, 0 otherwise.


=item B<gte(x, y)>

Return 1 if I<x> is greater than or equal to I<y>, 0 otherwise.


=item B<hypot(x, y)>

This function is similar to the C function with the same name; it returns
"sqrt(I<x>*I<x> + I<y>*I<y>)", the length of the hypotenuse of a
right triangle with sides of length I<x> and I<y>, or the distance of the
point (I<x>, I<y>) from the origin.


=item B<if(x, y)>

Evaluate I<x>, and if the result is non-zero return the result of
the evaluation of I<y>, return 0 otherwise.


=item B<if(x, y, z)>

Evaluate I<x>, and if the result is non-zero return the evaluation
result of I<y>, otherwise the evaluation result of I<z>.


=item B<ifnot(x, y)>

Evaluate I<x>, and if the result is zero return the result of the
evaluation of I<y>, return 0 otherwise.


=item B<ifnot(x, y, z)>

Evaluate I<x>, and if the result is zero return the evaluation
result of I<y>, otherwise the evaluation result of I<z>.


=item B<isinf(x)>

Return 1.0 if I<x> is +/-INFINITY, 0.0 otherwise.


=item B<isnan(x)>

Return 1.0 if I<x> is NAN, 0.0 otherwise.


=item B<ld(idx)>

Load the value of the internal variable with index I<idx>, which was
previously stored with st(I<idx>, I<expr>).
The function returns the loaded value.


=item B<lerp(x, y, z)>

Return linear interpolation between I<x> and I<y> by amount of I<z>.


=item B<log(x)>

Compute natural logarithm of I<x>.


=item B<lt(x, y)>

Return 1 if I<x> is lesser than I<y>, 0 otherwise.


=item B<lte(x, y)>

Return 1 if I<x> is lesser than or equal to I<y>, 0 otherwise.


=item B<max(x, y)>

Return the maximum between I<x> and I<y>.


=item B<min(x, y)>

Return the minimum between I<x> and I<y>.


=item B<mod(x, y)>

Compute the remainder of division of I<x> by I<y>.


=item B<not(expr)>

Return 1.0 if I<expr> is zero, 0.0 otherwise.


=item B<pow(x, y)>

Compute the power of I<x> elevated I<y>, it is equivalent to
"(I<x>)^(I<y>)".


=item B<print(t)>


=item B<print(t, l)>

Print the value of expression I<t> with loglevel I<l>. If I<l> is not
specified then a default log level is used.
Return the value of the expression printed.


=item B<random(idx)>

Return a pseudo random value between 0.0 and 1.0. I<idx> is the
index of the internal variable used to save the seed/state, which can be
previously stored with C<st(idx)>.

To initialize the seed, you need to store the seed value as a 64-bit
unsigned integer in the internal variable with index I<idx>.

For example, to store the seed with value C<42> in the internal
variable with index C<0> and print a few random values:
	
	st(0,42); print(random(0)); print(random(0)); print(random(0))



=item B<randomi(idx, min, max)>

Return a pseudo random value in the interval between I<min> and
I<max>. I<idx> is the index of the internal variable which will be used to
save the seed/state, which can be previously stored with C<st(idx)>.

To initialize the seed, you need to store the seed value as a 64-bit
unsigned integer in the internal variable with index I<idx>.


=item B<root(expr, max)>

Find an input value for which the function represented by I<expr>
with argument I<ld(0)> is 0 in the interval 0..I<max>.

The expression in I<expr> must denote a continuous function or the
result is undefined.

I<ld(0)> is used to represent the function input value, which means that the
given expression will be evaluated multiple times with various input values that
the expression can access through C<ld(0)>. When the expression evaluates to
0 then the corresponding input value will be returned.


=item B<round(expr)>

Round the value of expression I<expr> to the nearest integer. For example,
"round(1.5)" is "2.0".


=item B<sgn(x)>

Compute sign of I<x>.


=item B<sin(x)>

Compute sine of I<x>.


=item B<sinh(x)>

Compute hyperbolic sine of I<x>.


=item B<sqrt(expr)>

Compute the square root of I<expr>. This is equivalent to
"(I<expr>)^.5".


=item B<squish(x)>

Compute expression C<1/(1 + exp(4*x))>.


=item B<st(idx, expr)>

Store the value of the expression I<expr> in an internal
variable. I<idx> specifies the index of the variable where to store
the value, and it is a value ranging from 0 to 9. The function returns
the value stored in the internal variable.

The stored value can be retrieved with C<ld(var)>.

Note: variables are currently not shared between expressions.


=item B<tan(x)>

Compute tangent of I<x>.


=item B<tanh(x)>

Compute hyperbolic tangent of I<x>.


=item B<taylor(expr, x)>


=item B<taylor(expr, x, idx)>

Evaluate a Taylor series at I<x>, given an expression representing
the C<ld(idx)>-th derivative of a function at 0.

When the series does not converge the result is undefined.

I<ld(idx)> is used to represent the derivative order in I<expr>,
which means that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times
with various input values that the expression can access through
C<ld(idx)>. If I<idx> is not specified then 0 is assumed.

Note, when you have the derivatives at y instead of 0,
C<taylor(expr, x-y)> can be used.


=item B<time(0)>

Return the current (wallclock) time in seconds.


=item B<trunc(expr)>

Round the value of expression I<expr> towards zero to the nearest
integer. For example, "trunc(-1.5)" is "-1.0".


=item B<while(cond, expr)>

Evaluate expression I<expr> while the expression I<cond> is
non-zero, and returns the value of the last I<expr> evaluation, or
NAN if I<cond> was always false.

=back


The following constants are available:

=over 4


=item B<PI>

area of the unit disc, approximately 3.14

=item B<E>

exp(1) (Euler's number), approximately 2.718

=item B<PHI>

golden ratio (1+sqrt(5))/2, approximately 1.618

=back


Assuming that an expression is considered "true" if it has a non-zero
value, note that:

C<*> works like AND

C<+> works like OR

For example the construct:
	
	if (A AND B) then C

is equivalent to:
	
	if(A*B, C)


In your C code, you can extend the list of unary and binary functions,
and define recognized constants, so that they are available for your
expressions.

The evaluator also recognizes the International System unit prefixes.
If 'i' is appended after the prefix, binary prefixes are used, which
are based on powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000.
The 'B' postfix multiplies the value by 8, and can be appended after a
unit prefix or used alone. This allows using for example 'KB', 'MiB',
'G' and 'B' as number postfix.

The list of available International System prefixes follows, with
indication of the corresponding powers of 10 and of 2.

=over 4


=item B<y>

10^-24 / 2^-80

=item B<z>

10^-21 / 2^-70

=item B<a>

10^-18 / 2^-60

=item B<f>

10^-15 / 2^-50

=item B<p>

10^-12 / 2^-40

=item B<n>

10^-9 / 2^-30

=item B<u>

10^-6 / 2^-20

=item B<m>

10^-3 / 2^-10

=item B<c>

10^-2

=item B<d>

10^-1

=item B<h>

10^2

=item B<k>

10^3 / 2^10

=item B<K>

10^3 / 2^10

=item B<M>

10^6 / 2^20

=item B<G>

10^9 / 2^30

=item B<T>

10^12 / 2^40

=item B<P>

10^15 / 2^50

=item B<E>

10^18 / 2^60

=item B<Z>

10^21 / 2^70

=item B<Y>

10^24 / 2^80

=back




=head1 CODEC OPTIONS


libavcodec provides some generic global options, which can be set on
all the encoders and decoders. In addition, each codec may support
so-called private options, which are specific for a given codec.

Sometimes, a global option may only affect a specific kind of codec,
and may be nonsensical or ignored by another, so you need to be aware
of the meaning of the specified options. Also some options are
meant only for decoding or encoding.

Options may be set by specifying -I<option> I<value> in the
FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
C<AVCodecContext> options or using the F<libavutil/opt.h> API
for programmatic use.

The list of supported options follow:


=over 4


=item B<b> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>

Set bitrate in bits/s. Default value is 200K.


=item B<ab> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio>B<)>

Set audio bitrate (in bits/s). Default value is 128K.


=item B<bt> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set video bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). In 1-pass mode, bitrate
tolerance specifies how far ratecontrol is willing to deviate from the
target average bitrate value. This is not related to min/max
bitrate. Lowering tolerance too much has an adverse effect on quality.


=item B<flags> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles>B<)>

Set generic flags.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<mv4>

Use four motion vector by macroblock (mpeg4).

=item B<qpel>

Use 1/4 pel motion compensation.

=item B<loop>

Use loop filter.

=item B<qscale>

Use fixed qscale.

=item B<pass1>

Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.

=item B<pass2>

Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.

=item B<gray>

Only decode/encode grayscale.

=item B<psnr>

Set error[?] variables during encoding.

=item B<truncated>

Input bitstream might be randomly truncated.

=item B<drop_changed>

Don't output frames whose parameters differ from first decoded frame in stream.
Error AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED is returned when a frame is dropped.


=item B<ildct>

Use interlaced DCT.

=item B<low_delay>

Force low delay.

=item B<global_header>

Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.

=item B<bitexact>

Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data. (except (I)DCT).
This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.

=item B<aic>

Apply H263 advanced intra coding / mpeg4 ac prediction.

=item B<ilme>

Apply interlaced motion estimation.

=item B<cgop>

Use closed gop.

=item B<output_corrupt>

Output even potentially corrupted frames.

=back



=item B<time_base> I<rational number>

Set codec time base.

It is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms of which
frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content, timebase
should be C<1 / frame_rate> and timestamp increments should be
identically 1.


=item B<g> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set the group of picture (GOP) size. Default value is 12.


=item B<ar> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio>B<)>

Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).


=item B<ac> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio>B<)>

Set number of audio channels.


=item B<cutoff> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio>B<)>

Set cutoff bandwidth. (Supported only by selected encoders, see
their respective documentation sections.)


=item B<frame_size> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio>B<)>

Set audio frame size.

Each submitted frame except the last must contain exactly frame_size
samples per channel. May be 0 when the codec has
CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, in that case the frame size is not
restricted. It is set by some decoders to indicate constant frame
size.


=item B<frame_number> I<integer>

Set the frame number.


=item B<delay> I<integer>



=item B<qcomp> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set video quantizer scale compression (VBR). It is used as a constant
in the ratecontrol equation. Recommended range for default rc_eq:
0.0-1.0.


=item B<qblur> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set video quantizer scale blur (VBR).


=item B<qmin> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set min video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
69, default value is 2.


=item B<qmax> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set max video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
1024, default value is 31.


=item B<qdiff> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set max difference between the quantizer scale (VBR).


=item B<bf> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set max number of B frames between non-B-frames.

Must be an integer between -1 and 16. 0 means that B-frames are
disabled. If a value of -1 is used, it will choose an automatic value
depending on the encoder.

Default value is 0.


=item B<b_qfactor> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set qp factor between P and B frames.


=item B<codec_tag> I<integer>


=item B<bug> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>

Workaround not auto detected encoder bugs.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<autodetect>



=item B<xvid_ilace>

Xvid interlacing bug (autodetected if fourcc==XVIX)

=item B<ump4>

(autodetected if fourcc==UMP4)

=item B<no_padding>

padding bug (autodetected)

=item B<amv>



=item B<qpel_chroma>



=item B<std_qpel>

old standard qpel (autodetected per fourcc/version)

=item B<qpel_chroma2>



=item B<direct_blocksize>

direct-qpel-blocksize bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)

=item B<edge>

edge padding bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)

=item B<hpel_chroma>



=item B<dc_clip>



=item B<ms>

Workaround various bugs in microsoft broken decoders.

=item B<trunc>

trancated frames

=back



=item B<strict> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio,video>B<)>

Specify how strictly to follow the standards.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<very>

strictly conform to an older more strict version of the spec or reference software

=item B<strict>

strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences

=item B<normal>



=item B<unofficial>

allow unofficial extensions

=item B<experimental>

allow non standardized experimental things, experimental
(unfinished/work in progress/not well tested) decoders and encoders.
Note: experimental decoders can pose a security risk, do not use this for
decoding untrusted input.

=back



=item B<b_qoffset> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set QP offset between P and B frames.


=item B<err_detect> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding,audio,video>B<)>

Set error detection flags.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<crccheck>

verify embedded CRCs

=item B<bitstream>

detect bitstream specification deviations

=item B<buffer>

detect improper bitstream length

=item B<explode>

abort decoding on minor error detection

=item B<ignore_err>

ignore decoding errors, and continue decoding.
This is useful if you want to analyze the content of a video and thus want
everything to be decoded no matter what. This option will not result in a video
that is pleasing to watch in case of errors.

=item B<careful>

consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the wild as errors

=item B<compliant>

consider all spec non compliancies as errors

=item B<aggressive>

consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error

=back



=item B<has_b_frames> I<integer>



=item B<block_align> I<integer>



=item B<rc_override_count> I<integer>



=item B<maxrate> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>

Set max bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Requires bufsize to be set.


=item B<minrate> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>

Set min bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Most useful in setting up a CBR
encode. It is of little use elsewise.


=item B<bufsize> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>

Set ratecontrol buffer size (in bits).


=item B<i_qfactor> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set QP factor between P and I frames.


=item B<i_qoffset> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set QP offset between P and I frames.


=item B<dct> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set DCT algorithm.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

autoselect a good one (default)

=item B<fastint>

fast integer

=item B<int>

accurate integer

=item B<mmx>



=item B<altivec>



=item B<faan>

floating point AAN DCT

=back



=item B<lumi_mask> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Compress bright areas stronger than medium ones.


=item B<tcplx_mask> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set temporal complexity masking.


=item B<scplx_mask> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set spatial complexity masking.


=item B<p_mask> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set inter masking.


=item B<dark_mask> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Compress dark areas stronger than medium ones.


=item B<idct> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Select IDCT implementation.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<auto>



=item B<int>



=item B<simple>



=item B<simplemmx>



=item B<simpleauto>

Automatically pick a IDCT compatible with the simple one


=item B<arm>



=item B<altivec>



=item B<sh4>



=item B<simplearm>



=item B<simplearmv5te>



=item B<simplearmv6>



=item B<simpleneon>



=item B<xvid>



=item B<faani>

floating point AAN IDCT

=back



=item B<slice_count> I<integer>



=item B<ec> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>

Set error concealment strategy.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<guess_mvs>

iterative motion vector (MV) search (slow)

=item B<deblock>

use strong deblock filter for damaged MBs

=item B<favor_inter>

favor predicting from the previous frame instead of the current

=back



=item B<bits_per_coded_sample> I<integer>



=item B<aspect> I<rational number> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set sample aspect ratio.


=item B<sar> I<rational number> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set sample aspect ratio. Alias to I<aspect>.


=item B<debug> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles>B<)>

Print specific debug info.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<pict>

picture info

=item B<rc>

rate control

=item B<bitstream>



=item B<mb_type>

macroblock (MB) type

=item B<qp>

per-block quantization parameter (QP)

=item B<dct_coeff>



=item B<green_metadata>

display complexity metadata for the upcoming frame, GoP or for a given duration.


=item B<skip>



=item B<startcode>



=item B<er>

error recognition

=item B<mmco>

memory management control operations (H.264)

=item B<bugs>



=item B<buffers>

picture buffer allocations

=item B<thread_ops>

threading operations

=item B<nomc>

skip motion compensation

=back



=item B<cmp> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set full pel me compare function.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<sad>

sum of absolute differences, fast (default)

=item B<sse>

sum of squared errors

=item B<satd>

sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences

=item B<dct>

sum of absolute DCT transformed differences

=item B<psnr>

sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)

=item B<bit>

number of bits needed for the block

=item B<rd>

rate distortion optimal, slow

=item B<zero>

0

=item B<vsad>

sum of absolute vertical differences

=item B<vsse>

sum of squared vertical differences

=item B<nsse>

noise preserving sum of squared differences

=item B<w53>

5/3 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<w97>

9/7 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<dctmax>



=item B<chroma>



=back



=item B<subcmp> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set sub pel me compare function.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<sad>

sum of absolute differences, fast (default)

=item B<sse>

sum of squared errors

=item B<satd>

sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences

=item B<dct>

sum of absolute DCT transformed differences

=item B<psnr>

sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)

=item B<bit>

number of bits needed for the block

=item B<rd>

rate distortion optimal, slow

=item B<zero>

0

=item B<vsad>

sum of absolute vertical differences

=item B<vsse>

sum of squared vertical differences

=item B<nsse>

noise preserving sum of squared differences

=item B<w53>

5/3 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<w97>

9/7 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<dctmax>



=item B<chroma>



=back



=item B<mbcmp> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set macroblock compare function.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<sad>

sum of absolute differences, fast (default)

=item B<sse>

sum of squared errors

=item B<satd>

sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences

=item B<dct>

sum of absolute DCT transformed differences

=item B<psnr>

sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)

=item B<bit>

number of bits needed for the block

=item B<rd>

rate distortion optimal, slow

=item B<zero>

0

=item B<vsad>

sum of absolute vertical differences

=item B<vsse>

sum of squared vertical differences

=item B<nsse>

noise preserving sum of squared differences

=item B<w53>

5/3 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<w97>

9/7 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<dctmax>



=item B<chroma>



=back



=item B<ildctcmp> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set interlaced dct compare function.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<sad>

sum of absolute differences, fast (default)

=item B<sse>

sum of squared errors

=item B<satd>

sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences

=item B<dct>

sum of absolute DCT transformed differences

=item B<psnr>

sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)

=item B<bit>

number of bits needed for the block

=item B<rd>

rate distortion optimal, slow

=item B<zero>

0

=item B<vsad>

sum of absolute vertical differences

=item B<vsse>

sum of squared vertical differences

=item B<nsse>

noise preserving sum of squared differences

=item B<w53>

5/3 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<w97>

9/7 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<dctmax>



=item B<chroma>



=back



=item B<dia_size> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set diamond type & size for motion estimation.

=over 4


=item B<(1024, INT_MAX)>

full motion estimation(slowest)

=item B<(768, 1024]>

umh motion estimation

=item B<(512, 768]>

hex motion estimation

=item B<(256, 512]>

l2s diamond motion estimation

=item B<[2,256]>

var diamond motion estimation

=item B<(-1,  2)>

small diamond motion estimation

=item B<-1>

funny diamond motion estimation

=item B<(INT_MIN, -1)>

sab diamond motion estimation

=back



=item B<last_pred> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set amount of motion predictors from the previous frame.


=item B<precmp> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set pre motion estimation compare function.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<sad>

sum of absolute differences, fast (default)

=item B<sse>

sum of squared errors

=item B<satd>

sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences

=item B<dct>

sum of absolute DCT transformed differences

=item B<psnr>

sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)

=item B<bit>

number of bits needed for the block

=item B<rd>

rate distortion optimal, slow

=item B<zero>

0

=item B<vsad>

sum of absolute vertical differences

=item B<vsse>

sum of squared vertical differences

=item B<nsse>

noise preserving sum of squared differences

=item B<w53>

5/3 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<w97>

9/7 wavelet, only used in snow

=item B<dctmax>



=item B<chroma>



=back



=item B<pre_dia_size> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set diamond type & size for motion estimation pre-pass.


=item B<subq> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set sub pel motion estimation quality.


=item B<me_range> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set limit motion vectors range (1023 for DivX player).


=item B<global_quality> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>



=item B<slice_flags> I<integer>



=item B<mbd> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set macroblock decision algorithm (high quality mode).

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<simple>

use mbcmp (default)

=item B<bits>

use fewest bits

=item B<rd>

use best rate distortion

=back



=item B<rc_init_occupancy> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before
decoding starts.


=item B<flags2> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles>B<)>


Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<fast>

Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.

=item B<noout>

Skip bitstream encoding.

=item B<ignorecrop>

Ignore cropping information from sps.

=item B<local_header>

Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.

=item B<chunks>

Frame data might be split into multiple chunks.

=item B<showall>

Show all frames before the first keyframe.

=item B<export_mvs>

Export motion vectors into frame side-data (see C<AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS>)
for codecs that support it. See also F<doc/examples/export_mvs.c>.

=item B<skip_manual>

Do not skip samples and export skip information as frame side data.

=item B<ass_ro_flush_noop>

Do not reset ASS ReadOrder field on flush.

=item B<icc_profiles>

Generate/parse embedded ICC profiles from/to colorimetry tags.

=back



=item B<export_side_data> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles>B<)>


Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<mvs>

Export motion vectors into frame side-data (see C<AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS>)
for codecs that support it. See also F<doc/examples/export_mvs.c>.

=item B<prft>

Export encoder Producer Reference Time into packet side-data (see C<AV_PKT_DATA_PRFT>)
for codecs that support it.

=item B<venc_params>

Export video encoding parameters through frame side data (see C<AV_FRAME_DATA_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS>)
for codecs that support it. At present, those are H.264 and VP9.

=item B<film_grain>

Export film grain parameters through frame side data (see C<AV_FRAME_DATA_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS>).
Supported at present by AV1 decoders.

=back



=item B<threads> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Set the number of threads to be used, in case the selected codec
implementation supports multi-threading.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<auto, 0>

automatically select the number of threads to set

=back


Default value is B<auto>.


=item B<dc> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set intra_dc_precision.


=item B<nssew> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set nsse weight.


=item B<skip_top> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>

Set number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.


=item B<skip_bottom> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>

Set number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.


=item B<profile> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>


Set encoder codec profile. Default value is B<unknown>. Encoder specific
profiles are documented in the relevant encoder documentation.


=item B<level> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>


Set the encoder level. This level depends on the specific codec, and
might correspond to the profile level. It is set by default to
B<unknown>.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=back



=item B<lowres> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding,audio,video>B<)>

Decode at 1= 1/2, 2=1/4, 3=1/8 resolutions.


=item B<mblmin> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set min macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).


=item B<mblmax> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set max macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).


=item B<skip_loop_filter> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>


=item B<skip_idct>        I<integer> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>


=item B<skip_frame>       I<integer> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>


Make decoder discard processing depending on the frame type selected
by the option value.

B<skip_loop_filter> skips frame loop filtering, B<skip_idct>
skips frame IDCT/dequantization, B<skip_frame> skips decoding.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Discard no frame.


=item B<default>

Discard useless frames like 0-sized frames.


=item B<noref>

Discard all non-reference frames.


=item B<bidir>

Discard all bidirectional frames.


=item B<nokey>

Discard all frames excepts keyframes.


=item B<nointra>

Discard all frames except I frames.


=item B<all>

Discard all frames.

=back


Default value is B<default>.


=item B<bidir_refine> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Refine the two motion vectors used in bidirectional macroblocks.


=item B<keyint_min> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set minimum interval between IDR-frames.


=item B<refs> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Set reference frames to consider for motion compensation.


=item B<trellis> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>

Set rate-distortion optimal quantization.


=item B<mv0_threshold> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>


=item B<compression_level> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio,video>B<)>


=item B<bits_per_raw_sample> I<integer>


=item B<channel_layout> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,audio>B<)>

See B<the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the required syntax.


=item B<rc_max_vbv_use> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>


=item B<rc_min_vbv_use> I<float> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>



=item B<color_primaries> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<bt709>

BT.709

=item B<bt470m>

BT.470 M

=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470 BG

=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE 170 M

=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE 240 M

=item B<film>

Film

=item B<bt2020>

BT.2020

=item B<smpte428>


=item B<smpte428_1>

SMPTE ST 428-1

=item B<smpte431>

SMPTE 431-2

=item B<smpte432>

SMPTE 432-1

=item B<jedec-p22>

JEDEC P22

=back



=item B<color_trc> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<bt709>

BT.709

=item B<gamma22>

BT.470 M

=item B<gamma28>

BT.470 BG

=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE 170 M

=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE 240 M

=item B<linear>

Linear

=item B<log>


=item B<log100>

Log

=item B<log_sqrt>


=item B<log316>

Log square root

=item B<iec61966_2_4>


=item B<iec61966-2-4>

IEC 61966-2-4

=item B<bt1361>


=item B<bt1361e>

BT.1361

=item B<iec61966_2_1>


=item B<iec61966-2-1>

IEC 61966-2-1

=item B<bt2020_10>


=item B<bt2020_10bit>

BT.2020 - 10 bit

=item B<bt2020_12>


=item B<bt2020_12bit>

BT.2020 - 12 bit

=item B<smpte2084>

SMPTE ST 2084

=item B<smpte428>


=item B<smpte428_1>

SMPTE ST 428-1

=item B<arib-std-b67>

ARIB STD-B67

=back



=item B<colorspace> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<rgb>

RGB

=item B<bt709>

BT.709

=item B<fcc>

FCC

=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470 BG

=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE 170 M

=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE 240 M

=item B<ycocg>

YCOCG

=item B<bt2020nc>


=item B<bt2020_ncl>

BT.2020 NCL

=item B<bt2020c>


=item B<bt2020_cl>

BT.2020 CL

=item B<smpte2085>

SMPTE 2085

=item B<chroma-derived-nc>

Chroma-derived NCL

=item B<chroma-derived-c>

Chroma-derived CL

=item B<ictcp>

ICtCp

=back



=item B<color_range> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

If used as input parameter, it serves as a hint to the decoder, which
color_range the input has.
Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<tv>


=item B<mpeg>


=item B<limited>

MPEG (219*2^(n-8))

=item B<pc>


=item B<jpeg>


=item B<full>

JPEG (2^n-1)

=back



=item B<chroma_sample_location> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<left>



=item B<center>



=item B<topleft>



=item B<top>



=item B<bottomleft>



=item B<bottom>



=back



=item B<log_level_offset> I<integer>

Set the log level offset.


=item B<slices> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,video>B<)>

Number of slices, used in parallelized encoding.


=item B<thread_type> I<flags> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Select which multithreading methods to use.

Use of B<frame> will increase decoding delay by one frame per
thread, so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use
it.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<slice>

Decode more than one part of a single frame at once.

Multithreading using slices works only when the video was encoded with
slices.


=item B<frame>

Decode more than one frame at once.

=back


Default value is B<slice+frame>.


=item B<audio_service_type> I<integer> B<(>I<encoding,audio>B<)>

Set audio service type.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<ma>

Main Audio Service

=item B<ef>

Effects

=item B<vi>

Visually Impaired

=item B<hi>

Hearing Impaired

=item B<di>

Dialogue

=item B<co>

Commentary

=item B<em>

Emergency

=item B<vo>

Voice Over

=item B<ka>

Karaoke

=back



=item B<request_sample_fmt> I<sample_fmt> B<(>I<decoding,audio>B<)>

Set sample format audio decoders should prefer. Default value is
C<none>.


=item B<pkt_timebase> I<rational number>



=item B<sub_charenc> I<encoding> B<(>I<decoding,subtitles>B<)>

Set the input subtitles character encoding.


=item B<field_order>  I<field_order> B<(>I<video>B<)>

Set/override the field order of the video.
Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<progressive>

Progressive video

=item B<tt>

Interlaced video, top field coded and displayed first

=item B<bb>

Interlaced video, bottom field coded and displayed first

=item B<tb>

Interlaced video, top coded first, bottom displayed first

=item B<bt>

Interlaced video, bottom coded first, top displayed first

=back



=item B<skip_alpha> I<bool> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>

Set to 1 to disable processing alpha (transparency). This works like the
B<gray> flag in the B<flags> option which skips chroma information
instead of alpha. Default is 0.


=item B<codec_whitelist> I<list> B<(>I<input>B<)>

"," separated list of allowed decoders. By default all are allowed.


=item B<dump_separator> I<string> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
Stream parameters.
For example, to separate the fields with newlines and indentation:
	
	ffprobe -dump_separator "
	                          "  -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg



=item B<max_pixels> I<integer> B<(>I<decoding/encoding,video>B<)>

Maximum number of pixels per image. This value can be used to avoid out of
memory failures due to large images.


=item B<apply_cropping> I<bool> B<(>I<decoding,video>B<)>

Enable cropping if cropping parameters are multiples of the required
alignment for the left and top parameters. If the alignment is not met the
cropping will be partially applied to maintain alignment.
Default is 1 (enabled).
Note: The required alignment depends on if C<AV_CODEC_FLAG_UNALIGNED> is set and the
CPU. C<AV_CODEC_FLAG_UNALIGNED> cannot be changed from the command line. Also hardware
decoders will not apply left/top Cropping.



=back




=head1 DECODERS


Decoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the decoding of
multimedia streams.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native decoders
are enabled by default. Decoders requiring an external library must be enabled
manually via the corresponding C<--enable-lib> option. You can list all
available decoders using the configure option C<--list-decoders>.

You can disable all the decoders with the configure option
C<--disable-decoders> and selectively enable / disable single decoders
with the options C<--enable-decoder=I<DECODER>> /
C<--disable-decoder=I<DECODER>>.

The option C<-decoders> of the ff* tools will display the list of
enabled decoders.



=head1 VIDEO DECODERS


A description of some of the currently available video decoders
follows.


=head2 av1


AOMedia Video 1 (AV1) decoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<operating_point>

Select an operating point of a scalable AV1 bitstream (0 - 31). Default is 0.


=back



=head2 hevc

HEVC (AKA ITU-T H.265 or ISO/IEC 23008-2) decoder.

The decoder supports MV-HEVC multiview streams with at most two views. Views to
be output are selected by supplying a list of view IDs to the decoder (the
B<view_ids> option). This option may be set either statically before
decoder init, or from the C<get_format()> callback - useful for the case
when the view count or IDs change dynamically during decoding.

Only the base layer is decoded by default.

Note that if you are using the C<ffmpeg> CLI tool, you should be using view
specifiers as documented in its manual, rather than the options documented here.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<view_ids (MV-HEVC)>

Specify a list of view IDs that should be output. This option can also be set to
a single '-1', which will cause all views defined in the VPS to be decoded and
output.


=item B<view_ids_available (MV-HEVC)>

This option may be read by the caller to retrieve an array of view IDs available
in the active VPS. The array is empty for single-layer video.

The value of this option is guaranteed to be accurate when read from the
C<get_format()> callback. It may also be set at other times (e.g. after
opening the decoder), but the value is informational only and may be incorrect
(e.g. when the stream contains multiple distinct VPS NALUs).


=item B<view_pos_available (MV-HEVC)>

This option may be read by the caller to retrieve an array of view positions
(left, right, or unspecified) available in the active VPS, as
C<AVStereo3DView> values. When the array is available, its elements apply to
the corresponding elements of B<view_ids_available>, i.e.
C<view_pos_available[i]> contains the position of view with ID
C<view_ids_available[i]>.

Same validity restrictions as for B<view_ids_available> apply to
this option.


=back



=head2 rawvideo


Raw video decoder.

This decoder decodes rawvideo streams.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<top> I<top_field_first>

Specify the assumed field type of the input video.

=over 4


=item B<-1>

the video is assumed to be progressive (default)

=item B<0>

bottom-field-first is assumed

=item B<1>

top-field-first is assumed

=back



=back



=head2 libdav1d


dav1d AV1 decoder.

libdav1d allows libavcodec to decode the AOMedia Video 1 (AV1) codec.
Requires the presence of the libdav1d headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libdav1d>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libdav1d wrapper.


=over 4



=item B<framethreads>

Set amount of frame threads to use during decoding. The default value is 0 (autodetect).
This option is deprecated for libdav1d E<gt>= 1.0 and will be removed in the future. Use the
option C<max_frame_delay> and the global option C<threads> instead.


=item B<tilethreads>

Set amount of tile threads to use during decoding. The default value is 0 (autodetect).
This option is deprecated for libdav1d E<gt>= 1.0 and will be removed in the future. Use the
global option C<threads> instead.


=item B<max_frame_delay>

Set max amount of frames the decoder may buffer internally. The default value is 0
(autodetect).


=item B<filmgrain>

Apply film grain to the decoded video if present in the bitstream. Defaults to the
internal default of the library.
This option is deprecated and will be removed in the future. See the global option
C<export_side_data> to export Film Grain parameters instead of applying it.


=item B<oppoint>

Select an operating point of a scalable AV1 bitstream (0 - 31). Defaults to the
internal default of the library.


=item B<alllayers>

Output all spatial layers of a scalable AV1 bitstream. The default value is false.


=back



=head2 libdavs2


AVS2-P2/IEEE1857.4 video decoder wrapper.

This decoder allows libavcodec to decode AVS2 streams with davs2 library.



=head2 libuavs3d


AVS3-P2/IEEE1857.10 video decoder.

libuavs3d allows libavcodec to decode AVS3 streams.
Requires the presence of the libuavs3d headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libuavs3d>.


=head3 Options


The following option is supported by the libuavs3d wrapper.


=over 4



=item B<frame_threads>

Set amount of frame threads to use during decoding. The default value is 0 (autodetect).


=back



=head2 libxevd


eXtra-fast Essential Video Decoder (XEVD) MPEG-5 EVC decoder wrapper.

This decoder requires the presence of the libxevd headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
B<--enable-libxevd>.

The xevd project website is at E<lt>B<https://github.com/mpeg5/xevd>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libxevd wrapper.
The xevd-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses for easy migration.

To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libxevd options,
invoke the command  C<xevd_app --help> or consult the libxevd documentation.


=over 4


=item B<threads (>I<threads>B<)>

Force to use a specific number of threads


=back



=head2 QSV Decoders


The family of Intel QuickSync Video decoders (VC1, MPEG-2, H.264, HEVC,
JPEG/MJPEG, VP8, VP9, AV1, VVC).


=head3 Common Options


The following options are supported by all qsv decoders.


=over 4



=item I<async_depth>

Internal parallelization depth, the higher the value the higher the latency.


=item I<gpu_copy>

A GPU-accelerated copy between video and system memory

=over 4


=item B<default>


=item B<on>


=item B<off>


=back



=back



=head3 HEVC Options

Extra options for hevc_qsv.


=over 4



=item I<load_plugin>

A user plugin to load in an internal session

=over 4


=item B<none>


=item B<hevc_sw>


=item B<hevc_hw>


=back



=item I<load_plugins>

A :-separate list of hexadecimal plugin UIDs to load in an internal session


=back



=head2 v210


Uncompressed 4:2:2 10-bit decoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<custom_stride>

Set the line size of the v210 data in bytes. The default value is 0
(autodetect). You can use the special -1 value for a strideless v210 as seen in
BOXX files.


=back




=head1 AUDIO DECODERS


A description of some of the currently available audio decoders
follows.


=head2 ac3


AC-3 audio decoder.

This decoder implements part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).


=head3 AC-3 Decoder Options



=over 4



=item B<-drc_scale> I<value>

Dynamic Range Scale Factor. The factor to apply to dynamic range values
from the AC-3 stream. This factor is applied exponentially. The default value is 1.
There are 3 notable scale factor ranges:

=over 4


=item B<drc_scale == 0>

DRC disabled. Produces full range audio.

=item B<0 E<lt> drc_scale E<lt>= 1>

DRC enabled.  Applies a fraction of the stream DRC value.
Audio reproduction is between full range and full compression.

=item B<drc_scale E<gt> 1>

DRC enabled. Applies drc_scale asymmetrically.
Loud sounds are fully compressed.  Soft sounds are enhanced.

=back



=back



=head2 flac


FLAC audio decoder.

This decoder aims to implement the complete FLAC specification from Xiph.


=head3 FLAC Decoder options



=over 4



=item B<-use_buggy_lpc>

The lavc FLAC encoder used to produce buggy streams with high lpc values
(like the default value). This option makes it possible to decode such streams
correctly by using lavc's old buggy lpc logic for decoding.


=back



=head2 ffwavesynth


Internal wave synthesizer.

This decoder generates wave patterns according to predefined sequences. Its
use is purely internal and the format of the data it accepts is not publicly
documented.


=head2 libcelt


libcelt decoder wrapper.

libcelt allows libavcodec to decode the Xiph CELT ultra-low delay audio codec.
Requires the presence of the libcelt headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libcelt>.


=head2 libgsm


libgsm decoder wrapper.

libgsm allows libavcodec to decode the GSM full rate audio codec. Requires
the presence of the libgsm headers and library during configuration. You need
to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libgsm>.

This decoder supports both the ordinary GSM and the Microsoft variant.


=head2 libilbc


libilbc decoder wrapper.

libilbc allows libavcodec to decode the Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC)
audio codec. Requires the presence of the libilbc headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libilbc>.


=head3 Options


The following option is supported by the libilbc wrapper.


=over 4


=item B<enhance>


Enable the enhancement of the decoded audio when set to 1. The default
value is 0 (disabled).


=back



=head2 libopencore-amrnb


libopencore-amrnb decoder wrapper.

libopencore-amrnb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
Narrowband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
libopencore-amrnb headers and library during configuration. You need to
explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libopencore-amrnb>.

An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-NB exists, so users can decode AMR-NB
without this library.


=head2 libopencore-amrwb


libopencore-amrwb decoder wrapper.

libopencore-amrwb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
Wideband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
libopencore-amrwb headers and library during configuration. You need to
explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libopencore-amrwb>.

An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-WB exists, so users can decode AMR-WB
without this library.


=head2 libopus


libopus decoder wrapper.

libopus allows libavcodec to decode the Opus Interactive Audio Codec.
Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libopus>.

An FFmpeg native decoder for Opus exists, so users can decode Opus
without this library.



=head1 SUBTITLES DECODERS



=head2 libaribb24


ARIB STD-B24 caption decoder.

Implements profiles A and C of the ARIB STD-B24 standard.


=head3 libaribb24 Decoder Options



=over 4



=item B<-aribb24-base-path> I<path>

Sets the base path for the libaribb24 library. This is utilized for reading of
configuration files (for custom unicode conversions), and for dumping of
non-text symbols as images under that location.

Unset by default.


=item B<-aribb24-skip-ruby-text> I<boolean>

Tells the decoder wrapper to skip text blocks that contain half-height ruby
text.

Enabled by default.


=back



=head2 libaribcaption


Yet another ARIB STD-B24 caption decoder using external I<libaribcaption>
library.

Implements profiles A and C of the Japanse ARIB STD-B24 standard,
Brazilian ABNT NBR 15606-1, and Philippines version of ISDB-T.

Requires the presence of the libaribcaption headers and library
(E<lt>B<https://github.com/xqq/libaribcaption>E<gt>) during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libaribcaption>.
If both I<libaribb24> and I<libaribcaption> are enabled, I<libaribcaption>
decoder precedes.


=head3 libaribcaption Decoder Options



=over 4



=item B<-sub_type> I<subtitle_type>

Specifies the format of the decoded subtitles.


=over 4


=item B<bitmap>

Graphical image.

=item B<ass>

ASS formatted text.

=item B<text>

Simple text based output without formatting.

=back


The default is I<ass> as same as I<libaribb24> decoder.
Some present players (e.g., I<mpv>) expect ASS format for ARIB caption.


=item B<-caption_encoding> I<encoding_scheme>

Specifies the encoding scheme of input subtitle text.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Automatically detect text encoding (default).

=item B<jis>

8bit-char JIS encoding defined in ARIB STD B24.
This encoding used in Japan for ISDB captions.

=item B<utf8>

UTF-8 encoding defined in ARIB STD B24.
This encoding is used in Philippines for ISDB-T captions.

=item B<latin>

Latin character encoding defined in ABNT NBR 15606-1.
This encoding is used in South America for SBTVD / ISDB-Tb captions.

=back



=item B<-font> I<font_name[,font_name2,...]>

Specify comma-separated list of font family names to be used for I<bitmap>
or I<ass> type subtitle rendering.
Only first font name is used for I<ass> type subtitle.

If not specified, use internaly defined default font family.


=item B<-ass_single_rect> I<boolean>

ARIB STD-B24 specifies that some captions may be displayed at different
positions at a time (multi-rectangle subtitle).
Since some players (e.g., old I<mpv>) can't handle multiple ASS rectangles
in a single AVSubtitle, or multiple ASS rectangles of indeterminate duration
with the same start timestamp, this option can change the behavior so that
all the texts are displayed in a single ASS rectangle.

The default is I<false>.

If your player cannot handle AVSubtitles with multiple ASS rectangles properly,
set this option to I<true> or define B<ASS_SINGLE_RECT=1> to change
default behavior at compilation.


=item B<-force_outline_text> I<boolean>

Specify whether always render outline text for all characters regardless of
the indication by charactor style.

The default is I<false>.


=item B<-outline_width> I<number> B<(0.0 - 3.0)>

Specify width for outline text, in dots (relative).

The default is I<1.5>.


=item B<-ignore_background> I<boolean>

Specify whether to ignore background color rendering.

The default is I<false>.


=item B<-ignore_ruby> I<boolean>

Specify whether to ignore rendering for ruby-like (furigana) characters.

The default is I<false>.


=item B<-replace_drcs> I<boolean>

Specify whether to render replaced DRCS characters as Unicode characters.

The default is I<true>.


=item B<-replace_msz_ascii> I<boolean>

Specify whether to replace MSZ (Middle Size; half width) fullwidth
alphanumerics with halfwidth alphanumerics.

The default is I<true>.


=item B<-replace_msz_japanese> I<boolean>

Specify whether to replace some MSZ (Middle Size; half width) fullwidth
japanese special characters with halfwidth ones.

The default is I<true>.


=item B<-replace_msz_glyph> I<boolean>

Specify whether to replace MSZ (Middle Size; half width) characters
with halfwidth glyphs if the fonts supports it.
This option works under FreeType or DirectWrite renderer
with Adobe-Japan1 compliant fonts.
e.g., IBM Plex Sans JP, Morisawa BIZ UDGothic, Morisawa BIZ UDMincho,
Yu Gothic, Yu Mincho, and Meiryo.

The default is I<true>.


=item B<-canvas_size> I<image_size>

Specify the resolution of the canvas to render subtitles to; usually, this
should be frame size of input video.
This only applies when C<-subtitle_type> is set to I<bitmap>.

The libaribcaption decoder assumes input frame size for bitmap rendering as below:

=over 4


=item 1.

PROFILE_A : 1440 x 1080 with SAR (PAR) 4:3

=item 2.

PROFILE_C : 320 x 180 with SAR (PAR) 1:1

=back


If actual frame size of input video does not match above assumption,
the rendered captions may be distorted.
To make the captions undistorted, add C<-canvas_size> option to specify
actual input video size.

Note that the C<-canvas_size> option is not required for video with
different size but same aspect ratio.
In such cases, the caption will be stretched or shrunk to actual video size
if C<-canvas_size> option is not specified.
If C<-canvas_size> option is specified with different size,
the caption will be stretched or shrunk as specified size with calculated SAR.


=back



=head3 libaribcaption decoder usage examples


Display MPEG-TS file with ARIB subtitle by C<ffplay> tool:
	
	ffplay -sub_type bitmap MPEG.TS


Display MPEG-TS file with input frame size 1920x1080 by C<ffplay> tool:
	
	ffplay -sub_type bitmap -canvas_size 1920x1080 MPEG.TS


Embed ARIB subtitle in transcoded video:
	
	ffmpeg -sub_type bitmap -i src.m2t -filter_complex "[0:v][0:s]overlay" -vcodec h264 dest.mp4



=head2 dvbsub



=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<compute_clut>


=over 4


=item B<-2>

Compute clut once if no matching CLUT is in the stream.

=item B<-1>

Compute clut if no matching CLUT is in the stream.

=item B<0>

Never compute CLUT

=item B<1>

Always compute CLUT and override the one provided in the stream.

=back


=item B<dvb_substream>

Selects the dvb substream, or all substreams if -1 which is default.


=back



=head2 dvdsub


This codec decodes the bitmap subtitles used in DVDs; the same subtitles can
also be found in VobSub file pairs and in some Matroska files.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<palette>

Specify the global palette used by the bitmaps. When stored in VobSub, the
palette is normally specified in the index file; in Matroska, the palette is
stored in the codec extra-data in the same format as in VobSub. In DVDs, the
palette is stored in the IFO file, and therefore not available when reading
from dumped VOB files.

The format for this option is a string containing 16 24-bits hexadecimal
numbers (without 0x prefix) separated by commas, for example C<0d00ee,
ee450d, 101010, eaeaea, 0ce60b, ec14ed, ebff0b, 0d617a, 7b7b7b, d1d1d1,
7b2a0e, 0d950c, 0f007b, cf0dec, cfa80c, 7c127b>.


=item B<ifo_palette>

Specify the IFO file from which the global palette is obtained.
(experimental)


=item B<forced_subs_only>

Only decode subtitle entries marked as forced. Some titles have forced
and non-forced subtitles in the same track. Setting this flag to C<1>
will only keep the forced subtitles. Default value is C<0>.

=back



=head2 libzvbi-teletext


Libzvbi allows libavcodec to decode DVB teletext pages and DVB teletext
subtitles. Requires the presence of the libzvbi headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libzvbi>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<txt_page>

List of teletext page numbers to decode. Pages that do not match the specified
list are dropped. You may use the special C<*> string to match all pages,
or C<subtitle> to match all subtitle pages.
Default value is *.

=item B<txt_default_region>

Set default character set used for decoding, a value between 0 and 87 (see
ETS 300 706, Section 15, Table 32). Default value is -1, which does not
override the libzvbi default. This option is needed for some legacy level 1.0
transmissions which cannot signal the proper charset.

=item B<txt_chop_top>

Discards the top teletext line. Default value is 1.

=item B<txt_format>

Specifies the format of the decoded subtitles.

=over 4


=item B<bitmap>

The default format, you should use this for teletext pages, because certain
graphics and colors cannot be expressed in simple text or even ASS.

=item B<text>

Simple text based output without formatting.

=item B<ass>

Formatted ASS output, subtitle pages and teletext pages are returned in
different styles, subtitle pages are stripped down to text, but an effort is
made to keep the text alignment and the formatting.

=back


=item B<txt_left>

X offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.

=item B<txt_top>

Y offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.

=item B<txt_chop_spaces>

Chops leading and trailing spaces and removes empty lines from the generated
text. This option is useful for teletext based subtitles where empty spaces may
be present at the start or at the end of the lines or empty lines may be
present between the subtitle lines because of double-sized teletext characters.
Default value is 1.

=item B<txt_duration>

Sets the display duration of the decoded teletext pages or subtitles in
milliseconds. Default value is -1 which means infinity or until the next
subtitle event comes.

=item B<txt_transparent>

Force transparent background of the generated teletext bitmaps. Default value
is 0 which means an opaque background.

=item B<txt_opacity>

Sets the opacity (0-255) of the teletext background. If
B<txt_transparent> is not set, it only affects characters between a start
box and an end box, typically subtitles. Default value is 0 if
B<txt_transparent> is set, 255 otherwise.


=back



=head1 ENCODERS


Encoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the encoding of
multimedia streams.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native encoders
are enabled by default. Encoders requiring an external library must be enabled
manually via the corresponding C<--enable-lib> option. You can list all
available encoders using the configure option C<--list-encoders>.

You can disable all the encoders with the configure option
C<--disable-encoders> and selectively enable / disable single encoders
with the options C<--enable-encoder=I<ENCODER>> /
C<--disable-encoder=I<ENCODER>>.

The option C<-encoders> of the ff* tools will display the list of
enabled encoders.



=head1 AUDIO ENCODERS


A description of some of the currently available audio encoders
follows.



=head2 aac


Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) encoder.

This encoder is the default AAC encoder, natively implemented into FFmpeg.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<b>

Set bit rate in bits/s. Setting this automatically activates constant bit rate
(CBR) mode. If this option is unspecified it is set to 128kbps.


=item B<q>

Set quality for variable bit rate (VBR) mode. This option is valid only using
the B<ffmpeg> command-line tool. For library interface users, use
B<global_quality>.


=item B<cutoff>

Set cutoff frequency. If unspecified will allow the encoder to dynamically
adjust the cutoff to improve clarity on low bitrates.


=item B<aac_coder>

Set AAC encoder coding method. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<twoloop>

Two loop searching (TLS) method. This is the default method.

This method first sets quantizers depending on band thresholds and then tries
to find an optimal combination by adding or subtracting a specific value from
all quantizers and adjusting some individual quantizer a little.  Will tune
itself based on whether B<aac_is>, B<aac_ms> and B<aac_pns>
are enabled.


=item B<anmr>

Average noise to mask ratio (ANMR) trellis-based solution.

This is an experimental coder which currently produces a lower quality, is more
unstable and is slower than the default twoloop coder but has potential.
Currently has no support for the B<aac_is> or B<aac_pns> options.
Not currently recommended.


=item B<fast>

Constant quantizer method.

Uses a cheaper version of twoloop algorithm that doesn't try to do as many
clever adjustments. Worse with low bitrates (less than 64kbps), but is better
and much faster at higher bitrates.


=back



=item B<aac_ms>

Sets mid/side coding mode. The default value of "auto" will automatically use
M/S with bands which will benefit from such coding. Can be forced for all bands
using the value "enable", which is mainly useful for debugging or disabled using
"disable".


=item B<aac_is>

Sets intensity stereo coding tool usage. By default, it's enabled and will
automatically toggle IS for similar pairs of stereo bands if it's beneficial.
Can be disabled for debugging by setting the value to "disable".


=item B<aac_pns>

Uses perceptual noise substitution to replace low entropy high frequency bands
with imperceptible white noise during the decoding process. By default, it's
enabled, but can be disabled for debugging purposes by using "disable".


=item B<aac_tns>

Enables the use of a multitap FIR filter which spans through the high frequency
bands to hide quantization noise during the encoding process and is reverted
by the decoder. As well as decreasing unpleasant artifacts in the high range
this also reduces the entropy in the high bands and allows for more bits to
be used by the mid-low bands. By default it's enabled but can be disabled for
debugging by setting the option to "disable".


=item B<aac_ltp>

Enables the use of the long term prediction extension which increases coding
efficiency in very low bandwidth situations such as encoding of voice or
solo piano music by extending constant harmonic peaks in bands throughout
frames. This option is implied by profile:a aac_low and is incompatible with
aac_pred. Use in conjunction with B<-ar> to decrease the samplerate.


=item B<aac_pred>

Enables the use of a more traditional style of prediction where the spectral
coefficients transmitted are replaced by the difference of the current
coefficients minus the previous "predicted" coefficients. In theory and sometimes
in practice this can improve quality for low to mid bitrate audio.
This option implies the aac_main profile and is incompatible with aac_ltp.


=item B<profile>

Sets the encoding profile, possible values:


=over 4


=item B<aac_low>

The default, AAC "Low-complexity" profile. Is the most compatible and produces
decent quality.


=item B<mpeg2_aac_low>

Equivalent to C<-profile:a aac_low -aac_pns 0>. PNS was introduced with the
MPEG4 specifications.


=item B<aac_ltp>

Long term prediction profile, is enabled by and will enable the B<aac_ltp>
option. Introduced in MPEG4.


=item B<aac_main>

Main-type prediction profile, is enabled by and will enable the B<aac_pred>
option. Introduced in MPEG2.


=back

If this option is unspecified it is set to B<aac_low>.

=back



=head2 ac3 and ac3_fixed


AC-3 audio encoders.

These encoders implement part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366.

The I<ac3> encoder uses floating-point math, while the I<ac3_fixed>
encoder only uses fixed-point integer math. This does not mean that one is
always faster, just that one or the other may be better suited to a
particular system. The I<ac3_fixed> encoder is not the default codec for
any of the output formats, so it must be specified explicitly using the option
C<-acodec ac3_fixed> in order to use it.


=head3 AC-3 Metadata


The AC-3 metadata options are used to set parameters that describe the audio,
but in most cases do not affect the audio encoding itself. Some of the options
do directly affect or influence the decoding and playback of the resulting
bitstream, while others are just for informational purposes. A few of the
options will add bits to the output stream that could otherwise be used for
audio data, and will thus affect the quality of the output. Those will be
indicated accordingly with a note in the option list below.

These parameters are described in detail in several publicly-available
documents.

=over 4


=item *<E<lt>B<http://www.atsc.org/cms/standards/a_52-2010.pdf>E<gt>>


=item *<E<lt>B<http://www.atsc.org/cms/standards/a_54a_with_corr_1.pdf>E<gt>>


=item *<E<lt>B<http://www.dolby.com/uploadedFiles/zz-_Shared_Assets/English_PDFs/Professional/18_Metadata.Guide.pdf>E<gt>>


=item *<E<lt>B<http://www.dolby.com/uploadedFiles/zz-_Shared_Assets/English_PDFs/Professional/46_DDEncodingGuidelines.pdf>E<gt>>


=back



=head4 Metadata Control Options



=over 4



=item B<-per_frame_metadata> I<boolean>

Allow Per-Frame Metadata. Specifies if the encoder should check for changing
metadata for each frame.

=over 4


=item B<0>

The metadata values set at initialization will be used for every frame in the
stream. (default)

=item B<1>

Metadata values can be changed before encoding each frame.

=back



=back



=head4 Downmix Levels



=over 4



=item B<-center_mixlev> I<level>

Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the center
channel when downmixing to stereo. This field will only be written to the
bitstream if a center channel is present. The value is specified as a scale
factor. There are 3 valid values:

=over 4


=item B<0.707>

Apply -3dB gain

=item B<0.595>

Apply -4.5dB gain (default)

=item B<0.500>

Apply -6dB gain

=back



=item B<-surround_mixlev> I<level>

Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the surround
channel(s) when downmixing to stereo. This field will only be written to the
bitstream if one or more surround channels are present. The value is specified
as a scale factor.  There are 3 valid values:

=over 4


=item B<0.707>

Apply -3dB gain

=item B<0.500>

Apply -6dB gain (default)

=item B<0.000>

Silence Surround Channel(s)

=back



=back



=head4 Audio Production Information

Audio Production Information is optional information describing the mixing
environment.  Either none or both of the fields are written to the bitstream.


=over 4



=item B<-mixing_level> I<number>

Mixing Level. Specifies peak sound pressure level (SPL) in the production
environment when the mix was mastered. Valid values are 80 to 111, or -1 for
unknown or not indicated. The default value is -1, but that value cannot be
used if the Audio Production Information is written to the bitstream. Therefore,
if the C<room_type> option is not the default value, the C<mixing_level>
option must not be -1.


=item B<-room_type> I<type>

Room Type. Describes the equalization used during the final mixing session at
the studio or on the dubbing stage. A large room is a dubbing stage with the
industry standard X-curve equalization; a small room has flat equalization.
This field will not be written to the bitstream if both the C<mixing_level>
option and the C<room_type> option have the default values.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<notindicated>

Not Indicated (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<large>

Large Room

=item B<2>


=item B<small>

Small Room

=back



=back



=head4 Other Metadata Options



=over 4



=item B<-copyright> I<boolean>

Copyright Indicator. Specifies whether a copyright exists for this audio.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<off>

No Copyright Exists (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<on>

Copyright Exists

=back



=item B<-dialnorm> I<value>

Dialogue Normalization. Indicates how far the average dialogue level of the
program is below digital 100% full scale (0 dBFS). This parameter determines a
level shift during audio reproduction that sets the average volume of the
dialogue to a preset level. The goal is to match volume level between program
sources. A value of -31dB will result in no volume level change, relative to
the source volume, during audio reproduction. Valid values are whole numbers in
the range -31 to -1, with -31 being the default.


=item B<-dsur_mode> I<mode>

Dolby Surround Mode. Specifies whether the stereo signal uses Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic). This field will only be written to the bitstream if the audio
stream is stereo. Using this option does B<NOT> mean the encoder will actually
apply Dolby Surround processing.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<notindicated>

Not Indicated (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<off>

Not Dolby Surround Encoded

=item B<2>


=item B<on>

Dolby Surround Encoded

=back



=item B<-original> I<boolean>

Original Bit Stream Indicator. Specifies whether this audio is from the
original source and not a copy.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<off>

Not Original Source

=item B<1>


=item B<on>

Original Source (default)

=back



=back



=head3 Extended Bitstream Information

The extended bitstream options are part of the Alternate Bit Stream Syntax as
specified in Annex D of the A/52:2010 standard. It is grouped into 2 parts.
If any one parameter in a group is specified, all values in that group will be
written to the bitstream.  Default values are used for those that are written
but have not been specified.  If the mixing levels are written, the decoder
will use these values instead of the ones specified in the C<center_mixlev>
and C<surround_mixlev> options if it supports the Alternate Bit Stream
Syntax.


=head4 Extended Bitstream Information - Part 1



=over 4



=item B<-dmix_mode> I<mode>

Preferred Stereo Downmix Mode. Allows the user to select either Lt/Rt
(Dolby Surround) or Lo/Ro (normal stereo) as the preferred stereo downmix mode.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<notindicated>

Not Indicated (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<ltrt>

Lt/Rt Downmix Preferred

=item B<2>


=item B<loro>

Lo/Ro Downmix Preferred

=back



=item B<-ltrt_cmixlev> I<level>

Lt/Rt Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
center channel when downmixing to stereo in Lt/Rt mode.

=over 4


=item B<1.414>

Apply +3dB gain

=item B<1.189>

Apply +1.5dB gain

=item B<1.000>

Apply 0dB gain

=item B<0.841>

Apply -1.5dB gain

=item B<0.707>

Apply -3.0dB gain

=item B<0.595>

Apply -4.5dB gain (default)

=item B<0.500>

Apply -6.0dB gain

=item B<0.000>

Silence Center Channel

=back



=item B<-ltrt_surmixlev> I<level>

Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
surround channel(s) when downmixing to stereo in Lt/Rt mode.

=over 4


=item B<0.841>

Apply -1.5dB gain

=item B<0.707>

Apply -3.0dB gain

=item B<0.595>

Apply -4.5dB gain

=item B<0.500>

Apply -6.0dB gain (default)

=item B<0.000>

Silence Surround Channel(s)

=back



=item B<-loro_cmixlev> I<level>

Lo/Ro Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
center channel when downmixing to stereo in Lo/Ro mode.

=over 4


=item B<1.414>

Apply +3dB gain

=item B<1.189>

Apply +1.5dB gain

=item B<1.000>

Apply 0dB gain

=item B<0.841>

Apply -1.5dB gain

=item B<0.707>

Apply -3.0dB gain

=item B<0.595>

Apply -4.5dB gain (default)

=item B<0.500>

Apply -6.0dB gain

=item B<0.000>

Silence Center Channel

=back



=item B<-loro_surmixlev> I<level>

Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
surround channel(s) when downmixing to stereo in Lo/Ro mode.

=over 4


=item B<0.841>

Apply -1.5dB gain

=item B<0.707>

Apply -3.0dB gain

=item B<0.595>

Apply -4.5dB gain

=item B<0.500>

Apply -6.0dB gain (default)

=item B<0.000>

Silence Surround Channel(s)

=back



=back



=head4 Extended Bitstream Information - Part 2



=over 4



=item B<-dsurex_mode> I<mode>

Dolby Surround EX Mode. Indicates whether the stream uses Dolby Surround EX
(7.1 matrixed to 5.1). Using this option does B<NOT> mean the encoder will actually
apply Dolby Surround EX processing.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<notindicated>

Not Indicated (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<on>

Dolby Surround EX Off

=item B<2>


=item B<off>

Dolby Surround EX On

=back



=item B<-dheadphone_mode> I<mode>

Dolby Headphone Mode. Indicates whether the stream uses Dolby Headphone
encoding (multi-channel matrixed to 2.0 for use with headphones). Using this
option does B<NOT> mean the encoder will actually apply Dolby Headphone
processing.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<notindicated>

Not Indicated (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<on>

Dolby Headphone Off

=item B<2>


=item B<off>

Dolby Headphone On

=back



=item B<-ad_conv_type> I<type>

A/D Converter Type. Indicates whether the audio has passed through HDCD A/D
conversion.

=over 4


=item B<0>


=item B<standard>

Standard A/D Converter (default)

=item B<1>


=item B<hdcd>

HDCD A/D Converter

=back



=back



=head3 Other AC-3 Encoding Options



=over 4



=item B<-stereo_rematrixing> I<boolean>

Stereo Rematrixing. Enables/Disables use of rematrixing for stereo input. This
is an optional AC-3 feature that increases quality by selectively encoding
the left/right channels as mid/side. This option is enabled by default, and it
is highly recommended that it be left as enabled except for testing purposes.


=item B<cutoff> I<frequency>

Set lowpass cutoff frequency. If unspecified, the encoder selects a default
determined by various other encoding parameters.


=back



=head3 Floating-Point-Only AC-3 Encoding Options


These options are only valid for the floating-point encoder and do not exist
for the fixed-point encoder due to the corresponding features not being
implemented in fixed-point.


=over 4



=item B<-channel_coupling> I<boolean>

Enables/Disables use of channel coupling, which is an optional AC-3 feature
that increases quality by combining high frequency information from multiple
channels into a single channel. The per-channel high frequency information is
sent with less accuracy in both the frequency and time domains. This allows
more bits to be used for lower frequencies while preserving enough information
to reconstruct the high frequencies. This option is enabled by default for the
floating-point encoder and should generally be left as enabled except for
testing purposes or to increase encoding speed.

=over 4


=item B<-1>


=item B<auto>

Selected by Encoder (default)

=item B<0>


=item B<off>

Disable Channel Coupling

=item B<1>


=item B<on>

Enable Channel Coupling

=back



=item B<-cpl_start_band> I<number>

Coupling Start Band. Sets the channel coupling start band, from 1 to 15. If a
value higher than the bandwidth is used, it will be reduced to 1 less than the
coupling end band. If I<auto> is used, the start band will be determined by
the encoder based on the bit rate, sample rate, and channel layout. This option
has no effect if channel coupling is disabled.

=over 4


=item B<-1>


=item B<auto>

Selected by Encoder (default)

=back



=back




=head2 flac


FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) Encoder


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by FFmpeg's flac encoder.


=over 4


=item B<compression_level>

Sets the compression level, which chooses defaults for many other options
if they are not set explicitly. Valid values are from 0 to 12, 5 is the
default.


=item B<frame_size>

Sets the size of the frames in samples per channel.


=item B<lpc_coeff_precision>

Sets the LPC coefficient precision, valid values are from 1 to 15, 15 is the
default.


=item B<lpc_type>

Sets the first stage LPC algorithm

=over 4


=item B<none>

LPC is not used


=item B<fixed>

fixed LPC coefficients


=item B<levinson>



=item B<cholesky>


=back



=item B<lpc_passes>

Number of passes to use for Cholesky factorization during LPC analysis


=item B<min_partition_order>

The minimum partition order


=item B<max_partition_order>

The maximum partition order


=item B<prediction_order_method>


=over 4


=item B<estimation>


=item B<2level>


=item B<4level>


=item B<8level>


=item B<search>

Bruteforce search

=item B<log>


=back



=item B<ch_mode>

Channel mode

=over 4


=item B<auto>

The mode is chosen automatically for each frame

=item B<indep>

Channels are independently coded

=item B<left_side>


=item B<right_side>


=item B<mid_side>


=back



=item B<exact_rice_parameters>

Chooses if rice parameters are calculated exactly or approximately.
if set to 1 then they are chosen exactly, which slows the code down slightly and
improves compression slightly.


=item B<multi_dim_quant>

Multi Dimensional Quantization. If set to 1 then a 2nd stage LPC algorithm is
applied after the first stage to finetune the coefficients. This is quite slow
and slightly improves compression.


=back




=head2 opus


Opus encoder.

This is a native FFmpeg encoder for the Opus format. Currently, it's in development and
only implements the CELT part of the codec. Its quality is usually worse and at best
is equal to the libopus encoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<b>

Set bit rate in bits/s. If unspecified it uses the number of channels and the layout
to make a good guess.


=item B<opus_delay>

Sets the maximum delay in milliseconds. Lower delays than 20ms will very quickly
decrease quality.

=back




=head2 libfdk_aac


libfdk-aac AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder wrapper.

The libfdk-aac library is based on the Fraunhofer FDK AAC code from
the Android project.

Requires the presence of the libfdk-aac headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libfdk-aac>. The library is also incompatible with GPL,
so if you allow the use of GPL, you should configure with
C<--enable-gpl --enable-nonfree --enable-libfdk-aac>.

This encoder has support for the AAC-HE profiles.

VBR encoding, enabled through the B<vbr> or B<flags
+qscale> options, is experimental and only works with some
combinations of parameters.

Support for encoding 7.1 audio is only available with libfdk-aac 0.1.3 or
higher.

For more information see the fdk-aac project at
E<lt>B<http://sourceforge.net/p/opencore-amr/fdk-aac/>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


The following options are mapped on the shared FFmpeg codec options.


=over 4


=item B<b>

Set bit rate in bits/s. If the bitrate is not explicitly specified, it
is automatically set to a suitable value depending on the selected
profile.

In case VBR mode is enabled the option is ignored.


=item B<ar>

Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).


=item B<channels>

Set the number of audio channels.


=item B<flags +qscale>

Enable fixed quality, VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
Note that VBR is implicitly enabled when the B<vbr> value is
positive.


=item B<cutoff>

Set cutoff frequency. If not specified (or explicitly set to 0) it
will use a value automatically computed by the library. Default value
is 0.


=item B<profile>

Set audio profile.

The following profiles are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<aac_low>

Low Complexity AAC (LC)


=item B<aac_he>

High Efficiency AAC (HE-AAC)


=item B<aac_he_v2>

High Efficiency AAC version 2 (HE-AACv2)


=item B<aac_ld>

Low Delay AAC (LD)


=item B<aac_eld>

Enhanced Low Delay AAC (ELD)

=back


If not specified it is set to B<aac_low>.

=back


The following are private options of the libfdk_aac encoder.


=over 4


=item B<afterburner>

Enable afterburner feature if set to 1, disabled if set to 0. This
improves the quality but also the required processing power.

Default value is 1.


=item B<eld_sbr>

Enable SBR (Spectral Band Replication) for ELD if set to 1, disabled
if set to 0.

Default value is 0.


=item B<eld_v2>

Enable ELDv2 (LD-MPS extension for ELD stereo signals) for ELDv2 if set to 1,
disabled if set to 0.

Note that option is available when fdk-aac version (AACENCODER_LIB_VL0.AACENCODER_LIB_VL1.AACENCODER_LIB_VL2) E<gt> (4.0.0).

Default value is 0.


=item B<signaling>

Set SBR/PS signaling style.

It can assume one of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<default>

choose signaling implicitly (explicit hierarchical by default,
implicit if global header is disabled)


=item B<implicit>

implicit backwards compatible signaling


=item B<explicit_sbr>

explicit SBR, implicit PS signaling


=item B<explicit_hierarchical>

explicit hierarchical signaling

=back


Default value is B<default>.


=item B<latm>

Output LATM/LOAS encapsulated data if set to 1, disabled if set to 0.

Default value is 0.


=item B<header_period>

Set StreamMuxConfig and PCE repetition period (in frames) for sending
in-band configuration buffers within LATM/LOAS transport layer.

Must be a 16-bits non-negative integer.

Default value is 0.


=item B<vbr>

Set VBR mode, from 1 to 5. 1 is lowest quality (though still pretty
good) and 5 is highest quality. A value of 0 will disable VBR, and CBR
(Constant Bit Rate) is enabled.

Currently only the B<aac_low> profile supports VBR encoding.

VBR modes 1-5 correspond to roughly the following average bit rates:


=over 4


=item B<1>

32 kbps/channel

=item B<2>

40 kbps/channel

=item B<3>

48-56 kbps/channel

=item B<4>

64 kbps/channel

=item B<5>

about 80-96 kbps/channel

=back


Default value is 0.


=item B<frame_length>

Set the audio frame length in samples. Default value is the internal
default of the library. Refer to the library's documentation for information
about supported values.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to convert an audio file to VBR AAC in an M4A (MP4)
container:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.wav -codec:a libfdk_aac -vbr 3 output.m4a



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to convert an audio file to CBR 64k kbps AAC, using the
High-Efficiency AAC profile:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.wav -c:a libfdk_aac -profile:a aac_he -b:a 64k output.m4a


=back




=head2 liblc3


liblc3 LC3 (Low Complexity Communication Codec) encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the liblc3 headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-liblc3>.

This encoder has support for the Bluetooth SIG LC3 codec for the LE Audio
protocol, and the following features of LC3plus:

=over 4


=item *

Frame duration of 2.5 and 5ms.

=item *

High-Resolution mode, 48 KHz, and 96 kHz sampling rates.

=back


For more information see the liblc3 project at
E<lt>B<https://github.com/google/liblc3>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


The following options are mapped on the shared FFmpeg codec options.


=over 4


=item B<b> I<bitrate>

Set the bit rate in bits/s. This will determine the fixed size of the encoded
frames, for a selected frame duration.


=item B<ar> I<frequency>

Set the audio sampling rate (in Hz).


=item B<channels>

Set the number of audio channels.


=item B<frame_duration>

Set the audio frame duration in milliseconds. Default value is 10ms.
Allowed frame durations are 2.5ms, 5ms, 7.5ms and 10ms.
LC3 (Bluetooth LE Audio), allows 7.5ms and 10ms; and LC3plus 2.5ms, 5ms
and 10ms.

The 10ms frame duration is available in LC3 and LC3 plus standard.
In this mode, the produced bitstream can be referenced either as LC3 or LC3plus.


=item B<high_resolution> I<boolean>

Enable the high-resolution mode if set to 1. The high-resolution mode is
available with all LC3plus frame durations and for a sampling rate of 48 KHz,
and 96 KHz.

The encoder automatically turns off this mode at lower sampling rates and
activates it at 96 KHz.

This mode should be preferred at high bitrates. In this mode, the audio
bandwidth is always up to the Nyquist frequency, compared to LC3 at 48 KHz,
which limits the bandwidth to 20 KHz.

=back




=head2 libmp3lame


LAME (Lame Ain't an MP3 Encoder) MP3 encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libmp3lame headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libmp3lame>.

See B<libshine> for a fixed-point MP3 encoder, although with a
lower quality.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libmp3lame wrapper. The
B<lame>-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.


=over 4


=item B<b (>I<-b>B<)>

Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR or ABR. LAME C<bitrate> is
expressed in kilobits/s.


=item B<q (>I<-V>B<)>

Set constant quality setting for VBR. This option is valid only
using the B<ffmpeg> command-line tool. For library interface
users, use B<global_quality>.


=item B<compression_level (>I<-q>B<)>

Set algorithm quality. Valid arguments are integers in the 0-9 range,
with 0 meaning highest quality but slowest, and 9 meaning fastest
while producing the worst quality.


=item B<cutoff (>I<--lowpass>B<)>

Set lowpass cutoff frequency. If unspecified, the encoder dynamically
adjusts the cutoff.


=item B<reservoir>

Enable use of bit reservoir when set to 1. Default value is 1. LAME
has this enabled by default, but can be overridden by use
B<--nores> option.


=item B<joint_stereo (>I<-m j>B<)>

Enable the encoder to use (on a frame by frame basis) either L/R
stereo or mid/side stereo. Default value is 1.


=item B<abr (>I<--abr>B<)>

Enable the encoder to use ABR when set to 1. The B<lame>
B<--abr> sets the target bitrate, while this options only
tells FFmpeg to use ABR still relies on B<b> to set bitrate.


=item B<copyright (>I<-c>B<)>

Set MPEG audio copyright flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
(disabled).


=item B<original (>I<-o>B<)>

Set MPEG audio original flag when set to 1. The default value is 1
(enabled).

=back



=head2 libopencore-amrnb


OpenCORE Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband encoder.

Requires the presence of the libopencore-amrnb headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libopencore-amrnb --enable-version3>.

This is a mono-only encoder. Officially it only supports 8000Hz sample rate,
but you can override it by setting B<strict> to B<unofficial> or
lower.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<b>

Set bitrate in bits per second. Only the following bitrates are supported,
otherwise libavcodec will round to the nearest valid bitrate.


=over 4


=item B<4750>


=item B<5150>


=item B<5900>


=item B<6700>


=item B<7400>


=item B<7950>


=item B<10200>


=item B<12200>


=back



=item B<dtx>

Allow discontinuous transmission (generate comfort noise) when set to 1. The
default value is 0 (disabled).


=back



=head2 libopus


libopus Opus Interactive Audio Codec encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libopus>.


=head3 Option Mapping


Most libopus options are modelled after the B<opusenc> utility from
opus-tools. The following is an option mapping chart describing options
supported by the libopus wrapper, and their B<opusenc>-equivalent
in parentheses.


=over 4



=item B<b (>I<bitrate>B<)>

Set the bit rate in bits/s.  FFmpeg's B<b> option is
expressed in bits/s, while B<opusenc>'s B<bitrate> in
kilobits/s.


=item B<vbr (>I<vbr>B<,> I<hard-cbr>B<, and> I<cvbr>B<)>

Set VBR mode. The FFmpeg B<vbr> option has the following
valid arguments, with the B<opusenc> equivalent options
in parentheses:


=over 4


=item B<off (>I<hard-cbr>B<)>

Use constant bit rate encoding.


=item B<on (>I<vbr>B<)>

Use variable bit rate encoding (the default).


=item B<constrained (>I<cvbr>B<)>

Use constrained variable bit rate encoding.

=back



=item B<compression_level (>I<comp>B<)>

Set encoding algorithm complexity. Valid options are integers in
the 0-10 range. 0 gives the fastest encodes but lower quality, while 10
gives the highest quality but slowest encoding. The default is 10.


=item B<frame_duration (>I<framesize>B<)>

Set maximum frame size, or duration of a frame in milliseconds. The
argument must be exactly the following: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60. Smaller
frame sizes achieve lower latency but less quality at a given bitrate.
Sizes greater than 20ms are only interesting at fairly low bitrates.
The default is 20ms.


=item B<packet_loss (>I<expect-loss>B<)>

Set expected packet loss percentage. The default is 0.


=item B<fec (>I<n/a>B<)>

Enable inband forward error correction. B<packet_loss> must be non-zero
to take advantage - frequency of FEC 'side-data' is proportional to expected packet loss.
Default is disabled.


=item B<application (N.A.)>

Set intended application type. Valid options are listed below:


=over 4


=item B<voip>

Favor improved speech intelligibility.

=item B<audio>

Favor faithfulness to the input (the default).

=item B<lowdelay>

Restrict to only the lowest delay modes by disabling voice-optimized
modes.

=back



=item B<cutoff (N.A.)>

Set cutoff bandwidth in Hz. The argument must be exactly one of the
following: 4000, 6000, 8000, 12000, or 20000, corresponding to
narrowband, mediumband, wideband, super wideband, and fullband
respectively. The default is 0 (cutoff disabled). Note that libopus
forces a wideband cutoff for bitrates E<lt> 15 kbps, unless CELT-only
(B<application> set to B<lowdelay>) mode is used.


=item B<mapping_family (>I<mapping_family>B<)>

Set channel mapping family to be used by the encoder. The default value of -1
uses mapping family 0 for mono and stereo inputs, and mapping family 1
otherwise. The default also disables the surround masking and LFE bandwidth
optimzations in libopus, and requires that the input contains 8 channels or
fewer.

Other values include 0 for mono and stereo, 1 for surround sound with masking
and LFE bandwidth optimizations, and 255 for independent streams with an
unspecified channel layout.


=item B<apply_phase_inv (N.A.) (requires libopus E<gt>= 1.2)>

If set to 0, disables the use of phase inversion for intensity stereo,
improving the quality of mono downmixes, but slightly reducing normal stereo
quality. The default is 1 (phase inversion enabled).


=back




=head2 libshine


Shine Fixed-Point MP3 encoder wrapper.

Shine is a fixed-point MP3 encoder. It has a far better performance on
platforms without an FPU, e.g. armel CPUs, and some phones and tablets.
However, as it is more targeted on performance than quality, it is not on par
with LAME and other production-grade encoders quality-wise. Also, according to
the project's homepage, this encoder may not be free of bugs as the code was
written a long time ago and the project was dead for at least 5 years.

This encoder only supports stereo and mono input. This is also CBR-only.

The original project (last updated in early 2007) is at
E<lt>B<http://sourceforge.net/projects/libshine-fxp/>E<gt>. We only support the
updated fork by the Savonet/Liquidsoap project at E<lt>B<https://github.com/savonet/shine>E<gt>.

Requires the presence of the libshine headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libshine>.

See also B<libmp3lame>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libshine wrapper. The
B<shineenc>-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.


=over 4


=item B<b (>I<-b>B<)>

Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR. B<shineenc> B<-b> option
is expressed in kilobits/s.


=back



=head2 libtwolame


TwoLAME MP2 encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libtwolame headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libtwolame>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libtwolame wrapper. The
B<twolame>-equivalent options follow the FFmpeg ones and are in
parentheses.


=over 4


=item B<b (>I<-b>B<)>

Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR. B<twolame> B<b>
option is expressed in kilobits/s. Default value is 128k.


=item B<q (>I<-V>B<)>

Set quality for experimental VBR support. Maximum value range is
from -50 to 50, useful range is from -10 to 10. The higher the
value, the better the quality. This option is valid only using the
B<ffmpeg> command-line tool. For library interface users,
use B<global_quality>.


=item B<mode (>I<--mode>B<)>

Set the mode of the resulting audio. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Choose mode automatically based on the input. This is the default.

=item B<stereo>

Stereo

=item B<joint_stereo>

Joint stereo

=item B<dual_channel>

Dual channel

=item B<mono>

Mono

=back



=item B<psymodel (>I<--psyc-mode>B<)>

Set psychoacoustic model to use in encoding. The argument must be
an integer between -1 and 4, inclusive. The higher the value, the
better the quality. The default value is 3.


=item B<energy_levels (>I<--energy>B<)>

Enable energy levels extensions when set to 1. The default value is
0 (disabled).


=item B<error_protection (>I<--protect>B<)>

Enable CRC error protection when set to 1. The default value is 0
(disabled).


=item B<copyright (>I<--copyright>B<)>

Set MPEG audio copyright flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
(disabled).


=item B<original (>I<--original>B<)>

Set MPEG audio original flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
(disabled).


=back



=head2 libvo-amrwbenc


VisualOn Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband encoder.

Requires the presence of the libvo-amrwbenc headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libvo-amrwbenc --enable-version3>.

This is a mono-only encoder. Officially it only supports 16000Hz sample
rate, but you can override it by setting B<strict> to
B<unofficial> or lower.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<b>

Set bitrate in bits/s. Only the following bitrates are supported, otherwise
libavcodec will round to the nearest valid bitrate.


=over 4


=item B<6600>


=item B<8850>


=item B<12650>


=item B<14250>


=item B<15850>


=item B<18250>


=item B<19850>


=item B<23050>


=item B<23850>


=back



=item B<dtx>

Allow discontinuous transmission (generate comfort noise) when set to 1. The
default value is 0 (disabled).


=back



=head2 libvorbis


libvorbis encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libvorbisenc headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libvorbis>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libvorbis wrapper. The
B<oggenc>-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.

To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libvorbis
options, consult the libvorbisenc's and B<oggenc>'s documentations.
See E<lt>B<http://xiph.org/vorbis/>E<gt>,
E<lt>B<http://wiki.xiph.org/Vorbis-tools>E<gt>, and oggenc(1).


=over 4


=item B<b (>I<-b>B<)>

Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for ABR. B<oggenc> B<-b> is
expressed in kilobits/s.


=item B<q (>I<-q>B<)>

Set constant quality setting for VBR. The value should be a float
number in the range of -1.0 to 10.0. The higher the value, the better
the quality. The default value is B<3.0>.

This option is valid only using the B<ffmpeg> command-line tool.
For library interface users, use B<global_quality>.


=item B<cutoff (>I<--advanced-encode-option lowpass_frequency=N>B<)>

Set cutoff bandwidth in Hz, a value of 0 disables cutoff. B<oggenc>'s
related option is expressed in kHz. The default value is B<0> (cutoff
disabled).


=item B<minrate (>I<-m>B<)>

Set minimum bitrate expressed in bits/s. B<oggenc> B<-m> is
expressed in kilobits/s.


=item B<maxrate (>I<-M>B<)>

Set maximum bitrate expressed in bits/s. B<oggenc> B<-M> is
expressed in kilobits/s. This only has effect on ABR mode.


=item B<iblock (>I<--advanced-encode-option impulse_noisetune=N>B<)>

Set noise floor bias for impulse blocks. The value is a float number from
-15.0 to 0.0. A negative bias instructs the encoder to pay special attention
to the crispness of transients in the encoded audio. The tradeoff for better
transient response is a higher bitrate.


=back




=head2 mjpeg


Motion JPEG encoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<huffman>

Set the huffman encoding strategy. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<default>

Use the default huffman tables. This is the default strategy.


=item B<optimal>

Compute and use optimal huffman tables.


=back


=back




=head2 wavpack


WavPack lossless audio encoder.


=head3 Options


The equivalent options for B<wavpack> command line utility are listed in
parentheses.


=head4 Shared options


The following shared options are effective for this encoder. Only special notes
about this particular encoder will be documented here. For the general meaning
of the options, see B<the Codec Options chapter>.


=over 4


=item B<frame_size (>I<--blocksize>B<)>

For this encoder, the range for this option is between 128 and 131072. Default
is automatically decided based on sample rate and number of channel.

For the complete formula of calculating default, see
F<libavcodec/wavpackenc.c>.


=item B<compression_level (>I<-f>B<,> I<-h>B<,> I<-hh>B<, and> I<-x>B<)>


=back



=head4 Private options



=over 4


=item B<joint_stereo (>I<-j>B<)>

Set whether to enable joint stereo. Valid values are:


=over 4


=item B<on (>I<1>B<)>

Force mid/side audio encoding.

=item B<off (>I<0>B<)>

Force left/right audio encoding.

=item B<auto>

Let the encoder decide automatically.

=back



=item B<optimize_mono>

Set whether to enable optimization for mono. This option is only effective for
non-mono streams. Available values:


=over 4


=item B<on>

enabled

=item B<off>

disabled

=back



=back




=head1 VIDEO ENCODERS


A description of some of the currently available video encoders
follows.


=head2 a64_multi, a64_multi5


A64 / Commodore 64 multicolor charset encoder. C<a64_multi5> is extended with 5th color (colram).


=head2 Cinepak


Cinepak aka CVID encoder.
Compatible with Windows 3.1 and vintage MacOS.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<g> I<integer>

Keyframe interval.
A keyframe is inserted at least every C<-g> frames, sometimes sooner.


=item B<q:v> I<integer>

Quality factor. Lower is better. Higher gives lower bitrate.
The following table lists bitrates when encoding akiyo_cif.y4m for various values of C<-q:v> with C<-g 100>:


=over 4


=item B<C<-q:v 1> 1918 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 2> 1735 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 4> 1500 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 10> 1041 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 20> 826 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 40> 553 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 100> 394 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 200> 312 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 400> 266 kb/s>


=item B<C<-q:v 1000> 237 kb/s>


=back



=item B<max_extra_cb_iterations> I<integer>

Max extra codebook recalculation passes, more is better and slower.


=item B<skip_empty_cb> I<boolean>

Avoid wasting bytes, ignore vintage MacOS decoder.


=item B<max_strips> I<integer>


=item B<min_strips> I<integer>

The minimum and maximum number of strips to use.
Wider range sometimes improves quality.
More strips is generally better quality but costs more bits.
Fewer strips tend to yield more keyframes.
Vintage compatible is 1..3.


=item B<strip_number_adaptivity> I<integer>

How much number of strips is allowed to change between frames.
Higher is better but slower.


=back



=head2 GIF


GIF image/animation encoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<gifflags> I<integer>

Sets the flags used for GIF encoding.


=over 4


=item B<offsetting>

Enables picture offsetting.

Default is enabled.


=item B<transdiff>

Enables transparency detection between frames.

Default is enabled.


=back



=item B<gifimage> I<integer>

Enables encoding one full GIF image per frame, rather than an animated GIF.

Default value is B<0>.


=item B<global_palette> I<integer>

Writes a palette to the global GIF header where feasible.

If disabled, every frame will always have a palette written, even if there
is a global palette supplied.

Default value is B<1>.


=back



=head2 Hap


Vidvox Hap video encoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<format> I<integer>

Specifies the Hap format to encode.


=over 4


=item B<hap>


=item B<hap_alpha>


=item B<hap_q>


=back


Default value is B<hap>.


=item B<chunks> I<integer>

Specifies the number of chunks to split frames into, between 1 and 64. This
permits multithreaded decoding of large frames, potentially at the cost of
data-rate. The encoder may modify this value to divide frames evenly.

Default value is I<1>.


=item B<compressor> I<integer>

Specifies the second-stage compressor to use. If set to B<none>,
B<chunks> will be limited to 1, as chunked uncompressed frames offer no
benefit.


=over 4


=item B<none>


=item B<snappy>


=back


Default value is B<snappy>.


=back



=head2 jpeg2000


The native jpeg 2000 encoder is lossy by default, the C<-q:v>
option can be used to set the encoding quality. Lossless encoding
can be selected with C<-pred 1>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<format> I<integer>

Can be set to either C<j2k> or C<jp2> (the default) that
makes it possible to store non-rgb pix_fmts.


=item B<tile_width> I<integer>

Sets tile width. Range is 1 to 1073741824. Default is 256.


=item B<tile_height> I<integer>

Sets tile height. Range is 1 to 1073741824. Default is 256.


=item B<pred> I<integer>

Allows setting the discrete wavelet transform (DWT) type

=over 4


=item B<dwt97int (Lossy)>


=item B<dwt53 (Lossless)>


=back

Default is C<dwt97int>


=item B<sop> I<boolean>

Enable this to add SOP marker at the start of each packet. Disabled by default.


=item B<eph> I<boolean>

Enable this to add EPH marker at the end of each packet header. Disabled by default.


=item B<prog> I<integer>

Sets the progression order to be used by the encoder.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item B<lrcp>


=item B<rlcp>


=item B<rpcl>


=item B<pcrl>


=item B<cprl>


=back

Set to C<lrcp> by default.


=item B<layer_rates> I<string>

By default, when this option is not used, compression is done using the quality metric.
This option allows for compression using compression ratio. The compression ratio for each
level could be specified. The compression ratio of a layer C<l> species the what ratio of
total file size is contained in the first C<l> layers.

Example usage:

	
	ffmpeg -i input.bmp -c:v jpeg2000 -layer_rates "100,10,1" output.j2k


This would compress the image to contain 3 layers, where the data contained in the
first layer would be compressed by 1000 times, compressed by 100 in the first two layers,
and shall contain all data while using all 3 layers.


=back



=head2 librav1e


rav1e AV1 encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the rav1e headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-librav1e>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<qmax>

Sets the maximum quantizer to use when using bitrate mode.


=item B<qmin>

Sets the minimum quantizer to use when using bitrate mode.


=item B<qp>

Uses quantizer mode to encode at the given quantizer (0-255).


=item B<speed>

Selects the speed preset (0-10) to encode with.


=item B<tiles>

Selects how many tiles to encode with.


=item B<tile-rows>

Selects how many rows of tiles to encode with.


=item B<tile-columns>

Selects how many columns of tiles to encode with.


=item B<rav1e-params>

Set rav1e options using a list of I<key>=I<value> pairs separated
by ":". See B<rav1e --help> for a list of options.

For example to specify librav1e encoding options with B<-rav1e-params>:

	
	ffmpeg -i input -c:v librav1e -b:v 500K -rav1e-params speed=5:low_latency=true output.mp4



=back



=head2 libaom-av1


libaom AV1 encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libaom headers and library during
configuration.  You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libaom>.


=head3 Options


The wrapper supports the following standard libavcodec options:


=over 4



=item B<b>

Set bitrate target in bits/second.  By default this will use
variable-bitrate mode.  If B<maxrate> and B<minrate> are
also set to the same value then it will use constant-bitrate mode,
otherwise if B<crf> is set as well then it will use
constrained-quality mode.


=item B<g keyint_min>

Set key frame placement.  The GOP size sets the maximum distance between
key frames; if zero the output stream will be intra-only.  The minimum
distance is ignored unless it is the same as the GOP size, in which case
key frames will always appear at a fixed interval.  Not set by default,
so without this option the library has completely free choice about
where to place key frames.


=item B<qmin qmax>

Set minimum/maximum quantisation values.  Valid range is from 0 to 63
(warning: this does not match the quantiser values actually used by AV1
- divide by four to map real quantiser values to this range).  Defaults
to min/max (no constraint).


=item B<minrate maxrate bufsize rc_init_occupancy>

Set rate control buffering parameters.  Not used if not set - defaults
to unconstrained variable bitrate.


=item B<threads>

Set the number of threads to use while encoding.  This may require the
B<tiles> or B<row-mt> options to also be set to actually
use the specified number of threads fully. Defaults to the number of
hardware threads supported by the host machine.


=item B<profile>

Set the encoding profile.  Defaults to using the profile which matches
the bit depth and chroma subsampling of the input.


=back


The wrapper also has some specific options:


=over 4



=item B<cpu-used>

Set the quality/encoding speed tradeoff.  Valid range is from 0 to 8,
higher numbers indicating greater speed and lower quality.  The default
value is 1, which will be slow and high quality.


=item B<auto-alt-ref>

Enable use of alternate reference frames.  Defaults to the internal
default of the library.


=item B<arnr-max-frames (>I<frames>B<)>

Set altref noise reduction max frame count. Default is -1.


=item B<arnr-strength (>I<strength>B<)>

Set altref noise reduction filter strength. Range is -1 to 6. Default is -1.


=item B<aq-mode (>I<aq-mode>B<)>

Set adaptive quantization mode. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<none (>I<0>B<)>

Disabled.


=item B<variance (>I<1>B<)>

Variance-based.


=item B<complexity (>I<2>B<)>

Complexity-based.


=item B<cyclic (>I<3>B<)>

Cyclic refresh.

=back



=item B<tune (>I<tune>B<)>

Set the distortion metric the encoder is tuned with. Default is C<psnr>.


=over 4


=item B<psnr (>I<0>B<)>



=item B<ssim (>I<1>B<)>


=back



=item B<lag-in-frames>

Set the maximum number of frames which the encoder may keep in flight
at any one time for lookahead purposes.  Defaults to the internal
default of the library.


=item B<error-resilience>

Enable error resilience features:

=over 4


=item B<default>

Improve resilience against losses of whole frames.

=back

Not enabled by default.


=item B<crf>

Set the quality/size tradeoff for constant-quality (no bitrate target)
and constrained-quality (with maximum bitrate target) modes. Valid
range is 0 to 63, higher numbers indicating lower quality and smaller
output size.  Only used if set; by default only the bitrate target is
used.


=item B<static-thresh>

Set a change threshold on blocks below which they will be skipped by
the encoder.  Defined in arbitrary units as a nonnegative integer,
defaulting to zero (no blocks are skipped).


=item B<drop-threshold>

Set a threshold for dropping frames when close to rate control bounds.
Defined as a percentage of the target buffer - when the rate control
buffer falls below this percentage, frames will be dropped until it
has refilled above the threshold.  Defaults to zero (no frames are
dropped).


=item B<denoise-noise-level (>I<level>B<)>

Amount of noise to be removed for grain synthesis. Grain synthesis is disabled if
this option is not set or set to 0.


=item B<denoise-block-size (>I<pixels>B<)>

Block size used for denoising for grain synthesis. If not set, AV1 codec
uses the default value of 32.


=item B<undershoot-pct (>I<pct>B<)>

Set datarate undershoot (min) percentage of the target bitrate. Range is -1 to 100.
Default is -1.


=item B<overshoot-pct (>I<pct>B<)>

Set datarate overshoot (max) percentage of the target bitrate. Range is -1 to 1000.
Default is -1.


=item B<minsection-pct (>I<pct>B<)>

Minimum percentage variation of the GOP bitrate from the target bitrate. If minsection-pct
is not set, the libaomenc wrapper computes it as follows: C<(minrate * 100 / bitrate)>.
Range is -1 to 100. Default is -1 (unset).


=item B<maxsection-pct (>I<pct>B<)>

Maximum percentage variation of the GOP bitrate from the target bitrate. If maxsection-pct
is not set, the libaomenc wrapper computes it as follows: C<(maxrate * 100 / bitrate)>.
Range is -1 to 5000. Default is -1 (unset).


=item B<frame-parallel (>I<boolean>B<)>

Enable frame parallel decodability features. Default is true.


=item B<tiles>

Set the number of tiles to encode the input video with, as columns x
rows.  Larger numbers allow greater parallelism in both encoding and
decoding, but may decrease coding efficiency.  Defaults to the minimum
number of tiles required by the size of the input video (this is 1x1
(that is, a single tile) for sizes up to and including 4K).


=item B<tile-columns tile-rows>

Set the number of tiles as log2 of the number of tile rows and columns.
Provided for compatibility with libvpx/VP9.


=item B<row-mt (Requires libaom E<gt>= 1.0.0-759-g90a15f4f2)>

Enable row based multi-threading. Disabled by default.


=item B<enable-cdef (>I<boolean>B<)>

Enable Constrained Directional Enhancement Filter. The libaom-av1
encoder enables CDEF by default.


=item B<enable-restoration (>I<boolean>B<)>

Enable Loop Restoration Filter. Default is true for libaom-av1.


=item B<enable-global-motion (>I<boolean>B<)>

Enable the use of global motion for block prediction. Default is true.


=item B<enable-intrabc (>I<boolean>B<)>

Enable block copy mode for intra block prediction. This mode is
useful for screen content. Default is true.


=item B<enable-rect-partitions (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable rectangular partitions. Default is true.


=item B<enable-1to4-partitions (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable 1:4/4:1 partitions. Default is true.


=item B<enable-ab-partitions (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable AB shape partitions. Default is true.


=item B<enable-angle-delta (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable angle delta intra prediction. Default is true.


=item B<enable-cfl-intra (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable chroma predicted from luma intra prediction. Default is true.


=item B<enable-filter-intra (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable filter intra predictor. Default is true.


=item B<enable-intra-edge-filter (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable intra edge filter. Default is true.


=item B<enable-smooth-intra (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable smooth intra prediction mode. Default is true.


=item B<enable-paeth-intra (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable paeth predictor in intra prediction. Default is true.


=item B<enable-palette (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable palette prediction mode. Default is true.


=item B<enable-flip-idtx (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable extended transform type, including FLIPADST_DCT, DCT_FLIPADST,
FLIPADST_FLIPADST, ADST_FLIPADST, FLIPADST_ADST, IDTX, V_DCT, H_DCT,
V_ADST, H_ADST, V_FLIPADST, H_FLIPADST. Default is true.


=item B<enable-tx64 (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable 64-pt transform. Default is true.


=item B<reduced-tx-type-set (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Use reduced set of transform types. Default is false.


=item B<use-intra-dct-only (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Use DCT only for INTRA modes. Default is false.


=item B<use-inter-dct-only (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Use DCT only for INTER modes. Default is false.


=item B<use-intra-default-tx-only (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Use Default-transform only for INTRA modes. Default is false.


=item B<enable-ref-frame-mvs (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable temporal mv prediction. Default is true.


=item B<enable-reduced-reference-set (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Use reduced set of single and compound references. Default is false.


=item B<enable-obmc (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable obmc. Default is true.


=item B<enable-dual-filter (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable dual filter. Default is true.


=item B<enable-diff-wtd-comp (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable difference-weighted compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-dist-wtd-comp (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable distance-weighted compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-onesided-comp (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable one sided compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-interinter-wedge (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable interinter wedge compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-interintra-wedge (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable interintra wedge compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-masked-comp (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable masked compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-interintra-comp (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable interintra compound. Default is true.


=item B<enable-smooth-interintra (>I<boolean>B<) (Requires libaom E<gt>= v2.0.0)>

Enable smooth interintra mode. Default is true.


=item B<aom-params>

Set libaom options using a list of I<key>=I<value> pairs separated
by ":". For a list of supported options, see B<aomenc --help> under the
section "AV1 Specific Options".

For example to specify libaom encoding options with B<-aom-params>:

	
	ffmpeg -i input -c:v libaom-av1 -b:v 500K -aom-params tune=psnr:enable-tpl-model=1 output.mp4



=back



=head2 libsvtav1


SVT-AV1 encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the SVT-AV1 headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libsvtav1>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<profile>

Set the encoding profile.

=over 4


=item B<main>


=item B<high>


=item B<professional>


=back



=item B<level>

Set the operating point level. For example: '4.0'


=item B<hielevel>

Set the Hierarchical prediction levels.

=over 4


=item B<3level>


=item B<4level>

This is the default.

=back



=item B<tier>

Set the operating point tier.

=over 4


=item B<main>

This is the default.

=item B<high>


=back



=item B<qmax>

Set the maximum quantizer to use when using a bitrate mode.


=item B<qmin>

Set the minimum quantizer to use when using a bitrate mode.


=item B<crf>

Constant rate factor value used in crf rate control mode (0-63).


=item B<qp>

Set the quantizer used in cqp rate control mode (0-63).


=item B<sc_detection>

Enable scene change detection.


=item B<la_depth>

Set number of frames to look ahead (0-120).


=item B<preset>

Set the quality-speed tradeoff, in the range 0 to 13.  Higher values are
faster but lower quality.


=item B<tile_rows>

Set log2 of the number of rows of tiles to use (0-6).


=item B<tile_columns>

Set log2 of the number of columns of tiles to use (0-4).


=item B<svtav1-params>

Set SVT-AV1 options using a list of I<key>=I<value> pairs separated
by ":". See the SVT-AV1 encoder user guide for a list of accepted parameters.


=back



=head2 libjxl


libjxl JPEG XL encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libjxl headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libjxl>.


=head3 Options


The libjxl wrapper supports the following options:


=over 4



=item B<distance>

Set the target Butteraugli distance. This is a quality setting: lower
distance yields higher quality, with distance=1.0 roughly comparable to
libjpeg Quality 90 for photographic content. Setting distance=0.0 yields
true lossless encoding. Valid values range between 0.0 and 15.0, and sane
values rarely exceed 5.0. Setting distance=0.1 usually attains
transparency for most input. The default is 1.0.


=item B<effort>

Set the encoding effort used. Higher effort values produce more consistent
quality and usually produces a better quality/bpp curve, at the cost of
more CPU time required. Valid values range from 1 to 9, and the default is 7.


=item B<modular>

Force the encoder to use Modular mode instead of choosing automatically. The
default is to use VarDCT for lossy encoding and Modular for lossless. VarDCT
is generally superior to Modular for lossy encoding but does not support
lossless encoding.


=back



=head2 libkvazaar


Kvazaar H.265/HEVC encoder.

Requires the presence of the libkvazaar headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
B<--enable-libkvazaar>.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<b>

Set target video bitrate in bit/s and enable rate control.


=item B<kvazaar-params>

Set kvazaar parameters as a list of I<name>=I<value> pairs separated
by commas (,). See kvazaar documentation for a list of options.


=back



=head2 libopenh264


Cisco libopenh264 H.264/MPEG-4 AVC encoder wrapper.

This encoder requires the presence of the libopenh264 headers and
library during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the
build with C<--enable-libopenh264>. The library is detected using
B<pkg-config>.

For more information about the library see
E<lt>B<http://www.openh264.org>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


The following FFmpeg global options affect the configurations of the
libopenh264 encoder.


=over 4


=item B<b>

Set the bitrate (as a number of bits per second).


=item B<g>

Set the GOP size.


=item B<maxrate>

Set the max bitrate (as a number of bits per second).


=item B<flags +global_header>

Set global header in the bitstream.


=item B<slices>

Set the number of slices, used in parallelized encoding. Default value
is 0. This is only used when B<slice_mode> is set to
B<fixed>.


=item B<loopfilter>

Enable loop filter, if set to 1 (automatically enabled). To disable
set a value of 0.


=item B<profile>

Set profile restrictions. If set to the value of B<main> enable
CABAC (set the C<SEncParamExt.iEntropyCodingModeFlag> flag to 1).


=item B<max_nal_size>

Set maximum NAL size in bytes.


=item B<allow_skip_frames>

Allow skipping frames to hit the target bitrate if set to 1.

=back



=head2 libtheora


libtheora Theora encoder wrapper.

Requires the presence of the libtheora headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libtheora>.

For more information about the libtheora project see
E<lt>B<http://www.theora.org/>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


The following global options are mapped to internal libtheora options
which affect the quality and the bitrate of the encoded stream.


=over 4


=item B<b>

Set the video bitrate in bit/s for CBR (Constant Bit Rate) mode.  In
case VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode is enabled this option is ignored.


=item B<flags>

Used to enable constant quality mode (VBR) encoding through the
B<qscale> flag, and to enable the C<pass1> and C<pass2>
modes.


=item B<g>

Set the GOP size.


=item B<global_quality>

Set the global quality as an integer in lambda units.

Only relevant when VBR mode is enabled with C<flags +qscale>. The
value is converted to QP units by dividing it by C<FF_QP2LAMBDA>,
clipped in the [0 - 10] range, and then multiplied by 6.3 to get a
value in the native libtheora range [0-63]. A higher value corresponds
to a higher quality.


=item B<q>

Enable VBR mode when set to a non-negative value, and set constant
quality value as a double floating point value in QP units.

The value is clipped in the [0-10] range, and then multiplied by 6.3
to get a value in the native libtheora range [0-63].

This option is valid only using the B<ffmpeg> command-line
tool. For library interface users, use B<global_quality>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Set maximum constant quality (VBR) encoding with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -codec:v libtheora -q:v 10 OUTPUT.ogg



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to convert a CBR 1000 kbps Theora video stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -codec:v libtheora -b:v 1000k OUTPUT.ogg


=back



=head2 libvpx


VP8/VP9 format supported through libvpx.

Requires the presence of the libvpx headers and library during configuration.
You need to explicitly configure the build with C<--enable-libvpx>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libvpx wrapper. The
B<vpxenc>-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses
for easy migration.

To reduce the duplication of documentation, only the private options
and some others requiring special attention are documented here. For
the documentation of the undocumented generic options, see
B<the Codec Options chapter>.

To get more documentation of the libvpx options, invoke the command
B<ffmpeg -h encoder=libvpx>, B<ffmpeg -h encoder=libvpx-vp9> or
B<vpxenc --help>. Further information is available in the libvpx API
documentation.


=over 4



=item B<b (>I<target-bitrate>B<)>

Set bitrate in bits/s. Note that FFmpeg's B<b> option is
expressed in bits/s, while B<vpxenc>'s B<target-bitrate> is in
kilobits/s.


=item B<g (>I<kf-max-dist>B<)>



=item B<keyint_min (>I<kf-min-dist>B<)>



=item B<qmin (>I<min-q>B<)>

Minimum (Best Quality) Quantizer.


=item B<qmax (>I<max-q>B<)>

Maximum (Worst Quality) Quantizer.
Can be changed per-frame.


=item B<bufsize (>I<buf-sz>B<,> I<buf-optimal-sz>B<)>

Set ratecontrol buffer size (in bits). Note B<vpxenc>'s options are
specified in milliseconds, the libvpx wrapper converts this value as follows:
C<buf-sz = bufsize * 1000 / bitrate>,
C<buf-optimal-sz = bufsize * 1000 / bitrate * 5 / 6>.


=item B<rc_init_occupancy (>I<buf-initial-sz>B<)>

Set number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before decoding
starts. Note B<vpxenc>'s option is specified in milliseconds, the libvpx
wrapper converts this value as follows:
C<rc_init_occupancy * 1000 / bitrate>.


=item B<undershoot-pct>

Set datarate undershoot (min) percentage of the target bitrate.


=item B<overshoot-pct>

Set datarate overshoot (max) percentage of the target bitrate.


=item B<skip_threshold (>I<drop-frame>B<)>



=item B<qcomp (>I<bias-pct>B<)>



=item B<maxrate (>I<maxsection-pct>B<)>

Set GOP max bitrate in bits/s. Note B<vpxenc>'s option is specified as a
percentage of the target bitrate, the libvpx wrapper converts this value as
follows: C<(maxrate * 100 / bitrate)>.


=item B<minrate (>I<minsection-pct>B<)>

Set GOP min bitrate in bits/s. Note B<vpxenc>'s option is specified as a
percentage of the target bitrate, the libvpx wrapper converts this value as
follows: C<(minrate * 100 / bitrate)>.


=item B<minrate, maxrate, b> I<end-usage=cbr>

C<(minrate == maxrate == bitrate)>.


=item B<crf (>I<end-usage=cq>B<,> I<cq-level>B<)>



=item B<tune (>I<tune>B<)>


=over 4


=item B<psnr (>I<psnr>B<)>


=item B<ssim (>I<ssim>B<)>


=back



=item B<quality, deadline (>I<deadline>B<)>


=over 4


=item B<best>

Use best quality deadline. Poorly named and quite slow, this option should be
avoided as it may give worse quality output than good.

=item B<good>

Use good quality deadline. This is a good trade-off between speed and quality
when used with the B<cpu-used> option.

=item B<realtime>

Use realtime quality deadline.

=back



=item B<speed, cpu-used (>I<cpu-used>B<)>

Set quality/speed ratio modifier. Higher values speed up the encode at the cost
of quality.


=item B<nr (>I<noise-sensitivity>B<)>



=item B<static-thresh>

Set a change threshold on blocks below which they will be skipped by the
encoder.


=item B<slices (>I<token-parts>B<)>

Note that FFmpeg's B<slices> option gives the total number of partitions,
while B<vpxenc>'s B<token-parts> is given as
C<log2(partitions)>.


=item B<max-intra-rate>

Set maximum I-frame bitrate as a percentage of the target bitrate. A value of 0
means unlimited.


=item B<force_key_frames>

C<VPX_EFLAG_FORCE_KF>


=item B<Alternate reference frame related>


=over 4


=item B<auto-alt-ref>

Enable use of alternate reference frames (2-pass only).
Values greater than 1 enable multi-layer alternate reference frames (VP9 only).

=item B<arnr-maxframes>

Set altref noise reduction max frame count.

=item B<arnr-type>

Set altref noise reduction filter type: backward, forward, centered.

=item B<arnr-strength>

Set altref noise reduction filter strength.

=item B<rc-lookahead, lag-in-frames (>I<lag-in-frames>B<)>

Set number of frames to look ahead for frametype and ratecontrol.

=item B<min-gf-interval>

Set minimum golden/alternate reference frame interval (VP9 only).

=back



=item B<error-resilient>

Enable error resiliency features.


=item B<sharpness> I<integer>

Increase sharpness at the expense of lower PSNR.
The valid range is [0, 7].


=item B<ts-parameters>

Sets the temporal scalability configuration using a :-separated list of
key=value pairs. For example, to specify temporal scalability parameters
with C<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v libvpx -ts-parameters ts_number_layers=3:\
	ts_target_bitrate=250,500,1000:ts_rate_decimator=4,2,1:\
	ts_periodicity=4:ts_layer_id=0,2,1,2:ts_layering_mode=3 OUTPUT

Below is a brief explanation of each of the parameters, please
refer to C<struct vpx_codec_enc_cfg> in C<vpx/vpx_encoder.h> for more
details.

=over 4


=item B<ts_number_layers>

Number of temporal coding layers.

=item B<ts_target_bitrate>

Target bitrate for each temporal layer (in kbps).
(bitrate should be inclusive of the lower temporal layer).

=item B<ts_rate_decimator>

Frame rate decimation factor for each temporal layer.

=item B<ts_periodicity>

Length of the sequence defining frame temporal layer membership.

=item B<ts_layer_id>

Template defining the membership of frames to temporal layers.

=item B<ts_layering_mode>

(optional) Selecting the temporal structure from a set of pre-defined temporal layering modes.
Currently supports the following options.

=over 4


=item B<0>

No temporal layering flags are provided internally,
relies on flags being passed in using C<metadata> field in C<AVFrame>
with following keys.

=over 4


=item B<vp8-flags>

Sets the flags passed into the encoder to indicate the referencing scheme for
the current frame.
Refer to function C<vpx_codec_encode> in C<vpx/vpx_encoder.h> for more
details.

=item B<temporal_id>

Explicitly sets the temporal id of the current frame to encode.

=back


=item B<2>

Two temporal layers. 0-1...

=item B<3>

Three temporal layers. 0-2-1-2...; with single reference frame.

=item B<4>

Same as option "3", except there is a dependency between
the two temporal layer 2 frames within the temporal period.

=back


=back



=item B<VP8-specific options>


=over 4


=item B<screen-content-mode>

Screen content mode, one of: 0 (off), 1 (screen), 2 (screen with more aggressive rate control).

=back



=item B<VP9-specific options>


=over 4


=item B<lossless>

Enable lossless mode.

=item B<tile-columns>

Set number of tile columns to use. Note this is given as
C<log2(tile_columns)>. For example, 8 tile columns would be requested by
setting the B<tile-columns> option to 3.

=item B<tile-rows>

Set number of tile rows to use. Note this is given as C<log2(tile_rows)>.
For example, 4 tile rows would be requested by setting the B<tile-rows>
option to 2.

=item B<frame-parallel>

Enable frame parallel decodability features.

=item B<aq-mode>

Set adaptive quantization mode (0: off (default), 1: variance 2: complexity, 3:
cyclic refresh, 4: equator360).

=item B<colorspace> I<color-space>

Set input color space. The VP9 bitstream supports signaling the following
colorspaces:

=over 4


=item B<B<rgb> I<sRGB>>


=item B<B<bt709> I<bt709>>


=item B<B<unspecified> I<unknown>>


=item B<B<bt470bg> I<bt601>>


=item B<B<smpte170m> I<smpte170>>


=item B<B<smpte240m> I<smpte240>>


=item B<B<bt2020_ncl> I<bt2020>>


=back


=item B<row-mt> I<boolean>

Enable row based multi-threading.

=item B<tune-content>

Set content type: default (0), screen (1), film (2).

=item B<corpus-complexity>

Corpus VBR mode is a variant of standard VBR where the complexity distribution
midpoint is passed in rather than calculated for a specific clip or chunk.

The valid range is [0, 10000]. 0 (default) uses standard VBR.

=item B<enable-tpl> I<boolean>

Enable temporal dependency model.

=item B<ref-frame-config>

Using per-frame metadata, set members of the structure C<vpx_svc_ref_frame_config_t> in C<vpx/vp8cx.h> to fine-control referencing schemes and frame buffer management.
Use a :-separated list of key=value pairs.
For example,
	
	av_dict_set(&av_frame->metadata, "ref-frame-config", \
	"rfc_update_buffer_slot=7:rfc_lst_fb_idx=0:rfc_gld_fb_idx=1:rfc_alt_fb_idx=2:rfc_reference_last=0:rfc_reference_golden=0:rfc_reference_alt_ref=0");


=over 4


=item B<rfc_update_buffer_slot>

Indicates the buffer slot number to update

=item B<rfc_update_last>

Indicates whether to update the LAST frame

=item B<rfc_update_golden>

Indicates whether to update GOLDEN frame

=item B<rfc_update_alt_ref>

Indicates whether to update ALT_REF frame

=item B<rfc_lst_fb_idx>

LAST frame buffer index

=item B<rfc_gld_fb_idx>

GOLDEN frame buffer index

=item B<rfc_alt_fb_idx>

ALT_REF frame buffer index

=item B<rfc_reference_last>

Indicates whether to reference LAST frame

=item B<rfc_reference_golden>

Indicates whether to reference GOLDEN frame

=item B<rfc_reference_alt_ref>

Indicates whether to reference ALT_REF frame

=item B<rfc_reference_duration>

Indicates frame duration

=back


=back



=back


For more information about libvpx see:
E<lt>B<http://www.webmproject.org/>E<gt>


=head2 libvvenc


VVenC H.266/VVC encoder wrapper.

This encoder requires the presence of the libvvenc headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
B<--enable-libvvenc>.

The VVenC project website is at
E<lt>B<https://github.com/fraunhoferhhi/vvenc>E<gt>.


=head3 Supported Pixel Formats


VVenC supports only 10-bit color spaces as input. But the internal (encoded)
bit depth can be set to 8-bit or 10-bit at runtime.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<b>

Sets target video bitrate.


=item B<g>

Set the GOP size. Currently support for g=1 (Intra only) or default.


=item B<preset>

Set the VVenC preset.


=item B<levelidc>

Set level idc.


=item B<tier>

Set vvc tier.


=item B<qp>

Set constant quantization parameter.


=item B<subopt> I<boolean>

Set subjective (perceptually motivated) optimization. Default is 1 (on).


=item B<bitdepth8> I<boolean>

Set 8bit coding mode instead of using 10bit. Default is 0 (off).


=item B<period>

set (intra) refresh period in seconds.


=item B<vvenc-params>

Set vvenc options using a list of I<key>=I<value> couples separated
by ":". See B<vvencapp --fullhelp> or B<vvencFFapp --fullhelp> for a list of options.

For example, the options might be provided as:

	
	intraperiod=64:decodingrefreshtype=idr:poc0idr=1:internalbitdepth=8


For example the encoding options might be provided with B<-vvenc-params>:

	
	ffmpeg -i input -c:v libvvenc -b 1M -vvenc-params intraperiod=64:decodingrefreshtype=idr:poc0idr=1:internalbitdepth=8 output.mp4



=back



=head2 libwebp


libwebp WebP Image encoder wrapper

libwebp is Google's official encoder for WebP images. It can encode in either
lossy or lossless mode. Lossy images are essentially a wrapper around a VP8
frame. Lossless images are a separate codec developed by Google.


=head3 Pixel Format


Currently, libwebp only supports YUV420 for lossy and RGB for lossless due
to limitations of the format and libwebp. Alpha is supported for either mode.
Because of API limitations, if RGB is passed in when encoding lossy or YUV is
passed in for encoding lossless, the pixel format will automatically be
converted using functions from libwebp. This is not ideal and is done only for
convenience.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<-lossless> I<boolean>

Enables/Disables use of lossless mode. Default is 0.


=item B<-compression_level> I<integer>

For lossy, this is a quality/speed tradeoff. Higher values give better quality
for a given size at the cost of increased encoding time. For lossless, this is
a size/speed tradeoff. Higher values give smaller size at the cost of increased
encoding time. More specifically, it controls the number of extra algorithms
and compression tools used, and varies the combination of these tools. This
maps to the I<method> option in libwebp. The valid range is 0 to 6.
Default is 4.


=item B<-quality> I<float>

For lossy encoding, this controls image quality. For lossless encoding, this
controls the effort and time spent in compression.
Range is 0 to 100. Default is 75.


=item B<-preset> I<type>

Configuration preset. This does some automatic settings based on the general
type of the image.

=over 4


=item B<none>

Do not use a preset.

=item B<default>

Use the encoder default.

=item B<picture>

Digital picture, like portrait, inner shot

=item B<photo>

Outdoor photograph, with natural lighting

=item B<drawing>

Hand or line drawing, with high-contrast details

=item B<icon>

Small-sized colorful images

=item B<text>

Text-like

=back



=back



=head2 libx264, libx264rgb


x264 H.264/MPEG-4 AVC encoder wrapper.

This encoder requires the presence of the libx264 headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libx264>.

libx264 supports an impressive number of features, including 8x8 and
4x4 adaptive spatial transform, adaptive B-frame placement, CAVLC/CABAC
entropy coding, interlacing (MBAFF), lossless mode, psy optimizations
for detail retention (adaptive quantization, psy-RD, psy-trellis).

Many libx264 encoder options are mapped to FFmpeg global codec
options, while unique encoder options are provided through private
options. Additionally the B<x264opts> and B<x264-params>
private options allows one to pass a list of key=value tuples as accepted
by the libx264 C<x264_param_parse> function.

The x264 project website is at
E<lt>B<http://www.videolan.org/developers/x264.html>E<gt>.

The libx264rgb encoder is the same as libx264, except it accepts packed RGB
pixel formats as input instead of YUV.


=head3 Supported Pixel Formats


x264 supports 8- to 10-bit color spaces. The exact bit depth is controlled at
x264's configure time.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libx264 wrapper. The
B<x264>-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses
for easy migration.

To reduce the duplication of documentation, only the private options
and some others requiring special attention are documented here. For
the documentation of the undocumented generic options, see
B<the Codec Options chapter>.

To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libx264
options, invoke the command B<x264 --fullhelp> or consult
the libx264 documentation.

In the list below, note that the B<x264> option name is shown
in parentheses after the libavcodec corresponding name, in case there
is a direct mapping.


=over 4


=item B<b (>I<bitrate>B<)>

Set bitrate in bits/s. Note that FFmpeg's B<b> option is
expressed in bits/s, while B<x264>'s B<bitrate> is in
kilobits/s.


=item B<bf (>I<bframes>B<)>

Number of B-frames between I and P-frames


=item B<g (>I<keyint>B<)>

Maximum GOP size


=item B<qmin (>I<qpmin>B<)>

Minimum quantizer scale


=item B<qmax (>I<qpmax>B<)>

Maximum quantizer scale


=item B<qdiff (>I<qpstep>B<)>

Maximum difference between quantizer scales


=item B<qblur (>I<qblur>B<)>

Quantizer curve blur


=item B<qcomp (>I<qcomp>B<)>

Quantizer curve compression factor


=item B<refs (>I<ref>B<)>

Number of reference frames each P-frame can use. The range is I<0-16>.


=item B<level (>I<level>B<)>

Set the C<x264_param_t.i_level_idc> value in case the value is
positive, it is ignored otherwise.

This value can be set using the C<AVCodecContext> API (e.g. by
setting the C<AVCodecContext> value directly), and is specified as
an integer mapped on a corresponding level (e.g. the value 31 maps
to H.264 level IDC "3.1", as defined in the C<x264_levels>
table). It is ignored when set to a non positive value.

Alternatively it can be set as a private option, overriding the value
set in C<AVCodecContext>, and in this case must be specified as
the level IDC identifier (e.g. "3.1"), as defined by H.264 Annex A.


=item B<sc_threshold (>I<scenecut>B<)>

Sets the threshold for the scene change detection.


=item B<trellis (>I<trellis>B<)>

Performs Trellis quantization to increase efficiency. Enabled by default.


=item B<nr (>I<nr>B<)>

Noise reduction


=item B<me_range (>I<merange>B<)>

Maximum range of the motion search in pixels.


=item B<me_method (>I<me>B<)>

Set motion estimation method. Possible values in the decreasing order
of speed:


=over 4


=item B<dia (>I<dia>B<)>


=item B<epzs (>I<dia>B<)>

Diamond search with radius 1 (fastest). B<epzs> is an alias for
B<dia>.

=item B<hex (>I<hex>B<)>

Hexagonal search with radius 2.

=item B<umh (>I<umh>B<)>

Uneven multi-hexagon search.

=item B<esa (>I<esa>B<)>

Exhaustive search.

=item B<tesa (>I<tesa>B<)>

Hadamard exhaustive search (slowest).

=back



=item B<forced-idr>

Normally, when forcing a I-frame type, the encoder can select any type
of I-frame. This option forces it to choose an IDR-frame.


=item B<subq (>I<subme>B<)>

Sub-pixel motion estimation method.


=item B<b_strategy (>I<b-adapt>B<)>

Adaptive B-frame placement decision algorithm. Use only on first-pass.


=item B<keyint_min (>I<min-keyint>B<)>

Minimum GOP size.


=item B<coder>

Set entropy encoder. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<ac>

Enable CABAC.


=item B<vlc>

Enable CAVLC and disable CABAC. It generates the same effect as
B<x264>'s B<--no-cabac> option.

=back



=item B<cmp>

Set full pixel motion estimation comparison algorithm. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<chroma>

Enable chroma in motion estimation.


=item B<sad>

Ignore chroma in motion estimation. It generates the same effect as
B<x264>'s B<--no-chroma-me> option.

=back



=item B<threads (>I<threads>B<)>

Number of encoding threads.


=item B<thread_type>

Set multithreading technique. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<slice>

Slice-based multithreading. It generates the same effect as
B<x264>'s B<--sliced-threads> option.

=item B<frame>

Frame-based multithreading.

=back



=item B<flags>

Set encoding flags. It can be used to disable closed GOP and enable
open GOP by setting it to C<-cgop>. The result is similar to
the behavior of B<x264>'s B<--open-gop> option.


=item B<rc_init_occupancy (>I<vbv-init>B<)>

Initial VBV buffer occupancy


=item B<preset (>I<preset>B<)>

Set the encoding preset.


=item B<tune (>I<tune>B<)>

Set tuning of the encoding params.


=item B<profile (>I<profile>B<)>

Set profile restrictions.


=item B<fastfirstpass>

Enable fast settings when encoding first pass, when set to 1. When set
to 0, it has the same effect of B<x264>'s
B<--slow-firstpass> option.


=item B<crf (>I<crf>B<)>

Set the quality for constant quality mode.


=item B<crf_max (>I<crf-max>B<)>

In CRF mode, prevents VBV from lowering quality beyond this point.


=item B<qp (>I<qp>B<)>

Set constant quantization rate control method parameter.


=item B<aq-mode (>I<aq-mode>B<)>

Set AQ method. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<none (>I<0>B<)>

Disabled.


=item B<variance (>I<1>B<)>

Variance AQ (complexity mask).


=item B<autovariance (>I<2>B<)>

Auto-variance AQ (experimental).

=back



=item B<aq-strength (>I<aq-strength>B<)>

Set AQ strength, reduce blocking and blurring in flat and textured areas.


=item B<psy>

Use psychovisual optimizations when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the
same effect as B<x264>'s B<--no-psy> option.


=item B<psy-rd (>I<psy-rd>B<)>

Set strength of psychovisual optimization, in
I<psy-rd>:I<psy-trellis> format.


=item B<rc-lookahead (>I<rc-lookahead>B<)>

Set number of frames to look ahead for frametype and ratecontrol.


=item B<weightb>

Enable weighted prediction for B-frames when set to 1. When set to 0,
it has the same effect as B<x264>'s B<--no-weightb> option.


=item B<weightp (>I<weightp>B<)>

Set weighted prediction method for P-frames. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<none (>I<0>B<)>

Disabled

=item B<simple (>I<1>B<)>

Enable only weighted refs

=item B<smart (>I<2>B<)>

Enable both weighted refs and duplicates

=back



=item B<ssim (>I<ssim>B<)>

Enable calculation and printing SSIM stats after the encoding.


=item B<intra-refresh (>I<intra-refresh>B<)>

Enable the use of Periodic Intra Refresh instead of IDR frames when set
to 1.


=item B<avcintra-class (>I<class>B<)>

Configure the encoder to generate AVC-Intra.
Valid values are 50, 100 and 200


=item B<bluray-compat (>I<bluray-compat>B<)>

Configure the encoder to be compatible with the bluray standard.
It is a shorthand for setting "bluray-compat=1 force-cfr=1".


=item B<b-bias (>I<b-bias>B<)>

Set the influence on how often B-frames are used.


=item B<b-pyramid (>I<b-pyramid>B<)>

Set method for keeping of some B-frames as references. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<none (>I<none>B<)>

Disabled.

=item B<strict (>I<strict>B<)>

Strictly hierarchical pyramid.

=item B<normal (>I<normal>B<)>

Non-strict (not Blu-ray compatible).

=back



=item B<mixed-refs>

Enable the use of one reference per partition, as opposed to one
reference per macroblock when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the
same effect as B<x264>'s B<--no-mixed-refs> option.


=item B<8x8dct>

Enable adaptive spatial transform (high profile 8x8 transform)
when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the same effect as
B<x264>'s B<--no-8x8dct> option.


=item B<fast-pskip>

Enable early SKIP detection on P-frames when set to 1. When set
to 0, it has the same effect as B<x264>'s
B<--no-fast-pskip> option.


=item B<aud (>I<aud>B<)>

Enable use of access unit delimiters when set to 1.


=item B<mbtree>

Enable use macroblock tree ratecontrol when set to 1. When set
to 0, it has the same effect as B<x264>'s
B<--no-mbtree> option.


=item B<deblock (>I<deblock>B<)>

Set loop filter parameters, in I<alpha>:I<beta> form.


=item B<cplxblur (>I<cplxblur>B<)>

Set fluctuations reduction in QP (before curve compression).


=item B<partitions (>I<partitions>B<)>

Set partitions to consider as a comma-separated list of values.
Possible values in the list:


=over 4


=item B<p8x8>

8x8 P-frame partition.

=item B<p4x4>

4x4 P-frame partition.

=item B<b8x8>

4x4 B-frame partition.

=item B<i8x8>

8x8 I-frame partition.

=item B<i4x4>

4x4 I-frame partition.
(Enabling B<p4x4> requires B<p8x8> to be enabled. Enabling
B<i8x8> requires adaptive spatial transform (B<8x8dct>
option) to be enabled.)

=item B<none (>I<none>B<)>

Do not consider any partitions.

=item B<all (>I<all>B<)>

Consider every partition.

=back



=item B<direct-pred (>I<direct>B<)>

Set direct MV prediction mode. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<none (>I<none>B<)>

Disable MV prediction.

=item B<spatial (>I<spatial>B<)>

Enable spatial predicting.

=item B<temporal (>I<temporal>B<)>

Enable temporal predicting.

=item B<auto (>I<auto>B<)>

Automatically decided.

=back



=item B<slice-max-size (>I<slice-max-size>B<)>

Set the limit of the size of each slice in bytes. If not specified
but RTP payload size (B<ps>) is specified, that is used.


=item B<stats (>I<stats>B<)>

Set the file name for multi-pass stats.


=item B<nal-hrd (>I<nal-hrd>B<)>

Set signal HRD information (requires B<vbv-bufsize> to be set).
Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<none (>I<none>B<)>

Disable HRD information signaling.

=item B<vbr (>I<vbr>B<)>

Variable bit rate.

=item B<cbr (>I<cbr>B<)>

Constant bit rate (not allowed in MP4 container).

=back



=item B<x264opts> I<opts>


=item B<x264-params> I<opts>

Override the x264 configuration using a :-separated list of key=value
options.

The argument for both options is a list of I<key>=I<value>
couples separated by ":". With B<x264opts> the value can be
omitted, and the value C<1> is assumed in that case.

For I<filter> and I<psy-rd> options values that use ":" as a
separator themselves, use "," instead. They accept it as well since
long ago but this is kept undocumented for some reason.

For example, the options might be provided as:
	
	level=30:bframes=0:weightp=0:cabac=0:ref=1:vbv-maxrate=768:vbv-bufsize=2000:analyse=all:me=umh:no-fast-pskip=1:subq=6:8x8dct=0:trellis=0


For example to specify libx264 encoding options with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i foo.mpg -c:v libx264 -x264opts keyint=123:min-keyint=20 -an out.mkv


To get the complete list of the libx264 options, invoke the command
B<x264 --fullhelp> or consult the libx264 documentation.


=item B<a53cc> I<boolean>

Import closed captions (which must be ATSC compatible format) into output.
Only the mpeg2 and h264 decoders provide these. Default is 1 (on).


=item B<udu_sei> I<boolean>

Import user data unregistered SEI if available into output. Default is 0 (off).


=item B<mb_info> I<boolean>

Set mb_info data through AVFrameSideData, only useful when used from the
API. Default is 0 (off).

=back


Encoding ffpresets for common usages are provided so they can be used with the
general presets system (e.g. passing the B<pre> option).


=head2 libx265


x265 H.265/HEVC encoder wrapper.

This encoder requires the presence of the libx265 headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
B<--enable-libx265>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<b>

Sets target video bitrate.


=item B<bf>



=item B<g>

Set the GOP size.


=item B<keyint_min>

Minimum GOP size.


=item B<refs>

Number of reference frames each P-frame can use. The range is from I<1-16>.


=item B<preset>

Set the x265 preset.


=item B<tune>

Set the x265 tune parameter.


=item B<profile>

Set profile restrictions.


=item B<crf>

Set the quality for constant quality mode.


=item B<qp>

Set constant quantization rate control method parameter.


=item B<qmin>

Minimum quantizer scale.


=item B<qmax>

Maximum quantizer scale.


=item B<qdiff>

Maximum difference between quantizer scales.


=item B<qblur>

Quantizer curve blur


=item B<qcomp>

Quantizer curve compression factor


=item B<i_qfactor>



=item B<b_qfactor>



=item B<forced-idr>

Normally, when forcing a I-frame type, the encoder can select any type
of I-frame. This option forces it to choose an IDR-frame.


=item B<udu_sei> I<boolean>

Import user data unregistered SEI if available into output. Default is 0 (off).


=item B<x265-params>

Set x265 options using a list of I<key>=I<value> couples separated
by ":". See B<x265 --help> for a list of options.

For example to specify libx265 encoding options with B<-x265-params>:

	
	ffmpeg -i input -c:v libx265 -x265-params crf=26:psy-rd=1 output.mp4


=back



=head2 libxavs2


xavs2 AVS2-P2/IEEE1857.4 encoder wrapper.

This encoder requires the presence of the libxavs2 headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
B<--enable-libxavs2>.

The following standard libavcodec options are used:

=over 4


=item *

B<b> / B<bit_rate>

=item *

B<g> / B<gop_size>

=item *

B<bf> / B<max_b_frames>

=back


The encoder also has its own specific options:

=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<lcu_row_threads>

Set the number of parallel threads for rows from 1 to 8 (default 5).


=item B<initial_qp>

Set the xavs2 quantization parameter from 1 to 63 (default 34). This is
used to set the initial qp for the first frame.


=item B<qp>

Set the xavs2 quantization parameter from 1 to 63 (default 34). This is
used to set the qp value under constant-QP mode.


=item B<max_qp>

Set the max qp for rate control from 1 to 63 (default 55).


=item B<min_qp>

Set the min qp for rate control from 1 to 63 (default 20).


=item B<speed_level>

Set the Speed level from 0 to 9 (default 0). Higher is better but slower.


=item B<log_level>

Set the log level from -1 to 3 (default 0). -1: none, 0: error,
1: warning, 2: info, 3: debug.


=item B<xavs2-params>

Set xavs2 options using a list of I<key>=I<value> couples separated
by ":".

For example to specify libxavs2 encoding options with B<-xavs2-params>:

	
	ffmpeg -i input -c:v libxavs2 -xavs2-params RdoqLevel=0 output.avs2


=back



=head2 libxeve


eXtra-fast Essential Video Encoder (XEVE) MPEG-5 EVC encoder wrapper.
The xeve-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses for easy migration.

This encoder requires the presence of the libxeve headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
B<--enable-libxeve>.


=over 4

Many libxeve encoder options are mapped to FFmpeg global codec options,
while unique encoder options are provided through private options.
Additionally the xeve-params private options allows one to pass a list
of key=value tuples as accepted by the libxeve C<parse_xeve_params> function.

=back


The xeve project website is at E<lt>B<https://github.com/mpeg5/xeve>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libxeve wrapper.
The xeve-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses for easy migration.


=over 4

To reduce the duplication of documentation, only the private options
and some others requiring special attention are documented here. For
the documentation of the undocumented generic options, see
B<the Codec Options chapter>.

=back



=over 4

To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libxeve options,
invoke the command  C<xeve_app --help> or consult the libxeve documentation.

=back



=over 4


=item B<b (>I<bitrate>B<)>

Set target video bitrate in bits/s.
Note that FFmpeg's b option is expressed in bits/s, while xeve's bitrate is in kilobits/s.


=item B<bf (>I<bframes>B<)>

Set the maximum number of B frames (1,3,7,15).


=item B<g (>I<keyint>B<)>

Set the GOP size (I-picture period).


=item B<preset (>I<preset>B<)>

Set the xeve preset.
Set the encoder preset value to determine encoding speed [fast, medium, slow, placebo]


=item B<tune (>I<tune>B<)>

Set the encoder tune parameter [psnr, zerolatency]


=item B<profile (>I<profile>B<)>

Set the encoder profile [0: baseline; 1: main]


=item B<crf (>I<crf>B<)>

Set the quality for constant quality mode.
Constant rate factor E<lt>10..49E<gt> [default: 32]


=item B<qp (>I<qp>B<)>

Set constant quantization rate control method parameter.
Quantization parameter qp E<lt>0..51E<gt> [default: 32]


=item B<threads (>I<threads>B<)>

Force to use a specific number of threads


=back



=head2 libxvid


Xvid MPEG-4 Part 2 encoder wrapper.

This encoder requires the presence of the libxvidcore headers and library
during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
C<--enable-libxvid --enable-gpl>.

The native C<mpeg4> encoder supports the MPEG-4 Part 2 format, so
users can encode to this format without this library.


=head3 Options


The following options are supported by the libxvid wrapper. Some of
the following options are listed but are not documented, and
correspond to shared codec options. See B<the Codec
Options chapter> for their documentation. The other shared options
which are not listed have no effect for the libxvid encoder.


=over 4


=item B<b>



=item B<g>



=item B<qmin>



=item B<qmax>



=item B<mpeg_quant>



=item B<threads>



=item B<bf>



=item B<b_qfactor>



=item B<b_qoffset>



=item B<flags>

Set specific encoding flags. Possible values:


=over 4



=item B<mv4>

Use four motion vector by macroblock.


=item B<aic>

Enable high quality AC prediction.


=item B<gray>

Only encode grayscale.


=item B<qpel>

Enable quarter-pixel motion compensation.


=item B<cgop>

Enable closed GOP.


=item B<global_header>

Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.


=back



=item B<gmc>

Enable the use of global motion compensation (GMC).  Default is 0
(disabled).


=item B<me_quality>

Set motion estimation quality level. Possible values in decreasing order of
speed and increasing order of quality:


=over 4


=item B<0>

Use no motion estimation (default).


=item B<1, 2>

Enable advanced diamond zonal search for 16x16 blocks and half-pixel
refinement for 16x16 blocks.


=item B<3, 4>

Enable all of the things described above, plus advanced diamond zonal
search for 8x8 blocks and half-pixel refinement for 8x8 blocks, also
enable motion estimation on chroma planes for P and B-frames.


=item B<5, 6>

Enable all of the things described above, plus extended 16x16 and 8x8
blocks search.

=back



=item B<mbd>

Set macroblock decision algorithm. Possible values in the increasing
order of quality:


=over 4


=item B<simple>

Use macroblock comparing function algorithm (default).


=item B<bits>

Enable rate distortion-based half pixel and quarter pixel refinement for
16x16 blocks.


=item B<rd>

Enable all of the things described above, plus rate distortion-based
half pixel and quarter pixel refinement for 8x8 blocks, and rate
distortion-based search using square pattern.

=back



=item B<lumi_aq>

Enable lumi masking adaptive quantization when set to 1. Default is 0
(disabled).


=item B<variance_aq>

Enable variance adaptive quantization when set to 1. Default is 0
(disabled).

When combined with B<lumi_aq>, the resulting quality will not
be better than any of the two specified individually. In other
words, the resulting quality will be the worse one of the two
effects.


=item B<trellis>

Set rate-distortion optimal quantization.


=item B<ssim>

Set structural similarity (SSIM) displaying method. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<off>

Disable displaying of SSIM information.


=item B<avg>

Output average SSIM at the end of encoding to stdout. The format of
showing the average SSIM is:

	
	Average SSIM: %f


For users who are not familiar with C, %f means a float number, or
a decimal (e.g. 0.939232).


=item B<frame>

Output both per-frame SSIM data during encoding and average SSIM at
the end of encoding to stdout. The format of per-frame information
is:

	
	       SSIM: avg: %1.3f min: %1.3f max: %1.3f


For users who are not familiar with C, %1.3f means a float number
rounded to 3 digits after the dot (e.g. 0.932).


=back



=item B<ssim_acc>

Set SSIM accuracy. Valid options are integers within the range of
0-4, while 0 gives the most accurate result and 4 computes the
fastest.


=back



=head2 MediaFoundation


This provides wrappers to encoders (both audio and video) in the
MediaFoundation framework. It can access both SW and HW encoders.
Video encoders can take input in either of nv12 or yuv420p form
(some encoders support both, some support only either - in practice,
nv12 is the safer choice, especially among HW encoders).


=head2 Microsoft RLE


Microsoft RLE aka MSRLE encoder.
Only 8-bit palette mode supported.
Compatible with Windows 3.1 and Windows 95.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<g> I<integer>

Keyframe interval.
A keyframe is inserted at least every C<-g> frames, sometimes sooner.

=back



=head2 mpeg2


MPEG-2 video encoder.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<profile>

Select the mpeg2 profile to encode:


=over 4


=item B<422>


=item B<high>


=item B<ss>

Spatially Scalable

=item B<snr>

SNR Scalable

=item B<main>


=item B<simple>


=back



=item B<level>

Select the mpeg2 level to encode:


=over 4


=item B<high>


=item B<high1440>


=item B<main>


=item B<low>


=back



=item B<seq_disp_ext> I<integer>

Specifies if the encoder should write a sequence_display_extension to the
output.

=over 4


=item B<-1>


=item B<auto>

Decide automatically to write it or not (this is the default) by checking if
the data to be written is different from the default or unspecified values.

=item B<0>


=item B<never>

Never write it.

=item B<1>


=item B<always>

Always write it.

=back


=item B<video_format> I<integer>

Specifies the video_format written into the sequence display extension
indicating the source of the video pictures. The default is B<unspecified>,
can be B<component>, B<pal>, B<ntsc>, B<secam> or B<mac>.
For maximum compatibility, use B<component>.

=item B<a53cc> I<boolean>

Import closed captions (which must be ATSC compatible format) into output.
Default is 1 (on).

=back



=head2 png


PNG image encoder.


=head3 Private options



=over 4


=item B<dpi> I<integer>

Set physical density of pixels, in dots per inch, unset by default

=item B<dpm> I<integer>

Set physical density of pixels, in dots per meter, unset by default

=back



=head2 ProRes


Apple ProRes encoder.

FFmpeg contains 2 ProRes encoders, the prores-aw and prores-ks encoder.
The used encoder can be chosen with the C<-vcodec> option.


=head3 Private Options for prores-ks



=over 4


=item B<profile> I<integer>

Select the ProRes profile to encode

=over 4


=item B<proxy>


=item B<lt>


=item B<standard>


=item B<hq>


=item B<4444>


=item B<4444xq>


=back



=item B<quant_mat> I<integer>

Select quantization matrix.

=over 4


=item B<auto>


=item B<default>


=item B<proxy>


=item B<lt>


=item B<standard>


=item B<hq>


=back

If set to I<auto>, the matrix matching the profile will be picked.
If not set, the matrix providing the highest quality, I<default>, will be
picked.


=item B<bits_per_mb> I<integer>

How many bits to allot for coding one macroblock. Different profiles use
between 200 and 2400 bits per macroblock, the maximum is 8000.


=item B<mbs_per_slice> I<integer>

Number of macroblocks in each slice (1-8); the default value (8)
should be good in almost all situations.


=item B<vendor> I<string>

Override the 4-byte vendor ID.
A custom vendor ID like I<apl0> would claim the stream was produced by
the Apple encoder.


=item B<alpha_bits> I<integer>

Specify number of bits for alpha component.
Possible values are I<0>, I<8> and I<16>.
Use I<0> to disable alpha plane coding.


=back



=head3 Speed considerations


In the default mode of operation the encoder has to honor frame constraints
(i.e. not produce frames with size bigger than requested) while still making
output picture as good as possible.
A frame containing a lot of small details is harder to compress and the encoder
would spend more time searching for appropriate quantizers for each slice.

Setting a higher B<bits_per_mb> limit will improve the speed.

For the fastest encoding speed set the B<qscale> parameter (4 is the
recommended value) and do not set a size constraint.


=head2 QSV Encoders


The family of Intel QuickSync Video encoders (MPEG-2, H.264, HEVC, JPEG/MJPEG,
VP9, AV1)


=head3 Ratecontrol Method

The ratecontrol method is selected as follows:

=over 4


=item *

When B<global_quality> is specified, a quality-based mode is used.
Specifically this means either

=over 4


=item -

I<CQP> - constant quantizer scale, when the B<qscale> codec flag is
also set (the B<-qscale> ffmpeg option).


=item -

I<LA_ICQ> - intelligent constant quality with lookahead, when the
B<look_ahead> option is also set.


=item -

I<ICQ> -- intelligent constant quality otherwise. For the ICQ modes, global
quality range is 1 to 51, with 1 being the best quality.

=back



=item *

Otherwise when the desired average bitrate is specified with the B<b>
option, a bitrate-based mode is used.

=over 4


=item -

I<LA> - VBR with lookahead, when the B<look_ahead> option is specified.


=item -

I<VCM> - video conferencing mode, when the B<vcm> option is set.


=item -

I<CBR> - constant bitrate, when B<maxrate> is specified and equal to
the average bitrate.


=item -

I<VBR> - variable bitrate, when B<maxrate> is specified, but is higher
than the average bitrate.


=item -

I<AVBR> - average VBR mode, when B<maxrate> is not specified, both
B<avbr_accuracy> and B<avbr_convergence> are set to non-zero. This
mode is available for H264 and HEVC on Windows.

=back



=item *

Otherwise the default ratecontrol method I<CQP> is used.

=back


Note that depending on your system, a different mode than the one you specified
may be selected by the encoder. Set the verbosity level to I<verbose> or
higher to see the actual settings used by the QSV runtime.


=head3 Global Options -E<gt> MSDK Options

Additional libavcodec global options are mapped to MSDK options as follows:


=over 4


=item *

B<g/gop_size> -E<gt> B<GopPicSize>


=item *

B<bf/max_b_frames>+1 -E<gt> B<GopRefDist>


=item *

B<rc_init_occupancy/rc_initial_buffer_occupancy> -E<gt>
B<InitialDelayInKB>


=item *

B<slices> -E<gt> B<NumSlice>


=item *

B<refs> -E<gt> B<NumRefFrame>


=item *

B<b_strategy/b_frame_strategy> -E<gt> B<BRefType>


=item *

B<cgop/CLOSED_GOP> codec flag -E<gt> B<GopOptFlag>


=item *

For the I<CQP> mode, the B<i_qfactor/i_qoffset> and
B<b_qfactor/b_qoffset> set the difference between I<QPP> and I<QPI>,
and I<QPP> and I<QPB> respectively.


=item *

Setting the B<coder> option to the value I<vlc> will make the H.264
encoder use CAVLC instead of CABAC.


=back



=head3 Common Options

Following options are used by all qsv encoders.


=over 4


=item I<async_depth>

Specifies how many asynchronous operations an application performs
before the application explicitly synchronizes the result. If zero,
the value is not specified.


=item I<preset>

This option itemizes a range of choices from veryfast (best speed) to veryslow
(best quality).

=over 4


=item B<veryfast>


=item B<faster>


=item B<fast>


=item B<medium>


=item B<slow>


=item B<slower>


=item B<veryslow>


=back



=item I<forced_idr>

Forcing I frames as IDR frames.


=item I<low_power>

For encoders set this flag to ON to reduce power consumption and GPU usage.

=back



=head3 Runtime Options

Following options can be used durning qsv encoding.


=over 4


=item I<global_quality>


=item I<i_quant_factor>


=item I<i_quant_offset>


=item I<b_quant_factor>


=item I<b_quant_offset>

Supported in h264_qsv and hevc_qsv.
Change these value to reset qsv codec's qp configuration.


=item I<max_frame_size>

Supported in h264_qsv and hevc_qsv.
Change this value to reset qsv codec's MaxFrameSize configuration.


=item I<gop_size>

Change this value to reset qsv codec's gop configuration.


=item I<int_ref_type>


=item I<int_ref_cycle_size>


=item I<int_ref_qp_delta>


=item I<int_ref_cycle_dist>

Supported in h264_qsv and hevc_qsv.
Change these value to reset qsv codec's Intra Refresh configuration.


=item I<qmax>


=item I<qmin>


=item I<max_qp_i>


=item I<min_qp_i>


=item I<max_qp_p>


=item I<min_qp_p>


=item I<max_qp_b>


=item I<min_qp_b>

Supported in h264_qsv.
Change these value to reset qsv codec's max/min qp configuration.


=item I<low_delay_brc>

Supported in h264_qsv, hevc_qsv and av1_qsv.
Change this value to reset qsv codec's low_delay_brc configuration.


=item I<framerate>

Change this value to reset qsv codec's framerate configuration.


=item I<bit_rate>


=item I<rc_buffer_size>


=item I<rc_initial_buffer_occupancy>


=item I<rc_max_rate>

Change these value to reset qsv codec's bitrate control configuration.


=item I<pic_timing_sei>

Supported in h264_qsv and hevc_qsv.
Change this value to reset qsv codec's pic_timing_sei configuration.


=item I<qsv_params>

Set QSV encoder parameters as a colon-separated list of key-value pairs.

The B<qsv_params> should be formatted as C<key1=value1:key2=value2:...>.

These parameters are passed directly to the underlying Intel Quick Sync Video (QSV) encoder using the MFXSetParameter function.

Example:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -c:v h264_qsv -qsv_params "CodingOption1=1:CodingOption2=2" output.mp4


This option allows fine-grained control over various encoder-specific settings provided by the QSV encoder.

=back



=head3 H264 options

These options are used by h264_qsv


=over 4


=item I<extbrc>

Extended bitrate control.


=item I<recovery_point_sei>

Set this flag to insert the recovery point SEI message at the beginning of every
intra refresh cycle.


=item I<rdo>

Enable rate distortion optimization.


=item I<max_frame_size>

Maximum encoded frame size in bytes.


=item I<max_frame_size_i>

Maximum encoded frame size for I frames in bytes. If this value is set as larger
than zero, then for I frames the value set by max_frame_size is ignored.


=item I<max_frame_size_p>

Maximum encoded frame size for P frames in bytes. If this value is set as larger
than zero, then for P frames the value set by max_frame_size is ignored.


=item I<max_slice_size>

Maximum encoded slice size in bytes.


=item I<bitrate_limit>

Toggle bitrate limitations.
Modifies bitrate to be in the range imposed by the QSV encoder. Setting this
flag off may lead to violation of HRD conformance. Mind that specifying bitrate
below the QSV encoder range might significantly affect quality. If on this
option takes effect in non CQP modes: if bitrate is not in the range imposed
by the QSV encoder, it will be changed to be in the range.


=item I<mbbrc>

Setting this flag enables macroblock level bitrate control that generally
improves subjective visual quality. Enabling this flag may have negative impact
on performance and objective visual quality metric.


=item I<low_delay_brc>

Setting this flag turns on or off LowDelayBRC feautre in qsv plugin, which provides
more accurate bitrate control to minimize the variance of bitstream size frame
by frame. Value: -1-default 0-off 1-on


=item I<adaptive_i>

This flag controls insertion of I frames by the QSV encoder. Turn ON this flag
to allow changing of frame type from P and B to I.


=item I<adaptive_b>

This flag controls changing of frame type from B to P.


=item I<p_strategy>

Enable P-pyramid: 0-default 1-simple 2-pyramid(bf need to be set to 0).


=item I<b_strategy>

This option controls usage of B frames as reference.


=item I<dblk_idc>

This option disable deblocking. It has value in range 0~2.


=item I<cavlc>

If set, CAVLC is used; if unset, CABAC is used for encoding.


=item I<vcm>

Video conferencing mode, please see ratecontrol method.


=item I<idr_interval>

Distance (in I-frames) between IDR frames.


=item I<pic_timing_sei>

Insert picture timing SEI with pic_struct_syntax element.


=item I<single_sei_nal_unit>

Put all the SEI messages into one NALU.


=item I<max_dec_frame_buffering>

Maximum number of frames buffered in the DPB.


=item I<look_ahead>

Use VBR algorithm with look ahead.


=item I<look_ahead_depth>

Depth of look ahead in number frames.


=item I<look_ahead_downsampling>

Downscaling factor for the frames saved for the lookahead analysis.

=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<auto>


=item B<off>


=item B<2x>


=item B<4x>


=back



=item I<int_ref_type>

Specifies intra refresh type. The major goal of intra refresh is improvement of
error resilience without significant impact on encoded bitstream size caused by
I frames. The SDK encoder achieves this by encoding part of each frame in
refresh cycle using intra MBs. I<none> means no refresh. I<vertical> means
vertical refresh, by column of MBs. I<horizontal> means horizontal refresh,
by rows of MBs. I<slice> means horizontal refresh by slices without
overlapping. In case of I<slice>, in_ref_cycle_size is ignored. To enable
intra refresh, B frame should be set to 0.


=item I<int_ref_cycle_size>

Specifies number of pictures within refresh cycle starting from 2. 0 and 1 are
invalid values.


=item I<int_ref_qp_delta>

Specifies QP difference for inserted intra MBs. This is signed value in
[-51, 51] range if target encoding bit-depth for luma samples is 8 and this
range is [-63, 63] for 10 bit-depth or [-75, 75] for 12 bit-depth respectively.


=item I<int_ref_cycle_dist>

Distance between the beginnings of the intra-refresh cycles in frames.


=item I<profile>


=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<baseline>


=item B<main>


=item B<high>


=back



=item I<a53cc>

Use A53 Closed Captions (if available).


=item I<aud>

Insert the Access Unit Delimiter NAL.


=item I<mfmode>

Multi-Frame Mode.

=over 4


=item B<off>


=item B<auto>


=back



=item I<repeat_pps>

Repeat pps for every frame.


=item I<max_qp_i>

Maximum video quantizer scale for I frame.


=item I<min_qp_i>

Minimum video quantizer scale for I frame.


=item I<max_qp_p>

Maximum video quantizer scale for P frame.


=item I<min_qp_p>

Minimum video quantizer scale for P frame.


=item I<max_qp_b>

Maximum video quantizer scale for B frame.


=item I<min_qp_b>

Minimum video quantizer scale for B frame.


=item I<scenario>

Provides a hint to encoder about the scenario for the encoding session.

=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<displayremoting>


=item B<videoconference>


=item B<archive>


=item B<livestreaming>


=item B<cameracapture>


=item B<videosurveillance>


=item B<gamestreaming>


=item B<remotegaming>


=back



=item I<avbr_accuracy>

Accuracy of the AVBR ratecontrol (unit of tenth of percent).


=item I<avbr_convergence>

Convergence of the AVBR ratecontrol (unit of 100 frames)

The parameters I<avbr_accuracy> and I<avbr_convergence> are for the
average variable bitrate control (AVBR) algorithm.
The algorithm focuses on overall encoding quality while meeting the specified
bitrate, I<target_bitrate>, within the accuracy range I<avbr_accuracy>,
after a I<avbr_Convergence> period. This method does not follow HRD and the
instant bitrate is not capped or padded.


=item I<skip_frame>

Use per-frame metadata "qsv_skip_frame" to skip frame when encoding. This option
defines the usage of this metadata.

=over 4


=item B<no_skip>

Frame skipping is disabled.

=item B<insert_dummy>

Encoder inserts into bitstream frame where all macroblocks are encoded as
skipped.

=item B<insert_nothing>

Similar to insert_dummy, but encoder inserts nothing into bitstream. The skipped
frames are still used in brc. For example, gop still include skipped frames, and
the frames after skipped frames will be larger in size.

=item B<brc_only>

skip_frame metadata indicates the number of missed frames before the current
frame.

=back



=back



=head3 HEVC Options

These options are used by hevc_qsv


=over 4


=item I<extbrc>

Extended bitrate control.


=item I<recovery_point_sei>

Set this flag to insert the recovery point SEI message at the beginning of every
intra refresh cycle.


=item I<rdo>

Enable rate distortion optimization.


=item I<max_frame_size>

Maximum encoded frame size in bytes.


=item I<max_frame_size_i>

Maximum encoded frame size for I frames in bytes. If this value is set as larger
than zero, then for I frames the value set by max_frame_size is ignored.


=item I<max_frame_size_p>

Maximum encoded frame size for P frames in bytes. If this value is set as larger
than zero, then for P frames the value set by max_frame_size is ignored.


=item I<max_slice_size>

Maximum encoded slice size in bytes.


=item I<mbbrc>

Setting this flag enables macroblock level bitrate control that generally
improves subjective visual quality. Enabling this flag may have negative impact
on performance and objective visual quality metric.


=item I<low_delay_brc>

Setting this flag turns on or off LowDelayBRC feautre in qsv plugin, which provides
more accurate bitrate control to minimize the variance of bitstream size frame
by frame. Value: -1-default 0-off 1-on


=item I<adaptive_i>

This flag controls insertion of I frames by the QSV encoder. Turn ON this flag
to allow changing of frame type from P and B to I.


=item I<adaptive_b>

This flag controls changing of frame type from B to P.


=item I<p_strategy>

Enable P-pyramid: 0-default 1-simple 2-pyramid(bf need to be set to 0).


=item I<b_strategy>

This option controls usage of B frames as reference.


=item I<dblk_idc>

This option disable deblocking. It has value in range 0~2.


=item I<idr_interval>

Distance (in I-frames) between IDR frames.

=over 4


=item B<begin_only>

Output an IDR-frame only at the beginning of the stream.

=back



=item I<load_plugin>

A user plugin to load in an internal session.

=over 4


=item B<none>


=item B<hevc_sw>


=item B<hevc_hw>


=back



=item I<load_plugins>

A :-separate list of hexadecimal plugin UIDs to load in
an internal session.


=item I<look_ahead_depth>

Depth of look ahead in number frames, available when extbrc option is enabled.


=item I<profile>

Set the encoding profile (scc requires libmfx E<gt>= 1.32).


=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<main>


=item B<main10>


=item B<mainsp>


=item B<rext>


=item B<scc>


=back



=item I<tier>

Set the encoding tier (only level E<gt>= 4 can support high tier).
This option only takes effect when the level option is specified.


=over 4


=item B<main>


=item B<high>


=back



=item I<gpb>

1: GPB (generalized P/B frame)

0: regular P frame.


=item I<tile_cols>

Number of columns for tiled encoding.


=item I<tile_rows>

Number of rows for tiled encoding.


=item I<aud>

Insert the Access Unit Delimiter NAL.


=item I<pic_timing_sei>

Insert picture timing SEI with pic_struct_syntax element.


=item I<transform_skip>

Turn this option ON to enable transformskip. It is supported on platform equal
or newer than ICL.


=item I<int_ref_type>

Specifies intra refresh type. The major goal of intra refresh is improvement of
error resilience without significant impact on encoded bitstream size caused by
I frames. The SDK encoder achieves this by encoding part of each frame in
refresh cycle using intra MBs. I<none> means no refresh. I<vertical> means
vertical refresh, by column of MBs. I<horizontal> means horizontal refresh,
by rows of MBs. I<slice> means horizontal refresh by slices without
overlapping. In case of I<slice>, in_ref_cycle_size is ignored. To enable
intra refresh, B frame should be set to 0.


=item I<int_ref_cycle_size>

Specifies number of pictures within refresh cycle starting from 2. 0 and 1 are
invalid values.


=item I<int_ref_qp_delta>

Specifies QP difference for inserted intra MBs. This is signed value in
[-51, 51] range if target encoding bit-depth for luma samples is 8 and this
range is [-63, 63] for 10 bit-depth or [-75, 75] for 12 bit-depth respectively.


=item I<int_ref_cycle_dist>

Distance between the beginnings of the intra-refresh cycles in frames.


=item I<max_qp_i>

Maximum video quantizer scale for I frame.


=item I<min_qp_i>

Minimum video quantizer scale for I frame.


=item I<max_qp_p>

Maximum video quantizer scale for P frame.


=item I<min_qp_p>

Minimum video quantizer scale for P frame.


=item I<max_qp_b>

Maximum video quantizer scale for B frame.


=item I<min_qp_b>

Minimum video quantizer scale for B frame.


=item I<scenario>

Provides a hint to encoder about the scenario for the encoding session.

=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<displayremoting>


=item B<videoconference>


=item B<archive>


=item B<livestreaming>


=item B<cameracapture>


=item B<videosurveillance>


=item B<gamestreaming>


=item B<remotegaming>


=back



=item I<avbr_accuracy>

Accuracy of the AVBR ratecontrol (unit of tenth of percent).


=item I<avbr_convergence>

Convergence of the AVBR ratecontrol (unit of 100 frames)

The parameters I<avbr_accuracy> and I<avbr_convergence> are for the
average variable bitrate control (AVBR) algorithm.
The algorithm focuses on overall encoding quality while meeting the specified
bitrate, I<target_bitrate>, within the accuracy range I<avbr_accuracy>,
after a I<avbr_Convergence> period. This method does not follow HRD and the
instant bitrate is not capped or padded.


=item I<skip_frame>

Use per-frame metadata "qsv_skip_frame" to skip frame when encoding. This option
defines the usage of this metadata.

=over 4


=item B<no_skip>

Frame skipping is disabled.

=item B<insert_dummy>

Encoder inserts into bitstream frame where all macroblocks are encoded as
skipped.

=item B<insert_nothing>

Similar to insert_dummy, but encoder inserts nothing into bitstream. The skipped
frames are still used in brc. For example, gop still include skipped frames, and
the frames after skipped frames will be larger in size.

=item B<brc_only>

skip_frame metadata indicates the number of missed frames before the current
frame.

=back



=back



=head3 MPEG2 Options

These options are used by mpeg2_qsv

=over 4


=item I<profile>


=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<simple>


=item B<main>


=item B<high>


=back


=back



=head3 VP9 Options

These options are used by vp9_qsv

=over 4


=item I<profile>


=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<profile0>


=item B<profile1>


=item B<profile2>


=item B<profile3>


=back



=item I<tile_cols>

Number of columns for tiled encoding (requires libmfx E<gt>= 1.29).


=item I<tile_rows>

Number of rows for tiled encoding (requires libmfx  E<gt>= 1.29).

=back



=head3 AV1 Options

These options are used by av1_qsv (requires libvpl).

=over 4


=item I<profile>


=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<main>


=back



=item I<tile_cols>

Number of columns for tiled encoding.


=item I<tile_rows>

Number of rows for tiled encoding.


=item I<adaptive_i>

This flag controls insertion of I frames by the QSV encoder. Turn ON this flag
to allow changing of frame type from P and B to I.


=item I<adaptive_b>

This flag controls changing of frame type from B to P.


=item I<b_strategy>

This option controls usage of B frames as reference.


=item I<extbrc>

Extended bitrate control.


=item I<look_ahead_depth>

Depth of look ahead in number frames, available when extbrc option is enabled.


=item I<low_delay_brc>

Setting this flag turns on or off LowDelayBRC feautre in qsv plugin, which provides
more accurate bitrate control to minimize the variance of bitstream size frame
by frame. Value: -1-default 0-off 1-on


=item I<max_frame_size>

Set the allowed max size in bytes for each frame. If the frame size exceeds
the limitation, encoder will adjust the QP value to control the frame size.
Invalid in CQP rate control mode.


=item I<max_frame_size_i>

Maximum encoded frame size for I frames in bytes. If this value is set as larger
than zero, then for I frames the value set by max_frame_size is ignored.


=item I<max_frame_size_p>

Maximum encoded frame size for P frames in bytes. If this value is set as larger
than zero, then for P frames the value set by max_frame_size is ignored.

=back



=head2 snow



=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<iterative_dia_size>

dia size for the iterative motion estimation

=back



=head2 VAAPI encoders


Wrappers for hardware encoders accessible via VAAPI.

These encoders only accept input in VAAPI hardware surfaces.  If you have input
in software frames, use the B<hwupload> filter to upload them to the GPU.

The following standard libavcodec options are used:

=over 4


=item *

B<g> / B<gop_size>

=item *

B<bf> / B<max_b_frames>

=item *

B<profile>

If not set, this will be determined automatically from the format of the input
frames and the profiles supported by the driver.

=item *

B<level>

=item *

B<b> / B<bit_rate>

=item *

B<maxrate> / B<rc_max_rate>

=item *

B<bufsize> / B<rc_buffer_size>

=item *

B<rc_init_occupancy> / B<rc_initial_buffer_occupancy>

=item *

B<compression_level>

Speed / quality tradeoff: higher values are faster / worse quality.

=item *

B<q> / B<global_quality>

Size / quality tradeoff: higher values are smaller / worse quality.

=item *

B<qmin>

=item *

B<qmax>

=item *

B<i_qfactor> / B<i_quant_factor>

=item *

B<i_qoffset> / B<i_quant_offset>

=item *

B<b_qfactor> / B<b_quant_factor>

=item *

B<b_qoffset> / B<b_quant_offset>

=item *

B<slices>

=back


All encoders support the following options:

=over 4


=item B<low_power>

Some drivers/platforms offer a second encoder for some codecs intended to use
less power than the default encoder; setting this option will attempt to use
that encoder.  Note that it may support a reduced feature set, so some other
options may not be available in this mode.


=item B<idr_interval>

Set the number of normal intra frames between full-refresh (IDR) frames in
open-GOP mode.  The intra frames are still IRAPs, but will not include global
headers and may have non-decodable leading pictures.


=item B<b_depth>

Set the B-frame reference depth.  When set to one (the default), all B-frames
will refer only to P- or I-frames.  When set to greater values multiple layers
of B-frames will be present, frames in each layer only referring to frames in
higher layers.


=item B<async_depth>

Maximum processing parallelism. Increase this to improve single channel
performance. This option doesn't work if driver doesn't implement vaSyncBuffer
function. Please make sure there are enough hw_frames allocated if a large
number of async_depth is used.


=item B<max_frame_size>

Set the allowed max size in bytes for each frame. If the frame size exceeds
the limitation, encoder will adjust the QP value to control the frame size.
Invalid in CQP rate control mode.


=item B<rc_mode>

Set the rate control mode to use.  A given driver may only support a subset of
modes.

Possible modes:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Choose the mode automatically based on driver support and the other options.
This is the default.

=item B<CQP>

Constant-quality.

=item B<CBR>

Constant-bitrate.

=item B<VBR>

Variable-bitrate.

=item B<ICQ>

Intelligent constant-quality.

=item B<QVBR>

Quality-defined variable-bitrate.

=item B<AVBR>

Average variable bitrate.

=back



=item B<blbrc>

Enable block level rate control, which assigns different bitrate block by block.
Invalid for CQP mode.


=back


Each encoder also has its own specific options:

=over 4



=item B<av1_vaapi>

B<profile> sets the value of I<seq_profile>.
B<tier> sets the value of I<seq_tier>.
B<level> sets the value of I<seq_level_idx>.


=over 4


=item B<tiles>

Set the number of tiles to encode the input video with, as columns x rows.
(default is auto, which means use minimal tile column/row number).

=item B<tile_groups>

Set tile groups number. All the tiles will be distributed as evenly as possible to
each tile group. (default is 1).

=back



=item B<h264_vaapi>

B<profile> sets the value of I<profile_idc> and the I<constraint_set*_flag>s.
B<level> sets the value of I<level_idc>.


=over 4


=item B<coder>

Set entropy encoder (default is I<cabac>).  Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<ac>


=item B<cabac>

Use CABAC.


=item B<vlc>


=item B<cavlc>

Use CAVLC.

=back



=item B<aud>

Include access unit delimiters in the stream (not included by default).


=item B<sei>

Set SEI message types to include.
Some combination of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<identifier>

Include a I<user_data_unregistered> message containing information about
the encoder.

=item B<timing>

Include picture timing parameters (I<buffering_period> and
I<pic_timing> messages).

=item B<recovery_point>

Include recovery points where appropriate (I<recovery_point> messages).

=back



=back



=item B<hevc_vaapi>

B<profile> and B<level> set the values of
I<general_profile_idc> and I<general_level_idc> respectively.


=over 4


=item B<aud>

Include access unit delimiters in the stream (not included by default).


=item B<tier>

Set I<general_tier_flag>.  This may affect the level chosen for the stream
if it is not explicitly specified.


=item B<sei>

Set SEI message types to include.
Some combination of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<hdr>

Include HDR metadata if the input frames have it
(I<mastering_display_colour_volume> and I<content_light_level>
messages).

=back



=item B<tiles>

Set the number of tiles to encode the input video with, as columns x rows.
Larger numbers allow greater parallelism in both encoding and decoding, but
may decrease coding efficiency.


=back



=item B<mjpeg_vaapi>

Only baseline DCT encoding is supported.  The encoder always uses the standard
quantisation and huffman tables - B<global_quality> scales the standard
quantisation table (range 1-100).

For YUV, 4:2:0, 4:2:2 and 4:4:4 subsampling modes are supported.  RGB is also
supported, and will create an RGB JPEG.


=over 4


=item B<jfif>

Include JFIF header in each frame (not included by default).

=item B<huffman>

Include standard huffman tables (on by default).  Turning this off will save
a few hundred bytes in each output frame, but may lose compatibility with some
JPEG decoders which don't fully handle MJPEG.

=back



=item B<mpeg2_vaapi>

B<profile> and B<level> set the value of I<profile_and_level_indication>.


=item B<vp8_vaapi>

B-frames are not supported.

B<global_quality> sets the I<q_idx> used for non-key frames (range 0-127).


=over 4


=item B<loop_filter_level>


=item B<loop_filter_sharpness>

Manually set the loop filter parameters.

=back



=item B<vp9_vaapi>

B<global_quality> sets the I<q_idx> used for P-frames (range 0-255).


=over 4


=item B<loop_filter_level>


=item B<loop_filter_sharpness>

Manually set the loop filter parameters.

=back


B-frames are supported, but the output stream is always in encode order rather than display
order.  If B-frames are enabled, it may be necessary to use the B<vp9_raw_reorder>
bitstream filter to modify the output stream to display frames in the correct order.

Only normal frames are produced - the B<vp9_superframe> bitstream filter may be
required to produce a stream usable with all decoders.


=back



=head2 vbn


Vizrt Binary Image encoder.

This format is used by the broadcast vendor Vizrt for quick texture streaming.
Advanced features of the format such as LZW compression of texture data or
generation of mipmaps are not supported.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<format> I<string>

Sets the texture compression used by the VBN file. Can be I<dxt1>,
I<dxt5> or I<raw>. Default is I<dxt5>.

=back



=head2 vc2


SMPTE VC-2 (previously BBC Dirac Pro). This codec was primarily aimed at
professional broadcasting but since it supports yuv420, yuv422 and yuv444 at
8 (limited range or full range), 10 or 12 bits, this makes it suitable for
other tasks which require low overhead and low compression (like screen
recording).


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<b>

Sets target video bitrate. Usually that's around 1:6 of the uncompressed
video bitrate (e.g. for 1920x1080 50fps yuv422p10 that's around 400Mbps). Higher
values (close to the uncompressed bitrate) turn on lossless compression mode.


=item B<field_order>

Enables field coding when set (e.g. to tt - top field first) for interlaced
inputs. Should increase compression with interlaced content as it splits the
fields and encodes each separately.


=item B<wavelet_depth>

Sets the total amount of wavelet transforms to apply, between 1 and 5 (default).
Lower values reduce compression and quality. Less capable decoders may not be
able to handle values of B<wavelet_depth> over 3.


=item B<wavelet_type>

Sets the transform type. Currently only I<5_3> (LeGall) and I<9_7>
(Deslauriers-Dubuc)
are implemented, with 9_7 being the one with better compression and thus
is the default.


=item B<slice_width>


=item B<slice_height>

Sets the slice size for each slice. Larger values result in better compression.
For compatibility with other more limited decoders use B<slice_width> of
32 and B<slice_height> of 8.


=item B<tolerance>

Sets the undershoot tolerance of the rate control system in percent. This is
to prevent an expensive search from being run.


=item B<qm>

Sets the quantization matrix preset to use by default or when B<wavelet_depth>
is set to 5

=over 4


=item -

I<default>
Uses the default quantization matrix from the specifications, extended with
values for the fifth level. This provides a good balance between keeping detail
and omitting artifacts.


=item -

I<flat>
Use a completely zeroed out quantization matrix. This increases PSNR but might
reduce perception. Use in bogus benchmarks.


=item -

I<color>
Reduces detail but attempts to preserve color at extremely low bitrates.

=back



=back




=head1 SUBTITLES ENCODERS



=head2 dvdsub


This codec encodes the bitmap subtitle format that is used in DVDs.
Typically they are stored in VOBSUB file pairs (*.idx + *.sub),
and they can also be used in Matroska files.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<palette>

Specify the global palette used by the bitmaps.

The format for this option is a string containing 16 24-bits hexadecimal
numbers (without 0x prefix) separated by commas, for example C<0d00ee,
ee450d, 101010, eaeaea, 0ce60b, ec14ed, ebff0b, 0d617a, 7b7b7b, d1d1d1,
7b2a0e, 0d950c, 0f007b, cf0dec, cfa80c, 7c127b>.


=item B<even_rows_fix>

When set to 1, enable a work-around that makes the number of pixel rows
even in all subtitles.  This fixes a problem with some players that
cut off the bottom row if the number is odd.  The work-around just adds
a fully transparent row if needed.  The overhead is low, typically
one byte per subtitle on average.

By default, this work-around is disabled.

=back



=head1 BITSTREAM FILTERS


When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported bitstream
filters are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using
the configure option C<--list-bsfs>.

You can disable all the bitstream filters using the configure option
C<--disable-bsfs>, and selectively enable any bitstream filter using
the option C<--enable-bsf=BSF>, or you can disable a particular
bitstream filter using the option C<--disable-bsf=BSF>.

The option C<-bsfs> of the ff* tools will display the list of
all the supported bitstream filters included in your build.

The ff* tools have a -bsf option applied per stream, taking a
comma-separated list of filters, whose parameters follow the filter
name after a '='.

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v filter1[=opt1=str1:opt2=str2][,filter2] OUTPUT


Below is a description of the currently available bitstream filters,
with their parameters, if any.


=head2 aac_adtstoasc


Convert MPEG-2/4 AAC ADTS to an MPEG-4 Audio Specific Configuration
bitstream.

This filter creates an MPEG-4 AudioSpecificConfig from an MPEG-2/4
ADTS header and removes the ADTS header.

This filter is required for example when copying an AAC stream from a
raw ADTS AAC or an MPEG-TS container to MP4A-LATM, to an FLV file, or
to MOV/MP4 files and related formats such as 3GP or M4A. Please note
that it is auto-inserted for MP4A-LATM and MOV/MP4 and related formats.


=head2 av1_metadata


Modify metadata embedded in an AV1 stream.


=over 4


=item B<td>

Insert or remove temporal delimiter OBUs in all temporal units of the
stream.


=over 4


=item B<insert>

Insert a TD at the beginning of every TU which does not already have one.

=item B<remove>

Remove the TD from the beginning of every TU which has one.

=back



=item B<color_primaries>


=item B<transfer_characteristics>


=item B<matrix_coefficients>

Set the color description fields in the stream (see AV1 section 6.4.2).


=item B<color_range>

Set the color range in the stream (see AV1 section 6.4.2; note that
this cannot be set for streams using BT.709 primaries, sRGB transfer
characteristic and identity (RGB) matrix coefficients).

=over 4


=item B<tv>

Limited range.

=item B<pc>

Full range.

=back



=item B<chroma_sample_position>

Set the chroma sample location in the stream (see AV1 section 6.4.2).
This can only be set for 4:2:0 streams.


=over 4


=item B<vertical>

Left position (matching the default in MPEG-2 and H.264).

=item B<colocated>

Top-left position.

=back



=item B<tick_rate>

Set the tick rate (I<time_scale / num_units_in_display_tick>) in
the timing info in the sequence header.

=item B<num_ticks_per_picture>

Set the number of ticks in each picture, to indicate that the stream
has a fixed framerate.  Ignored if B<tick_rate> is not also set.


=item B<delete_padding>

Deletes Padding OBUs.


=back



=head2 chomp


Remove zero padding at the end of a packet.


=head2 dca_core


Extract the core from a DCA/DTS stream, dropping extensions such as
DTS-HD.


=head2 dovi_rpu


Manipulate Dolby Vision metadata in a HEVC/AV1 bitstream, optionally enabling
metadata compression.


=over 4


=item B<strip>

If enabled, strip all Dolby Vision metadata (configuration record + RPU data
blocks) from the stream.

=item B<compression>

Which compression level to enable.

=over 4


=item B<none>

No metadata compression.

=item B<limited>

Limited metadata compression scheme. Should be compatible with most devices.
This is the default.

=item B<extended>

Extended metadata compression. Devices are not required to support this. Note
that this level currently behaves the same as B<limited> in libavcodec.

=back


=back



=head2 dump_extra


Add extradata to the beginning of the filtered packets except when
said packets already exactly begin with the extradata that is intended
to be added.


=over 4


=item B<freq>

The additional argument specifies which packets should be filtered.
It accepts the values:

=over 4


=item B<k>


=item B<keyframe>

add extradata to all key packets


=item B<e>


=item B<all>

add extradata to all packets

=back


=back


If not specified it is assumed B<k>.

For example the following B<ffmpeg> command forces a global
header (thus disabling individual packet headers) in the H.264 packets
generated by the C<libx264> encoder, but corrects them by adding
the header stored in extradata to the key packets:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -flags:v +global_header -c:v libx264 -bsf:v dump_extra out.ts



=head2 dv_error_marker


Blocks in DV which are marked as damaged are replaced by blocks of the specified color.


=over 4


=item B<color>

The color to replace damaged blocks by

=item B<sta>

A 16 bit mask which specifies which of the 16 possible error status values are
to be replaced by colored blocks. 0xFFFE is the default which replaces all non 0
error status values.

=over 4


=item B<ok>

No error, no concealment

=item B<err>

Error, No concealment

=item B<res>

Reserved

=item B<notok>

Error or concealment

=item B<notres>

Not reserved

=item B<Aa, Ba, Ca, Ab, Bb, Cb, A, B, C, a, b, erri, erru>

The specific error status code

=back

see page 44-46 or section 5.5 of
E<lt>B<http://web.archive.org/web/20060927044735/http://www.smpte.org/smpte_store/standards/pdf/s314m.pdf>E<gt>


=back



=head2 eac3_core


Extract the core from a E-AC-3 stream, dropping extra channels.


=head2 extract_extradata


Extract the in-band extradata.

Certain codecs allow the long-term headers (e.g. MPEG-2 sequence headers,
or H.264/HEVC (VPS/)SPS/PPS) to be transmitted either "in-band" (i.e. as a part
of the bitstream containing the coded frames) or "out of band" (e.g. on the
container level). This latter form is called "extradata" in FFmpeg terminology.

This bitstream filter detects the in-band headers and makes them available as
extradata.


=over 4


=item B<remove>

When this option is enabled, the long-term headers are removed from the
bitstream after extraction.

=back



=head2 filter_units


Remove units with types in or not in a given set from the stream.


=over 4


=item B<pass_types>

List of unit types or ranges of unit types to pass through while removing
all others.  This is specified as a '|'-separated list of unit type values
or ranges of values with '-'.


=item B<remove_types>

Identical to B<pass_types>, except the units in the given set
removed and all others passed through.

=back


The types used by pass_types and remove_types correspond to NAL unit types
(nal_unit_type) in H.264, HEVC and H.266 (see Table 7-1 in the H.264
and HEVC specifications or Table 5 in the H.266 specification), to
marker values for JPEG (without 0xFF prefix) and to start codes without
start code prefix (i.e. the byte following the 0x000001) for MPEG-2.
For VP8 and VP9, every unit has type zero.

Extradata is unchanged by this transformation, but note that if the stream
contains inline parameter sets then the output may be unusable if they are
removed.

For example, to remove all non-VCL NAL units from an H.264 stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v 'filter_units=pass_types=1-5' OUTPUT


To remove all AUDs, SEI and filler from an H.265 stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v 'filter_units=remove_types=35|38-40' OUTPUT


To remove all user data from a MPEG-2 stream, including Closed Captions:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v 'filter_units=remove_types=178' OUTPUT


To remove all SEI from a H264 stream, including Closed Captions:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v 'filter_units=remove_types=6' OUTPUT


To remove all prefix and suffix SEI from a HEVC stream, including Closed Captions and dynamic HDR:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v 'filter_units=remove_types=39|40' OUTPUT



=head2 hapqa_extract


Extract Rgb or Alpha part of an HAPQA file, without recompression, in order to create an HAPQ or an HAPAlphaOnly file.


=over 4


=item B<texture>

Specifies the texture to keep.


=over 4


=item B<color>


=item B<alpha>


=back



=back


Convert HAPQA to HAPQ
	
	ffmpeg -i hapqa_inputfile.mov -c copy -bsf:v hapqa_extract=texture=color -tag:v HapY -metadata:s:v:0 encoder="HAPQ" hapq_file.mov


Convert HAPQA to HAPAlphaOnly
	
	ffmpeg -i hapqa_inputfile.mov -c copy -bsf:v hapqa_extract=texture=alpha -tag:v HapA -metadata:s:v:0 encoder="HAPAlpha Only" hapalphaonly_file.mov



=head2 h264_metadata


Modify metadata embedded in an H.264 stream.


=over 4


=item B<aud>

Insert or remove AUD NAL units in all access units of the stream.


=over 4


=item B<pass>


=item B<insert>


=item B<remove>


=back


Default is pass.


=item B<sample_aspect_ratio>

Set the sample aspect ratio of the stream in the VUI parameters.
See H.264 table E-1.


=item B<overscan_appropriate_flag>

Set whether the stream is suitable for display using overscan
or not (see H.264 section E.2.1).


=item B<video_format>


=item B<video_full_range_flag>

Set the video format in the stream (see H.264 section E.2.1 and
table E-2).


=item B<colour_primaries>


=item B<transfer_characteristics>


=item B<matrix_coefficients>

Set the colour description in the stream (see H.264 section E.2.1
and tables E-3, E-4 and E-5).


=item B<chroma_sample_loc_type>

Set the chroma sample location in the stream (see H.264 section
E.2.1 and figure E-1).


=item B<tick_rate>

Set the tick rate (time_scale / num_units_in_tick) in the VUI
parameters.  This is the smallest time unit representable in the
stream, and in many cases represents the field rate of the stream
(double the frame rate).

=item B<fixed_frame_rate_flag>

Set whether the stream has fixed framerate - typically this indicates
that the framerate is exactly half the tick rate, but the exact
meaning is dependent on interlacing and the picture structure (see
H.264 section E.2.1 and table E-6).

=item B<zero_new_constraint_set_flags>

Zero constraint_set4_flag and constraint_set5_flag in the SPS. These
bits were reserved in a previous version of the H.264 spec, and thus
some hardware decoders require these to be zero. The result of zeroing
this is still a valid bitstream.


=item B<crop_left>


=item B<crop_right>


=item B<crop_top>


=item B<crop_bottom>

Set the frame cropping offsets in the SPS.  These values will replace
the current ones if the stream is already cropped.

These fields are set in pixels.  Note that some sizes may not be
representable if the chroma is subsampled or the stream is interlaced
(see H.264 section 7.4.2.1.1).


=item B<sei_user_data>

Insert a string as SEI unregistered user data.  The argument must
be of the form I<UUID+string>, where the UUID is as hex digits
possibly separated by hyphens, and the string can be anything.

For example, B<086f3693-b7b3-4f2c-9653-21492feee5b8+hello> will
insert the string ``hello'' associated with the given UUID.


=item B<delete_filler>

Deletes both filler NAL units and filler SEI messages.


=item B<display_orientation>

Insert, extract or remove Display orientation SEI messages.
See H.264 section D.1.27 and D.2.27 for syntax and semantics.


=over 4


=item B<pass>


=item B<insert>


=item B<remove>


=item B<extract>


=back


Default is pass.

Insert mode works in conjunction with C<rotate> and C<flip> options.
Any pre-existing Display orientation messages will be removed in insert or remove mode.
Extract mode attaches the display matrix to the packet as side data.


=item B<rotate>

Set rotation in display orientation SEI (anticlockwise angle in degrees).
Range is -360 to +360. Default is NaN.


=item B<flip>

Set flip in display orientation SEI.


=over 4


=item B<horizontal>


=item B<vertical>


=back


Default is unset.


=item B<level>

Set the level in the SPS.  Refer to H.264 section A.3 and tables A-1
to A-5.

The argument must be the name of a level (for example, B<4.2>), a
level_idc value (for example, B<42>), or the special name B<auto>
indicating that the filter should attempt to guess the level from the
input stream properties.


=back



=head2 h264_mp4toannexb


Convert an H.264 bitstream from length prefixed mode to start code
prefixed mode (as defined in the Annex B of the ITU-T H.264
specification).

This is required by some streaming formats, typically the MPEG-2
transport stream format (muxer C<mpegts>).

For example to remux an MP4 file containing an H.264 stream to mpegts
format with B<ffmpeg>, you can use the command:

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT.mp4 -codec copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb OUTPUT.ts


Please note that this filter is auto-inserted for MPEG-TS (muxer
C<mpegts>) and raw H.264 (muxer C<h264>) output formats.


=head2 h264_redundant_pps


This applies a specific fixup to some Blu-ray streams which contain
redundant PPSs modifying irrelevant parameters of the stream which
confuse other transformations which require correct extradata.


=head2 hevc_metadata


Modify metadata embedded in an HEVC stream.


=over 4


=item B<aud>

Insert or remove AUD NAL units in all access units of the stream.


=over 4


=item B<insert>


=item B<remove>


=back



=item B<sample_aspect_ratio>

Set the sample aspect ratio in the stream in the VUI parameters.


=item B<video_format>


=item B<video_full_range_flag>

Set the video format in the stream (see H.265 section E.3.1 and
table E.2).


=item B<colour_primaries>


=item B<transfer_characteristics>


=item B<matrix_coefficients>

Set the colour description in the stream (see H.265 section E.3.1
and tables E.3, E.4 and E.5).


=item B<chroma_sample_loc_type>

Set the chroma sample location in the stream (see H.265 section
E.3.1 and figure E.1).


=item B<tick_rate>

Set the tick rate in the VPS and VUI parameters (time_scale /
num_units_in_tick). Combined with B<num_ticks_poc_diff_one>, this can
set a constant framerate in the stream.  Note that it is likely to be
overridden by container parameters when the stream is in a container.


=item B<num_ticks_poc_diff_one>

Set poc_proportional_to_timing_flag in VPS and VUI and use this value
to set num_ticks_poc_diff_one_minus1 (see H.265 sections 7.4.3.1 and
E.3.1).  Ignored if B<tick_rate> is not also set.


=item B<crop_left>


=item B<crop_right>


=item B<crop_top>


=item B<crop_bottom>

Set the conformance window cropping offsets in the SPS.  These values
will replace the current ones if the stream is already cropped.

These fields are set in pixels.  Note that some sizes may not be
representable if the chroma is subsampled (H.265 section 7.4.3.2.1).


=item B<width>


=item B<height>

Set width and height after crop.


=item B<level>

Set the level in the VPS and SPS.  See H.265 section A.4 and tables
A.6 and A.7.

The argument must be the name of a level (for example, B<5.1>), a
I<general_level_idc> value (for example, B<153> for level 5.1),
or the special name B<auto> indicating that the filter should
attempt to guess the level from the input stream properties.


=back



=head2 hevc_mp4toannexb


Convert an HEVC/H.265 bitstream from length prefixed mode to start code
prefixed mode (as defined in the Annex B of the ITU-T H.265
specification).

This is required by some streaming formats, typically the MPEG-2
transport stream format (muxer C<mpegts>).

For example to remux an MP4 file containing an HEVC stream to mpegts
format with B<ffmpeg>, you can use the command:

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT.mp4 -codec copy -bsf:v hevc_mp4toannexb OUTPUT.ts


Please note that this filter is auto-inserted for MPEG-TS (muxer
C<mpegts>) and raw HEVC/H.265 (muxer C<h265> or
C<hevc>) output formats.


=head2 imxdump


Modifies the bitstream to fit in MOV and to be usable by the Final Cut
Pro decoder. This filter only applies to the mpeg2video codec, and is
likely not needed for Final Cut Pro 7 and newer with the appropriate
B<-tag:v>.

For example, to remux 30 MB/sec NTSC IMX to MOV:

	
	ffmpeg -i input.mxf -c copy -bsf:v imxdump -tag:v mx3n output.mov



=head2 mjpeg2jpeg


Convert MJPEG/AVI1 packets to full JPEG/JFIF packets.

MJPEG is a video codec wherein each video frame is essentially a
JPEG image. The individual frames can be extracted without loss,
e.g. by

	
	ffmpeg -i ../some_mjpeg.avi -c:v copy frames_%d.jpg


Unfortunately, these chunks are incomplete JPEG images, because
they lack the DHT segment required for decoding. Quoting from
E<lt>B<http://www.digitalpreservation.gov/formats/fdd/fdd000063.shtml>E<gt>:

Avery Lee, writing in the rec.video.desktop newsgroup in 2001,
commented that "MJPEG, or at least the MJPEG in AVIs having the
MJPG fourcc, is restricted JPEG with a fixed -- and *omitted* --
Huffman table. The JPEG must be YCbCr colorspace, it must be 4:2:2,
and it must use basic Huffman encoding, not arithmetic or
progressive. . . . You can indeed extract the MJPEG frames and
decode them with a regular JPEG decoder, but you have to prepend
the DHT segment to them, or else the decoder won't have any idea
how to decompress the data. The exact table necessary is given in
the OpenDML spec."

This bitstream filter patches the header of frames extracted from an MJPEG
stream (carrying the AVI1 header ID and lacking a DHT segment) to
produce fully qualified JPEG images.

	
	ffmpeg -i mjpeg-movie.avi -c:v copy -bsf:v mjpeg2jpeg frame_%d.jpg
	exiftran -i -9 frame*.jpg
	ffmpeg -i frame_%d.jpg -c:v copy rotated.avi



=head2 mjpegadump


Add an MJPEG A header to the bitstream, to enable decoding by
Quicktime.



=head2 mov2textsub


Extract a representable text file from MOV subtitles, stripping the
metadata header from each subtitle packet.

See also the B<text2movsub> filter.


=head2 mpeg2_metadata


Modify metadata embedded in an MPEG-2 stream.


=over 4


=item B<display_aspect_ratio>

Set the display aspect ratio in the stream.

The following fixed values are supported:

=over 4


=item B<4/3>


=item B<16/9>


=item B<221/100>


=back

Any other value will result in square pixels being signalled instead
(see H.262 section 6.3.3 and table 6-3).


=item B<frame_rate>

Set the frame rate in the stream.  This is constructed from a table
of known values combined with a small multiplier and divisor - if
the supplied value is not exactly representable, the nearest
representable value will be used instead (see H.262 section 6.3.3
and table 6-4).


=item B<video_format>

Set the video format in the stream (see H.262 section 6.3.6 and
table 6-6).


=item B<colour_primaries>


=item B<transfer_characteristics>


=item B<matrix_coefficients>

Set the colour description in the stream (see H.262 section 6.3.6
and tables 6-7, 6-8 and 6-9).


=back



=head2 mpeg4_unpack_bframes


Unpack DivX-style packed B-frames.

DivX-style packed B-frames are not valid MPEG-4 and were only a
workaround for the broken Video for Windows subsystem.
They use more space, can cause minor AV sync issues, require more
CPU power to decode (unless the player has some decoded picture queue
to compensate the 2,0,2,0 frame per packet style) and cause
trouble if copied into a standard container like mp4 or mpeg-ps/ts,
because MPEG-4 decoders may not be able to decode them, since they are
not valid MPEG-4.

For example to fix an AVI file containing an MPEG-4 stream with
DivX-style packed B-frames using B<ffmpeg>, you can use the command:

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT.avi -codec copy -bsf:v mpeg4_unpack_bframes OUTPUT.avi



=head2 noise


Damages the contents of packets or simply drops them without damaging the
container. Can be used for fuzzing or testing error resilience/concealment.

Parameters:

=over 4


=item B<amount>

Accepts an expression whose evaluation per-packet determines how often bytes in that
packet will be modified. A value below 0 will result in a variable frequency.
Default is 0 which results in no modification. However, if neither amount nor drop is specified,
amount will be set to I<-1>. See below for accepted variables.

=item B<drop>

Accepts an expression evaluated per-packet whose value determines whether that packet is dropped.
Evaluation to a positive value results in the packet being dropped. Evaluation to a negative
value results in a variable chance of it being dropped, roughly inverse in proportion to the magnitude
of the value. Default is 0 which results in no drops. See below for accepted variables.

=item B<dropamount>

Accepts a non-negative integer, which assigns a variable chance of it being dropped, roughly inverse
in proportion to the value. Default is 0 which results in no drops. This option is kept for backwards
compatibility and is equivalent to setting drop to a negative value with the same magnitude
i.e. C<dropamount=4> is the same as C<drop=-4>. Ignored if drop is also specified.

=back


Both C<amount> and C<drop> accept expressions containing the following variables:


=over 4


=item B<n>

The index of the packet, starting from zero.

=item B<tb>

The timebase for packet timestamps.

=item B<pts>

Packet presentation timestamp.

=item B<dts>

Packet decoding timestamp.

=item B<nopts>

Constant representing AV_NOPTS_VALUE.

=item B<startpts>

First non-AV_NOPTS_VALUE PTS seen in the stream.

=item B<startdts>

First non-AV_NOPTS_VALUE DTS seen in the stream.

=item B<duration>


=item B<d>

Packet duration, in timebase units.

=item B<pos>

Packet position in input; may be -1 when unknown or not set.

=item B<size>

Packet size, in bytes.

=item B<key>

Whether packet is marked as a keyframe.

=item B<state>

A pseudo random integer, primarily derived from the content of packet payload.

=back



=head3 Examples

Apply modification to every byte but don't drop any packets.
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf noise=1 output.mkv


Drop every video packet not marked as a keyframe after timestamp 30s but do not
modify any of the remaining packets.
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf:v noise=drop='gt(t\,30)*not(key)' output.mkv


Drop one second of audio every 10 seconds and add some random noise to the rest.
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf:a noise=amount=-1:drop='between(mod(t\,10)\,9\,10)' output.mkv



=head2 null

This bitstream filter passes the packets through unchanged.


=head2 pcm_rechunk


Repacketize PCM audio to a fixed number of samples per packet or a fixed packet
rate per second. This is similar to the B<asetnsamples audio
filter> but works on audio packets instead of audio frames.


=over 4


=item B<nb_out_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per each output audio packet. The number is intended
as the number of samples I<per each channel>. Default value is 1024.


=item B<pad, p>

If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio packet with silence, so that it
will contain the same number of samples (or roughly the same number of samples,
see B<frame_rate>) as the previous ones. Default value is 1.


=item B<frame_rate, r>

This option makes the filter output a fixed number of packets per second instead
of a fixed number of samples per packet. If the audio sample rate is not
divisible by the frame rate then the number of samples will not be constant but
will vary slightly so that each packet will start as close to the frame
boundary as possible. Using this option has precedence over B<nb_out_samples>.

=back


You can generate the well known 1602-1601-1602-1601-1602 pattern of 48kHz audio
for NTSC frame rate using the B<frame_rate> option.
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i sine=r=48000:d=1 -c pcm_s16le -bsf pcm_rechunk=r=30000/1001 -f framecrc -



=head2 pgs_frame_merge


Merge a sequence of PGS Subtitle segments ending with an "end of display set"
segment into a single packet.

This is required by some containers that support PGS subtitles
(muxer C<matroska>).


=head2 prores_metadata


Modify color property metadata embedded in prores stream.


=over 4


=item B<color_primaries>

Set the color primaries.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same color primaries property (default).


=item B<unknown>


=item B<bt709>


=item B<bt470bg>

BT601 625


=item B<smpte170m>

BT601 525


=item B<bt2020>


=item B<smpte431>

DCI P3


=item B<smpte432>

P3 D65


=back



=item B<transfer_characteristics>

Set the color transfer.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same transfer characteristics property (default).


=item B<unknown>


=item B<bt709>

BT 601, BT 709, BT 2020

=item B<smpte2084>

SMPTE ST 2084

=item B<arib-std-b67>

ARIB STD-B67

=back




=item B<matrix_coefficients>

Set the matrix coefficient.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same colorspace property (default).


=item B<unknown>


=item B<bt709>


=item B<smpte170m>

BT 601


=item B<bt2020nc>


=back


=back


Set Rec709 colorspace for each frame of the file
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf:v prores_metadata=color_primaries=bt709:color_trc=bt709:colorspace=bt709 output.mov


Set Hybrid Log-Gamma parameters for each frame of the file
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf:v prores_metadata=color_primaries=bt2020:color_trc=arib-std-b67:colorspace=bt2020nc output.mov



=head2 remove_extra


Remove extradata from packets.

It accepts the following parameter:

=over 4


=item B<freq>

Set which frame types to remove extradata from.


=over 4


=item B<k>

Remove extradata from non-keyframes only.


=item B<keyframe>

Remove extradata from keyframes only.


=item B<e, all>

Remove extradata from all frames.


=back


=back



=head2 setts

Set PTS and DTS in packets.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<ts>


=item B<pts>


=item B<dts>

Set expressions for PTS, DTS or both.

=item B<duration>

Set expression for duration.

=item B<time_base>

Set output time base.

=back


The expressions are evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
constants:


=over 4


=item B<N>

The count of the input packet. Starting from 0.


=item B<TS>

The demux timestamp in input in case of C<ts> or C<dts> option or presentation
timestamp in case of C<pts> option.


=item B<POS>

The original position in the file of the packet, or undefined if undefined
for the current packet


=item B<DTS>

The demux timestamp in input.


=item B<PTS>

The presentation timestamp in input.


=item B<DURATION>

The duration in input.


=item B<STARTDTS>

The DTS of the first packet.


=item B<STARTPTS>

The PTS of the first packet.


=item B<PREV_INDTS>

The previous input DTS.


=item B<PREV_INPTS>

The previous input PTS.


=item B<PREV_INDURATION>

The previous input duration.


=item B<PREV_OUTDTS>

The previous output DTS.


=item B<PREV_OUTPTS>

The previous output PTS.


=item B<PREV_OUTDURATION>

The previous output duration.


=item B<NEXT_DTS>

The next input DTS.


=item B<NEXT_PTS>

The next input PTS.


=item B<NEXT_DURATION>

The next input duration.


=item B<TB>

The timebase of stream packet belongs.


=item B<TB_OUT>

The output timebase.


=item B<SR>

The sample rate of stream packet belongs.


=item B<NOPTS>

The AV_NOPTS_VALUE constant.

=back


For example, to set PTS equal to DTS (not recommended if B-frames are involved):
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a copy -bsf:a setts=pts=DTS out.mkv



=head2 showinfo

Log basic packet information. Mainly useful for testing, debugging,
and development.



=head2 text2movsub


Convert text subtitles to MOV subtitles (as used by the C<mov_text>
codec) with metadata headers.

See also the B<mov2textsub> filter.


=head2 trace_headers


Log trace output containing all syntax elements in the coded stream
headers (everything above the level of individual coded blocks).
This can be useful for debugging low-level stream issues.

Supports AV1, H.264, H.265, (M)JPEG, MPEG-2 and VP9, but depending
on the build only a subset of these may be available.


=head2 truehd_core


Extract the core from a TrueHD stream, dropping ATMOS data.


=head2 vp9_metadata


Modify metadata embedded in a VP9 stream.


=over 4


=item B<color_space>

Set the color space value in the frame header.  Note that any frame
set to RGB will be implicitly set to PC range and that RGB is
incompatible with profiles 0 and 2.

=over 4


=item B<unknown>


=item B<bt601>


=item B<bt709>


=item B<smpte170>


=item B<smpte240>


=item B<bt2020>


=item B<rgb>


=back



=item B<color_range>

Set the color range value in the frame header.  Note that any value
imposed by the color space will take precedence over this value.

=over 4


=item B<tv>


=item B<pc>


=back


=back



=head2 vp9_superframe


Merge VP9 invisible (alt-ref) frames back into VP9 superframes. This
fixes merging of split/segmented VP9 streams where the alt-ref frame
was split from its visible counterpart.


=head2 vp9_superframe_split


Split VP9 superframes into single frames.


=head2 vp9_raw_reorder


Given a VP9 stream with correct timestamps but possibly out of order,
insert additional show-existing-frame packets to correct the ordering.


=head1 FORMAT OPTIONS


The libavformat library provides some generic global options, which
can be set on all the muxers and demuxers. In addition each muxer or
demuxer may support so-called private options, which are specific for
that component.

Options may be set by specifying -I<option> I<value> in the
FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
C<AVFormatContext> options or using the F<libavutil/opt.h> API
for programmatic use.

The list of supported options follows:


=over 4


=item B<avioflags> I<flags> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<direct>

Reduce buffering.

=back



=item B<probesize> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set probing size in bytes, i.e. the size of the data to analyze to get
stream information. A higher value will enable detecting more
information in case it is dispersed into the stream, but will increase
latency. Must be an integer not lesser than 32. It is 5000000 by default.


=item B<max_probe_packets> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set the maximum number of buffered packets when probing a codec.
Default is 2500 packets.


=item B<packetsize> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set packet size.


=item B<fflags> I<flags>

Set format flags. Some are implemented for a limited number of formats.

Possible values for input files:

=over 4


=item B<discardcorrupt>

Discard corrupted packets.

=item B<fastseek>

Enable fast, but inaccurate seeks for some formats.

=item B<genpts>

Generate missing PTS if DTS is present.

=item B<igndts>

Ignore DTS if PTS is also set. In case the PTS is set, the DTS value
is set to NOPTS. This is ignored when the C<nofillin> flag is set.

=item B<ignidx>

Ignore index.

=item B<nobuffer>

Reduce the latency introduced by buffering during initial input streams analysis.

=item B<nofillin>

Do not fill in missing values in packet fields that can be exactly calculated.

=item B<noparse>

Disable AVParsers, this needs C<+nofillin> too.

=item B<sortdts>

Try to interleave output packets by DTS. At present, available only for AVIs with an index.

=back


Possible values for output files:

=over 4


=item B<autobsf>

Automatically apply bitstream filters as required by the output format. Enabled by default.

=item B<bitexact>

Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data.
This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.

=item B<flush_packets>

Write out packets immediately.

=item B<shortest>

Stop muxing at the end of the shortest stream.
It may be needed to increase max_interleave_delta to avoid flushing the longer
streams before EOF.

=back



=item B<seek2any> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Allow seeking to non-keyframes on demuxer level when supported if set to 1.
Default is 0.


=item B<analyzeduration> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Specify how many microseconds are analyzed to probe the input. A
higher value will enable detecting more accurate information, but will
increase latency. It defaults to 5,000,000 microseconds = 5 seconds.


=item B<cryptokey> I<hexadecimal string> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set decryption key.


=item B<indexmem> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set max memory used for timestamp index (per stream).


=item B<rtbufsize> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set max memory used for buffering real-time frames.


=item B<fdebug> I<flags> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Print specific debug info.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<ts>


=back



=item B<max_delay> I<integer> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Set maximum muxing or demuxing delay in microseconds.


=item B<fpsprobesize> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set number of frames used to probe fps.


=item B<audio_preload> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set microseconds by which audio packets should be interleaved earlier.


=item B<chunk_duration> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set microseconds for each chunk.


=item B<chunk_size> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set size in bytes for each chunk.


=item B<err_detect, f_err_detect> I<flags> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set error detection flags. C<f_err_detect> is deprecated and
should be used only via the B<ffmpeg> tool.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<crccheck>

Verify embedded CRCs.

=item B<bitstream>

Detect bitstream specification deviations.

=item B<buffer>

Detect improper bitstream length.

=item B<explode>

Abort decoding on minor error detection.

=item B<careful>

Consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the
wild as errors.

=item B<compliant>

Consider all spec non compliancies as errors.

=item B<aggressive>

Consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error.

=back



=item B<max_interleave_delta> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set maximum buffering duration for interleaving. The duration is
expressed in microseconds, and defaults to 10000000 (10 seconds).

To ensure all the streams are interleaved correctly, libavformat will
wait until it has at least one packet for each stream before actually
writing any packets to the output file. When some streams are
"sparse" (i.e. there are large gaps between successive packets), this
can result in excessive buffering.

This field specifies the maximum difference between the timestamps of the
first and the last packet in the muxing queue, above which libavformat
will output a packet regardless of whether it has queued a packet for all
the streams.

If set to 0, libavformat will continue buffering packets until it has
a packet for each stream, regardless of the maximum timestamp
difference between the buffered packets.


=item B<use_wallclock_as_timestamps> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Use wallclock as timestamps if set to 1. Default is 0.


=item B<avoid_negative_ts> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>


Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<make_non_negative>

Shift timestamps to make them non-negative.
Also note that this affects only leading negative timestamps, and not
non-monotonic negative timestamps.

=item B<make_zero>

Shift timestamps so that the first timestamp is 0.

=item B<auto (default)>

Enables shifting when required by the target format.

=item B<disabled>

Disables shifting of timestamp.

=back


When shifting is enabled, all output timestamps are shifted by the
same amount. Audio, video, and subtitles desynching and relative
timestamp differences are preserved compared to how they would have
been without shifting.


=item B<skip_initial_bytes> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set number of bytes to skip before reading header and frames if set to 1.
Default is 0.


=item B<correct_ts_overflow> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Correct single timestamp overflows if set to 1. Default is 1.


=item B<flush_packets> I<integer> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Flush the underlying I/O stream after each packet. Default is -1 (auto), which
means that the underlying protocol will decide, 1 enables it, and has the
effect of reducing the latency, 0 disables it and may increase IO throughput in
some cases.


=item B<output_ts_offset> I<offset> B<(>I<output>B<)>

Set the output time offset.

I<offset> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

The offset is added by the muxer to the output timestamps.

Specifying a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are
delayed bt the time duration specified in I<offset>. Default value
is C<0> (meaning that no offset is applied).


=item B<format_whitelist> I<list> B<(>I<input>B<)>

"," separated list of allowed demuxers. By default all are allowed.


=item B<dump_separator> I<string> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
Stream parameters.
For example, to separate the fields with newlines and indentation:
	
	ffprobe -dump_separator "
	                          "  -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg



=item B<max_streams> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Specifies the maximum number of streams. This can be used to reject files that
would require too many resources due to a large number of streams.


=item B<skip_estimate_duration_from_pts> I<bool> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Skip estimation of input duration if it requires an additional probing for PTS at end of file.
At present, applicable for MPEG-PS and MPEG-TS.


=item B<duration_probesize> I<integer> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set probing size, in bytes, for input duration estimation when it actually requires
an additional probing for PTS at end of file (at present: MPEG-PS and MPEG-TS).
It is aimed at users interested in better durations probing for itself, or indirectly
because using the concat demuxer, for example.
The typical use case is an MPEG-TS CBR with a high bitrate, high video buffering and
ending cleaning with similar PTS for video and audio: in such a scenario, the large
physical gap between the last video packet and the last audio packet makes it necessary
to read many bytes in order to get the video stream duration.
Another use case is where the default probing behaviour only reaches a single video frame which is
not the last one of the stream due to frame reordering, so the duration is not accurate.
Setting this option has a performance impact even for small files because the probing
size is fixed.
Default behaviour is a general purpose trade-off, largely adaptive, but the probing size
will not be extended to get streams durations at all costs.
Must be an integer not lesser than 1, or 0 for default behaviour.


=item B<strict, f_strict> I<integer> B<(>I<input/output>B<)>

Specify how strictly to follow the standards. C<f_strict> is deprecated and
should be used only via the B<ffmpeg> tool.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<very>

strictly conform to an older more strict version of the spec or reference software

=item B<strict>

strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences

=item B<normal>



=item B<unofficial>

allow unofficial extensions

=item B<experimental>

allow non standardized experimental things, experimental
(unfinished/work in progress/not well tested) decoders and encoders.
Note: experimental decoders can pose a security risk, do not use this for
decoding untrusted input.

=back



=back





=head2 Format stream specifiers


Format stream specifiers allow selection of one or more streams that
match specific properties.

The exact semantics of stream specifiers is defined by the
C<avformat_match_stream_specifier()> function declared in the
F<libavformat/avformat.h> header and documented in the
B<Stream specifiers section in the ffmpeg(1) manual>.


=head1 DEMUXERS


Demuxers are configured elements in FFmpeg that can read the
multimedia streams from a particular type of file.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported demuxers
are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
configure option C<--list-demuxers>.

You can disable all the demuxers using the configure option
C<--disable-demuxers>, and selectively enable a single demuxer with
the option C<--enable-demuxer=I<DEMUXER>>, or disable it
with the option C<--disable-demuxer=I<DEMUXER>>.

The option C<-demuxers> of the ff* tools will display the list of
enabled demuxers. Use C<-formats> to view a combined list of
enabled demuxers and muxers.

The description of some of the currently available demuxers follows.


=head2 aa


Audible Format 2, 3, and 4 demuxer.

This demuxer is used to demux Audible Format 2, 3, and 4 (.aa) files.


=head2 aac


Raw Audio Data Transport Stream AAC demuxer.

This demuxer is used to demux an ADTS input containing a single AAC stream
alongwith any ID3v1/2 or APE tags in it.


=head2 apng


Animated Portable Network Graphics demuxer.

This demuxer is used to demux APNG files.
All headers, but the PNG signature, up to (but not including) the first
fcTL chunk are transmitted as extradata.
Frames are then split as being all the chunks between two fcTL ones, or
between the last fcTL and IEND chunks.


=over 4


=item B<-ignore_loop> I<bool>

Ignore the loop variable in the file if set. Default is enabled.


=item B<-max_fps> I<int>

Maximum framerate in frames per second. Default of 0 imposes no limit.


=item B<-default_fps> I<int>

Default framerate in frames per second when none is specified in the file
(0 meaning as fast as possible). Default is 15.


=back



=head2 asf


Advanced Systems Format demuxer.

This demuxer is used to demux ASF files and MMS network streams.


=over 4


=item B<-no_resync_search> I<bool>

Do not try to resynchronize by looking for a certain optional start code.

=back




=head2 concat


Virtual concatenation script demuxer.

This demuxer reads a list of files and other directives from a text file and
demuxes them one after the other, as if all their packets had been muxed
together.

The timestamps in the files are adjusted so that the first file starts at 0
and each next file starts where the previous one finishes. Note that it is
done globally and may cause gaps if all streams do not have exactly the same
length.

All files must have the same streams (same codecs, same time base, etc.).

The duration of each file is used to adjust the timestamps of the next file:
if the duration is incorrect (because it was computed using the bit-rate or
because the file is truncated, for example), it can cause artifacts. The
C<duration> directive can be used to override the duration stored in
each file.


=head3 Syntax


The script is a text file in extended-ASCII, with one directive per line.
Empty lines, leading spaces and lines starting with '#' are ignored. The
following directive is recognized:


=over 4



=item B<C<file I<path>>>

Path to a file to read; special characters and spaces must be escaped with
backslash or single quotes.

All subsequent file-related directives apply to that file.


=item B<C<ffconcat version 1.0>>

Identify the script type and version.

To make FFmpeg recognize the format automatically, this directive must
appear exactly as is (no extra space or byte-order-mark) on the very first
line of the script.


=item B<C<duration I<dur>>>

Duration of the file. This information can be specified from the file;
specifying it here may be more efficient or help if the information from the
file is not available or accurate.

If the duration is set for all files, then it is possible to seek in the
whole concatenated video.


=item B<C<inpoint I<timestamp>>>

In point of the file. When the demuxer opens the file it instantly seeks to the
specified timestamp. Seeking is done so that all streams can be presented
successfully at In point.

This directive works best with intra frame codecs, because for non-intra frame
ones you will usually get extra packets before the actual In point and the
decoded content will most likely contain frames before In point too.

For each file, packets before the file In point will have timestamps less than
the calculated start timestamp of the file (negative in case of the first
file), and the duration of the files (if not specified by the C<duration>
directive) will be reduced based on their specified In point.

Because of potential packets before the specified In point, packet timestamps
may overlap between two concatenated files.


=item B<C<outpoint I<timestamp>>>

Out point of the file. When the demuxer reaches the specified decoding
timestamp in any of the streams, it handles it as an end of file condition and
skips the current and all the remaining packets from all streams.

Out point is exclusive, which means that the demuxer will not output packets
with a decoding timestamp greater or equal to Out point.

This directive works best with intra frame codecs and formats where all streams
are tightly interleaved. For non-intra frame codecs you will usually get
additional packets with presentation timestamp after Out point therefore the
decoded content will most likely contain frames after Out point too. If your
streams are not tightly interleaved you may not get all the packets from all
streams before Out point and you may only will be able to decode the earliest
stream until Out point.

The duration of the files (if not specified by the C<duration>
directive) will be reduced based on their specified Out point.


=item B<C<file_packet_metadata I<key=value>>>

Metadata of the packets of the file. The specified metadata will be set for
each file packet. You can specify this directive multiple times to add multiple
metadata entries.
This directive is deprecated, use C<file_packet_meta> instead.


=item B<C<file_packet_meta I<key> I<value>>>

Metadata of the packets of the file. The specified metadata will be set for
each file packet. You can specify this directive multiple times to add multiple
metadata entries.


=item B<C<option I<key> I<value>>>

Option to access, open and probe the file.
Can be present multiple times.


=item B<C<stream>>

Introduce a stream in the virtual file.
All subsequent stream-related directives apply to the last introduced
stream.
Some streams properties must be set in order to allow identifying the
matching streams in the subfiles.
If no streams are defined in the script, the streams from the first file are
copied.


=item B<C<exact_stream_id I<id>>>

Set the id of the stream.
If this directive is given, the string with the corresponding id in the
subfiles will be used.
This is especially useful for MPEG-PS (VOB) files, where the order of the
streams is not reliable.


=item B<C<stream_meta I<key> I<value>>>

Metadata for the stream.
Can be present multiple times.


=item B<C<stream_codec I<value>>>

Codec for the stream.


=item B<C<stream_extradata I<hex_string>>>

Extradata for the string, encoded in hexadecimal.


=item B<C<chapter I<id> I<start> I<end>>>

Add a chapter. I<id> is an unique identifier, possibly small and
consecutive.


=back



=head3 Options


This demuxer accepts the following option:


=over 4



=item B<safe>

If set to 1, reject unsafe file paths and directives.
A file path is considered safe if it
does not contain a protocol specification and is relative and all components
only contain characters from the portable character set (letters, digits,
period, underscore and hyphen) and have no period at the beginning of a
component.

If set to 0, any file name is accepted.

The default is 1.


=item B<auto_convert>

If set to 1, try to perform automatic conversions on packet data to make the
streams concatenable.
The default is 1.

Currently, the only conversion is adding the h264_mp4toannexb bitstream
filter to H.264 streams in MP4 format. This is necessary in particular if
there are resolution changes.


=item B<segment_time_metadata>

If set to 1, every packet will contain the I<lavf.concat.start_time> and the
I<lavf.concat.duration> packet metadata values which are the start_time and
the duration of the respective file segments in the concatenated output
expressed in microseconds. The duration metadata is only set if it is known
based on the concat file.
The default is 0.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use absolute filenames and include some comments:
	
	# my first filename
	file /mnt/share/file-1.wav
	# my second filename including whitespace
	file '/mnt/share/file 2.wav'
	# my third filename including whitespace plus single quote
	file '/mnt/share/file 3'\''.wav'



=item *

Allow for input format auto-probing, use safe filenames and set the duration of
the first file:
	
	ffconcat version 1.0
	
	file file-1.wav
	duration 20.0
	
	file subdir/file-2.wav


=back



=head2 dash


Dynamic Adaptive Streaming over HTTP demuxer.

This demuxer presents all AVStreams found in the manifest.
By setting the discard flags on AVStreams the caller can decide
which streams to actually receive.
Each stream mirrors the C<id> and C<bandwidth> properties from the
C<E<lt>RepresentationE<gt>> as metadata keys named "id" and "variant_bitrate" respectively.


=head3 Options


This demuxer accepts the following option:


=over 4



=item B<cenc_decryption_key>

16-byte key, in hex, to decrypt files encrypted using ISO Common Encryption (CENC/AES-128 CTR; ISO/IEC 23001-7).


=back



=head2 dvdvideo


DVD-Video demuxer, powered by libdvdnav and libdvdread.

Can directly ingest DVD titles, specifically sequential PGCs, into
a conversion pipeline. Menu assets, such as background video or audio,
can also be demuxed given the menu's coordinates (at best effort).
Seeking is not supported at this time.

Block devices (DVD drives), ISO files, and directory structures are accepted.
Activate with C<-f dvdvideo> in front of one of these inputs.

This demuxer does NOT have decryption code of any kind. You are on your own
working with encrypted DVDs, and should not expect support on the matter.

Underlying playback is handled by libdvdnav, and structure parsing by libdvdread.
FFmpeg must be built with GPL library support available as well as the
configure switches C<--enable-libdvdnav> and C<--enable-libdvdread>.

You will need to provide either the desired "title number" or exact PGC/PG coordinates.
Many open-source DVD players and tools can aid in providing this information.
If not specified, the demuxer will default to title 1 which works for many discs.
However, due to the flexibility of the format, it is recommended to check manually.
There are many discs that are authored strangely or with invalid headers.

If the input is a real DVD drive, please note that there are some drives which may
silently fail on reading bad sectors from the disc, returning random bits instead
which is effectively corrupt data. This is especially prominent on aging or rotting discs.
A second pass and integrity checks would be needed to detect the corruption.
This is not an FFmpeg issue.


=head3 Background


DVD-Video is not a directly accessible, linear container format in the
traditional sense. Instead, it allows for complex and programmatic playback of
carefully muxed MPEG-PS streams that are stored in headerless VOB files.
To the end-user, these streams are known simply as "titles", but the actual
logical playback sequence is defined by one or more "PGCs", or Program Group Chains,
within the title. The PGC is in turn comprised of multiple "PGs", or Programs",
which are the actual video segments (and for a typical video feature, sequentially
ordered). The PGC structure, along with stream layout and metadata, are stored in
IFO files that need to be parsed. PGCs can be thought of as playlists in easier terms.

An actual DVD player relies on user GUI interaction via menus and an internal VM
to drive the direction of demuxing. Generally, the user would either navigate (via menus)
or automatically be redirected to the PGC of their choice. During this process and
the subsequent playback, the DVD player's internal VM also maintains a state and
executes instructions that can create jumps to different sectors during playback.
This is why libdvdnav is involved, as a linear read of the MPEG-PS blobs on the
disc (VOBs) is not enough to produce the right sequence in many cases.

There are many other DVD structures (a long subject) that will not be discussed here.
NAV packets, in particular, are handled by this demuxer to build accurate timing
but not emitted as a stream. For a good high-level understanding, refer to:
E<lt>B<https://code.videolan.org/videolan/libdvdnav/-/blob/master/doc/dvd_structures>E<gt>


=head3 Options


This demuxer accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<title> I<int>

The title number to play. Must be set if B<pgc> and B<pg> are not set.
Not applicable to menus.
Default is 0 (auto), which currently only selects the first available title (title 1)
and notifies the user about the implications.


=item B<chapter_start> I<int>

The chapter, or PTT (part-of-title), number to start at. Not applicable to menus.
Default is 1.


=item B<chapter_end> I<int>

The chapter, or PTT (part-of-title), number to end at. Not applicable to menus.
Default is 0, which is a special value to signal end at the last possible chapter.


=item B<angle> I<int>

The video angle number, referring to what is essentially an additional
video stream that is composed from alternate frames interleaved in the VOBs.
Not applicable to menus.
Default is 1.


=item B<region> I<int>

The region code to use for playback. Some discs may use this to default playback
at a particular angle in different regions. This option will not affect the region code
of a real DVD drive, if used as an input. Not applicable to menus.
Default is 0, "world".


=item B<menu> I<bool>

Demux menu assets instead of navigating a title. Requires exact coordinates
of the menu (B<menu_lu>, B<menu_vts>, B<pgc>, B<pg>).
Default is false.


=item B<menu_lu> I<int>

The menu language to demux. In DVD, menus are grouped by language.
Default is 0, the first language unit.


=item B<menu_vts> I<int>

The VTS where the menu lives, or 0 if it is a VMG menu (root-level).
Default is 0, VMG menu.


=item B<pgc> I<int>

The entry PGC to start playback, in conjunction with B<pg>.
Alternative to setting B<title>.
Chapter markers are not supported at this time.
Must be explicitly set for menus.
Default is 0, automatically resolve from value of B<title>.


=item B<pg> I<int>

The entry PG to start playback, in conjunction with B<pgc>.
Alternative to setting B<title>.
Chapter markers are not supported at this time.
Default is 0, automatically resolve from value of B<title>, or
start from the beginning (PG 1) of the menu.


=item B<preindex> I<bool>

Enable this to have accurate chapter (PTT) markers and duration measurement,
which requires a slow second pass read in order to index the chapter marker
timestamps from NAV packets. This is non-ideal extra work for real optical drives.
It is recommended and faster to use this option with a backup of the DVD structure
stored on a hard drive. Not compatible with B<pgc> and B<pg>.
Not applicable to menus.
Default is 0, false.


=item B<trim> I<bool>

Skip padding cells (i.e. cells shorter than 1 second) from the beginning.
There exist many discs with filler segments at the beginning of the PGC,
often with junk data intended for controlling a real DVD player's
buffering speed and with no other material data value.
Not applicable to menus.
Default is 1, true.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Open title 3 from a given DVD structure:
	
	ffmpeg -f dvdvideo -title 3 -i <path to DVD> ...



=item *

Open chapters 3-6 from title 1 from a given DVD structure:
	
	ffmpeg -f dvdvideo -chapter_start 3 -chapter_end 6 -title 1 -i <path to DVD> ...



=item *

Open only chapter 5 from title 1 from a given DVD structure:
	
	ffmpeg -f dvdvideo -chapter_start 5 -chapter_end 5 -title 1 -i <path to DVD> ...



=item *

Demux menu with language 1 from VTS 1, PGC 1, starting at PG 1:
	
	ffmpeg -f dvdvideo -menu 1 -menu_lu 1 -menu_vts 1 -pgc 1 -pg 1 -i <path to DVD> ...


=back



=head2 ea


Electronic Arts Multimedia format demuxer.

This format is used by various Electronic Arts games.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<merge_alpha> I<bool>


Normally the VP6 alpha channel (if exists) is returned as a secondary video
stream, by setting this option you can make the demuxer return a single video
stream which contains the alpha channel in addition to the ordinary video.


=back



=head2 imf


Interoperable Master Format demuxer.

This demuxer presents audio and video streams found in an IMF Composition, as
specified in E<lt>B<https://doi.org/10.5594/SMPTE.ST2067-2.2020>E<gt>.

	
	ffmpeg [-assetmaps <path of ASSETMAP1>,<path of ASSETMAP2>,...] -i <path of CPL> ...


If C<-assetmaps> is not specified, the demuxer looks for a file called
F<ASSETMAP.xml> in the same directory as the CPL.


=head2 flv, live_flv, kux


Adobe Flash Video Format demuxer.

This demuxer is used to demux FLV files and RTMP network streams. In case of live network streams, if you force format, you may use live_flv option instead of flv to survive timestamp discontinuities.
KUX is a flv variant used on the Youku platform.

	
	ffmpeg -f flv -i myfile.flv ...
	ffmpeg -f live_flv -i rtmp://<any.server>/anything/key ....




=over 4


=item B<-flv_metadata> I<bool>

Allocate the streams according to the onMetaData array content.


=item B<-flv_ignore_prevtag> I<bool>

Ignore the size of previous tag value.


=item B<-flv_full_metadata> I<bool>

Output all context of the onMetadata.

=back



=head2 gif


Animated GIF demuxer.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<min_delay>

Set the minimum valid delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 2.


=item B<max_gif_delay>

Set the maximum valid delay between frames in hundredth of seconds.
Range is 0 to 65535. Default value is 65535 (nearly eleven minutes),
the maximum value allowed by the specification.


=item B<default_delay>

Set the default delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 10.


=item B<ignore_loop>

GIF files can contain information to loop a certain number of times (or
infinitely). If B<ignore_loop> is set to 1, then the loop setting
from the input will be ignored and looping will not occur. If set to 0,
then looping will occur and will cycle the number of times according to
the GIF. Default value is 1.

=back


For example, with the overlay filter, place an infinitely looping GIF
over another video:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -ignore_loop 0 -i input.gif -filter_complex overlay=shortest=1 out.mkv


Note that in the above example the shortest option for overlay filter is
used to end the output video at the length of the shortest input file,
which in this case is F<input.mp4> as the GIF in this example loops
infinitely.


=head2 hls


HLS demuxer

Apple HTTP Live Streaming demuxer.

This demuxer presents all AVStreams from all variant streams.
The id field is set to the bitrate variant index number. By setting
the discard flags on AVStreams (by pressing 'a' or 'v' in ffplay),
the caller can decide which variant streams to actually receive.
The total bitrate of the variant that the stream belongs to is
available in a metadata key named "variant_bitrate".

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<live_start_index>

segment index to start live streams at (negative values are from the end).


=item B<prefer_x_start>

prefer to use #EXT-X-START if it's in playlist instead of live_start_index.


=item B<allowed_extensions>

',' separated list of file extensions that hls is allowed to access.


=item B<max_reload>

Maximum number of times a insufficient list is attempted to be reloaded.
Default value is 1000.


=item B<m3u8_hold_counters>

The maximum number of times to load m3u8 when it refreshes without new segments.
Default value is 1000.


=item B<http_persistent>

Use persistent HTTP connections. Applicable only for HTTP streams.
Enabled by default.


=item B<http_multiple>

Use multiple HTTP connections for downloading HTTP segments.
Enabled by default for HTTP/1.1 servers.


=item B<http_seekable>

Use HTTP partial requests for downloading HTTP segments.
0 = disable, 1 = enable, -1 = auto, Default is auto.


=item B<seg_format_options>

Set options for the demuxer of media segments using a list of key=value pairs separated by C<:>.


=item B<seg_max_retry>

Maximum number of times to reload a segment on error, useful when segment skip on network error is not desired.
Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 image2


Image file demuxer.

This demuxer reads from a list of image files specified by a pattern.
The syntax and meaning of the pattern is specified by the
option I<pattern_type>.

The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
determine the format of the images contained in the files.

The size, the pixel format, and the format of each image must be the
same for all the files in the sequence.

This demuxer accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<framerate>

Set the frame rate for the video stream. It defaults to 25.

=item B<loop>

If set to 1, loop over the input. Default value is 0.

=item B<pattern_type>

Select the pattern type used to interpret the provided filename.

I<pattern_type> accepts one of the following values.

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disable pattern matching, therefore the video will only contain the specified
image. You should use this option if you do not want to create sequences from
multiple images and your filenames may contain special pattern characters.

=item B<sequence>

Select a sequence pattern type, used to specify a sequence of files
indexed by sequential numbers.

A sequence pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0I<N>d", which
specifies the position of the characters representing a sequential
number in each filename matched by the pattern. If the form
"%d0I<N>d" is used, the string representing the number in each
filename is 0-padded and I<N> is the total number of 0-padded
digits representing the number. The literal character '%' can be
specified in the pattern with the string "%%".

If the sequence pattern contains "%d" or "%0I<N>d", the first filename of
the file list specified by the pattern must contain a number
inclusively contained between I<start_number> and
I<start_number>+I<start_number_range>-1, and all the following
numbers must be sequential.

For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will match a sequence of
filenames of the form F<img-001.bmp>, F<img-002.bmp>, ...,
F<img-010.bmp>, etc.; the pattern "i%%m%%g-%d.jpg" will match a
sequence of filenames of the form F<i%m%g-1.jpg>,
F<i%m%g-2.jpg>, ..., F<i%m%g-10.jpg>, etc.

Note that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
"%0I<N>d", for example to convert a single image file
F<img.jpeg> you can employ the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i img.jpeg img.png



=item B<glob>

Select a glob wildcard pattern type.

The pattern is interpreted like a C<glob()> pattern. This is only
selectable if libavformat was compiled with globbing support.


=item B<glob_sequence> I<(deprecated, will be removed)>

Select a mixed glob wildcard/sequence pattern.

If your version of libavformat was compiled with globbing support, and
the provided pattern contains at least one glob meta character among
C<%*?[]{}> that is preceded by an unescaped "%", the pattern is
interpreted like a C<glob()> pattern, otherwise it is interpreted
like a sequence pattern.

All glob special characters C<%*?[]{}> must be prefixed
with "%". To escape a literal "%" you shall use "%%".

For example the pattern C<foo-%*.jpeg> will match all the
filenames prefixed by "foo-" and terminating with ".jpeg", and
C<foo-%?%?%?.jpeg> will match all the filenames prefixed with
"foo-", followed by a sequence of three characters, and terminating
with ".jpeg".

This pattern type is deprecated in favor of I<glob> and
I<sequence>.

=back


Default value is I<glob_sequence>.

=item B<pixel_format>

Set the pixel format of the images to read. If not specified the pixel
format is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.

=item B<start_number>

Set the index of the file matched by the image file pattern to start
to read from. Default value is 0.

=item B<start_number_range>

Set the index interval range to check when looking for the first image
file in the sequence, starting from I<start_number>. Default value
is 5.

=item B<ts_from_file>

If set to 1, will set frame timestamp to modification time of image file. Note
that monotonity of timestamps is not provided: images go in the same order as
without this option. Default value is 0.
If set to 2, will set frame timestamp to the modification time of the image file in
nanosecond precision.

=item B<video_size>

Set the video size of the images to read. If not specified the video
size is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.

=item B<export_path_metadata>

If set to 1, will add two extra fields to the metadata found in input, making them
also available for other filters (see I<drawtext> filter for examples). Default
value is 0. The extra fields are described below:

=over 4


=item B<lavf.image2dec.source_path>

Corresponds to the full path to the input file being read.

=item B<lavf.image2dec.source_basename>

Corresponds to the name of the file being read.

=back



=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> for creating a video from the images in the file
sequence F<img-001.jpeg>, F<img-002.jpeg>, ..., assuming an
input frame rate of 10 frames per second:
	
	ffmpeg -framerate 10 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv



=item *

As above, but start by reading from a file with index 100 in the sequence:
	
	ffmpeg -framerate 10 -start_number 100 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv



=item *

Read images matching the "*.png" glob pattern , that is all the files
terminating with the ".png" suffix:
	
	ffmpeg -framerate 10 -pattern_type glob -i "*.png" out.mkv


=back



=head2 libgme


The Game Music Emu library is a collection of video game music file emulators.

See E<lt>B<https://bitbucket.org/mpyne/game-music-emu/overview>E<gt> for more information.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<track_index>

Set the index of which track to demux. The demuxer can only export one track.
Track indexes start at 0. Default is to pick the first track. Number of tracks
is exported as I<tracks> metadata entry.


=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sampling rate of the exported track. Range is 1000 to 999999. Default is 44100.


=item B<max_size> I<(bytes)>

The demuxer buffers the entire file into memory. Adjust this value to set the maximum buffer size,
which in turn, acts as a ceiling for the size of files that can be read.
Default is 50 MiB.


=back



=head2 libmodplug


ModPlug based module demuxer

See E<lt>B<https://github.com/Konstanty/libmodplug>E<gt>

It will export one 2-channel 16-bit 44.1 kHz audio stream.
Optionally, a C<pal8> 16-color video stream can be exported with or without printed metadata.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<noise_reduction>

Apply a simple low-pass filter. Can be 1 (on) or 0 (off). Default is 0.


=item B<reverb_depth>

Set amount of reverb. Range 0-100. Default is 0.


=item B<reverb_delay>

Set delay in ms, clamped to 40-250 ms. Default is 0.


=item B<bass_amount>

Apply bass expansion a.k.a. XBass or megabass. Range is 0 (quiet) to 100 (loud). Default is 0.


=item B<bass_range>

Set cutoff i.e. upper-bound for bass frequencies. Range is 10-100 Hz. Default is 0.


=item B<surround_depth>

Apply a Dolby Pro-Logic surround effect. Range is 0 (quiet) to 100 (heavy). Default is 0.


=item B<surround_delay>

Set surround delay in ms, clamped to 5-40 ms. Default is 0.


=item B<max_size>

The demuxer buffers the entire file into memory. Adjust this value to set the maximum buffer size,
which in turn, acts as a ceiling for the size of files that can be read. Range is 0 to 100 MiB.
0 removes buffer size limit (not recommended). Default is 5 MiB.


=item B<video_stream_expr>

String which is evaluated using the eval API to assign colors to the generated video stream.
Variables which can be used are C<x>, C<y>, C<w>, C<h>, C<t>, C<speed>,
C<tempo>, C<order>, C<pattern> and C<row>.


=item B<video_stream>

Generate video stream. Can be 1 (on) or 0 (off). Default is 0.


=item B<video_stream_w>

Set video frame width in 'chars' where one char indicates 8 pixels. Range is 20-512. Default is 30.


=item B<video_stream_h>

Set video frame height in 'chars' where one char indicates 8 pixels. Range is 20-512. Default is 30.


=item B<video_stream_ptxt>

Print metadata on video stream. Includes C<speed>, C<tempo>, C<order>, C<pattern>,
C<row> and C<ts> (time in ms). Can be 1 (on) or 0 (off). Default is 1.


=back



=head2 libopenmpt


libopenmpt based module demuxer

See E<lt>B<https://lib.openmpt.org/libopenmpt/>E<gt> for more information.

Some files have multiple subsongs (tracks) this can be set with the B<subsong>
option.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<subsong>

Set the subsong index. This can be either  'all', 'auto', or the index of the
subsong. Subsong indexes start at 0. The default is 'auto'.

The default value is to let libopenmpt choose.


=item B<layout>

Set the channel layout. Valid values are 1, 2, and 4 channel layouts.
The default value is STEREO.


=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sample rate for libopenmpt to output.
Range is from 1000 to INT_MAX. The value default is 48000.

=back



=head2 mov/mp4/3gp


Demuxer for Quicktime File Format & ISO/IEC Base Media File Format (ISO/IEC 14496-12 or MPEG-4 Part 12, ISO/IEC 15444-12 or JPEG 2000 Part 12).

Registered extensions: mov, mp4, m4a, 3gp, 3g2, mj2, psp, m4b, ism, ismv, isma, f4v


=head3 Options


This demuxer accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<enable_drefs>

Enable loading of external tracks, disabled by default.
Enabling this can theoretically leak information in some use cases.


=item B<use_absolute_path>

Allows loading of external tracks via absolute paths, disabled by default.
Enabling this poses a security risk. It should only be enabled if the source
is known to be non-malicious.


=item B<seek_streams_individually>

When seeking, identify the closest point in each stream individually and demux packets in
that stream from identified point. This can lead to a different sequence of packets compared
to demuxing linearly from the beginning. Default is true.


=item B<ignore_editlist>

Ignore any edit list atoms. The demuxer, by default, modifies the stream index to reflect the
timeline described by the edit list. Default is false.


=item B<advanced_editlist>

Modify the stream index to reflect the timeline described by the edit list. C<ignore_editlist>
must be set to false for this option to be effective.
If both C<ignore_editlist> and this option are set to false, then only the
start of the stream index is modified to reflect initial dwell time or starting timestamp
described by the edit list. Default is true.


=item B<ignore_chapters>

Don't parse chapters. This includes GoPro 'HiLight' tags/moments. Note that chapters are
only parsed when input is seekable. Default is false.


=item B<use_mfra_for>

For seekable fragmented input, set fragment's starting timestamp from media fragment random access box, if present.

Following options are available:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto-detect whether to set mfra timestamps as PTS or DTS I<(default)>


=item B<dts>

Set mfra timestamps as DTS


=item B<pts>

Set mfra timestamps as PTS


=item B<0>

Don't use mfra box to set timestamps

=back



=item B<use_tfdt>

For fragmented input, set fragment's starting timestamp to C<baseMediaDecodeTime> from the C<tfdt> box.
Default is enabled, which will prefer to use the C<tfdt> box to set DTS. Disable to use the C<earliest_presentation_time> from the C<sidx> box.
In either case, the timestamp from the C<mfra> box will be used if it's available and C<use_mfra_for> is
set to pts or dts.


=item B<export_all>

Export unrecognized boxes within the I<udta> box as metadata entries. The first four
characters of the box type are set as the key. Default is false.


=item B<export_xmp>

Export entire contents of I<XMP_> box and I<uuid> box as a string with key C<xmp>. Note that
if C<export_all> is set and this option isn't, the contents of I<XMP_> box are still exported
but with key C<XMP_>. Default is false.


=item B<activation_bytes>

4-byte key required to decrypt Audible AAX and AAX+ files. See Audible AAX subsection below.


=item B<audible_fixed_key>

Fixed key used for handling Audible AAX/AAX+ files. It has been pre-set so should not be necessary to
specify.


=item B<decryption_key>

16-byte key, in hex, to decrypt files encrypted using ISO Common Encryption (CENC/AES-128 CTR; ISO/IEC 23001-7).


=item B<max_stts_delta>

Very high sample deltas written in a trak's stts box may occasionally be intended but usually they are written in
error or used to store a negative value for dts correction when treated as signed 32-bit integers. This option lets
the user set an upper limit, beyond which the delta is clamped to 1. Values greater than the limit if negative when
cast to int32 are used to adjust onward dts.

Unit is the track time scale. Range is 0 to UINT_MAX. Default is C<UINT_MAX - 48000*10> which allows up to
a 10 second dts correction for 48 kHz audio streams while accommodating 99.9% of C<uint32> range.


=item B<interleaved_read>

Interleave packets from multiple tracks at demuxer level. For badly interleaved files, this prevents playback issues
caused by large gaps between packets in different tracks, as MOV/MP4 do not have packet placement requirements.
However, this can cause excessive seeking on very badly interleaved files, due to seeking between tracks, so disabling
it may prevent I/O issues, at the expense of playback.


=back



=head3 Audible AAX


Audible AAX files are encrypted M4B files, and they can be decrypted by specifying a 4 byte activation secret.
	
	ffmpeg -activation_bytes 1CEB00DA -i test.aax -vn -c:a copy output.mp4



=head2 mpegts


MPEG-2 transport stream demuxer.

This demuxer accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<resync_size>

Set size limit for looking up a new synchronization. Default value is
65536.


=item B<skip_unknown_pmt>

Skip PMTs for programs not defined in the PAT. Default value is 0.


=item B<fix_teletext_pts>

Override teletext packet PTS and DTS values with the timestamps calculated
from the PCR of the first program which the teletext stream is part of and is
not discarded. Default value is 1, set this option to 0 if you want your
teletext packet PTS and DTS values untouched.


=item B<ts_packetsize>

Output option carrying the raw packet size in bytes.
Show the detected raw packet size, cannot be set by the user.


=item B<scan_all_pmts>

Scan and combine all PMTs. The value is an integer with value from -1
to 1 (-1 means automatic setting, 1 means enabled, 0 means
disabled). Default value is -1.


=item B<merge_pmt_versions>

Re-use existing streams when a PMT's version is updated and elementary
streams move to different PIDs. Default value is 0.


=item B<max_packet_size>

Set maximum size, in bytes, of packet emitted by the demuxer. Payloads above this size
are split across multiple packets. Range is 1 to INT_MAX/2. Default is 204800 bytes.

=back



=head2 mpjpeg


MJPEG encapsulated in multi-part MIME demuxer.

This demuxer allows reading of MJPEG, where each frame is represented as a part of
multipart/x-mixed-replace stream.

=over 4



=item B<strict_mime_boundary>

Default implementation applies a relaxed standard to multi-part MIME boundary detection,
to prevent regression with numerous existing endpoints not generating a proper MIME
MJPEG stream. Turning this option on by setting it to 1 will result in a stricter check
of the boundary value.

=back



=head2 rawvideo


Raw video demuxer.

This demuxer allows one to read raw video data. Since there is no header
specifying the assumed video parameters, the user must specify them
in order to be able to decode the data correctly.

This demuxer accepts the following options:

=over 4



=item B<framerate>

Set input video frame rate. Default value is 25.


=item B<pixel_format>

Set the input video pixel format. Default value is C<yuv420p>.


=item B<video_size>

Set the input video size. This value must be specified explicitly.

=back


For example to read a rawvideo file F<input.raw> with
B<ffplay>, assuming a pixel format of C<rgb24>, a video
size of C<320x240>, and a frame rate of 10 images per second, use
the command:
	
	ffplay -f rawvideo -pixel_format rgb24 -video_size 320x240 -framerate 10 input.raw




=head2 rcwt


RCWT (Raw Captions With Time) is a format native to ccextractor, a commonly
used open source tool for processing 608/708 Closed Captions (CC) sources.
For more information on the format, see .

This demuxer implements the specification as of March 2024, which has
been stable and unchanged since April 2014.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Render CC to ASS using the built-in decoder:
	
	ffmpeg -i CC.rcwt.bin CC.ass

Note that if your output appears to be empty, you may have to manually
set the decoder's B<data_field> option to pick the desired CC substream.


=item *

Convert an RCWT backup to Scenarist (SCC) format:
	
	ffmpeg -i CC.rcwt.bin -c:s copy CC.scc

Note that the SCC format does not support all of the possible CC extensions
that can be stored in RCWT (such as EIA-708).

=back



=head2 sbg


SBaGen script demuxer.

This demuxer reads the script language used by SBaGen
E<lt>B<http://uazu.net/sbagen/>E<gt> to generate binaural beats sessions. A SBG
script looks like that:
	
	-SE
	a: 300-2.5/3 440+4.5/0
	b: 300-2.5/0 440+4.5/3
	off: -
	NOW      == a
	+0:07:00 == b
	+0:14:00 == a
	+0:21:00 == b
	+0:30:00    off


A SBG script can mix absolute and relative timestamps. If the script uses
either only absolute timestamps (including the script start time) or only
relative ones, then its layout is fixed, and the conversion is
straightforward. On the other hand, if the script mixes both kind of
timestamps, then the I<NOW> reference for relative timestamps will be
taken from the current time of day at the time the script is read, and the
script layout will be frozen according to that reference. That means that if
the script is directly played, the actual times will match the absolute
timestamps up to the sound controller's clock accuracy, but if the user
somehow pauses the playback or seeks, all times will be shifted accordingly.


=head2 tedcaptions


JSON captions used for E<lt>B<http://www.ted.com/>E<gt>.

TED does not provide links to the captions, but they can be guessed from the
page. The file F<tools/bookmarklets.html> from the FFmpeg source tree
contains a bookmarklet to expose them.

This demuxer accepts the following option:

=over 4


=item B<start_time>

Set the start time of the TED talk, in milliseconds. The default is 15000
(15s). It is used to sync the captions with the downloadable videos, because
they include a 15s intro.

=back


Example: convert the captions to a format most players understand:
	
	ffmpeg -i http://www.ted.com/talks/subtitles/id/1/lang/en talk1-en.srt



=head2 vapoursynth


Vapoursynth wrapper.

Due to security concerns, Vapoursynth scripts will not
be autodetected so the input format has to be forced. For ff* CLI tools,
add C<-f vapoursynth> before the input C<-i yourscript.vpy>.

This demuxer accepts the following option:

=over 4


=item B<max_script_size>

The demuxer buffers the entire script into memory. Adjust this value to set the maximum buffer size,
which in turn, acts as a ceiling for the size of scripts that can be read.
Default is 1 MiB.

=back



=head2 w64


Sony Wave64 Audio demuxer.

This demuxer accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<max_size>

See the same option for the B<wav> demuxer.

=back




=head2 wav


RIFF Wave Audio demuxer.

This demuxer accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<max_size>

Specify the maximum packet size in bytes for the demuxed packets. By default
this is set to 0, which means that a sensible value is chosen based on the
input format.

=back



=head1 MUXERS


Muxers are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow writing
multimedia streams to a particular type of file.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported muxers
are enabled by default. You can list all available muxers using the
configure option C<--list-muxers>.

You can disable all the muxers with the configure option
C<--disable-muxers> and selectively enable / disable single muxers
with the options C<--enable-muxer=I<MUXER>> /
C<--disable-muxer=I<MUXER>>.

The option C<-muxers> of the ff* tools will display the list of
enabled muxers. Use C<-formats> to view a combined list of
enabled demuxers and muxers.

A description of some of the currently available muxers follows.



=head2 Raw muxers


This section covers raw muxers. They accept a single stream matching
the designated codec. They do not store timestamps or metadata. The
recognized extension is the same as the muxer name unless indicated
otherwise.

It comprises the following muxers. The media type and the eventual
extensions used to automatically selects the muxer from the output
extensions are also shown.


=over 4


=item B<ac3> I<audio>

Dolby Digital, also known as AC-3.


=item B<adx> I<audio>

CRI Middleware ADX audio.

This muxer will write out the total sample count near the start of the
first packet when the output is seekable and the count can be stored
in 32 bits.


=item B<aptx> I<audio>

aptX (Audio Processing Technology for Bluetooth)


=item B<aptx_hd> I<audio> B<(aptxdh)>

aptX HD (Audio Processing Technology for Bluetooth) audio


=item B<avs2> I<video> B<(avs, avs2)>

AVS2-P2 (Audio Video Standard - Second generation - Part 2) /
IEEE 1857.4 video


=item B<avs3> I<video> B<(avs3)>

AVS3-P2 (Audio Video Standard - Third generation - Part 2) /
IEEE 1857.10 video


=item B<cavsvideo> I<video> B<(cavs)>

Chinese AVS (Audio Video Standard - First generation)


=item B<codec2raw> I<audio>

Codec 2 audio.

No extension is registered so format name has to be supplied e.g. with
the ffmpeg CLI tool C<-f codec2raw>.


=item B<data> I<any>

Generic data muxer.

This muxer accepts a single stream with any codec of any type. The
input stream has to be selected using the C<-map> option with the
B<ffmpeg> CLI tool.

No extension is registered so format name has to be supplied e.g. with
the B<ffmpeg> CLI tool C<-f data>.


=item B<dfpwm> I<audio> B<(dfpwm)>

Raw DFPWM1a (Dynamic Filter Pulse With Modulation) audio muxer.


=item B<dirac> I<video> B<(drc, vc2)>

BBC Dirac video.

The Dirac Pro codec is a subset and is standardized as SMPTE VC-2.


=item B<dnxhd> I<video> B<(dnxhd, dnxhr)>

Avid DNxHD video.

It is standardized as SMPTE VC-3. Accepts DNxHR streams.


=item B<dts> I<audio>

DTS Coherent Acoustics (DCA) audio


=item B<eac3> I<audio>

Dolby Digital Plus, also known as Enhanced AC-3


=item B<evc> I<video> B<(evc)>

MPEG-5 Essential Video Coding (EVC) / EVC / MPEG-5 Part 1 EVC video


=item B<g722> I<audio>

ITU-T G.722 audio


=item B<g723_1> I<audio> B<(tco, rco)>

ITU-T G.723.1 audio


=item B<g726> I<audio>

ITU-T G.726 big-endian ("left-justified") audio.

No extension is registered so format name has to be supplied e.g. with
the B<ffmpeg> CLI tool C<-f g726>.


=item B<g726le> I<audio>

ITU-T G.726 little-endian ("right-justified") audio.

No extension is registered so format name has to be supplied e.g. with
the B<ffmpeg> CLI tool C<-f g726le>.


=item B<gsm> I<audio>

Global System for Mobile Communications audio


=item B<h261> I<video>

ITU-T H.261 video


=item B<h263> I<video>

ITU-T H.263 / H.263-1996, H.263+ / H.263-1998 / H.263 version 2 video


=item B<h264> I<video> B<(h264, 264)>

ITU-T H.264 / MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC video. Bitstream shall be converted
to Annex B syntax if it's in length-prefixed mode.


=item B<hevc> I<video> B<(hevc, h265, 265)>

ITU-T H.265 / MPEG-H Part 2 HEVC video. Bitstream shall be converted
to Annex B syntax if it's in length-prefixed mode.


=item B<m4v> I<video>

MPEG-4 Part 2 video


=item B<mjpeg> I<video> B<(mjpg, mjpeg)>

Motion JPEG video


=item B<mlp> I<audio>

Meridian Lossless Packing, also known as Packed PCM


=item B<mp2> I<audio> B<(mp2, m2a, mpa)>

MPEG-1 Audio Layer II audio


=item B<mpeg1video> I<video> B<(mpg, mpeg, m1v)>

MPEG-1 Part 2 video.


=item B<mpeg2video> I<video> B<(m2v)>

ITU-T H.262 / MPEG-2 Part 2 video


=item B<obu> I<video>

AV1 low overhead Open Bitstream Units muxer.

Temporal delimiter OBUs will be inserted in all temporal units of the
stream.


=item B<rawvideo> I<video> B<(yuv, rgb)>

Raw uncompressed video.


=item B<sbc> I<audio> B<(sbc, msbc)>

Bluetooth SIG low-complexity subband codec audio


=item B<truehd> I<audio> B<(thd)>

Dolby TrueHD audio


=item B<vc1> I<video>

SMPTE 421M / VC-1 video

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Store raw video frames with the B<rawvideo> muxer using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i testsrc -t 10 -s hd1080p testsrc.yuv


Since the rawvideo muxer do not store the information related to size
and format, this information must be provided when demuxing the file:
	
	ffplay -video_size 1920x1080 -pixel_format rgb24 -f rawvideo testsrc.rgb


=back



=head2 Raw PCM muxers

This section covers raw PCM (Pulse-Code Modulation) audio muxers.

They accept a single stream matching the designated codec. They do not
store timestamps or metadata. The recognized extension is the same as
the muxer name.

It comprises the following muxers. The optional additional extension
used to automatically select the muxer from the output extension is
also shown in parentheses.


=over 4


=item B<alaw (al)>

PCM A-law


=item B<f32be>

PCM 32-bit floating-point big-endian


=item B<f32le>

PCM 32-bit floating-point little-endian


=item B<f64be>

PCM 64-bit floating-point big-endian


=item B<f64le>

PCM 64-bit floating-point little-endian


=item B<mulaw (ul)>

PCM mu-law


=item B<s16be>

PCM signed 16-bit big-endian


=item B<s16le>

PCM signed 16-bit little-endian


=item B<s24be>

PCM signed 24-bit big-endian


=item B<s24le>

PCM signed 24-bit little-endian


=item B<s32be>

PCM signed 32-bit big-endian


=item B<s32le>

PCM signed 32-bit little-endian


=item B<s8 (sb)>

PCM signed 8-bit


=item B<u16be>

PCM unsigned 16-bit big-endian


=item B<u16le>

PCM unsigned 16-bit little-endian


=item B<u24be>

PCM unsigned 24-bit big-endian


=item B<u24le>

PCM unsigned 24-bit little-endian


=item B<u32be>

PCM unsigned 32-bit big-endian


=item B<u32le>

PCM unsigned 32-bit little-endian


=item B<u8 (ub)>

PCM unsigned 8-bit


=item B<vidc>

PCM Archimedes VIDC

=back



=head2 MPEG-1/MPEG-2 program stream muxers


This section covers formats belonging to the MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 Systems
family.

The MPEG-1 Systems format (also known as ISO/IEEC 11172-1 or MPEG-1
program stream) has been adopted for the format of media track stored
in VCD (Video Compact Disc).

The MPEG-2 Systems standard (also known as ISO/IEEC 13818-1) covers
two containers formats, one known as transport stream and one known as
program stream; only the latter is covered here.

The MPEG-2 program stream format (also known as VOB due to the
corresponding file extension) is an extension of MPEG-1 program
stream: in addition to support different codecs for the audio and
video streams, it also stores subtitles and navigation metadata.
MPEG-2 program stream has been adopted for storing media streams in
SVCD and DVD storage devices.

This section comprises the following muxers.


=over 4


=item B<mpeg (mpg,mpeg)>

MPEG-1 Systems / MPEG-1 program stream muxer.


=item B<vcd>

MPEG-1 Systems / MPEG-1 program stream (VCD) muxer.

This muxer can be used to generate tracks in the format accepted by
the VCD (Video Compact Disc) storage devices.

It is the same as the B<mpeg> muxer with a few differences.


=item B<vob>

MPEG-2 program stream (VOB) muxer.


=item B<dvd>

MPEG-2 program stream (DVD VOB) muxer.

This muxer can be used to generate tracks in the format accepted by
the DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) storage devices.

This is the same as the B<vob> muxer with a few differences.


=item B<svcd (vob)>

MPEG-2 program stream (SVCD VOB) muxer.

This muxer can be used to generate tracks in the format accepted by
the SVCD (Super Video Compact Disc) storage devices.

This is the same as the B<vob> muxer with a few differences.

=back



=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<muxrate> I<rate>

Set user-defined mux rate expressed as a number of bits/s. If not
specied the automatically computed mux rate is employed. Default value
is C<0>.


=item B<preload> I<delay>

Set initial demux-decode delay in microseconds. Default value is
C<500000>.

=back



=head2 MOV/MPEG-4/ISOMBFF muxers


This section covers formats belonging to the QuickTime / MOV family,
including the MPEG-4 Part 14 format and ISO base media file format
(ISOBMFF). These formats share a common structure based on the ISO
base media file format (ISOBMFF).

The MOV format was originally developed for use with Apple QuickTime.
It was later used as the basis for the MPEG-4 Part 1 (later Part 14)
format, also known as ISO/IEC 14496-1. That format was then
generalized into ISOBMFF, also named MPEG-4 Part 12 format, ISO/IEC
14496-12, or ISO/IEC 15444-12.

It comprises the following muxers.


=over 4


=item B<3gp>

Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) format for 3G UMTS
multimedia services


=item B<3g2>

Third Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GP2 or 3GPP2) format for 3G
CDMA2000 multimedia services, similar to B<3gp> with extensions
and limitations


=item B<f4v>

Adobe Flash Video format


=item B<ipod>

MPEG-4 audio file format, as MOV/MP4 but limited to contain only audio
streams, typically played with the Apple ipod device


=item B<ismv>

Microsoft IIS (Internet Information Services) Smooth Streaming
Audio/Video (ISMV or ISMA) format. This is based on MPEG-4 Part 14
format with a few incompatible variants, used to stream media files
for the Microsoft IIS server.


=item B<mov>

QuickTime player format identified by the C<.mov> extension


=item B<mp4>

MP4 or MPEG-4 Part 14 format


=item B<psp>

PlayStation Portable MP4/MPEG-4 Part 14 format variant. This is based
on MPEG-4 Part 14 format with a few incompatible variants, used to
play files on PlayStation devices.

=back



=head3 Fragmentation


The B<mov>, B<mp4>, and B<ismv> muxers support
fragmentation. Normally, a MOV/MP4 file has all the metadata about all
packets stored in one location.

This data is usually written at the end of the file, but it can be
moved to the start for better playback by adding C<+faststart> to
the C<-movflags>, or using the B<qt-faststart> tool).

A fragmented file consists of a number of fragments, where packets and
metadata about these packets are stored together. Writing a fragmented
file has the advantage that the file is decodable even if the writing
is interrupted (while a normal MOV/MP4 is undecodable if it is not
properly finished), and it requires less memory when writing very long
files (since writing normal MOV/MP4 files stores info about every
single packet in memory until the file is closed). The downside is
that it is less compatible with other applications.

Fragmentation is enabled by setting one of the options that define
how to cut the file into fragments:

=over 4


=item B<frag_duration>


=item B<frag_size>


=item B<min_frag_duration>


=item B<movflags +frag_keyframe>


=item B<movflags +frag_custom>


=back


If more than one condition is specified, fragments are cut when one of
the specified conditions is fulfilled. The exception to this is the
option B<min_frag_duration>, which has to be fulfilled for any
of the other conditions to apply.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<brand> I<brand_string>

Override major brand.


=item B<empty_hdlr_name> I<bool>

Enable to skip writing the name inside a C<hdlr> box.
Default is C<false>.


=item B<encryption_key> I<key>

set the media encryption key in hexadecimal format


=item B<encryption_kid> I<kid>

set the media encryption key identifier in hexadecimal format


=item B<encryption_scheme> I<scheme>

configure the encryption scheme, allowed values are B<none>, and
B<cenc-aes-ctr>


=item B<frag_duration> I<duration>

Create fragments that are I<duration> microseconds long.


=item B<frag_interleave>  I<number>

Interleave samples within fragments (max number of consecutive
samples, lower is tighter interleaving, but with more overhead. It is
set to C<0> by default.


=item B<frag_size> I<size>

create fragments that contain up to I<size> bytes of payload data


=item B<iods_audio_profile> I<profile>

specify iods number for the audio profile atom (from -1 to 255),
default is C<-1>


=item B<iods_video_profile> I<profile>

specify iods number for the video profile atom (from -1 to 255),
default is C<-1>


=item B<ism_lookahead> I<num_entries>

specify number of lookahead entries for ISM files (from 0 to 255),
default is C<0>


=item B<min_frag_duration> I<duration>

do not create fragments that are shorter than I<duration> microseconds long


=item B<moov_size> I<bytes>

Reserves space for the moov atom at the beginning of the file instead of placing the
moov atom at the end. If the space reserved is insufficient, muxing will fail.


=item B<mov_gamma> I<gamma>

specify gamma value for gama atom (as a decimal number from 0 to 10),
default is C<0.0>, must be set together with C<+ movflags>


=item B<movflags> I<flags>

Set various muxing switches. The following flags can be used:

=over 4


=item B<cmaf>

write CMAF (Common Media Application Format) compatible fragmented
MP4 output


=item B<dash>

write DASH (Dynamic Adaptive Streaming over HTTP) compatible fragmented
MP4 output


=item B<default_base_moof>

Similarly to the B<omit_tfhd_offset> flag, this flag avoids
writing the absolute base_data_offset field in tfhd atoms, but does so
by using the new default-base-is-moof flag instead. This flag is new
from 14496-12:2012. This may make the fragments easier to parse in
certain circumstances (avoiding basing track fragment location
calculations on the implicit end of the previous track fragment).


=item B<delay_moov>

delay writing the initial moov until the first fragment is cut, or
until the first fragment flush


=item B<disable_chpl>

Disable Nero chapter markers (chpl atom). Normally, both Nero chapters
and a QuickTime chapter track are written to the file. With this
option set, only the QuickTime chapter track will be written. Nero
chapters can cause failures when the file is reprocessed with certain
tagging programs, like mp3Tag 2.61a and iTunes 11.3, most likely other
versions are affected as well.


=item B<faststart>

Run a second pass moving the index (moov atom) to the beginning of the
file. This operation can take a while, and will not work in various
situations such as fragmented output, thus it is not enabled by
default.


=item B<frag_custom>

Allow the caller to manually choose when to cut fragments, by calling
C<av_write_frame(ctx, NULL)> to write a fragment with the packets
written so far. (This is only useful with other applications
integrating libavformat, not from B<ffmpeg>.)


=item B<frag_discont>

signal that the next fragment is discontinuous from earlier ones


=item B<frag_every_frame>

fragment at every frame


=item B<frag_keyframe>

start a new fragment at each video keyframe


=item B<global_sidx>

write a global sidx index at the start of the file


=item B<isml>

create a live smooth streaming feed (for pushing to a publishing point)


=item B<negative_cts_offsets>

Enables utilization of version 1 of the CTTS box, in which the CTS offsets can
be negative. This enables the initial sample to have DTS/CTS of zero, and
reduces the need for edit lists for some cases such as video tracks with
B-frames. Additionally, eases conformance with the DASH-IF interoperability
guidelines.

This option is implicitly set when writing B<ismv> (Smooth
Streaming) files.


=item B<omit_tfhd_offset>

Do not write any absolute base_data_offset in tfhd atoms. This avoids
tying fragments to absolute byte positions in the file/streams.


=item B<prefer_icc>

If writing colr atom prioritise usage of ICC profile if it exists in
stream packet side data.


=item B<rtphint>

add RTP hinting tracks to the output file


=item B<separate_moof>

Write a separate moof (movie fragment) atom for each track. Normally,
packets for all tracks are written in a moof atom (which is slightly
more efficient), but with this option set, the muxer writes one
moof/mdat pair for each track, making it easier to separate tracks.


=item B<skip_sidx>

Skip writing of sidx atom. When bitrate overhead due to sidx atom is
high, this option could be used for cases where sidx atom is not
mandatory. When the B<global_sidx> flag is enabled, this option
is ignored.


=item B<skip_trailer>

skip writing the mfra/tfra/mfro trailer for fragmented files


=item B<use_metadata_tags>

use mdta atom for metadata


=item B<write_colr>

write colr atom even if the color info is unspecified. This flag is
experimental, may be renamed or changed, do not use from scripts.


=item B<write_gama>

write deprecated gama atom


=item B<hybrid_fragmented>

For recoverability - write the output file as a fragmented file.
This allows the intermediate file to be read while being written
(in particular, if the writing process is aborted uncleanly). When
writing is finished, the file is converted to a regular, non-fragmented
file, which is more compatible and allows easier and quicker seeking.

If writing is aborted, the intermediate file can manually be
remuxed to get a regular, non-fragmented file of what had been
written into the unfinished file.

=back



=item B<movie_timescale> I<scale>

Set the timescale written in the movie header box (C<mvhd>).
Range is 1 to INT_MAX. Default is C<1000>.


=item B<rtpflags> I<flags>

Add RTP hinting tracks to the output file.

The following flags can be used:

=over 4


=item B<h264_mode0>

use mode 0 for H.264 in RTP


=item B<latm>

use MP4A-LATM packetization instead of MPEG4-GENERIC for AAC


=item B<rfc2190>

use RFC 2190 packetization instead of RFC 4629 for H.263


=item B<send_bye>

send RTCP BYE packets when finishing


=item B<skip_rtcp>

do not send RTCP sender reports

=back



=item B<skip_iods> I<bool>

skip writing iods atom (default value is C<true>)


=item B<use_editlist> I<bool>

use edit list (default value is C<auto>)


=item B<use_stream_ids_as_track_ids> I<bool>

use stream ids as track ids (default value is C<false>)


=item B<video_track_timescale> I<scale>

Set the timescale used for video tracks. Range is C<0> to INT_MAX. If
set to C<0>, the timescale is automatically set based on the
native stream time base. Default is C<0>.


=item B<write_btrt> I<bool>

Force or disable writing bitrate box inside stsd box of a track. The
box contains decoding buffer size (in bytes), maximum bitrate and
average bitrate for the track. The box will be skipped if none of
these values can be computed.  Default is C<-1> or C<auto>,
which will write the box only in MP4 mode.


=item B<write_prft> I<option>

Write producer time reference box (PRFT) with a specified time source for the
NTP field in the PRFT box. Set value as B<wallclock> to specify timesource
as wallclock time and B<pts> to specify timesource as input packets' PTS
values.


=item B<write_tmcd> I<bool>

Specify C<on> to force writing a timecode track, C<off> to disable it
and C<auto> to write a timecode track only for mov and mp4 output (default).

Setting value to B<pts> is applicable only for a live encoding use case,
where PTS values are set as as wallclock time at the source. For example, an
encoding use case with decklink capture source where B<video_pts> and
B<audio_pts> are set to B<abs_wallclock>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Push Smooth Streaming content in real time to a publishing point on
IIS with the B<ismv> muxer using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -re <<normal input/transcoding options>> -movflags isml+frag_keyframe -f ismv http://server/publishingpoint.isml/Streams(Encoder1)


=back




=head2 a64

A64 Commodore 64 video muxer.

This muxer accepts a single C<a64_multi> or C<a64_multi5>
codec video stream.


=head2 ac4

Raw AC-4 audio muxer.

This muxer accepts a single C<ac4> audio stream.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<write_crc> I<bool>

when enabled, write a CRC checksum for each packet to the output,
default is C<false>

=back




=head2 adts

Audio Data Transport Stream muxer.

It accepts a single AAC stream.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<write_id3v2> I<bool>

Enable to write ID3v2.4 tags at the start of the stream. Default is
disabled.


=item B<write_apetag> I<bool>

Enable to write APE tags at the end of the stream. Default is
disabled.


=item B<write_mpeg2> I<bool>

Enable to set MPEG version bit in the ADTS frame header to 1 which
indicates MPEG-2. Default is 0, which indicates MPEG-4.

=back




=head2 aea

MD STUDIO audio muxer.

This muxer accepts a single ATRAC1 audio stream with either one or two channels
and a sample rate of 44100Hz.

As AEA supports storing the track title, this muxer will also write
the title from stream's metadata to the container.



=head2 aiff

Audio Interchange File Format muxer.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<write_id3v2> I<bool>

Enable ID3v2 tags writing when set to 1. Default is 0 (disabled).


=item B<id3v2_version> I<bool>

Select ID3v2 version to write. Currently only version 3 and 4 (aka.
ID3v2.3 and ID3v2.4) are supported. The default is version 4.

=back




=head2 alp

High Voltage Software's Lego Racers game audio muxer.

It accepts a single ADPCM_IMA_ALP stream with no more than 2 channels
and a sample rate not greater than 44100 Hz.

Extensions: C<tun>, C<pcm>


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<type> I<type>

Set file type.

I<type> accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<tun>

Set file type as music. Must have a sample rate of 22050 Hz.


=item B<pcm>

Set file type as sfx.


=item B<auto>

Set file type as per output file extension. C<.pcm> results in
type C<pcm> else type C<tun> is set. I<(default)>

=back


=back



=head2 amr

3GPP AMR (Adaptive Multi-Rate) audio muxer.

It accepts a single audio stream containing an AMR NB stream.


=head2 amv

AMV (Actions Media Video) format muxer.


=head2 apm

Ubisoft Rayman 2 APM audio muxer.

It accepts a single ADPCM IMA APM audio stream.


=head2 apng

Animated Portable Network Graphics muxer.

It accepts a single APNG video stream.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<final_delay> I<delay>

Force a delay expressed in seconds after the last frame of each
repetition. Default value is C<0.0>.


=item B<plays> I<repetitions>

specify how many times to play the content, C<0> causes an infinte
loop, with C<1> there is no loop

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to generate an APNG output with 2 repetitions,
and with a delay of half a second after the first repetition:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -final_delay 0.5 -plays 2 out.apng


=back



=head2 argo_asf

Argonaut Games ASF audio muxer.

It accepts a single ADPCM audio stream.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<version_major> I<version>

override file major version, specified as an integer, default value is
C<2>


=item B<version_minor> I<version>

override file minor version, specified as an integer, default value is
C<1>


=item B<name> I<name>

Embed file name into file, if not specified use the output file
name. The name is truncated to 8 characters.

=back



=head2 argo_cvg

Argonaut Games CVG audio muxer.

It accepts a single one-channel ADPCM 22050Hz audio stream.

The B<loop> and B<reverb> options set the corresponding
flags in the header which can be later retrieved to process the audio
stream accordingly.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<skip_rate_check> I<bool>

skip sample rate check (default is C<false>)


=item B<loop> I<bool>

set loop flag (default is C<false>)


=item B<reverb> I<boolean>

set reverb flag (default is C<true>)

=back




=head2 asf, asf_stream

Advanced / Active Systems (or Streaming) Format audio muxer.

The B<asf_stream> variant should be selected for streaming.

Note that Windows Media Audio (wma) and Windows Media Video (wmv) use this
muxer too.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<packet_size> I<size>

Set the muxer packet size as a number of bytes. By tuning this setting
you may reduce data fragmentation or muxer overhead depending on your
source. Default value is C<3200>, minimum is C<100>, maximum
is C<64Ki>.

=back



=head2 ass

ASS/SSA (SubStation Alpha) subtitles muxer.

It accepts a single ASS subtitles stream.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<ignore_readorder> I<bool>

Write dialogue events immediately, even if they are out-of-order,
default is C<false>, otherwise they are cached until the expected
time event is found.

=back



=head2 ast

AST (Audio Stream) muxer.

This format is used to play audio on some Nintendo Wii games.

It accepts a single audio stream.

The B<loopstart> and B<loopend> options can be used to
define a section of the file to loop for players honoring such
options.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<loopstart> I<start>

Specify loop start position expressesd in milliseconds, from C<-1>
to C<INT_MAX>, in case C<-1> is set then no loop is specified
(default -1) and the B<loopend> value is ignored.


=item B<loopend> I<end>

Specify loop end position expressed in milliseconds, from C<0> to
C<INT_MAX>, default is C<0>, in case C<0> is set it
assumes the total stream duration.

=back



=head2 au

SUN AU audio muxer.

It accepts a single audio stream.



=head2 avi

Audio Video Interleaved muxer.

AVI is a proprietary format developed by Microsoft, and later formally specified
through the Open DML specification.

Because of differences in players implementations, it might be required to set
some options to make sure that the generated output can be correctly played by
the target player.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<flipped_raw_rgb> I<bool>

If set to C<true>, store positive height for raw RGB bitmaps, which
indicates bitmap is stored bottom-up. Note that this option does not flip the
bitmap which has to be done manually beforehand, e.g. by using the B<vflip>
filter. Default is C<false> and indicates bitmap is stored top down.


=item B<reserve_index_space> I<size>

Reserve the specified amount of bytes for the OpenDML master index of each
stream within the file header. By default additional master indexes are
embedded within the data packets if there is no space left in the first master
index and are linked together as a chain of indexes. This index structure can
cause problems for some use cases, e.g. third-party software strictly relying
on the OpenDML index specification or when file seeking is slow. Reserving
enough index space in the file header avoids these problems.

The required index space depends on the output file size and should be about 16
bytes per gigabyte. When this option is omitted or set to zero the necessary
index space is guessed.

Default value is C<0>.


=item B<write_channel_mask> I<bool>

Write the channel layout mask into the audio stream header.

This option is enabled by default. Disabling the channel mask can be useful in
specific scenarios, e.g. when merging multiple audio streams into one for
compatibility with software that only supports a single audio stream in AVI
(see B<the "amerge" section in the ffmpeg-filters manual>).

=back



=head2 avif

AV1 (Alliance for Open Media Video codec 1) image format muxer.

This muxers stores images encoded using the AV1 codec.

It accepts one or two video streams. In case two video streams are
provided, the second one shall contain a single plane storing the
alpha mask.

In case more than one image is provided, the generated output is
considered an animated AVIF and the number of loops can be specified
with the B<loop> option.

This is based on the specification by Alliance for Open Media at url
E<lt>B<https://aomediacodec.github.io/av1-avif>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<loop> I<count>

number of times to loop an animated AVIF, C<0> specify an infinite
loop, default is C<0>


=item B<movie_timescale> I<timescale>

Set the timescale written in the movie header box (C<mvhd>).
Range is 1 to INT_MAX. Default is C<1000>.

=back



=head2 avm2

ShockWave Flash (SWF) / ActionScript Virtual Machine 2 (AVM2) format muxer.

It accepts one audio stream, one video stream, or both.


=head2 bit

G.729 (.bit) file format muxer.

It accepts a single G.729 audio stream.


=head2 caf

Apple CAF (Core Audio Format) muxer.

It accepts a single audio stream.


=head2 codec2

Codec2 audio audio muxer.

It accepts a single codec2 audio stream.



=head2 chromaprint

Chromaprint fingerprinter muxers.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-chromaprint>.

This muxer feeds audio data to the Chromaprint library, which
generates a fingerprint for the provided audio data. See:
E<lt>B<https://acoustid.org/chromaprint>E<gt>

It takes a single signed native-endian 16-bit raw audio stream of at
most 2 channels.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<algorithm> I<version>

Select version of algorithm to fingerprint with. Range is C<0> to
C<4>. Version C<3> enables silence detection. Default is C<1>.


=item B<fp_format> I<format>

Format to output the fingerprint as. Accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<base64>

Base64 compressed fingerprint I<(default)>


=item B<compressed>

Binary compressed fingerprint


=item B<raw>

Binary raw fingerprint

=back



=item B<silence_threshold> I<threshold>

Threshold for detecting silence. Range is from C<-1> to
C<32767>, where C<-1> disables silence detection. Silence
detection can only be used with version C<3> of the algorithm.

Silence detection must be disabled for use with the AcoustID
service. Default is C<-1>.

=back




=head2 crc

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) muxer.

This muxer computes and prints the Adler-32 CRC of all the input audio
and video frames. By default audio frames are converted to signed
16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
CRC.

The output of the muxer consists of a single line of the form:
CRC=0xI<CRC>, where I<CRC> is a hexadecimal number 0-padded to
8 digits containing the CRC for all the decoded input frames.

See also the B<framecrc> muxer.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to compute the CRC of the input, and store it in
the file F<out.crc>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f crc out.crc



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to print the CRC to stdout with the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f crc -



=item *

You can select the output format of each frame with B<ffmpeg> by
specifying the audio and video codec and format. For example, to
compute the CRC of the input audio converted to PCM unsigned 8-bit
and the input video converted to MPEG-2 video, use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a pcm_u8 -c:v mpeg2video -f crc -


=back




=head2 dash

Dynamic Adaptive Streaming over HTTP (DASH) muxer.

This muxer creates segments and manifest files according to the
MPEG-DASH standard ISO/IEC 23009-1:2014 and following standard
updates.

For more information see:

=over 4


=item *

ISO DASH Specification: E<lt>B<http://standards.iso.org/ittf/PubliclyAvailableStandards/c065274_ISO_IEC_23009-1_2014.zip>E<gt>

=item *

WebM DASH Specification: E<lt>B<https://sites.google.com/a/webmproject.org/wiki/adaptive-streaming/webm-dash-specification>E<gt>

=back


This muxer creates an MPD (Media Presentation Description) manifest
file and segment files for each stream. Segment files are placed in
the same directory of the MPD manifest file.

The segment filename might contain pre-defined identifiers used in the
manifest C<SegmentTemplate> section as defined in section
5.3.9.4.4 of the standard.

Available identifiers are C<$RepresentationID$>, C<$Number$>,
C<$Bandwidth$>, and C<$Time$>. In addition to the standard
identifiers, an ffmpeg-specific C<$ext$> identifier is also
supported. When specified, B<ffmpeg> will replace C<$ext$>
in the file name with muxing format's extensions such as C<mp4>,
C<webm> etc.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<adaptation_sets> I<adaptation_sets>

Assign streams to adaptation sets, specified in the MPD manifest
C<AdaptationSets> section.

An adaptation set contains a set of one or more streams accessed as a
single subset, e.g. corresponding streams encoded at different size
selectable by the user depending on the available bandwidth, or to
different audio streams with a different language.

Each adaptation set is specified with the syntax:
	
	id=<index>,streams=<streams>


where I<index> must be a numerical index, and I<streams> is a
sequence of C<,>-separated stream indices. Multiple adaptation
sets can be specified, separated by spaces.

To map all video (or audio) streams to an adaptation set, C<v> (or
C<a>) can be used as stream identifier instead of IDs.

When no assignment is defined, this defaults to an adaptation set for
each stream.

The following optional fields can also be specified:


=over 4


=item B<descriptor>

Define the descriptor as defined by ISO/IEC 23009-1:2014/Amd.2:2015.

For example:
	
	<SupplementalProperty schemeIdUri=\"urn:mpeg:dash:srd:2014\" value=\"0,0,0,1,1,2,2\"/>


The descriptor string should be a self-closing XML tag.


=item B<frag_duration>

Override the global fragment duration specified with the
B<frag_duration> option.


=item B<frag_type>

Override the global fragment type specified with the
B<frag_type> option.


=item B<seg_duration>

Override the global segment duration specified with the
B<seg_duration> option.


=item B<trick_id>

Mark an adaptation set as containing streams meant to be used for
Trick Mode for the referenced adaptation set.

=back


A few examples of possible values for the B<adaptation_sets>
option follow:
	
	id=0,seg_duration=2,frag_duration=1,frag_type=duration,streams=v id=1,seg_duration=2,frag_type=none,streams=a


	
	id=0,seg_duration=2,frag_type=none,streams=0 id=1,seg_duration=10,frag_type=none,trick_id=0,streams=1



=item B<dash_segment_type> I<type>

Set DASH segment files type.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

The dash segment files format will be selected based on the stream
codec. This is the default mode.

=item B<mp4>

the dash segment files will be in ISOBMFF/MP4 format

=item B<webm>

the dash segment files will be in WebM format

=back



=item B<extra_window_size> I<size>

Set the maximum number of segments kept outside of the manifest before
removing from disk.


=item B<format_options> I<options_list>

Set container format (mp4/webm) options using a C<:>-separated list of
key=value parameters. Values containing C<:> special characters must be
escaped.


=item B<frag_duration> I<duration>

Set the length in seconds of fragments within segments, fractional
value can also be set.


=item B<frag_type> I<type>

Set the type of interval for fragmentation.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

set one fragment per segment


=item B<every_frame>

fragment at every frame


=item B<duration>

fragment at specific time intervals


=item B<pframes>

fragment at keyframes and following P-Frame reordering (Video only,
experimental)

=back



=item B<global_sidx> I<bool>

Write global C<SIDX> atom. Applicable only for single file, mp4
output, non-streaming mode.


=item B<hls_master_name> I<file_name>

HLS master playlist name. Default is F<master.m3u8>.


=item B<hls_playlist> I<bool>

Generate HLS playlist files. The master playlist is generated with
filename specified by the B<hls_master_name> option. One media
playlist file is generated for each stream with filenames
F<media_0.m3u8>, F<media_1.m3u8>, etc.


=item B<http_opts> I<http_opts>

Specify a list of C<:>-separated key=value options to pass to the
underlying HTTP protocol. Applicable only for HTTP output.


=item B<http_persistent> I<bool>

Use persistent HTTP connections. Applicable only for HTTP output.


=item B<http_user_agent> I<user_agent>

Override User-Agent field in HTTP header. Applicable only for HTTP
output.


=item B<ignore_io_errors> I<bool>

Ignore IO errors during open and write. Useful for long-duration runs
with network output. This is disabled by default.


=item B<index_correction> I<bool>

Enable or disable segment index correction logic. Applicable only when
B<use_template> is enabled and B<use_timeline> is
disabled. This is disabled by default.

When enabled, the logic monitors the flow of segment indexes. If a
streams's segment index value is not at the expected real time
position, then the logic corrects that index value.

Typically this logic is needed in live streaming use cases. The
network bandwidth fluctuations are common during long run
streaming. Each fluctuation can cause the segment indexes fall behind
the expected real time position.


=item B<init_seg_name> I<init_name>

DASH-templated name to use for the initialization segment. Default is
C<init-stream$RepresentationID$.$ext$>. C<$ext$> is replaced
with the file name extension specific for the segment format.


=item B<ldash> I<bool>

Enable Low-latency Dash by constraining the presence and values of
some elements. This is disabled by default.


=item B<lhls> I<bool>

Enable Low-latency HLS (LHLS). Add C<#EXT-X-PREFETCH> tag with
current segment's URI. hls.js player folks are trying to standardize
an open LHLS spec. The draft spec is available at
E<lt>B<https://github.com/video-dev/hlsjs-rfcs/blob/lhls-spec/proposals/0001-lhls.md>E<gt>.

This option tries to comply with the above open spec. It enables
B<streaming> and B<hls_playlist> options automatically.
This is an experimental feature.

Note: This is not Apple's version LHLS. See
E<lt>B<https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/draft-pantos-hls-rfc8216bis>E<gt>


=item B<master_m3u8_publish_rate> I<segment_intervals_count>

Publish master playlist repeatedly every after specified number of
segment intervals.


=item B<max_playback_rate> I<rate>

Set the maximum playback rate indicated as appropriate for the
purposes of automatically adjusting playback latency and buffer
occupancy during normal playback by clients.


=item B<media_seg_name> I<segment_name>

DASH-templated name to use for the media segments. Default is
C<chunk-stream$RepresentationID$-$Number%05d$.$ext$>. C<$ext$>
is replaced with the file name extension specific for the segment
format.


=item B<method> I<method>

Use the given HTTP method to create output files. Generally set to C<PUT>
or C<POST>.


=item B<min_playback_rate> I<rate>

Set the minimum playback rate indicated as appropriate for the
purposes of automatically adjusting playback latency and buffer
occupancy during normal playback by clients.


=item B<mpd_profile> I<flags>

Set one or more MPD manifest profiles.

Possible values:

=over 4


=item B<dash>

MPEG-DASH ISO Base media file format live profile

=item B<dvb_dash>

DVB-DASH profile

=back


Default value is C<dash>.


=item B<remove_at_exit> I<bool>

Enable or disable removal of all segments when finished. This is
disabled by default.


=item B<seg_duration> I<duration>

Set the segment length in seconds (fractional value can be set). The
value is treated as average segment duration when the
B<use_template> option is enabled and the B<use_timeline>
option is disabled and as minimum segment duration for all the other
use cases.

Default value is C<5>.


=item B<single_file> I<bool>

Enable or disable storing all segments in one file, accessed using
byte ranges. This is disabled by default.

The name of the single file can be specified with the
B<single_file_name> option, if not specified assume the basename
of the manifest file with the output format extension.


=item B<single_file_name> I<file_name>

DASH-templated name to use for the manifest C<baseURL>
element. Imply that the B<single_file> option is set to
I<true>. In the template, C<$ext$> is replaced with the file
name extension specific for the segment format.


=item B<streaming> I<bool>

Enable or disable chunk streaming mode of output. In chunk streaming
mode, each frame will be a C<moof> fragment which forms a
chunk. This is disabled by default.


=item B<target_latency> I<target_latency>

Set an intended target latency in seconds for serving (fractional
value can be set). Applicable only when the B<streaming> and
B<write_prft> options are enabled. This is an informative fields
clients can use to measure the latency of the service.


=item B<timeout> I<timeout>

Set timeout for socket I/O operations expressed in seconds (fractional
value can be set). Applicable only for HTTP output.


=item B<update_period> I<period>

Set the MPD update period, for dynamic content. The unit is
second. If set to C<0>, the period is automatically computed.

Default value is C<0>.


=item B<use_template> I<bool>

Enable or disable use of C<SegmentTemplate> instead of
C<SegmentList> in the manifest. This is enabled by default.


=item B<use_timeline> I<bool>

Enable or disable use of C<SegmentTimeline> within the
C<SegmentTemplate> manifest section. This is enabled by default.


=item B<utc_timing_url> I<url>

URL of the page that will return the UTC timestamp in ISO
format, for example C<https://time.akamai.com/?iso>


=item B<window_size> I<size>

Set the maximum number of segments kept in the manifest, discard the
oldest one. This is useful for live streaming.

If the value is C<0>, all segments are kept in the
manifest. Default value is C<0>.


=item B<write_prft> I<write_prft>

Write Producer Reference Time elements on supported streams. This also
enables writing prft boxes in the underlying muxer. Applicable only
when the I<utc_url> option is enabled. It is set to I<auto> by
default, in which case the muxer will attempt to enable it only in
modes that require it.

=back



=head3 Example

Generate a DASH output reading from an input source in realtime using
B<ffmpeg>.

Two multimedia streams are generated from the input file, both
containing a video stream encoded through B<libx264>, and an audio
stream encoded with B<libfdk_aac>. The first multimedia stream
contains video with a bitrate of 800k and audio at the default rate,
the second with video scaled to 320x170 pixels at 300k and audio
resampled at 22005 Hz.

The B<window_size> option keeps only the latest 5 segments with
the default duration of 5 seconds.

	
	ffmpeg -re -i <input> -map 0 -map 0 -c:a libfdk_aac -c:v libx264 \
	-b:v:0 800k -profile:v:0 main \
	-b:v:1 300k -s:v:1 320x170 -profile:v:1 baseline -ar:a:1 22050 \
	-bf 1 -keyint_min 120 -g 120 -sc_threshold 0 -b_strategy 0 \
	-use_timeline 1 -use_template 1 -window_size 5 \
	-adaptation_sets "id=0,streams=v id=1,streams=a" \
	-f dash /path/to/out.mpd



=head2 daud

D-Cinema audio muxer.

It accepts a single 6-channels audio stream resampled at 96000 Hz
encoded with the B<pcm_24daud> codec.


=head3 Example

Use B<ffmpeg> to mux input audio to a B<5.1> channel layout
resampled at 96000Hz:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -af aresample=96000,pan=5.1 slow.302


For ffmpeg versions before 7.0 you might have to use the B<asetnsamples>
filter to limit the muxed packet size, because this format does not support
muxing packets larger than 65535 bytes (3640 samples). For newer ffmpeg
versions audio is automatically packetized to 36000 byte (2000 sample) packets.


=head2 dv

DV (Digital Video) muxer.

It accepts exactly one B<dvvideo> video stream and at most two
B<pcm_s16> audio streams. More constraints are defined by the
property of the video, which must correspond to a DV video supported
profile, and on the framerate.


=head3 Example

Use B<ffmpeg> to convert the input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -s:v 720x480 -pix_fmt yuv411p -r 29.97 -ac 2 -ar 48000 -y out.dv



=head2 ffmetadata

FFmpeg metadata muxer.

This muxer writes the streams metadata in the B<ffmetadata>
format.

See B<the Metadata chapter> for
information about the format.


=head3 Example


Use B<ffmpeg> to extract metadata from an input file to a F<metadata.ffmeta>
file in B<ffmetadata> format:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f ffmetadata metadata.ffmeta




=head2 fifo

FIFO (First-In First-Out) muxer.

The B<fifo> pseudo-muxer allows the separation of encoding and
muxing by using a first-in-first-out queue and running the actual muxer
in a separate thread.

This is especially useful in combination with
the B<tee> muxer and can be used to send data to several
destinations with different reliability/writing speed/latency.

The target muxer is either selected from the output name or specified
through the B<fifo_format> option.

The behavior of the B<fifo> muxer if the queue fills up or if the
output fails (e.g. if a packet cannot be written to the output) is
selectable:

=over 4


=item *

Output can be transparently restarted with configurable delay between
retries based on real time or time of the processed stream.


=item *

Encoding can be blocked during temporary failure, or continue transparently
dropping packets in case the FIFO queue fills up.

=back


API users should be aware that callback functions
(C<interrupt_callback>, C<io_open> and C<io_close>) used
within its C<AVFormatContext> must be thread-safe.


=head3 Options


=over 4



=item B<attempt_recovery> I<bool>

If failure occurs, attempt to recover the output. This is especially
useful when used with network output, since it makes it possible to
restart streaming transparently. By default this option is set to
C<false>.


=item B<drop_pkts_on_overflow> I<bool>

If set to C<true>, in case the fifo queue fills up, packets will
be dropped rather than blocking the encoder. This makes it possible to
continue streaming without delaying the input, at the cost of omitting
part of the stream. By default this option is set to C<false>, so in
such cases the encoder will be blocked until the muxer processes some
of the packets and none of them is lost.


=item B<fifo_format> I<format_name>

Specify the format name. Useful if it cannot be guessed from the
output name suffix.


=item B<format_opts> I<options>

Specify format options for the underlying muxer. Muxer options can be
specified as a list of I<key>=I<value> pairs separated by ':'.


=item B<max_recovery_attempts> I<count>

Set maximum number of successive unsuccessful recovery attempts after
which the output fails permanently. By default this option is set to
C<0> (unlimited).


=item B<queue_size> I<size>

Specify size of the queue as a number of packets. Default value is
C<60>.


=item B<recover_any_error> I<bool>

If set to C<true>, recovery will be attempted regardless of type
of the error causing the failure. By default this option is set to
C<false> and in case of certain (usually permanent) errors the
recovery is not attempted even when the B<attempt_recovery>
option is set to C<true>.


=item B<recovery_wait_streamtime> I<bool>

If set to C<false>, the real time is used when waiting for the
recovery attempt (i.e. the recovery will be attempted after the time
specified by the B<recovery_wait_time> option).

If set to C<true>, the time of the processed stream is taken into
account instead (i.e. the recovery will be attempted after discarding
the packets corresponding to the B<recovery_wait_time> option).

By default this option is set to C<false>.


=item B<recovery_wait_time> I<duration>

Specify waiting time in seconds before the next recovery attempt after
previous unsuccessful recovery attempt. Default value is C<5>.


=item B<restart_with_keyframe> I<bool>

Specify whether to wait for the keyframe after recovering from
queue overflow or failure. This option is set to C<false> by default.


=item B<timeshift> I<duration>

Buffer the specified amount of packets and delay writing the
output. Note that the value of the B<queue_size> option must be
big enough to store the packets for timeshift. At the end of the input
the fifo buffer is flushed at realtime speed.

=back



=head3 Example


Use B<ffmpeg> to stream to an RTMP server, continue processing
the stream at real-time rate even in case of temporary failure
(network outage) and attempt to recover streaming every second
indefinitely:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i ... -c:v libx264 -c:a aac -f fifo -fifo_format flv \
	  -drop_pkts_on_overflow 1 -attempt_recovery 1 -recovery_wait_time 1 \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a rtmp://example.com/live/stream_name



=head2 film_cpk

Sega film (.cpk) muxer.

This format was used as internal format for several Sega games.

For more information regarding the Sega film file format, visit
E<lt>B<http://wiki.multimedia.cx/index.php?title=Sega_FILM>E<gt>.

It accepts at maximum one B<cinepak> or raw video stream, and at
maximum one audio stream.


=head2 filmstrip

Adobe Filmstrip muxer.

This format is used by several Adobe tools to store a generated filmstrip export. It
accepts a single raw video stream.


=head2 fits

Flexible Image Transport System (FITS) muxer.

This image format is used to store astronomical data.

For more information regarding the format, visit
E<lt>B<https://fits.gsfc.nasa.gov>E<gt>.


=head2 flac

Raw FLAC audio muxer.

This muxer accepts exactly one FLAC audio stream. Additionally, it is possible to add
images with disposition B<attached_pic>.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<write_header> I<bool>

write the file header if set to C<true>, default is C<true>

=back



=head3 Example

Use B<ffmpeg> to store the audio stream from an input file,
together with several pictures used with B<attached_pic>
disposition:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -i pic1.png -i pic2.jpg -map 0:a -map 1 -map 2 -disposition:v attached_pic OUTPUT



=head2 flv

Adobe Flash Video Format muxer.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<flvflags> I<flags>

Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<aac_seq_header_detect>

Place AAC sequence header based on audio stream data.


=item B<no_sequence_end>

Disable sequence end tag.


=item B<no_metadata>

Disable metadata tag.


=item B<no_duration_filesize>

Disable duration and filesize in metadata when they are equal to zero
at the end of stream. (Be used to non-seekable living stream).


=item B<add_keyframe_index>

Used to facilitate seeking; particularly for HTTP pseudo streaming.

=back


=back




=head2 framecrc


Per-packet CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) testing format.

This muxer computes and prints the Adler-32 CRC for each audio
and video packet. By default audio frames are converted to signed
16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
CRC.

The output of the muxer consists of a line for each audio and video
packet of the form:
	
	<stream_index>, <packet_dts>, <packet_pts>, <packet_duration>, <packet_size>, 0x<CRC>


I<CRC> is a hexadecimal number 0-padded to 8 digits containing the
CRC of the packet.


=head3 Examples


For example to compute the CRC of the audio and video frames in
F<INPUT>, converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it
in the file F<out.crc>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framecrc out.crc


To print the information to stdout, use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framecrc -


With B<ffmpeg>, you can select the output format to which the
audio and video frames are encoded before computing the CRC for each
packet by specifying the audio and video codec. For example, to
compute the CRC of each decoded input audio frame converted to PCM
unsigned 8-bit and of each decoded input video frame converted to
MPEG-2 video, use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a pcm_u8 -c:v mpeg2video -f framecrc -


See also the B<crc> muxer.



=head2 framehash


Per-packet hash testing format.

This muxer computes and prints a cryptographic hash for each audio
and video packet. This can be used for packet-by-packet equality
checks without having to individually do a binary comparison on each.

By default audio frames are converted to signed 16-bit raw audio and
video frames to raw video before computing the hash, but the output
of explicit conversions to other codecs can also be used. It uses the
SHA-256 cryptographic hash function by default, but supports several
other algorithms.

The output of the muxer consists of a line for each audio and video
packet of the form:
	
	<stream_index>, <packet_dts>, <packet_pts>, <packet_duration>, <packet_size>, <hash>


I<hash> is a hexadecimal number representing the computed hash
for the packet.


=over 4


=item B<hash> I<algorithm>

Use the cryptographic hash function specified by the string I<algorithm>.
Supported values include C<MD5>, C<murmur3>, C<RIPEMD128>,
C<RIPEMD160>, C<RIPEMD256>, C<RIPEMD320>, C<SHA160>,
C<SHA224>, C<SHA256> (default), C<SHA512/224>, C<SHA512/256>,
C<SHA384>, C<SHA512>, C<CRC32> and C<adler32>.


=back



=head3 Examples


To compute the SHA-256 hash of the audio and video frames in F<INPUT>,
converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it in the file
F<out.sha256>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framehash out.sha256


To print the information to stdout, using the MD5 hash function, use
the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framehash -hash md5 -


See also the B<hash> muxer.



=head2 framemd5


Per-packet MD5 testing format.

This is a variant of the B<framehash> muxer. Unlike that muxer,
it defaults to using the MD5 hash function.


=head3 Examples


To compute the MD5 hash of the audio and video frames in F<INPUT>,
converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it in the file
F<out.md5>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framemd5 out.md5


To print the information to stdout, use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framemd5 -


See also the B<framehash> and B<md5> muxers.



=head2 gif

Animated GIF muxer.

Note that the GIF format has a very large time base: the delay between two frames can
therefore not be smaller than one centi second.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<loop> I<bool>

Set the number of times to loop the output. Use C<-1> for no loop, C<0>
for looping indefinitely (default).


=item B<final_delay> I<delay>

Force the delay (expressed in centiseconds) after the last frame. Each frame
ends with a delay until the next frame. The default is C<-1>, which is a
special value to tell the muxer to re-use the previous delay. In case of a
loop, you might want to customize this value to mark a pause for instance.

=back



=head3 Example

Encode a gif looping 10 times, with a 5 seconds delay between
the loops:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -loop 10 -final_delay 500 out.gif


Note 1: if you wish to extract the frames into separate GIF files, you need to
force the B<image2> muxer:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v gif -f image2 "out%d.gif"



=head2 gxf

General eXchange Format (GXF) muxer.

GXF was developed by Grass Valley Group, then standardized by SMPTE as SMPTE
360M and was extended in SMPTE RDD 14-2007 to include high-definition video
resolutions.

It accepts at most one video stream with codec B<mjpeg>, or
B<mpeg1video>, or B<mpeg2video>, or B<dvvideo> with resolution
B<512x480> or B<608x576>, and several audio streams with rate 48000Hz
and codec B<pcm16_le>.



=head2 hash


Hash testing format.

This muxer computes and prints a cryptographic hash of all the input
audio and video frames. This can be used for equality checks without
having to do a complete binary comparison.

By default audio frames are converted to signed 16-bit raw audio and
video frames to raw video before computing the hash, but the output
of explicit conversions to other codecs can also be used. Timestamps
are ignored. It uses the SHA-256 cryptographic hash function by default,
but supports several other algorithms.

The output of the muxer consists of a single line of the form:
I<algo>=I<hash>, where I<algo> is a short string representing
the hash function used, and I<hash> is a hexadecimal number
representing the computed hash.


=over 4


=item B<hash> I<algorithm>

Use the cryptographic hash function specified by the string I<algorithm>.
Supported values include C<MD5>, C<murmur3>, C<RIPEMD128>,
C<RIPEMD160>, C<RIPEMD256>, C<RIPEMD320>, C<SHA160>,
C<SHA224>, C<SHA256> (default), C<SHA512/224>, C<SHA512/256>,
C<SHA384>, C<SHA512>, C<CRC32> and C<adler32>.


=back



=head3 Examples


To compute the SHA-256 hash of the input converted to raw audio and
video, and store it in the file F<out.sha256>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f hash out.sha256


To print an MD5 hash to stdout use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f hash -hash md5 -


See also the B<framehash> muxer.



=head2 hds

HTTP Dynamic Streaming (HDS) muxer.

HTTP dynamic streaming, or HDS, is an adaptive bitrate streaming method
developed by Adobe. HDS delivers MP4 video content over HTTP connections. HDS
can be used for on-demand streaming or live streaming.

This muxer creates an .f4m (Adobe Flash Media Manifest File) manifest, an .abst
(Adobe Bootstrap File) for each stream, and segment files in a directory
specified as the output.

These needs to be accessed by an HDS player throuhg HTTPS for it to be able to
perform playback on the generated stream.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<extra_window_size> I<int>

number of fragments kept outside of the manifest before removing from disk


=item B<min_frag_duration> I<microseconds>

minimum fragment duration (in microseconds), default value is 1 second
(C<10000000>)


=item B<remove_at_exit> I<bool>

remove all fragments when finished when set to C<true>


=item B<window_size> I<int>

number of fragments kept in the manifest, if set to a value different from
C<0>. By default all segments are kept in the output directory.

=back



=head3 Example

Use B<ffmpeg> to generate HDS files to the F<output.hds> directory in
real-time rate:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i INPUT -f hds -b:v 200k output.hds




=head2 hls


Apple HTTP Live Streaming muxer that segments MPEG-TS according to
the HTTP Live Streaming (HLS) specification.

It creates a playlist file, and one or more segment files. The output filename
specifies the playlist filename.

By default, the muxer creates a file for each segment produced. These files
have the same name as the playlist, followed by a sequential number and a
.ts extension.

Make sure to require a closed GOP when encoding and to set the GOP
size to fit your segment time constraint.

For example, to convert an input file with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -c:v h264 -flags +cgop -g 30 -hls_time 1 out.m3u8

This example will produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and segment files:
F<out0.ts>, F<out1.ts>, F<out2.ts>, etc.

See also the B<segment> muxer, which provides a more generic and
flexible implementation of a segmenter, and can be used to perform HLS
segmentation.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<hls_init_time> I<duration>

Set the initial target segment length. Default value is I<0>.

I<duration> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

Segment will be cut on the next key frame after this time has passed on the
first m3u8 list. After the initial playlist is filled, B<ffmpeg> will cut
segments at duration equal to B<hls_time>.


=item B<hls_time> I<duration>

Set the target segment length. Default value is 2.

I<duration> must be a time duration specification,
see B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.
Segment will be cut on the next key frame after this time has passed.


=item B<hls_list_size> I<size>

Set the maximum number of playlist entries. If set to 0 the list file
will contain all the segments. Default value is 5.


=item B<hls_delete_threshold> I<size>

Set the number of unreferenced segments to keep on disk before C<hls_flags delete_segments>
deletes them. Increase this to allow continue clients to download segments which
were recently referenced in the playlist. Default value is 1, meaning segments older than
B<hls_list_size+1> will be deleted.


=item B<hls_start_number_source> I<source>

Start the playlist sequence number (C<#EXT-X-MEDIA-SEQUENCE>) according to the specified source.
Unless B<hls_flags single_file> is set, it also specifies source of starting sequence numbers of
segment and subtitle filenames. In any case, if B<hls_flags append_list>
is set and read playlist sequence number is greater than the specified start sequence number,
then that value will be used as start value.

It accepts the following values:


=over 4



=item B<generic (default)>

Set the start numbers according to the B<start_number> option value.


=item B<epoch>

Set the start number as the seconds since epoch (1970-01-01 00:00:00).


=item B<epoch_us>

Set the start number as the microseconds since epoch (1970-01-01 00:00:00).


=item B<datetime>

Set the start number based on the current date/time as YYYYmmddHHMMSS. e.g. 20161231235759.

=back



=item B<start_number> I<number>

Start the playlist sequence number (C<#EXT-X-MEDIA-SEQUENCE>) from the specified I<number>
when B<hls_start_number_source> value is I<generic>. (This is the default case.)
Unless B<hls_flags single_file> is set, it also specifies starting sequence numbers of segment and subtitle filenames.
Default value is 0.


=item B<hls_allow_cache> I<bool>

Explicitly set whether the client MAY (1) or MUST NOT (0) cache media segments.


=item B<hls_base_url> I<baseurl>

Append I<baseurl> to every entry in the playlist.
Useful to generate playlists with absolute paths.

Note that the playlist sequence number must be unique for each segment
and it is not to be confused with the segment filename sequence number
which can be cyclic, for example if the B<wrap> option is
specified.


=item B<hls_segment_filename> I<filename>

Set the segment filename. Unless the B<hls_flags> option is set with
B<single_file>, I<filename> is used as a string format with the
segment number appended.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -hls_segment_filename 'file%03d.ts' out.m3u8


will produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and segment files:
F<file000.ts>, F<file001.ts>, F<file002.ts>, etc.

I<filename> may contain a full path or relative path specification,
but only the file name part without any path will be contained in the m3u8 segment list.
Should a relative path be specified, the path of the created segment
files will be relative to the current working directory.
When B<strftime_mkdir> is set, the whole expanded value of I<filename> will be written into the m3u8 segment list.

When B<var_stream_map> is set with two or more variant streams, the
I<filename> pattern must contain the string "%v", and this string will be
expanded to the position of variant stream index in the generated segment file
names.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k -b:a:1 32k \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:a -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0 v:1,a:1" \
	  -hls_segment_filename 'file_%v_%03d.ts' out_%v.m3u8


will produce the playlists segment file sets:
F<file_0_000.ts>, F<file_0_001.ts>, F<file_0_002.ts>, etc. and
F<file_1_000.ts>, F<file_1_001.ts>, F<file_1_002.ts>, etc.

The string "%v" may be present in the filename or in the last directory name
containing the file, but only in one of them. (Additionally, %v may appear multiple times in the last
sub-directory or filename.) If the string %v is present in the directory name, then
sub-directories are created after expanding the directory name pattern. This
enables creation of segments corresponding to different variant streams in
subdirectories.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k -b:a:1 32k \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:a -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0 v:1,a:1" \
	  -hls_segment_filename 'vs%v/file_%03d.ts' vs%v/out.m3u8

will produce the playlists segment file sets:
F<vs0/file_000.ts>, F<vs0/file_001.ts>, F<vs0/file_002.ts>, etc. and
F<vs1/file_000.ts>, F<vs1/file_001.ts>, F<vs1/file_002.ts>, etc.


=item B<strftime> I<bool>

Use C<strftime()> on I<filename> to expand the segment filename with
localtime. The segment number is also available in this mode, but to use it,
you need to set B<second_level_segment_index> in the B<hls_flag> and
%%d will be the specifier.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -strftime 1 -hls_segment_filename 'file-%Y%m%d-%s.ts' out.m3u8

will produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and segment files:
F<file-20160215-1455569023.ts>, F<file-20160215-1455569024.ts>, etc.
Note: On some systems/environments, the C<%s> specifier is not
available. See C<strftime()> documentation.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -strftime 1 -hls_flags second_level_segment_index -hls_segment_filename 'file-%Y%m%d-%%04d.ts' out.m3u8

will produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and segment files:
F<file-20160215-0001.ts>, F<file-20160215-0002.ts>, etc.


=item B<strftime_mkdir> I<bool>

Used together with B<strftime>, it will create all subdirectories which
are present in the expanded values of option B<hls_segment_filename>.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -strftime 1 -strftime_mkdir 1 -hls_segment_filename '%Y%m%d/file-%Y%m%d-%s.ts' out.m3u8

will create a directory F<201560215> (if it does not exist), and then
produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and segment files:
F<20160215/file-20160215-1455569023.ts>,
F<20160215/file-20160215-1455569024.ts>, etc.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -strftime 1 -strftime_mkdir 1 -hls_segment_filename '%Y/%m/%d/file-%Y%m%d-%s.ts' out.m3u8

will create a directory hierarchy F<2016/02/15> (if any of them do not
exist), and then produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and segment files:
F<2016/02/15/file-20160215-1455569023.ts>,
F<2016/02/15/file-20160215-1455569024.ts>, etc.


=item B<hls_segment_options> I<options_list>

Set output format options using a :-separated list of key=value
parameters. Values containing C<:> special characters must be
escaped.


=item B<hls_key_info_file> I<key_info_file>

Use the information in I<key_info_file> for segment encryption. The first
line of I<key_info_file> specifies the key URI written to the playlist. The
key URL is used to access the encryption key during playback. The second line
specifies the path to the key file used to obtain the key during the encryption
process. The key file is read as a single packed array of 16 octets in binary
format. The optional third line specifies the initialization vector (IV) as a
hexadecimal string to be used instead of the segment sequence number (default)
for encryption. Changes to I<key_info_file> will result in segment
encryption with the new key/IV and an entry in the playlist for the new key
URI/IV if B<hls_flags periodic_rekey> is enabled.

Key info file format:
	
	<key URI>
	<key file path>
	<IV> (optional)


Example key URIs:
	
	http://server/file.key
	/path/to/file.key
	file.key


Example key file paths:
	
	file.key
	/path/to/file.key


Example IV:
	
	0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF


Key info file example:
	
	http://server/file.key
	/path/to/file.key
	0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF


Example shell script:
	
	#!/bin/sh
	BASE_URL=${1:-'.'}
	openssl rand 16 > file.key
	echo $BASE_URL/file.key > file.keyinfo
	echo file.key >> file.keyinfo
	echo $(openssl rand -hex 16) >> file.keyinfo
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -re -i testsrc -c:v h264 -hls_flags delete_segments \
	  -hls_key_info_file file.keyinfo out.m3u8



=item B<hls_enc> I<bool>

Enable (1) or disable (0) the AES128 encryption.
When enabled every segment generated is encrypted and the encryption key
is saved as I<playlist name>.key.


=item B<hls_enc_key> I<key>

Specify a 16-octet key to encrypt the segments, by default it is randomly
generated.


=item B<hls_enc_key_url> I<keyurl>

If set, I<keyurl> is prepended instead of I<baseurl> to the key filename
in the playlist.


=item B<hls_enc_iv> I<iv>

Specify the 16-octet initialization vector for every segment instead of the
autogenerated ones.


=item B<hls_segment_type> I<flags>

Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<mpegts>

Output segment files in MPEG-2 Transport Stream format. This is
compatible with all HLS versions.


=item B<fmp4>

Output segment files in fragmented MP4 format, similar to MPEG-DASH.
fmp4 files may be used in HLS version 7 and above.

=back



=item B<hls_fmp4_init_filename> I<filename>

Set filename for the fragment files header file, default filename is F<init.mp4>.

When B<strftime> is enabled, I<filename> is expanded to the segment filename with localtime.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -hls_segment_type fmp4 -strftime 1 -hls_fmp4_init_filename "%s_init.mp4" out.m3u8

will produce init like this F<1602678741_init.mp4>.


=item B<hls_fmp4_init_resend> I<bool>

Resend init file after m3u8 file refresh every time, default is I<0>.

When B<var_stream_map> is set with two or more variant streams, the
I<filename> pattern must contain the string "%v", this string specifies
the position of variant stream index in the generated init file names.
The string "%v" may be present in the filename or in the last directory name
containing the file. If the string is present in the directory name, then
sub-directories are created after expanding the directory name pattern. This
enables creation of init files corresponding to different variant streams in
subdirectories.


=item B<hls_flags> I<flags>

Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<single_file>

If this flag is set, the muxer will store all segments in a single MPEG-TS
file, and will use byte ranges in the playlist. HLS playlists generated with
this way will have the version number 4.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.nut -hls_flags single_file out.m3u8

will produce the playlist, F<out.m3u8>, and a single segment file,
F<out.ts>.


=item B<delete_segments>

Segment files removed from the playlist are deleted after a period of time
equal to the duration of the segment plus the duration of the playlist.


=item B<append_list>

Append new segments into the end of old segment list,
and remove the C<#EXT-X-ENDLIST> from the old segment list.


=item B<round_durations>

Round the duration info in the playlist file segment info to integer
values, instead of using floating point.
If there are no other features requiring higher HLS versions be used,
then this will allow B<ffmpeg> to output a HLS version 2 m3u8.


=item B<discont_start>

Add the C<#EXT-X-DISCONTINUITY> tag to the playlist, before the
first segment's information.


=item B<omit_endlist>

Do not append the C<EXT-X-ENDLIST> tag at the end of the playlist.


=item B<periodic_rekey>

The file specified by C<hls_key_info_file> will be checked periodically and
detect updates to the encryption info. Be sure to replace this file atomically,
including the file containing the AES encryption key.


=item B<independent_segments>

Add the C<#EXT-X-INDEPENDENT-SEGMENTS> tag to playlists that has video segments
and when all the segments of that playlist are guaranteed to start with a key frame.


=item B<iframes_only>

Add the C<#EXT-X-I-FRAMES-ONLY> tag to playlists that has video segments
and can play only I-frames in the C<#EXT-X-BYTERANGE> mode.


=item B<split_by_time>

Allow segments to start on frames other than key frames. This improves
behavior on some players when the time between key frames is inconsistent,
but may make things worse on others, and can cause some oddities during
seeking. This flag should be used with the B<hls_time> option.


=item B<program_date_time>

Generate C<EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME> tags.


=item B<second_level_segment_index>

Make it possible to use segment indexes as %%d in the
B<hls_segment_filename> option expression besides date/time values when
B<strftime> option is on. To get fixed width numbers with trailing zeroes, %%0xd format
is available where x is the required width.


=item B<second_level_segment_size>

Make it possible to use segment sizes (counted in bytes) as %%s in
B<hls_segment_filename> option expression besides date/time values when
strftime is on. To get fixed width numbers with trailing zeroes, %%0xs format
is available where x is the required width.


=item B<second_level_segment_duration>

Make it possible to use segment duration (calculated in microseconds) as %%t in
B<hls_segment_filename> option expression besides date/time values when
strftime is on. To get fixed width numbers with trailing zeroes, %%0xt format
is available where x is the required width.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i sample.mpeg \
	   -f hls -hls_time 3 -hls_list_size 5 \
	   -hls_flags second_level_segment_index+second_level_segment_size+second_level_segment_duration \
	   -strftime 1 -strftime_mkdir 1 -hls_segment_filename "segment_%Y%m%d%H%M%S_%%04d_%%08s_%%013t.ts" stream.m3u8

will produce segments like this:
F<segment_20170102194334_0003_00122200_0000003000000.ts>, F<segment_20170102194334_0004_00120072_0000003000000.ts> etc.


=item B<temp_file>

Write segment data to F<filename.tmp> and rename to filename only once the
segment is complete.

A webserver serving up segments can be configured to reject requests to *.tmp to
prevent access to in-progress segments before they have been added to the m3u8
playlist.

This flag also affects how m3u8 playlist files are created. If this flag is set,
all playlist files will be written into a temporary file and renamed after they
are complete, similarly as segments are handled. But playlists with C<file>
protocol and with B<hls_playlist_type> type other than B<vod> are
always written into a temporary file regardless of this flag.

Master playlist files specified with B<master_pl_name>, if any, with
C<file> protocol, are always written into temporary file regardless of this
flag if B<master_pl_publish_rate> value is other than zero.

=back



=item B<hls_playlist_type> I<type>

If type is B<event>, emit C<#EXT-X-PLAYLIST-TYPE:EVENT> in the m3u8
header. This forces B<hls_list_size> to 0; the playlist can only be
appended to.

If type is B<vod>, emit C<#EXT-X-PLAYLIST-TYPE:VOD> in the m3u8
header. This forces B<hls_list_size> to 0; the playlist must not change.


=item B<method> I<method>

Use the given HTTP method to create the hls files.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -f hls -method PUT http://example.com/live/out.m3u8

will upload all the mpegts segment files to the HTTP server using the HTTP PUT
method, and update the m3u8 files every C<refresh> times using the same
method. Note that the HTTP server must support the given method for uploading
files.


=item B<http_user_agent> I<agent>

Override User-Agent field in HTTP header. Applicable only for HTTP output.


=item B<var_stream_map> I<stream_map>

Specify a map string defining how to group the audio, video and subtitle streams
into different variant streams. The variant stream groups are separated by
space.

Expected string format is like this "a:0,v:0 a:1,v:1 ....". Here a:, v:, s: are
the keys to specify audio, video and subtitle streams respectively.
Allowed values are 0 to 9 (limited just based on practical usage).

When there are two or more variant streams, the output filename pattern must
contain the string "%v": this string specifies the position of variant stream
index in the output media playlist filenames. The string "%v" may be present in
the filename or in the last directory name containing the file. If the string is
present in the directory name, then sub-directories are created after expanding
the directory name pattern. This enables creation of variant streams in
subdirectories.

A few examples follow.


=over 4


=item *

Create two hls variant streams. The first variant stream will contain video
stream of bitrate 1000k and audio stream of bitrate 64k and the second variant
stream will contain video stream of bitrate 256k and audio stream of bitrate
32k. Here, two media playlist with file names F<out_0.m3u8> and
F<out_1.m3u8> will be created.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k -b:a:1 32k \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:a -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0 v:1,a:1" \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8



=item *

If you want something meaningful text instead of indexes in result names, you
may specify names for each or some of the variants. The following example will
create two hls variant streams as in the previous one. But here, the two media
playlist with file names F<out_my_hd.m3u8> and F<out_my_sd.m3u8> will be
created.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k -b:a:1 32k \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:a -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0,name:my_hd v:1,a:1,name:my_sd" \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8



=item *

Create three hls variant streams. The first variant stream will be a video only
stream with video bitrate 1000k, the second variant stream will be an audio only
stream with bitrate 64k and the third variant stream will be a video only stream
with bitrate 256k. Here, three media playlist with file names F<out_0.m3u8>,
F<out_1.m3u8> and F<out_2.m3u8> will be created.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0 a:0 v:1" \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8



=item *

Create the variant streams in subdirectories. Here, the first media playlist is
created at F<http://example.com/live/vs_0/out.m3u8> and the second one at
F<http://example.com/live/vs_1/out.m3u8>.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k -b:a:1 32k \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:a -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0 v:1,a:1" \
	  http://example.com/live/vs_%v/out.m3u8



=item *

Create two audio only and two video only variant streams. In addition to the
C<#EXT-X-STREAM-INF> tag for each variant stream in the master playlist, the
C<#EXT-X-MEDIA> tag is also added for the two audio only variant streams and
they are mapped to the two video only variant streams with audio group names
'aud_low' and 'aud_high'.
By default, a single hls variant containing all the encoded streams is created.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:a:0 32k -b:a:1 64k -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 3000k  \
	  -map 0:a -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:v -f hls \
	  -var_stream_map "a:0,agroup:aud_low a:1,agroup:aud_high v:0,agroup:aud_low v:1,agroup:aud_high" \
	  -master_pl_name master.m3u8 \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8



=item *


Create two audio only and one video only variant streams. In addition to the
C<#EXT-X-STREAM-INF> tag for each variant stream in the master playlist, the
C<#EXT-X-MEDIA> tag is also added for the two audio only variant streams and
they are mapped to the one video only variant streams with audio group name
'aud_low', and the audio group have default stat is NO or YES.
By default, a single hls variant containing all the encoded streams is created.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:a:0 32k -b:a:1 64k -b:v:0 1000k \
	  -map 0:a -map 0:a -map 0:v -f hls \
	  -var_stream_map "a:0,agroup:aud_low,default:yes a:1,agroup:aud_low v:0,agroup:aud_low" \
	  -master_pl_name master.m3u8 \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8



=item *

Create two audio only and one video only variant streams. In addition to the
C<#EXT-X-STREAM-INF> tag for each variant stream in the master playlist, the
C<#EXT-X-MEDIA> tag is also added for the two audio only variant streams and
they are mapped to the one video only variant streams with audio group name
'aud_low', and the audio group have default stat is NO or YES, and one audio
have and language is named ENG, the other audio language is named CHN. By
default, a single hls variant containing all the encoded streams is created.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:a:0 32k -b:a:1 64k -b:v:0 1000k \
	  -map 0:a -map 0:a -map 0:v -f hls \
	  -var_stream_map "a:0,agroup:aud_low,default:yes,language:ENG a:1,agroup:aud_low,language:CHN v:0,agroup:aud_low" \
	  -master_pl_name master.m3u8 \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8



=item *

Create a single variant stream. Add the C<#EXT-X-MEDIA> tag with
C<TYPE=SUBTITLES> in the master playlist with webvtt subtitle group name
'subtitle'. Make sure the input file has one text subtitle stream at least.
	
	ffmpeg -y -i input_with_subtitle.mkv \
	 -b:v:0 5250k -c:v h264 -pix_fmt yuv420p -profile:v main -level 4.1 \
	 -b:a:0 256k \
	 -c:s webvtt -c:a mp2 -ar 48000 -ac 2 -map 0:v -map 0:a:0 -map 0:s:0 \
	 -f hls -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0,s:0,sgroup:subtitle" \
	 -master_pl_name master.m3u8 -t 300 -hls_time 10 -hls_init_time 4 -hls_list_size \
	 10 -master_pl_publish_rate 10 -hls_flags \
	 delete_segments+discont_start+split_by_time ./tmp/video.m3u8


=back



=item B<cc_stream_map> I<cc_stream_map>

Map string which specifies different closed captions groups and their
attributes. The closed captions stream groups are separated by space.

Expected string format is like this
"ccgroup:E<lt>group nameE<gt>,instreamid:E<lt>INSTREAM-IDE<gt>,language:E<lt>language codeE<gt> ....".
'ccgroup' and 'instreamid' are mandatory attributes. 'language' is an optional
attribute.

The closed captions groups configured using this option are mapped to different
variant streams by providing the same 'ccgroup' name in the
B<var_stream_map> string.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:v:0 1000k -b:v:1 256k -b:a:0 64k -b:a:1 32k \
	  -a53cc:0 1 -a53cc:1 1 \
	  -map 0:v -map 0:a -map 0:v -map 0:a -f hls \
	  -cc_stream_map "ccgroup:cc,instreamid:CC1,language:en ccgroup:cc,instreamid:CC2,language:sp" \
	  -var_stream_map "v:0,a:0,ccgroup:cc v:1,a:1,ccgroup:cc" \
	  -master_pl_name master.m3u8 \
	  http://example.com/live/out_%v.m3u8

will add two C<#EXT-X-MEDIA> tags with C<TYPE=CLOSED-CAPTIONS> in the
master playlist for the INSTREAM-IDs 'CC1' and 'CC2'. Also, it will add
C<CLOSED-CAPTIONS> attribute with group name 'cc' for the two output variant
streams.

If B<var_stream_map> is not set, then the first available ccgroup in
B<cc_stream_map> is mapped to the output variant stream.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -b:v 1000k -b:a 64k -a53cc 1 -f hls \
	  -cc_stream_map "ccgroup:cc,instreamid:CC1,language:en" \
	  -master_pl_name master.m3u8 \
	  http://example.com/live/out.m3u8

this will add C<#EXT-X-MEDIA> tag with C<TYPE=CLOSED-CAPTIONS> in the
master playlist with group name 'cc', language 'en' (english) and INSTREAM-ID
'CC1'. Also, it will add C<CLOSED-CAPTIONS> attribute with group name 'cc'
for the output variant stream.


=item B<master_pl_name> I<name>

Create HLS master playlist with the given name.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -f hls -master_pl_name master.m3u8 http://example.com/live/out.m3u8

creates an HLS master playlist with name F<master.m3u8> which is published
at E<lt>B<http://example.com/live/>E<gt>.


=item B<master_pl_publish_rate> I<count>

Publish master play list repeatedly every after specified number of segment intervals.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.ts -f hls -master_pl_name master.m3u8 \
	-hls_time 2 -master_pl_publish_rate 30 http://example.com/live/out.m3u8

creates an HLS master playlist with name F<master.m3u8> and keeps
publishing it repeatedly every after 30 segments i.e. every after 60s.


=item B<http_persistent> I<bool>

Use persistent HTTP connections. Applicable only for HTTP output.


=item B<timeout> I<timeout>

Set timeout for socket I/O operations. Applicable only for HTTP output.


=item B<ignore_io_errors> I<bool>

Ignore IO errors during open, write and delete. Useful for long-duration runs with network output.


=item B<headers> I<headers>

Set custom HTTP headers, can override built in default headers. Applicable only for HTTP output.

=back



=head2 iamf

Immersive Audio Model and Formats (IAMF) muxer.

IAMF is used to provide immersive audio content for presentation on a wide range
of devices in both streaming and offline applications. These applications
include internet audio streaming, multicasting/broadcasting services, file
download, gaming, communication, virtual and augmented reality, and others. In
these applications, audio may be played back on a wide range of devices, e.g.,
headphones, mobile phones, tablets, TVs, sound bars, home theater systems, and
big screens.

This format was promoted and desgined by Alliance for Open Media.

For more information about this format, see E<lt>B<https://aomedia.org/iamf/>E<gt>.



=head2 ico


ICO file muxer.

Microsoft's icon file format (ICO) has some strict limitations that should be noted:


=over 4


=item *

Size cannot exceed 256 pixels in any dimension


=item *

Only BMP and PNG images can be stored


=item *

If a BMP image is used, it must be one of the following pixel formats:
	
	BMP Bit Depth      FFmpeg Pixel Format
	1bit               pal8
	4bit               pal8
	8bit               pal8
	16bit              rgb555le
	24bit              bgr24
	32bit              bgra



=item *

If a BMP image is used, it must use the BITMAPINFOHEADER DIB header


=item *

If a PNG image is used, it must use the rgba pixel format

=back



=head2 ilbc

Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC) raw muxer.

It accepts a single B<ilbc> audio stream.



=head2 image2, image2pipe

Image file muxer.

The B<image2> muxer writes video frames to image files.

The output filenames are specified by a pattern, which can be used to
produce sequentially numbered series of files.
The pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0I<N>d", this string
specifies the position of the characters representing a numbering in
the filenames. If the form "%0I<N>d" is used, the string
representing the number in each filename is 0-padded to I<N>
digits. The literal character '%' can be specified in the pattern with
the string "%%".

If the pattern contains "%d" or "%0I<N>d", the first filename of
the file list specified will contain the number 1, all the following
numbers will be sequential.

The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
determine the format of the image files to write.

For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will specify a sequence of
filenames of the form F<img-001.bmp>, F<img-002.bmp>, ...,
F<img-010.bmp>, etc.
The pattern "img%%-%d.jpg" will specify a sequence of filenames of the
form F<img%-1.jpg>, F<img%-2.jpg>, ..., F<img%-10.jpg>,
etc.

The image muxer supports the .Y.U.V image file format. This format is
special in that each image frame consists of three files, for
each of the YUV420P components. To read or write this image file format,
specify the name of the '.Y' file. The muxer will automatically open the
'.U' and '.V' files as required.

The B<image2pipe> muxer accepts the same options as the B<image2> muxer,
but ignores the pattern verification and expansion, as it is supposed to write
to the command output rather than to an actual stored file.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<frame_pts> I<bool>

If set to 1, expand the filename with the packet PTS (presentation time stamp).
Default value is 0.


=item B<start_number> I<count>

Start the sequence from the specified number. Default value is 1.


=item B<update> I<bool>

If set to 1, the filename will always be interpreted as just a
filename, not a pattern, and the corresponding file will be continuously
overwritten with new images. Default value is 0.


=item B<strftime> I<bool>

If set to 1, expand the filename with date and time information from
C<strftime()>. Default value is 0.


=item B<atomic_writing> I<bool>

Write output to a temporary file, which is renamed to target filename once
writing is completed. Default is disabled.


=item B<protocol_opts> I<options_list>

Set protocol options as a :-separated list of key=value parameters. Values
containing the C<:> special character must be escaped.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> for creating a sequence of files F<img-001.jpeg>,
F<img-002.jpeg>, ..., taking one image every second from the input video:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -vsync cfr -r 1 -f image2 'img-%03d.jpeg'


Note that with B<ffmpeg>, if the format is not specified with the
C<-f> option and the output filename specifies an image file
format, the image2 muxer is automatically selected, so the previous
command can be written as:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -vsync cfr -r 1 'img-%03d.jpeg'


Note also that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
"%0I<N>d", for example to create a single image file
F<img.jpeg> from the start of the input video you can employ the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -f image2 -frames:v 1 img.jpeg



=item *

The B<strftime> option allows you to expand the filename with
date and time information. Check the documentation of
the C<strftime()> function for the syntax.

To generate image files from the C<strftime()> "%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S" pattern,
the following B<ffmpeg> command can be used:
	
	ffmpeg -f v4l2 -r 1 -i /dev/video0 -f image2 -strftime 1 "%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S.jpg"



=item *

Set the file name with current frame's PTS:
	
	ffmpeg -f v4l2 -r 1 -i /dev/video0 -copyts -f image2 -frame_pts true %d.jpg



=item *

Publish contents of your desktop directly to a WebDAV server every second:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 1 -i :0.0 -q:v 6 -update 1 -protocol_opts method=PUT http://example.com/desktop.jpg


=back



=head2 ircam

Berkeley / IRCAM / CARL Sound Filesystem (BICSF) format muxer.

The Berkeley/IRCAM/CARL Sound Format, developed in the 1980s, is a result of the
merging of several different earlier sound file formats and systems including
the csound system developed by Dr Gareth Loy at the Computer Audio Research Lab
(CARL) at UC San Diego, the IRCAM sound file system developed by Rob Gross and
Dan Timis at the Institut de Recherche et Coordination Acoustique / Musique in
Paris and the Berkeley Fast Filesystem.

It was developed initially as part of the Berkeley/IRCAM/CARL Sound Filesystem,
a suite of programs designed to implement a filesystem for audio applications
running under Berkeley UNIX. It was particularly popular in academic music
research centres, and was used a number of times in the creation of early
computer-generated compositions.

This muxer accepts a single audio stream containing PCM data.


=head2 ivf

On2 IVF muxer.

IVF was developed by On2 Technologies (formerly known as Duck
Corporation), to store internally developed codecs.

This muxer accepts a single B<vp8>, B<vp9>, or B<av1>
video stream.


=head2 jacosub

JACOsub subtitle format muxer.

This muxer accepts a single B<jacosub> subtitles stream.

For more information about the format, see
E<lt>B<http://unicorn.us.com/jacosub/jscripts.html>E<gt>.


=head2 kvag

Simon & Schuster Interactive VAG muxer.

This custom VAG container is used by some Simon & Schuster Interactive
games such as "Real War", and "Real War: Rogue States".

This muxer accepts a single B<adpcm_ima_ssi> audio stream.


=head2 lc3

Bluetooth SIG Low Complexity Communication Codec audio (LC3), or
ETSI TS 103 634 Low Complexity Communication Codec plus (LC3plus).

This muxer accepts a single B<lc3> audio stream.


=head2 lrc

LRC lyrics file format muxer.

LRC (short for LyRiCs) is a computer file format that synchronizes
song lyrics with an audio file, such as MP3, Vorbis, or MIDI.

This muxer accepts a single B<subrip> or B<text> subtitles stream.


=head3 Metadata

The following metadata tags are converted to the format corresponding
metadata:


=over 4


=item B<title>


=item B<album>


=item B<artist>


=item B<author>


=item B<creator>


=item B<encoder>


=item B<encoder_version>


=back


If B<encoder_version> is not explicitly set, it is automatically
set to the libavformat version.


=head2 matroska

Matroska container muxer.

This muxer implements the matroska and webm container specs.


=head3 Metadata

The recognized metadata settings in this muxer are:


=over 4


=item B<title>

Set title name provided to a single track. This gets mapped to
the FileDescription element for a stream written as attachment.


=item B<language>

Specify the language of the track in the Matroska languages form.

The language can be either the 3 letters bibliographic ISO-639-2 (ISO
639-2/B) form (like "fre" for French), or a language code mixed with a
country code for specialities in languages (like "fre-ca" for Canadian
French).


=item B<stereo_mode>

Set stereo 3D video layout of two views in a single video track.

The following values are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<mono>

video is not stereo

=item B<left_right>

Both views are arranged side by side, Left-eye view is on the left

=item B<bottom_top>

Both views are arranged in top-bottom orientation, Left-eye view is at bottom

=item B<top_bottom>

Both views are arranged in top-bottom orientation, Left-eye view is on top

=item B<checkerboard_rl>

Each view is arranged in a checkerboard interleaved pattern, Left-eye view being first

=item B<checkerboard_lr>

Each view is arranged in a checkerboard interleaved pattern, Right-eye view being first

=item B<row_interleaved_rl>

Each view is constituted by a row based interleaving, Right-eye view is first row

=item B<row_interleaved_lr>

Each view is constituted by a row based interleaving, Left-eye view is first row

=item B<col_interleaved_rl>

Both views are arranged in a column based interleaving manner, Right-eye view is first column

=item B<col_interleaved_lr>

Both views are arranged in a column based interleaving manner, Left-eye view is first column

=item B<anaglyph_cyan_red>

All frames are in anaglyph format viewable through red-cyan filters

=item B<right_left>

Both views are arranged side by side, Right-eye view is on the left

=item B<anaglyph_green_magenta>

All frames are in anaglyph format viewable through green-magenta filters

=item B<block_lr>

Both eyes laced in one Block, Left-eye view is first

=item B<block_rl>

Both eyes laced in one Block, Right-eye view is first

=back


=back


For example a 3D WebM clip can be created using the following command line:
	
	ffmpeg -i sample_left_right_clip.mpg -an -c:v libvpx -metadata stereo_mode=left_right -y stereo_clip.webm



=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<reserve_index_space> I<size>

By default, this muxer writes the index for seeking (called cues in Matroska
terms) at the end of the file, because it cannot know in advance how much space
to leave for the index at the beginning of the file. However for some use cases
-- e.g.  streaming where seeking is possible but slow -- it is useful to put the
index at the beginning of the file.

If this option is set to a non-zero value, the muxer will reserve I<size> bytes
of space in the file header and then try to write the cues there when the muxing
finishes. If the reserved space does not suffice, no Cues will be written, the
file will be finalized and writing the trailer will return an error.
A safe size for most use cases should be about 50kB per hour of video.

Note that cues are only written if the output is seekable and this option will
have no effect if it is not.


=item B<cues_to_front> I<bool>

If set, the muxer will write the index at the beginning of the file
by shifting the main data if necessary. This can be combined with
reserve_index_space in which case the data is only shifted if
the initially reserved space turns out to be insufficient.

This option is ignored if the output is unseekable.


=item B<cluster_size_limit> I<size>

Store at most the provided amount of bytes in a cluster.

If not specified, the limit is set automatically to a sensible
hardcoded fixed value.


=item B<cluster_time_limit> I<duration>

Store at most the provided number of milliseconds in a cluster.

If not specified, the limit is set automatically to a sensible
hardcoded fixed value.


=item B<dash> I<bool>

Create a WebM file conforming to WebM DASH specification. By default
it is set to C<false>.


=item B<dash_track_number> I<index>

Track number for the DASH stream. By default it is set to C<1>.


=item B<live> I<bool>

Write files assuming it is a live stream. By default it is set to
C<false>.


=item B<allow_raw_vfw> I<bool>

Allow raw VFW mode. By default it is set to C<false>.


=item B<flipped_raw_rgb> I<bool>

If set to C<true>, store positive height for raw RGB bitmaps, which indicates
bitmap is stored bottom-up. Note that this option does not flip the bitmap
which has to be done manually beforehand, e.g. by using the B<vflip> filter.
Default is C<false> and indicates bitmap is stored top down.


=item B<write_crc32> I<bool>

Write a CRC32 element inside every Level 1 element. By default it is
set to C<true>. This option is ignored for WebM.


=item B<default_mode> I<mode>

Control how the FlagDefault of the output tracks will be set.
It influences which tracks players should play by default. The default mode
is B<passthrough>.

=over 4


=item B<infer>

Every track with disposition default will have the FlagDefault set.
Additionally, for each type of track (audio, video or subtitle), if no track
with disposition default of this type exists, then the first track of this type
will be marked as default (if existing). This ensures that the default flag
is set in a sensible way even if the input originated from containers that
lack the concept of default tracks.

=item B<infer_no_subs>

This mode is the same as infer except that if no subtitle track with
disposition default exists, no subtitle track will be marked as default.

=item B<passthrough>

In this mode the FlagDefault is set if and only if the AV_DISPOSITION_DEFAULT
flag is set in the disposition of the corresponding stream.

=back


=back




=head2 md5

MD5 testing format.

This is a variant of the B<hash> muxer. Unlike that muxer, it
defaults to using the MD5 hash function.

See also the B<hash> and B<framemd5> muxers.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

To compute the MD5 hash of the input converted to raw
audio and video, and store it in the file F<out.md5>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f md5 out.md5



=item *

To print the MD5 hash to stdout:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f md5 -


=back



=head2 microdvd

MicroDVD subtitle format muxer.

This muxer accepts a single B<microdvd> subtitles stream.


=head2 mmf

Synthetic music Mobile Application Format (SMAF) format muxer.

SMAF is a music data format specified by Yamaha for portable
electronic devices, such as mobile phones and personal digital
assistants.

This muxer accepts a single B<adpcm_yamaha> audio stream.


=head2 mp3


The MP3 muxer writes a raw MP3 stream with the following optional features:

=over 4


=item *

An ID3v2 metadata header at the beginning (enabled by default). Versions 2.3 and
2.4 are supported, the C<id3v2_version> private option controls which one is
used (3 or 4). Setting C<id3v2_version> to 0 disables the ID3v2 header
completely.

The muxer supports writing attached pictures (APIC frames) to the ID3v2 header.
The pictures are supplied to the muxer in form of a video stream with a single
packet. There can be any number of those streams, each will correspond to a
single APIC frame.  The stream metadata tags I<title> and I<comment> map
to APIC I<description> and I<picture type> respectively. See
E<lt>B<http://id3.org/id3v2.4.0-frames>E<gt> for allowed picture types.

Note that the APIC frames must be written at the beginning, so the muxer will
buffer the audio frames until it gets all the pictures. It is therefore advised
to provide the pictures as soon as possible to avoid excessive buffering.


=item *

A Xing/LAME frame right after the ID3v2 header (if present). It is enabled by
default, but will be written only if the output is seekable. The
C<write_xing> private option can be used to disable it.  The frame contains
various information that may be useful to the decoder, like the audio duration
or encoder delay.


=item *

A legacy ID3v1 tag at the end of the file (disabled by default). It may be
enabled with the C<write_id3v1> private option, but as its capabilities are
very limited, its usage is not recommended.

=back


Examples:

Write an mp3 with an ID3v2.3 header and an ID3v1 footer:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -id3v2_version 3 -write_id3v1 1 out.mp3


To attach a picture to an mp3 file select both the audio and the picture stream
with C<map>:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mp3 -i cover.png -c copy -map 0 -map 1
	-metadata:s:v title="Album cover" -metadata:s:v comment="Cover (Front)" out.mp3


Write a "clean" MP3 without any extra features:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.wav -write_xing 0 -id3v2_version 0 out.mp3



=head2 mpegts


MPEG transport stream muxer.

This muxer implements ISO 13818-1 and part of ETSI EN 300 468.

The recognized metadata settings in mpegts muxer are C<service_provider>
and C<service_name>. If they are not set the default for
C<service_provider> is B<FFmpeg> and the default for
C<service_name> is B<Service01>.


=head3 Options


The muxer options are:


=over 4


=item B<mpegts_transport_stream_id> I<integer>

Set the B<transport_stream_id>. This identifies a transponder in DVB.
Default is C<0x0001>.


=item B<mpegts_original_network_id> I<integer>

Set the B<original_network_id>. This is unique identifier of a
network in DVB. Its main use is in the unique identification of a service
through the path B<Original_Network_ID, Transport_Stream_ID>. Default
is C<0x0001>.


=item B<mpegts_service_id> I<integer>

Set the B<service_id>, also known as program in DVB. Default is
C<0x0001>.


=item B<mpegts_service_type> I<integer>

Set the program B<service_type>. Default is C<digital_tv>.
Accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<hex_value>

Any hexadecimal value between C<0x01> and C<0xff> as defined in
ETSI 300 468.

=item B<digital_tv>

Digital TV service.

=item B<digital_radio>

Digital Radio service.

=item B<teletext>

Teletext service.

=item B<advanced_codec_digital_radio>

Advanced Codec Digital Radio service.

=item B<mpeg2_digital_hdtv>

MPEG2 Digital HDTV service.

=item B<advanced_codec_digital_sdtv>

Advanced Codec Digital SDTV service.

=item B<advanced_codec_digital_hdtv>

Advanced Codec Digital HDTV service.

=back



=item B<mpegts_pmt_start_pid> I<integer>

Set the first PID for PMTs. Default is C<0x1000>, minimum is C<0x0020>,
maximum is C<0x1ffa>. This option has no effect in m2ts mode where the PMT
PID is fixed C<0x0100>.


=item B<mpegts_start_pid> I<integer>

Set the first PID for elementary streams. Default is C<0x0100>, minimum is
C<0x0020>, maximum is C<0x1ffa>. This option has no effect in m2ts mode
where the elementary stream PIDs are fixed.


=item B<mpegts_m2ts_mode> I<boolean>

Enable m2ts mode if set to C<1>. Default value is C<-1> which
disables m2ts mode.


=item B<muxrate> I<integer>

Set a constant muxrate. Default is VBR.


=item B<pes_payload_size> I<integer>

Set minimum PES packet payload in bytes. Default is C<2930>.


=item B<mpegts_flags> I<flags>

Set mpegts flags. Accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<resend_headers>

Reemit PAT/PMT before writing the next packet.

=item B<latm>

Use LATM packetization for AAC.

=item B<pat_pmt_at_frames>

Reemit PAT and PMT at each video frame.

=item B<system_b>

Conform to System B (DVB) instead of System A (ATSC).

=item B<initial_discontinuity>

Mark the initial packet of each stream as discontinuity.

=item B<nit>

Emit NIT table.

=item B<omit_rai>

Disable writing of random access indicator.

=back



=item B<mpegts_copyts> I<boolean>

Preserve original timestamps, if value is set to C<1>. Default value
is C<-1>, which results in shifting timestamps so that they start from 0.


=item B<omit_video_pes_length> I<boolean>

Omit the PES packet length for video packets. Default is C<1> (true).


=item B<pcr_period> I<integer>

Override the default PCR retransmission time in milliseconds. Default is
C<-1> which means that the PCR interval will be determined automatically:
20 ms is used for CBR streams, the highest multiple of the frame duration which
is less than 100 ms is used for VBR streams.


=item B<pat_period> I<duration>

Maximum time in seconds between PAT/PMT tables. Default is C<0.1>.


=item B<sdt_period> I<duration>

Maximum time in seconds between SDT tables. Default is C<0.5>.


=item B<nit_period> I<duration>

Maximum time in seconds between NIT tables. Default is C<0.5>.


=item B<tables_version> I<integer>

Set PAT, PMT, SDT and NIT version (default C<0>, valid values are from 0 to 31, inclusively).
This option allows updating stream structure so that standard consumer may
detect the change. To do so, reopen output C<AVFormatContext> (in case of API
usage) or restart B<ffmpeg> instance, cyclically changing
B<tables_version> value:

	
	ffmpeg -i source1.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 0 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
	ffmpeg -i source2.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 1 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
	...
	ffmpeg -i source3.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 31 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
	ffmpeg -i source1.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 0 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
	ffmpeg -i source2.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 1 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
	...


=back



=head3 Example


	
	ffmpeg -i file.mpg -c copy \
	     -mpegts_original_network_id 0x1122 \
	     -mpegts_transport_stream_id 0x3344 \
	     -mpegts_service_id 0x5566 \
	     -mpegts_pmt_start_pid 0x1500 \
	     -mpegts_start_pid 0x150 \
	     -metadata service_provider="Some provider" \
	     -metadata service_name="Some Channel" \
	     out.ts



=head2 mxf, mxf_d10, mxf_opatom


MXF muxer.


=head3 Options


The muxer options are:


=over 4


=item B<store_user_comments> I<bool>

Set if user comments should be stored if available or never.
IRT D-10 does not allow user comments. The default is thus to write them for
mxf and mxf_opatom but not for mxf_d10

=back



=head2 null


Null muxer.

This muxer does not generate any output file, it is mainly useful for
testing or benchmarking purposes.

For example to benchmark decoding with B<ffmpeg> you can use the
command:
	
	ffmpeg -benchmark -i INPUT -f null out.null


Note that the above command does not read or write the F<out.null>
file, but specifying the output file is required by the B<ffmpeg>
syntax.

Alternatively you can write the command as:
	
	ffmpeg -benchmark -i INPUT -f null -



=head2 nut



=over 4


=item B<-syncpoints> I<flags>

Change the syncpoint usage in nut:

=over 4


=item I<default> B<use the normal low-overhead seeking aids.>


=item I<none> B<do not use the syncpoints at all, reducing the overhead but making the stream non-seekable;>

    Use of this option is not recommended, as the resulting files are very damage
    sensitive and seeking is not possible. Also in general the overhead from
    syncpoints is negligible. Note, -C<write_index> 0 can be used to disable
    all growing data tables, allowing to mux endless streams with limited memory
    and without these disadvantages.

=item I<timestamped> B<extend the syncpoint with a wallclock field.>


=back

The I<none> and I<timestamped> flags are experimental.

=item B<-write_index> I<bool>

Write index at the end, the default is to write an index.

=back


	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f_strict experimental -syncpoints none - | processor



=head2 ogg


Ogg container muxer.


=over 4


=item B<-page_duration> I<duration>

Preferred page duration, in microseconds. The muxer will attempt to create
pages that are approximately I<duration> microseconds long. This allows the
user to compromise between seek granularity and container overhead. The default
is 1 second. A value of 0 will fill all segments, making pages as large as
possible. A value of 1 will effectively use 1 packet-per-page in most
situations, giving a small seek granularity at the cost of additional container
overhead.

=item B<-serial_offset> I<value>

Serial value from which to set the streams serial number.
Setting it to different and sufficiently large values ensures that the produced
ogg files can be safely chained.


=back




=head2 rcwt


RCWT (Raw Captions With Time) is a format native to ccextractor, a commonly
used open source tool for processing 608/708 Closed Captions (CC) sources.
It can be used to archive the original extracted CC bitstream and to produce
a source file for later processing or conversion. The format allows
for interoperability between ccextractor and FFmpeg, is simple to parse,
and can be used to create a backup of the CC presentation.

This muxer implements the specification as of March 2024, which has
been stable and unchanged since April 2014.

This muxer will have some nuances from the way that ccextractor muxes RCWT.
No compatibility issues when processing the output with ccextractor
have been observed as a result of this so far, but mileage may vary
and outputs will not be a bit-exact match.

A free specification of RCWT can be found here:
E<lt>B<https://github.com/CCExtractor/ccextractor/blob/master/docs/BINARY_FILE_FORMAT.TXT>E<gt>


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Extract Closed Captions to RCWT using lavfi:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i "movie=INPUT.mkv[out+subcc]" -map 0:s:0 -c:s copy -f rcwt CC.rcwt.bin


=back




=head2 segment, stream_segment, ssegment


Basic stream segmenter.

This muxer outputs streams to a number of separate files of nearly
fixed duration. Output filename pattern can be set in a fashion
similar to B<image2>, or by using a C<strftime> template if
the B<strftime> option is enabled.

C<stream_segment> is a variant of the muxer used to write to
streaming output formats, i.e. which do not require global headers,
and is recommended for outputting e.g. to MPEG transport stream segments.
C<ssegment> is a shorter alias for C<stream_segment>.

Every segment starts with a keyframe of the selected reference stream,
which is set through the B<reference_stream> option.

Note that if you want accurate splitting for a video file, you need to
make the input key frames correspond to the exact splitting times
expected by the segmenter, or the segment muxer will start the new
segment with the key frame found next after the specified start
time.

The segment muxer works best with a single constant frame rate video.

Optionally it can generate a list of the created segments, by setting
the option I<segment_list>. The list type is specified by the
I<segment_list_type> option. The entry filenames in the segment
list are set by default to the basename of the corresponding segment
files.

See also the B<hls> muxer, which provides a more specific
implementation for HLS segmentation.


=head3 Options


The segment muxer supports the following options:


=over 4


=item B<increment_tc> I<1|0>

if set to C<1>, increment timecode between each segment
If this is selected, the input need to have
a timecode in the first video stream. Default value is
C<0>.


=item B<reference_stream> I<specifier>

Set the reference stream, as specified by the string I<specifier>.
If I<specifier> is set to C<auto>, the reference is chosen
automatically. Otherwise it must be a stream specifier (see the ``Stream
specifiers'' chapter in the ffmpeg manual) which specifies the
reference stream. The default value is C<auto>.


=item B<segment_format> I<format>

Override the inner container format, by default it is guessed by the filename
extension.


=item B<segment_format_options> I<options_list>

Set output format options using a :-separated list of key=value
parameters. Values containing the C<:> special character must be
escaped.


=item B<segment_list> I<name>

Generate also a listfile named I<name>. If not specified no
listfile is generated.


=item B<segment_list_flags> I<flags>

Set flags affecting the segment list generation.

It currently supports the following flags:

=over 4


=item B<cache>

Allow caching (only affects M3U8 list files).


=item B<live>

Allow live-friendly file generation.

=back



=item B<segment_list_size> I<size>

Update the list file so that it contains at most I<size>
segments. If 0 the list file will contain all the segments. Default
value is 0.


=item B<segment_list_entry_prefix> I<prefix>

Prepend I<prefix> to each entry. Useful to generate absolute paths.
By default no prefix is applied.


=item B<segment_list_type> I<type>

Select the listing format.

The following values are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<flat>

Generate a flat list for the created segments, one segment per line.


=item B<csv, ext>

Generate a list for the created segments, one segment per line,
each line matching the format (comma-separated values):
	
	<segment_filename>,<segment_start_time>,<segment_end_time>


I<segment_filename> is the name of the output file generated by the
muxer according to the provided pattern. CSV escaping (according to
RFC4180) is applied if required.

I<segment_start_time> and I<segment_end_time> specify
the segment start and end time expressed in seconds.

A list file with the suffix C<".csv"> or C<".ext"> will
auto-select this format.

B<ext> is deprecated in favor or B<csv>.


=item B<ffconcat>

Generate an ffconcat file for the created segments. The resulting file
can be read using the FFmpeg B<concat> demuxer.

A list file with the suffix C<".ffcat"> or C<".ffconcat"> will
auto-select this format.


=item B<m3u8>

Generate an extended M3U8 file, version 3, compliant with
E<lt>B<http://tools.ietf.org/id/draft-pantos-http-live-streaming>E<gt>.

A list file with the suffix C<".m3u8"> will auto-select this format.

=back


If not specified the type is guessed from the list file name suffix.


=item B<segment_time> I<time>

Set segment duration to I<time>, the value must be a duration
specification. Default value is "2". See also the
B<segment_times> option.

Note that splitting may not be accurate, unless you force the
reference stream key-frames at the given time. See the introductory
notice and the examples below.


=item B<min_seg_duration> I<time>

Set minimum segment duration to I<time>, the value must be a duration
specification. This prevents the muxer ending segments at a duration below
this value. Only effective with C<segment_time>. Default value is "0".


=item B<segment_atclocktime> I<1|0>

If set to "1" split at regular clock time intervals starting from 00:00
o'clock. The I<time> value specified in B<segment_time> is
used for setting the length of the splitting interval.

For example with B<segment_time> set to "900" this makes it possible
to create files at 12:00 o'clock, 12:15, 12:30, etc.

Default value is "0".


=item B<segment_clocktime_offset> I<duration>

Delay the segment splitting times with the specified duration when using
B<segment_atclocktime>.

For example with B<segment_time> set to "900" and
B<segment_clocktime_offset> set to "300" this makes it possible to
create files at 12:05, 12:20, 12:35, etc.

Default value is "0".


=item B<segment_clocktime_wrap_duration> I<duration>

Force the segmenter to only start a new segment if a packet reaches the muxer
within the specified duration after the segmenting clock time. This way you
can make the segmenter more resilient to backward local time jumps, such as
leap seconds or transition to standard time from daylight savings time.

Default is the maximum possible duration which means starting a new segment
regardless of the elapsed time since the last clock time.


=item B<segment_time_delta> I<delta>

Specify the accuracy time when selecting the start time for a
segment, expressed as a duration specification. Default value is "0".

When delta is specified a key-frame will start a new segment if its
PTS satisfies the relation:
	
	PTS >= start_time - time_delta


This option is useful when splitting video content, which is always
split at GOP boundaries, in case a key frame is found just before the
specified split time.

In particular may be used in combination with the F<ffmpeg> option
I<force_key_frames>. The key frame times specified by
I<force_key_frames> may not be set accurately because of rounding
issues, with the consequence that a key frame time may result set just
before the specified time. For constant frame rate videos a value of
1/(2*I<frame_rate>) should address the worst case mismatch between
the specified time and the time set by I<force_key_frames>.


=item B<segment_times> I<times>

Specify a list of split points. I<times> contains a list of comma
separated duration specifications, in increasing order. See also
the B<segment_time> option.


=item B<segment_frames> I<frames>

Specify a list of split video frame numbers. I<frames> contains a
list of comma separated integer numbers, in increasing order.

This option specifies to start a new segment whenever a reference
stream key frame is found and the sequential number (starting from 0)
of the frame is greater or equal to the next value in the list.


=item B<segment_wrap> I<limit>

Wrap around segment index once it reaches I<limit>.


=item B<segment_start_number> I<number>

Set the sequence number of the first segment. Defaults to C<0>.


=item B<strftime> I<1|0>

Use the C<strftime> function to define the name of the new
segments to write. If this is selected, the output segment name must
contain a C<strftime> function template. Default value is
C<0>.


=item B<break_non_keyframes> I<1|0>

If enabled, allow segments to start on frames other than keyframes. This
improves behavior on some players when the time between keyframes is
inconsistent, but may make things worse on others, and can cause some oddities
during seeking. Defaults to C<0>.


=item B<reset_timestamps> I<1|0>

Reset timestamps at the beginning of each segment, so that each segment
will start with near-zero timestamps. It is meant to ease the playback
of the generated segments. May not work with some combinations of
muxers/codecs. It is set to C<0> by default.


=item B<initial_offset> I<offset>

Specify timestamp offset to apply to the output packet timestamps. The
argument must be a time duration specification, and defaults to 0.


=item B<write_empty_segments> I<1|0>

If enabled, write an empty segment if there are no packets during the period a
segment would usually span. Otherwise, the segment will be filled with the next
packet written. Defaults to C<0>.

=back


Make sure to require a closed GOP when encoding and to set the GOP
size to fit your segment time constraint.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Remux the content of file F<in.mkv> to a list of segments
F<out-000.nut>, F<out-001.nut>, etc., and write the list of
generated segments to F<out.list>:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -codec hevc -flags +cgop -g 60 -map 0 -f segment -segment_list out.list out%03d.nut



=item *

Segment input and set output format options for the output segments:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -f segment -segment_time 10 -segment_format_options movflags=+faststart out%03d.mp4



=item *

Segment the input file according to the split points specified by the
I<segment_times> option:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -codec copy -map 0 -f segment -segment_list out.csv -segment_times 1,2,3,5,8,13,21 out%03d.nut



=item *

Use the B<ffmpeg> B<force_key_frames>
option to force key frames in the input at the specified location, together
with the segment option B<segment_time_delta> to account for
possible roundings operated when setting key frame times.
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -force_key_frames 1,2,3,5,8,13,21 -codec:v mpeg4 -codec:a pcm_s16le -map 0 \
	-f segment -segment_list out.csv -segment_times 1,2,3,5,8,13,21 -segment_time_delta 0.05 out%03d.nut

In order to force key frames on the input file, transcoding is
required.


=item *

Segment the input file by splitting the input file according to the
frame numbers sequence specified with the B<segment_frames> option:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -codec copy -map 0 -f segment -segment_list out.csv -segment_frames 100,200,300,500,800 out%03d.nut



=item *

Convert the F<in.mkv> to TS segments using the C<libx264>
and C<aac> encoders:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mkv -map 0 -codec:v libx264 -codec:a aac -f ssegment -segment_list out.list out%03d.ts



=item *

Segment the input file, and create an M3U8 live playlist (can be used
as live HLS source):
	
	ffmpeg -re -i in.mkv -codec copy -map 0 -f segment -segment_list playlist.m3u8 \
	-segment_list_flags +live -segment_time 10 out%03d.mkv


=back



=head2 smoothstreaming


Smooth Streaming muxer generates a set of files (Manifest, chunks) suitable for serving with conventional web server.


=over 4


=item B<window_size>

Specify the number of fragments kept in the manifest. Default 0 (keep all).


=item B<extra_window_size>

Specify the number of fragments kept outside of the manifest before removing from disk. Default 5.


=item B<lookahead_count>

Specify the number of lookahead fragments. Default 2.


=item B<min_frag_duration>

Specify the minimum fragment duration (in microseconds). Default 5000000.


=item B<remove_at_exit>

Specify whether to remove all fragments when finished. Default 0 (do not remove).


=back




=head2 streamhash


Per stream hash testing format.

This muxer computes and prints a cryptographic hash of all the input frames,
on a per-stream basis. This can be used for equality checks without having
to do a complete binary comparison.

By default audio frames are converted to signed 16-bit raw audio and
video frames to raw video before computing the hash, but the output
of explicit conversions to other codecs can also be used. Timestamps
are ignored. It uses the SHA-256 cryptographic hash function by default,
but supports several other algorithms.

The output of the muxer consists of one line per stream of the form:
I<streamindex>,I<streamtype>,I<algo>=I<hash>, where
I<streamindex> is the index of the mapped stream, I<streamtype> is a
single character indicating the type of stream, I<algo> is a short string
representing the hash function used, and I<hash> is a hexadecimal number
representing the computed hash.


=over 4


=item B<hash> I<algorithm>

Use the cryptographic hash function specified by the string I<algorithm>.
Supported values include C<MD5>, C<murmur3>, C<RIPEMD128>,
C<RIPEMD160>, C<RIPEMD256>, C<RIPEMD320>, C<SHA160>,
C<SHA224>, C<SHA256> (default), C<SHA512/224>, C<SHA512/256>,
C<SHA384>, C<SHA512>, C<CRC32> and C<adler32>.


=back



=head3 Examples


To compute the SHA-256 hash of the input converted to raw audio and
video, and store it in the file F<out.sha256>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f streamhash out.sha256


To print an MD5 hash to stdout use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f streamhash -hash md5 -


See also the B<hash> and B<framehash> muxers.



=head2 tee


The tee muxer can be used to write the same data to several outputs, such as files or streams.
It can be used, for example, to stream a video over a network and save it to disk at the same time.

It is different from specifying several outputs to the B<ffmpeg>
command-line tool. With the tee muxer, the audio and video data will be encoded only once.
With conventional multiple outputs, multiple encoding operations in parallel are initiated,
which can be a very expensive process. The tee muxer is not useful when using the libavformat API
directly because it is then possible to feed the same packets to several muxers directly.

Since the tee muxer does not represent any particular output format, ffmpeg cannot auto-select
output streams. So all streams intended for output must be specified using C<-map>. See
the examples below.

Some encoders may need different options depending on the output format;
the auto-detection of this can not work with the tee muxer, so they need to be explicitly specified.
The main example is the B<global_header> flag.

The slave outputs are specified in the file name given to the muxer,
separated by '|'. If any of the slave name contains the '|' separator,
leading or trailing spaces or any special character, those must be
escaped (see B<the "Quoting and escaping"
section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>).


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<use_fifo> I<bool>

If set to 1, slave outputs will be processed in separate threads using the B<fifo>
muxer. This allows to compensate for different speed/latency/reliability of
outputs and setup transparent recovery. By default this feature is turned off.


=item B<fifo_options>

Options to pass to fifo pseudo-muxer instances. See B<fifo>.


=back


Muxer options can be specified for each slave by prepending them as a list of
I<key>=I<value> pairs separated by ':', between square brackets. If
the options values contain a special character or the ':' separator, they
must be escaped; note that this is a second level escaping.

The following special options are also recognized:

=over 4


=item B<f>

Specify the format name. Required if it cannot be guessed from the
output URL.


=item B<bsfs[/>I<spec>B<]>

Specify a list of bitstream filters to apply to the specified
output.

It is possible to specify to which streams a given bitstream filter
applies, by appending a stream specifier to the option separated by
C</>. I<spec> must be a stream specifier (see B<Format
stream specifiers>).

If the stream specifier is not specified, the bitstream filters will be
applied to all streams in the output. This will cause that output operation
to fail if the output contains streams to which the bitstream filter cannot
be applied e.g. C<h264_mp4toannexb> being applied to an output containing an audio stream.

Options for a bitstream filter must be specified in the form of C<opt=value>.

Several bitstream filters can be specified, separated by ",".


=item B<use_fifo> I<bool>

This allows to override tee muxer use_fifo option for individual slave muxer.


=item B<fifo_options>

This allows to override tee muxer fifo_options for individual slave muxer.
See B<fifo>.


=item B<select>

Select the streams that should be mapped to the slave output,
specified by a stream specifier. If not specified, this defaults to
all the mapped streams. This will cause that output operation to fail
if the output format does not accept all mapped streams.

You may use multiple stream specifiers separated by commas (C<,>) e.g.: C<a:0,v>


=item B<onfail>

Specify behaviour on output failure. This can be set to either C<abort> (which is
default) or C<ignore>. C<abort> will cause whole process to fail in case of failure
on this slave output. C<ignore> will ignore failure on this output, so other outputs
will continue without being affected.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Encode something and both archive it in a WebM file and stream it
as MPEG-TS over UDP:
	
	ffmpeg -i ... -c:v libx264 -c:a mp2 -f tee -map 0:v -map 0:a
	  "archive-20121107.mkv|[f=mpegts]udp://10.0.1.255:1234/"



=item *

As above, but continue streaming even if output to local file fails
(for example local drive fills up):
	
	ffmpeg -i ... -c:v libx264 -c:a mp2 -f tee -map 0:v -map 0:a
	  "[onfail=ignore]archive-20121107.mkv|[f=mpegts]udp://10.0.1.255:1234/"



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to encode the input, and send the output
to three different destinations. The C<dump_extra> bitstream
filter is used to add extradata information to all the output video
keyframes packets, as requested by the MPEG-TS format. The select
option is applied to F<out.aac> in order to make it contain only
audio packets.
	
	ffmpeg -i ... -map 0 -flags +global_header -c:v libx264 -c:a aac
	       -f tee "[bsfs/v=dump_extra=freq=keyframe]out.ts|[movflags=+faststart]out.mp4|[select=a]out.aac"



=item *

As above, but select only stream C<a:1> for the audio output. Note
that a second level escaping must be performed, as ":" is a special
character used to separate options.
	
	ffmpeg -i ... -map 0 -flags +global_header -c:v libx264 -c:a aac
	       -f tee "[bsfs/v=dump_extra=freq=keyframe]out.ts|[movflags=+faststart]out.mp4|[select=\'a:1\']out.aac"


=back



=head2 webm_chunk


WebM Live Chunk Muxer.

This muxer writes out WebM headers and chunks as separate files which can be
consumed by clients that support WebM Live streams via DASH.


=head3 Options


This muxer supports the following options:


=over 4


=item B<chunk_start_index>

Index of the first chunk (defaults to 0).


=item B<header>

Filename of the header where the initialization data will be written.


=item B<audio_chunk_duration>

Duration of each audio chunk in milliseconds (defaults to 5000).

=back



=head3 Example

	
	ffmpeg -f v4l2 -i /dev/video0 \
	       -f alsa -i hw:0 \
	       -map 0:0 \
	       -c:v libvpx-vp9 \
	       -s 640x360 -keyint_min 30 -g 30 \
	       -f webm_chunk \
	       -header webm_live_video_360.hdr \
	       -chunk_start_index 1 \
	       webm_live_video_360_%d.chk \
	       -map 1:0 \
	       -c:a libvorbis \
	       -b:a 128k \
	       -f webm_chunk \
	       -header webm_live_audio_128.hdr \
	       -chunk_start_index 1 \
	       -audio_chunk_duration 1000 \
	       webm_live_audio_128_%d.chk



=head2 webm_dash_manifest


WebM DASH Manifest muxer.

This muxer implements the WebM DASH Manifest specification to generate the DASH
manifest XML. It also supports manifest generation for DASH live streams.

For more information see:


=over 4


=item *

WebM DASH Specification: E<lt>B<https://sites.google.com/a/webmproject.org/wiki/adaptive-streaming/webm-dash-specification>E<gt>

=item *

ISO DASH Specification: E<lt>B<http://standards.iso.org/ittf/PubliclyAvailableStandards/c065274_ISO_IEC_23009-1_2014.zip>E<gt>

=back



=head3 Options


This muxer supports the following options:


=over 4


=item B<adaptation_sets>

This option has the following syntax: "id=x,streams=a,b,c id=y,streams=d,e" where x and y are the
unique identifiers of the adaptation sets and a,b,c,d and e are the indices of the corresponding
audio and video streams. Any number of adaptation sets can be added using this option.


=item B<live>

Set this to 1 to create a live stream DASH Manifest. Default: 0.


=item B<chunk_start_index>

Start index of the first chunk. This will go in the B<startNumber> attribute
of the B<SegmentTemplate> element in the manifest. Default: 0.


=item B<chunk_duration_ms>

Duration of each chunk in milliseconds. This will go in the B<duration>
attribute of the B<SegmentTemplate> element in the manifest. Default: 1000.


=item B<utc_timing_url>

URL of the page that will return the UTC timestamp in ISO format. This will go
in the B<value> attribute of the B<UTCTiming> element in the manifest.
Default: None.


=item B<time_shift_buffer_depth>

Smallest time (in seconds) shifting buffer for which any Representation is
guaranteed to be available. This will go in the B<timeShiftBufferDepth>
attribute of the B<MPD> element. Default: 60.


=item B<minimum_update_period>

Minimum update period (in seconds) of the manifest. This will go in the
B<minimumUpdatePeriod> attribute of the B<MPD> element. Default: 0.


=back



=head3 Example

	
	ffmpeg -f webm_dash_manifest -i video1.webm \
	       -f webm_dash_manifest -i video2.webm \
	       -f webm_dash_manifest -i audio1.webm \
	       -f webm_dash_manifest -i audio2.webm \
	       -map 0 -map 1 -map 2 -map 3 \
	       -c copy \
	       -f webm_dash_manifest \
	       -adaptation_sets "id=0,streams=0,1 id=1,streams=2,3" \
	       manifest.xml




=head1 METADATA


FFmpeg is able to dump metadata from media files into a simple UTF-8-encoded
INI-like text file and then load it back using the metadata muxer/demuxer.

The file format is as follows:

=over 4



=item 1.

A file consists of a header and a number of metadata tags divided into sections,
each on its own line.


=item 2.

The header is a B<;FFMETADATA> string, followed by a version number (now 1).


=item 3.

Metadata tags are of the form B<key=value>


=item 4.

Immediately after header follows global metadata


=item 5.

After global metadata there may be sections with per-stream/per-chapter
metadata.


=item 6.

A section starts with the section name in uppercase (i.e. STREAM or CHAPTER) in
brackets (B<[>, B<]>) and ends with next section or end of file.


=item 7.

At the beginning of a chapter section there may be an optional timebase to be
used for start/end values. It must be in form
B<TIMEBASE=>I<num>B</>I<den>, where I<num> and I<den> are
integers. If the timebase is missing then start/end times are assumed to
be in nanoseconds.

Next a chapter section must contain chapter start and end times in form
B<START=>I<num>, B<END=>I<num>, where I<num> is a positive
integer.


=item 8.

Empty lines and lines starting with B<;> or B<#> are ignored.


=item 9.

Metadata keys or values containing special characters (B<=>, B<;>,
B<#>, B<\> and a newline) must be escaped with a backslash B<\>.


=item 10.

Note that whitespace in metadata (e.g. B<foo = bar>) is considered to be
a part of the tag (in the example above key is B<foo> , value is
 B<bar>).

=back


A ffmetadata file might look like this:
	
	;FFMETADATA1
	title=bike\\shed
	;this is a comment
	artist=FFmpeg troll team
	
	[CHAPTER]
	TIMEBASE=1/1000
	START=0
	#chapter ends at 0:01:00
	END=60000
	title=chapter \#1
	[STREAM]
	title=multi\
	line


By using the ffmetadata muxer and demuxer it is possible to extract
metadata from an input file to an ffmetadata file, and then transcode
the file into an output file with the edited ffmetadata file.

Extracting an ffmetadata file with F<ffmpeg> goes as follows:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f ffmetadata FFMETADATAFILE


Reinserting edited metadata information from the FFMETADATAFILE file can
be done as:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -i FFMETADATAFILE -map_metadata 1 -codec copy OUTPUT



=head1 PROTOCOL OPTIONS


The libavformat library provides some generic global options, which
can be set on all the protocols. In addition each protocol may support
so-called private options, which are specific for that component.

Options may be set by specifying -I<option> I<value> in the
FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
C<AVFormatContext> options or using the F<libavutil/opt.h> API
for programmatic use.

The list of supported options follows:


=over 4


=item B<protocol_whitelist> I<list> B<(>I<input>B<)>

Set a ","-separated list of allowed protocols. "ALL" matches all protocols. Protocols
prefixed by "-" are disabled.
All protocols are allowed by default but protocols used by an another
protocol (nested protocols) are restricted to a per protocol subset.

=back




=head1 PROTOCOLS


Protocols are configured elements in FFmpeg that enable access to
resources that require specific protocols.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported protocols are
enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
configure option "--list-protocols".

You can disable all the protocols using the configure option
"--disable-protocols", and selectively enable a protocol using the
option "--enable-protocol=I<PROTOCOL>", or you can disable a
particular protocol using the option
"--disable-protocol=I<PROTOCOL>".

The option "-protocols" of the ff* tools will display the list of
supported protocols.

All protocols accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rw_timeout>

Maximum time to wait for (network) read/write operations to complete,
in microseconds.

=back


A description of the currently available protocols follows.


=head2 amqp


Advanced Message Queueing Protocol (AMQP) version 0-9-1 is a broker based
publish-subscribe communication protocol.

FFmpeg must be compiled with --enable-librabbitmq to support AMQP. A separate
AMQP broker must also be run. An example open-source AMQP broker is RabbitMQ.

After starting the broker, an FFmpeg client may stream data to the broker using
the command:

	
	ffmpeg -re -i input -f mpegts amqp://[[user]:[password]@]hostname[:port][/vhost]


Where hostname and port (default is 5672) is the address of the broker. The
client may also set a user/password for authentication. The default for both
fields is "guest". Name of virtual host on broker can be set with vhost. The
default value is "/".

Muliple subscribers may stream from the broker using the command:
	
	ffplay amqp://[[user]:[password]@]hostname[:port][/vhost]


In RabbitMQ all data published to the broker flows through a specific exchange,
and each subscribing client has an assigned queue/buffer. When a packet arrives
at an exchange, it may be copied to a client's queue depending on the exchange
and routing_key fields.

The following options are supported:


=over 4



=item B<exchange>

Sets the exchange to use on the broker. RabbitMQ has several predefined
exchanges: "amq.direct" is the default exchange, where the publisher and
subscriber must have a matching routing_key; "amq.fanout" is the same as a
broadcast operation (i.e. the data is forwarded to all queues on the fanout
exchange independent of the routing_key); and "amq.topic" is similar to
"amq.direct", but allows for more complex pattern matching (refer to the RabbitMQ
documentation).


=item B<routing_key>

Sets the routing key. The default value is "amqp". The routing key is used on
the "amq.direct" and "amq.topic" exchanges to decide whether packets are written
to the queue of a subscriber.


=item B<pkt_size>

Maximum size of each packet sent/received to the broker. Default is 131072.
Minimum is 4096 and max is any large value (representable by an int). When
receiving packets, this sets an internal buffer size in FFmpeg. It should be
equal to or greater than the size of the published packets to the broker. Otherwise
the received message may be truncated causing decoding errors.


=item B<connection_timeout>

The timeout in seconds during the initial connection to the broker. The
default value is rw_timeout, or 5 seconds if rw_timeout is not set.


=item B<delivery_mode> I<mode>

Sets the delivery mode of each message sent to broker.
The following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<persistent>

Delivery mode set to "persistent" (2). This is the default value.
Messages may be written to the broker's disk depending on its setup.


=item B<non-persistent>

Delivery mode set to "non-persistent" (1).
Messages will stay in broker's memory unless the broker is under memory
pressure.


=back



=back



=head2 async


Asynchronous data filling wrapper for input stream.

Fill data in a background thread, to decouple I/O operation from demux thread.

	
	async:<URL>
	async:http://host/resource
	async:cache:http://host/resource



=head2 bluray


Read BluRay playlist.

The accepted options are:

=over 4



=item B<angle>

BluRay angle


=item B<chapter>

Start chapter (1...N)


=item B<playlist>

Playlist to read (BDMV/PLAYLIST/?????.mpls)


=back


Examples:

Read longest playlist from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray:
	
	bluray:/mnt/bluray


Read angle 2 of playlist 4 from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray, start from chapter 2:
	
	-playlist 4 -angle 2 -chapter 2 bluray:/mnt/bluray



=head2 cache


Caching wrapper for input stream.

Cache the input stream to temporary file. It brings seeking capability to live streams.

The accepted options are:

=over 4



=item B<read_ahead_limit>

Amount in bytes that may be read ahead when seeking isn't supported. Range is -1 to INT_MAX.
-1 for unlimited. Default is 65536.


=back


URL Syntax is
	
	cache:<URL>



=head2 concat


Physical concatenation protocol.

Read and seek from many resources in sequence as if they were
a unique resource.

A URL accepted by this protocol has the syntax:
	
	concat:<URL1>|<URL2>|...|<URLN>


where I<URL1>, I<URL2>, ..., I<URLN> are the urls of the
resource to be concatenated, each one possibly specifying a distinct
protocol.

For example to read a sequence of files F<split1.mpeg>,
F<split2.mpeg>, F<split3.mpeg> with B<ffplay> use the
command:
	
	ffplay concat:split1.mpeg\|split2.mpeg\|split3.mpeg


Note that you may need to escape the character "|" which is special for
many shells.


=head2 concatf


Physical concatenation protocol using a line break delimited list of
resources.

Read and seek from many resources in sequence as if they were
a unique resource.

A URL accepted by this protocol has the syntax:
	
	concatf:<URL>


where I<URL> is the url containing a line break delimited list of
resources to be concatenated, each one possibly specifying a distinct
protocol. Special characters must be escaped with backslash or single
quotes. See B<the "Quoting and escaping"
section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

For example to read a sequence of files F<split1.mpeg>,
F<split2.mpeg>, F<split3.mpeg> listed in separate lines within
a file F<split.txt> with B<ffplay> use the command:
	
	ffplay concatf:split.txt

Where F<split.txt> contains the lines:
	
	split1.mpeg
	split2.mpeg
	split3.mpeg



=head2 crypto


AES-encrypted stream reading protocol.

The accepted options are:

=over 4


=item B<key>

Set the AES decryption key binary block from given hexadecimal representation.


=item B<iv>

Set the AES decryption initialization vector binary block from given hexadecimal representation.

=back


Accepted URL formats:
	
	crypto:<URL>
	crypto+<URL>



=head2 data


Data in-line in the URI. See E<lt>B<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_URI_scheme>E<gt>.

For example, to convert a GIF file given inline with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i "data:image/gif;base64,R0lGODdhCAAIAMIEAAAAAAAA//8AAP//AP///////////////ywAAAAACAAIAAADF0gEDLojDgdGiJdJqUX02iB4E8Q9jUMkADs=" smiley.png



=head2 fd


File descriptor access protocol.

The accepted syntax is:
	
	fd: -fd <file_descriptor>


If B<fd> is not specified, by default the stdout file descriptor will be
used for writing, stdin for reading. Unlike the pipe protocol, fd protocol has
seek support if it corresponding to a regular file. fd protocol doesn't support
pass file descriptor via URL for security.

This protocol accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<blocksize>

Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
C<INT_MAX>, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
time, which is valuable if data transmission is slow.


=item B<fd>

Set file descriptor.

=back



=head2 file


File access protocol.

Read from or write to a file.

A file URL can have the form:
	
	file:<filename>


where I<filename> is the path of the file to read.

An URL that does not have a protocol prefix will be assumed to be a
file URL. Depending on the build, an URL that looks like a Windows
path with the drive letter at the beginning will also be assumed to be
a file URL (usually not the case in builds for unix-like systems).

For example to read from a file F<input.mpeg> with B<ffmpeg>
use the command:
	
	ffmpeg -i file:input.mpeg output.mpeg


This protocol accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<truncate>

Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
truncating. Default value is 1.


=item B<blocksize>

Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
C<INT_MAX>, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
time, which is valuable for files on slow medium.


=item B<follow>

If set to 1, the protocol will retry reading at the end of the file, allowing
reading files that still are being written. In order for this to terminate,
you either need to use the rw_timeout option, or use the interrupt callback
(for API users).


=item B<seekable>

Controls if seekability is advertised on the file. 0 means non-seekable, -1
means auto (seekable for normal files, non-seekable for named pipes).

Many demuxers handle seekable and non-seekable resources differently,
overriding this might speed up opening certain files at the cost of losing some
features (e.g. accurate seeking).

=back



=head2 ftp


FTP (File Transfer Protocol).

Read from or write to remote resources using FTP protocol.

Following syntax is required.
	
	ftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg


This protocol accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<timeout>

Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
not specified.


=item B<ftp-user>

Set a user to be used for authenticating to the FTP server. This is overridden by the
user in the FTP URL.


=item B<ftp-password>

Set a password to be used for authenticating to the FTP server. This is overridden by
the password in the FTP URL, or by B<ftp-anonymous-password> if no user is set.


=item B<ftp-anonymous-password>

Password used when login as anonymous user. Typically an e-mail address
should be used.


=item B<ftp-write-seekable>

Control seekability of connection during encoding. If set to 1 the
resource is supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not
to be seekable. Default value is 0.

=back


NOTE: Protocol can be used as output, but it is recommended to not do
it, unless special care is taken (tests, customized server configuration
etc.). Different FTP servers behave in different way during seek
operation. ff* tools may produce incomplete content due to server limitations.


=head2 gopher


Gopher protocol.


=head2 gophers


Gophers protocol.

The Gopher protocol with TLS encapsulation.


=head2 hls


Read Apple HTTP Live Streaming compliant segmented stream as
a uniform one. The M3U8 playlists describing the segments can be
remote HTTP resources or local files, accessed using the standard
file protocol.
The nested protocol is declared by specifying
"+I<proto>" after the hls URI scheme name, where I<proto>
is either "file" or "http".

	
	hls+http://host/path/to/remote/resource.m3u8
	hls+file://path/to/local/resource.m3u8


Using this protocol is discouraged - the hls demuxer should work
just as well (if not, please report the issues) and is more complete.
To use the hls demuxer instead, simply use the direct URLs to the
m3u8 files.


=head2 http


HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).

This protocol accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<seekable>

Control seekability of connection. If set to 1 the resource is
supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not to be seekable,
if set to -1 it will try to autodetect if it is seekable. Default
value is -1.


=item B<chunked_post>

If set to 1 use chunked Transfer-Encoding for posts, default is 1.


=item B<http_proxy>

set HTTP proxy to tunnel through e.g. http://example.com:1234


=item B<headers>

Set custom HTTP headers, can override built in default headers. The
value must be a string encoding the headers.


=item B<content_type>

Set a specific content type for the POST messages or for listen mode.


=item B<user_agent>

Override the User-Agent header. If not specified the protocol will use a
string describing the libavformat build. ("Lavf/E<lt>versionE<gt>")


=item B<referer>

Set the Referer header. Include 'Referer: URL' header in HTTP request.


=item B<multiple_requests>

Use persistent connections if set to 1, default is 0.


=item B<post_data>

Set custom HTTP post data.


=item B<mime_type>

Export the MIME type.


=item B<http_version>

Exports the HTTP response version number. Usually "1.0" or "1.1".


=item B<cookies>

Set the cookies to be sent in future requests. The format of each cookie is the
same as the value of a Set-Cookie HTTP response field. Multiple cookies can be
delimited by a newline character.


=item B<icy>

If set to 1 request ICY (SHOUTcast) metadata from the server. If the server
supports this, the metadata has to be retrieved by the application by reading
the B<icy_metadata_headers> and B<icy_metadata_packet> options.
The default is 1.


=item B<icy_metadata_headers>

If the server supports ICY metadata, this contains the ICY-specific HTTP reply
headers, separated by newline characters.


=item B<icy_metadata_packet>

If the server supports ICY metadata, and B<icy> was set to 1, this
contains the last non-empty metadata packet sent by the server. It should be
polled in regular intervals by applications interested in mid-stream metadata
updates.


=item B<metadata>

Set an exported dictionary containing Icecast metadata from the bitstream, if present.
Only useful with the C API.


=item B<auth_type>


Set HTTP authentication type. No option for Digest, since this method requires
getting nonce parameters from the server first and can't be used straight away like
Basic.


=over 4


=item B<none>

Choose the HTTP authentication type automatically. This is the default.

=item B<basic>


Choose the HTTP basic authentication.

Basic authentication sends a Base64-encoded string that contains a user name and password
for the client. Base64 is not a form of encryption and should be considered the same as
sending the user name and password in clear text (Base64 is a reversible encoding).
If a resource needs to be protected, strongly consider using an authentication scheme
other than basic authentication. HTTPS/TLS should be used with basic authentication.
Without these additional security enhancements, basic authentication should not be used
to protect sensitive or valuable information.

=back



=item B<send_expect_100>

Send an Expect: 100-continue header for POST. If set to 1 it will send, if set
to 0 it won't, if set to -1 it will try to send if it is applicable. Default
value is -1.


=item B<location>

An exported dictionary containing the content location. Only useful with the C
API.


=item B<offset>

Set initial byte offset.


=item B<end_offset>

Try to limit the request to bytes preceding this offset.


=item B<method>

When used as a client option it sets the HTTP method for the request.

When used as a server option it sets the HTTP method that is going to be
expected from the client(s).
If the expected and the received HTTP method do not match the client will
be given a Bad Request response.
When unset the HTTP method is not checked for now. This will be replaced by
autodetection in the future.


=item B<reconnect>

Reconnect automatically when disconnected before EOF is hit.


=item B<reconnect_at_eof>

If set then eof is treated like an error and causes reconnection, this is useful
for live / endless streams.


=item B<reconnect_on_network_error>

Reconnect automatically in case of TCP/TLS errors during connect.


=item B<reconnect_on_http_error>

A comma separated list of HTTP status codes to reconnect on. The list can
include specific status codes (e.g. '503') or the strings '4xx' / '5xx'.


=item B<reconnect_streamed>

If set then even streamed/non seekable streams will be reconnected on errors.


=item B<reconnect_delay_max>

Set the maximum delay in seconds after which to give up reconnecting.


=item B<reconnect_max_retries>

Set the maximum number of times to retry a connection. Default unset.


=item B<reconnect_delay_total_max>

Set the maximum total delay in seconds after which to give up reconnecting.


=item B<respect_retry_after>

If enabled, and a Retry-After header is encountered, its requested reconnection
delay will be honored, rather than using exponential backoff. Useful for 429 and
503 errors. Default enabled.


=item B<listen>

If set to 1 enables experimental HTTP server. This can be used to send data when
used as an output option, or read data from a client with HTTP POST when used as
an input option.
If set to 2 enables experimental multi-client HTTP server. This is not yet implemented
in ffmpeg.c and thus must not be used as a command line option.
	
	# Server side (sending):
	ffmpeg -i somefile.ogg -c copy -listen 1 -f ogg http://<server>:<port>
	
	# Client side (receiving):
	ffmpeg -i http://<server>:<port> -c copy somefile.ogg
	
	# Client can also be done with wget:
	wget http://<server>:<port> -O somefile.ogg
	
	# Server side (receiving):
	ffmpeg -listen 1 -i http://<server>:<port> -c copy somefile.ogg
	
	# Client side (sending):
	ffmpeg -i somefile.ogg -chunked_post 0 -c copy -f ogg http://<server>:<port>
	
	# Client can also be done with wget:
	wget --post-file=somefile.ogg http://<server>:<port>



=item B<resource>

The resource requested by a client, when the experimental HTTP server is in use.


=item B<reply_code>

The HTTP code returned to the client, when the experimental HTTP server is in use.


=item B<short_seek_size>

Set the threshold, in bytes, for when a readahead should be prefered over a seek and
new HTTP request. This is useful, for example, to make sure the same connection
is used for reading large video packets with small audio packets in between.


=back



=head3 HTTP Cookies


Some HTTP requests will be denied unless cookie values are passed in with the
request. The B<cookies> option allows these cookies to be specified. At
the very least, each cookie must specify a value along with a path and domain.
HTTP requests that match both the domain and path will automatically include the
cookie value in the HTTP Cookie header field. Multiple cookies can be delimited
by a newline.

The required syntax to play a stream specifying a cookie is:
	
	ffplay -cookies "nlqptid=nltid=tsn; path=/; domain=somedomain.com;" http://somedomain.com/somestream.m3u8



=head2 Icecast


Icecast protocol (stream to Icecast servers)

This protocol accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<ice_genre>

Set the stream genre.


=item B<ice_name>

Set the stream name.


=item B<ice_description>

Set the stream description.


=item B<ice_url>

Set the stream website URL.


=item B<ice_public>

Set if the stream should be public.
The default is 0 (not public).


=item B<user_agent>

Override the User-Agent header. If not specified a string of the form
"Lavf/E<lt>versionE<gt>" will be used.


=item B<password>

Set the Icecast mountpoint password.


=item B<content_type>

Set the stream content type. This must be set if it is different from
audio/mpeg.


=item B<legacy_icecast>

This enables support for Icecast versions E<lt> 2.4.0, that do not support the
HTTP PUT method but the SOURCE method.


=item B<tls>

Establish a TLS (HTTPS) connection to Icecast.


=back


	
	icecast://[<username>[:<password>]@]<server>:<port>/<mountpoint>



=head2 ipfs


InterPlanetary File System (IPFS) protocol support. One can access files stored
on the IPFS network through so-called gateways. These are http(s) endpoints.
This protocol wraps the IPFS native protocols (ipfs:// and ipns://) to be sent
to such a gateway. Users can (and should) host their own node which means this
protocol will use one's local gateway to access files on the IPFS network.

This protocol accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<gateway>

Defines the gateway to use. When not set, the protocol will first try
locating the local gateway by looking at C<$IPFS_GATEWAY>, C<$IPFS_PATH>
and C<$HOME/.ipfs/>, in that order.


=back


One can use this protocol in 2 ways. Using IPFS:
	
	ffplay ipfs://<hash>


Or the IPNS protocol (IPNS is mutable IPFS):
	
	ffplay ipns://<hash>



=head2 mmst


MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over TCP.


=head2 mmsh


MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over HTTP.

The required syntax is:
	
	mmsh://<server>[:<port>][/<app>][/<playpath>]



=head2 md5


MD5 output protocol.

Computes the MD5 hash of the data to be written, and on close writes
this to the designated output or stdout if none is specified. It can
be used to test muxers without writing an actual file.

Some examples follow.
	
	# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to the file output.avi.md5.
	ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:output.avi.md5
	
	# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to stdout.
	ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:


Note that some formats (typically MOV) require the output protocol to
be seekable, so they will fail with the MD5 output protocol.


=head2 pipe


UNIX pipe access protocol.

Read and write from UNIX pipes.

The accepted syntax is:
	
	pipe:[<number>]


If B<fd> isn't specified, I<number> is the number corresponding to the file descriptor of the
pipe (e.g. 0 for stdin, 1 for stdout, 2 for stderr).  If I<number>
is not specified, by default the stdout file descriptor will be used
for writing, stdin for reading.

For example to read from stdin with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:0
	# ...this is the same as...
	cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:


For writing to stdout with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe:1 | cat > test.avi
	# ...this is the same as...
	ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe: | cat > test.avi


This protocol accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<blocksize>

Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
C<INT_MAX>, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
time, which is valuable if data transmission is slow.

=item B<fd>

Set file descriptor.

=back


Note that some formats (typically MOV), require the output protocol to
be seekable, so they will fail with the pipe output protocol.


=head2 prompeg


Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3 Release 2 FEC protocol.

The Pro-MPEG CoP#3 FEC is a 2D parity-check forward error correction mechanism
for MPEG-2 Transport Streams sent over RTP.

This protocol must be used in conjunction with the C<rtp_mpegts> muxer and
the C<rtp> protocol.

The required syntax is:
	
	-f rtp_mpegts -fec prompeg=<option>=<val>... rtp://<hostname>:<port>


The destination UDP ports are C<port + 2> for the column FEC stream
and C<port + 4> for the row FEC stream.

This protocol accepts the following options:

=over 4



=item B<l=>I<n>

The number of columns (4-20, LxD E<lt>= 100)


=item B<d=>I<n>

The number of rows (4-20, LxD E<lt>= 100)


=back


Example usage:

	
	-f rtp_mpegts -fec prompeg=l=8:d=4 rtp://<hostname>:<port>



=head2 rist


Reliable Internet Streaming Transport protocol

The accepted options are:

=over 4


=item B<rist_profile>

Supported values:

=over 4


=item B<simple>


=item B<main>

This one is default.

=item B<advanced>


=back



=item B<buffer_size>

Set internal RIST buffer size in milliseconds for retransmission of data.
Default value is 0 which means the librist default (1 sec). Maximum value is 30
seconds.


=item B<fifo_size>

Size of the librist receiver output fifo in number of packets. This must be a
power of 2.
Defaults to 8192 (vs the librist default of 1024).


=item B<overrun_nonfatal=>I<1|0>

Survive in case of librist fifo buffer overrun. Default value is 0.


=item B<pkt_size>

Set maximum packet size for sending data. 1316 by default.


=item B<log_level>

Set loglevel for RIST logging messages. You only need to set this if you
explicitly want to enable debug level messages or packet loss simulation,
otherwise the regular loglevel is respected.


=item B<secret>

Set override of encryption secret, by default is unset.


=item B<encryption>

Set encryption type, by default is disabled.
Acceptable values are 128 and 256.

=back



=head2 rtmp


Real-Time Messaging Protocol.

The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) is used for streaming multimedia
content across a TCP/IP network.

The required syntax is:
	
	rtmp://[<username>:<password>@]<server>[:<port>][/<app>][/<instance>][/<playpath>]


The accepted parameters are:

=over 4



=item B<username>

An optional username (mostly for publishing).


=item B<password>

An optional password (mostly for publishing).


=item B<server>

The address of the RTMP server.


=item B<port>

The number of the TCP port to use (by default is 1935).


=item B<app>

It is the name of the application to access. It usually corresponds to
the path where the application is installed on the RTMP server
(e.g. F</ondemand/>, F</flash/live/>, etc.). You can override
the value parsed from the URI through the C<rtmp_app> option, too.


=item B<playpath>

It is the path or name of the resource to play with reference to the
application specified in I<app>, may be prefixed by "mp4:". You
can override the value parsed from the URI through the C<rtmp_playpath>
option, too.


=item B<listen>

Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.


=item B<timeout>

Maximum time to wait for the incoming connection. Implies listen.

=back


Additionally, the following parameters can be set via command line options
(or in code via C<AVOption>s):

=over 4



=item B<rtmp_app>

Name of application to connect on the RTMP server. This option
overrides the parameter specified in the URI.


=item B<rtmp_buffer>

Set the client buffer time in milliseconds. The default is 3000.


=item B<rtmp_conn>

Extra arbitrary AMF connection parameters, parsed from a string,
e.g. like C<B:1 S:authMe O:1 NN:code:1.23 NS:flag:ok O:0>.
Each value is prefixed by a single character denoting the type,
B for Boolean, N for number, S for string, O for object, or Z for null,
followed by a colon. For Booleans the data must be either 0 or 1 for
FALSE or TRUE, respectively.  Likewise for Objects the data must be 0 or
1 to end or begin an object, respectively. Data items in subobjects may
be named, by prefixing the type with 'N' and specifying the name before
the value (i.e. C<NB:myFlag:1>). This option may be used multiple
times to construct arbitrary AMF sequences.


=item B<rtmp_enhanced_codecs>

Specify the list of codecs the client advertises to support in an
enhanced RTMP stream. This option should be set to a comma separated
list of fourcc values, like C<hvc1,av01,vp09> for multiple codecs
or C<hvc1> for only one codec. The specified list will be presented
in the "fourCcLive" property of the Connect Command Message.


=item B<rtmp_flashver>

Version of the Flash plugin used to run the SWF player. The default
is LNX 9,0,124,2. (When publishing, the default is FMLE/3.0 (compatible;
E<lt>libavformat versionE<gt>).)


=item B<rtmp_flush_interval>

Number of packets flushed in the same request (RTMPT only). The default
is 10.


=item B<rtmp_live>

Specify that the media is a live stream. No resuming or seeking in
live streams is possible. The default value is C<any>, which means the
subscriber first tries to play the live stream specified in the
playpath. If a live stream of that name is not found, it plays the
recorded stream. The other possible values are C<live> and
C<recorded>.


=item B<rtmp_pageurl>

URL of the web page in which the media was embedded. By default no
value will be sent.


=item B<rtmp_playpath>

Stream identifier to play or to publish. This option overrides the
parameter specified in the URI.


=item B<rtmp_subscribe>

Name of live stream to subscribe to. By default no value will be sent.
It is only sent if the option is specified or if rtmp_live
is set to live.


=item B<rtmp_swfhash>

SHA256 hash of the decompressed SWF file (32 bytes).


=item B<rtmp_swfsize>

Size of the decompressed SWF file, required for SWFVerification.


=item B<rtmp_swfurl>

URL of the SWF player for the media. By default no value will be sent.


=item B<rtmp_swfverify>

URL to player swf file, compute hash/size automatically.


=item B<rtmp_tcurl>

URL of the target stream. Defaults to proto://host[:port]/app.


=item B<tcp_nodelay=>I<1|0>

Set TCP_NODELAY to disable Nagle's algorithm. Default value is 0.

I<Remark: Writing to the socket is currently not optimized to minimize system calls and reduces the efficiency / effect of TCP_NODELAY.>


=back


For example to read with B<ffplay> a multimedia resource named
"sample" from the application "vod" from an RTMP server "myserver":
	
	ffplay rtmp://myserver/vod/sample


To publish to a password protected server, passing the playpath and
app names separately:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f flv -rtmp_playpath some/long/path -rtmp_app long/app/name rtmp://username:password@myserver/



=head2 rtmpe


Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol.

The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPE) is used for
streaming multimedia content within standard cryptographic primitives,
consisting of Diffie-Hellman key exchange and HMACSHA256, generating
a pair of RC4 keys.


=head2 rtmps


Real-Time Messaging Protocol over a secure SSL connection.

The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPS) is used for streaming
multimedia content across an encrypted connection.


=head2 rtmpt


Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.

The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPT) is used
for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
firewalls.


=head2 rtmpte


Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.

The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPTE)
is used for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
firewalls.


=head2 rtmpts


Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS.

The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS (RTMPTS) is used
for streaming multimedia content within HTTPS requests to traverse
firewalls.


=head2 libsmbclient


libsmbclient permits one to manipulate CIFS/SMB network resources.

Following syntax is required.

	
	smb://[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]


This protocol accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<timeout>

Set timeout in milliseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying
low level operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
is not specified.


=item B<truncate>

Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
truncating. Default value is 1.


=item B<workgroup>

Set the workgroup used for making connections. By default workgroup is not specified.


=back


For more information see: E<lt>B<http://www.samba.org/>E<gt>.


=head2 libssh


Secure File Transfer Protocol via libssh

Read from or write to remote resources using SFTP protocol.

Following syntax is required.

	
	sftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg


This protocol accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<timeout>

Set timeout of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
is not specified.


=item B<truncate>

Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
truncating. Default value is 1.


=item B<private_key>

Specify the path of the file containing private key to use during authorization.
By default libssh searches for keys in the F<~/.ssh/> directory.


=back


Example: Play a file stored on remote server.

	
	ffplay sftp://user:password@server_address:22/home/user/resource.mpeg



=head2 librtmp rtmp, rtmpe, rtmps, rtmpt, rtmpte


Real-Time Messaging Protocol and its variants supported through
librtmp.

Requires the presence of the librtmp headers and library during
configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
"--enable-librtmp". If enabled this will replace the native RTMP
protocol.

This protocol provides most client functions and a few server
functions needed to support RTMP, RTMP tunneled in HTTP (RTMPT),
encrypted RTMP (RTMPE), RTMP over SSL/TLS (RTMPS) and tunneled
variants of these encrypted types (RTMPTE, RTMPTS).

The required syntax is:
	
	<rtmp_proto>://<server>[:<port>][/<app>][/<playpath>] <options>


where I<rtmp_proto> is one of the strings "rtmp", "rtmpt", "rtmpe",
"rtmps", "rtmpte", "rtmpts" corresponding to each RTMP variant, and
I<server>, I<port>, I<app> and I<playpath> have the same
meaning as specified for the RTMP native protocol.
I<options> contains a list of space-separated options of the form
I<key>=I<val>.

See the librtmp manual page (man 3 librtmp) for more information.

For example, to stream a file in real-time to an RTMP server using
B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i myfile -f flv rtmp://myserver/live/mystream


To play the same stream using B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay "rtmp://myserver/live/mystream live=1"



=head2 rtp


Real-time Transport Protocol.

The required syntax for an RTP URL is:
rtp://I<hostname>[:I<port>][?I<option>=I<val>...]

I<port> specifies the RTP port to use.

The following URL options are supported:


=over 4



=item B<ttl=>I<n>

Set the TTL (Time-To-Live) value (for multicast only).


=item B<rtcpport=>I<n>

Set the remote RTCP port to I<n>.


=item B<localrtpport=>I<n>

Set the local RTP port to I<n>.


=item B<localrtcpport=>I<n>B<'>

Set the local RTCP port to I<n>.


=item B<pkt_size=>I<n>

Set max packet size (in bytes) to I<n>.


=item B<buffer_size=>I<size>

Set the maximum UDP socket buffer size in bytes.


=item B<connect=0|1>

Do a C<connect()> on the UDP socket (if set to 1) or not (if set
to 0).


=item B<sources=>I<ip>B<[,>I<ip>B<]>

List allowed source IP addresses.


=item B<block=>I<ip>B<[,>I<ip>B<]>

List disallowed (blocked) source IP addresses.


=item B<write_to_source=0|1>

Send packets to the source address of the latest received packet (if
set to 1) or to a default remote address (if set to 0).


=item B<localport=>I<n>

Set the local RTP port to I<n>.


=item B<localaddr=>I<addr>

Local IP address of a network interface used for sending packets or joining
multicast groups.


=item B<timeout=>I<n>

Set timeout (in microseconds) of socket I/O operations to I<n>.

This is a deprecated option. Instead, B<localrtpport> should be
used.


=back


Important notes:


=over 4



=item 1.

If B<rtcpport> is not set the RTCP port will be set to the RTP
port value plus 1.


=item 2.

If B<localrtpport> (the local RTP port) is not set any available
port will be used for the local RTP and RTCP ports.


=item 3.

If B<localrtcpport> (the local RTCP port) is not set it will be
set to the local RTP port value plus 1.

=back



=head2 rtsp


Real-Time Streaming Protocol.

RTSP is not technically a protocol handler in libavformat, it is a demuxer
and muxer. The demuxer supports both normal RTSP (with data transferred
over RTP; this is used by e.g. Apple and Microsoft) and Real-RTSP (with
data transferred over RDT).

The muxer can be used to send a stream using RTSP ANNOUNCE to a server
supporting it (currently Darwin Streaming Server and Mischa Spiegelmock's
E<lt>B<https://github.com/revmischa/rtsp-server>E<gt>).

The required syntax for a RTSP url is:
	
	rtsp://<hostname>[:<port>]/<path>


Options can be set on the B<ffmpeg>/B<ffplay> command
line, or set in code via C<AVOption>s or in
C<avformat_open_input>.


=head3 Muxer

The following options are supported.


=over 4


=item B<rtsp_transport>

Set RTSP transport protocols.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<udp>

Use UDP as lower transport protocol.


=item B<tcp>

Use TCP (interleaving within the RTSP control channel) as lower
transport protocol.

=back


Default value is B<0>.


=item B<rtsp_flags>

Set RTSP flags.

The following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<latm>

Use MP4A-LATM packetization instead of MPEG4-GENERIC for AAC.

=item B<rfc2190>

Use RFC 2190 packetization instead of RFC 4629 for H.263.

=item B<skip_rtcp>

Don't send RTCP sender reports.

=item B<h264_mode0>

Use mode 0 for H.264 in RTP.

=item B<send_bye>

Send RTCP BYE packets when finishing.

=back


Default value is B<0>.



=item B<min_port>

Set minimum local UDP port. Default value is 5000.


=item B<max_port>

Set maximum local UDP port. Default value is 65000.


=item B<buffer_size>

Set the maximum socket buffer size in bytes.


=item B<pkt_size>

Set max send packet size (in bytes). Default value is 1472.

=back



=head3 Demuxer

The following options are supported.


=over 4


=item B<initial_pause>

Do not start playing the stream immediately if set to 1. Default value
is 0.


=item B<rtsp_transport>

Set RTSP transport protocols.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<udp>

Use UDP as lower transport protocol.


=item B<tcp>

Use TCP (interleaving within the RTSP control channel) as lower
transport protocol.


=item B<udp_multicast>

Use UDP multicast as lower transport protocol.


=item B<http>

Use HTTP tunneling as lower transport protocol, which is useful for
passing proxies.


=item B<https>

Use HTTPs tunneling as lower transport protocol, which is useful for
passing proxies and widely used for security consideration.

=back


Multiple lower transport protocols may be specified, in that case they are
tried one at a time (if the setup of one fails, the next one is tried).
For the muxer, only the B<tcp> and B<udp> options are supported.


=item B<rtsp_flags>

Set RTSP flags.

The following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<filter_src>

Accept packets only from negotiated peer address and port.

=item B<listen>

Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.

=item B<prefer_tcp>

Try TCP for RTP transport first, if TCP is available as RTSP RTP transport.

=item B<satip_raw>

Export raw MPEG-TS stream instead of demuxing. The flag will simply write out
the raw stream, with the original PAT/PMT/PIDs intact.

=back


Default value is B<none>.


=item B<allowed_media_types>

Set media types to accept from the server.

The following flags are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<video>


=item B<audio>


=item B<data>


=item B<subtitle>


=back


By default it accepts all media types.


=item B<min_port>

Set minimum local UDP port. Default value is 5000.


=item B<max_port>

Set maximum local UDP port. Default value is 65000.


=item B<listen_timeout>

Set maximum timeout (in seconds) to establish an initial connection. Setting
B<listen_timeout> E<gt> 0 sets B<rtsp_flags> to B<listen>. Default is -1
which means an infinite timeout when B<listen> mode is set.


=item B<reorder_queue_size>

Set number of packets to buffer for handling of reordered packets.


=item B<timeout>

Set socket TCP I/O timeout in microseconds.


=item B<user_agent>

Override User-Agent header. If not specified, it defaults to the
libavformat identifier string.


=item B<buffer_size>

Set the maximum socket buffer size in bytes.

=back


When receiving data over UDP, the demuxer tries to reorder received packets
(since they may arrive out of order, or packets may get lost totally). This
can be disabled by setting the maximum demuxing delay to zero (via
the C<max_delay> field of AVFormatContext).

When watching multi-bitrate Real-RTSP streams with B<ffplay>, the
streams to display can be chosen with C<-vst> I<n> and
C<-ast> I<n> for video and audio respectively, and can be switched
on the fly by pressing C<v> and C<a>.


=head3 Examples


The following examples all make use of the B<ffplay> and
B<ffmpeg> tools.


=over 4


=item *

Watch a stream over UDP, with a max reordering delay of 0.5 seconds:
	
	ffplay -max_delay 500000 -rtsp_transport udp rtsp://server/video.mp4



=item *

Watch a stream tunneled over HTTP:
	
	ffplay -rtsp_transport http rtsp://server/video.mp4



=item *

Send a stream in realtime to a RTSP server, for others to watch:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f rtsp -muxdelay 0.1 rtsp://server/live.sdp



=item *

Receive a stream in realtime:
	
	ffmpeg -rtsp_flags listen -i rtsp://ownaddress/live.sdp <output>


=back



=head2 sap


Session Announcement Protocol (RFC 2974). This is not technically a
protocol handler in libavformat, it is a muxer and demuxer.
It is used for signalling of RTP streams, by announcing the SDP for the
streams regularly on a separate port.


=head3 Muxer


The syntax for a SAP url given to the muxer is:
	
	sap://<destination>[:<port>][?<options>]


The RTP packets are sent to I<destination> on port I<port>,
or to port 5004 if no port is specified.
I<options> is a C<&>-separated list. The following options
are supported:


=over 4



=item B<announce_addr=>I<address>

Specify the destination IP address for sending the announcements to.
If omitted, the announcements are sent to the commonly used SAP
announcement multicast address 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net), or
ff0e::2:7ffe if I<destination> is an IPv6 address.


=item B<announce_port=>I<port>

Specify the port to send the announcements on, defaults to
9875 if not specified.


=item B<ttl=>I<ttl>

Specify the time to live value for the announcements and RTP packets,
defaults to 255.


=item B<same_port=>I<0|1>

If set to 1, send all RTP streams on the same port pair. If zero (the
default), all streams are sent on unique ports, with each stream on a
port 2 numbers higher than the previous.
VLC/Live555 requires this to be set to 1, to be able to receive the stream.
The RTP stack in libavformat for receiving requires all streams to be sent
on unique ports.

=back


Example command lines follow.

To broadcast a stream on the local subnet, for watching in VLC:

	
	ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f sap sap://224.0.0.255?same_port=1


Similarly, for watching in B<ffplay>:

	
	ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f sap sap://224.0.0.255


And for watching in B<ffplay>, over IPv6:

	
	ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f sap sap://[ff0e::1:2:3:4]



=head3 Demuxer


The syntax for a SAP url given to the demuxer is:
	
	sap://[<address>][:<port>]


I<address> is the multicast address to listen for announcements on,
if omitted, the default 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net) is used. I<port>
is the port that is listened on, 9875 if omitted.

The demuxers listens for announcements on the given address and port.
Once an announcement is received, it tries to receive that particular stream.

Example command lines follow.

To play back the first stream announced on the normal SAP multicast address:

	
	ffplay sap://


To play back the first stream announced on one the default IPv6 SAP multicast address:

	
	ffplay sap://[ff0e::2:7ffe]



=head2 sctp


Stream Control Transmission Protocol.

The accepted URL syntax is:
	
	sctp://<host>:<port>[?<options>]


The protocol accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<listen>

If set to any value, listen for an incoming connection. Outgoing connection is done by default.


=item B<max_streams>

Set the maximum number of streams. By default no limit is set.

=back



=head2 srt


Haivision Secure Reliable Transport Protocol via libsrt.

The supported syntax for a SRT URL is:
	
	srt://<hostname>:<port>[?<options>]


I<options> contains a list of &-separated options of the form
I<key>=I<val>.

or

	
	<options> srt://<hostname>:<port>


I<options> contains a list of '-I<key> I<val>'
options.

This protocol accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<connect_timeout=>I<milliseconds>

Connection timeout; SRT cannot connect for RTT E<gt> 1500 msec
(2 handshake exchanges) with the default connect timeout of
3 seconds. This option applies to the caller and rendezvous
connection modes. The connect timeout is 10 times the value
set for the rendezvous mode (which can be used as a
workaround for this connection problem with earlier versions).


=item B<ffs=>I<bytes>

Flight Flag Size (Window Size), in bytes. FFS is actually an
internal parameter and you should set it to not less than
B<recv_buffer_size> and B<mss>. The default value
is relatively large, therefore unless you set a very large receiver buffer,
you do not need to change this option. Default value is 25600.


=item B<inputbw=>I<bytes/seconds>

Sender nominal input rate, in bytes per seconds. Used along with
B<oheadbw>, when B<maxbw> is set to relative (0), to
calculate maximum sending rate when recovery packets are sent
along with the main media stream:
B<inputbw> * (100 + B<oheadbw>) / 100
if B<inputbw> is not set while B<maxbw> is set to
relative (0), the actual input rate is evaluated inside
the library. Default value is 0.


=item B<iptos=>I<tos>

IP Type of Service. Applies to sender only. Default value is 0xB8.


=item B<ipttl=>I<ttl>

IP Time To Live. Applies to sender only. Default value is 64.


=item B<latency=>I<microseconds>

Timestamp-based Packet Delivery Delay.
Used to absorb bursts of missed packet retransmissions.
This flag sets both B<rcvlatency> and B<peerlatency>
to the same value. Note that prior to version 1.3.0
this is the only flag to set the latency, however
this is effectively equivalent to setting B<peerlatency>,
when side is sender and B<rcvlatency>
when side is receiver, and the bidirectional stream
sending is not supported.


=item B<listen_timeout=>I<microseconds>

Set socket listen timeout.


=item B<maxbw=>I<bytes/seconds>

Maximum sending bandwidth, in bytes per seconds.
-1 infinite (CSRTCC limit is 30mbps)
0 relative to input rate (see B<inputbw>)
E<gt>0 absolute limit value
Default value is 0 (relative)


=item B<mode=>I<caller|listener|rendezvous>

Connection mode.
B<caller> opens client connection.
B<listener> starts server to listen for incoming connections.
B<rendezvous> use Rendez-Vous connection mode.
Default value is caller.


=item B<mss=>I<bytes>

Maximum Segment Size, in bytes. Used for buffer allocation
and rate calculation using a packet counter assuming fully
filled packets. The smallest MSS between the peers is
used. This is 1500 by default in the overall internet.
This is the maximum size of the UDP packet and can be
only decreased, unless you have some unusual dedicated
network settings. Default value is 1500.


=item B<nakreport=>I<1|0>

If set to 1, Receiver will send `UMSG_LOSSREPORT` messages
periodically until a lost packet is retransmitted or
intentionally dropped. Default value is 1.


=item B<oheadbw=>I<percents>

Recovery bandwidth overhead above input rate, in percents.
See B<inputbw>. Default value is 25%.


=item B<passphrase=>I<string>

HaiCrypt Encryption/Decryption Passphrase string, length
from 10 to 79 characters. The passphrase is the shared
secret between the sender and the receiver. It is used
to generate the Key Encrypting Key using PBKDF2
(Password-Based Key Derivation Function). It is used
only if B<pbkeylen> is non-zero. It is used on
the receiver only if the received data is encrypted.
The configured passphrase cannot be recovered (write-only).


=item B<enforced_encryption=>I<1|0>

If true, both connection parties must have the same password
set (including empty, that is, with no encryption). If the
password doesn't match or only one side is unencrypted,
the connection is rejected. Default is true.


=item B<kmrefreshrate=>I<packets>

The number of packets to be transmitted after which the
encryption key is switched to a new key. Default is -1.
-1 means auto (0x1000000 in srt library). The range for
this option is integers in the 0 - C<INT_MAX>.


=item B<kmpreannounce=>I<packets>

The interval between when a new encryption key is sent and
when switchover occurs. This value also applies to the
subsequent interval between when switchover occurs and
when the old encryption key is decommissioned. Default is -1.
-1 means auto (0x1000 in srt library). The range for
this option is integers in the 0 - C<INT_MAX>.


=item B<snddropdelay=>I<microseconds>

The sender's extra delay before dropping packets. This delay is
added to the default drop delay time interval value.

Special value -1: Do not drop packets on the sender at all.


=item B<payload_size=>I<bytes>

Sets the maximum declared size of a packet transferred
during the single call to the sending function in Live
mode. Use 0 if this value isn't used (which is default in
file mode).
Default is -1 (automatic), which typically means MPEG-TS;
if you are going to use SRT
to send any different kind of payload, such as, for example,
wrapping a live stream in very small frames, then you can
use a bigger maximum frame size, though not greater than
1456 bytes.


=item B<pkt_size=>I<bytes>

Alias for B<payload_size>.


=item B<peerlatency=>I<microseconds>

The latency value (as described in B<rcvlatency>) that is
set by the sender side as a minimum value for the receiver.


=item B<pbkeylen=>I<bytes>

Sender encryption key length, in bytes.
Only can be set to 0, 16, 24 and 32.
Enable sender encryption if not 0.
Not required on receiver (set to 0),
key size obtained from sender in HaiCrypt handshake.
Default value is 0.


=item B<rcvlatency=>I<microseconds>

The time that should elapse since the moment when the
packet was sent and the moment when it's delivered to
the receiver application in the receiving function.
This time should be a buffer time large enough to cover
the time spent for sending, unexpectedly extended RTT
time, and the time needed to retransmit the lost UDP
packet. The effective latency value will be the maximum
of this options' value and the value of B<peerlatency>
set by the peer side. Before version 1.3.0 this option
is only available as B<latency>.


=item B<recv_buffer_size=>I<bytes>

Set UDP receive buffer size, expressed in bytes.


=item B<send_buffer_size=>I<bytes>

Set UDP send buffer size, expressed in bytes.


=item B<timeout=>I<microseconds>

Set raise error timeouts for read, write and connect operations. Note that the
SRT library has internal timeouts which can be controlled separately, the
value set here is only a cap on those.


=item B<tlpktdrop=>I<1|0>

Too-late Packet Drop. When enabled on receiver, it skips
missing packets that have not been delivered in time and
delivers the following packets to the application when
their time-to-play has come. It also sends a fake ACK to
the sender. When enabled on sender and enabled on the
receiving peer, the sender drops the older packets that
have no chance of being delivered in time. It was
automatically enabled in the sender if the receiver
supports it.


=item B<sndbuf=>I<bytes>

Set send buffer size, expressed in bytes.


=item B<rcvbuf=>I<bytes>

Set receive buffer size, expressed in bytes.

Receive buffer must not be greater than B<ffs>.


=item B<lossmaxttl=>I<packets>

The value up to which the Reorder Tolerance may grow. When
Reorder Tolerance is E<gt> 0, then packet loss report is delayed
until that number of packets come in. Reorder Tolerance
increases every time a "belated" packet has come, but it
wasn't due to retransmission (that is, when UDP packets tend
to come out of order), with the difference between the latest
sequence and this packet's sequence, and not more than the
value of this option. By default it's 0, which means that this
mechanism is turned off, and the loss report is always sent
immediately upon experiencing a "gap" in sequences.


=item B<minversion>

The minimum SRT version that is required from the peer. A connection
to a peer that does not satisfy the minimum version requirement
will be rejected.

The version format in hex is 0xXXYYZZ for x.y.z in human readable
form.


=item B<streamid=>I<string>

A string limited to 512 characters that can be set on the socket prior
to connecting. This stream ID will be able to be retrieved by the
listener side from the socket that is returned from srt_accept and
was connected by a socket with that set stream ID. SRT does not enforce
any special interpretation of the contents of this string.
This option doesn’t make sense in Rendezvous connection; the result
might be that simply one side will override the value from the other
side and it’s the matter of luck which one would win


=item B<srt_streamid=>I<string>

Alias for B<streamid> to avoid conflict with ffmpeg command line option.


=item B<smoother=>I<live|file>

The type of Smoother used for the transmission for that socket, which
is responsible for the transmission and congestion control. The Smoother
type must be exactly the same on both connecting parties, otherwise
the connection is rejected.


=item B<messageapi=>I<1|0>

When set, this socket uses the Message API, otherwise it uses Buffer
API. Note that in live mode (see B<transtype>) there’s only
message API available. In File mode you can chose to use one of two modes:

Stream API (default, when this option is false). In this mode you may
send as many data as you wish with one sending instruction, or even use
dedicated functions that read directly from a file. The internal facility
will take care of any speed and congestion control. When receiving, you
can also receive as many data as desired, the data not extracted will be
waiting for the next call. There is no boundary between data portions in
the Stream mode.

Message API. In this mode your single sending instruction passes exactly
one piece of data that has boundaries (a message). Contrary to Live mode,
this message may span across multiple UDP packets and the only size
limitation is that it shall fit as a whole in the sending buffer. The
receiver shall use as large buffer as necessary to receive the message,
otherwise the message will not be given up. When the message is not
complete (not all packets received or there was a packet loss) it will
not be given up.


=item B<transtype=>I<live|file>

Sets the transmission type for the socket, in particular, setting this
option sets multiple other parameters to their default values as required
for a particular transmission type.

live: Set options as for live transmission. In this mode, you should
send by one sending instruction only so many data that fit in one UDP packet,
and limited to the value defined first in B<payload_size> (1316 is
default in this mode). There is no speed control in this mode, only the
bandwidth control, if configured, in order to not exceed the bandwidth with
the overhead transmission (retransmitted and control packets).

file: Set options as for non-live transmission. See B<messageapi>
for further explanations


=item B<linger=>I<seconds>

The number of seconds that the socket waits for unsent data when closing.
Default is -1. -1 means auto (off with 0 seconds in live mode, on with 180
seconds in file mode). The range for this option is integers in the
0 - C<INT_MAX>.


=item B<tsbpd=>I<1|0>

When true, use Timestamp-based Packet Delivery mode. The default behavior
depends on the transmission type: enabled in live mode, disabled in file
mode.


=back


For more information see: E<lt>B<https://github.com/Haivision/srt>E<gt>.


=head2 srtp


Secure Real-time Transport Protocol.

The accepted options are:

=over 4


=item B<srtp_in_suite>


=item B<srtp_out_suite>

Select input and output encoding suites.

Supported values:

=over 4


=item B<AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80>


=item B<SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80>


=item B<AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32>


=item B<SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32>


=back



=item B<srtp_in_params>


=item B<srtp_out_params>

Set input and output encoding parameters, which are expressed by a
base64-encoded representation of a binary block. The first 16 bytes of
this binary block are used as master key, the following 14 bytes are
used as master salt.

=back



=head2 subfile


Virtually extract a segment of a file or another stream.
The underlying stream must be seekable.

Accepted options:

=over 4


=item B<start>

Start offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.

=item B<end>

End offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
If set to 0, extract till end of file.

=back


Examples:

Extract a chapter from a DVD VOB file (start and end sectors obtained
externally and multiplied by 2048):
	
	subfile,,start,153391104,end,268142592,,:/media/dvd/VIDEO_TS/VTS_08_1.VOB


Play an AVI file directly from a TAR archive:
	
	subfile,,start,183241728,end,366490624,,:archive.tar


Play a MPEG-TS file from start offset till end:
	
	subfile,,start,32815239,end,0,,:video.ts



=head2 tee


Writes the output to multiple protocols. The individual outputs are separated
by |

	
	tee:file://path/to/local/this.avi|file://path/to/local/that.avi



=head2 tcp


Transmission Control Protocol.

The required syntax for a TCP url is:
	
	tcp://<hostname>:<port>[?<options>]


I<options> contains a list of &-separated options of the form
I<key>=I<val>.

The list of supported options follows.


=over 4


=item B<listen=>I<2|1|0>

Listen for an incoming connection. 0 disables listen, 1 enables listen in
single client mode, 2 enables listen in multi-client mode. Default value is 0.


=item B<local_addr=>I<addr>

Local IP address of a network interface used for tcp socket connect.


=item B<local_port=>I<port>

Local port used for tcp socket connect.


=item B<timeout=>I<microseconds>

Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.

This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
than this time interval, raise error.


=item B<listen_timeout=>I<milliseconds>

Set listen timeout, expressed in milliseconds.


=item B<recv_buffer_size=>I<bytes>

Set receive buffer size, expressed bytes.


=item B<send_buffer_size=>I<bytes>

Set send buffer size, expressed bytes.


=item B<tcp_nodelay=>I<1|0>

Set TCP_NODELAY to disable Nagle's algorithm. Default value is 0.

I<Remark: Writing to the socket is currently not optimized to minimize system calls and reduces the efficiency / effect of TCP_NODELAY.>


=item B<tcp_mss=>I<bytes>

Set maximum segment size for outgoing TCP packets, expressed in bytes.

=back


The following example shows how to setup a listening TCP connection
with B<ffmpeg>, which is then accessed with B<ffplay>:
	
	ffmpeg -i <input> -f <format> tcp://<hostname>:<port>?listen
	ffplay tcp://<hostname>:<port>



=head2 tls


Transport Layer Security (TLS) / Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)

The required syntax for a TLS/SSL url is:
	
	tls://<hostname>:<port>[?<options>]


The following parameters can be set via command line options
(or in code via C<AVOption>s):


=over 4



=item B<ca_file, cafile=>I<filename>

A file containing certificate authority (CA) root certificates to treat
as trusted. If the linked TLS library contains a default this might not
need to be specified for verification to work, but not all libraries and
setups have defaults built in.
The file must be in OpenSSL PEM format.


=item B<tls_verify=>I<1|0>

If enabled, try to verify the peer that we are communicating with.
Note, if using OpenSSL, this currently only makes sure that the
peer certificate is signed by one of the root certificates in the CA
database, but it does not validate that the certificate actually
matches the host name we are trying to connect to. (With other backends,
the host name is validated as well.)

This is disabled by default since it requires a CA database to be
provided by the caller in many cases.


=item B<cert_file, cert=>I<filename>

A file containing a certificate to use in the handshake with the peer.
(When operating as server, in listen mode, this is more often required
by the peer, while client certificates only are mandated in certain
setups.)


=item B<key_file, key=>I<filename>

A file containing the private key for the certificate.


=item B<listen=>I<1|0>

If enabled, listen for connections on the provided port, and assume
the server role in the handshake instead of the client role.


=item B<http_proxy>

The HTTP proxy to tunnel through, e.g. C<http://example.com:1234>.
The proxy must support the CONNECT method.


=back


Example command lines:

To create a TLS/SSL server that serves an input stream.

	
	ffmpeg -i <input> -f <format> tls://<hostname>:<port>?listen&cert=<server.crt>&key=<server.key>


To play back a stream from the TLS/SSL server using B<ffplay>:

	
	ffplay tls://<hostname>:<port>



=head2 udp


User Datagram Protocol.

The required syntax for an UDP URL is:
	
	udp://<hostname>:<port>[?<options>]


I<options> contains a list of &-separated options of the form I<key>=I<val>.

In case threading is enabled on the system, a circular buffer is used
to store the incoming data, which allows one to reduce loss of data due to
UDP socket buffer overruns. The I<fifo_size> and
I<overrun_nonfatal> options are related to this buffer.

The list of supported options follows.


=over 4


=item B<buffer_size=>I<size>

Set the UDP maximum socket buffer size in bytes. This is used to set either
the receive or send buffer size, depending on what the socket is used for.
Default is 32 KB for output, 384 KB for input.  See also I<fifo_size>.


=item B<bitrate=>I<bitrate>

If set to nonzero, the output will have the specified constant bitrate if the
input has enough packets to sustain it.


=item B<burst_bits=>I<bits>

When using I<bitrate> this specifies the maximum number of bits in
packet bursts.


=item B<localport=>I<port>

Override the local UDP port to bind with.


=item B<localaddr=>I<addr>

Local IP address of a network interface used for sending packets or joining
multicast groups.


=item B<pkt_size=>I<size>

Set the size in bytes of UDP packets.


=item B<reuse=>I<1|0>

Explicitly allow or disallow reusing UDP sockets.


=item B<ttl=>I<ttl>

Set the time to live value (for multicast only).


=item B<connect=>I<1|0>

Initialize the UDP socket with C<connect()>. In this case, the
destination address can't be changed with ff_udp_set_remote_url later.
If the destination address isn't known at the start, this option can
be specified in ff_udp_set_remote_url, too.
This allows finding out the source address for the packets with getsockname,
and makes writes return with AVERROR(ECONNREFUSED) if "destination
unreachable" is received.
For receiving, this gives the benefit of only receiving packets from
the specified peer address/port.


=item B<sources=>I<address>B<[,>I<address>B<]>

Only receive packets sent from the specified addresses. In case of multicast,
also subscribe to multicast traffic coming from these addresses only.


=item B<block=>I<address>B<[,>I<address>B<]>

Ignore packets sent from the specified addresses. In case of multicast, also
exclude the source addresses in the multicast subscription.


=item B<fifo_size=>I<units>

Set the UDP receiving circular buffer size, expressed as a number of
packets with size of 188 bytes. If not specified defaults to 7*4096.


=item B<overrun_nonfatal=>I<1|0>

Survive in case of UDP receiving circular buffer overrun. Default
value is 0.


=item B<timeout=>I<microseconds>

Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.

This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
than this time interval, raise error.


=item B<broadcast=>I<1|0>

Explicitly allow or disallow UDP broadcasting.

Note that broadcasting may not work properly on networks having
a broadcast storm protection.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to stream over UDP to a remote endpoint:
	
	ffmpeg -i <input> -f <format> udp://<hostname>:<port>



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to stream in mpegts format over UDP using 188
sized UDP packets, using a large input buffer:
	
	ffmpeg -i <input> -f mpegts udp://<hostname>:<port>?pkt_size=188&buffer_size=65535



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to receive over UDP from a remote endpoint:
	
	ffmpeg -i udp://[<multicast-address>]:<port> ...


=back



=head2 unix


Unix local socket

The required syntax for a Unix socket URL is:

	
	unix://<filepath>


The following parameters can be set via command line options
(or in code via C<AVOption>s):


=over 4


=item B<timeout>

Timeout in ms.

=item B<listen>

Create the Unix socket in listening mode.

=back



=head2 zmq


ZeroMQ asynchronous messaging using the libzmq library.

This library supports unicast streaming to multiple clients without relying on
an external server.

The required syntax for streaming or connecting to a stream is:
	
	zmq:tcp://ip-address:port


Example:
Create a localhost stream on port 5555:
	
	ffmpeg -re -i input -f mpegts zmq:tcp://127.0.0.1:5555


Multiple clients may connect to the stream using:
	
	ffplay zmq:tcp://127.0.0.1:5555


Streaming to multiple clients is implemented using a ZeroMQ Pub-Sub pattern.
The server side binds to a port and publishes data. Clients connect to the
server (via IP address/port) and subscribe to the stream. The order in which
the server and client start generally does not matter.

ffmpeg must be compiled with the --enable-libzmq option to support
this protocol.

Options can be set on the B<ffmpeg>/B<ffplay> command
line. The following options are supported:


=over 4



=item B<pkt_size>

Forces the maximum packet size for sending/receiving data. The default value is
131,072 bytes. On the server side, this sets the maximum size of sent packets
via ZeroMQ. On the clients, it sets an internal buffer size for receiving
packets. Note that pkt_size on the clients should be equal to or greater than
pkt_size on the server. Otherwise the received message may be truncated causing
decoding errors.


=back



=head1 DEVICE OPTIONS


The libavdevice library provides the same interface as
libavformat. Namely, an input device is considered like a demuxer, and
an output device like a muxer, and the interface and generic device
options are the same provided by libavformat (see the ffmpeg-formats
manual).

In addition each input or output device may support so-called private
options, which are specific for that component.

Options may be set by specifying -I<option> I<value> in the
FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the device
C<AVFormatContext> options or using the F<libavutil/opt.h> API
for programmatic use.



=head1 INPUT DEVICES


Input devices are configured elements in FFmpeg which enable accessing
the data coming from a multimedia device attached to your system.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported input devices
are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
configure option "--list-indevs".

You can disable all the input devices using the configure option
"--disable-indevs", and selectively enable an input device using the
option "--enable-indev=I<INDEV>", or you can disable a particular
input device using the option "--disable-indev=I<INDEV>".

The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
supported input devices.

A description of the currently available input devices follows.


=head2 alsa


ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) input device.

To enable this input device during configuration you need libasound
installed on your system.

This device allows capturing from an ALSA device. The name of the
device to capture has to be an ALSA card identifier.

An ALSA identifier has the syntax:
	
	hw:<CARD>[,<DEV>[,<SUBDEV>]]


where the I<DEV> and I<SUBDEV> components are optional.

The three arguments (in order: I<CARD>,I<DEV>,I<SUBDEV>)
specify card number or identifier, device number and subdevice number
(-1 means any).

To see the list of cards currently recognized by your system check the
files F</proc/asound/cards> and F</proc/asound/devices>.

For example to capture with B<ffmpeg> from an ALSA device with
card id 0, you may run the command:
	
	ffmpeg -f alsa -i hw:0 alsaout.wav


For more information see:
E<lt>B<http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/alsa-lib/pcm.html>E<gt>


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sample rate in Hz. Default is 48000.


=item B<channels>

Set the number of channels. Default is 2.


=back



=head2 android_camera


Android camera input device.

This input devices uses the Android Camera2 NDK API which is
available on devices with API level 24+. The availability of
android_camera is autodetected during configuration.

This device allows capturing from all cameras on an Android device,
which are integrated into the Camera2 NDK API.

The available cameras are enumerated internally and can be selected
with the I<camera_index> parameter. The input file string is
discarded.

Generally the back facing camera has index 0 while the front facing
camera has index 1.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<video_size>

Set the video size given as a string such as 640x480 or hd720.
Falls back to the first available configuration reported by
Android if requested video size is not available or by default.


=item B<framerate>

Set the video framerate.
Falls back to the first available configuration reported by
Android if requested framerate is not available or by default (-1).


=item B<camera_index>

Set the index of the camera to use. Default is 0.


=item B<input_queue_size>

Set the maximum number of frames to buffer. Default is 5.


=back



=head2 avfoundation


AVFoundation input device.

AVFoundation is the currently recommended framework by Apple for streamgrabbing on OSX E<gt>= 10.7 as well as on iOS.

The input filename has to be given in the following syntax:
	
	-i "[[VIDEO]:[AUDIO]]"

The first entry selects the video input while the latter selects the audio input.
The stream has to be specified by the device name or the device index as shown by the device list.
Alternatively, the video and/or audio input device can be chosen by index using the

    B<-video_device_index E<lt>INDEXE<gt>>

and/or

    B<-audio_device_index E<lt>INDEXE<gt>>

, overriding any
device name or index given in the input filename.

All available devices can be enumerated by using B<-list_devices true>, listing
all device names and corresponding indices.

There are two device name aliases:

=over 4



=item C<default>

Select the AVFoundation default device of the corresponding type.


=item C<none>

Do not record the corresponding media type.
This is equivalent to specifying an empty device name or index.


=back



=head3 Options


AVFoundation supports the following options:


=over 4



=item B<-list_devices E<lt>TRUE|FALSEE<gt>>

If set to true, a list of all available input devices is given showing all
device names and indices.


=item B<-video_device_index E<lt>INDEXE<gt>>

Specify the video device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.


=item B<-audio_device_index E<lt>INDEXE<gt>>

Specify the audio device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.


=item B<-pixel_format E<lt>FORMATE<gt>>

Request the video device to use a specific pixel format.
If the specified format is not supported, a list of available formats is given
and the first one in this list is used instead. Available pixel formats are:
C<monob, rgb555be, rgb555le, rgb565be, rgb565le, rgb24, bgr24, 0rgb, bgr0, 0bgr, rgb0,
 bgr48be, uyvy422, yuva444p, yuva444p16le, yuv444p, yuv422p16, yuv422p10, yuv444p10,
 yuv420p, nv12, yuyv422, gray>


=item B<-framerate>

Set the grabbing frame rate. Default is C<ntsc>, corresponding to a
frame rate of C<30000/1001>.


=item B<-video_size>

Set the video frame size.


=item B<-capture_cursor>

Capture the mouse pointer. Default is 0.


=item B<-capture_mouse_clicks>

Capture the screen mouse clicks. Default is 0.


=item B<-capture_raw_data>

Capture the raw device data. Default is 0.
Using this option may result in receiving the underlying data delivered to the AVFoundation framework. E.g. for muxed devices that sends raw DV data to the framework (like tape-based camcorders), setting this option to false results in extracted video frames captured in the designated pixel format only. Setting this option to true results in receiving the raw DV stream untouched.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Print the list of AVFoundation supported devices and exit:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -list_devices true -i ""



=item *

Record video from video device 0 and audio from audio device 0 into out.avi:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -i "0:0" out.avi



=item *

Record video from video device 2 and audio from audio device 1 into out.avi:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -video_device_index 2 -i ":1" out.avi



=item *

Record video from the system default video device using the pixel format bgr0 and do not record any audio into out.avi:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -pixel_format bgr0 -i "default:none" out.avi



=item *

Record raw DV data from a suitable input device and write the output into out.dv:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -capture_raw_data true -i "zr100:none" out.dv




=back



=head2 bktr


BSD video input device. Deprecated and will be removed - please contact
the developers if you are interested in maintaining it.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<framerate>

Set the frame rate.


=item B<video_size>

Set the video frame size. Default is C<vga>.


=item B<standard>


Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<pal>



=item B<ntsc>



=item B<secam>



=item B<paln>



=item B<palm>



=item B<ntscj>



=back



=back



=head2 decklink


The decklink input device provides capture capabilities for Blackmagic
DeckLink devices.

To enable this input device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
need to configure with the appropriate C<--extra-cflags>
and C<--extra-ldflags>.
On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through B<widl>.

DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format of the
input can be set with B<raw_format>.
Framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
B<-list_formats 1>. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz and the number
of channels can be 2, 8 or 16. Note that all audio channels are bundled in one single
audio track.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<list_devices>

If set to B<true>, print a list of devices and exit.
Defaults to B<false>. This option is deprecated, please use the
C<-sources> option of ffmpeg to list the available input devices.


=item B<list_formats>

If set to B<true>, print a list of supported formats and exit.
Defaults to B<false>.


=item B<format_code E<lt>FourCCE<gt>>

This sets the input video format to the format given by the FourCC. To see
the supported values of your device(s) use B<list_formats>.
Note that there is a FourCC B<'pal '> that can also be used
as B<pal> (3 letters).
Default behavior is autodetection of the input video format, if the hardware
supports it.


=item B<raw_format>

Set the pixel format of the captured video.
Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<auto>


This is the default which means 8-bit YUV 422 or 8-bit ARGB if format
autodetection is used, 8-bit YUV 422 otherwise.


=item B<uyvy422>


8-bit YUV 422.


=item B<yuv422p10>


10-bit YUV 422.


=item B<argb>


8-bit RGB.


=item B<bgra>


8-bit RGB.


=item B<rgb10>


10-bit RGB.


=back



=item B<teletext_lines>

If set to nonzero, an additional teletext stream will be captured from the
vertical ancillary data. Both SD PAL (576i) and HD (1080i or 1080p)
sources are supported. In case of HD sources, OP47 packets are decoded.

This option is a bitmask of the SD PAL VBI lines captured, specifically lines 6
to 22, and lines 318 to 335. Line 6 is the LSB in the mask. Selected lines
which do not contain teletext information will be ignored. You can use the
special B<all> constant to select all possible lines, or
B<standard> to skip lines 6, 318 and 319, which are not compatible with
all receivers.

For SD sources, ffmpeg needs to be compiled with C<--enable-libzvbi>. For
HD sources, on older (pre-4K) DeckLink card models you have to capture in 10
bit mode.


=item B<channels>

Defines number of audio channels to capture. Must be B<2>, B<8> or B<16>.
Defaults to B<2>.


=item B<duplex_mode>

Sets the decklink device duplex/profile mode. Must be B<unset>, B<half>, B<full>,
B<one_sub_device_full>, B<one_sub_device_half>, B<two_sub_device_full>,
B<four_sub_device_half>
Defaults to B<unset>.

Note: DeckLink SDK 11.0 have replaced the duplex property by a profile property.
For the DeckLink Duo 2 and DeckLink Quad 2, a profile is shared between any 2
sub-devices that utilize the same connectors. For the DeckLink 8K Pro, a profile
is shared between all 4 sub-devices. So DeckLink 8K Pro support four profiles.

Valid profile modes for DeckLink 8K Pro(with DeckLink SDK E<gt>= 11.0):
B<one_sub_device_full>, B<one_sub_device_half>, B<two_sub_device_full>,
B<four_sub_device_half>

Valid profile modes for DeckLink Quad 2 and DeckLink Duo 2:
B<half>, B<full>


=item B<timecode_format>

Timecode type to include in the frame and video stream metadata. Must be
B<none>, B<rp188vitc>, B<rp188vitc2>, B<rp188ltc>,
B<rp188hfr>, B<rp188any>, B<vitc>, B<vitc2>, or B<serial>.
Defaults to B<none> (not included).

In order to properly support 50/60 fps timecodes, the ordering of the queried
timecode types for B<rp188any> is HFR, VITC1, VITC2 and LTC for E<gt>30 fps
content. Note that this is slightly different to the ordering used by the
DeckLink API, which is HFR, VITC1, LTC, VITC2.


=item B<video_input>

Sets the video input source. Must be B<unset>, B<sdi>, B<hdmi>,
B<optical_sdi>, B<component>, B<composite> or B<s_video>.
Defaults to B<unset>.


=item B<audio_input>

Sets the audio input source. Must be B<unset>, B<embedded>,
B<aes_ebu>, B<analog>, B<analog_xlr>, B<analog_rca> or
B<microphone>. Defaults to B<unset>.


=item B<video_pts>

Sets the video packet timestamp source. Must be B<video>, B<audio>,
B<reference>, B<wallclock> or B<abs_wallclock>.
Defaults to B<video>.


=item B<audio_pts>

Sets the audio packet timestamp source. Must be B<video>, B<audio>,
B<reference>, B<wallclock> or B<abs_wallclock>.
Defaults to B<audio>.


=item B<draw_bars>

If set to B<true>, color bars are drawn in the event of a signal loss.
Defaults to B<true>.
This option is deprecated, please use the C<signal_loss_action> option.


=item B<signal_loss_action>

Sets the action to take in the event of a signal loss. Accepts one of the
following values:


=over 4


=item B<1, none>

Do nothing on signal loss. This usually results in black frames.

=item B<2, bars>

Draw color bars on signal loss. Only supported for 8-bit input signals.

=item B<3, repeat>

Repeat the last video frame on signal loss.

=back


Defaults to B<bars>.


=item B<queue_size>

Sets maximum input buffer size in bytes. If the buffering reaches this value,
incoming frames will be dropped.
Defaults to B<1073741824>.


=item B<audio_depth>

Sets the audio sample bit depth. Must be B<16> or B<32>.
Defaults to B<16>.


=item B<decklink_copyts>

If set to B<true>, timestamps are forwarded as they are without removing
the initial offset.
Defaults to B<false>.


=item B<timestamp_align>

Capture start time alignment in seconds. If set to nonzero, input frames are
dropped till the system timestamp aligns with configured value.
Alignment difference of up to one frame duration is tolerated.
This is useful for maintaining input synchronization across N different
hardware devices deployed for 'N-way' redundancy. The system time of different
hardware devices should be synchronized with protocols such as NTP or PTP,
before using this option.
Note that this method is not foolproof. In some border cases input
synchronization may not happen due to thread scheduling jitters in the OS.
Either sync could go wrong by 1 frame or in a rarer case
B<timestamp_align> seconds.
Defaults to B<0>.


=item B<wait_for_tc (>I<bool>B<)>

Drop frames till a frame with timecode is received. Sometimes serial timecode
isn't received with the first input frame. If that happens, the stored stream
timecode will be inaccurate. If this option is set to B<true>, input frames
are dropped till a frame with timecode is received.
Option I<timecode_format> must be specified.
Defaults to B<false>.


=item B<enable_klv(>I<bool>B<)>

If set to B<true>, extracts KLV data from VANC and outputs KLV packets.
KLV VANC packets are joined based on MID and PSC fields and aggregated into
one KLV packet.
Defaults to B<false>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

List input devices:
	
	ffmpeg -sources decklink



=item *

List supported formats:
	
	ffmpeg -f decklink -list_formats 1 -i 'Intensity Pro'



=item *

Capture video clip at 1080i50:
	
	ffmpeg -format_code Hi50 -f decklink -i 'Intensity Pro' -c:a copy -c:v copy output.avi



=item *

Capture video clip at 1080i50 10 bit:
	
	ffmpeg -raw_format yuv422p10 -format_code Hi50 -f decklink -i 'UltraStudio Mini Recorder' -c:a copy -c:v copy output.avi



=item *

Capture video clip at 1080i50 with 16 audio channels:
	
	ffmpeg -channels 16 -format_code Hi50 -f decklink -i 'UltraStudio Mini Recorder' -c:a copy -c:v copy output.avi



=back



=head2 dshow


Windows DirectShow input device.

DirectShow support is enabled when FFmpeg is built with the mingw-w64 project.
Currently only audio and video devices are supported.

Multiple devices may be opened as separate inputs, but they may also be
opened on the same input, which should improve synchronism between them.

The input name should be in the format:

	
	<TYPE>=<NAME>[:<TYPE>=<NAME>]


where I<TYPE> can be either I<audio> or I<video>,
and I<NAME> is the device's name or alternative name..


=head3 Options


If no options are specified, the device's defaults are used.
If the device does not support the requested options, it will
fail to open.


=over 4



=item B<video_size>

Set the video size in the captured video.


=item B<framerate>

Set the frame rate in the captured video.


=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.


=item B<sample_size>

Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio.


=item B<channels>

Set the number of channels in the captured audio.


=item B<list_devices>

If set to B<true>, print a list of devices and exit.


=item B<list_options>

If set to B<true>, print a list of selected device's options
and exit.


=item B<video_device_number>

Set video device number for devices with the same name (starts at 0,
defaults to 0).


=item B<audio_device_number>

Set audio device number for devices with the same name (starts at 0,
defaults to 0).


=item B<pixel_format>

Select pixel format to be used by DirectShow. This may only be set when
the video codec is not set or set to rawvideo.


=item B<audio_buffer_size>

Set audio device buffer size in milliseconds (which can directly
impact latency, depending on the device).
Defaults to using the audio device's
default buffer size (typically some multiple of 500ms).
Setting this value too low can degrade performance.
See also
E<lt>B<http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/dd377582(v=vs.85).aspx>E<gt>


=item B<video_pin_name>

Select video capture pin to use by name or alternative name.


=item B<audio_pin_name>

Select audio capture pin to use by name or alternative name.


=item B<crossbar_video_input_pin_number>

Select video input pin number for crossbar device. This will be
routed to the crossbar device's Video Decoder output pin.
Note that changing this value can affect future invocations
(sets a new default) until system reboot occurs.


=item B<crossbar_audio_input_pin_number>

Select audio input pin number for crossbar device. This will be
routed to the crossbar device's Audio Decoder output pin.
Note that changing this value can affect future invocations
(sets a new default) until system reboot occurs.


=item B<show_video_device_dialog>

If set to B<true>, before capture starts, popup a display dialog
to the end user, allowing them to change video filter properties
and configurations manually.
Note that for crossbar devices, adjusting values in this dialog
may be needed at times to toggle between PAL (25 fps) and NTSC (29.97)
input frame rates, sizes, interlacing, etc.  Changing these values can
enable different scan rates/frame rates and avoiding green bars at
the bottom, flickering scan lines, etc.
Note that with some devices, changing these properties can also affect future
invocations (sets new defaults) until system reboot occurs.


=item B<show_audio_device_dialog>

If set to B<true>, before capture starts, popup a display dialog
to the end user, allowing them to change audio filter properties
and configurations manually.


=item B<show_video_crossbar_connection_dialog>

If set to B<true>, before capture starts, popup a display
dialog to the end user, allowing them to manually
modify crossbar pin routings, when it opens a video device.


=item B<show_audio_crossbar_connection_dialog>

If set to B<true>, before capture starts, popup a display
dialog to the end user, allowing them to manually
modify crossbar pin routings, when it opens an audio device.


=item B<show_analog_tv_tuner_dialog>

If set to B<true>, before capture starts, popup a display
dialog to the end user, allowing them to manually
modify TV channels and frequencies.


=item B<show_analog_tv_tuner_audio_dialog>

If set to B<true>, before capture starts, popup a display
dialog to the end user, allowing them to manually
modify TV audio (like mono vs. stereo, Language A,B or C).


=item B<audio_device_load>

Load an audio capture filter device from file instead of searching
it by name. It may load additional parameters too, if the filter
supports the serialization of its properties to.
To use this an audio capture source has to be specified, but it can
be anything even fake one.


=item B<audio_device_save>

Save the currently used audio capture filter device and its
parameters (if the filter supports it) to a file.
If a file with the same name exists it will be overwritten.


=item B<video_device_load>

Load a video capture filter device from file instead of searching
it by name. It may load additional parameters too, if the filter
supports the serialization of its properties to.
To use this a video capture source has to be specified, but it can
be anything even fake one.


=item B<video_device_save>

Save the currently used video capture filter device and its
parameters (if the filter supports it) to a file.
If a file with the same name exists it will be overwritten.


=item B<use_video_device_timestamps>

If set to B<false>, the timestamp for video frames will be
derived from the wallclock instead of the timestamp provided by
the capture device. This allows working around devices that
provide unreliable timestamps.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Print the list of DirectShow supported devices and exit:
	
	$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f dshow -i dummy



=item *

Open video device I<Camera>:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera"



=item *

Open second video device with name I<Camera>:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f dshow -video_device_number 1 -i video="Camera"



=item *

Open video device I<Camera> and audio device I<Microphone>:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera":audio="Microphone"



=item *

Print the list of supported options in selected device and exit:
	
	$ ffmpeg -list_options true -f dshow -i video="Camera"



=item *

Specify pin names to capture by name or alternative name, specify alternative device name:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f dshow -audio_pin_name "Audio Out" -video_pin_name 2 -i video=video="@device_pnp_\\?\pci#ven_1a0a&dev_6200&subsys_62021461&rev_01#4&e2c7dd6&0&00e1#{65e8773d-8f56-11d0-a3b9-00a0c9223196}\{ca465100-deb0-4d59-818f-8c477184adf6}":audio="Microphone"



=item *

Configure a crossbar device, specifying crossbar pins, allow user to adjust video capture properties at startup:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f dshow -show_video_device_dialog true -crossbar_video_input_pin_number 0
	     -crossbar_audio_input_pin_number 3 -i video="AVerMedia BDA Analog Capture":audio="AVerMedia BDA Analog Capture"



=back



=head2 fbdev


Linux framebuffer input device.

The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
F</dev/fb0>.

For more detailed information read the file
Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.

See also E<lt>B<http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/>E<gt>, and fbset(1).

To record from the framebuffer device F</dev/fb0> with
B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -f fbdev -framerate 10 -i /dev/fb0 out.avi


You can take a single screenshot image with the command:
	
	ffmpeg -f fbdev -framerate 1 -i /dev/fb0 -frames:v 1 screenshot.jpeg



=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<framerate>

Set the frame rate. Default is 25.


=back



=head2 gdigrab


Win32 GDI-based screen capture device.

This device allows you to capture a region of the display on Windows.

Amongst options for the imput filenames are such elements as:
	
	desktop

or
	
	title=<window_title>

or
	
	hwnd=<window_hwnd>


The first option will capture the entire desktop, or a fixed region of the
desktop. The second and third options will instead capture the contents of a single
window, regardless of its position on the screen.

For example, to grab the entire desktop using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i desktop out.mpg


Grab a 640x480 region at position C<10,20>:
	
	ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -video_size vga -i desktop out.mpg


Grab the contents of the window named "Calculator"
	
	ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i title=Calculator out.mpg



=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<draw_mouse>

Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. Use the value C<0> to
not draw the pointer. Default value is C<1>.


=item B<framerate>

Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is C<ntsc>,
corresponding to a frame rate of C<30000/1001>.


=item B<show_region>

Show grabbed region on screen.

If I<show_region> is specified with C<1>, then the grabbing
region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.

Note that I<show_region> is incompatible with grabbing the contents
of a single window.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -f gdigrab -show_region 1 -framerate 6 -video_size cif -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -i desktop out.mpg



=item B<video_size>

Set the video frame size. The default is to capture the full screen if F<desktop> is selected, or the full window size if F<title=I<window_title>> is selected.


=item B<offset_x>

When capturing a region with I<video_size>, set the distance from the left edge of the screen or desktop.

Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned to the left of your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative I<offset_x> value to move the region to that monitor.


=item B<offset_y>

When capturing a region with I<video_size>, set the distance from the top edge of the screen or desktop.

Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned above your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative I<offset_y> value to move the region to that monitor.


=back



=head2 iec61883


FireWire DV/HDV input device using libiec61883.

To enable this input device, you need libiec61883, libraw1394 and
libavc1394 installed on your system. Use the configure option
C<--enable-libiec61883> to compile with the device enabled.

The iec61883 capture device supports capturing from a video device
connected via IEEE1394 (FireWire), using libiec61883 and the new Linux
FireWire stack (juju). This is the default DV/HDV input method in Linux
Kernel 2.6.37 and later, since the old FireWire stack was removed.

Specify the FireWire port to be used as input file, or "auto"
to choose the first port connected.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<dvtype>

Override autodetection of DV/HDV. This should only be used if auto
detection does not work, or if usage of a different device type
should be prohibited. Treating a DV device as HDV (or vice versa) will
not work and result in undefined behavior.
The values B<auto>, B<dv> and B<hdv> are supported.


=item B<dvbuffer>

Set maximum size of buffer for incoming data, in frames. For DV, this
is an exact value. For HDV, it is not frame exact, since HDV does
not have a fixed frame size.


=item B<dvguid>

Select the capture device by specifying its GUID. Capturing will only
be performed from the specified device and fails if no device with the
given GUID is found. This is useful to select the input if multiple
devices are connected at the same time.
Look at /sys/bus/firewire/devices to find out the GUIDs.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Grab and show the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device.
	
	ffplay -f iec61883 -i auto



=item *

Grab and record the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device,
using a packet buffer of 100000 packets if the source is HDV.
	
	ffmpeg -f iec61883 -i auto -dvbuffer 100000 out.mpg



=back



=head2 jack


JACK input device.

To enable this input device during configuration you need libjack
installed on your system.

A JACK input device creates one or more JACK writable clients, one for
each audio channel, with name I<client_name>:input_I<N>, where
I<client_name> is the name provided by the application, and I<N>
is a number which identifies the channel.
Each writable client will send the acquired data to the FFmpeg input
device.

Once you have created one or more JACK readable clients, you need to
connect them to one or more JACK writable clients.

To connect or disconnect JACK clients you can use the B<jack_connect>
and B<jack_disconnect> programs, or do it through a graphical interface,
for example with B<qjackctl>.

To list the JACK clients and their properties you can invoke the command
B<jack_lsp>.

Follows an example which shows how to capture a JACK readable client
with B<ffmpeg>.
	
	# Create a JACK writable client with name "ffmpeg".
	$ ffmpeg -f jack -i ffmpeg -y out.wav
	
	# Start the sample jack_metro readable client.
	$ jack_metro -b 120 -d 0.2 -f 4000
	
	# List the current JACK clients.
	$ jack_lsp -c
	system:capture_1
	system:capture_2
	system:playback_1
	system:playback_2
	ffmpeg:input_1
	metro:120_bpm
	
	# Connect metro to the ffmpeg writable client.
	$ jack_connect metro:120_bpm ffmpeg:input_1


For more information read:
E<lt>B<http://jackaudio.org/>E<gt>


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<channels>

Set the number of channels. Default is 2.


=back



=head2 kmsgrab


KMS video input device.

Captures the KMS scanout framebuffer associated with a specified CRTC or plane as a
DRM object that can be passed to other hardware functions.

Requires either DRM master or CAP_SYS_ADMIN to run.

If you don't understand what all of that means, you probably don't want this.  Look at
B<x11grab> instead.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<device>

DRM device to capture on.  Defaults to B</dev/dri/card0>.


=item B<format>

Pixel format of the framebuffer.  This can be autodetected if you are running Linux 5.7
or later, but needs to be provided for earlier versions.  Defaults to B<bgr0>,
which is the most common format used by the Linux console and Xorg X server.


=item B<format_modifier>

Format modifier to signal on output frames.  This is necessary to import correctly into
some APIs.  It can be autodetected if you are running Linux 5.7 or later, but will need
to be provided explicitly when needed in earlier versions.  See the libdrm documentation
for possible values.


=item B<crtc_id>

KMS CRTC ID to define the capture source.  The first active plane on the given CRTC
will be used.


=item B<plane_id>

KMS plane ID to define the capture source.  Defaults to the first active plane found if
neither B<crtc_id> nor B<plane_id> are specified.


=item B<framerate>

Framerate to capture at.  This is not synchronised to any page flipping or framebuffer
changes - it just defines the interval at which the framebuffer is sampled.  Sampling
faster than the framebuffer update rate will generate independent frames with the same
content.  Defaults to C<30>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Capture from the first active plane, download the result to normal frames and encode.
This will only work if the framebuffer is both linear and mappable - if not, the result
may be scrambled or fail to download.
	
	ffmpeg -f kmsgrab -i - -vf 'hwdownload,format=bgr0' output.mp4



=item *

Capture from CRTC ID 42 at 60fps, map the result to VAAPI, convert to NV12 and encode as H.264.
	
	ffmpeg -crtc_id 42 -framerate 60 -f kmsgrab -i - -vf 'hwmap=derive_device=vaapi,scale_vaapi=w=1920:h=1080:format=nv12' -c:v h264_vaapi output.mp4



=item *

To capture only part of a plane the output can be cropped - this can be used to capture
a single window, as long as it has a known absolute position and size.  For example, to
capture and encode the middle quarter of a 1920x1080 plane:
	
	ffmpeg -f kmsgrab -i - -vf 'hwmap=derive_device=vaapi,crop=960:540:480:270,scale_vaapi=960:540:nv12' -c:v h264_vaapi output.mp4



=back



=head2 lavfi


Libavfilter input virtual device.

This input device reads data from the open output pads of a libavfilter
filtergraph.

For each filtergraph open output, the input device will create a
corresponding stream which is mapped to the generated output.
The filtergraph is specified through the option B<graph>.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<graph>

Specify the filtergraph to use as input. Each video open output must be
labelled by a unique string of the form "outI<N>", where I<N> is a
number starting from 0 corresponding to the mapped input stream
generated by the device.
The first unlabelled output is automatically assigned to the "out0"
label, but all the others need to be specified explicitly.

The suffix "+subcc" can be appended to the output label to create an extra
stream with the closed captions packets attached to that output
(experimental; only for EIA-608 / CEA-708 for now).
The subcc streams are created after all the normal streams, in the order of
the corresponding stream.
For example, if there is "out19+subcc", "out7+subcc" and up to "out42", the
stream #43 is subcc for stream #7 and stream #44 is subcc for stream #19.

If not specified defaults to the filename specified for the input
device.


=item B<graph_file>

Set the filename of the filtergraph to be read and sent to the other
filters. Syntax of the filtergraph is the same as the one specified by
the option I<graph>.


=item B<dumpgraph>

Dump graph to stderr.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Create a color video stream and play it back with B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi -graph "color=c=pink [out0]" dummy



=item *

As the previous example, but use filename for specifying the graph
description, and omit the "out0" label:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi color=c=pink



=item *

Create three different video test filtered sources and play them:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi -graph "testsrc [out0]; testsrc,hflip [out1]; testsrc,negate [out2]" test3



=item *

Read an audio stream from a file using the amovie source and play it
back with B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi "amovie=test.wav"



=item *

Read an audio stream and a video stream and play it back with
B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi "movie=test.avi[out0];amovie=test.wav[out1]"



=item *

Dump decoded frames to images and Closed Captions to an RCWT backup:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i "movie=test.ts[out0+subcc]" -map v frame%08d.png -map s -c copy -f rcwt subcc.bin



=back



=head2 libcdio


Audio-CD input device based on libcdio.

To enable this input device during configuration you need libcdio
installed on your system. It requires the configure option
C<--enable-libcdio>.

This device allows playing and grabbing from an Audio-CD.

For example to copy with B<ffmpeg> the entire Audio-CD in F</dev/sr0>,
you may run the command:
	
	ffmpeg -f libcdio -i /dev/sr0 cd.wav



=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<speed>

Set drive reading speed. Default value is 0.

The speed is specified CD-ROM speed units. The speed is set through
the libcdio C<cdio_cddap_speed_set> function. On many CD-ROM
drives, specifying a value too large will result in using the fastest
speed.


=item B<paranoia_mode>

Set paranoia recovery mode flags. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<disable>


=item B<verify>


=item B<overlap>


=item B<neverskip>


=item B<full>


=back


Default value is B<disable>.

For more information about the available recovery modes, consult the
paranoia project documentation.

=back



=head2 libdc1394


IIDC1394 input device, based on libdc1394 and libraw1394.

Requires the configure option C<--enable-libdc1394>.


=head3 Options


=over 4



=item B<framerate>

Set the frame rate. Default is C<ntsc>, corresponding to a frame
rate of C<30000/1001>.


=item B<pixel_format>

Select the pixel format. Default is C<uyvy422>.


=item B<video_size>

Set the video size given as a string such as C<640x480> or C<hd720>.
Default is C<qvga>.

=back



=head2 openal


The OpenAL input device provides audio capture on all systems with a
working OpenAL 1.1 implementation.

To enable this input device during configuration, you need OpenAL
headers and libraries installed on your system, and need to configure
FFmpeg with C<--enable-openal>.

OpenAL headers and libraries should be provided as part of your OpenAL
implementation, or as an additional download (an SDK). Depending on your
installation you may need to specify additional flags via the
C<--extra-cflags> and C<--extra-ldflags> for allowing the build
system to locate the OpenAL headers and libraries.

An incomplete list of OpenAL implementations follows:


=over 4


=item B<Creative>

The official Windows implementation, providing hardware acceleration
with supported devices and software fallback.
See E<lt>B<http://openal.org/>E<gt>.

=item B<OpenAL Soft>

Portable, open source (LGPL) software implementation. Includes
backends for the most common sound APIs on the Windows, Linux,
Solaris, and BSD operating systems.
See E<lt>B<http://kcat.strangesoft.net/openal.html>E<gt>.

=item B<Apple>

OpenAL is part of Core Audio, the official Mac OS X Audio interface.
See E<lt>B<http://developer.apple.com/technologies/mac/audio-and-video.html>E<gt>

=back


This device allows one to capture from an audio input device handled
through OpenAL.

You need to specify the name of the device to capture in the provided
filename. If the empty string is provided, the device will
automatically select the default device. You can get the list of the
supported devices by using the option I<list_devices>.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<channels>

Set the number of channels in the captured audio. Only the values
B<1> (monaural) and B<2> (stereo) are currently supported.
Defaults to B<2>.


=item B<sample_size>

Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio. Only the values
B<8> and B<16> are currently supported. Defaults to
B<16>.


=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
Defaults to B<44.1k>.


=item B<list_devices>

If set to B<true>, print a list of devices and exit.
Defaults to B<false>.


=back



=head3 Examples


Print the list of OpenAL supported devices and exit:
	
	$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f openal -i dummy out.ogg


Capture from the OpenAL device F<DR-BT101 via PulseAudio>:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out.ogg


Capture from the default device (note the empty string '' as filename):
	
	$ ffmpeg -f openal -i '' out.ogg


Capture from two devices simultaneously, writing to two different files,
within the same B<ffmpeg> command:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out1.ogg -f openal -i 'ALSA Default' out2.ogg

Note: not all OpenAL implementations support multiple simultaneous capture -
try the latest OpenAL Soft if the above does not work.


=head2 oss


Open Sound System input device.

The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
representing the OSS input device, and is usually set to
F</dev/dsp>.

For example to grab from F</dev/dsp> using B<ffmpeg> use the
command:
	
	ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp /tmp/oss.wav


For more information about OSS see:
E<lt>B<http://manuals.opensound.com/usersguide/dsp.html>E<gt>


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sample rate in Hz. Default is 48000.


=item B<channels>

Set the number of channels. Default is 2.


=back



=head2 pulse


PulseAudio input device.

To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libpulse>.

The filename to provide to the input device is a source device or the
string "default"

To list the PulseAudio source devices and their properties you can invoke
the command B<pactl list sources>.

More information about PulseAudio can be found on E<lt>B<http://www.pulseaudio.org>E<gt>.


=head3 Options


=over 4


=item B<server>

Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
Default server is used when not provided.


=item B<name>

Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
by default it is the C<LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT> string.


=item B<stream_name>

Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
by default it is "record".


=item B<sample_rate>

Specify the samplerate in Hz, by default 48kHz is used.


=item B<channels>

Specify the channels in use, by default 2 (stereo) is set.


=item B<frame_size>

This option does nothing and is deprecated.


=item B<fragment_size>

Specify the size in bytes of the minimal buffering fragment in PulseAudio, it
will affect the audio latency. By default it is set to 50 ms amount of data.


=item B<wallclock>

Set the initial PTS using the current time. Default is 1.


=back



=head3 Examples

Record a stream from default device:
	
	ffmpeg -f pulse -i default /tmp/pulse.wav



=head2 sndio


sndio input device.

To enable this input device during configuration you need libsndio
installed on your system.

The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
representing the sndio input device, and is usually set to
F</dev/audio0>.

For example to grab from F</dev/audio0> using B<ffmpeg> use the
command:
	
	ffmpeg -f sndio -i /dev/audio0 /tmp/oss.wav



=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<sample_rate>

Set the sample rate in Hz. Default is 48000.


=item B<channels>

Set the number of channels. Default is 2.


=back



=head2 video4linux2, v4l2


Video4Linux2 input video device.

"v4l2" can be used as alias for "video4linux2".

If FFmpeg is built with v4l-utils support (by using the
C<--enable-libv4l2> configure option), it is possible to use it with the
C<-use_libv4l2> input device option.

The name of the device to grab is a file device node, usually Linux
systems tend to automatically create such nodes when the device
(e.g. an USB webcam) is plugged into the system, and has a name of the
kind F</dev/videoI<N>>, where I<N> is a number associated to
the device.

Video4Linux2 devices usually support a limited set of
I<width>xI<height> sizes and frame rates. You can check which are
supported using B<-list_formats all> for Video4Linux2 devices.
Some devices, like TV cards, support one or more standards. It is possible
to list all the supported standards using B<-list_standards all>.

The time base for the timestamps is 1 microsecond. Depending on the kernel
version and configuration, the timestamps may be derived from the real time
clock (origin at the Unix Epoch) or the monotonic clock (origin usually at
boot time, unaffected by NTP or manual changes to the clock). The
B<-timestamps abs> or B<-ts abs> option can be used to force
conversion into the real time clock.

Some usage examples of the video4linux2 device with B<ffmpeg>
and B<ffplay>:

=over 4


=item *

List supported formats for a video4linux2 device:
	
	ffplay -f video4linux2 -list_formats all /dev/video0



=item *

Grab and show the input of a video4linux2 device:
	
	ffplay -f video4linux2 -framerate 30 -video_size hd720 /dev/video0



=item *

Grab and record the input of a video4linux2 device, leave the
frame rate and size as previously set:
	
	ffmpeg -f video4linux2 -input_format mjpeg -i /dev/video0 out.mpeg


=back


For more information about Video4Linux, check E<lt>B<http://linuxtv.org/>E<gt>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<standard>

Set the standard. Must be the name of a supported standard. To get a
list of the supported standards, use the B<list_standards>
option.


=item B<channel>

Set the input channel number. Default to -1, which means using the
previously selected channel.


=item B<video_size>

Set the video frame size. The argument must be a string in the form
I<WIDTH>xI<HEIGHT> or a valid size abbreviation.


=item B<pixel_format>

Select the pixel format (only valid for raw video input).


=item B<input_format>

Set the preferred pixel format (for raw video) or a codec name.
This option allows one to select the input format, when several are
available.


=item B<framerate>

Set the preferred video frame rate.


=item B<list_formats>

List available formats (supported pixel formats, codecs, and frame
sizes) and exit.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<all>

Show all available (compressed and non-compressed) formats.


=item B<raw>

Show only raw video (non-compressed) formats.


=item B<compressed>

Show only compressed formats.

=back



=item B<list_standards>

List supported standards and exit.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<all>

Show all supported standards.

=back



=item B<timestamps, ts>

Set type of timestamps for grabbed frames.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<default>

Use timestamps from the kernel.


=item B<abs>

Use absolute timestamps (wall clock).


=item B<mono2abs>

Force conversion from monotonic to absolute timestamps.

=back


Default value is C<default>.


=item B<use_libv4l2>

Use libv4l2 (v4l-utils) conversion functions. Default is 0.


=back



=head2 vfwcap


VfW (Video for Windows) capture input device.

The filename passed as input is the capture driver number, ranging from
0 to 9. You may use "list" as filename to print a list of drivers. Any
other filename will be interpreted as device number 0.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<video_size>

Set the video frame size.


=item B<framerate>

Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is C<ntsc>,
corresponding to a frame rate of C<30000/1001>.


=back



=head2 x11grab


X11 video input device.

To enable this input device during configuration you need libxcb
installed on your system. It will be automatically detected during
configuration.

This device allows one to capture a region of an X11 display.

The filename passed as input has the syntax:
	
	[<hostname>]:<display_number>.<screen_number>[+<x_offset>,<y_offset>]


I<hostname>:I<display_number>.I<screen_number> specifies the
X11 display name of the screen to grab from. I<hostname> can be
omitted, and defaults to "localhost". The environment variable
B<DISPLAY> contains the default display name.

I<x_offset> and I<y_offset> specify the offsets of the grabbed
area with respect to the top-left border of the X11 screen. They
default to 0.

Check the X11 documentation (e.g. B<man X>) for more detailed
information.

Use the B<xdpyinfo> program for getting basic information about
the properties of your X11 display (e.g. grep for "name" or
"dimensions").

For example to grab from F<:0.0> using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg


Grab at position C<10,20>:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg



=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<select_region>

Specify whether to select the grabbing area graphically using the pointer.
A value of C<1> prompts the user to select the grabbing area graphically
by clicking and dragging. A single click with no dragging will select the
whole screen. A region with zero width or height will also select the whole
screen. This option overwrites the I<video_size>, I<grab_x>, and
I<grab_y> options. Default value is C<0>.


=item B<draw_mouse>

Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. A value of C<0> specifies
not to draw the pointer. Default value is C<1>.


=item B<follow_mouse>

Make the grabbed area follow the mouse. The argument can be
C<centered> or a number of pixels I<PIXELS>.

When it is specified with "centered", the grabbing region follows the mouse
pointer and keeps the pointer at the center of region; otherwise, the region
follows only when the mouse pointer reaches within I<PIXELS> (greater than
zero) to the edge of region.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg


To follow only when the mouse pointer reaches within 100 pixels to edge:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse 100 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg



=item B<framerate>

Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is C<ntsc>,
corresponding to a frame rate of C<30000/1001>.


=item B<show_region>

Show grabbed region on screen.

If I<show_region> is specified with C<1>, then the grabbing
region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.


=item B<region_border>

Set the region border thickness if B<-show_region 1> is used.
Range is 1 to 128 and default is 3 (XCB-based x11grab only).

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg


With I<follow_mouse>:
	
	ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg



=item B<window_id>

Grab this window, instead of the whole screen. Default value is 0, which maps to
the whole screen (root window).

The id of a window can be found using the B<xwininfo> program, possibly with options -tree and
-root.

If the window is later enlarged, the new area is not recorded. Video ends when
the window is closed, unmapped (i.e., iconified) or shrunk beyond the video
size (which defaults to the initial window size).

This option disables options B<follow_mouse> and B<select_region>.


=item B<video_size>

Set the video frame size. Default is the full desktop or window.


=item B<grab_x>


=item B<grab_y>

Set the grabbing region coordinates. They are expressed as offset from
the top left corner of the X11 window and correspond to the
I<x_offset> and I<y_offset> parameters in the device name. The
default value for both options is 0.

=back



=head1 OUTPUT DEVICES


Output devices are configured elements in FFmpeg that can write
multimedia data to an output device attached to your system.

When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported output devices
are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
configure option "--list-outdevs".

You can disable all the output devices using the configure option
"--disable-outdevs", and selectively enable an output device using the
option "--enable-outdev=I<OUTDEV>", or you can disable a particular
input device using the option "--disable-outdev=I<OUTDEV>".

The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
enabled output devices.

A description of the currently available output devices follows.


=head2 alsa


ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) output device.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Play a file on default ALSA device:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f alsa default



=item *

Play a file on soundcard 1, audio device 7:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f alsa hw:1,7


=back



=head2 AudioToolbox


AudioToolbox output device.

Allows native output to CoreAudio devices on OSX.

The output filename can be empty (or C<->) to refer to the default system output device or a number that refers to the device index as shown using: C<-list_devices true>.

Alternatively, the audio input device can be chosen by index using the

    B<-audio_device_index E<lt>INDEXE<gt>>

, overriding any device name or index given in the input filename.

All available devices can be enumerated by using B<-list_devices true>, listing
all device names, UIDs and corresponding indices.


=head3 Options


AudioToolbox supports the following options:


=over 4



=item B<-audio_device_index E<lt>INDEXE<gt>>

Specify the audio device by its index. Overrides anything given in the output filename.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Print the list of supported devices and output a sine wave to the default device:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f lavfi -i sine=r=44100 -f audiotoolbox -list_devices true -



=item *

Output a sine wave to the device with the index 2, overriding any output filename:
	
	$ ffmpeg -f lavfi -i sine=r=44100 -f audiotoolbox -audio_device_index 2 -



=back



=head2 caca


CACA output device.

This output device allows one to show a video stream in CACA window.
Only one CACA window is allowed per application, so you can
have only one instance of this output device in an application.

To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libcaca>.
libcaca is a graphics library that outputs text instead of pixels.

For more information about libcaca, check:
E<lt>B<http://caca.zoy.org/wiki/libcaca>E<gt>


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<window_title>

Set the CACA window title, if not specified default to the filename
specified for the output device.


=item B<window_size>

Set the CACA window size, can be a string of the form
I<width>xI<height> or a video size abbreviation.
If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video.


=item B<driver>

Set display driver.


=item B<algorithm>

Set dithering algorithm. Dithering is necessary
because the picture being rendered has usually far more colours than
the available palette.
The accepted values are listed with C<-list_dither algorithms>.


=item B<antialias>

Set antialias method. Antialiasing smoothens the rendered
image and avoids the commonly seen staircase effect.
The accepted values are listed with C<-list_dither antialiases>.


=item B<charset>

Set which characters are going to be used when rendering text.
The accepted values are listed with C<-list_dither charsets>.


=item B<color>

Set color to be used when rendering text.
The accepted values are listed with C<-list_dither colors>.


=item B<list_drivers>

If set to B<true>, print a list of available drivers and exit.


=item B<list_dither>

List available dither options related to the argument.
The argument must be one of C<algorithms>, C<antialiases>,
C<charsets>, C<colors>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

The following command shows the B<ffmpeg> output is an
CACA window, forcing its size to 80x25:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v rawvideo -pix_fmt rgb24 -window_size 80x25 -f caca -



=item *

Show the list of available drivers and exit:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -pix_fmt rgb24 -f caca -list_drivers true -



=item *

Show the list of available dither colors and exit:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -pix_fmt rgb24 -f caca -list_dither colors -


=back



=head2 decklink


The decklink output device provides playback capabilities for Blackmagic
DeckLink devices.

To enable this output device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
need to configure with the appropriate C<--extra-cflags>
and C<--extra-ldflags>.
On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through B<widl>.

DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
uyvy422, framerate, field order and video size must be determined for your
device with B<-list_formats 1>. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz.


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<list_devices>

If set to B<true>, print a list of devices and exit.
Defaults to B<false>. This option is deprecated, please use the
C<-sinks> option of ffmpeg to list the available output devices.


=item B<list_formats>

If set to B<true>, print a list of supported formats and exit.
Defaults to B<false>.


=item B<preroll>

Amount of time to preroll video in seconds.
Defaults to B<0.5>.


=item B<duplex_mode>

Sets the decklink device duplex/profile mode. Must be B<unset>, B<half>, B<full>,
B<one_sub_device_full>, B<one_sub_device_half>, B<two_sub_device_full>,
B<four_sub_device_half>
Defaults to B<unset>.

Note: DeckLink SDK 11.0 have replaced the duplex property by a profile property.
For the DeckLink Duo 2 and DeckLink Quad 2, a profile is shared between any 2
sub-devices that utilize the same connectors. For the DeckLink 8K Pro, a profile
is shared between all 4 sub-devices. So DeckLink 8K Pro support four profiles.

Valid profile modes for DeckLink 8K Pro(with DeckLink SDK E<gt>= 11.0):
B<one_sub_device_full>, B<one_sub_device_half>, B<two_sub_device_full>,
B<four_sub_device_half>

Valid profile modes for DeckLink Quad 2 and DeckLink Duo 2:
B<half>, B<full>


=item B<timing_offset>

Sets the genlock timing pixel offset on the used output.
Defaults to B<unset>.


=item B<link>

Sets the SDI video link configuration on the used output. Must be
B<unset>, B<single> link SDI, B<dual> link SDI or B<quad> link
SDI.
Defaults to B<unset>.


=item B<sqd>

Enable Square Division Quad Split mode for Quad-link SDI output.
Must be B<unset>, B<true> or B<false>.
Defaults to B<unset>.


=item B<level_a>

Enable SMPTE Level A mode on the used output.
Must be B<unset>, B<true> or B<false>.
Defaults to B<unset>.


=item B<vanc_queue_size>

Sets maximum output buffer size in bytes for VANC data. If the buffering reaches this value,
outgoing VANC data will be dropped.
Defaults to B<1048576>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

List output devices:
	
	ffmpeg -sinks decklink



=item *

List supported formats:
	
	ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -list_formats 1 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'



=item *

Play video clip:
	
	ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -pix_fmt uyvy422 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'



=item *

Play video clip with non-standard framerate or video size:
	
	ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -pix_fmt uyvy422 -s 720x486 -r 24000/1001 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'



=back



=head2 fbdev


Linux framebuffer output device.

The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
F</dev/fb0>.

For more detailed information read the file
F<Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt> included in the Linux source tree.


=head3 Options


=over 4



=item B<xoffset>


=item B<yoffset>

Set x/y coordinate of top left corner. Default is 0.

=back



=head3 Examples

Play a file on framebuffer device F</dev/fb0>.
Required pixel format depends on current framebuffer settings.
	
	ffmpeg -re -i INPUT -c:v rawvideo -pix_fmt bgra -f fbdev /dev/fb0


See also E<lt>B<http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/>E<gt>, and fbset(1).


=head2 opengl

OpenGL output device. Deprecated and will be removed.

To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-opengl>.

This output device allows one to render to OpenGL context.
Context may be provided by application or default SDL window is created.

When device renders to external context, application must implement handlers for following messages:
C<AV_DEV_TO_APP_CREATE_WINDOW_BUFFER> - create OpenGL context on current thread.
C<AV_DEV_TO_APP_PREPARE_WINDOW_BUFFER> - make OpenGL context current.
C<AV_DEV_TO_APP_DISPLAY_WINDOW_BUFFER> - swap buffers.
C<AV_DEV_TO_APP_DESTROY_WINDOW_BUFFER> - destroy OpenGL context.
Application is also required to inform a device about current resolution by sending C<AV_APP_TO_DEV_WINDOW_SIZE> message.


=head3 Options


=over 4



=item B<background>

Set background color. Black is a default.

=item B<no_window>

Disables default SDL window when set to non-zero value.
Application must provide OpenGL context and both C<window_size_cb> and C<window_swap_buffers_cb> callbacks when set.

=item B<window_title>

Set the SDL window title, if not specified default to the filename specified for the output device.
Ignored when B<no_window> is set.

=item B<window_size>

Set preferred window size, can be a string of the form widthxheight or a video size abbreviation.
If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video, downscaled according to the aspect ratio.
Mostly usable when B<no_window> is not set.


=back



=head3 Examples

Play a file on SDL window using OpenGL rendering:
	
	ffmpeg  -i INPUT -f opengl "window title"



=head2 oss


OSS (Open Sound System) output device.


=head2 pulse


PulseAudio output device.

To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libpulse>.

More information about PulseAudio can be found on E<lt>B<http://www.pulseaudio.org>E<gt>


=head3 Options


=over 4



=item B<server>

Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
Default server is used when not provided.


=item B<name>

Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
by default it is the C<LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT> string.


=item B<stream_name>

Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
by default it is set to the specified output name.


=item B<device>

Specify the device to use. Default device is used when not provided.
List of output devices can be obtained with command B<pactl list sinks>.


=item B<buffer_size>


=item B<buffer_duration>

Control the size and duration of the PulseAudio buffer. A small buffer
gives more control, but requires more frequent updates.

B<buffer_size> specifies size in bytes while
B<buffer_duration> specifies duration in milliseconds.

When both options are provided then the highest value is used
(duration is recalculated to bytes using stream parameters). If they
are set to 0 (which is default), the device will use the default
PulseAudio duration value. By default PulseAudio set buffer duration
to around 2 seconds.


=item B<prebuf>

Specify pre-buffering size in bytes. The server does not start with
playback before at least B<prebuf> bytes are available in the
buffer. By default this option is initialized to the same value as
B<buffer_size> or B<buffer_duration> (whichever is bigger).


=item B<minreq>

Specify minimum request size in bytes. The server does not request less
than B<minreq> bytes from the client, instead waits until the buffer
is free enough to request more bytes at once. It is recommended to not set
this option, which will initialize this to a value that is deemed sensible
by the server.


=back



=head3 Examples

Play a file on default device on default server:
	
	ffmpeg  -i INPUT -f pulse "stream name"



=head2 sdl


SDL (Simple DirectMedia Layer) output device. Deprecated and will be removed.

For monitoring purposes in FFmpeg, pipes and a video player such as ffplay can be used:

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f nut -c:v rawvideo - | ffplay -


"sdl2" can be used as alias for "sdl".

This output device allows one to show a video stream in an SDL
window. Only one SDL window is allowed per application, so you can
have only one instance of this output device in an application.

To enable this output device you need libsdl installed on your system
when configuring your build.

For more information about SDL, check:
E<lt>B<http://www.libsdl.org/>E<gt>


=head3 Options



=over 4



=item B<window_borderless>

Set SDL window border off.
Default value is 0 (enable window border).


=item B<window_enable_quit>

Enable quit action (using window button or keyboard key)
when non-zero value is provided.
Default value is 1 (enable quit action).


=item B<window_fullscreen>

Set fullscreen mode when non-zero value is provided.
Default value is zero.


=item B<window_size>

Set the SDL window size, can be a string of the form
I<width>xI<height> or a video size abbreviation.
If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video,
downscaled according to the aspect ratio.


=item B<window_title>

Set the SDL window title, if not specified default to the filename
specified for the output device.


=item B<window_x>


=item B<window_y>

Set the position of the window on the screen.

=back



=head3 Interactive commands


The window created by the device can be controlled through the
following interactive commands.


=over 4


=item B<q, ESC>

Quit the device immediately.

=back



=head3 Examples


The following command shows the B<ffmpeg> output is an
SDL window, forcing its size to the qcif format:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v rawvideo -pix_fmt yuv420p -window_size qcif -f sdl "SDL output"



=head2 sndio


sndio audio output device.


=head2 v4l2


Video4Linux2 output device.


=head2 xv


XV (XVideo) output device.

This output device allows one to show a video stream in a X Window System
window.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<display_name>

Specify the hardware display name, which determines the display and
communications domain to be used.

The display name or DISPLAY environment variable can be a string in
the format I<hostname>[:I<number>[.I<screen_number>]].

I<hostname> specifies the name of the host machine on which the
display is physically attached. I<number> specifies the number of
the display server on that host machine. I<screen_number> specifies
the screen to be used on that server.

If unspecified, it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment
variable.

For example, C<dual-headed:0.1> would specify screen 1 of display
0 on the machine named ``dual-headed''.

Check the X11 specification for more detailed information about the
display name format.


=item B<window_id>

When set to non-zero value then device doesn't create new window,
but uses existing one with provided I<window_id>. By default
this options is set to zero and device creates its own window.


=item B<window_size>

Set the created window size, can be a string of the form
I<width>xI<height> or a video size abbreviation. If not
specified it defaults to the size of the input video.
Ignored when I<window_id> is set.


=item B<window_x>


=item B<window_y>

Set the X and Y window offsets for the created window. They are both
set to 0 by default. The values may be ignored by the window manager.
Ignored when I<window_id> is set.


=item B<window_title>

Set the window title, if not specified default to the filename
specified for the output device. Ignored when I<window_id> is set.

=back


For more information about XVideo see E<lt>B<http://www.x.org/>E<gt>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Decode, display and encode video input with B<ffmpeg> at the
same time:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT OUTPUT -f xv display



=item *

Decode and display the input video to multiple X11 windows:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f xv normal -vf negate -f xv negated


=back



=head1 RESAMPLER OPTIONS


The audio resampler supports the following named options.

Options may be set by specifying -I<option> I<value> in the
FFmpeg tools, I<option>=I<value> for the aresample filter,
by setting the value explicitly in the
C<SwrContext> options or using the F<libavutil/opt.h> API for
programmatic use.


=over 4



=item B<uchl, used_chlayout>

Set used input channel layout. Default is unset. This option is
only used for special remapping.


=item B<isr, in_sample_rate>

Set the input sample rate. Default value is 0.


=item B<osr, out_sample_rate>

Set the output sample rate. Default value is 0.


=item B<isf, in_sample_fmt>

Specify the input sample format. It is set by default to C<none>.


=item B<osf, out_sample_fmt>

Specify the output sample format. It is set by default to C<none>.


=item B<tsf, internal_sample_fmt>

Set the internal sample format. Default value is C<none>.
This will automatically be chosen when it is not explicitly set.


=item B<ichl, in_chlayout>


=item B<ochl, out_chlayout>

Set the input/output channel layout.

See B<the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the required syntax.


=item B<clev, center_mix_level>

Set the center mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must be
in the interval [-32,32].


=item B<slev, surround_mix_level>

Set the surround mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
be in the interval [-32,32].


=item B<lfe_mix_level>

Set LFE mix into non LFE level. It is used when there is a LFE input but no
LFE output. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
be in the interval [-32,32].


=item B<rmvol, rematrix_volume>

Set rematrix volume. Default value is 1.0.


=item B<rematrix_maxval>

Set maximum output value for rematrixing.
This can be used to prevent clipping vs. preventing volume reduction.
A value of 1.0 prevents clipping.


=item B<flags, swr_flags>

Set flags used by the converter. Default value is 0.

It supports the following individual flags:

=over 4


=item B<res>

force resampling, this flag forces resampling to be used even when the
input and output sample rates match.

=back



=item B<dither_scale>

Set the dither scale. Default value is 1.


=item B<dither_method>

Set dither method. Default value is 0.

Supported values:

=over 4


=item B<rectangular>

select rectangular dither

=item B<triangular>

select triangular dither

=item B<triangular_hp>

select triangular dither with high pass

=item B<lipshitz>

select Lipshitz noise shaping dither.

=item B<shibata>

select Shibata noise shaping dither.

=item B<low_shibata>

select low Shibata noise shaping dither.

=item B<high_shibata>

select high Shibata noise shaping dither.

=item B<f_weighted>

select f-weighted noise shaping dither

=item B<modified_e_weighted>

select modified-e-weighted noise shaping dither

=item B<improved_e_weighted>

select improved-e-weighted noise shaping dither


=back



=item B<resampler>

Set resampling engine. Default value is swr.

Supported values:

=over 4


=item B<swr>

select the native SW Resampler; filter options precision and cheby are not
applicable in this case.

=item B<soxr>

select the SoX Resampler (where available); compensation, and filter options
filter_size, phase_shift, exact_rational, filter_type & kaiser_beta, are not
applicable in this case.

=back



=item B<filter_size>

For swr only, set resampling filter size, default value is 32.


=item B<phase_shift>

For swr only, set resampling phase shift, default value is 10, and must be in
the interval [0,30].


=item B<linear_interp>

Use linear interpolation when enabled (the default). Disable it if you want
to preserve speed instead of quality when exact_rational fails.


=item B<exact_rational>

For swr only, when enabled, try to use exact phase_count based on input and
output sample rate. However, if it is larger than C<1 E<lt>E<lt> phase_shift>,
the phase_count will be C<1 E<lt>E<lt> phase_shift> as fallback. Default is enabled.


=item B<cutoff>

Set cutoff frequency (swr: 6dB point; soxr: 0dB point) ratio; must be a float
value between 0 and 1.  Default value is 0.97 with swr, and 0.91 with soxr
(which, with a sample-rate of 44100, preserves the entire audio band to 20kHz).


=item B<precision>

For soxr only, the precision in bits to which the resampled signal will be
calculated.  The default value of 20 (which, with suitable dithering, is
appropriate for a destination bit-depth of 16) gives SoX's 'High Quality'; a
value of 28 gives SoX's 'Very High Quality'.


=item B<cheby>

For soxr only, selects passband rolloff none (Chebyshev) & higher-precision
approximation for 'irrational' ratios. Default value is 0.


=item B<async>

For swr only, simple 1 parameter audio sync to timestamps using stretching,
squeezing, filling and trimming. Setting this to 1 will enable filling and
trimming, larger values represent the maximum amount in samples that the data
may be stretched or squeezed for each second.
Default value is 0, thus no compensation is applied to make the samples match
the audio timestamps.


=item B<first_pts>

For swr only, assume the first pts should be this value. The time unit is 1 / sample rate.
This allows for padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no
assumption is made about the first frame's expected pts, so no padding or
trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
with a negative pts due to encoder delay.


=item B<min_comp>

For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
seconds) to trigger stretching/squeezing/filling or trimming of the
data to make it match the timestamps. The default is that
stretching/squeezing/filling and trimming is disabled
(B<min_comp> = C<FLT_MAX>).


=item B<min_hard_comp>

For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
seconds) to trigger adding/dropping samples to make it match the
timestamps.  This option effectively is a threshold to select between
hard (trim/fill) and soft (squeeze/stretch) compensation. Note that
all compensation is by default disabled through B<min_comp>.
The default is 0.1.


=item B<comp_duration>

For swr only, set duration (in seconds) over which data is stretched/squeezed
to make it match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value,
default value is 1.0.


=item B<max_soft_comp>

For swr only, set maximum factor by which data is stretched/squeezed to make it
match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value, default value
is 0.


=item B<matrix_encoding>

Select matrixed stereo encoding.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

select none

=item B<dolby>

select Dolby

=item B<dplii>

select Dolby Pro Logic II

=back


Default value is C<none>.


=item B<filter_type>

For swr only, select resampling filter type. This only affects resampling
operations.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<cubic>

select cubic

=item B<blackman_nuttall>

select Blackman Nuttall windowed sinc

=item B<kaiser>

select Kaiser windowed sinc

=back



=item B<kaiser_beta>

For swr only, set Kaiser window beta value. Must be a double float value in the
interval [2,16], default value is 9.


=item B<output_sample_bits>

For swr only, set number of used output sample bits for dithering. Must be an integer in the
interval [0,64], default value is 0, which means it's not used.


=back




=head1 SCALER OPTIONS


The video scaler supports the following named options.

Options may be set by specifying -I<option> I<value> in the
FFmpeg tools, with a few API-only exceptions noted below.
For programmatic use, they can be set explicitly in the
C<SwsContext> options or through the F<libavutil/opt.h> API.


=over 4




=item B<sws_flags>

Set the scaler flags. This is also used to set the scaling
algorithm. Only a single algorithm should be selected. Default
value is B<bicubic>.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<fast_bilinear>

Select fast bilinear scaling algorithm.


=item B<bilinear>

Select bilinear scaling algorithm.


=item B<bicubic>

Select bicubic scaling algorithm.


=item B<experimental>

Select experimental scaling algorithm.


=item B<neighbor>

Select nearest neighbor rescaling algorithm.


=item B<area>

Select averaging area rescaling algorithm.


=item B<bicublin>

Select bicubic scaling algorithm for the luma component, bilinear for
chroma components.


=item B<gauss>

Select Gaussian rescaling algorithm.


=item B<sinc>

Select sinc rescaling algorithm.


=item B<lanczos>

Select Lanczos rescaling algorithm. The default width (alpha) is 3 and can be
changed by setting C<param0>.


=item B<spline>

Select natural bicubic spline rescaling algorithm.


=item B<print_info>

Enable printing/debug logging.


=item B<accurate_rnd>

Enable accurate rounding.


=item B<full_chroma_int>

Enable full chroma interpolation.


=item B<full_chroma_inp>

Select full chroma input.


=item B<bitexact>

Enable bitexact output.

=back



=item B<srcw> I<(API only)>

Set source width.


=item B<srch> I<(API only)>

Set source height.


=item B<dstw> I<(API only)>

Set destination width.


=item B<dsth> I<(API only)>

Set destination height.


=item B<src_format> I<(API only)>

Set source pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).


=item B<dst_format> I<(API only)>

Set destination pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).


=item B<src_range> I<(boolean)>

If value is set to C<1>, indicates source is full range. Default value is
C<0>, which indicates source is limited range.


=item B<dst_range> I<(boolean)>

If value is set to C<1>, enable full range for destination. Default value
is C<0>, which enables limited range.



=item B<param0, param1>

Set scaling algorithm parameters. The specified values are specific of
some scaling algorithms and ignored by others. The specified values
are floating point number values.


=item B<sws_dither>

Set the dithering algorithm. Accepts one of the following
values. Default value is B<auto>.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

automatic choice


=item B<none>

no dithering


=item B<bayer>

bayer dither


=item B<ed>

error diffusion dither


=item B<a_dither>

arithmetic dither, based using addition


=item B<x_dither>

arithmetic dither, based using xor (more random/less apparent patterning that
a_dither).


=back



=item B<alphablend>

Set the alpha blending to use when the input has alpha but the output does not.
Default value is B<none>.


=over 4


=item B<uniform_color>

Blend onto a uniform background color


=item B<checkerboard>

Blend onto a checkerboard


=item B<none>

No blending


=back



=back



=head1 FILTERING INTRODUCTION


Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.

In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
outputs.
To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
following filtergraph.

	
	                [main]
	input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
	            |                             ^
	            |[tmp]                  [flip]|
	            +-----> crop --> vflip -------+


This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
following command to achieve this:

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT


The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
onto the bottom half of the output video.

Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
I<crop,vflip> are in one linear chain, I<split> and
I<overlay> are separately in another. The points where the linear
chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
the labels I<[main]> and I<[tmp]>.

The stream sent to the second output of I<split>, labelled as
I<[tmp]>, is processed through the I<crop> filter, which crops
away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
I<overlay> filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
split filter (which was labelled as I<[main]>), and overlay on its
lower half the output generated by the I<crop,vflip> filterchain.

Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
by a colon.

There exist so-called I<source filters> that do not have an
audio/video input, and I<sink filters> that will not have audio/video
output.



=head1 GRAPH


The F<graph2dot> program included in the FFmpeg F<tools>
directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
corresponding textual representation in the dot language.

Invoke the command:
	
	graph2dot -h


to see how to use F<graph2dot>.

You can then pass the dot description to the F<dot> program (from
the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
of the filtergraph.

For example the sequence of commands:
	
	echo <GRAPH_DESCRIPTION> | \
	tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
	dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
	display graph.png


can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
described by the I<GRAPH_DESCRIPTION> string. Note that this string must be
a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
For example if your command line is of the form:
	
	ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile

your I<GRAPH_DESCRIPTION> string will need to be of the form:
	
	nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink

you may also need to set the I<nullsrc> parameters and add a I<format>
filter in order to simulate a specific input file.



=head1 FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION


A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.

Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
registered in the application, which defines the features and the
number of input and output pads of the filter.

A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
output pads is called a "sink".



=head2 Filtergraph syntax


A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is recognized by the
B<-filter>/B<-vf>/B<-af> and
B<-filter_complex> options in B<ffmpeg> and
B<-vf>/B<-af> in B<ffplay>, and by the
C<avfilter_graph_parse_ptr()> function defined in
F<libavfilter/avfilter.h>.

A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.

A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
descriptions.

A filter is represented by a string of the form:
[I<in_link_1>]...[I<in_link_N>]I<filter_name>@I<id>=I<arguments>[I<out_link_1>]...[I<out_link_M>]

I<filter_name> is the name of the filter class of which the
described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
the filter classes registered in the program optionally followed by "@I<id>".
The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
"=I<arguments>".

I<arguments> is a string which contains the parameters used to
initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:

=over 4



=item *

A ':'-separated list of I<key=value> pairs.


=item *

A ':'-separated list of I<value>. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the C<fade> filter
declares three options in this order -- B<type>, B<start_frame> and
B<nb_frames>. Then the parameter list I<in:0:30> means that the value
I<in> is assigned to the option B<type>, I<0> to
B<start_frame> and I<30> to B<nb_frames>.


=item *

A ':'-separated list of mixed direct I<value> and long I<key=value>
pairs. The direct I<value> must precede the I<key=value> pairs, and
follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
I<key=value> pairs can be set in any preferred order.


=back


If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the C<format> filter
takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
B<|>.

The list of arguments can be quoted using the character B<'> as initial
and ending mark, and the character B<\> for escaping the characters
within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
B<[]=;,>) is encountered.

A special syntax implemented in the B<ffmpeg> CLI tool allows loading
option values from files. This is done be prepending a slash '/' to the option
name, then the supplied value is interpreted as a path from which the actual
value is loaded. E.g.
	
	ffmpeg -i <INPUT> -vf drawtext=/text=/tmp/some_text <OUTPUT>

will load the text to be drawn from F</tmp/some_text>. API users wishing to
implement a similar feature should use the C<avfilter_graph_segment_*()>
functions together with custom IO code.

The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
followed by a list of link labels.
A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
or input pad. The preceding labels I<in_link_1>
... I<in_link_N>, are associated to the filter input pads,
the following labels I<out_link_1> ... I<out_link_M>, are
associated to the output pads.

When two link labels with the same name are found in the
filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
created.

If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
For example in the filterchain
	
	nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink

the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
"L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
which are both unlabelled.

In a filter description, if the input label of the first filter is not
specified, "in" is assumed; if the output label of the last filter is not
specified, "out" is assumed.

In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.

Leading and trailing whitespaces (space, tabs, or line feeds) separating tokens
in the filtergraph specification are ignored. This means that the filtergraph
can be expressed using empty lines and spaces to improve redability.

For example, the filtergraph:
	
	testsrc,split[L1],hflip[L2];[L1][L2] hstack


can be represented as:
	
	testsrc,
	split [L1], hflip [L2];
	
	[L1][L2] hstack


Libavfilter will automatically insert B<scale> filters where format
conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
C<sws_flags=I<flags>;>
to the filtergraph description.

Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
	
	<NAME>             ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
	<FILTER_NAME>      ::= <NAME>["@"<NAME>]
	<LINKLABEL>        ::= "[" <NAME> "]"
	<LINKLABELS>       ::= <LINKLABEL> [<LINKLABELS>]
	<FILTER_ARGUMENTS> ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
	<FILTER>           ::= [<LINKLABELS>] <FILTER_NAME> ["=" <FILTER_ARGUMENTS>] [<LINKLABELS>]
	<FILTERCHAIN>      ::= <FILTER> [,<FILTERCHAIN>]
	<FILTERGRAPH>      ::= [sws_flags=<flags>;] <FILTERCHAIN> [;<FILTERGRAPH>]




=head2 Notes on filtergraph escaping


Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
escaping. See B<the "Quoting and escaping"
section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual> for more
information about the employed escaping procedure.

A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
value, which may contain the special character C<:> used to
separate values, or one of the escaping characters C<\'>.

A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
may contain the escaping characters C<\'> or the special
characters C<[],;> used by the filtergraph description.

Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
characters contained within it.

For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
the B<drawtext> filter description B<text> value:
	
	this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters


This string contains the C<'> special escaping character, and the
C<:> special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
	
	text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters


A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
	
	drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters

(note that in addition to the C<\'> escaping special characters,
also C<,> needs to be escaped).

Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
C<\> is special and needs to be escaped with another C<\>, the
previous string will finally result in:
	
	-vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"


In order to avoid cumbersome escaping when using a commandline tool accepting a
filter specification as input, it is advisable to avoid direct inclusion of the
filter or options specification in the shell.

For example, in case of the B<drawtext filter>, you might prefer to
use the B<textfile> option in place of B<text> to specify the text
to render.


=head1 TIMELINE EDITING


Some filters support a generic B<enable> option. For the filters
supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
next filter in the filtergraph.

The expression accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown


=item B<n>

sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0


=item B<pos>

the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated, do
not use


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

width and height of the input frame if video

=back


Additionally, these filters support an B<enable> command that can be used
to re-define the expression.

Like any other filtering option, the B<enable> option follows the same
rules.

For example, to enable a blur filter (B<smartblur>) from 10 seconds to 3
minutes, and a B<curves> filter starting at 3 seconds:
	
	smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
	curves    = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process


See C<ffmpeg -filters> to view which filters have timeline support.




=head1 CHANGING OPTIONS AT RUNTIME WITH A COMMAND


Some options can be changed during the operation of the filter using
a command. These options are marked 'T' on the output of
B<ffmpeg> B<-h filter=E<lt>name of filterE<gt>>.
The name of the command is the name of the option and the argument is
the new value.



=head1 OPTIONS FOR FILTERS WITH SEVERAL INPUTS 


Some filters with several inputs support a common set of options.
These options can only be set by name, not with the short notation.


=over 4


=item B<eof_action>

The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<repeat>

Repeat the last frame (the default).

=item B<endall>

End both streams.

=item B<pass>

Pass the main input through.

=back



=item B<shortest>

If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
terminates. Default value is 0.


=item B<repeatlast>

If set to 1, force the filter to extend the last frame of secondary streams
until the end of the primary stream. A value of 0 disables this behavior.
Default value is 1.


=item B<ts_sync_mode>

How strictly to sync streams based on secondary input timestamps; it accepts
one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<default>

Frame from secondary input with the nearest lower or equal timestamp to the
primary input frame.

=item B<nearest>

Frame from secondary input with the absolute nearest timestamp to the primary
input frame.

=back


=back




=head1 AUDIO FILTERS


When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
existing filters using C<--disable-filters>.
The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
build.

Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.


=head2 aap

Apply Affine Projection algorithm to the first audio stream using the second audio stream.

This adaptive filter is used to estimate unknown audio based on multiple input audio samples.
Affine projection algorithm can make trade-offs between computation complexity with convergence speed.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<order>

Set the filter order.


=item B<projection>

Set the projection order.


=item B<mu>

Set the filter mu.


=item B<delta>

Set the coefficient to initialize internal covariance matrix.


=item B<out_mode>

Set the filter output samples. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<i>

Pass the 1st input.


=item B<d>

Pass the 2nd input.


=item B<o>

Pass difference between desired, 2nd input and error signal estimate.


=item B<n>

Pass difference between input, 1st input and error signal estimate.


=item B<e>

Pass error signal estimated samples.

Default value is I<o>.

=back



=item B<precision>

Set which precision to use when processing samples.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.


=item B<float>

Always use single-floating point precision sample format.


=item B<double>

Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

=back


=back



=head2 acompressor


A compressor is mainly used to reduce the dynamic range of a signal.
Especially modern music is mostly compressed at a high ratio to
improve the overall loudness. It's done to get the highest attention
of a listener, "fatten" the sound and bring more "power" to the track.
If a signal is compressed too much it may sound dull or "dead"
afterwards or it may start to "pump" (which could be a powerful effect
but can also destroy a track completely).
The right compression is the key to reach a professional sound and is
the high art of mixing and mastering. Because of its complex settings
it may take a long time to get the right feeling for this kind of effect.

Compression is done by detecting the volume above a chosen level
C<threshold> and dividing it by the factor set with C<ratio>.
So if you set the threshold to -12dB and your signal reaches -6dB a ratio
of 2:1 will result in a signal at -9dB. Because an exact manipulation of
the signal would cause distortion of the waveform the reduction can be
levelled over the time. This is done by setting "Attack" and "Release".
C<attack> determines how long the signal has to rise above the threshold
before any reduction will occur and C<release> sets the time the signal
has to fall below the threshold to reduce the reduction again. Shorter signals
than the chosen attack time will be left untouched.
The overall reduction of the signal can be made up afterwards with the
C<makeup> setting. So compressing the peaks of a signal about 6dB and
raising the makeup to this level results in a signal twice as loud than the
source. To gain a softer entry in the compression the C<knee> flattens the
hard edge at the threshold in the range of the chosen decibels.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain. Default is 1. Range is between 0.015625 and 64.


=item B<mode>

Set mode of compressor operation. Can be C<upward> or C<downward>.
Default is C<downward>.


=item B<threshold>

If a signal of stream rises above this level it will affect the gain
reduction.
By default it is 0.125. Range is between 0.00097563 and 1.


=item B<ratio>

Set a ratio by which the signal is reduced. 1:2 means that if the level
rose 4dB above the threshold, it will be only 2dB above after the reduction.
Default is 2. Range is between 1 and 20.


=item B<attack>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before gain
reduction starts. Default is 20. Range is between 0.01 and 2000.


=item B<release>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the threshold before
reduction is decreased again. Default is 250. Range is between 0.01 and 9000.


=item B<makeup>

Set the amount by how much signal will be amplified after processing.
Default is 1. Range is from 1 to 64.


=item B<knee>

Curve the sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more softly.
Default is 2.82843. Range is between 1 and 8.


=item B<link>

Choose if the C<average> level between all channels of input stream
or the louder(C<maximum>) channel of input stream affects the
reduction. Default is C<average>.


=item B<detection>

Should the exact signal be taken in case of C<peak> or an RMS one in case
of C<rms>. Default is C<rms> which is mostly smoother.


=item B<mix>

How much to use compressed signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 acontrast

Simple audio dynamic range compression/expansion filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<contrast>

Set contrast. Default is 33. Allowed range is between 0 and 100.

=back



=head2 acopy


Copy the input audio source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
testing purposes.


=head2 acrossfade


Apply cross fade from one input audio stream to another input audio stream.
The cross fade is applied for specified duration near the end of first stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<nb_samples, ns>

Specify the number of samples for which the cross fade effect has to last.
At the end of the cross fade effect the first input audio will be completely
silent. Default is 44100.


=item B<duration, d>

Specify the duration of the cross fade effect. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
By default the duration is determined by I<nb_samples>.
If set this option is used instead of I<nb_samples>.


=item B<overlap, o>

Should first stream end overlap with second stream start. Default is enabled.


=item B<curve1>

Set curve for cross fade transition for first stream.


=item B<curve2>

Set curve for cross fade transition for second stream.

For description of available curve types see B<afade> filter description.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Cross fade from one input to another:
	
	ffmpeg -i first.flac -i second.flac -filter_complex acrossfade=d=10:c1=exp:c2=exp output.flac



=item *

Cross fade from one input to another but without overlapping:
	
	ffmpeg -i first.flac -i second.flac -filter_complex acrossfade=d=10:o=0:c1=exp:c2=exp output.flac


=back



=head2 acrossover

Split audio stream into several bands.

This filter splits audio stream into two or more frequency ranges.
Summing all streams back will give flat output.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<split>

Set split frequencies. Those must be positive and increasing.


=item B<order>

Set filter order for each band split. This controls filter roll-off or steepness
of filter transfer function.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<2nd>

12 dB per octave.

=item B<4th>

24 dB per octave.

=item B<6th>

36 dB per octave.

=item B<8th>

48 dB per octave.

=item B<10th>

60 dB per octave.

=item B<12th>

72 dB per octave.

=item B<14th>

84 dB per octave.

=item B<16th>

96 dB per octave.

=item B<18th>

108 dB per octave.

=item B<20th>

120 dB per octave.

=back


Default is I<4th>.


=item B<level>

Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.


=item B<gains>

Set output gain for each band. Default value is 1 for all bands.


=item B<precision>

Set which precision to use when processing samples.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.


=item B<float>

Always use single-floating point precision sample format.


=item B<double>

Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

=back


Default value is C<auto>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Split input audio stream into two bands (low and high) with split frequency of 1500 Hz,
each band will be in separate stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.flac -filter_complex 'acrossover=split=1500[LOW][HIGH]' -map '[LOW]' low.wav -map '[HIGH]' high.wav



=item *

Same as above, but with higher filter order:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.flac -filter_complex 'acrossover=split=1500:order=8th[LOW][HIGH]' -map '[LOW]' low.wav -map '[HIGH]' high.wav



=item *

Same as above, but also with additional middle band (frequencies between 1500 and 8000):
	
	ffmpeg -i in.flac -filter_complex 'acrossover=split=1500 8000:order=8th[LOW][MID][HIGH]' -map '[LOW]' low.wav -map '[MID]' mid.wav -map '[HIGH]' high.wav


=back



=head2 acrusher


Reduce audio bit resolution.

This filter is bit crusher with enhanced functionality. A bit crusher
is used to audibly reduce number of bits an audio signal is sampled
with. This doesn't change the bit depth at all, it just produces the
effect. Material reduced in bit depth sounds more harsh and "digital".
This filter is able to even round to continuous values instead of discrete
bit depths.
Additionally it has a D/C offset which results in different crushing of
the lower and the upper half of the signal.
An Anti-Aliasing setting is able to produce "softer" crushing sounds.

Another feature of this filter is the logarithmic mode.
This setting switches from linear distances between bits to logarithmic ones.
The result is a much more "natural" sounding crusher which doesn't gate low
signals for example. The human ear has a logarithmic perception,
so this kind of crushing is much more pleasant.
Logarithmic crushing is also able to get anti-aliased.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set level in.


=item B<level_out>

Set level out.


=item B<bits>

Set bit reduction.


=item B<mix>

Set mixing amount.


=item B<mode>

Can be linear: C<lin> or logarithmic: C<log>.


=item B<dc>

Set DC.


=item B<aa>

Set anti-aliasing.


=item B<samples>

Set sample reduction.


=item B<lfo>

Enable LFO. By default disabled.


=item B<lforange>

Set LFO range.


=item B<lforate>

Set LFO rate.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 acue


Delay audio filtering until a given wallclock timestamp. See the B<cue>
filter.


=head2 adeclick

Remove impulsive noise from input audio.

Samples detected as impulsive noise are replaced by interpolated samples using
autoregressive modelling.


=over 4


=item B<window, w>

Set window size, in milliseconds. Allowed range is from C<10> to
C<100>. Default value is C<55> milliseconds.
This sets size of window which will be processed at once.


=item B<overlap, o>

Set window overlap, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from
C<50> to C<95>. Default value is C<75> percent.
Setting this to a very high value increases impulsive noise removal but makes
whole process much slower.


=item B<arorder, a>

Set autoregression order, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from
C<0> to C<25>. Default value is C<2> percent. This option also
controls quality of interpolated samples using neighbour good samples.


=item B<threshold, t>

Set threshold value. Allowed range is from C<1> to C<100>.
Default value is C<2>.
This controls the strength of impulsive noise which is going to be removed.
The lower value, the more samples will be detected as impulsive noise.


=item B<burst, b>

Set burst fusion, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is C<0> to
C<10>. Default value is C<2>.
If any two samples detected as noise are spaced less than this value then any
sample between those two samples will be also detected as noise.


=item B<method, m>

Set overlap method.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<add, a>

Select overlap-add method. Even not interpolated samples are slightly
changed with this method.


=item B<save, s>

Select overlap-save method. Not interpolated samples remain unchanged.

=back


Default value is C<a>.

=back



=head2 adeclip

Remove clipped samples from input audio.

Samples detected as clipped are replaced by interpolated samples using
autoregressive modelling.


=over 4


=item B<window, w>

Set window size, in milliseconds. Allowed range is from C<10> to C<100>.
Default value is C<55> milliseconds.
This sets size of window which will be processed at once.


=item B<overlap, o>

Set window overlap, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from C<50>
to C<95>. Default value is C<75> percent.


=item B<arorder, a>

Set autoregression order, in percentage of window size. Allowed range is from
C<0> to C<25>. Default value is C<8> percent. This option also controls
quality of interpolated samples using neighbour good samples.


=item B<threshold, t>

Set threshold value. Allowed range is from C<1> to C<100>.
Default value is C<10>. Higher values make clip detection less aggressive.


=item B<hsize, n>

Set size of histogram used to detect clips. Allowed range is from C<100> to C<9999>.
Default value is C<1000>. Higher values make clip detection less aggressive.


=item B<method, m>

Set overlap method.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<add, a>

Select overlap-add method. Even not interpolated samples are slightly changed
with this method.


=item B<save, s>

Select overlap-save method. Not interpolated samples remain unchanged.

=back


Default value is C<a>.

=back



=head2 adecorrelate

Apply decorrelation to input audio stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<stages>

Set decorrelation stages of filtering. Allowed
range is from 1 to 16. Default value is 6.


=item B<seed>

Set random seed used for setting delay in samples across channels.

=back



=head2 adelay


Delay one or more audio channels.

Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<delays>

Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
If you want to delay exact number of samples, append 'S' to number.
If you want instead to delay in seconds, append 's' to number.


=item B<all>

Use last set delay for all remaining channels. By default is disabled.
This option if enabled changes how option C<delays> is interpreted.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
	
	adelay=1500|0|500



=item *

Delay second channel by 500 samples, the third channel by 700 samples and leave
the first channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
	
	adelay=0|500S|700S



=item *

Delay all channels by same number of samples:
	
	adelay=delays=64S:all=1


=back



=head2 adenorm

Remedy denormals in audio by adding extremely low-level noise.

This filter shall be placed before any filter that can produce denormals.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<level>

Set level of added noise in dB. Default is C<-351>.
Allowed range is from -451 to -90.


=item B<type>

Set type of added noise.


=over 4


=item B<dc>

Add DC signal.

=item B<ac>

Add AC signal.

=item B<square>

Add square signal.

=item B<pulse>

Add pulse signal.

=back


Default is C<dc>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 aderivative, aintegral


Compute derivative/integral of audio stream.

Applying both filters one after another produces original audio.


=head2 adrc


Apply spectral dynamic range controller filter to input audio stream.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<transfer>

Set the transfer expression.

The expression can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<ch>

current channel number


=item B<sn>

current sample number


=item B<nb_channels>

number of channels


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds


=item B<sr>

sample rate


=item B<p>

current frequency power value, in dB


=item B<f>

current frequency in Hz

=back


Default value is C<p>.


=item B<attack>

Set the attack in milliseconds. Default is C<50> milliseconds.
Allowed range is from 1 to 1000 milliseconds.

=item B<release>

Set the release in milliseconds. Default is C<100> milliseconds.
Allowed range is from 5 to 2000 milliseconds.

=item B<channels>

Set which channels to filter, by default C<all> channels in audio stream are filtered.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply spectral compression to all frequencies with threshold of -50 dB and 1:6 ratio:
	
	adrc=transfer='if(gt(p,-50),-50+(p-(-50))/6,p)':attack=50:release=100



=item *

Similar to above but with 1:2 ratio and filtering only front center channel:
	
	adrc=transfer='if(gt(p,-50),-50+(p-(-50))/2,p)':attack=50:release=100:channels=FC



=item *

Apply spectral noise gate to all frequencies with threshold of -85 dB and with short attack time and short release time:
	
	adrc=transfer='if(lte(p,-85),p-800,p)':attack=1:release=5



=item *

Apply spectral expansion to all frequencies with threshold of -10 dB and 1:2 ratio:
	
	adrc=transfer='if(lt(p,-10),-10+(p-(-10))*2,p)':attack=50:release=100



=item *

Apply limiter to max -60 dB to all frequencies, with attack of 2 ms and release of 10 ms:
	
	adrc=transfer='min(p,-60)':attack=2:release=10


=back



=head2 adynamicequalizer


Apply dynamic equalization to input audio stream.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<threshold>

Set the detection threshold used to trigger equalization.
Threshold detection is using detection filter.
Default value is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 100.


=item B<dfrequency>

Set the detection frequency in Hz used for detection filter used to trigger equalization.
Default value is 1000 Hz. Allowed range is between 2 and 1000000 Hz.


=item B<dqfactor>

Set the detection resonance factor for detection filter used to trigger equalization.
Default value is 1. Allowed range is from 0.001 to 1000.


=item B<tfrequency>

Set the target frequency of equalization filter.
Default value is 1000 Hz. Allowed range is between 2 and 1000000 Hz.


=item B<tqfactor>

Set the target resonance factor for target equalization filter.
Default value is 1. Allowed range is from 0.001 to 1000.


=item B<attack>

Set the amount of milliseconds the signal from detection has to rise above
the detection threshold before equalization starts.
Default is 20. Allowed range is between 1 and 2000.


=item B<release>

Set the amount of milliseconds the signal from detection has to fall below the
detection threshold before equalization ends.
Default is 200. Allowed range is between 1 and 2000.


=item B<ratio>

Set the ratio by which the equalization gain is raised.
Default is 1. Allowed range is between 0 and 30.


=item B<makeup>

Set the makeup offset by which the equalization gain is raised.
Default is 0. Allowed range is between 0 and 100.


=item B<range>

Set the max allowed cut/boost amount. Default is 50.
Allowed range is from 1 to 200.


=item B<mode>

Set the mode of filter operation, can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<listen>

Output only isolated detection signal.

=item B<cutbelow>

Cut frequencies below detection threshold.

=item B<cutabove>

Cut frequencies above detection threshold.

=item B<boostbelow>

Boost frequencies below detection threshold.

=item B<boostabove>

Boost frequencies above detection threshold.

=back

Default mode is B<cutbelow>.


=item B<dftype>

Set the type of detection filter, can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<bandpass>


=item B<lowpass>


=item B<highpass>


=item B<peak>


=back

Default type is B<bandpass>.


=item B<tftype>

Set the type of target filter, can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<bell>


=item B<lowshelf>


=item B<highshelf>


=back

Default type is B<bell>.


=item B<auto>

Automatically gather threshold from detection filter. By default
is B<disabled>.
This option is useful to detect threshold in certain time frame of
input audio stream, in such case option value is changed at runtime.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<disabled>

Disable using automatically gathered threshold value.

=item B<off>

Stop picking threshold value.

=item B<on>

Start picking threshold value.

=item B<adaptive>

Adaptively pick threshold value, by calculating sliding window entropy.

=back



=item B<precision>

Set which precision to use when processing samples.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.


=item B<float>

Always use single-floating point precision sample format.


=item B<double>

Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 adynamicsmooth


Apply dynamic smoothing to input audio stream.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<sensitivity>

Set an amount of sensitivity to frequency fluctations. Default is 2.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1e+06.


=item B<basefreq>

Set a base frequency for smoothing. Default value is 22050.
Allowed range is from 2 to 1e+06.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 aecho


Apply echoing to the input audio.

Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
(and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
original signal and the reflection is the C<delay>, and the
loudness of the reflected signal is the C<decay>.
Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<in_gain>

Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is C<0.6>.


=item B<out_gain>

Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is C<0.3>.


=item B<delays>

Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
separated by '|'. Allowed range for each C<delay> is C<(0 - 90000.0]>.
Default is C<1000>.


=item B<decays>

Set list of loudness of reflected signals separated by '|'.
Allowed range for each C<decay> is C<(0 - 1.0]>.
Default is C<0.5>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
	
	aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4



=item *

If delay is very short, then it sounds like a (metallic) robot playing music:
	
	aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4



=item *

A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
	
	aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3



=item *

Same as above but with one more mountain:
	
	aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25


=back



=head2 aemphasis

Audio emphasis filter creates or restores material directly taken from LPs or
emphased CDs with different filter curves. E.g. to store music on vinyl the
signal has to be altered by a filter first to even out the disadvantages of
this recording medium.
Once the material is played back the inverse filter has to be applied to
restore the distortion of the frequency response.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain.


=item B<level_out>

Set output gain.


=item B<mode>

Set filter mode. For restoring material use C<reproduction> mode, otherwise
use C<production> mode. Default is C<reproduction> mode.


=item B<type>

Set filter type. Selects medium. Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<col>

select Columbia.

=item B<emi>

select EMI.

=item B<bsi>

select BSI (78RPM).

=item B<riaa>

select RIAA.

=item B<cd>

select Compact Disc (CD).

=item B<50fm>

select 50µs (FM).

=item B<75fm>

select 75µs (FM).

=item B<50kf>

select 50µs (FM-KF).

=item B<75kf>

select 75µs (FM-KF).

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 aeval


Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.

This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<exprs>

Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
the number of input channels is greater than the number of
expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
output channels.


=item B<channel_layout, c>

Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
specified by the number of expressions. If set to B<same>, it will
use by default the same input channel layout.

=back


Each expression in I<exprs> can contain the following constants and functions:


=over 4


=item B<ch>

channel number of the current expression


=item B<n>

number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0


=item B<s>

sample rate


=item B<t>

time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds


=item B<nb_in_channels>


=item B<nb_out_channels>

input and output number of channels


=item B<val(CH)>

the value of input channel with number I<CH>

=back


Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
dedicated filter.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Half volume:
	
	aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same



=item *

Invert phase of the second channel:
	
	aeval=val(0)|-val(1)


=back



=head2 aexciter


An exciter is used to produce high sound that is not present in the
original signal. This is done by creating harmonic distortions of the
signal which are restricted in range and added to the original signal.
An Exciter raises the upper end of an audio signal without simply raising
the higher frequencies like an equalizer would do to create a more
"crisp" or "brilliant" sound.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input level prior processing of signal.
Allowed range is from 0 to 64.
Default value is 1.


=item B<level_out>

Set output level after processing of signal.
Allowed range is from 0 to 64.
Default value is 1.


=item B<amount>

Set the amount of harmonics added to original signal.
Allowed range is from 0 to 64.
Default value is 1.


=item B<drive>

Set the amount of newly created harmonics.
Allowed range is from 0.1 to 10.
Default value is 8.5.


=item B<blend>

Set the octave of newly created harmonics.
Allowed range is from -10 to 10.
Default value is 0.


=item B<freq>

Set the lower frequency limit of producing harmonics in Hz.
Allowed range is from 2000 to 12000 Hz.
Default is 7500 Hz.


=item B<ceil>

Set the upper frequency limit of producing harmonics.
Allowed range is from 9999 to 20000 Hz.
If value is lower than 10000 Hz no limit is applied.


=item B<listen>

Mute the original signal and output only added harmonics.
By default is disabled.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.



=head2 afade


Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<type, t>

Specify the effect type, can be either C<in> for fade-in, or
C<out> for a fade-out effect. Default is C<in>.


=item B<start_sample, ss>

Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
effect. Default is 0.


=item B<nb_samples, ns>

Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.


=item B<start_time, st>

Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
The value must be specified as a time duration; see
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
If set this option is used instead of I<start_sample>.


=item B<duration, d>

Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
the output audio will be silence.
By default the duration is determined by I<nb_samples>.
If set this option is used instead of I<nb_samples>.


=item B<curve>

Set curve for fade transition.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<tri>

select triangular, linear slope (default)

=item B<qsin>

select quarter of sine wave

=item B<hsin>

select half of sine wave

=item B<esin>

select exponential sine wave

=item B<log>

select logarithmic

=item B<ipar>

select inverted parabola

=item B<qua>

select quadratic

=item B<cub>

select cubic

=item B<squ>

select square root

=item B<cbr>

select cubic root

=item B<par>

select parabola

=item B<exp>

select exponential

=item B<iqsin>

select inverted quarter of sine wave

=item B<ihsin>

select inverted half of sine wave

=item B<dese>

select double-exponential seat

=item B<desi>

select double-exponential sigmoid

=item B<losi>

select logistic sigmoid

=item B<sinc>

select sine cardinal function

=item B<isinc>

select inverted sine cardinal function

=item B<quat>

select quartic

=item B<quatr>

select quartic root

=item B<qsin2>

select squared quarter of sine wave

=item B<hsin2>

select squared half of sine wave

=item B<nofade>

no fade applied

=back



=item B<silence>

Set the initial gain for fade-in or final gain for fade-out.
Default value is C<0.0>.


=item B<unity>

Set the initial gain for fade-out or final gain for fade-in.
Default value is C<1.0>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
	
	afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15



=item *

Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
	
	afade=t=out:st=875:d=25


=back



=head2 afftdn

Denoise audio samples with FFT.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<noise_reduction, nr>

Set the noise reduction in dB, allowed range is 0.01 to 97.
Default value is 12 dB.


=item B<noise_floor, nf>

Set the noise floor in dB, allowed range is -80 to -20.
Default value is -50 dB.


=item B<noise_type, nt>

Set the noise type.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<white, w>

Select white noise.


=item B<vinyl, v>

Select vinyl noise.


=item B<shellac, s>

Select shellac noise.


=item B<custom, c>

Select custom noise, defined in C<bn> option.

Default value is white noise.

=back



=item B<band_noise, bn>

Set custom band noise profile for every one of 15 bands.
Bands are separated by ' ' or '|'.


=item B<residual_floor, rf>

Set the residual floor in dB, allowed range is -80 to -20.
Default value is -38 dB.


=item B<track_noise, tn>

Enable noise floor tracking. By default is disabled.
With this enabled, noise floor is automatically adjusted.


=item B<track_residual, tr>

Enable residual tracking. By default is disabled.


=item B<output_mode, om>

Set the output mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<input, i>

Pass input unchanged.


=item B<output, o>

Pass noise filtered out.


=item B<noise, n>

Pass only noise.

Default value is I<output>.

=back



=item B<adaptivity, ad>

Set the adaptivity factor, used how fast to adapt gains adjustments per
each frequency bin. Value I<0> enables instant adaptation, while higher values
react much slower.
Allowed range is from I<0> to I<1>. Default value is I<0.5>.


=item B<floor_offset, fo>

Set the noise floor offset factor. This option is used to adjust offset applied to measured
noise floor. It is only effective when noise floor tracking is enabled.
Allowed range is from I<-2.0> to I<2.0>. Default value is I<1.0>.


=item B<noise_link, nl>

Set the noise link used for multichannel audio.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Use unchanged channel's noise floor.


=item B<min>

Use measured min noise floor of all channels.


=item B<max>

Use measured max noise floor of all channels.


=item B<average>

Use measured average noise floor of all channels.

Default value is I<min>.

=back



=item B<band_multiplier, bm>

Set the band multiplier factor, used how much to spread bands across frequency bins.
Allowed range is from I<0.2> to I<5>. Default value is I<1.25>.


=item B<sample_noise, sn>

Toggle capturing and measurement of noise profile from input audio.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<start, begin>

Start sample noise capture.


=item B<stop, end>

Stop sample noise capture and measure new noise band profile.

Default value is C<none>.

=back



=item B<gain_smooth, gs>

Set gain smooth spatial radius, used to smooth gains applied to each frequency bin.
Useful to reduce random music noise artefacts.
Higher values increases smoothing of gains.
Allowed range is from C<0> to C<50>.
Default value is C<0>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the some above mentioned options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Reduce white noise by 10dB, and use previously measured noise floor of -40dB:
	
	afftdn=nr=10:nf=-40



=item *

Reduce white noise by 10dB, also set initial noise floor to -80dB and enable automatic
tracking of noise floor so noise floor will gradually change during processing:
	
	afftdn=nr=10:nf=-80:tn=1



=item *

Reduce noise by 20dB, using noise floor of -40dB and using commands to take noise profile
of first 0.4 seconds of input audio:
	
	asendcmd=0.0 afftdn sn start,asendcmd=0.4 afftdn sn stop,afftdn=nr=20:nf=-40


=back



=head2 afftfilt

Apply arbitrary expressions to samples in frequency domain.


=over 4


=item B<real>

Set frequency domain real expression for each separate channel separated
by '|'. Default is "re".
If the number of input channels is greater than the number of
expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
output channels.


=item B<imag>

Set frequency domain imaginary expression for each separate channel
separated by '|'. Default is "im".

Each expression in I<real> and I<imag> can contain the following
constants and functions:


=over 4


=item B<sr>

sample rate


=item B<b>

current frequency bin number


=item B<nb>

number of available bins


=item B<ch>

channel number of the current expression


=item B<chs>

number of channels


=item B<pts>

current frame pts


=item B<re>

current real part of frequency bin of current channel


=item B<im>

current imaginary part of frequency bin of current channel


=item B<real(b, ch)>

Return the value of real part of frequency bin at location (I<bin>,I<channel>)


=item B<imag(b, ch)>

Return the value of imaginary part of frequency bin at location (I<bin>,I<channel>)

=back



=item B<win_size>

Set window size. Allowed range is from 16 to 131072.
Default is C<4096>


=item B<win_func>

Set window function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hann, hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back

Default is C<hann>.


=item B<overlap>

Set window overlap. If set to 1, the recommended overlap for selected
window function will be picked. Default is C<0.75>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Leave almost only low frequencies in audio:
	
	afftfilt="'real=re * (1-clip((b/nb)*b,0,1))':imag='im * (1-clip((b/nb)*b,0,1))'"



=item *

Apply robotize effect:
	
	afftfilt="real='hypot(re,im)*sin(0)':imag='hypot(re,im)*cos(0)':win_size=512:overlap=0.75"



=item *

Apply whisper effect:
	
	afftfilt="real='hypot(re,im)*cos((random(0)*2-1)*2*3.14)':imag='hypot(re,im)*sin((random(1)*2-1)*2*3.14)':win_size=128:overlap=0.8"



=item *

Apply phase shift:
	
	afftfilt="real=re*cos(1)-im*sin(1):imag=re*sin(1)+im*cos(1)"


=back




=head2 afir


Apply an arbitrary Finite Impulse Response filter.

This filter is designed for applying long FIR filters,
up to 60 seconds long.

It can be used as component for digital crossover filters,
room equalization, cross talk cancellation, wavefield synthesis,
auralization, ambiophonics, ambisonics and spatialization.

This filter uses the streams higher than first one as FIR coefficients.
If the non-first stream holds a single channel, it will be used
for all input channels in the first stream, otherwise
the number of channels in the non-first stream must be same as
the number of channels in the first stream.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<dry>

Set dry gain. This sets input gain.


=item B<wet>

Set wet gain. This sets final output gain.


=item B<length>

Set Impulse Response filter length. Default is 1, which means whole IR is processed.


=item B<gtype>

This option is deprecated, and does nothing.


=item B<irnorm>

Set norm to be applied to IR coefficients before filtering.
Allowed range is from I<-1> to I<2>.
IR coefficients are normalized with calculated vector norm set by this option.
For negative values, no norm is calculated, and IR coefficients are not modified at all.
Default is I<1>.


=item B<irlink>

For multichannel IR if this option is set to I<true>, all IR channels will be
normalized with maximal measured gain of all IR channels coefficients as set by C<irnorm> option.
When disabled, all IR coefficients in each IR channel will be normalized independently.
Default is I<true>.


=item B<irgain>

Set gain to be applied to IR coefficients before filtering.
Allowed range is 0 to 1. This gain is applied after any gain applied with I<irnorm> option.


=item B<irfmt>

Set format of IR stream. Can be C<mono> or C<input>.
Default is C<input>.


=item B<maxir>

Set max allowed Impulse Response filter duration in seconds. Default is 30 seconds.
Allowed range is 0.1 to 60 seconds.


=item B<response>

This option is deprecated, and does nothing.


=item B<channel>

This option is deprecated, and does nothing.


=item B<size>

This option is deprecated, and does nothing.


=item B<rate>

This option is deprecated, and does nothing.


=item B<minp>

Set minimal partition size used for convolution. Default is I<8192>.
Allowed range is from I<1> to I<65536>.
Lower values decreases latency at cost of higher CPU usage.


=item B<maxp>

Set maximal partition size used for convolution. Default is I<8192>.
Allowed range is from I<8> to I<65536>.
Lower values may increase CPU usage.


=item B<nbirs>

Set number of input impulse responses streams which will be switchable at runtime.
Allowed range is from I<1> to I<32>. Default is I<1>.


=item B<ir>

Set IR stream which will be used for convolution, starting from I<0>, should always be
lower than supplied value by C<nbirs> option. Default is I<0>.
This option can be changed at runtime via B<commands>.


=item B<precision>

Set which precision to use when processing samples.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.


=item B<float>

Always use single-floating point precision sample format.


=item B<double>

Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

=back


Default value is auto.


=item B<irload>

Set when to load IR stream. Can be C<init> or C<access>.
First one load and prepares all IRs on initialization, second one
once on first access of specific IR.
Default is C<init>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply reverb to stream using mono IR file as second input, complete command using ffmpeg:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.wav -i middle_tunnel_1way_mono.wav -lavfi afir output.wav



=item *

Apply true stereo processing given input stereo stream, and two stereo impulse responses for left and right channel,
the impulse response files are files with names l_ir.wav and r_ir.wav, and setting irnorm option value:
	
	"pan=4C|c0=FL|c1=FL|c2=FR|c3=FR[a];amovie=l_ir.wav[LIR];amovie=r_ir.wav[RIR];[LIR][RIR]amerge[ir];[a][ir]afir=irfmt=input:irnorm=1.2,pan=stereo|FL<c0+c2|FR<c1+c3"



=item *

Similar to above example, but with C<irgain> explicitly set to estimated value and with C<irnorm> disabled:
	
	"pan=4C|c0=FL|c1=FL|c2=FR|c3=FR[a];amovie=l_ir.wav[LIR];amovie=r_ir.wav[RIR];[LIR][RIR]amerge[ir];[a][ir]afir=irfmt=input:irgain=-5dB:irnom=-1,pan=stereo|FL<c0+c2|FR<c1+c3"


=back




=head2 aformat


Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<sample_fmts, f>

A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.


=item B<sample_rates, r>

A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.


=item B<channel_layouts, cl>

A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.

See B<the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the required syntax.

=back


If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.

Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
	
	aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo



=head2 afreqshift

Apply frequency shift to input audio samples.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<shift>

Specify frequency shift. Allowed range is -INT_MAX to INT_MAX.
Default value is 0.0.


=item B<level>

Set output gain applied to final output. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 1.0.


=item B<order>

Set filter order used for filtering. Allowed range is from 1 to 16.
Default value is 8.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 afwtdn

Reduce broadband noise from input samples using Wavelets.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<sigma>

Set the noise sigma, allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.
This option controls strength of denoising applied to input samples.
Most useful way to set this option is via decibels, eg. -45dB.


=item B<levels>

Set the number of wavelet levels of decomposition.
Allowed range is from 1 to 12.
Default value is 10.
Setting this too low make denoising performance very poor.


=item B<wavet>

Set wavelet type for decomposition of input frame.
They are sorted by number of coefficients, from lowest to highest.
More coefficients means worse filtering speed, but overall better quality.
Available wavelets are:


=over 4


=item B<sym2>


=item B<sym4>


=item B<rbior68>


=item B<deb10>


=item B<sym10>


=item B<coif5>


=item B<bl3>


=back



=item B<percent>

Set percent of full denoising. Allowed range is from 0 to 100 percent.
Default value is 85 percent or partial denoising.


=item B<profile>

If enabled, first input frame will be used as noise profile.
If first frame samples contain non-noise performance will be very poor.


=item B<adaptive>

If enabled, input frames are analyzed for presence of noise.
If noise is detected with high possibility then input frame profile will be
used for processing following frames, until new noise frame is detected.


=item B<samples>

Set size of single frame in number of samples. Allowed range is from 512 to
65536. Default frame size is 8192 samples.


=item B<softness>

Set softness applied inside thresholding function. Allowed range is from 0 to
10. Default softness is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 agate


A gate is mainly used to reduce lower parts of a signal. This kind of signal
processing reduces disturbing noise between useful signals.

Gating is done by detecting the volume below a chosen level I<threshold>
and dividing it by the factor set with I<ratio>. The bottom of the noise
floor is set via I<range>. Because an exact manipulation of the signal
would cause distortion of the waveform the reduction can be levelled over
time. This is done by setting I<attack> and I<release>.

I<attack> determines how long the signal has to fall below the threshold
before any reduction will occur and I<release> sets the time the signal
has to rise above the threshold to reduce the reduction again.
Shorter signals than the chosen attack time will be left untouched.


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input level before filtering.
Default is 1. Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.


=item B<mode>

Set the mode of operation. Can be C<upward> or C<downward>.
Default is C<downward>. If set to C<upward> mode, higher parts of signal
will be amplified, expanding dynamic range in upward direction.
Otherwise, in case of C<downward> lower parts of signal will be reduced.


=item B<range>

Set the level of gain reduction when the signal is below the threshold.
Default is 0.06125. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Setting this to 0 disables reduction and then filter behaves like expander.


=item B<threshold>

If a signal rises above this level the gain reduction is released.
Default is 0.125. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.


=item B<ratio>

Set a ratio by which the signal is reduced.
Default is 2. Allowed range is from 1 to 9000.


=item B<attack>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before gain
reduction stops.
Default is 20 milliseconds. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.


=item B<release>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the threshold before the
reduction is increased again. Default is 250 milliseconds.
Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.


=item B<makeup>

Set amount of amplification of signal after processing.
Default is 1. Allowed range is from 1 to 64.


=item B<knee>

Curve the sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more softly.
Default is 2.828427125. Allowed range is from 1 to 8.


=item B<detection>

Choose if exact signal should be taken for detection or an RMS like one.
Default is C<rms>. Can be C<peak> or C<rms>.


=item B<link>

Choose if the average level between all channels or the louder channel affects
the reduction.
Default is C<average>. Can be C<average> or C<maximum>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 aiir


Apply an arbitrary Infinite Impulse Response filter.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<zeros, z>

Set B/numerator/zeros/reflection coefficients.


=item B<poles, p>

Set A/denominator/poles/ladder coefficients.


=item B<gains, k>

Set channels gains.


=item B<dry_gain>

Set input gain.


=item B<wet_gain>

Set output gain.


=item B<format, f>

Set coefficients format.


=over 4


=item B<ll>

lattice-ladder function

=item B<sf>

analog transfer function

=item B<tf>

digital transfer function

=item B<zp>

Z-plane zeros/poles, cartesian (default)

=item B<pr>

Z-plane zeros/poles, polar radians

=item B<pd>

Z-plane zeros/poles, polar degrees

=item B<sp>

S-plane zeros/poles

=back



=item B<process, r>

Set type of processing.


=over 4


=item B<d>

direct processing

=item B<s>

serial processing

=item B<p>

parallel processing

=back



=item B<precision, e>

Set filtering precision.


=over 4


=item B<dbl>

double-precision floating-point (default)

=item B<flt>

single-precision floating-point

=item B<i32>

32-bit integers

=item B<i16>

16-bit integers

=back



=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize filter coefficients, by default is enabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<mix>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<response>

Show IR frequency response, magnitude(magenta), phase(green) and group delay(yellow) in additional video stream.
By default it is disabled.


=item B<channel>

Set for which IR channel to display frequency response. By default is first channel
displayed. This option is used only when I<response> is enabled.


=item B<size>

Set video stream size. This option is used only when I<response> is enabled.

=back


Coefficients in C<tf> and C<sf> format are separated by spaces and are in ascending
order.

Coefficients in C<zp> format are separated by spaces and order of coefficients
doesn't matter. Coefficients in C<zp> format are complex numbers with I<i>
imaginary unit.

Different coefficients and gains can be provided for every channel, in such case
use '|' to separate coefficients or gains. Last provided coefficients will be
used for all remaining channels.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply 2 pole elliptic notch at around 5000Hz for 48000 Hz sample rate:
	
	aiir=k=1:z=7.957584807809675810E-1 -2.575128568908332300 3.674839853930788710 -2.57512875289799137 7.957586296317130880E-1:p=1 -2.86950072432325953 3.63022088054647218 -2.28075678147272232 6.361362326477423500E-1:f=tf:r=d



=item *

Same as above but in C<zp> format:
	
	aiir=k=0.79575848078096756:z=0.80918701+0.58773007i 0.80918701-0.58773007i 0.80884700+0.58784055i 0.80884700-0.58784055i:p=0.63892345+0.59951235i 0.63892345-0.59951235i 0.79582691+0.44198673i 0.79582691-0.44198673i:f=zp:r=s



=item *

Apply 3-rd order analog normalized Butterworth low-pass filter, using analog transfer function format:
	
	aiir=z=1.3057 0 0 0:p=1.3057 2.3892 2.1860 1:f=sf:r=d


=back



=head2 alimiter


The limiter prevents an input signal from rising over a desired threshold.
This limiter uses lookahead technology to prevent your signal from distorting.
It means that there is a small delay after the signal is processed. Keep in mind
that the delay it produces is the attack time you set.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain. Default is 1.


=item B<level_out>

Set output gain. Default is 1.


=item B<limit>

Don't let signals above this level pass the limiter. Default is 1.


=item B<attack>

The limiter will reach its attenuation level in this amount of time in
milliseconds. Default is 5 milliseconds.


=item B<release>

Come back from limiting to attenuation 1.0 in this amount of milliseconds.
Default is 50 milliseconds.


=item B<asc>

When gain reduction is always needed ASC takes care of releasing to an
average reduction level rather than reaching a reduction of 0 in the release
time.


=item B<asc_level>

Select how much the release time is affected by ASC, 0 means nearly no changes
in release time while 1 produces higher release times.


=item B<level>

Auto level output signal. Default is enabled.
This normalizes audio back to 0dB if enabled.


=item B<latency>

Compensate the delay introduced by using the lookahead buffer set with attack
parameter. Also flush the valid audio data in the lookahead buffer when the
stream hits EOF.

=back


Depending on picked setting it is recommended to upsample input 2x or 4x times
with B<aresample> before applying this filter.


=head2 allpass


Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
I<frequency>, and filter-width I<width>.
An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Set frequency in Hz.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<order, o>

Set the filter order, can be 1 or 2. Default is 2.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change allpass frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change allpass width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change allpass width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change allpass mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 aloop


Loop audio samples.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<loop>

Set the number of loops. Setting this value to -1 will result in infinite loops.
Default is 0.


=item B<size>

Set maximal number of samples. Default is 0.


=item B<start>

Set first sample of loop. Default is 0.


=item B<time>

Set the time of loop start in seconds.
Only used if option named I<start> is set to C<-1>.

=back




=head2 amerge


Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<inputs>

Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.


=back


If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
channels.

For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).

On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.

All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.

If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
shortest.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
	
	amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge



=item *

Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in F<input.mkv>:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv


=back



=head2 amix


Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.

Note that this filter only supports float samples (the I<amerge>
and I<pan> audio filters support many formats). If the I<amix>
input has integer samples then B<aresample> will be automatically
inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<inputs>

The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.


=item B<duration>

How to determine the end-of-stream.

=over 4



=item B<longest>

The duration of the longest input. (default)


=item B<shortest>

The duration of the shortest input.


=item B<first>

The duration of the first input.


=back



=item B<dropout_transition>

The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.


=item B<weights>

Specify weight of each input audio stream as a sequence of numbers separated
by a space. If fewer weights are specified compared to number of inputs, the
last weight is assigned to the remaining inputs.
Default weight for each input is 1.


=item B<normalize>

Always scale inputs instead of only doing summation of samples.
Beware of heavy clipping if inputs are not normalized prior or after filtering
by this filter if this option is disabled. By default is enabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

This will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT



=item *

This will mix one vocal and one music input audio stream to a single output with the same duration as the
longest input. The music will have quarter the weight as the vocals, and the inputs are not normalized:
	
	ffmpeg -i VOCALS -i MUSIC -filter_complex amix=inputs=2:duration=longest:dropout_transition=0:weights="1 0.25":normalize=0 OUTPUT



=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<weights>


=item B<normalize>

Syntax is same as option with same name.

=back



=head2 amultiply


Multiply first audio stream with second audio stream and store result
in output audio stream. Multiplication is done by multiplying each
sample from first stream with sample at same position from second stream.

With this element-wise multiplication one can create amplitude fades and
amplitude modulations.


=head2 anequalizer


High-order parametric multiband equalizer for each channel.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<params>


This option string is in format:
"cI<chn> f=I<cf> w=I<w> g=I<g> t=I<f> | ..."
Each equalizer band is separated by '|'.


=over 4


=item B<chn>

Set channel number to which equalization will be applied.
If input doesn't have that channel the entry is ignored.


=item B<f>

Set central frequency for band.
If input doesn't have that frequency the entry is ignored.


=item B<w>

Set band width in Hertz.


=item B<g>

Set band gain in dB.


=item B<t>

Set filter type for band, optional, can be:


=over 4


=item B<0>

Butterworth, this is default.


=item B<1>

Chebyshev type 1.


=item B<2>

Chebyshev type 2.

=back


=back



=item B<curves>

With this option activated frequency response of anequalizer is displayed
in video stream.


=item B<size>

Set video stream size. Only useful if curves option is activated.


=item B<mgain>

Set max gain that will be displayed. Only useful if curves option is activated.
Setting this to a reasonable value makes it possible to display gain which is derived from
neighbour bands which are too close to each other and thus produce higher gain
when both are activated.


=item B<fscale>

Set frequency scale used to draw frequency response in video output.
Can be linear or logarithmic. Default is logarithmic.


=item B<colors>

Set color for each channel curve which is going to be displayed in video stream.
This is list of color names separated by space or by '|'.
Unrecognised or missing colors will be replaced by white color.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Lower gain by 10 of central frequency 200Hz and width 100 Hz
for first 2 channels using Chebyshev type 1 filter:
	
	anequalizer=c0 f=200 w=100 g=-10 t=1|c1 f=200 w=100 g=-10 t=1


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<change>

Alter existing filter parameters.
Syntax for the commands is : "I<fN>|f=I<freq>|w=I<width>|g=I<gain>"

I<fN> is existing filter number, starting from 0, if no such filter is available
error is returned.
I<freq> set new frequency parameter.
I<width> set new width parameter in Hertz.
I<gain> set new gain parameter in dB.

Full filter invocation with asendcmd may look like this:
asendcmd=c='4.0 anequalizer change 0|f=200|w=50|g=1',anequalizer=...

=back



=head2 anlmdn


Reduce broadband noise in audio samples using Non-Local Means algorithm.

Each sample is adjusted by looking for other samples with similar contexts. This
context similarity is defined by comparing their surrounding patches of size
B<p>. Patches are searched in an area of B<r> around the sample.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<strength, s>

Set denoising strength. Allowed range is from 0.00001 to 10000. Default value is 0.00001.


=item B<patch, p>

Set patch radius duration. Allowed range is from 1 to 100 milliseconds.
Default value is 2 milliseconds.


=item B<research, r>

Set research radius duration. Allowed range is from 2 to 300 milliseconds.
Default value is 6 milliseconds.


=item B<output, o>

Set the output mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<i>

Pass input unchanged.


=item B<o>

Pass noise filtered out.


=item B<n>

Pass only noise.

Default value is I<o>.

=back



=item B<smooth, m>

Set smooth factor. Default value is I<11>. Allowed range is from I<1> to I<1000>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 anlmf, anlms

Apply Normalized Least-Mean-(Squares|Fourth) algorithm to the first audio stream using the second audio stream.

This adaptive filter is used to mimic a desired filter by finding the filter coefficients that
relate to producing the least mean square of the error signal (difference between the desired,
2nd input audio stream and the actual signal, the 1st input audio stream).

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<order>

Set filter order.


=item B<mu>

Set filter mu.


=item B<eps>

Set the filter eps.


=item B<leakage>

Set the filter leakage.


=item B<out_mode>

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<i>

Pass the 1st input.


=item B<d>

Pass the 2nd input.


=item B<o>

Pass difference between desired, 2nd input and error signal estimate.


=item B<n>

Pass difference between input, 1st input and error signal estimate.


=item B<e>

Pass error signal estimated samples.

Default value is I<o>.

=back



=item B<precision>

Set which precision to use when processing samples.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.


=item B<float>

Always use single-floating point precision sample format.


=item B<double>

Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

One of many usages of this filter is noise reduction, input audio is filtered
with same samples that are delayed by fixed amount, one such example for stereo audio is:
	
	asplit[a][b],[a]adelay=32S|32S[a],[b][a]anlms=order=128:leakage=0.0005:mu=.5:out_mode=o


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the same commands as options, excluding option C<order>.


=head2 anull


Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.


=head2 apad


Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.

This can be used together with B<ffmpeg> B<-shortest> to
extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<packet_size>

Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.


=item B<pad_len>

Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
exclusive with B<whole_len>.


=item B<whole_len>

Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
with B<pad_len>.


=item B<pad_dur>

Specify the duration of samples of silence to add. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax. Used only if set to non-negative value.


=item B<whole_dur>

Specify the minimum total duration in the output audio stream. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax. Used only if set to non-negative value. If the value is longer than
the input audio length, silence is added to the end, until the value is reached.
This option is mutually exclusive with B<pad_dur>

=back


If neither the B<pad_len> nor the B<whole_len> nor B<pad_dur>
nor B<whole_dur> option is set, the filter will add silence to the end of
the input stream indefinitely.

Note that for ffmpeg 4.4 and earlier a zero B<pad_dur> or
B<whole_dur> also caused the filter to add silence indefinitely.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
	
	apad=pad_len=1024



=item *

Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
the input with silence if required:
	
	apad=whole_len=10000



=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
until the end in the output file when using the B<shortest>
option:
	
	ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT


=back



=head2 aphaser

Add a phasing effect to the input audio.

A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<in_gain>

Set input gain. Default is 0.4.


=item B<out_gain>

Set output gain. Default is 0.74


=item B<delay>

Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.


=item B<decay>

Set decay. Default is 0.4.


=item B<speed>

Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.


=item B<type>

Set modulation type. Default is triangular.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<triangular, t>


=item B<sinusoidal, s>


=back


=back



=head2 aphaseshift

Apply phase shift to input audio samples.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<shift>

Specify phase shift. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 0.0.


=item B<level>

Set output gain applied to final output. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 1.0.


=item B<order>

Set filter order used for filtering. Allowed range is from 1 to 16.
Default value is 8.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 apsnr

Measure Audio Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio.

This filter takes two audio streams for input, and outputs first
audio stream.
Results are in dB per channel at end of either input.


=head2 apsyclip

Apply Psychoacoustic clipper to input audio stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].


=item B<level_out>

Set output gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].


=item B<clip>

Set the clipping start value. Default value is 0dBFS or 1.


=item B<diff>

Output only difference samples, useful to hear introduced distortions.
By default is disabled.


=item B<adaptive>

Set strength of adaptive distortion applied. Default value is 0.5.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1.


=item B<iterations>

Set number of iterations of psychoacoustic clipper.
Allowed range is from 1 to 20. Default value is 10.


=item B<level>

Auto level output signal. Default is disabled.
This normalizes audio back to 0dBFS if enabled.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 apulsator


Audio pulsator is something between an autopanner and a tremolo.
But it can produce funny stereo effects as well. Pulsator changes the volume
of the left and right channel based on a LFO (low frequency oscillator) with
different waveforms and shifted phases.
This filter have the ability to define an offset between left and right
channel. An offset of 0 means that both LFO shapes match each other.
The left and right channel are altered equally - a conventional tremolo.
An offset of 50% means that the shape of the right channel is exactly shifted
in phase (or moved backwards about half of the frequency) - pulsator acts as
an autopanner. At 1 both curves match again. Every setting in between moves the
phase shift gapless between all stages and produces some "bypassing" sounds with
sine and triangle waveforms. The more you set the offset near 1 (starting from
the 0.5) the faster the signal passes from the left to the right speaker.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].


=item B<level_out>

Set output gain. By default it is 1. Range is [0.015625 - 64].


=item B<mode>

Set waveform shape the LFO will use. Can be one of: sine, triangle, square,
sawup or sawdown. Default is sine.


=item B<amount>

Set modulation. Define how much of original signal is affected by the LFO.


=item B<offset_l>

Set left channel offset. Default is 0. Allowed range is [0 - 1].


=item B<offset_r>

Set right channel offset. Default is 0.5. Allowed range is [0 - 1].


=item B<width>

Set pulse width. Default is 1. Allowed range is [0 - 2].


=item B<timing>

Set possible timing mode. Can be one of: bpm, ms or hz. Default is hz.


=item B<bpm>

Set bpm. Default is 120. Allowed range is [30 - 300]. Only used if timing
is set to bpm.


=item B<ms>

Set ms. Default is 500. Allowed range is [10 - 2000]. Only used if timing
is set to ms.


=item B<hz>

Set frequency in Hz. Default is 2. Allowed range is [0.01 - 100]. Only used
if timing is set to hz.

=back




=head2 aresample


Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
automatically convert between its input and output.

This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.

The filter accepts the syntax
[I<sample_rate>:]I<resampler_options>, where I<sample_rate>
expresses a sample rate and I<resampler_options> is a list of
I<key>=I<value> pairs, separated by ":". See the
B<"Resampler Options" section in the
ffmpeg-resampler(1) manual>
for the complete list of supported options.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
	
	aresample=44100



=item *

Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
samples per second compensation:
	
	aresample=async=1000


=back



=head2 areverse


Reverse an audio clip.

Warning: This filter requires memory to buffer the entire clip, so trimming
is suggested.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Take the first 5 seconds of a clip, and reverse it.
	
	atrim=end=5,areverse


=back



=head2 arls

Apply Recursive Least Squares algorithm to the first audio stream using the second audio stream.

This adaptive filter is used to mimic a desired filter by recursively finding the filter coefficients that
relate to producing the minimal weighted linear least squares cost function of the error signal (difference
between the desired, 2nd input audio stream and the actual signal, the 1st input audio stream).

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<order>

Set the filter order.


=item B<lambda>

Set the forgetting factor.


=item B<delta>

Set the coefficient to initialize internal covariance matrix.


=item B<out_mode>

Set the filter output samples. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<i>

Pass the 1st input.


=item B<d>

Pass the 2nd input.


=item B<o>

Pass difference between desired, 2nd input and error signal estimate.


=item B<n>

Pass difference between input, 1st input and error signal estimate.


=item B<e>

Pass error signal estimated samples.

Default value is I<o>.

=back



=item B<precision>

Set which precision to use when processing samples.


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto pick internal sample format depending on other filters.


=item B<float>

Always use single-floating point precision sample format.


=item B<double>

Always use double-floating point precision sample format.

=back


=back



=head2 arnndn


Reduce noise from speech using Recurrent Neural Networks.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<model, m>

Set train model file to load. This option is always required.


=item B<mix>

Set how much to mix filtered samples into final output.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 1.
Negative values are special, they set how much to keep filtered noise
in the final filter output. Set this option to -1 to hear actual
noise removed from input signal.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 asdr

Measure Audio Signal-to-Distortion Ratio.

This filter takes two audio streams for input, and outputs first
audio stream.
Results are in dB per channel at end of either input.


=head2 asetnsamples


Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.

The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
signals its end.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<nb_out_samples, n>

Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
intended as the number of samples I<per each channel>.
Default value is 1024.


=item B<pad, p>

If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
previous ones. Default value is 1.

=back


For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
disable padding for the last frame, use:
	
	asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0



=head2 asetrate


Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
This will result in a change of speed and pitch.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.

=back



=head2 ashowinfo


Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
The input audio is not modified.

The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
I<key>:I<value>.

The following values are shown in the output:


=over 4


=item B<n>

The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.


=item B<pts>

The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/I<sample_rate>.


=item B<pts_time>

The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.


=item B<fmt>

The sample format.


=item B<chlayout>

The channel layout.


=item B<rate>

The sample rate for the audio frame.


=item B<nb_samples>

The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.


=item B<checksum>

The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.


=item B<plane_checksums>

A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.

=back



=head2 asisdr

Measure Audio Scaled-Invariant Signal-to-Distortion Ratio.

This filter takes two audio streams for input, and outputs first
audio stream.
Results are in dB per channel at end of either input.


=head2 asoftclip

Apply audio soft clipping.

Soft clipping is a type of distortion effect where the amplitude of a signal is saturated
along a smooth curve, rather than the abrupt shape of hard-clipping.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<type>

Set type of soft-clipping.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<hard>


=item B<tanh>


=item B<atan>


=item B<cubic>


=item B<exp>


=item B<alg>


=item B<quintic>


=item B<sin>


=item B<erf>


=back



=item B<threshold>

Set threshold from where to start clipping. Default value is 0dB or 1.


=item B<output>

Set gain applied to output. Default value is 0dB or 1.


=item B<param>

Set additional parameter which controls sigmoid function.


=item B<oversample>

Set oversampling factor.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 aspectralstats


Display frequency domain statistical information about the audio channels.
Statistics are calculated and stored as metadata for each audio channel and for each audio frame.

It accepts the following option:

=over 4


=item B<win_size>

Set the window length in samples. Default value is 2048.
Allowed range is from 32 to 65536.


=item B<win_func>

Set window function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hann, hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back

Default is C<hann>.


=item B<overlap>

Set window overlap. Allowed range is from C<0>
to C<1>. Default value is C<0.5>.


=item B<measure>

Select the parameters which are measured. The metadata keys can
be used as flags, default is B<all> which measures everything.
B<none> disables all measurement.

=back


A list of each metadata key follows:


=over 4


=item B<mean>


=item B<variance>


=item B<centroid>


=item B<spread>


=item B<skewness>


=item B<kurtosis>


=item B<entropy>


=item B<flatness>


=item B<crest>


=item B<flux>


=item B<slope>


=item B<decrease>


=item B<rolloff>


=back



=head2 asr

Automatic Speech Recognition

This filter uses PocketSphinx for speech recognition. To enable
compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-pocketsphinx>.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rate>

Set sampling rate of input audio. Defaults is C<16000>.
This need to match speech models, otherwise one will get poor results.


=item B<hmm>

Set dictionary containing acoustic model files.


=item B<dict>

Set pronunciation dictionary.


=item B<lm>

Set language model file.


=item B<lmctl>

Set language model set.


=item B<lmname>

Set which language model to use.


=item B<logfn>

Set output for log messages.

=back


The filter exports recognized speech as the frame metadata C<lavfi.asr.text>.



=head2 astats


Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
where applicable, an overall figure is also given.

It accepts the following option:

=over 4


=item B<length>

Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
Default is C<0.05> (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is C<[0 - 10]>.


=item B<metadata>


Set metadata injection. All the metadata keys are prefixed with C<lavfi.astats.X>,
where C<X> is channel number starting from 1 or string C<Overall>. Default is
disabled.

Available keys for each channel are:
I<Bit_depth>
I<Crest_factor>
I<DC_offset>
I<Dynamic_range>
I<Entropy>
I<Flat_factor>
I<Max_difference>
I<Max_level>
I<Mean_difference>
I<Min_difference>
I<Min_level>
I<Noise_floor>
I<Noise_floor_count>
I<Number_of_Infs>
I<Number_of_NaNs>
I<Number_of_denormals>
I<Peak_count>
I<Abs_Peak_count>
I<Peak_level>
I<RMS_difference>
I<RMS_peak>
I<RMS_trough>
I<Zero_crossings>
I<Zero_crossings_rate>

and for C<Overall>:
I<Bit_depth>
I<DC_offset>
I<Entropy>
I<Flat_factor>
I<Max_difference>
I<Max_level>
I<Mean_difference>
I<Min_difference>
I<Min_level>
I<Noise_floor>
I<Noise_floor_count>
I<Number_of_Infs>
I<Number_of_NaNs>
I<Number_of_denormals>
I<Number_of_samples>
I<Peak_count>
I<Abs_Peak_count>
I<Peak_level>
I<RMS_difference>
I<RMS_level>
I<RMS_peak>
I<RMS_trough>

For example, a full key looks like C<lavfi.astats.1.DC_offset> or
C<lavfi.astats.Overall.Peak_count>.

Read below for the description of the keys.


=item B<reset>

Set the number of frames over which cumulative stats are calculated before
being reset. Default is disabled.


=item B<measure_perchannel>

Select the parameters which are measured per channel. The metadata keys can
be used as flags, default is B<all> which measures everything.
B<none> disables all per channel measurement.


=item B<measure_overall>

Select the parameters which are measured overall. The metadata keys can
be used as flags, default is B<all> which measures everything.
B<none> disables all overall measurement.


=back


A description of the measure keys follow:


=over 4


=item B<none>

no measures


=item B<all>

all measures


=item B<Bit_depth>

overall bit depth of audio, i.e. number of bits used for each sample


=item B<Crest_factor>

standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB)


=item B<DC_offset>

mean amplitude displacement from zero


=item B<Dynamic_range>

measured dynamic range of audio in dB


=item B<Entropy>

entropy measured across whole audio, entropy of value near 1.0 is typically measured for white noise


=item B<Flat_factor>

flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
(i.e. either I<Min_level> or I<Max_level>)


=item B<Max_difference>

maximal difference between two consecutive samples


=item B<Max_level>

maximal sample level


=item B<Mean_difference>

mean difference between two consecutive samples, i.e. the average of each difference between two consecutive samples


=item B<Min_difference>

minimal difference between two consecutive samples


=item B<Min_level>

minimal sample level


=item B<Noise_floor>

minimum local peak measured in dBFS over a short window


=item B<Noise_floor_count>

number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained
I<Noise floor>


=item B<Number_of_Infs>

number of samples with an infinite value


=item B<Number_of_NaNs>

number of samples with a NaN (not a number) value


=item B<Number_of_denormals>

number of samples with a subnormal value


=item B<Number_of_samples>

number of samples


=item B<Peak_count>

number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
I<Min_level> or I<Max_level>


=item B<Abs_Peak_count>

number of occasions that the absolute samples taken from the signal attained
max absolute value of I<Min_level> and I<Max_level>


=item B<Peak_level>

standard peak level measured in dBFS


=item B<RMS_difference>

Root Mean Square difference between two consecutive samples


=item B<RMS_level>

standard RMS level measured in dBFS


=item B<RMS_peak>


=item B<RMS_trough>

peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window,
measured in dBFS.


=item B<Zero crossings>

number of points where the waveform crosses the zero level axis


=item B<Zero crossings rate>

rate of Zero crossings and number of audio samples

=back



=head2 asubboost

Boost subwoofer frequencies.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dry>

Set dry gain, how much of original signal is kept. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 1.0.


=item B<wet>

Set wet gain, how much of filtered signal is kept. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 1.0.


=item B<boost>

Set max boost factor. Allowed range is from 1 to 12. Default value is 2.


=item B<decay>

Set delay line decay gain value. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.0.


=item B<feedback>

Set delay line feedback gain value. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.9.


=item B<cutoff>

Set cutoff frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 50 to 900.
Default value is 100.


=item B<slope>

Set slope amount for cutoff frequency. Allowed range is 0.0001 to 1.
Default value is 0.5.


=item B<delay>

Set delay. Allowed range is from 1 to 100.
Default value is 20.


=item B<channels>

Set the channels to process. Default value is all available.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 asubcut

Cut subwoofer frequencies.

This filter allows to set custom, steeper
roll off than highpass filter, and thus is able to more attenuate
frequency content in stop-band.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<cutoff>

Set cutoff frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 2 to 200.
Default value is 20.


=item B<order>

Set filter order. Available values are from 3 to 20.
Default value is 10.


=item B<level>

Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 asupercut

Cut super frequencies.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<cutoff>

Set cutoff frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 20000 to 192000.
Default value is 20000.


=item B<order>

Set filter order. Available values are from 3 to 20.
Default value is 10.


=item B<level>

Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 asuperpass

Apply high order Butterworth band-pass filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<centerf>

Set center frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 2 to 999999.
Default value is 1000.


=item B<order>

Set filter order. Available values are from 4 to 20.
Default value is 4.


=item B<qfactor>

Set Q-factor. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 100. Default value is 1.


=item B<level>

Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 2. Default value is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 asuperstop

Apply high order Butterworth band-stop filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<centerf>

Set center frequency in Hertz. Allowed range is 2 to 999999.
Default value is 1000.


=item B<order>

Set filter order. Available values are from 4 to 20.
Default value is 4.


=item B<qfactor>

Set Q-factor. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 100. Default value is 1.


=item B<level>

Set input gain level. Allowed range is from 0 to 2. Default value is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 atempo


Adjust audio tempo.

The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
be in the [0.5, 100.0] range.

Note that tempo greater than 2 will skip some samples rather than
blend them in.  If for any reason this is a concern it is always
possible to daisy-chain several instances of atempo to achieve the
desired product tempo.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
	
	atempo=0.8



=item *

To speed up audio to 300% tempo:
	
	atempo=3



=item *

To speed up audio to 300% tempo by daisy-chaining two atempo instances:
	
	atempo=sqrt(3),atempo=sqrt(3)


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<tempo>

Change filter tempo scale factor.
Syntax for the command is : "I<tempo>"

=back



=head2 atilt

Apply spectral tilt filter to audio stream.

This filter apply any spectral roll-off slope over any specified frequency band.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<freq>

Set central frequency of tilt in Hz. Default is 10000 Hz.


=item B<slope>

Set slope direction of tilt. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<width>

Set width of tilt. Default is 1000. Allowed range is from 100 to 10000.


=item B<order>

Set order of tilt filter.


=item B<level>

Set input volume level. Allowed range is from 0 to 4.
Default is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 atrim


Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<start>

Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
sample with the timestamp I<start> will be the first sample in the output.


=item B<end>

Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp I<end> will be
the last sample in the output.


=item B<start_pts>

Same as I<start>, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
instead of seconds.


=item B<end_pts>

Same as I<end>, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
of seconds.


=item B<duration>

The maximum duration of the output in seconds.


=item B<start_sample>

The number of the first sample that should be output.


=item B<end_sample>

The number of the first sample that should be dropped.

=back


B<start>, B<end>, and B<duration> are expressed as time
duration specifications; see
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>.

Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the B<duration>
option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
atrim filter.

If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
filters.

The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.

Examples:

=over 4


=item *

Drop everything except the second minute of input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120



=item *

Keep only the first 1000 samples:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000



=back



=head2 axcorrelate

Calculate normalized windowed cross-correlation between two input audio streams.

Resulted samples are always between -1 and 1 inclusive.
If result is 1 it means two input samples are highly correlated in that selected segment.
Result 0 means they are not correlated at all.
If result is -1 it means two input samples are out of phase, which means they cancel each
other.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size>

Set size of segment over which cross-correlation is calculated.
Default is 256. Allowed range is from 2 to 131072.


=item B<algo>

Set algorithm for cross-correlation. Can be C<slow> or C<fast> or C<best>.
Default is C<best>. Fast algorithm assumes mean values over any given segment
are always zero and thus need much less calculations to make.
This is generally not true, but is valid for typical audio streams.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Calculate correlation between channels in stereo audio stream:
	
	ffmpeg -i stereo.wav -af channelsplit,axcorrelate=size=1024:algo=fast correlation.wav


=back



=head2 bandpass


Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
frequency I<frequency>, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
The I<csg> option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Set the filter's central frequency. Default is C<3000>.


=item B<csg>

Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change bandpass frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change bandpass width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change bandpass width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change bandpass mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 bandreject


Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
frequency I<frequency>, and (3dB-point) band-width I<width>.
The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Set the filter's central frequency. Default is C<3000>.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change bandreject frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change bandreject width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change bandreject width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change bandreject mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 bass, lowshelf


Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<gain, g>

Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
(for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.


=item B<frequency, f>

Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
The default value is C<100> Hz.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.


=item B<poles, p>

Set number of poles. Default is 2.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change bass frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change bass width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change bass width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<gain, g>

Change bass gain.
Syntax for the command is : "I<gain>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change bass mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 biquad


Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
Where I<b0>, I<b1>, I<b2> and I<a0>, I<a1>, I<a2>
are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
and I<channels>, I<c> specify which channels to filter, by default all
available are filtered.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<a0>


=item B<a1>


=item B<a2>


=item B<b0>


=item B<b1>


=item B<b2>

Change biquad parameter.
Syntax for the command is : "I<value>"


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head2 bs2b

Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
stereo audio records.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libbs2b>.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<profile>

Pre-defined crossfeed level.

=over 4



=item B<default>

Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).


=item B<cmoy>

Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).


=item B<jmeier>

Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).


=back



=item B<fcut>

Cut frequency (in Hz).


=item B<feed>

Feed level (in Hz).


=back



=head2 channelmap


Remap input channels to new locations.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<map>

Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
mappings, each in the C<I<in_channel>-I<out_channel>> or
C<I<in_channel>> form. I<in_channel> can be either the name of the
input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel
layout. I<out_channel> is the name of the output channel or its index in the
output channel layout. If I<out_channel> is not given then it is implicitly
an index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping. Mixing
different types of mappings is not allowed and will result in a parse error.


=item B<channel_layout>

The channel layout of the output stream. If not specified, then filter will
guess it based on the I<out_channel> names or the number of mappings.
Guessed layouts will not necessarily contain channels in the order of the
mappings.

=back


If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
output channels, preserving indices.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav

will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
the input.


=item *

To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
	
	ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:5.1' out.wav


=back



=head2 channelsplit


Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<channel_layout>

The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".

=item B<channels>

A channel layout describing the channels to be extracted as separate output streams
or "all" to extract each input channel as a separate stream. The default is "all".

Choosing channels not present in channel layout in the input will result in an error.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
	
	ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv

will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
the left channel and the other the right channel.


=item *

Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
	'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
	-map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
	front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
	side_right.wav



=item *

Extract only LFE from a 5.1 WAV file:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1:channels=LFE[LFE]'
	-map '[LFE]' lfe.wav


=back



=head2 chorus

Add a chorus effect to the audio.

Can make a single vocal sound like a chorus, but can also be applied to instrumentation.

Chorus resembles an echo effect with a short delay, but whereas with echo the delay is
constant, with chorus, it is varied using using sinusoidal or triangular modulation.
The modulation depth defines the range the modulated delay is played before or after
the delay. Hence the delayed sound will sound slower or faster, that is the delayed
sound tuned around the original one, like in a chorus where some vocals are slightly
off key.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<in_gain>

Set input gain. Default is 0.4.


=item B<out_gain>

Set output gain. Default is 0.4.


=item B<delays>

Set delays. A typical delay is around 40ms to 60ms.


=item B<decays>

Set decays.


=item B<speeds>

Set speeds.


=item B<depths>

Set depths.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

A single delay:
	
	chorus=0.7:0.9:55:0.4:0.25:2



=item *

Two delays:
	
	chorus=0.6:0.9:50|60:0.4|0.32:0.25|0.4:2|1.3



=item *

Fuller sounding chorus with three delays:
	
	chorus=0.5:0.9:50|60|40:0.4|0.32|0.3:0.25|0.4|0.3:2|2.3|1.3


=back



=head2 compand

Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<attacks>


=item B<decays>

A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. I<attacks> refers to
increase of volume and I<decays> refers to decrease of volume. For most
situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
If specified number of attacks & decays is lower than number of channels, the last
set attack/decay will be used for all remaining channels.


=item B<points>

A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
the following syntax: C<x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....> or
C<x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....>

The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
does not have to be monotonically rising. The point C<0/0> is assumed but
may be overridden (by C<0/out-dBn>). Typical values for the transfer
function are C<-70/-70|-60/-20|1/0>.


=item B<soft-knee>

Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.


=item B<gain>

Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
It defaults to 0.


=item B<volume>

Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.


=item B<delay>

Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
noisy environment:
	
	compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2


Another example for audio with whisper and explosion parts:
	
	compand=0|0:1|1:-90/-900|-70/-70|-30/-9|0/-3:6:0:0:0



=item *

A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
	
	compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1



=item *

Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
	
	compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1



=item *

2:1 compression starting at -6dB:
	
	compand=points=-80/-80|-6/-6|0/-3.8|20/3.5



=item *

2:1 compression starting at -9dB:
	
	compand=points=-80/-80|-9/-9|0/-5.3|20/2.9



=item *

2:1 compression starting at -12dB:
	
	compand=points=-80/-80|-12/-12|0/-6.8|20/1.9



=item *

2:1 compression starting at -18dB:
	
	compand=points=-80/-80|-18/-18|0/-9.8|20/0.7



=item *

3:1 compression starting at -15dB:
	
	compand=points=-80/-80|-15/-15|0/-10.8|20/-5.2



=item *

Compressor/Gate:
	
	compand=points=-80/-105|-62/-80|-15.4/-15.4|0/-12|20/-7.6



=item *

Expander:
	
	compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-169|-54/-80|-49.5/-64.6|-41.1/-41.1|-25.8/-15|-10.8/-4.5|0/0|20/8.3



=item *

Hard limiter at -6dB:
	
	compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-80|-6/-6|20/-6



=item *

Hard limiter at -12dB:
	
	compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-80|-12/-12|20/-12



=item *

Hard noise gate at -35 dB:
	
	compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-115|-35.1/-80|-35/-35|20/20



=item *

Soft limiter:
	
	compand=attacks=0:points=-80/-80|-12.4/-12.4|-6/-8|0/-6.8|20/-2.8


=back



=head2 compensationdelay


Compensation Delay Line is a metric based delay to compensate differing
positions of microphones or speakers.

For example, you have recorded guitar with two microphones placed in
different locations. Because the front of sound wave has fixed speed in
normal conditions, the phasing of microphones can vary and depends on
their location and interposition. The best sound mix can be achieved when
these microphones are in phase (synchronized). Note that a distance of
~30 cm between microphones makes one microphone capture the signal in
antiphase to the other microphone. That makes the final mix sound moody.
This filter helps to solve phasing problems by adding different delays
to each microphone track and make them synchronized.

The best result can be reached when you take one track as base and
synchronize other tracks one by one with it.
Remember that synchronization/delay tolerance depends on sample rate, too.
Higher sample rates will give more tolerance.

The filter accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mm>

Set millimeters distance. This is compensation distance for fine tuning.
Default is 0.


=item B<cm>

Set cm distance. This is compensation distance for tightening distance setup.
Default is 0.


=item B<m>

Set meters distance. This is compensation distance for hard distance setup.
Default is 0.


=item B<dry>

Set dry amount. Amount of unprocessed (dry) signal.
Default is 0.


=item B<wet>

Set wet amount. Amount of processed (wet) signal.
Default is 1.


=item B<temp>

Set temperature in degrees Celsius. This is the temperature of the environment.
Default is 20.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 crossfeed

Apply headphone crossfeed filter.

Crossfeed is the process of blending the left and right channels of stereo
audio recording.
It is mainly used to reduce extreme stereo separation of low frequencies.

The intent is to produce more speaker like sound to the listener.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<strength>

Set strength of crossfeed. Default is 0.2. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
This sets gain of low shelf filter for side part of stereo image.
Default is -6dB. Max allowed is -30db when strength is set to 1.


=item B<range>

Set soundstage wideness. Default is 0.5. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
This sets cut off frequency of low shelf filter. Default is cut off near
1550 Hz. With range set to 1 cut off frequency is set to 2100 Hz.


=item B<slope>

Set curve slope of low shelf filter. Default is 0.5.
Allowed range is from 0.01 to 1.


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain. Default is 0.9.


=item B<level_out>

Set output gain. Default is 1.


=item B<block_size>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 crystalizer

Simple algorithm for audio noise sharpening.

This filter linearly increases differences between each audio sample.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<i>

Sets the intensity of effect (default: 2.0). Must be in range between -10.0 to 0
(unchanged sound) to 10.0 (maximum effect).
To inverse filtering use negative value.


=item B<c>

Enable clipping. By default is enabled.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 dcshift

Apply a DC shift to the audio.

This can be useful to remove a DC offset (caused perhaps by a hardware problem
in the recording chain) from the audio. The effect of a DC offset is reduced
headroom and hence volume. The B<astats> filter can be used to determine if
a signal has a DC offset.


=over 4


=item B<shift>

Set the DC shift, allowed range is [-1, 1]. It indicates the amount to shift
the audio.


=item B<limitergain>

Optional. It should have a value much less than 1 (e.g. 0.05 or 0.02) and is
used to prevent clipping.

=back



=head2 deesser


Apply de-essing to the audio samples.


=over 4


=item B<i>

Set intensity for triggering de-essing. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default is 0.


=item B<m>

Set amount of ducking on treble part of sound. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default is 0.5.


=item B<f>

How much of original frequency content to keep when de-essing. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default is 0.5.


=item B<s>

Set the output mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<i>

Pass input unchanged.


=item B<o>

Pass ess filtered out.


=item B<e>

Pass only ess.

Default value is I<o>.

=back



=back



=head2 dialoguenhance

Enhance dialogue in stereo audio.

This filter accepts stereo input and produce surround (3.0) channels output.
The newly produced front center channel have enhanced speech dialogue originally
available in both stereo channels.
This filter outputs front left and front right channels same as available in stereo input.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<original>

Set the original center factor to keep in front center channel output.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 1.


=item B<enhance>

Set the dialogue enhance factor to put in front center channel output.
Allowed range is from 0 to 3. Default value is 1.


=item B<voice>

Set the voice detection factor.
Allowed range is from 2 to 32. Default value is 2.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 drmeter

Measure audio dynamic range.

DR values of 14 and higher is found in very dynamic material. DR of 8 to 13
is found in transition material. And anything less that 8 have very poor dynamics
and is very compressed.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<length>

Set window length in seconds used to split audio into segments of equal length.
Default is 3 seconds.

=back



=head2 dynaudnorm

Dynamic Audio Normalizer.

This filter applies a certain amount of gain to the input audio in order
to bring its peak magnitude to a target level (e.g. 0 dBFS). However, in
contrast to more "simple" normalization algorithms, the Dynamic Audio
Normalizer *dynamically* re-adjusts the gain factor to the input audio.
This allows for applying extra gain to the "quiet" sections of the audio
while avoiding distortions or clipping the "loud" sections. In other words:
The Dynamic Audio Normalizer will "even out" the volume of quiet and loud
sections, in the sense that the volume of each section is brought to the
same target level. Note, however, that the Dynamic Audio Normalizer achieves
this goal *without* applying "dynamic range compressing". It will retain 100%
of the dynamic range *within* each section of the audio file.


=over 4


=item B<framelen, f>

Set the frame length in milliseconds. In range from 10 to 8000 milliseconds.
Default is 500 milliseconds.
The Dynamic Audio Normalizer processes the input audio in small chunks,
referred to as frames. This is required, because a peak magnitude has no
meaning for just a single sample value. Instead, we need to determine the
peak magnitude for a contiguous sequence of sample values. While a "standard"
normalizer would simply use the peak magnitude of the complete file, the
Dynamic Audio Normalizer determines the peak magnitude individually for each
frame. The length of a frame is specified in milliseconds. By default, the
Dynamic Audio Normalizer uses a frame length of 500 milliseconds, which has
been found to give good results with most files.
Note that the exact frame length, in number of samples, will be determined
automatically, based on the sampling rate of the individual input audio file.


=item B<gausssize, g>

Set the Gaussian filter window size. In range from 3 to 301, must be odd
number. Default is 31.
Probably the most important parameter of the Dynamic Audio Normalizer is the
C<window size> of the Gaussian smoothing filter. The filter's window size
is specified in frames, centered around the current frame. For the sake of
simplicity, this must be an odd number. Consequently, the default value of 31
takes into account the current frame, as well as the 15 preceding frames and
the 15 subsequent frames. Using a larger window results in a stronger
smoothing effect and thus in less gain variation, i.e. slower gain
adaptation. Conversely, using a smaller window results in a weaker smoothing
effect and thus in more gain variation, i.e. faster gain adaptation.
In other words, the more you increase this value, the more the Dynamic Audio
Normalizer will behave like a "traditional" normalization filter. On the
contrary, the more you decrease this value, the more the Dynamic Audio
Normalizer will behave like a dynamic range compressor.


=item B<peak, p>

Set the target peak value. This specifies the highest permissible magnitude
level for the normalized audio input. This filter will try to approach the
target peak magnitude as closely as possible, but at the same time it also
makes sure that the normalized signal will never exceed the peak magnitude.
A frame's maximum local gain factor is imposed directly by the target peak
magnitude. The default value is 0.95 and thus leaves a headroom of 5%*.
It is not recommended to go above this value.


=item B<maxgain, m>

Set the maximum gain factor. In range from 1.0 to 100.0. Default is 10.0.
The Dynamic Audio Normalizer determines the maximum possible (local) gain
factor for each input frame, i.e. the maximum gain factor that does not
result in clipping or distortion. The maximum gain factor is determined by
the frame's highest magnitude sample. However, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer
additionally bounds the frame's maximum gain factor by a predetermined
(global) maximum gain factor. This is done in order to avoid excessive gain
factors in "silent" or almost silent frames. By default, the maximum gain
factor is 10.0, For most inputs the default value should be sufficient and
it usually is not recommended to increase this value. Though, for input
with an extremely low overall volume level, it may be necessary to allow even
higher gain factors. Note, however, that the Dynamic Audio Normalizer does
not simply apply a "hard" threshold (i.e. cut off values above the threshold).
Instead, a "sigmoid" threshold function will be applied. This way, the
gain factors will smoothly approach the threshold value, but never exceed that
value.


=item B<targetrms, r>

Set the target RMS. In range from 0.0 to 1.0. Default is 0.0 - disabled.
By default, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer performs "peak" normalization.
This means that the maximum local gain factor for each frame is defined
(only) by the frame's highest magnitude sample. This way, the samples can
be amplified as much as possible without exceeding the maximum signal
level, i.e. without clipping. Optionally, however, the Dynamic Audio
Normalizer can also take into account the frame's root mean square,
abbreviated RMS. In electrical engineering, the RMS is commonly used to
determine the power of a time-varying signal. It is therefore considered
that the RMS is a better approximation of the "perceived loudness" than
just looking at the signal's peak magnitude. Consequently, by adjusting all
frames to a constant RMS value, a uniform "perceived loudness" can be
established. If a target RMS value has been specified, a frame's local gain
factor is defined as the factor that would result in exactly that RMS value.
Note, however, that the maximum local gain factor is still restricted by the
frame's highest magnitude sample, in order to prevent clipping.


=item B<coupling, n>

Enable channels coupling. By default is enabled.
By default, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer will amplify all channels by the same
amount. This means the same gain factor will be applied to all channels, i.e.
the maximum possible gain factor is determined by the "loudest" channel.
However, in some recordings, it may happen that the volume of the different
channels is uneven, e.g. one channel may be "quieter" than the other one(s).
In this case, this option can be used to disable the channel coupling. This way,
the gain factor will be determined independently for each channel, depending
only on the individual channel's highest magnitude sample. This allows for
harmonizing the volume of the different channels.


=item B<correctdc, c>

Enable DC bias correction. By default is disabled.
An audio signal (in the time domain) is a sequence of sample values.
In the Dynamic Audio Normalizer these sample values are represented in the
-1.0 to 1.0 range, regardless of the original input format. Normally, the
audio signal, or "waveform", should be centered around the zero point.
That means if we calculate the mean value of all samples in a file, or in a
single frame, then the result should be 0.0 or at least very close to that
value. If, however, there is a significant deviation of the mean value from
0.0, in either positive or negative direction, this is referred to as a
DC bias or DC offset. Since a DC bias is clearly undesirable, the Dynamic
Audio Normalizer provides optional DC bias correction.
With DC bias correction enabled, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer will determine
the mean value, or "DC correction" offset, of each input frame and subtract
that value from all of the frame's sample values which ensures those samples
are centered around 0.0 again. Also, in order to avoid "gaps" at the frame
boundaries, the DC correction offset values will be interpolated smoothly
between neighbouring frames.


=item B<altboundary, b>

Enable alternative boundary mode. By default is disabled.
The Dynamic Audio Normalizer takes into account a certain neighbourhood
around each frame. This includes the preceding frames as well as the
subsequent frames. However, for the "boundary" frames, located at the very
beginning and at the very end of the audio file, not all neighbouring
frames are available. In particular, for the first few frames in the audio
file, the preceding frames are not known. And, similarly, for the last few
frames in the audio file, the subsequent frames are not known. Thus, the
question arises which gain factors should be assumed for the missing frames
in the "boundary" region. The Dynamic Audio Normalizer implements two modes
to deal with this situation. The default boundary mode assumes a gain factor
of exactly 1.0 for the missing frames, resulting in a smooth "fade in" and
"fade out" at the beginning and at the end of the input, respectively.


=item B<compress, s>

Set the compress factor. In range from 0.0 to 30.0. Default is 0.0.
By default, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer does not apply "traditional"
compression. This means that signal peaks will not be pruned and thus the
full dynamic range will be retained within each local neighbourhood. However,
in some cases it may be desirable to combine the Dynamic Audio Normalizer's
normalization algorithm with a more "traditional" compression.
For this purpose, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer provides an optional compression
(thresholding) function. If (and only if) the compression feature is enabled,
all input frames will be processed by a soft knee thresholding function prior
to the actual normalization process. Put simply, the thresholding function is
going to prune all samples whose magnitude exceeds a certain threshold value.
However, the Dynamic Audio Normalizer does not simply apply a fixed threshold
value. Instead, the threshold value will be adjusted for each individual
frame.
In general, smaller parameters result in stronger compression, and vice versa.
Values below 3.0 are not recommended, because audible distortion may appear.


=item B<threshold, t>

Set the target threshold value. This specifies the lowest permissible
magnitude level for the audio input which will be normalized.
If input frame volume is above this value frame will be normalized.
Otherwise frame may not be normalized at all. The default value is set
to 0, which means all input frames will be normalized.
This option is mostly useful if digital noise is not wanted to be amplified.


=item B<channels, h>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available channels are filtered.


=item B<overlap, o>

Specify overlap for frames. If set to 0 (default) no frame overlapping is done.
Using E<gt>0 and E<lt>1 values will make less conservative gain adjustments, like
when framelen option is set to smaller value, if framelen option value is
compensated for non-zero overlap then gain adjustments will be smoother across time
compared to zero overlap case.


=item B<curve, v>

Specify the peak mapping curve expression which is going to be used when calculating
gain applied to frames. The max output frame gain will still be limited by other
options mentioned previously for this filter.

The expression can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<ch>

current channel number


=item B<sn>

current sample number


=item B<nb_channels>

number of channels


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds


=item B<sr>

sample rate


=item B<p>

current frame peak value

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 earwax


Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.

This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
the listener (standard for speakers).

Ported from SoX.


=head2 equalizer


Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.

In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
be given several times, each with a different central frequency.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.


=item B<gain, g>

Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
	
	equalizer=f=1000:t=h:width=200:g=-10



=item *

Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
	
	equalizer=f=1000:t=q:w=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:t=q:w=2:g=-5


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change equalizer frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change equalizer width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change equalizer width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<gain, g>

Change equalizer gain.
Syntax for the command is : "I<gain>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change equalizer mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 extrastereo


Linearly increases the difference between left and right channels which
adds some sort of "live" effect to playback.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<m>

Sets the difference coefficient (default: 2.5). 0.0 means mono sound
(average of both channels), with 1.0 sound will be unchanged, with
-1.0 left and right channels will be swapped.


=item B<c>

Enable clipping. By default is enabled.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 firequalizer

Apply FIR Equalization using arbitrary frequency response.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<gain>

Set gain curve equation (in dB). The expression can contain variables:

=over 4


=item B<f>

the evaluated frequency

=item B<sr>

sample rate

=item B<ch>

channel number, set to 0 when multichannels evaluation is disabled

=item B<chid>

channel id, see libavutil/channel_layout.h, set to the first channel id when
multichannels evaluation is disabled

=item B<chs>

number of channels

=item B<chlayout>

channel_layout, see libavutil/channel_layout.h


=back

and functions:

=over 4


=item B<gain_interpolate(f)>

interpolate gain on frequency f based on gain_entry

=item B<cubic_interpolate(f)>

same as gain_interpolate, but smoother

=back

This option is also available as command. Default is C<gain_interpolate(f)>.


=item B<gain_entry>

Set gain entry for gain_interpolate function. The expression can
contain functions:

=over 4


=item B<entry(f, g)>

store gain entry at frequency f with value g

=back

This option is also available as command.


=item B<delay>

Set filter delay in seconds. Higher value means more accurate.
Default is C<0.01>.


=item B<accuracy>

Set filter accuracy in Hz. Lower value means more accurate.
Default is C<5>.


=item B<wfunc>

Set window function. Acceptable values are:

=over 4


=item B<rectangular>

rectangular window, useful when gain curve is already smooth

=item B<hann>

hann window (default)

=item B<hamming>

hamming window

=item B<blackman>

blackman window

=item B<nuttall3>

3-terms continuous 1st derivative nuttall window

=item B<mnuttall3>

minimum 3-terms discontinuous nuttall window

=item B<nuttall>

4-terms continuous 1st derivative nuttall window

=item B<bnuttall>

minimum 4-terms discontinuous nuttall (blackman-nuttall) window

=item B<bharris>

blackman-harris window

=item B<tukey>

tukey window

=back



=item B<fixed>

If enabled, use fixed number of audio samples. This improves speed when
filtering with large delay. Default is disabled.


=item B<multi>

Enable multichannels evaluation on gain. Default is disabled.


=item B<zero_phase>

Enable zero phase mode by subtracting timestamp to compensate delay.
Default is disabled.


=item B<scale>

Set scale used by gain. Acceptable values are:

=over 4


=item B<linlin>

linear frequency, linear gain

=item B<linlog>

linear frequency, logarithmic (in dB) gain (default)

=item B<loglin>

logarithmic (in octave scale where 20 Hz is 0) frequency, linear gain

=item B<loglog>

logarithmic frequency, logarithmic gain

=back



=item B<dumpfile>

Set file for dumping, suitable for gnuplot.


=item B<dumpscale>

Set scale for dumpfile. Acceptable values are same with scale option.
Default is linlog.


=item B<fft2>

Enable 2-channel convolution using complex FFT. This improves speed significantly.
Default is disabled.


=item B<min_phase>

Enable minimum phase impulse response. Default is disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

lowpass at 1000 Hz:
	
	firequalizer=gain='if(lt(f,1000), 0, -INF)'


=item *

lowpass at 1000 Hz with gain_entry:
	
	firequalizer=gain_entry='entry(1000,0); entry(1001, -INF)'


=item *

custom equalization:
	
	firequalizer=gain_entry='entry(100,0); entry(400, -4); entry(1000, -6); entry(2000, 0)'


=item *

higher delay with zero phase to compensate delay:
	
	firequalizer=delay=0.1:fixed=on:zero_phase=on


=item *

lowpass on left channel, highpass on right channel:
	
	firequalizer=gain='if(eq(chid,1), gain_interpolate(f), if(eq(chid,2), gain_interpolate(1e6+f), 0))'
	:gain_entry='entry(1000, 0); entry(1001,-INF); entry(1e6+1000,0)':multi=on


=back



=head2 flanger

Apply a flanging effect to the audio.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<delay>

Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.


=item B<depth>

Set added sweep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.


=item B<regen>

Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
Default value is 0.


=item B<width>

Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
Default value is 71.


=item B<speed>

Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.


=item B<shape>

Set swept wave shape, can be I<triangular> or I<sinusoidal>.
Default value is I<sinusoidal>.


=item B<phase>

Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
Default value is 25.


=item B<interp>

Set delay-line interpolation, I<linear> or I<quadratic>.
Default is I<linear>.

=back



=head2 haas

Apply Haas effect to audio.

Note that this makes most sense to apply on mono signals.
With this filter applied to mono signals it give some directionality and
stretches its stereo image.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input level. By default is I<1>, or 0dB


=item B<level_out>

Set output level. By default is I<1>, or 0dB.


=item B<side_gain>

Set gain applied to side part of signal. By default is I<1>.


=item B<middle_source>

Set kind of middle source. Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<left>

Pick left channel.


=item B<right>

Pick right channel.


=item B<mid>

Pick middle part signal of stereo image.


=item B<side>

Pick side part signal of stereo image.

=back



=item B<middle_phase>

Change middle phase. By default is disabled.


=item B<left_delay>

Set left channel delay. By default is I<2.05> milliseconds.


=item B<left_balance>

Set left channel balance. By default is I<-1>.


=item B<left_gain>

Set left channel gain. By default is I<1>.


=item B<left_phase>

Change left phase. By default is disabled.


=item B<right_delay>

Set right channel delay. By defaults is I<2.12> milliseconds.


=item B<right_balance>

Set right channel balance. By default is I<1>.


=item B<right_gain>

Set right channel gain. By default is I<1>.


=item B<right_phase>

Change right phase. By default is enabled.

=back



=head2 hdcd


Decodes High Definition Compatible Digital (HDCD) data. A 16-bit PCM stream with
embedded HDCD codes is expanded into a 20-bit PCM stream.

The filter supports the Peak Extend and Low-level Gain Adjustment features
of HDCD, and detects the Transient Filter flag.

	
	ffmpeg -i HDCD16.flac -af hdcd OUT24.flac


When using the filter with wav, note the default encoding for wav is 16-bit,
so the resulting 20-bit stream will be truncated back to 16-bit. Use something
like B<-acodec pcm_s24le> after the filter to get 24-bit PCM output.
	
	ffmpeg -i HDCD16.wav -af hdcd OUT16.wav
	ffmpeg -i HDCD16.wav -af hdcd -c:a pcm_s24le OUT24.wav


The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<disable_autoconvert>

Disable any automatic format conversion or resampling in the filter graph.


=item B<process_stereo>

Process the stereo channels together. If target_gain does not match between
channels, consider it invalid and use the last valid target_gain.


=item B<cdt_ms>

Set the code detect timer period in ms.


=item B<force_pe>

Always extend peaks above -3dBFS even if PE isn't signaled.


=item B<analyze_mode>

Replace audio with a solid tone and adjust the amplitude to signal some
specific aspect of the decoding process. The output file can be loaded in
an audio editor alongside the original to aid analysis.

C<analyze_mode=pe:force_pe=true> can be used to see all samples above the PE level.

Modes are:

=over 4


=item B<0, off>

Disabled

=item B<1, lle>

Gain adjustment level at each sample

=item B<2, pe>

Samples where peak extend occurs

=item B<3, cdt>

Samples where the code detect timer is active

=item B<4, tgm>

Samples where the target gain does not match between channels

=back


=back



=head2 headphone


Apply head-related transfer functions (HRTFs) to create virtual
loudspeakers around the user for binaural listening via headphones.
The HRIRs are provided via additional streams, for each channel
one stereo input stream is needed.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<map>

Set mapping of input streams for convolution.
The argument is a '|'-separated list of channel names in order as they
are given as additional stream inputs for filter.
This also specify number of input streams. Number of input streams
must be not less than number of channels in first stream plus one.


=item B<gain>

Set gain applied to audio. Value is in dB. Default is 0.


=item B<type>

Set processing type. Can be I<time> or I<freq>. I<time> is
processing audio in time domain which is slow.
I<freq> is processing audio in frequency domain which is fast.
Default is I<freq>.


=item B<lfe>

Set custom gain for LFE channels. Value is in dB. Default is 0.


=item B<size>

Set size of frame in number of samples which will be processed at once.
Default value is I<1024>. Allowed range is from 1024 to 96000.


=item B<hrir>

Set format of hrir stream.
Default value is I<stereo>. Alternative value is I<multich>.
If value is set to I<stereo>, number of additional streams should
be greater or equal to number of input channels in first input stream.
Also each additional stream should have stereo number of channels.
If value is set to I<multich>, number of additional streams should
be exactly one. Also number of input channels of additional stream
should be equal or greater than twice number of channels of first input
stream.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Full example using wav files as coefficients with amovie filters for 7.1 downmix,
each amovie filter use stereo file with IR coefficients as input.
The files give coefficients for each position of virtual loudspeaker:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.wav
	-filter_complex "amovie=azi_270_ele_0_DFC.wav[sr];amovie=azi_90_ele_0_DFC.wav[sl];amovie=azi_225_ele_0_DFC.wav[br];amovie=azi_135_ele_0_DFC.wav[bl];amovie=azi_0_ele_0_DFC.wav,asplit[fc][lfe];amovie=azi_35_ele_0_DFC.wav[fl];amovie=azi_325_ele_0_DFC.wav[fr];[0:a][fl][fr][fc][lfe][bl][br][sl][sr]headphone=FL|FR|FC|LFE|BL|BR|SL|SR"
	output.wav



=item *

Full example using wav files as coefficients with amovie filters for 7.1 downmix,
but now in I<multich> I<hrir> format.
	
	ffmpeg -i input.wav -filter_complex "amovie=minp.wav[hrirs];[0:a][hrirs]headphone=map=FL|FR|FC|LFE|BL|BR|SL|SR:hrir=multich"
	output.wav


=back



=head2 highpass


Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.


=item B<poles, p>

Set number of poles. Default is 2.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
Applies only to double-pole filter.
The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change highpass frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change highpass width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change highpass width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change highpass mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 join


Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<inputs>

The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.


=item B<channel_layout>

The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.


=item B<map>

Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
mappings, each in the C<I<input_idx>.I<in_channel>-I<out_channel>>
form. I<input_idx> is the 0-based index of the input stream. I<in_channel>
can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
index in the specified input stream. I<out_channel> is the name of the output
channel.

=back


The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.

Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT


Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
	
	ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
	'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
	out



=head2 ladspa


Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-ladspa>.


=over 4


=item B<file, f>

Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
variable B<LADSPA_PATH> is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
B<LADSPA_PATH>, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
this order: F<HOME/.ladspa/lib/>, F</usr/local/lib/ladspa/>,
F</usr/lib/ladspa/>.


=item B<plugin, p>

Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
will list all available plugins within the specified library.


=item B<controls, c>

Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
threshold or gain).
Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
c0=I<value0>|c1=I<value1>|c2=I<value2>|..., where
I<valuei> is the value set on the I<i>-th control.
Alternatively they can be also defined using the following syntax:
I<value0>|I<value1>|I<value2>|..., where
I<valuei> is the value set on the I<i>-th control.
If B<controls> is set to C<help>, all available controls and
their valid ranges are printed.


=item B<sample_rate, s>

Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
zero inputs.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.


=item B<duration, d>

Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
supposed to be generated forever.
Only used if plugin have zero inputs.


=item B<latency, l>

Enable latency compensation, by default is disabled.
Only used if plugin have inputs.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
	
	ladspa=file=amp



=item *

List all available controls and their valid ranges for C<vcf_notch>
plugin from C<VCF> library:
	
	ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help



=item *

Simulate low quality audio equipment using C<Computer Music Toolkit> (CMT)
plugin library:
	
	ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12



=item *

Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
(Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
	
	ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb



=item *

Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
	
	ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2



=item *

Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin C<C* Click - Metronome> from the
C<C* Audio Plugin Suite> (CAPS) library:
	
	ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'



=item *

Apply C<C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser> effect:
	
	ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2



=item *

Increase volume by 20dB using fast lookahead limiter from Steve Harris
C<SWH Plugins> collection:
	
	ladspa=fast_lookahead_limiter_1913:fastLookaheadLimiter:20|0|2



=item *

Attenuate low frequencies using Multiband EQ from Steve Harris
C<SWH Plugins> collection:
	
	ladspa=mbeq_1197:mbeq:-24|-24|-24|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0|0



=item *

Reduce stereo image using C<Narrower> from the C<C* Audio Plugin Suite>
(CAPS) library:
	
	ladspa=caps:Narrower



=item *

Another white noise, now using C<C* Audio Plugin Suite> (CAPS) library:
	
	ladspa=caps:White:.2



=item *

Some fractal noise, using C<C* Audio Plugin Suite> (CAPS) library:
	
	ladspa=caps:Fractal:c=c1=1



=item *

Dynamic volume normalization using C<VLevel> plugin:
	
	ladspa=vlevel-ladspa:vlevel_mono


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<cN>

Modify the I<N>-th control value.

If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.

=back



=head2 loudnorm


EBU R128 loudness normalization. Includes both dynamic and linear normalization modes.
Support for both single pass (livestreams, files) and double pass (files) modes.
This algorithm can target IL, LRA, and maximum true peak. In dynamic mode, to accurately
detect true peaks, the audio stream will be upsampled to 192 kHz.
Use the C<-ar> option or C<aresample> filter to explicitly set an output sample rate.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<I, i>

Set integrated loudness target.
Range is -70.0 - -5.0. Default value is -24.0.


=item B<LRA, lra>

Set loudness range target.
Range is 1.0 - 50.0. Default value is 7.0.


=item B<TP, tp>

Set maximum true peak.
Range is -9.0 - +0.0. Default value is -2.0.


=item B<measured_I, measured_i>

Measured IL of input file.
Range is -99.0 - +0.0.


=item B<measured_LRA, measured_lra>

Measured LRA of input file.
Range is  0.0 - 99.0.


=item B<measured_TP, measured_tp>

Measured true peak of input file.
Range is  -99.0 - +99.0.


=item B<measured_thresh>

Measured threshold of input file.
Range is -99.0 - +0.0.


=item B<offset>

Set offset gain. Gain is applied before the true-peak limiter.
Range is  -99.0 - +99.0. Default is +0.0.


=item B<linear>

Normalize by linearly scaling the source audio.
C<measured_I>, C<measured_LRA>, C<measured_TP>,
and C<measured_thresh> must all be specified. Target LRA shouldn't
be lower than source LRA and the change in integrated loudness shouldn't
result in a true peak which exceeds the target TP. If any of these
conditions aren't met, normalization mode will revert to I<dynamic>.
Options are C<true> or C<false>. Default is C<true>.


=item B<dual_mono>

Treat mono input files as "dual-mono". If a mono file is intended for playback
on a stereo system, its EBU R128 measurement will be perceptually incorrect.
If set to C<true>, this option will compensate for this effect.
Multi-channel input files are not affected by this option.
Options are true or false. Default is false.


=item B<print_format>

Set print format for stats. Options are summary, json, or none.
Default value is none.

=back



=head2 lowpass


Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.


=item B<poles, p>

Set number of poles. Default is 2.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
Applies only to double-pole filter.
The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Lowpass only LFE channel, it LFE is not present it does nothing:
	
	lowpass=c=LFE


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change lowpass frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change lowpass width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change lowpass width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change lowpass mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 lv2


Load a LV2 (LADSPA Version 2) plugin.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-lv2>.


=over 4


=item B<plugin, p>

Specifies the plugin URI. You may need to escape ':'.


=item B<controls, c>

Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
threshold or gain).
If B<controls> is set to C<help>, all available controls and
their valid ranges are printed.


=item B<sample_rate, s>

Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
zero inputs.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.


=item B<duration, d>

Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
supposed to be generated forever.
Only used if plugin have zero inputs.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply bass enhancer plugin from Calf:
	
	lv2=p=http\\\\://calf.sourceforge.net/plugins/BassEnhancer:c=amount=2



=item *

Apply vinyl plugin from Calf:
	
	lv2=p=http\\\\://calf.sourceforge.net/plugins/Vinyl:c=drone=0.2|aging=0.5



=item *

Apply bit crusher plugin from ArtyFX:
	
	lv2=p=http\\\\://www.openavproductions.com/artyfx#bitta:c=crush=0.3


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports all options that are exported by plugin as commands.


=head2 mcompand

Multiband Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.

The input audio is divided into bands using 4th order Linkwitz-Riley IIRs.
This is akin to the crossover of a loudspeaker, and results in flat frequency
response when absent compander action.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<args>

This option syntax is:
attack,decay,[attack,decay..] soft-knee points crossover_frequency [delay [initial_volume [gain]]] | attack,decay ...
For explanation of each item refer to compand filter documentation.

=back




=head2 pan


Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.

This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
stream.

The filter accepts parameters of the form:
"I<l>|I<outdef>|I<outdef>|..."


=over 4


=item B<l>

output channel layout or number of channels


=item B<outdef>

output channel specification, of the form:
"I<out_name>=[I<gain>*]I<in_name>[(+-)[I<gain>*]I<in_name>...]"


=item B<out_name>

output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
number (c0, c1, etc.)


=item B<gain>

multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged


=item B<in_name>

input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
named and numbered input channels

=back


If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `E<lt>', then the gains for
that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
avoiding clipping noise.


=head3 Mixing examples


For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
factor for the left channel:
	
	pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1


A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
7-channels surround:
	
	pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR


Note that B<ffmpeg> integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
needs.


=head3 Remapping examples


The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:


=over 4


=item *<gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,>


=item *<only one input per channel output,>


=back


If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
remapping.

For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
dropping the extra channels:
	
	pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"


Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
and keep the input channel layout:
	
	pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"


If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
	
	pan="stereo|c1=c1"


Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
front left and right:
	
	pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"



=head2 replaygain


ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
outputs it unchanged.
At end of filtering it displays C<track_gain> and C<track_peak>.

The filter accepts the following exported read-only options:


=over 4


=item B<track_gain>

Exported track gain in dB at end of stream.


=item B<track_peak>

Exported track peak at end of stream.

=back



=head2 resample


Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
not meant to be used directly.


=head2 rubberband

Apply time-stretching and pitch-shifting with librubberband.

To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-librubberband>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<tempo>

Set tempo scale factor.


=item B<pitch>

Set pitch scale factor.


=item B<transients>

Set transients detector.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<crisp>


=item I<mixed>


=item I<smooth>


=back



=item B<detector>

Set detector.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<compound>


=item I<percussive>


=item I<soft>


=back



=item B<phase>

Set phase.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<laminar>


=item I<independent>


=back



=item B<window>

Set processing window size.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<standard>


=item I<short>


=item I<long>


=back



=item B<smoothing>

Set smoothing.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<off>


=item I<on>


=back



=item B<formant>

Enable formant preservation when shift pitching.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<shifted>


=item I<preserved>


=back



=item B<pitchq>

Set pitch quality.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<quality>


=item I<speed>


=item I<consistency>


=back



=item B<channels>

Set channels.
Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<apart>


=item I<together>


=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<tempo>

Change filter tempo scale factor.
Syntax for the command is : "I<tempo>"


=item B<pitch>

Change filter pitch scale factor.
Syntax for the command is : "I<pitch>"

=back



=head2 sidechaincompress


This filter acts like normal compressor but has the ability to compress
detected signal using second input signal.
It needs two input streams and returns one output stream.
First input stream will be processed depending on second stream signal.
The filtered signal then can be filtered with other filters in later stages of
processing. See B<pan> and B<amerge> filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input gain. Default is 1. Range is between 0.015625 and 64.


=item B<mode>

Set mode of compressor operation. Can be C<upward> or C<downward>.
Default is C<downward>.


=item B<threshold>

If a signal of second stream raises above this level it will affect the gain
reduction of first stream.
By default is 0.125. Range is between 0.00097563 and 1.


=item B<ratio>

Set a ratio about which the signal is reduced. 1:2 means that if the level
raised 4dB above the threshold, it will be only 2dB above after the reduction.
Default is 2. Range is between 1 and 20.


=item B<attack>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before gain
reduction starts. Default is 20. Range is between 0.01 and 2000.


=item B<release>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the threshold before
reduction is decreased again. Default is 250. Range is between 0.01 and 9000.


=item B<makeup>

Set the amount by how much signal will be amplified after processing.
Default is 1. Range is from 1 to 64.


=item B<knee>

Curve the sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more softly.
Default is 2.82843. Range is between 1 and 8.


=item B<link>

Choose if the C<average> level between all channels of side-chain stream
or the louder(C<maximum>) channel of side-chain stream affects the
reduction. Default is C<average>.


=item B<detection>

Should the exact signal be taken in case of C<peak> or an RMS one in case
of C<rms>. Default is C<rms> which is mainly smoother.


=item B<level_sc>

Set sidechain gain. Default is 1. Range is between 0.015625 and 64.


=item B<mix>

How much to use compressed signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Full ffmpeg example taking 2 audio inputs, 1st input to be compressed
depending on the signal of 2nd input and later compressed signal to be
merged with 2nd input:
	
	ffmpeg -i main.flac -i sidechain.flac -filter_complex "[1:a]asplit=2[sc][mix];[0:a][sc]sidechaincompress[compr];[compr][mix]amerge"


=back



=head2 sidechaingate


A sidechain gate acts like a normal (wideband) gate but has the ability to
filter the detected signal before sending it to the gain reduction stage.
Normally a gate uses the full range signal to detect a level above the
threshold.
For example: If you cut all lower frequencies from your sidechain signal
the gate will decrease the volume of your track only if not enough highs
appear. With this technique you are able to reduce the resonation of a
natural drum or remove "rumbling" of muted strokes from a heavily distorted
guitar.
It needs two input streams and returns one output stream.
First input stream will be processed depending on second stream signal.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input level before filtering.
Default is 1. Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.


=item B<mode>

Set the mode of operation. Can be C<upward> or C<downward>.
Default is C<downward>. If set to C<upward> mode, higher parts of signal
will be amplified, expanding dynamic range in upward direction.
Otherwise, in case of C<downward> lower parts of signal will be reduced.


=item B<range>

Set the level of gain reduction when the signal is below the threshold.
Default is 0.06125. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Setting this to 0 disables reduction and then filter behaves like expander.


=item B<threshold>

If a signal rises above this level the gain reduction is released.
Default is 0.125. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.


=item B<ratio>

Set a ratio about which the signal is reduced.
Default is 2. Allowed range is from 1 to 9000.


=item B<attack>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to rise above the threshold before gain
reduction stops.
Default is 20 milliseconds. Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.


=item B<release>

Amount of milliseconds the signal has to fall below the threshold before the
reduction is increased again. Default is 250 milliseconds.
Allowed range is from 0.01 to 9000.


=item B<makeup>

Set amount of amplification of signal after processing.
Default is 1. Allowed range is from 1 to 64.


=item B<knee>

Curve the sharp knee around the threshold to enter gain reduction more softly.
Default is 2.828427125. Allowed range is from 1 to 8.


=item B<detection>

Choose if exact signal should be taken for detection or an RMS like one.
Default is rms. Can be peak or rms.


=item B<link>

Choose if the average level between all channels or the louder channel affects
the reduction.
Default is average. Can be average or maximum.


=item B<level_sc>

Set sidechain gain. Default is 1. Range is from 0.015625 to 64.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 silencedetect


Detect silence in an audio stream.

This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
minimum detected noise duration.

The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds. The
C<lavfi.silence_start> or C<lavfi.silence_start.X> metadata key
is set on the first frame whose timestamp equals or exceeds the detection
duration and it contains the timestamp of the first frame of the silence.

The C<lavfi.silence_duration> or C<lavfi.silence_duration.X>
and C<lavfi.silence_end> or C<lavfi.silence_end.X> metadata
keys are set on the first frame after the silence. If B<mono> is
enabled, and each channel is evaluated separately, the C<.X>
suffixed keys are used, and C<X> corresponds to the channel number.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<noise, n>

Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.


=item B<duration, d>

Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds). See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.


=item B<mono, m>

Process each channel separately, instead of combined. By default is disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
	
	silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5



=item *

Complete example with B<ffmpeg> to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
tolerance in F<silence.mp3>:
	
	ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -


=back



=head2 silenceremove


Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<start_periods>

This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
the I<start_periods> will be C<1> but it can be increased to higher
values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<start_duration>

Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
as silence and trimmed off. Default value is C<0>.


=item B<start_threshold>

This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
audio, a value of C<0> may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
or amplitude ratio. Default value is C<0>.


=item B<start_silence>

Specify max duration of silence at beginning that will be kept after
trimming. Default is 0, which is equal to trimming all samples detected
as silence.


=item B<start_mode>

Specify mode of detection of silence end at start of multi-channel audio.
Can be I<any> or I<all>. Default is I<any>.
With I<any>, any sample from any channel that is detected as non-silence
will trigger end of silence trimming at start of audio stream.
With I<all>, only if every sample from every channel is detected as non-silence
will trigger end of silence trimming at start of audio stream, limited usage.


=item B<stop_periods>

Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio. When specifying a
positive value, it trims audio after it finds specified silence period.
To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a I<stop_periods>
that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
I<stop_periods>, making it suitable for removing periods of silence
in the middle of the audio.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<stop_duration>

Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
the audio.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<stop_threshold>

This is the same as B<start_threshold> but for trimming silence from
the end of audio.
Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
or amplitude ratio. Default value is C<0>.


=item B<stop_silence>

Specify max duration of silence at end that will be kept after
trimming. Default is 0, which is equal to trimming all samples detected
as silence.


=item B<stop_mode>

Specify mode of detection of silence start after start of multi-channel audio.
Can be I<any> or I<all>. Default is I<all>.
With I<any>, any sample from any channel that is detected as silence
will trigger start of silence trimming after start of audio stream, limited usage.
With I<all>, only if every sample from every channel is detected as silence
will trigger start of silence trimming after start of audio stream.


=item B<detection>

Set how is silence detected.

=over 4


=item B<avg>

Mean of absolute values of samples in moving window.

=item B<rms>

Root squared mean of absolute values of samples in moving window.

=item B<peak>

Maximum of absolute values of samples in moving window.

=item B<median>

Median of absolute values of samples in moving window.

=item B<ptp>

Absolute of max peak to min peak difference of samples in moving window.

=item B<dev>

Standard deviation of values of samples in moving window.

=back

Default value is C<rms>.


=item B<window>

Set duration in number of seconds used to calculate size of window in number
of samples for detecting silence. Using C<0> will effectively disable
any windowing and use only single sample per channel for silence detection.
In that case it may be needed to also set B<start_silence> and/or
B<stop_silence> to nonzero values with also B<start_duration> and/or
B<stop_duration> to nonzero values.
Default value is C<0.02>. Allowed range is from C<0> to C<10>.


=item B<timestamp>

Set processing mode of every audio frame output timestamp.

=over 4


=item B<write>

Full timestamps rewrite, keep only the start time for the first output frame.

=item B<copy>

Non-dropped frames are left with same timestamp as input audio frame.

=back

Defaults value is C<write>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
	
	silenceremove=start_periods=1:start_duration=5:start_threshold=0.02



=item *

Trim all silence encountered from beginning to end where there is more than 1
second of silence in audio:
	
	silenceremove=stop_periods=-1:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB



=item *

Trim all digital silence samples, using peak detection, from beginning to end
where there is more than 0 samples of digital silence in audio and digital
silence is detected in all channels at same positions in stream:
	
	silenceremove=window=0:detection=peak:stop_mode=all:start_mode=all:stop_periods=-1:stop_threshold=0



=item *

Trim every 2nd encountered silence period from beginning to end where there is
more than 1 second of silence per silence period in audio:
	
	silenceremove=stop_periods=-2:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB



=item *

Similar as above, but keep maximum of 0.5 seconds of silence from each trimmed period:
	
	silenceremove=stop_periods=-2:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB:stop_silence=0.5



=item *

Similar as above, but keep maximum of 1.5 seconds of silence from start of audio:
	
	silenceremove=stop_periods=-2:stop_duration=1:stop_threshold=-90dB:stop_silence=0.5:start_periods=1:start_duration=1:start_silence=1.5:stop_threshold=-90dB


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports some above options as B<commands>.


=head2 sofalizer


SOFAlizer uses head-related transfer functions (HRTFs) to create virtual
loudspeakers around the user for binaural listening via headphones (audio
formats up to 9 channels supported).
The HRTFs are stored in SOFA files (see E<lt>B<http://www.sofacoustics.org/>E<gt> for a database).
SOFAlizer is developed at the Acoustics Research Institute (ARI) of the
Austrian Academy of Sciences.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libmysofa>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sofa>

Set the SOFA file used for rendering.


=item B<gain>

Set gain applied to audio. Value is in dB. Default is 0.


=item B<rotation>

Set rotation of virtual loudspeakers in deg. Default is 0.


=item B<elevation>

Set elevation of virtual speakers in deg. Default is 0.


=item B<radius>

Set distance in meters between loudspeakers and the listener with near-field
HRTFs. Default is 1.


=item B<type>

Set processing type. Can be I<time> or I<freq>. I<time> is
processing audio in time domain which is slow.
I<freq> is processing audio in frequency domain which is fast.
Default is I<freq>.


=item B<speakers>

Set custom positions of virtual loudspeakers. Syntax for this option is:
E<lt>CHE<gt> E<lt>AZIME<gt> E<lt>ELEVE<gt>[|E<lt>CHE<gt> E<lt>AZIME<gt> E<lt>ELEVE<gt>|...].
Each virtual loudspeaker is described with short channel name following with
azimuth and elevation in degrees.
Each virtual loudspeaker description is separated by '|'.
For example to override front left and front right channel positions use:
'speakers=FL 45 15|FR 345 15'.
Descriptions with unrecognised channel names are ignored.


=item B<lfegain>

Set custom gain for LFE channels. Value is in dB. Default is 0.


=item B<framesize>

Set custom frame size in number of samples. Default is 1024.
Allowed range is from 1024 to 96000. Only used if option B<type>
is set to I<freq>.


=item B<normalize>

Should all IRs be normalized upon importing SOFA file.
By default is enabled.


=item B<interpolate>

Should nearest IRs be interpolated with neighbor IRs if exact position
does not match. By default is disabled.


=item B<minphase>

Minphase all IRs upon loading of SOFA file. By default is disabled.


=item B<anglestep>

Set neighbor search angle step. Only used if option I<interpolate> is enabled.


=item B<radstep>

Set neighbor search radius step. Only used if option I<interpolate> is enabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Using ClubFritz6 sofa file:
	
	sofalizer=sofa=/path/to/ClubFritz6.sofa:type=freq:radius=1



=item *

Using ClubFritz12 sofa file and bigger radius with small rotation:
	
	sofalizer=sofa=/path/to/ClubFritz12.sofa:type=freq:radius=2:rotation=5



=item *

Similar as above but with custom speaker positions for front left, front right, back left and back right
and also with custom gain:
	
	"sofalizer=sofa=/path/to/ClubFritz6.sofa:type=freq:radius=2:speakers=FL 45|FR 315|BL 135|BR 225:gain=28"


=back



=head2 speechnorm

Speech Normalizer.

This filter expands or compresses each half-cycle of audio samples
(local set of samples all above or all below zero and between two nearest zero crossings) depending
on threshold value, so audio reaches target peak value under conditions controlled by below options.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<peak, p>

Set the expansion target peak value. This specifies the highest allowed absolute amplitude
level for the normalized audio input. Default value is 0.95. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.


=item B<expansion, e>

Set the maximum expansion factor. Allowed range is from 1.0 to 50.0. Default value is 2.0.
This option controls maximum local half-cycle of samples expansion. The maximum expansion
would be such that local peak value reaches target peak value but never to surpass it and that
ratio between new and previous peak value does not surpass this option value.


=item B<compression, c>

Set the maximum compression factor. Allowed range is from 1.0 to 50.0. Default value is 2.0.
This option controls maximum local half-cycle of samples compression. This option is used
only if B<threshold> option is set to value greater than 0.0, then in such cases
when local peak is lower or same as value set by B<threshold> all samples belonging to
that peak's half-cycle will be compressed by current compression factor.


=item B<threshold, t>

Set the threshold value. Default value is 0.0. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.
This option specifies which half-cycles of samples will be compressed and which will be expanded.
Any half-cycle samples with their local peak value below or same as this option value will be
compressed by current compression factor, otherwise, if greater than threshold value they will be
expanded with expansion factor so that it could reach peak target value but never surpass it.


=item B<raise, r>

Set the expansion raising amount per each half-cycle of samples. Default value is 0.001.
Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0. This controls how fast expansion factor is raised per
each new half-cycle until it reaches B<expansion> value.
Setting this options too high may lead to distortions.


=item B<fall, f>

Set the compression raising amount per each half-cycle of samples. Default value is 0.001.
Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0. This controls how fast compression factor is raised per
each new half-cycle until it reaches B<compression> value.


=item B<channels, h>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available channels are filtered.


=item B<invert, i>

Enable inverted filtering, by default is disabled. This inverts interpretation of B<threshold>
option. When enabled any half-cycle of samples with their local peak value below or same as
B<threshold> option will be expanded otherwise it will be compressed.


=item B<link, l>

Link channels when calculating gain applied to each filtered channel sample, by default is disabled.
When disabled each filtered channel gain calculation is independent, otherwise when this option
is enabled the minimum of all possible gains for each filtered channel is used.


=item B<rms, m>

Set the expansion target RMS value. This specifies the highest allowed RMS level for the normalized
audio input. Default value is 0.0, thus disabled. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Weak and slow amplification:
	
	speechnorm=e=3:r=0.00001:l=1



=item *

Moderate and slow amplification:
	
	speechnorm=e=6.25:r=0.00001:l=1



=item *

Strong and fast amplification:
	
	speechnorm=e=12.5:r=0.0001:l=1



=item *

Very strong and fast amplification:
	
	speechnorm=e=25:r=0.0001:l=1



=item *

Extreme and fast amplification:
	
	speechnorm=e=50:r=0.0001:l=1


=back



=head2 stereotools


This filter has some handy utilities to manage stereo signals, for converting
M/S stereo recordings to L/R signal while having control over the parameters
or spreading the stereo image of master track.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_in>

Set input level before filtering for both channels. Defaults is 1.
Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.


=item B<level_out>

Set output level after filtering for both channels. Defaults is 1.
Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.


=item B<balance_in>

Set input balance between both channels. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<balance_out>

Set output balance between both channels. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<softclip>

Enable softclipping. Results in analog distortion instead of harsh digital 0dB
clipping. Disabled by default.


=item B<mutel>

Mute the left channel. Disabled by default.


=item B<muter>

Mute the right channel. Disabled by default.


=item B<phasel>

Change the phase of the left channel. Disabled by default.


=item B<phaser>

Change the phase of the right channel. Disabled by default.


=item B<mode>

Set stereo mode. Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<lrE<gt>lr>

Left/Right to Left/Right, this is default.


=item B<lrE<gt>ms>

Left/Right to Mid/Side.


=item B<msE<gt>lr>

Mid/Side to Left/Right.


=item B<lrE<gt>ll>

Left/Right to Left/Left.


=item B<lrE<gt>rr>

Left/Right to Right/Right.


=item B<lrE<gt>l+r>

Left/Right to Left + Right.


=item B<lrE<gt>rl>

Left/Right to Right/Left.


=item B<msE<gt>ll>

Mid/Side to Left/Left.


=item B<msE<gt>rr>

Mid/Side to Right/Right.


=item B<msE<gt>rl>

Mid/Side to Right/Left.


=item B<lrE<gt>l-r>

Left/Right to Left - Right.

=back



=item B<slev>

Set level of side signal. Default is 1.
Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.


=item B<sbal>

Set balance of side signal. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<mlev>

Set level of the middle signal. Default is 1.
Allowed range is from 0.015625 to 64.


=item B<mpan>

Set middle signal pan. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<base>

Set stereo base between mono and inversed channels. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<delay>

Set delay in milliseconds how much to delay left from right channel and
vice versa. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -20 to 20.


=item B<sclevel>

Set S/C level. Default is 1. Allowed range is from 1 to 100.


=item B<phase>

Set the stereo phase in degrees. Default is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 360.


=item B<bmode_in, bmode_out>

Set balance mode for balance_in/balance_out option.

Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<balance>

Classic balance mode. Attenuate one channel at time.
Gain is raised up to 1.


=item B<amplitude>

Similar as classic mode above but gain is raised up to 2.


=item B<power>

Equal power distribution, from -6dB to +6dB range.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply karaoke like effect:
	
	stereotools=mlev=0.015625



=item *

Convert M/S signal to L/R:
	
	"stereotools=mode=ms>lr"


=back



=head2 stereowiden


This filter enhance the stereo effect by suppressing signal common to both
channels and by delaying the signal of left into right and vice versa,
thereby widening the stereo effect.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<delay>

Time in milliseconds of the delay of left signal into right and vice versa.
Default is 20 milliseconds.


=item B<feedback>

Amount of gain in delayed signal into right and vice versa. Gives a delay
effect of left signal in right output and vice versa which gives widening
effect. Default is 0.3.


=item B<crossfeed>

Cross feed of left into right with inverted phase. This helps in suppressing
the mono. If the value is 1 it will cancel all the signal common to both
channels. Default is 0.3.


=item B<drymix>

Set level of input signal of original channel. Default is 0.8.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options except C<delay> as B<commands>.


=head2 superequalizer

Apply 18 band equalizer.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<1b>

Set 65Hz band gain.

=item B<2b>

Set 92Hz band gain.

=item B<3b>

Set 131Hz band gain.

=item B<4b>

Set 185Hz band gain.

=item B<5b>

Set 262Hz band gain.

=item B<6b>

Set 370Hz band gain.

=item B<7b>

Set 523Hz band gain.

=item B<8b>

Set 740Hz band gain.

=item B<9b>

Set 1047Hz band gain.

=item B<10b>

Set 1480Hz band gain.

=item B<11b>

Set 2093Hz band gain.

=item B<12b>

Set 2960Hz band gain.

=item B<13b>

Set 4186Hz band gain.

=item B<14b>

Set 5920Hz band gain.

=item B<15b>

Set 8372Hz band gain.

=item B<16b>

Set 11840Hz band gain.

=item B<17b>

Set 16744Hz band gain.

=item B<18b>

Set 20000Hz band gain.

=back



=head2 surround

Apply audio surround upmix filter.

This filter allows to produce multichannel output from audio stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<chl_out>

Set output channel layout. By default, this is I<5.1>.

See B<the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the required syntax.


=item B<chl_in>

Set input channel layout. By default, this is I<stereo>.

See B<the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the required syntax.


=item B<level_in>

Set input volume level. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<level_out>

Set output volume level. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<lfe>

Enable LFE channel output if output channel layout has it. By default, this is enabled.


=item B<lfe_low>

Set LFE low cut off frequency. By default, this is I<128> Hz.


=item B<lfe_high>

Set LFE high cut off frequency. By default, this is I<256> Hz.


=item B<lfe_mode>

Set LFE mode, can be I<add> or I<sub>. Default is I<add>.
In I<add> mode, LFE channel is created from input audio and added to output.
In I<sub> mode, LFE channel is created from input audio and added to output but
also all non-LFE output channels are subtracted with output LFE channel.


=item B<smooth>

Set temporal smoothness strength, used to gradually change factors when transforming
stereo sound in time. Allowed range is from I<0.0> to I<1.0>.
Useful to improve output quality with I<focus> option values greater than I<0.0>.
Default is I<0.0>. Only values inside this range and without edges are effective.


=item B<angle>

Set angle of stereo surround transform, Allowed range is from I<0> to I<360>.
Default is I<90>.


=item B<focus>

Set focus of stereo surround transform, Allowed range is from I<-1> to I<1>.
Default is I<0>.


=item B<fc_in>

Set front center input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<fc_out>

Set front center output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<fl_in>

Set front left input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<fl_out>

Set front left output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<fr_in>

Set front right input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<fr_out>

Set front right output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<sl_in>

Set side left input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<sl_out>

Set side left output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<sr_in>

Set side right input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<sr_out>

Set side right output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<bl_in>

Set back left input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<bl_out>

Set back left output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<br_in>

Set back right input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<br_out>

Set back right output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<bc_in>

Set back center input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<bc_out>

Set back center output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<lfe_in>

Set LFE input volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<lfe_out>

Set LFE output volume. By default, this is I<1>.


=item B<allx>

Set spread usage of stereo image across X axis for all channels.
Allowed range is from I<-1> to I<15>.
By default this value is negative I<-1>, and thus unused.


=item B<ally>

Set spread usage of stereo image across Y axis for all channels.
Allowed range is from I<-1> to I<15>.
By default this value is negative I<-1>, and thus unused.


=item B<fcx, flx, frx, blx, brx, slx, srx, bcx>

Set spread usage of stereo image across X axis for each channel.
Allowed range is from I<0.06> to I<15>.
By default this value is I<0.5>.


=item B<fcy, fly, fry, bly, bry, sly, sry, bcy>

Set spread usage of stereo image across Y axis for each channel.
Allowed range is from I<0.06> to I<15>.
By default this value is I<0.5>.


=item B<win_size>

Set window size. Allowed range is from I<1024> to I<65536>. Default size is I<4096>.


=item B<win_func>

Set window function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hann, hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back

Default is C<hann>.


=item B<overlap>

Set window overlap. If set to 1, the recommended overlap for selected
window function will be picked. Default is C<0.5>.

=back



=head2 tiltshelf


Boost or cut the lower frequencies and cut or boost higher frequencies
of the audio using a two-pole shelving filter with a response similar to
that of a standard hi-fi's tone-controls.
This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<gain, g>

Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
(for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.


=item B<frequency, f>

Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
The default value is C<3000> Hz.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.


=item B<poles, p>

Set number of poles. Default is 2.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports some options as B<commands>.


=head2 treble, highshelf


Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<gain, g>

Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.


=item B<frequency, f>

Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
The default value is C<3000> Hz.


=item B<width_type, t>

Set method to specify band-width of filter.

=over 4


=item B<h>

Hz

=item B<q>

Q-Factor

=item B<o>

octave

=item B<s>

slope

=item B<k>

kHz

=back



=item B<width, w>

Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.


=item B<poles, p>

Set number of poles. Default is 2.


=item B<mix, m>

How much to use filtered signal in output. Default is 1.
Range is between 0 and 1.


=item B<channels, c>

Specify which channels to filter, by default all available are filtered.


=item B<normalize, n>

Normalize biquad coefficients, by default is disabled.
Enabling it will normalize magnitude response at DC to 0dB.


=item B<transform, a>

Set transform type of IIR filter.

=over 4


=item B<di>


=item B<dii>


=item B<tdi>


=item B<tdii>


=item B<latt>


=item B<svf>


=item B<zdf>


=back



=item B<precision, r>

Set precision of filtering.

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Pick automatic sample format depending on surround filters.

=item B<s16>

Always use signed 16-bit.

=item B<s32>

Always use signed 32-bit.

=item B<f32>

Always use float 32-bit.

=item B<f64>

Always use float 64-bit.

=back



=item B<block_size, b>

Set block size used for reverse IIR processing. If this value is set to high enough
value (higher than impulse response length truncated when reaches near zero values) filtering
will become linear phase otherwise if not big enough it will just produce nasty artifacts.

Note that filter delay will be exactly this many samples when set to non-zero value.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, f>

Change treble frequency.
Syntax for the command is : "I<frequency>"


=item B<width_type, t>

Change treble width_type.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width_type>"


=item B<width, w>

Change treble width.
Syntax for the command is : "I<width>"


=item B<gain, g>

Change treble gain.
Syntax for the command is : "I<gain>"


=item B<mix, m>

Change treble mix.
Syntax for the command is : "I<mix>"

=back



=head2 tremolo


Sinusoidal amplitude modulation.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<f>

Modulation frequency in Hertz. Modulation frequencies in the subharmonic range
(20 Hz or lower) will result in a tremolo effect.
This filter may also be used as a ring modulator by specifying
a modulation frequency higher than 20 Hz.
Range is 0.1 - 20000.0. Default value is 5.0 Hz.


=item B<d>

Depth of modulation as a percentage. Range is 0.0 - 1.0.
Default value is 0.5.

=back



=head2 vibrato


Sinusoidal phase modulation.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<f>

Modulation frequency in Hertz.
Range is 0.1 - 20000.0. Default value is 5.0 Hz.


=item B<d>

Depth of modulation as a percentage. Range is 0.0 - 1.0.
Default value is 0.5.

=back



=head2 virtualbass


Apply audio Virtual Bass filter.

This filter accepts stereo input and produce stereo with LFE (2.1) channels output.
The newly produced LFE channel have enhanced virtual bass originally obtained from both stereo channels.
This filter outputs front left and front right channels unchanged as available in stereo input.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<cutoff>

Set the virtual bass cutoff frequency. Default value is 250 Hz.
Allowed range is from 100 to 500 Hz.


=item B<strength>

Set the virtual bass strength. Allowed range is from 0.5 to 3.
Default value is 3.

=back



=head2 volume


Adjust the input audio volume.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<volume>

Set audio volume expression.

Output values are clipped to the maximum value.

The output audio volume is given by the relation:
	
	<output_volume> = <volume> * <input_volume>


The default value for I<volume> is "1.0".


=item B<precision>

This parameter represents the mathematical precision.

It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
precision of the volume scaling.


=over 4


=item B<fixed>

8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.

=item B<float>

32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)

=item B<double>

64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.

=back



=item B<replaygain>

Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.


=over 4


=item B<drop>

Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).


=item B<ignore>

Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.


=item B<track>

Prefer the track gain, if present.


=item B<album>

Prefer the album gain, if present.

=back



=item B<replaygain_preamp>

Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.

Default value for I<replaygain_preamp> is 0.0.


=item B<replaygain_noclip>

Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.

Default value for I<replaygain_noclip> is 1.


=item B<eval>

Set when the volume expression is evaluated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<once>

only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
when the B<volume> command is sent


=item B<frame>

evaluate expression for each incoming frame

=back


Default value is B<once>.

=back


The volume expression can contain the following parameters.


=over 4


=item B<n>

frame number (starting at zero)

=item B<nb_channels>

number of channels

=item B<nb_consumed_samples>

number of samples consumed by the filter

=item B<nb_samples>

number of samples in the current frame

=item B<pos>

original frame position in the file; deprecated, do not use

=item B<pts>

frame PTS

=item B<sample_rate>

sample rate

=item B<startpts>

PTS at start of stream

=item B<startt>

time at start of stream

=item B<t>

frame time

=item B<tb>

timestamp timebase

=item B<volume>

last set volume value

=back


Note that when B<eval> is set to B<once> only the
I<sample_rate> and I<tb> variables are available, all other
variables will evaluate to NAN.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<volume>

Modify the volume expression.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Halve the input audio volume:
	
	volume=volume=0.5
	volume=volume=1/2
	volume=volume=-6.0206dB


In all the above example the named key for B<volume> can be
omitted, for example like in:
	
	volume=0.5



=item *

Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
	
	volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed



=item *

Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
	
	volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame


=back



=head2 volumedetect


Detect the volume of the input video.

The filter has no parameters. It supports only 16-bit signed integer samples,
so the input will be converted when needed. Statistics about the volume will
be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.

In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
the samples).

All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.


=head3 Examples


Here is an excerpt of the output:
	
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
	[Parsed_volumedetect_0  0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409


It means that:

=over 4


=item *

The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.

=item *

The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.

=item *

There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.

=back


In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.



=head1 AUDIO SOURCES


Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.


=head2 abuffer


Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.

This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
through the interface defined in F<libavfilter/buffersrc.h>.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<time_base>

The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
either a floating-point number or in I<numerator>/I<denominator> form.


=item B<sample_rate>

The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.


=item B<sample_fmt>

The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
the enum AVSampleFormat in F<libavutil/samplefmt.h>


=item B<channel_layout>

The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
F<libavutil/channel_layout.c> or its corresponding integer representation
from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in F<libavutil/channel_layout.h>


=item B<channels>

The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
If both I<channels> and I<channel_layout> are specified, then they
must be consistent.


=back



=head3 Examples


	
	abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo


will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
equivalent to:
	
	abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3



=head2 aevalsrc


Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.

This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
audio signal.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<exprs>

Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
B<channel_layout> option is not specified, the selected channel layout
depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.


=item B<channel_layout, c>

Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
must be equal to the number of specified expressions.


=item B<duration, d>

Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
complete frame.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
supposed to be generated forever.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
default to 1024.


=item B<sample_rate, s>

Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.

=back


Each expression in I<exprs> can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<n>

number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0


=item B<t>

time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0


=item B<s>

sample rate


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Generate silence:
	
	aevalsrc=0



=item *

Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
8000 Hz:
	
	aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"



=item *

Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
Center + Back Center) explicitly:
	
	aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"



=item *

Generate white noise:
	
	aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"



=item *

Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
	
	aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"



=item *

Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
	
	aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"



=back



=head2 afdelaysrc


Generate a fractional delay FIR coefficients.

The resulting stream can be used with B<afir> filter for filtering the audio signal.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<delay, d>

Set the fractional delay. Default is 0.


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Set the sample rate, default is 44100.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per each frame. Default is 1024.


=item B<taps, t>

Set the number of filter coefficients in output audio stream.
Default value is 0.


=item B<channel_layout, c>

Specifies the channel layout, and can be a string representing a channel layout.
The default value of I<channel_layout> is "stereo".

=back



=head2 afireqsrc


Generate a FIR equalizer coefficients.

The resulting stream can be used with B<afir> filter for filtering the audio signal.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<preset, p>

Set equalizer preset.
Default preset is C<flat>.

Available presets are:

=over 4


=item B<custom>


=item B<flat>


=item B<acoustic>


=item B<bass>


=item B<beats>


=item B<classic>


=item B<clear>


=item B<deep bass>


=item B<dubstep>


=item B<electronic>


=item B<hard-style>


=item B<hip-hop>


=item B<jazz>


=item B<metal>


=item B<movie>


=item B<pop>


=item B<r&b>


=item B<rock>


=item B<vocal booster>


=back



=item B<gains, g>

Set custom gains for each band. Only used if the preset option is set to C<custom>.
Gains are separated by white spaces and each gain is set in dBFS.
Default is C<0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0>.


=item B<bands, b>

Set the custom bands from where custon equalizer gains are set.
This must be in strictly increasing order. Only used if the preset option is set to C<custom>.
Bands are separated by white spaces and each band represent frequency in Hz.
Default is C<25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600 2500 4000 6300 10000 16000 24000>.


=item B<taps, t>

Set number of filter coefficients in output audio stream.
Default value is C<4096>.


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Set sample rate of output audio stream, default is C<44100>.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set number of samples per each frame in output audio stream. Default is C<1024>.


=item B<interp, i>

Set interpolation method for FIR equalizer coefficients. Can be C<linear> or C<cubic>.


=item B<phase, h>

Set phase type of FIR filter. Can be C<linear> or C<min>: minimum-phase.
Default is minimum-phase filter.

=back



=head2 afirsrc


Generate a FIR coefficients using frequency sampling method.

The resulting stream can be used with B<afir> filter for filtering the audio signal.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<taps, t>

Set number of filter coefficients in output audio stream.
Default value is 1025.


=item B<frequency, f>

Set frequency points from where magnitude and phase are set.
This must be in non decreasing order, and first element must be 0, while last element
must be 1. Elements are separated by white spaces.


=item B<magnitude, m>

Set magnitude value for every frequency point set by B<frequency>.
Number of values must be same as number of frequency points.
Values are separated by white spaces.


=item B<phase, p>

Set phase value for every frequency point set by B<frequency>.
Number of values must be same as number of frequency points.
Values are separated by white spaces.


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Set sample rate, default is 44100.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set number of samples per each frame. Default is 1024.


=item B<win_func, w>

Set window function. Default is blackman.

=back



=head2 anullsrc


The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
synth filter).

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<channel_layout, cl>


Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
representing a channel layout. The default value of I<channel_layout>
is "stereo".

Check the channel_layout_map definition in
F<libavutil/channel_layout.c> for the mapping between strings and
channel layout values.


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per requested frames.


=item B<duration, d>

Set the duration of the sourced audio. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
supposed to be generated forever.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
	
	anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4



=item *

Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
	
	anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono


=back


All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.


=head2 flite


Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libflite>.

Note that versions of the flite library prior to 2.0 are not thread-safe.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<list_voices>

If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
immediately. Default value is 0.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.


=item B<textfile>

Set the filename containing the text to speak.


=item B<text>

Set the text to speak.


=item B<voice, v>

Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
C<kal>. See also the I<list_voices> option.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Read from file F<speech.txt>, and synthesize the text using the
standard flite voice:
	
	flite=textfile=speech.txt



=item *

Read the specified text selecting the C<slt> voice:
	
	flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt



=item *

Input text to ffmpeg:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt



=item *

Make F<ffplay> speak the specified text, using C<flite> and
the C<lavfi> device:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'


=back


For more information about libflite, check:
E<lt>B<http://www.festvox.org/flite/>E<gt>


=head2 anoisesrc


Generate a noise audio signal.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Specify the sample rate. Default value is 48000 Hz.


=item B<amplitude, a>

Specify the amplitude (0.0 - 1.0) of the generated audio stream. Default value
is 1.0.


=item B<duration, d>

Specify the duration of the generated audio stream. Not specifying this option
results in noise with an infinite length.


=item B<color, colour, c>

Specify the color of noise. Available noise colors are white, pink, brown,
blue, violet and velvet. Default color is white.


=item B<seed, s>

Specify a value used to seed the PRNG.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set the number of samples per each output frame, default is 1024.


=item B<density>

Set the density (0.0 - 1.0) for the velvet noise generator, default is 0.05.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Generate 60 seconds of pink noise, with a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and an amplitude of 0.5:
	
	anoisesrc=d=60:c=pink:r=44100:a=0.5


=back



=head2 hilbert


Generate odd-tap Hilbert transform FIR coefficients.

The resulting stream can be used with B<afir> filter for phase-shifting
the signal by 90 degrees.

This is used in many matrix coding schemes and for analytic signal generation.
The process is often written as a multiplication by i (or j), the imaginary unit.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<sample_rate, s>

Set sample rate, default is 44100.


=item B<taps, t>

Set length of FIR filter, default is 22051.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set number of samples per each frame.


=item B<win_func, w>

Set window function to be used when generating FIR coefficients.

=back



=head2 sinc


Generate a sinc kaiser-windowed low-pass, high-pass, band-pass, or band-reject FIR coefficients.

The resulting stream can be used with B<afir> filter for filtering the audio signal.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Set sample rate, default is 44100.


=item B<nb_samples, n>

Set number of samples per each frame. Default is 1024.


=item B<hp>

Set high-pass frequency. Default is 0.


=item B<lp>

Set low-pass frequency. Default is 0.
If high-pass frequency is lower than low-pass frequency and low-pass frequency
is higher than 0 then filter will create band-pass filter coefficients,
otherwise band-reject filter coefficients.


=item B<phase>

Set filter phase response. Default is 50. Allowed range is from 0 to 100.


=item B<beta>

Set Kaiser window beta.


=item B<att>

Set stop-band attenuation. Default is 120dB, allowed range is from 40 to 180 dB.


=item B<round>

Enable rounding, by default is disabled.


=item B<hptaps>

Set number of taps for high-pass filter.


=item B<lptaps>

Set number of taps for low-pass filter.

=back



=head2 sine


Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.

The audio signal is bit-exact.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<frequency, f>

Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.


=item B<beep_factor, b>

Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency I<beep_factor> times
the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.


=item B<sample_rate, r>

Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.


=item B<duration, d>

Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.


=item B<samples_per_frame>

Set the number of samples per output frame.

The expression can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<n>

The (sequential) number of the output audio frame, starting from 0.


=item B<pts>

The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the output audio frame,
expressed in I<TB> units.


=item B<t>

The PTS of the output audio frame, expressed in seconds.


=item B<TB>

The timebase of the output audio frames.

=back


Default is C<1024>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
	
	sine



=item *

Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
	
	sine=220:4:d=5
	sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
	sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5



=item *

Generate a 1 kHz sine wave following C<1602,1601,1602,1601,1602> NTSC
pattern:
	
	sine=1000:samples_per_frame='st(0,mod(n,5)); 1602-not(not(eq(ld(0),1)+eq(ld(0),3)))'


=back




=head1 AUDIO SINKS


Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.


=head2 abuffersink


Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.

This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
through the interface defined in F<libavfilter/buffersink.h>
or the options system.

It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
parameter to C<avfilter_init_filter> for initialization.

=head2 anullsink


Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
tools.



=head1 VIDEO FILTERS


When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
existing filters using C<--disable-filters>.
The configure output will show the video filters included in your
build.

Below is a description of the currently available video filters.


=head2 addroi


Mark a region of interest in a video frame.

The frame data is passed through unchanged, but metadata is attached
to the frame indicating regions of interest which can affect the
behaviour of later encoding.  Multiple regions can be marked by
applying the filter multiple times.


=over 4


=item B<x>

Region distance in pixels from the left edge of the frame.

=item B<y>

Region distance in pixels from the top edge of the frame.

=item B<w>

Region width in pixels.

=item B<h>

Region height in pixels.

The parameters I<x>, I<y>, I<w> and I<h> are expressions,
and may contain the following variables:

=over 4


=item B<iw>

Width of the input frame.

=item B<ih>

Height of the input frame.

=back



=item B<qoffset>

Quantisation offset to apply within the region.

This must be a real value in the range -1 to +1.  A value of zero
indicates no quality change.  A negative value asks for better quality
(less quantisation), while a positive value asks for worse quality
(greater quantisation).

The range is calibrated so that the extreme values indicate the
largest possible offset - if the rest of the frame is encoded with the
worst possible quality, an offset of -1 indicates that this region
should be encoded with the best possible quality anyway.  Intermediate
values are then interpolated in some codec-dependent way.

For example, in 10-bit H.264 the quantisation parameter varies between
-12 and 51.  A typical qoffset value of -1/10 therefore indicates that
this region should be encoded with a QP around one-tenth of the full
range better than the rest of the frame.  So, if most of the frame
were to be encoded with a QP of around 30, this region would get a QP
of around 24 (an offset of approximately -1/10 * (51 - -12) = -6.3).
An extreme value of -1 would indicate that this region should be
encoded with the best possible quality regardless of the treatment of
the rest of the frame - that is, should be encoded at a QP of -12.

=item B<clear>

If set to true, remove any existing regions of interest marked on the
frame before adding the new one.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Mark the centre quarter of the frame as interesting.
	
	addroi=iw/4:ih/4:iw/2:ih/2:-1/10


=item *

Mark the 100-pixel-wide region on the left edge of the frame as very
uninteresting (to be encoded at much lower quality than the rest of
the frame).
	
	addroi=0:0:100:ih:+1/5


=back



=head2 alphaextract


Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
is especially useful with the I<alphamerge> filter.


=head2 alphamerge


Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
I<alphaextract> to allow the transmission or storage of frame
sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
channel.

For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
and a separate video created with I<alphaextract>, you might use:
	
	movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]



=head2 amplify


Amplify differences between current pixel and pixels of adjacent frames in
same pixel location.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<radius>

Set frame radius. Default is 2. Allowed range is from 1 to 63.
For example radius of 3 will instruct filter to calculate average of 7 frames.


=item B<factor>

Set factor to amplify difference. Default is 2. Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.


=item B<threshold>

Set threshold for difference amplification. Any difference greater or equal to
this value will not alter source pixel. Default is 10.
Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.


=item B<tolerance>

Set tolerance for difference amplification. Any difference lower to
this value will not alter source pixel. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.


=item B<low>

Set lower limit for changing source pixel. Default is 65535. Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.
This option controls maximum possible value that will decrease source pixel value.


=item B<high>

Set high limit for changing source pixel. Default is 65535. Allowed range is from 0 to 65535.
This option controls maximum possible value that will increase source pixel value.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following B<commands> that corresponds to option of same name:

=over 4


=item B<factor>


=item B<threshold>


=item B<tolerance>


=item B<low>


=item B<high>


=item B<planes>


=back



=head2 ass


Same as the B<subtitles> filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
Substation Alpha) subtitles files.

This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
the B<subtitles> filter:


=over 4


=item B<shaping>

Set the shaping engine

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.

=item B<simple>

Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions

=item B<complex>

Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning

=back


The default is C<auto>.

=back



=head2 atadenoise

Apply an Adaptive Temporal Averaging Denoiser to the video input.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<0a>

Set threshold A for 1st plane. Default is 0.02.
Valid range is 0 to 0.3.


=item B<0b>

Set threshold B for 1st plane. Default is 0.04.
Valid range is 0 to 5.


=item B<1a>

Set threshold A for 2nd plane. Default is 0.02.
Valid range is 0 to 0.3.


=item B<1b>

Set threshold B for 2nd plane. Default is 0.04.
Valid range is 0 to 5.


=item B<2a>

Set threshold A for 3rd plane. Default is 0.02.
Valid range is 0 to 0.3.


=item B<2b>

Set threshold B for 3rd plane. Default is 0.04.
Valid range is 0 to 5.

Threshold A is designed to react on abrupt changes in the input signal and
threshold B is designed to react on continuous changes in the input signal.


=item B<s>

Set number of frames filter will use for averaging. Default is 9. Must be odd
number in range [5, 129].


=item B<p>

Set what planes of frame filter will use for averaging. Default is all.


=item B<a>

Set what variant of algorithm filter will use for averaging. Default is C<p> parallel.
Alternatively can be set to C<s> serial.

Parallel can be faster then serial, while other way around is never true.
Parallel will abort early on first change being greater then thresholds, while serial
will continue processing other side of frames if they are equal or below thresholds.


=item B<0s>


=item B<1s>


=item B<2s>

Set sigma for 1st plane, 2nd plane or 3rd plane. Default is 32767.
Valid range is from 0 to 32767.
This options controls weight for each pixel in radius defined by size.
Default value means every pixel have same weight.
Setting this option to 0 effectively disables filtering.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options except option C<s>.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.


=head2 avgblur


Apply average blur filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sizeX>

Set horizontal radius size.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.


=item B<sizeY>

Set vertical radius size, if zero it will be same as C<sizeX>.
Default is C<0>.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same commands as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 backgroundkey


Turns a static background into transparency.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<threshold>

Threshold for scene change detection.

=item B<similarity>

Similarity percentage with the background.

=item B<blend>

Set the blend amount for pixels that are not similar.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 bbox


Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
luma plane.

This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
luma value greater than the minimum allowed value.
The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
log.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<min_val>

Set the minimal luma value. Default is C<16>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 bilateral

Apply bilateral filter, spatial smoothing while preserving edges.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<sigmaS>

Set sigma of gaussian function to calculate spatial weight.
Allowed range is 0 to 512. Default is 0.1.


=item B<sigmaR>

Set sigma of gaussian function to calculate range weight.
Allowed range is 0 to 1. Default is 0.1.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 bilateral_cuda

CUDA accelerated bilateral filter, an edge preserving filter.
This filter is mathematically accurate thanks to the use of GPU acceleration.
For best output quality, use one to one chroma subsampling, i.e. yuv444p format.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<sigmaS>

Set sigma of gaussian function to calculate spatial weight, also called sigma space.
Allowed range is 0.1 to 512. Default is 0.1.


=item B<sigmaR>

Set sigma of gaussian function to calculate color range weight, also called sigma color.
Allowed range is 0.1 to 512. Default is 0.1.


=item B<window_size>

Set window size of the bilateral function to determine the number of neighbours to loop on.
If the number entered is even, one will be added automatically.
Allowed range is 1 to 255. Default is 1.

=back


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply the bilateral filter on a video.

	
	./ffmpeg -v verbose \
	-hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -i input.mp4  \
	-init_hw_device cuda \
	-filter_complex \
	" \
	[0:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv444p[scaled_video];
	[scaled_video]bilateral_cuda=window_size=9:sigmaS=3.0:sigmaR=50.0" \
	-an -sn -c:v h264_nvenc -cq 20 out.mp4



=back



=head2 bitplanenoise


Show and measure bit plane noise.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<bitplane>

Set which plane to analyze. Default is C<1>.


=item B<filter>

Filter out noisy pixels from C<bitplane> set above.
Default is disabled.

=back



=head2 blackdetect


Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
recordings.

The filter outputs its detection analysis to both the log as well as
frame metadata. If a black segment of at least the specified minimum
duration is found, a line with the start and end timestamps as well
as duration is printed to the log with level C<info>. In addition,
a log line with level C<debug> is printed per frame showing the
black amount detected for that frame.

The filter also attaches metadata to the first frame of a black
segment with key C<lavfi.black_start> and to the first frame
after the black segment ends with key C<lavfi.black_end>. The
value is the frame's timestamp. This metadata is added regardless
of the minimum duration specified.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<black_min_duration, d>

Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
be a non-negative floating point number.

Default value is 2.0.


=item B<picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th>

Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
Express the minimum value for the ratio:
	
	<nb_black_pixels> / <nb_pixels>


for which a picture is considered black.
Default value is 0.98.


=item B<pixel_black_th, pix_th>

Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".

The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luma value for which a
pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
the following equation:
	
	<absolute_threshold> = <luma_minimum_value> + <pixel_black_th> * <luma_range_size>


I<luma_range_size> and I<luma_minimum_value> depend on
the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.

Default value is 0.10.

=back


The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
	
	blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00



=head2 blackframe


Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.

In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.

This filter exports frame metadata C<lavfi.blackframe.pblack>.
The value represents the percentage of pixels in the picture that
are below the threshold value.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<amount>

The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
C<98>.


=item B<threshold, thresh>

The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
C<32>.


=back




=head2 blend


Blend two video frames into each other.

The C<blend> filter takes two input streams and outputs one
stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
"bottom" layer.  By default, the output terminates when the longest input terminates.

The C<tblend> (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames
from one single stream, and outputs the result obtained by blending
the new frame on top of the old frame.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<c0_mode>


=item B<c1_mode>


=item B<c2_mode>


=item B<c3_mode>


=item B<all_mode>

Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
of I<all_mode>. Default value is C<normal>.

Available values for component modes are:

=over 4


=item B<addition>


=item B<and>


=item B<average>


=item B<bleach>


=item B<burn>


=item B<darken>


=item B<difference>


=item B<divide>


=item B<dodge>


=item B<exclusion>


=item B<extremity>


=item B<freeze>


=item B<geometric>


=item B<glow>


=item B<grainextract>


=item B<grainmerge>


=item B<hardlight>


=item B<hardmix>


=item B<hardoverlay>


=item B<harmonic>


=item B<heat>


=item B<interpolate>


=item B<lighten>


=item B<linearlight>


=item B<multiply>


=item B<multiply128>


=item B<negation>


=item B<normal>


=item B<or>


=item B<overlay>


=item B<phoenix>


=item B<pinlight>


=item B<reflect>


=item B<screen>


=item B<softdifference>


=item B<softlight>


=item B<stain>


=item B<subtract>


=item B<vividlight>


=item B<xor>


=back



=item B<c0_opacity>


=item B<c1_opacity>


=item B<c2_opacity>


=item B<c3_opacity>


=item B<all_opacity>

Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
of I<all_opacity>. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.


=item B<c0_expr>


=item B<c1_expr>


=item B<c2_expr>


=item B<c3_expr>


=item B<all_expr>

Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
of I<all_expr>. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.

The expressions can use the following variables:


=over 4


=item B<N>

The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from C<0>.


=item B<X>


=item B<Y>

the coordinates of the current sample


=item B<W>


=item B<H>

the width and height of currently filtered plane


=item B<SW>


=item B<SH>

Width and height scale for the plane being filtered. It is the
ratio between the dimensions of the current plane to the luma plane,
e.g. for a C<yuv420p> frame, the values are C<1,1> for
the luma plane and C<0.5,0.5> for the chroma planes.


=item B<T>

Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.


=item B<TOP, A>

Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).


=item B<BOTTOM, B>

Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).

=back


=back


The C<blend> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
	
	blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'



=item *

Apply linear horizontal transition from top layer to bottom layer:
	
	blend=all_expr='A*(X/W)+B*(1-X/W)'



=item *

Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
	
	blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'



=item *

Apply uncover left effect:
	
	blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'



=item *

Apply uncover down effect:
	
	blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'



=item *

Apply uncover up-left effect:
	
	blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'



=item *

Split diagonally video and shows top and bottom layer on each side:
	
	blend=all_expr='if(gt(X,Y*(W/H)),A,B)'



=item *

Display differences between the current and the previous frame:
	
	tblend=all_mode=grainextract


=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.



=head2 blockdetect


Determines blockiness of frames without altering the input frames.

Based on Remco Muijs and Ihor Kirenko: "A no-reference blocking artifact measure for adaptive video processing." 2005 13th European signal processing conference.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<period_min>


=item B<period_max>

Set minimum and maximum values for determining pixel grids (periods).
Default values are [3,24].


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Determine blockiness for the first plane and search for periods within [8,32]:
	
	blockdetect=period_min=8:period_max=32:planes=1


=back




=head2 blurdetect


Determines blurriness of frames without altering the input frames.

Based on Marziliano, Pina, et al. "A no-reference perceptual blur metric."
Allows for a block-based abbreviation.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<low>


=item B<high>

Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
algorithm.

The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
by the low threshold.

I<low> and I<high> threshold values must be chosen in the range
[0,1], and I<low> should be lesser or equal to I<high>.

Default value for I<low> is C<20/255>, and default value for I<high>
is C<50/255>.


=item B<radius>

Define the radius to search around an edge pixel for local maxima.


=item B<block_pct>

Determine blurriness only for the most significant blocks, given in percentage.


=item B<block_width>

Determine blurriness for blocks of width I<block_width>. If set to any value smaller 1, no blocks are used and the whole image is processed as one no matter of I<block_height>.


=item B<block_height>

Determine blurriness for blocks of height I<block_height>. If set to any value smaller 1, no blocks are used and the whole image is processed as one no matter of I<block_width>.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Determine blur for 80% of most significant 32x32 blocks:
	
	blurdetect=block_width=32:block_height=32:block_pct=80


=back



=head2 bm3d


Denoise frames using Block-Matching 3D algorithm.

The filter accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<sigma>

Set denoising strength. Default value is 1.
Allowed range is from 0 to 999.9.
The denoising algorithm is very sensitive to sigma, so adjust it
according to the source.


=item B<block>

Set local patch size. This sets dimensions in 2D.


=item B<bstep>

Set sliding step for processing blocks. Default value is 4.
Allowed range is from 1 to 64.
Smaller values allows processing more reference blocks and is slower.


=item B<group>

Set maximal number of similar blocks for 3rd dimension. Default value is 1.
When set to 1, no block matching is done. Larger values allows more blocks
in single group.
Allowed range is from 1 to 256.


=item B<range>

Set radius for search block matching. Default is 9.
Allowed range is from 1 to INT32_MAX.


=item B<mstep>

Set step between two search locations for block matching. Default is 1.
Allowed range is from 1 to 64. Smaller is slower.


=item B<thmse>

Set threshold of mean square error for block matching. Valid range is 0 to
INT32_MAX.


=item B<hdthr>

Set thresholding parameter for hard thresholding in 3D transformed domain.
Larger values results in stronger hard-thresholding filtering in frequency
domain.


=item B<estim>

Set filtering estimation mode. Can be C<basic> or C<final>.
Default is C<basic>.


=item B<ref>

If enabled, filter will use 2nd stream for block matching.
Default is disabled for C<basic> value of I<estim> option,
and always enabled if value of I<estim> is C<final>.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default is all available except alpha.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Basic filtering with bm3d:
	
	bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=1:estim=basic



=item *

Same as above, but filtering only luma:
	
	bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=1:estim=basic:planes=1



=item *

Same as above, but with both estimation modes:
	
	split[a][b],[a]bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=1:estim=basic[a],[b][a]bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=16:estim=final:ref=1



=item *

Same as above, but prefilter with B<nlmeans> filter instead:
	
	split[a][b],[a]nlmeans=s=3:r=7:p=3[a],[b][a]bm3d=sigma=3:block=4:bstep=2:group=16:estim=final:ref=1


=back



=head2 boxblur


Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<luma_radius, lr>


=item B<luma_power, lp>


=item B<chroma_radius, cr>


=item B<chroma_power, cp>


=item B<alpha_radius, ar>


=item B<alpha_power, ap>



=back


A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<luma_radius, lr>


=item B<chroma_radius, cr>


=item B<alpha_radius, ar>

Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
corresponding input plane.

The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
greater than the value of the expression C<min(w,h)/2> for the
luma and alpha planes, and of C<min(cw,ch)/2> for the chroma
planes.

Default value for B<luma_radius> is "2". If not specified,
B<chroma_radius> and B<alpha_radius> default to the
corresponding value set for B<luma_radius>.

The expressions can contain the following constants:

=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The input width and height in pixels.


=item B<cw>


=item B<ch>

The input chroma image width and height in pixels.


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
pixel format "yuv422p", I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.

=back



=item B<luma_power, lp>


=item B<chroma_power, cp>


=item B<alpha_power, ap>

Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
corresponding plane.

Default value for B<luma_power> is 2. If not specified,
B<chroma_power> and B<alpha_power> default to the
corresponding value set for B<luma_power>.

A value of 0 will disable the effect.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
set to 2:
	
	boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
	boxblur=2:1



=item *

Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
	
	boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0



=item *

Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
	
	boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1


=back




=head2 bwdif


Deinterlace the input video ("bwdif" stands for "Bob Weaver
Deinterlacing Filter").

Motion adaptive deinterlacing based on yadif with the use of w3fdif and cubic
interpolation algorithms.
It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, send_frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<1, send_field>

Output one frame for each field.

=back


The default value is C<send_field>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<1, bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<-1, auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following
values:


=over 4


=item B<0, all>

Deinterlace all frames.

=item B<1, interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


The default value is C<all>.

=back



=head2 bwdif_cuda


Deinterlace the input video using the B<bwdif> algorithm, but implemented
in CUDA so that it can work as part of a GPU accelerated pipeline with nvdec
and/or nvenc.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, send_frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<1, send_field>

Output one frame for each field.

=back


The default value is C<send_field>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<1, bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<-1, auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following
values:


=over 4


=item B<0, all>

Deinterlace all frames.

=item B<1, interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


The default value is C<all>.

=back



=head2 ccrepack


Repack CEA-708 closed captioning side data

This filter fixes various issues seen with commerical encoders
related to upstream malformed CEA-708 payloads, specifically
incorrect number of tuples (wrong cc_count for the target FPS),
and incorrect ordering of tuples (i.e. the CEA-608 tuples are not at
the first entries in the payload).


=head2 cas


Apply Contrast Adaptive Sharpen filter to video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<strength>

Set the sharpening strength. Default value is 0.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default value is to filter all
planes except alpha plane.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 chromahold

Remove all color information for all colors except for certain one.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<color>

The color which will not be replaced with neutral chroma.


=item B<similarity>

Similarity percentage with the above color.
0.01 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.


=item B<blend>

Blend percentage.
0.0 makes pixels either fully gray, or not gray at all.
Higher values result in more preserved color.


=item B<yuv>

Signals that the color passed is already in YUV instead of RGB.

Literal colors like "green" or "red" don't make sense with this enabled anymore.
This can be used to pass exact YUV values as hexadecimal numbers.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.



=head2 chromakey

YUV colorspace color/chroma keying.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<color>

The color which will be replaced with transparency.


=item B<similarity>

Similarity percentage with the key color.

0.01 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.


=item B<blend>

Blend percentage.

0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent, or not transparent at all.

Higher values result in semi-transparent pixels, with a higher transparency
the more similar the pixels color is to the key color.


=item B<yuv>

Signals that the color passed is already in YUV instead of RGB.

Literal colors like "green" or "red" don't make sense with this enabled anymore.
This can be used to pass exact YUV values as hexadecimal numbers.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make every green pixel in the input image transparent:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.png -vf chromakey=green out.png



=item *

Overlay a greenscreen-video on top of a static black background.
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i color=c=black:s=1280x720 -i video.mp4 -shortest -filter_complex "[1:v]chromakey=0x70de77:0.1:0.2[ckout];[0:v][ckout]overlay[out]" -map "[out]" output.mkv


=back



=head2 chromakey_cuda

CUDA accelerated YUV colorspace color/chroma keying.

This filter works like normal chromakey filter but operates on CUDA frames.
for more details and parameters see B<chromakey>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make all the green pixels in the input video transparent and use it as an overlay for another video:

	
	./ffmpeg \
	    -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -i input_green.mp4  \
	    -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -i base_video.mp4 \
	    -init_hw_device cuda \
	    -filter_complex \
	    " \
	        [0:v]chromakey_cuda=0x25302D:0.1:0.12:1[overlay_video]; \
	        [1:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv420p[base]; \
	        [base][overlay_video]overlay_cuda" \
	    -an -sn -c:v h264_nvenc -cq 20 output.mp4



=item *

Process two software sources, explicitly uploading the frames:

	
	./ffmpeg -init_hw_device cuda=cuda -filter_hw_device cuda \
	    -f lavfi -i color=size=800x600:color=white,format=yuv420p \
	    -f lavfi -i yuvtestsrc=size=200x200,format=yuv420p \
	    -filter_complex \
	    " \
	        [0]hwupload[under]; \
	        [1]hwupload,chromakey_cuda=green:0.1:0.12[over]; \
	        [under][over]overlay_cuda" \
	    -c:v hevc_nvenc -cq 18 -preset slow output.mp4



=back



=head2 chromanr

Reduce chrominance noise.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<thres>

Set threshold for averaging chrominance values.
Sum of absolute difference of Y, U and V pixel components of current
pixel and neighbour pixels lower than this threshold will be used in
averaging. Luma component is left unchanged and is copied to output.
Default value is 30. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.


=item B<sizew>

Set horizontal radius of rectangle used for averaging.
Allowed range is from 1 to 100. Default value is 5.


=item B<sizeh>

Set vertical radius of rectangle used for averaging.
Allowed range is from 1 to 100. Default value is 5.


=item B<stepw>

Set horizontal step when averaging. Default value is 1.
Allowed range is from 1 to 50.
Mostly useful to speed-up filtering.


=item B<steph>

Set vertical step when averaging. Default value is 1.
Allowed range is from 1 to 50.
Mostly useful to speed-up filtering.


=item B<threy>

Set Y threshold for averaging chrominance values.
Set finer control for max allowed difference between Y components
of current pixel and neigbour pixels.
Default value is 200. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.


=item B<threu>

Set U threshold for averaging chrominance values.
Set finer control for max allowed difference between U components
of current pixel and neigbour pixels.
Default value is 200. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.


=item B<threv>

Set V threshold for averaging chrominance values.
Set finer control for max allowed difference between V components
of current pixel and neigbour pixels.
Default value is 200. Allowed range is from 1 to 200.


=item B<distance>

Set distance type used in calculations.


=over 4


=item B<manhattan>

Absolute difference.

=item B<euclidean>

Difference squared.

=back


Default distance type is manhattan.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.


=head2 chromashift

Shift chroma pixels horizontally and/or vertically.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<cbh>

Set amount to shift chroma-blue horizontally.

=item B<cbv>

Set amount to shift chroma-blue vertically.

=item B<crh>

Set amount to shift chroma-red horizontally.

=item B<crv>

Set amount to shift chroma-red vertically.

=item B<edge>

Set edge mode, can be I<smear>, default, or I<warp>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 ciescope


Display CIE color diagram with pixels overlaid onto it.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<system>

Set color system.


=over 4


=item B<ntsc, 470m>


=item B<ebu, 470bg>


=item B<smpte>


=item B<240m>


=item B<apple>


=item B<widergb>


=item B<cie1931>


=item B<rec709, hdtv>


=item B<uhdtv, rec2020>


=item B<dcip3>


=back



=item B<cie>

Set CIE system.


=over 4


=item B<xyy>


=item B<ucs>


=item B<luv>


=back



=item B<gamuts>

Set what gamuts to draw.

See C<system> option for available values.


=item B<size, s>

Set ciescope size, by default set to 512.


=item B<intensity, i>

Set intensity used to map input pixel values to CIE diagram.


=item B<contrast>

Set contrast used to draw tongue colors that are out of active color system gamut.


=item B<corrgamma>

Correct gamma displayed on scope, by default enabled.


=item B<showwhite>

Show white point on CIE diagram, by default disabled.


=item B<gamma>

Set input gamma. Used only with XYZ input color space.


=item B<fill>

Fill with CIE colors. By default is enabled.

=back



=head2 codecview


Visualize information exported by some codecs.

Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
I<export_mvs> flag in the codec B<flags2> option.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<block>

Display block partition structure using the luma plane.


=item B<mv>

Set motion vectors to visualize.

Available flags for I<mv> are:


=over 4


=item B<pf>

forward predicted MVs of P-frames

=item B<bf>

forward predicted MVs of B-frames

=item B<bb>

backward predicted MVs of B-frames

=back



=item B<qp>

Display quantization parameters using the chroma planes.


=item B<mv_type, mvt>

Set motion vectors type to visualize. Includes MVs from all frames unless specified by I<frame_type> option.

Available flags for I<mv_type> are:


=over 4


=item B<fp>

forward predicted MVs

=item B<bp>

backward predicted MVs

=back



=item B<frame_type, ft>

Set frame type to visualize motion vectors of.

Available flags for I<frame_type> are:


=over 4


=item B<if>

intra-coded frames (I-frames)

=item B<pf>

predicted frames (P-frames)

=item B<bf>

bi-directionally predicted frames (B-frames)

=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Visualize forward predicted MVs of all frames using B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mp4 -vf codecview=mv_type=fp



=item *

Visualize multi-directionals MVs of P and B-Frames using B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mp4 -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb


=back



=head2 colorbalance

Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.

The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.

A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
value towards the complementary color.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rs>


=item B<gs>


=item B<bs>

Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).


=item B<rm>


=item B<gm>


=item B<bm>

Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).


=item B<rh>


=item B<gh>


=item B<bh>

Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).

Allowed ranges for options are C<[-1.0, 1.0]>. Defaults are C<0>.


=item B<pl>

Preserve lightness when changing color balance. Default is disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Add red color cast to shadows:
	
	colorbalance=rs=.3


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 colorcontrast


Adjust color contrast between RGB components.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rc>

Set the red-cyan contrast. Defaults is 0.0. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.


=item B<gm>

Set the green-magenta contrast. Defaults is 0.0. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.


=item B<by>

Set the blue-yellow contrast. Defaults is 0.0. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.


=item B<rcw>


=item B<gmw>


=item B<byw>

Set the weight of each C<rc>, C<gm>, C<by> option value. Default value is 0.0.
Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0. If all weights are 0.0 filtering is disabled.


=item B<pl>

Set the amount of preserving lightness. Default value is 0.0. Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 colorcorrect


Adjust color white balance selectively for blacks and whites.
This filter operates in YUV colorspace.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rl>

Set the red shadow spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 0.


=item B<bl>

Set the blue shadow spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 0.


=item B<rh>

Set the red highlight spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 0.


=item B<bh>

Set the blue highlight spot. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 0.


=item B<saturation>

Set the amount of saturation. Allowed range is from -3.0 to 3.0.
Default value is 1.


=item B<analyze>

If set to anything other than C<manual> it will analyze every frame and use derived
parameters for filtering output frame.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item B<manual>


=item B<average>


=item B<minmax>


=item B<median>


=back

Default value is C<manual>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 colorchannelmixer


Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.

This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
modify is red, the output value will be:
	
	<red>=<red>*<rr> + <blue>*<rb> + <green>*<rg> + <alpha>*<ra>


The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rr>


=item B<rg>


=item B<rb>


=item B<ra>

Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
Default is C<1> for I<rr>, and C<0> for I<rg>, I<rb> and I<ra>.


=item B<gr>


=item B<gg>


=item B<gb>


=item B<ga>

Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
Default is C<1> for I<gg>, and C<0> for I<gr>, I<gb> and I<ga>.


=item B<br>


=item B<bg>


=item B<bb>


=item B<ba>

Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
Default is C<1> for I<bb>, and C<0> for I<br>, I<bg> and I<ba>.


=item B<ar>


=item B<ag>


=item B<ab>


=item B<aa>

Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
Default is C<1> for I<aa>, and C<0> for I<ar>, I<ag> and I<ab>.

Allowed ranges for options are C<[-2.0, 2.0]>.


=item B<pc>

Set preserve color mode. The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disable color preserving, this is default.

=item B<lum>

Preserve luminance.

=item B<max>

Preserve max value of RGB triplet.

=item B<avg>

Preserve average value of RGB triplet.

=item B<sum>

Preserve sum value of RGB triplet.

=item B<nrm>

Preserve normalized value of RGB triplet.

=item B<pwr>

Preserve power value of RGB triplet.

=back



=item B<pa>

Set the preserve color amount when changing colors. Allowed range is from C<[0.0, 1.0]>.
Default is C<0.0>, thus disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Convert source to grayscale:
	
	colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3


=item *

Simulate sepia tones:
	
	colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 colorize

Overlay a solid color on the video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<hue>

Set the color hue. Allowed range is from 0 to 360.
Default value is 0.


=item B<saturation>

Set the color saturation. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.5.


=item B<lightness>

Set the color lightness. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.5.


=item B<mix>

Set the mix of source lightness. By default is set to 1.0.
Allowed range is from 0.0 to 1.0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 colorkey

RGB colorspace color keying.
This filter operates on 8-bit RGB format frames by setting the alpha component of each pixel
which falls within the similarity radius of the key color to 0. The alpha value for pixels outside
the similarity radius depends on the value of the blend option.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<color>

Set the color for which alpha will be set to 0 (full transparency).
See B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default is C<black>.


=item B<similarity>

Set the radius from the key color within which other colors also have full transparency.
The computed distance is related to the unit fractional distance in 3D space between the RGB values
of the key color and the pixel's color. Range is 0.01 to 1.0. 0.01 matches within a very small radius
around the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.
Default is C<0.01>.


=item B<blend>

Set how the alpha value for pixels that fall outside the similarity radius is computed.
0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent or fully opaque.
Higher values result in semi-transparent pixels, with greater transparency
the more similar the pixel color is to the key color.
Range is 0.0 to 1.0. Default is C<0.0>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make every green pixel in the input image transparent:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.png -vf colorkey=green out.png



=item *

Overlay a greenscreen-video on top of a static background image.
	
	ffmpeg -i background.png -i video.mp4 -filter_complex "[1:v]colorkey=0x3BBD1E:0.3:0.2[ckout];[0:v][ckout]overlay[out]" -map "[out]" output.flv


=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 colorhold

Remove all color information for all RGB colors except for certain one.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<color>

The color which will not be replaced with neutral gray.


=item B<similarity>

Similarity percentage with the above color.
0.01 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.


=item B<blend>

Blend percentage. 0.0 makes pixels fully gray.
Higher values result in more preserved color.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 colorlevels


Adjust video input frames using levels.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rimin>


=item B<gimin>


=item B<bimin>


=item B<aimin>

Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
Allowed ranges for options are C<[-1.0, 1.0]>. Defaults are C<0>.


=item B<rimax>


=item B<gimax>


=item B<bimax>


=item B<aimax>

Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
Allowed ranges for options are C<[-1.0, 1.0]>. Defaults are C<1>.

Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
(dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.


=item B<romin>


=item B<gomin>


=item B<bomin>


=item B<aomin>

Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
Allowed ranges for options are C<[0, 1.0]>. Defaults are C<0>.


=item B<romax>


=item B<gomax>


=item B<bomax>


=item B<aomax>

Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
Allowed ranges for options are C<[0, 1.0]>. Defaults are C<1>.

Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.


=item B<preserve>

Set preserve color mode. The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disable color preserving, this is default.

=item B<lum>

Preserve luminance.

=item B<max>

Preserve max value of RGB triplet.

=item B<avg>

Preserve average value of RGB triplet.

=item B<sum>

Preserve sum value of RGB triplet.

=item B<nrm>

Preserve normalized value of RGB triplet.

=item B<pwr>

Preserve power value of RGB triplet.

=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make video output darker:
	
	colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058



=item *

Increase contrast:
	
	colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96



=item *

Make video output lighter:
	
	colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902



=item *

Increase brightness:
	
	colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 colormap

Apply custom color maps to video stream.

This filter needs three input video streams.
First stream is video stream that is going to be filtered out.
Second and third video stream specify color patches for source
color to target color mapping.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<patch_size>

Set the source and target video stream patch size in pixels.


=item B<nb_patches>

Set the max number of used patches from source and target video stream.
Default value is number of patches available in additional video streams.
Max allowed number of patches is C<64>.


=item B<type>

Set the adjustments used for target colors. Can be C<relative> or C<absolute>.
Defaults is C<absolute>.


=item B<kernel>

Set the kernel used to measure color differences between mapped colors.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<euclidean>


=item B<weuclidean>


=back


Default is C<euclidean>.

=back



=head2 colormatrix


Convert color matrix.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<src>


=item B<dst>

Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
specified.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<bt709>

BT.709


=item B<fcc>

FCC


=item B<bt601>

BT.601


=item B<bt470>

BT.470


=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470BG


=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE-170M


=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE-240M


=item B<bt2020>

BT.2020

=back


=back


For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
	
	colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m



=head2 colorspace


Convert colorspace, transfer characteristics or color primaries.
Input video needs to have an even size.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<all>

Specify all color properties at once.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<bt470m>

BT.470M


=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470BG


=item B<bt601-6-525>

BT.601-6 525


=item B<bt601-6-625>

BT.601-6 625


=item B<bt709>

BT.709


=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE-170M


=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE-240M


=item B<bt2020>

BT.2020


=back




=item B<space>

Specify output colorspace.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<bt709>

BT.709


=item B<fcc>

FCC


=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470BG or BT.601-6 625


=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE-170M or BT.601-6 525


=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE-240M


=item B<ycgco>

YCgCo


=item B<bt2020ncl>

BT.2020 with non-constant luminance


=back




=item B<trc>

Specify output transfer characteristics.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<bt709>

BT.709


=item B<bt470m>

BT.470M


=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470BG


=item B<gamma22>

Constant gamma of 2.2


=item B<gamma28>

Constant gamma of 2.8


=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE-170M, BT.601-6 625 or BT.601-6 525


=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE-240M


=item B<srgb>

SRGB


=item B<iec61966-2-1>

iec61966-2-1


=item B<iec61966-2-4>

iec61966-2-4


=item B<xvycc>

xvycc


=item B<bt2020-10>

BT.2020 for 10-bits content


=item B<bt2020-12>

BT.2020 for 12-bits content


=back




=item B<primaries>

Specify output color primaries.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<bt709>

BT.709


=item B<bt470m>

BT.470M


=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470BG or BT.601-6 625


=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE-170M or BT.601-6 525


=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE-240M


=item B<film>

film


=item B<smpte431>

SMPTE-431


=item B<smpte432>

SMPTE-432


=item B<bt2020>

BT.2020


=item B<jedec-p22>

JEDEC P22 phosphors


=back




=item B<range>

Specify output color range.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<tv>

TV (restricted) range


=item B<mpeg>

MPEG (restricted) range


=item B<pc>

PC (full) range


=item B<jpeg>

JPEG (full) range


=back



=item B<format>

Specify output color format.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<yuv420p>

YUV 4:2:0 planar 8-bits


=item B<yuv420p10>

YUV 4:2:0 planar 10-bits


=item B<yuv420p12>

YUV 4:2:0 planar 12-bits


=item B<yuv422p>

YUV 4:2:2 planar 8-bits


=item B<yuv422p10>

YUV 4:2:2 planar 10-bits


=item B<yuv422p12>

YUV 4:2:2 planar 12-bits


=item B<yuv444p>

YUV 4:4:4 planar 8-bits


=item B<yuv444p10>

YUV 4:4:4 planar 10-bits


=item B<yuv444p12>

YUV 4:4:4 planar 12-bits


=back



=item B<fast>

Do a fast conversion, which skips gamma/primary correction. This will take
significantly less CPU, but will be mathematically incorrect. To get output
compatible with that produced by the colormatrix filter, use fast=1.


=item B<dither>

Specify dithering mode.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

No dithering


=item B<fsb>

Floyd-Steinberg dithering

=back



=item B<wpadapt>

Whitepoint adaptation mode.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<bradford>

Bradford whitepoint adaptation


=item B<vonkries>

von Kries whitepoint adaptation


=item B<identity>

identity whitepoint adaptation (i.e. no whitepoint adaptation)

=back



=item B<iall>

Override all input properties at once. Same accepted values as B<all>.


=item B<ispace>

Override input colorspace. Same accepted values as B<space>.


=item B<iprimaries>

Override input color primaries. Same accepted values as B<primaries>.


=item B<itrc>

Override input transfer characteristics. Same accepted values as B<trc>.


=item B<irange>

Override input color range. Same accepted values as B<range>.


=back


The filter converts the transfer characteristics, color space and color
primaries to the specified user values. The output value, if not specified,
is set to a default value based on the "all" property. If that property is
also not specified, the filter will log an error. The output color range and
format default to the same value as the input color range and format. The
input transfer characteristics, color space, color primaries and color range
should be set on the input data. If any of these are missing, the filter will
log an error and no conversion will take place.

For example to convert the input to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
	
	colorspace=smpte240m



=head2 colorspace_cuda


CUDA accelerated implementation of the colorspace filter.

It is by no means feature complete compared to the software colorspace filter,
and at the current time only supports color range conversion between jpeg/full
and mpeg/limited range.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<range>

Specify output color range.

The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<tv>

TV (restricted) range


=item B<mpeg>

MPEG (restricted) range


=item B<pc>

PC (full) range


=item B<jpeg>

JPEG (full) range


=back



=back



=head2 colortemperature

Adjust color temperature in video to simulate variations in ambient color temperature.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<temperature>

Set the temperature in Kelvin. Allowed range is from 1000 to 40000.
Default value is 6500 K.


=item B<mix>

Set mixing with filtered output. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 1.


=item B<pl>

Set the amount of preserving lightness. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 convolution


Apply convolution of 3x3, 5x5, 7x7 or horizontal/vertical up to 49 elements.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<0m>


=item B<1m>


=item B<2m>


=item B<3m>

Set matrix for each plane.
Matrix is sequence of 9, 25 or 49 signed integers in I<square> mode,
and from 1 to 49 odd number of signed integers in I<row> mode.


=item B<0rdiv>


=item B<1rdiv>


=item B<2rdiv>


=item B<3rdiv>

Set multiplier for calculated value for each plane.
If unset or 0, it will be 1/sum of all matrix elements.


=item B<0bias>


=item B<1bias>


=item B<2bias>


=item B<3bias>

Set bias for each plane. This value is added to the result of the multiplication.
Useful for making the overall image brighter or darker. Default is 0.0.


=item B<0mode>


=item B<1mode>


=item B<2mode>


=item B<3mode>

Set matrix mode for each plane. Can be I<square>, I<row> or I<column>.
Default is I<square>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply sharpen:
	
	convolution="0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0"



=item *

Apply blur:
	
	convolution="1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1/9:1/9:1/9:1/9"



=item *

Apply edge enhance:
	
	convolution="0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:5:1:1:1:0:128:128:128"



=item *

Apply edge detect:
	
	convolution="0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:128"



=item *

Apply laplacian edge detector which includes diagonals:
	
	convolution="1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:0"



=item *

Apply emboss:
	
	convolution="-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2"


=back



=head2 convolve


Apply 2D convolution of video stream in frequency domain using second stream
as impulse.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process.


=item B<impulse>

Set which impulse video frames will be processed, can be I<first>
or I<all>. Default is I<all>.

=back


The C<convolve> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head2 copy


Copy the input video source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
testing purposes.



=head2 coreimage

Video filtering on GPU using Apple's CoreImage API on OSX.

Hardware acceleration is based on an OpenGL context. Usually, this means it is
processed by video hardware. However, software-based OpenGL implementations
exist which means there is no guarantee for hardware processing. It depends on
the respective OSX.

There are many filters and image generators provided by Apple that come with a
large variety of options. The filter has to be referenced by its name along
with its options.

The coreimage filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<list_filters>

List all available filters and generators along with all their respective
options as well as possible minimum and maximum values along with the default
values.
	
	list_filters=true



=item B<filter>

Specify all filters by their respective name and options.
Use I<list_filters> to determine all valid filter names and options.
Numerical options are specified by a float value and are automatically clamped
to their respective value range.  Vector and color options have to be specified
by a list of space separated float values. Character escaping has to be done.
A special option name C<default> is available to use default options for a
filter.

It is required to specify either C<default> or at least one of the filter options.
All omitted options are used with their default values.
The syntax of the filter string is as follows:
	
	filter=<NAME>@<OPTION>=<VALUE>[@<OPTION>=<VALUE>][@...][#<NAME>@<OPTION>=<VALUE>[@<OPTION>=<VALUE>][@...]][#...]



=item B<output_rect>

Specify a rectangle where the output of the filter chain is copied into the
input image. It is given by a list of space separated float values:
	
	output_rect=x\ y\ width\ height

If not given, the output rectangle equals the dimensions of the input image.
The output rectangle is automatically cropped at the borders of the input
image. Negative values are valid for each component.
	
	output_rect=25\ 25\ 100\ 100


=back


Several filters can be chained for successive processing without GPU-HOST
transfers allowing for fast processing of complex filter chains.
Currently, only filters with zero (generators) or exactly one (filters) input
image and one output image are supported. Also, transition filters are not yet
usable as intended.

Some filters generate output images with additional padding depending on the
respective filter kernel. The padding is automatically removed to ensure the
filter output has the same size as the input image.

For image generators, the size of the output image is determined by the
previous output image of the filter chain or the input image of the whole
filterchain, respectively. The generators do not use the pixel information of
this image to generate their output. However, the generated output is
blended onto this image, resulting in partial or complete coverage of the
output image.

The B<coreimagesrc> video source can be used for generating input images
which are directly fed into the filter chain. By using it, providing input
images by another video source or an input video is not required.


=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

List all filters available:
	
	coreimage=list_filters=true



=item *

Use the CIBoxBlur filter with default options to blur an image:
	
	coreimage=filter=CIBoxBlur@default



=item *

Use a filter chain with CISepiaTone at default values and CIVignetteEffect with
its center at 100x100 and a radius of 50 pixels:
	
	coreimage=filter=CIBoxBlur@default#CIVignetteEffect@inputCenter=100\ 100@inputRadius=50



=item *

Use nullsrc and CIQRCodeGenerator to create a QR code for the FFmpeg homepage,
given as complete and escaped command-line for Apple's standard bash shell:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i nullsrc=s=100x100,coreimage=filter=CIQRCodeGenerator@inputMessage=https\\\\\://FFmpeg.org/@inputCorrectionLevel=H -frames:v 1 QRCode.png


=back



=head2 corr


Obtain the correlation between two input videos.

This filter takes two input videos.

Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format for
this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.

The obtained per component, average, min and max correlation is printed through
the logging system.

The filter stores the calculated correlation of each frame in frame metadata.

This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

In the below example the input file F<main.mpg> being processed is compared
with the reference file F<ref.mpg>.

	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi corr -f null -



=head2 cover_rect


Cover a rectangular object

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<cover>

Filepath of the optional cover image, needs to be in yuv420.


=item B<mode>

Set covering mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<cover>

cover it by the supplied image

=item B<blur>

cover it by interpolating the surrounding pixels

=back


Default value is I<blur>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Cover a rectangular object by the supplied image of a given video using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i file.ts -vf find_rect=newref.pgm,cover_rect=cover.jpg:mode=cover new.mkv


=back



=head2 crop


Crop the input video to given dimensions.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<w, out_w>

The width of the output video. It defaults to C<iw>.
This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
configuration, or when the B<w> or B<out_w> command is sent.


=item B<h, out_h>

The height of the output video. It defaults to C<ih>.
This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
configuration, or when the B<h> or B<out_h> command is sent.


=item B<x>

The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
video. It defaults to C<(in_w-out_w)/2>.
This expression is evaluated per-frame.


=item B<y>

The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
It defaults to C<(in_h-out_h)/2>.
This expression is evaluated per-frame.


=item B<keep_aspect>

If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
ratio. It defaults to 0.


=item B<exact>

Enable exact cropping. If enabled, subsampled videos will be cropped at exact
width/height/x/y as specified and will not be rounded to nearest smaller value.
It defaults to 0.

=back


The I<out_w>, I<out_h>, I<x>, I<y> parameters are
expressions containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The computed values for I<x> and I<y>. They are evaluated for
each new frame.


=item B<in_w>


=item B<in_h>

The input width and height.


=item B<iw>


=item B<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item B<out_w>


=item B<out_h>

The output (cropped) width and height.


=item B<ow>


=item B<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>.


=item B<a>

same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item B<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<iw> / I<ih>) * I<sar>


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<n>

The number of the input frame, starting from 0.


=item B<pos>

the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated,
do not use


=item B<t>

The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.


=back


The expression for I<out_w> may depend on the value of I<out_h>,
and the expression for I<out_h> may depend on I<out_w>, but they
cannot depend on I<x> and I<y>, as I<x> and I<y> are
evaluated after I<out_w> and I<out_h>.

The I<x> and I<y> parameters specify the expressions for the
position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
is approximated to the nearest valid value.

The expression for I<x> may depend on I<y>, and the expression
for I<y> may depend on I<x>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
	
	crop=100:100:12:34


Using named options, the example above becomes:
	
	crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34



=item *

Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
	
	crop=100:100



=item *

Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
	
	crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h



=item *

Crop the input video central square:
	
	crop=out_w=in_h
	crop=in_h



=item *

Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
corner of the input image.
	
	crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100



=item *

Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
the top and bottom borders
	
	crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20



=item *

Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
	
	crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2



=item *

Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
	
	crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w



=item *

Apply trembling effect:
	
	crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)



=item *

Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
	
	crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)



=item *

Set x depending on the value of y:
	
	crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<w, out_w>


=item B<h, out_h>


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Set width/height of the output video and the horizontal/vertical position
in the input video.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back



=head2 cropdetect


Auto-detect the crop size.

It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
correspond to the non-black or video area of the input video according to I<mode>.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<mode>

Depending on I<mode> crop detection is based on either the mere black value of surrounding pixels or a combination of motion vectors and edge pixels.


=over 4


=item B<black>

Detect black pixels surrounding the playing video. For fine control use option I<limit>.


=item B<mvedges>

Detect the playing video by the motion vectors inside the video and scanning for edge pixels typically forming the border of a playing video.

=back



=item B<limit>

Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
from nothing (0) to everything (255 for 8-bit based formats). An intensity
value greater to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
You can also specify a value between 0.0 and 1.0 which will be scaled depending
on the bitdepth of the pixel format.


=item B<round>

The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
encoding to most video codecs.


=item B<skip>

Set the number of initial frames for which evaluation is skipped.
Default is 2. Range is 0 to INT_MAX.


=item B<reset_count, reset>

Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.

This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
indicates 'never reset', and returns the largest area encountered during
playback.


=item B<mv_threshold>

Set motion in pixel units as threshold for motion detection. It defaults to 8.


=item B<low>


=item B<high>

Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
algorithm.

The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
by the low threshold.

I<low> and I<high> threshold values must be chosen in the range
[0,1], and I<low> should be lesser or equal to I<high>.

Default value for I<low> is C<5/255>, and default value for I<high>
is C<15/255>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Find video area surrounded by black borders:
	
	ffmpeg -i file.mp4 -vf cropdetect,metadata=mode=print -f null -



=item *

Find an embedded video area, generate motion vectors beforehand:
	
	ffmpeg -i file.mp4 -vf mestimate,cropdetect=mode=mvedges,metadata=mode=print -f null -



=item *

Find an embedded video area, use motion vectors from decoder:
	
	ffmpeg -flags2 +export_mvs -i file.mp4 -vf cropdetect=mode=mvedges,metadata=mode=print -f null -


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:


=over 4


=item B<limit>

The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current value.

=back




=head2 cue


Delay video filtering until a given wallclock timestamp. The filter first
passes on B<preroll> amount of frames, then it buffers at most
B<buffer> amount of frames and waits for the cue. After reaching the cue
it forwards the buffered frames and also any subsequent frames coming in its
input.

The filter can be used synchronize the output of multiple ffmpeg processes for
realtime output devices like decklink. By putting the delay in the filtering
chain and pre-buffering frames the process can pass on data to output almost
immediately after the target wallclock timestamp is reached.

Perfect frame accuracy cannot be guaranteed, but the result is good enough for
some use cases.


=over 4



=item B<cue>

The cue timestamp expressed in a UNIX timestamp in microseconds. Default is 0.


=item B<preroll>

The duration of content to pass on as preroll expressed in seconds. Default is 0.


=item B<buffer>

The maximum duration of content to buffer before waiting for the cue expressed
in seconds. Default is 0.


=back




=head2 curves


Apply color adjustments using curves.

This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by I<N> key points
tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
the output frame.

By default, a component curve is defined by the two points I<(0;0)> and
I<(1;1)>. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
"adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.

The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
curve will be defined to pass smoothly through all these new coordinates. The
new defined points need to be strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their
I<x> and I<y> values must be in the I<[0;1]> interval. The curve is
formed by using a natural or monotonic cubic spline interpolation, depending
on the I<interp> option (default: C<natural>). The C<natural>
spline produces a smoother curve in general while the monotonic (C<pchip>)
spline guarantees the transitions between the specified points to be
monotonic. If the computed curves happened to go outside the vector spaces,
the values will be clipped accordingly.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<preset>

Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
to the B<r>, B<g>, B<b> parameters; in this case, the later
options takes priority on the preset values.
Available presets are:

=over 4


=item B<none>


=item B<color_negative>


=item B<cross_process>


=item B<darker>


=item B<increase_contrast>


=item B<lighter>


=item B<linear_contrast>


=item B<medium_contrast>


=item B<negative>


=item B<strong_contrast>


=item B<vintage>


=back

Default is C<none>.

=item B<master, m>

Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
B<r>, B<g>, B<b> or B<all> since it acts like a
post-processing LUT.

=item B<red, r>

Set the key points for the red component.

=item B<green, g>

Set the key points for the green component.

=item B<blue, b>

Set the key points for the blue component.

=item B<all>

Set the key points for all components (not including master).
Can be used in addition to the other key points component
options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
B<all> setting.

=item B<psfile>

Specify a Photoshop curves file (C<.acv>) to import the settings from.

=item B<plot>

Save Gnuplot script of the curves in specified file.

=item B<interp>

Specify the kind of interpolation. Available algorithms are:

=over 4


=item B<natural>

Natural cubic spline using a piece-wise cubic polynomial that is twice continuously differentiable.

=item B<pchip>

Monotonic cubic spline using a piecewise cubic Hermite interpolating polynomial (PCHIP).

=back



=back


To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
defined using the following syntax: C<x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...>.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
	
	curves=blue='0/0 0.5/0.58 1/1'



=item *

Vintage effect:
	
	curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0/0 0.50/0.48 1/1':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'

Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:

=over 4


=item I<red>

C<(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)>

=item I<green>

C<(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)>

=item I<blue>

C<(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)>

=back



=item *

The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
	
	curves=preset=vintage



=item *

Or simply:
	
	curves=vintage



=item *

Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
	
	curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.acv':green='0/0 0.45/0.53 1/1'



=item *

Check out the curves of the C<cross_process> profile using B<ffmpeg>
and B<gnuplot>:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i color -vf curves=cross_process:plot=/tmp/curves.plt -frames:v 1 -f null -
	gnuplot -p /tmp/curves.plt


=back



=head2 datascope


Video data analysis filter.

This filter shows hexadecimal pixel values of part of video.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set output video size.


=item B<x>

Set x offset from where to pick pixels.


=item B<y>

Set y offset from where to pick pixels.


=item B<mode>

Set scope mode, can be one of the following:

=over 4


=item B<mono>

Draw hexadecimal pixel values with white color on black background.


=item B<color>

Draw hexadecimal pixel values with input video pixel color on black
background.


=item B<color2>

Draw hexadecimal pixel values on color background picked from input video,
the text color is picked in such way so its always visible.

=back



=item B<axis>

Draw rows and columns numbers on left and top of video.


=item B<opacity>

Set background opacity.


=item B<format>

Set display number format. Can be C<hex>, or C<dec>. Default is C<hex>.


=item B<components>

Set pixel components to display. By default all pixel components are displayed.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options excluding C<size> option.


=head2 dblur

Apply Directional blur filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<angle>

Set angle of directional blur. Default is C<45>.


=item B<radius>

Set radius of directional blur. Default is C<5>.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 dctdnoiz


Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).

This filter is not designed for real time.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sigma, s>

Set the noise sigma constant.

This I<sigma> defines a hard threshold of C<3 * sigma>; every DCT
coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.

If you need a more advanced filtering, see B<expr>.

Default is C<0>.


=item B<overlap>

Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
risk of various artefacts.

If the overlapping value doesn't permit processing the whole input width or
height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.

Default value is I<blocksize>-1, which is the best possible setting.


=item B<expr, e>

Set the coefficient factor expression.

For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
multiplier value for the coefficient.

If this is option is set, the B<sigma> option will be ignored.

The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the I<c>
variable.


=item B<n>

Set the I<blocksize> using the number of bits. C<1E<lt>E<lt>I<n>> defines the
I<blocksize>, which is the width and height of the processed blocks.

The default value is I<3> (8x8) and can be raised to I<4> for a
I<blocksize> of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
better de-noising.

=back



=head3 Examples


Apply a denoise with a B<sigma> of C<4.5>:
	
	dctdnoiz=4.5


The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
	
	dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'


Violent denoise using a block size of C<16x16>:
	
	dctdnoiz=15:n=4



=head2 deband


Remove banding artifacts from input video.
It works by replacing banded pixels with average value of referenced pixels.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<1thr>


=item B<2thr>


=item B<3thr>


=item B<4thr>

Set banding detection threshold for each plane. Default is 0.02.
Valid range is 0.00003 to 0.5.
If difference between current pixel and reference pixel is less than threshold,
it will be considered as banded.


=item B<range, r>

Banding detection range in pixels. Default is 16. If positive, random number
in range 0 to set value will be used. If negative, exact absolute value
will be used.
The range defines square of four pixels around current pixel.


=item B<direction, d>

Set direction in radians from which four pixel will be compared. If positive,
random direction from 0 to set direction will be picked. If negative, exact of
absolute value will be picked. For example direction 0, -PI or -2*PI radians
will pick only pixels on same row and -PI/2 will pick only pixels on same
column.


=item B<blur, b>

If enabled, current pixel is compared with average value of all four
surrounding pixels. The default is enabled. If disabled current pixel is
compared with all four surrounding pixels. The pixel is considered banded
if only all four differences with surrounding pixels are less than threshold.


=item B<coupling, c>

If enabled, current pixel is changed if and only if all pixel components are banded,
e.g. banding detection threshold is triggered for all color components.
The default is disabled.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 deblock


Remove blocking artifacts from input video.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<filter>

Set filter type, can be I<weak> or I<strong>. Default is I<strong>.
This controls what kind of deblocking is applied.


=item B<block>

Set size of block, allowed range is from 4 to 512. Default is I<8>.


=item B<alpha>


=item B<beta>


=item B<gamma>


=item B<delta>

Set blocking detection thresholds. Allowed range is 0 to 1.
Defaults are: I<0.098> for I<alpha> and I<0.05> for the rest.
Using higher threshold gives more deblocking strength.
Setting I<alpha> controls threshold detection at exact edge of block.
Remaining options controls threshold detection near the edge. Each one for
below/above or left/right. Setting any of those to I<0> disables
deblocking.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default is to filter all available planes.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Deblock using weak filter and block size of 4 pixels.
	
	deblock=filter=weak:block=4



=item *

Deblock using strong filter, block size of 4 pixels and custom thresholds for
deblocking more edges.
	
	deblock=filter=strong:block=4:alpha=0.12:beta=0.07:gamma=0.06:delta=0.05



=item *

Similar as above, but filter only first plane.
	
	deblock=filter=strong:block=4:alpha=0.12:beta=0.07:gamma=0.06:delta=0.05:planes=1



=item *

Similar as above, but filter only second and third plane.
	
	deblock=filter=strong:block=4:alpha=0.12:beta=0.07:gamma=0.06:delta=0.05:planes=6


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.



=head2 decimate


Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<cycle>

Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
I<N> means one frame in every batch of I<N> frames will be dropped.
Default is C<5>.


=item B<dupthresh>

Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
is C<1.1>


=item B<scthresh>

Set scene change threshold. Default is C<15>.


=item B<blockx>


=item B<blocky>

Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is C<32>.


=item B<ppsrc>

Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
C<1>, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
C<0>.


=item B<chroma>

Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
C<1>.


=item B<mixed>

Set whether or not the input only partially contains content to be decimated.
Default is C<false>.
If enabled video output stream will be in variable frame rate.

=back



=head2 deconvolve


Apply 2D deconvolution of video stream in frequency domain using second stream
as impulse.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process.


=item B<impulse>

Set which impulse video frames will be processed, can be I<first>
or I<all>. Default is I<all>.


=item B<noise>

Set noise when doing divisions. Default is I<0.0000001>. Useful when width
and height are not same and not power of 2 or if stream prior to convolving
had noise.

=back


The C<deconvolve> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head2 dedot


Reduce cross-luminance (dot-crawl) and cross-color (rainbows) from video.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<m>

Set mode of operation. Can be combination of I<dotcrawl> for cross-luminance reduction and/or
I<rainbows> for cross-color reduction.


=item B<lt>

Set spatial luma threshold. Lower values increases reduction of cross-luminance.


=item B<tl>

Set tolerance for temporal luma. Higher values increases reduction of cross-luminance.


=item B<tc>

Set tolerance for chroma temporal variation. Higher values increases reduction of cross-color.


=item B<ct>

Set temporal chroma threshold. Lower values increases reduction of cross-color.

=back



=head2 deflate


Apply deflate effect to the video.

This filter replaces the pixel by the local(3x3) average by taking into account
only values lower than the pixel.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold0>


=item B<threshold1>


=item B<threshold2>


=item B<threshold3>

Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is 65535.
If 0, plane will remain unchanged.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 deflicker


Remove temporal frame luminance variations.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set moving-average filter size in frames. Default is 5. Allowed range is 2 - 129.


=item B<mode, m>

Set averaging mode to smooth temporal luminance variations.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<am>

Arithmetic mean


=item B<gm>

Geometric mean


=item B<hm>

Harmonic mean


=item B<qm>

Quadratic mean


=item B<cm>

Cubic mean


=item B<pm>

Power mean


=item B<median>

Median

=back



=item B<bypass>

Do not actually modify frame. Useful when one only wants metadata.

=back



=head2 dejudder


Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.

Judder can be introduced, for instance, by B<pullup> filter. If the original
source was partially telecined content then the output of C<pullup,dejudder>
will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
rate video.

The option available in this filter is:

=over 4



=item B<cycle>

Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.

Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:

=over 4



=item B<4>

If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).


=item B<5>

If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).


=item B<20>

If a mixture of the two.

=back


The default is B<4>.

=back



=head2 delogo


Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
(and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
specified.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
specified.


=item B<show>

When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
finding the right I<x>, I<y>, I<w>, and I<h> parameters.
The default value is 0.

The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
and size 100x77:
	
	delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77



=back




=head2 derain


Remove the rain in the input image/video by applying the derain methods based on
convolutional neural networks. Supported models:


=over 4


=item *

Recurrent Squeeze-and-Excitation Context Aggregation Net (RESCAN).
See E<lt>B<http://openaccess.thecvf.com/content_ECCV_2018/papers/Xia_Li_Recurrent_Squeeze-and-Excitation_Context_ECCV_2018_paper.pdf>E<gt>.

=back


Training as well as model generation scripts are provided in
the repository at E<lt>B<https://github.com/XueweiMeng/derain_filter.git>E<gt>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<filter_type>

Specify which filter to use. This option accepts the following values:


=over 4


=item B<derain>

Derain filter. To conduct derain filter, you need to use a derain model.


=item B<dehaze>

Dehaze filter. To conduct dehaze filter, you need to use a dehaze model.

=back

Default value is B<derain>.


=item B<dnn_backend>

Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts
the following values:


=over 4


=item B<tensorflow>

TensorFlow backend. To enable this backend you
need to install the TensorFlow for C library (see
E<lt>B<https://www.tensorflow.org/install/lang_c>E<gt>) and configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libtensorflow>

=back



=item B<model>

Set path to model file specifying network architecture and its parameters.
Note that different backends use different file formats. TensorFlow can load files for only its format.

=back


To get full functionality (such as async execution), please use the B<dnn_processing> filter.


=head2 deshake


Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<x>


=item B<y>


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
vectors.
If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
box.

This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.

If any or all of I<x>, I<y>, I<w> and I<h> are set to -1
then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.

Default - search the whole frame.


=item B<rx>


=item B<ry>

Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.


=item B<edge>

Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
frame. Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<blank, 0>

Fill zeroes at blank locations

=item B<original, 1>

Original image at blank locations

=item B<clamp, 2>

Extruded edge value at blank locations

=item B<mirror, 3>

Mirrored edge at blank locations

=back

Default value is B<mirror>.


=item B<blocksize>

Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
default 8.


=item B<contrast>

Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.


=item B<search>

Specify the search strategy. Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<exhaustive, 0>

Set exhaustive search

=item B<less, 1>

Set less exhaustive search.

=back

Default value is B<exhaustive>.


=item B<filename>

If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
specified file.


=back



=head2 despill


Remove unwanted contamination of foreground colors, caused by reflected color of
greenscreen or bluescreen.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<type>

Set what type of despill to use.


=item B<mix>

Set how spillmap will be generated.


=item B<expand>

Set how much to get rid of still remaining spill.


=item B<red>

Controls amount of red in spill area.


=item B<green>

Controls amount of green in spill area.
Should be -1 for greenscreen.


=item B<blue>

Controls amount of blue in spill area.
Should be -1 for bluescreen.


=item B<brightness>

Controls brightness of spill area, preserving colors.


=item B<alpha>

Modify alpha from generated spillmap.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 detelecine


Apply an exact inverse of the telecine operation. It requires a predefined
pattern specified using the pattern option which must be the same as that passed
to the telecine filter.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<first_field>


=over 4


=item B<top, t>

top field first

=item B<bottom, b>

bottom field first
The default value is C<top>.

=back



=item B<pattern>

A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
The default value is C<23>.


=item B<start_frame>

A number representing position of the first frame with respect to the telecine
pattern. This is to be used if the stream is cut. The default value is C<0>.

=back




=head2 dilation


Apply dilation effect to the video.

This filter replaces the pixel by the local(3x3) maximum.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold0>


=item B<threshold1>


=item B<threshold2>


=item B<threshold3>

Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is 65535.
If 0, plane will remain unchanged.


=item B<coordinates>

Flag which specifies the pixel to refer to. Default is 255 i.e. all eight
pixels are used.

Flags to local 3x3 coordinates maps like this:

    1 2 3
    4   5
    6 7 8

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 displace


Displace pixels as indicated by second and third input stream.

It takes three input streams and outputs one stream, the first input is the
source, and second and third input are displacement maps.

The second input specifies how much to displace pixels along the
x-axis, while the third input specifies how much to displace pixels
along the y-axis.
If one of displacement map streams terminates, last frame from that
displacement map will be used.

Note that once generated, displacements maps can be reused over and over again.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<edge>

Set displace behavior for pixels that are out of range.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<blank>

Missing pixels are replaced by black pixels.


=item B<smear>

Adjacent pixels will spread out to replace missing pixels.


=item B<wrap>

Out of range pixels are wrapped so they point to pixels of other side.


=item B<mirror>

Out of range pixels will be replaced with mirrored pixels.

=back

Default is B<smear>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Add ripple effect to rgb input of video size hd720:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f lavfi -i nullsrc=s=hd720,lutrgb=128:128:128 -f lavfi -i nullsrc=s=hd720,geq='r=128+30*sin(2*PI*X/400+T):g=128+30*sin(2*PI*X/400+T):b=128+30*sin(2*PI*X/400+T)' -lavfi '[0][1][2]displace' OUTPUT



=item *

Add wave effect to rgb input of video size hd720:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -f lavfi -i nullsrc=hd720,geq='r=128+80*(sin(sqrt((X-W/2)*(X-W/2)+(Y-H/2)*(Y-H/2))/220*2*PI+T)):g=128+80*(sin(sqrt((X-W/2)*(X-W/2)+(Y-H/2)*(Y-H/2))/220*2*PI+T)):b=128+80*(sin(sqrt((X-W/2)*(X-W/2)+(Y-H/2)*(Y-H/2))/220*2*PI+T))' -lavfi '[1]split[x][y],[0][x][y]displace' OUTPUT


=back



=head2 dnn_classify


Do classification with deep neural networks based on bounding boxes.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dnn_backend>

Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts
only openvino now, tensorflow backends will be added.


=item B<model>

Set path to model file specifying network architecture and its parameters.
Note that different backends use different file formats.


=item B<input>

Set the input name of the dnn network.


=item B<output>

Set the output name of the dnn network.


=item B<confidence>

Set the confidence threshold (default: 0.5).


=item B<labels>

Set path to label file specifying the mapping between label id and name.
Each label name is written in one line, tailing spaces and empty lines are skipped.
The first line is the name of label id 0,
and the second line is the name of label id 1, etc.
The label id is considered as name if the label file is not provided.


=item B<backend_configs>

Set the configs to be passed into backend

For tensorflow backend, you can set its configs with B<sess_config> options,
please use tools/python/tf_sess_config.py to get the configs for your system.


=back



=head2 dnn_detect


Do object detection with deep neural networks.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dnn_backend>

Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts
only openvino now, tensorflow backends will be added.


=item B<model>

Set path to model file specifying network architecture and its parameters.
Note that different backends use different file formats.


=item B<input>

Set the input name of the dnn network.


=item B<output>

Set the output name of the dnn network.


=item B<confidence>

Set the confidence threshold (default: 0.5).


=item B<labels>

Set path to label file specifying the mapping between label id and name.
Each label name is written in one line, tailing spaces and empty lines are skipped.
The first line is the name of label id 0 (usually it is 'background'),
and the second line is the name of label id 1, etc.
The label id is considered as name if the label file is not provided.


=item B<backend_configs>

Set the configs to be passed into backend. To use async execution, set async (default: set).
Roll back to sync execution if the backend does not support async.


=back




=head2 dnn_processing


Do image processing with deep neural networks. It works together with another filter
which converts the pixel format of the Frame to what the dnn network requires.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dnn_backend>

Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts
the following values:


=over 4


=item B<tensorflow>

TensorFlow backend. To enable this backend you
need to install the TensorFlow for C library (see
E<lt>B<https://www.tensorflow.org/install/lang_c>E<gt>) and configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libtensorflow>


=item B<openvino>

OpenVINO backend. To enable this backend you
need to build and install the OpenVINO for C library (see
E<lt>B<https://github.com/openvinotoolkit/openvino/blob/master/build-instruction.md>E<gt>) and configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libopenvino> (--extra-cflags=-I... --extra-ldflags=-L... might
be needed if the header files and libraries are not installed into system path)


=item B<torch>

Libtorch backend. To enable this backend you need to build and install Libtroch
for C++ library. Please download cxx11 ABI version (see
E<lt>B<https://pytorch.org/get-started/locally>E<gt>)
and configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libtorch
--extra-cflags=-I/libtorch_root/libtorch/include
--extra-cflags=-I/libtorch_root/libtorch/include/torch/csrc/api/include
--extra-ldflags=-L/libtorch_root/libtorch/lib/>


=back



=item B<model>

Set path to model file specifying network architecture and its parameters.
Note that different backends use different file formats. TensorFlow, OpenVINO
and Libtorch backend can load files for only its format.


=item B<input>

Set the input name of the dnn network.


=item B<output>

Set the output name of the dnn network.


=item B<backend_configs>

Set the configs to be passed into backend. To use async execution, set async (default: set).
Roll back to sync execution if the backend does not support async.

For tensorflow backend, you can set its configs with B<sess_config> options,
please use tools/python/tf_sess_config.py to get the configs of TensorFlow backend for your system.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Remove rain in rgb24 frame with can.pb (see B<derain> filter):
	
	./ffmpeg -i rain.jpg -vf format=rgb24,dnn_processing=dnn_backend=tensorflow:model=can.pb:input=x:output=y derain.jpg



=item *

Handle the Y channel with srcnn.pb (see B<sr> filter) for frame with yuv420p (planar YUV formats supported):
	
	./ffmpeg -i 480p.jpg -vf format=yuv420p,scale=w=iw*2:h=ih*2,dnn_processing=dnn_backend=tensorflow:model=srcnn.pb:input=x:output=y -y srcnn.jpg



=item *

Handle the Y channel with espcn.pb (see B<sr> filter), which changes frame size, for format yuv420p (planar YUV formats supported),
please use tools/python/tf_sess_config.py to get the configs of TensorFlow backend for your system.
	
	./ffmpeg -i 480p.jpg -vf format=yuv420p,dnn_processing=dnn_backend=tensorflow:model=espcn.pb:input=x:output=y:backend_configs=sess_config=0x10022805320e09cdccccccccccec3f20012a01303801 -y tmp.espcn.jpg



=back



=head2 drawbox


Draw a colored box on the input image.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
the input width and height. It defaults to 0.


=item B<color, c>

Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>. If the special
value C<invert> is used, the box edge color is the same as the
video with inverted luma.


=item B<thickness, t>

The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge.
A value of C<fill> will create a filled box. Default value is C<3>.

See below for the list of accepted constants.


=item B<replace>

Applicable if the input has alpha. With value C<1>, the pixels of the painted box
will overwrite the video's color and alpha pixels.
Default is C<0>, which composites the box onto the input, leaving the video's alpha intact.

=back


The parameters for I<x>, I<y>, I<w> and I<h> and I<t> are expressions containing the
following constants:


=over 4


=item B<dar>

The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<w> / I<h>) * I<sar>.


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<in_h, ih>


=item B<in_w, iw>

The input width and height.


=item B<sar>

The input sample aspect ratio.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The width and height of the drawn box.


=item B<box_source>

Box source can be set as side_data_detection_bboxes if you want to use box data in
detection bboxes of side data.

If I<box_source> is set, the I<x>, I<y>, I<width> and I<height> will be ignored and
still use box data in detection bboxes of side data. So please do not use this parameter if you were
not sure about the box source.


=item B<t>

The thickness of the drawn box.

These constants allow the I<x>, I<y>, I<w>, I<h> and I<t> expressions to refer to
each other, so you may for example specify C<y=x/dar> or C<h=w/dar>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
	
	drawbox



=item *

Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
	
	drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@0.5


The previous example can be specified as:
	
	drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@0.5



=item *

Fill the box with pink color:
	
	drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@0.5:t=fill



=item *

Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
	
	drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red


=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same commands as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.



=head2 drawgraph

Draw a graph using input video metadata.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<m1>

Set 1st frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.


=item B<fg1>

Set 1st foreground color expression.


=item B<m2>

Set 2nd frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.


=item B<fg2>

Set 2nd foreground color expression.


=item B<m3>

Set 3rd frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.


=item B<fg3>

Set 3rd foreground color expression.


=item B<m4>

Set 4th frame metadata key from which metadata values will be used to draw a graph.


=item B<fg4>

Set 4th foreground color expression.


=item B<min>

Set minimal value of metadata value.


=item B<max>

Set maximal value of metadata value.


=item B<bg>

Set graph background color. Default is white.


=item B<mode>

Set graph mode.

Available values for mode is:

=over 4


=item B<bar>


=item B<dot>


=item B<line>


=back


Default is C<line>.


=item B<slide>

Set slide mode.

Available values for slide is:

=over 4


=item B<frame>

Draw new frame when right border is reached.


=item B<replace>

Replace old columns with new ones.


=item B<scroll>

Scroll from right to left.


=item B<rscroll>

Scroll from left to right.


=item B<picture>

Draw single picture.

=back


Default is C<frame>.


=item B<size>

Set size of graph video. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
The default value is C<900x256>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set the output frame rate. Default value is C<25>.

The foreground color expressions can use the following variables:

=over 4


=item B<MIN>

Minimal value of metadata value.


=item B<MAX>

Maximal value of metadata value.


=item B<VAL>

Current metadata key value.

=back


The color is defined as 0xAABBGGRR.

=back


Example using metadata from B<signalstats> filter:
	
	signalstats,drawgraph=lavfi.signalstats.YAVG:min=0:max=255


Example using metadata from B<ebur128> filter:
	
	ebur128=metadata=1,adrawgraph=lavfi.r128.M:min=-120:max=5



=head2 drawgrid


Draw a grid on the input image.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
input width and height, respectively, minus C<thickness>, so image gets
framed. Default to 0.


=item B<color, c>

Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>. If the special
value C<invert> is used, the grid color is the same as the
video with inverted luma.


=item B<thickness, t>

The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is C<1>.

See below for the list of accepted constants.


=item B<replace>

Applicable if the input has alpha. With C<1> the pixels of the painted grid
will overwrite the video's color and alpha pixels.
Default is C<0>, which composites the grid onto the input, leaving the video's alpha intact.

=back


The parameters for I<x>, I<y>, I<w> and I<h> and I<t> are expressions containing the
following constants:


=over 4


=item B<dar>

The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<w> / I<h>) * I<sar>.


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<in_h, ih>


=item B<in_w, iw>

The input grid cell width and height.


=item B<sar>

The input sample aspect ratio.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The width and height of the drawn cell.


=item B<t>

The thickness of the drawn cell.

These constants allow the I<x>, I<y>, I<w>, I<h> and I<t> expressions to refer to
each other, so you may for example specify C<y=x/dar> or C<h=w/dar>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
	
	drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@0.5



=item *

Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
	
	drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@0.5


=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same commands as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.



=head2 drawtext


Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
libfreetype library.

To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libfreetype> and C<--enable-libharfbuzz>.
To enable default font fallback and the I<font> option you need to
configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libfontconfig>.
To enable the I<text_shaping> option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libfribidi>.


=head3 Syntax


It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<box>

Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
The default value of I<box> is 0.


=item B<boxborderw>

Set the width of the border to be drawn around the box using I<boxcolor>.
The value must be specified using one of the following formats:

=over 4


=item *<C<boxborderw=10> set the width of all the borders to 10>


=item *<C<boxborderw=10|20> set the width of the top and bottom borders to 10>

    and the width of the left and right borders to 20

=item *<C<boxborderw=10|20|30> set the width of the top border to 10, the width>

    of the bottom border to 30 and the width of the left and right borders to 20

=item *<C<boxborderw=10|20|30|40> set the borders width to 10 (top), 20 (right),>

    30 (bottom), 40 (left)

=back

The default value of I<boxborderw> is "0".


=item B<boxcolor>

The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
option, check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

The default value of I<boxcolor> is "white".


=item B<line_spacing>

Set the line spacing in pixels. The default value of I<line_spacing> is 0.


=item B<text_align>

Set the vertical and horizontal alignment of the text with respect to the box boundaries.
The value is combination of flags, one for the vertical alignment (T=top,
M=middle, B=bottom) and one for the horizontal alignment (L=left, C=center, R=right).
Please note that tab characters are only supported with the left horizontal alignment.


=item B<y_align>

Specify what the I<y> value is referred to. Possible values are:

=over 4


=item *<C<text> the top of the highest glyph of the first text line is placed at I<y>>


=item *<C<baseline> the baseline of the first text line is placed at I<y>>


=item *<C<font> the baseline of the first text line is placed at I<y> plus the>

    ascent (in pixels) defined in the font metrics

=back

The default value of I<y_align> is "text" for backward compatibility.


=item B<borderw>

Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using I<bordercolor>.
The default value of I<borderw> is 0.


=item B<bordercolor>

Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
option, check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

The default value of I<bordercolor> is "black".


=item B<expansion>

Select how the I<text> is expanded. Can be either C<none>,
C<strftime> (deprecated) or C<normal> (default). See the
B<drawtext_expansion, Text expansion> section below for details.


=item B<basetime>

Set a start time for the count. Value is in microseconds. Only applied
in the deprecated C<strftime> expansion mode. To emulate in normal expansion
mode use the C<pts> function, supplying the start time (in seconds)
as the second argument.


=item B<fix_bounds>

If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.


=item B<fontcolor>

The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

The default value of I<fontcolor> is "black".


=item B<fontcolor_expr>

String which is expanded the same way as I<text> to obtain dynamic
I<fontcolor> value. By default this option has empty value and is not
processed. When this option is set, it overrides I<fontcolor> option.


=item B<font>

The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.


=item B<fontfile>

The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.


=item B<alpha>

Draw the text applying alpha blending. The value can
be a number between 0.0 and 1.0.
The expression accepts the same variables I<x, y> as well.
The default value is 1.
Please see I<fontcolor_expr>.


=item B<fontsize>

The font size to be used for drawing text.
The default value of I<fontsize> is 16.


=item B<text_shaping>

If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
By default 1 (if supported).


=item B<ft_load_flags>

The flags to be used for loading the fonts.

The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
a combination of the following values:

=over 4


=item I<default>


=item I<no_scale>


=item I<no_hinting>


=item I<render>


=item I<no_bitmap>


=item I<vertical_layout>


=item I<force_autohint>


=item I<crop_bitmap>


=item I<pedantic>


=item I<ignore_global_advance_width>


=item I<no_recurse>


=item I<ignore_transform>


=item I<monochrome>


=item I<linear_design>


=item I<no_autohint>


=back


Default value is "default".

For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
libfreetype flags.


=item B<shadowcolor>

The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
syntax of this option, check the B<"Color" section in the
ffmpeg-utils manual>.

The default value of I<shadowcolor> is "black".


=item B<boxw>

Set the width of the box to be drawn around text.
The default value of I<boxw> is computed automatically to match the text width


=item B<boxh>

Set the height of the box to be drawn around text.
The default value of I<boxh> is computed automatically to match the text height


=item B<shadowx>


=item B<shadowy>

The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
values. The default value for both is "0".


=item B<start_number>

The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
is "0".


=item B<tabsize>

The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
Default value is 4.


=item B<timecode>

Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
format. It can be used with or without text parameter. I<timecode_rate>
option must be specified.


=item B<timecode_rate, rate, r>

Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only). Value will be rounded to nearest
integer. Minimum value is "1".
Drop-frame timecode is supported for frame rates 30 & 60.


=item B<tc24hmax>

If set to 1, the output of the timecode option will wrap around at 24 hours.
Default is 0 (disabled).


=item B<text>

The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
encoded characters.
This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
I<textfile>.


=item B<textfile>

A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
of UTF-8 encoded characters.

This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
parameter I<text>.

If both I<text> and I<textfile> are specified, an error is thrown.


=item B<text_source>

Text source should be set as side_data_detection_bboxes if you want to use text data in
detection bboxes of side data.

If text source is set, I<text> and I<textfile> will be ignored and still use
text data in detection bboxes of side data. So please do not use this parameter
if you are not sure about the text source.


=item B<reload>

The I<textfile> will be reloaded at specified frame interval.
Be sure to update I<textfile> atomically, or it may be read partially,
or even fail.
Range is 0 to INT_MAX. Default is 0.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
output image.

The default value of I<x> and I<y> is "0".

See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.

=back


The parameters for I<x> and I<y> are expressions containing the
following constants and functions:


=over 4


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<w> / I<h>) * I<sar>


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<line_h, lh>

the height of each text line


=item B<main_h, h, H>

the input height


=item B<main_w, w, W>

the input width


=item B<max_glyph_a, ascent>

the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
glyphs.
It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
upwards.


=item B<max_glyph_d, descent>

the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
upwards.


=item B<max_glyph_h>

maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to I<ascent> -
I<descent>.


=item B<max_glyph_w>

maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
contained in the rendered text


=item B<font_a>

the ascent size defined in the font metrics


=item B<font_d>

the descent size defined in the font metrics


=item B<top_a>

the maximum ascender of the glyphs of the first text line


=item B<bottom_d>

the maximum descender of the glyphs of the last text line


=item B<n>

the number of input frame, starting from 0


=item B<rand(min, max)>

return a random number included between I<min> and I<max>


=item B<sar>

The input sample aspect ratio.


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown


=item B<text_h, th>

the height of the rendered text


=item B<text_w, tw>

the width of the rendered text


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.

These parameters allow the I<x> and I<y> expressions to refer
to each other, so you can for example specify C<y=x/dar>.


=item B<pict_type>

A one character description of the current frame's picture type.


=item B<pkt_pos>

The current packet's position in the input file or stream
(in bytes, from the start of the input). A value of -1 indicates
this info is not available.


=item B<duration>

The current packet's duration, in seconds.


=item B<pkt_size>

The current packet's size (in bytes).

=back




=head3 Text expansion


If B<expansion> is set to C<strftime>, the filter recognizes
sequences accepted by the C<strftime> C function in the provided
text and expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of
C<strftime>. This feature is deprecated in favor of C<normal>
expansion with the C<gmtime> or C<localtime> expansion
functions.

If B<expansion> is set to C<none>, the text is printed verbatim.

If B<expansion> is set to C<normal> (which is the default),
the following expansion mechanism is used.

The backslash character B<\>, followed by any character, always expands to
the second character.

Sequences of the form C<%{...}> are expanded. The text between the
braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '}'),
they should be escaped.

Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the B<text>
option in the filter argument string and as the filter argument in the
filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell, that makes up to four
levels of escaping; using a text file with the B<textfile> option avoids
these problems.

The following functions are available:


=over 4



=item B<expr, e>

The expression evaluation result.

It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
which accepts the same constants and functions as the I<x> and
I<y> values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
the constants I<text_w> and I<text_h> will have an undefined
value.


=item B<expr_int_format, eif>

Evaluate the expression's value and output as formatted integer.

The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the I<expr> function.
The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are B<x>,
B<X>, B<d> and B<u>. They are treated exactly as in the
C<printf> function.
The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.


=item B<gmtime>

The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
It can accept an argument: a C<strftime> C function format string.
The format string is extended to support the variable I<%[1-6]N>
which prints fractions of the second with optionally specified number of digits.


=item B<localtime>

The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
It can accept an argument: a C<strftime> C function format string.
The format string is extended to support the variable I<%[1-6]N>
which prints fractions of the second with optionally specified number of digits.


=item B<metadata>

Frame metadata. Takes one or two arguments.

The first argument is mandatory and specifies the metadata key.

The second argument is optional and specifies a default value, used when the
metadata key is not found or empty.

Available metadata can be identified by inspecting entries
starting with TAG included within each frame section
printed by running C<ffprobe -show_frames>.

String metadata generated in filters leading to
the drawtext filter are also available.


=item B<n, frame_num>

The frame number, starting from 0.


=item B<pict_type>

A one character description of the current picture type.


=item B<pts>

The timestamp of the current frame.
It can take up to three arguments.

The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to C<flt>
for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; C<hms> stands
for a formatted I<[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm> timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
C<gmtime> stands for the timestamp of the frame formatted as UTC time;
C<localtime> stands for the timestamp of the frame formatted as
local time zone time.

The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.

If the format is set to C<hms>, a third argument C<24HH> may be
supplied to present the hour part of the formatted timestamp in 24h format
(00-23).

If the format is set to C<localtime> or C<gmtime>, a third
argument may be supplied: a C<strftime> C function format string.
By default, I<YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS> format will be used.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports altering parameters via commands:

=over 4


=item B<reinit>

Alter existing filter parameters.

Syntax for the argument is the same as for filter invocation, e.g.

	
	fontsize=56:fontcolor=green:text='Hello World'


Full filter invocation with sendcmd would look like this:

	
	sendcmd=c='56.0 drawtext reinit fontsize=56\:fontcolor=green\:text=Hello\\ World'


If the entire argument can't be parsed or applied as valid values then the filter will
continue with its existing parameters.


=back


The following options are also supported as B<commands>:


=over 4


=item *<x>


=item *<y>


=item *<alpha>


=item *<fontsize>


=item *<fontcolor>


=item *<boxcolor>


=item *<bordercolor>


=item *<shadowcolor>


=item *<box>


=item *<boxw>


=item *<boxh>


=item *<boxborderw>


=item *<line_spacing>


=item *<text_align>


=item *<shadowx>


=item *<shadowy>


=item *<borderw>


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
optional parameters.

	
	drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"



=item *

Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
opacity of 20%.

	
	drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
	          x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@0.2"


Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
within the parameter list.


=item *

Show the text at the center of the video frame:
	
	drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h)/2"



=item *

Show the text at a random position, switching to a new position every 30 seconds:
	
	drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=if(eq(mod(t\,30)\,0)\,rand(0\,(w-text_w))\,x):y=if(eq(mod(t\,30)\,0)\,rand(0\,(h-text_h))\,y)"



=item *

Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
frame. The file F<LONG_LINE> is assumed to contain a single line
with no newlines.
	
	drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"



=item *

Show the content of file F<CREDITS> off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
	
	drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"



=item *

Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
	
	drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"



=item *

Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
	
	drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"



=item *

Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
	
	drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'



=item *

Draw "Test Text" with font size dependent on height of the video.
	
	drawtext="text='Test Text': fontsize=h/30: x=(w-text_w)/2: y=(h-text_h*2)"



=item *

Print the date of a real-time encoding (see documentation for the
C<strftime> C function):
	
	drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%{localtime\:%a %b %d %Y}'



=item *

Show text fading in and out (appearing/disappearing):
	
	#!/bin/sh
	DS=1.0 # display start
	DE=10.0 # display end
	FID=1.5 # fade in duration
	FOD=5 # fade out duration
	ffplay -f lavfi "color,drawtext=text=TEST:fontsize=50:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor_expr=ff0000%{eif\\\\: clip(255*(1*between(t\\, $DS + $FID\\, $DE - $FOD) + ((t - $DS)/$FID)*between(t\\, $DS\\, $DS + $FID) + (-(t - $DE)/$FOD)*between(t\\, $DE - $FOD\\, $DE) )\\, 0\\, 255) \\\\: x\\\\: 2 }"



=item *

Horizontally align multiple separate texts. Note that B<max_glyph_a>
and the B<fontsize> value are included in the B<y> offset.
	
	drawtext=fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=DOG:fontsize=24:x=10:y=20+24-max_glyph_a,
	drawtext=fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=cow:fontsize=24:x=80:y=20+24-max_glyph_a



=item *

Plot special I<lavf.image2dec.source_basename> metadata onto each frame if
such metadata exists. Otherwise, plot the string "NA". Note that image2 demuxer
must have option B<-export_path_metadata 1> for the special metadata fields
to be available for filters.
	
	drawtext="fontsize=20:fontcolor=white:fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text='%{metadata\:lavf.image2dec.source_basename\:NA}':x=10:y=10"



=back


For more information about libfreetype, check:
E<lt>B<http://www.freetype.org/>E<gt>.

For more information about fontconfig, check:
E<lt>B<http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html>E<gt>.

For more information about libfribidi, check:
E<lt>B<http://fribidi.org/>E<gt>.

For more information about libharfbuzz, check:
E<lt>B<https://github.com/harfbuzz/harfbuzz>E<gt>.


=head2 edgedetect


Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<low>


=item B<high>

Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
algorithm.

The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
by the low threshold.

I<low> and I<high> threshold values must be chosen in the range
[0,1], and I<low> should be lesser or equal to I<high>.

Default value for I<low> is C<20/255>, and default value for I<high>
is C<50/255>.


=item B<mode>

Define the drawing mode.


=over 4


=item B<wires>

Draw white/gray wires on black background.


=item B<colormix>

Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.


=item B<canny>

Apply Canny edge detector on all selected planes.

=back

Default value is I<wires>.


=item B<planes>

Select planes for filtering. By default all available planes are filtered.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
	
	edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4



=item *

Painting effect without thresholding:
	
	edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0


=back



=head2 elbg


Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.

For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
of distinct output colors.

This filter accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<codebook_length, l>

Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.


=item B<nb_steps, n>

Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
computation time. Default value is 1.


=item B<seed, s>

Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.


=item B<pal8>

Set pal8 output pixel format. This option does not work with codebook
length greater than 256. Default is disabled.


=item B<use_alpha>

Include alpha values in the quantization calculation. Allows creating
palettized output images (e.g. PNG8) with multiple alpha smooth blending.

=back



=head2 entropy


Measure graylevel entropy in histogram of color channels of video frames.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Can be either I<normal> or I<diff>. Default is I<normal>.

I<diff> mode measures entropy of histogram delta values, absolute differences
between neighbour histogram values.

=back



=head2 epx

Apply the EPX magnification filter which is designed for pixel art.

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<n>

Set the scaling dimension: C<2> for C<2xEPX>, C<3> for
C<3xEPX>.
Default is C<3>.

=back



=head2 eq

Set brightness, contrast, saturation and approximate gamma adjustment.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<contrast>

Set the contrast expression. The value must be a float value in range
C<-1000.0> to C<1000.0>. The default value is "1".


=item B<brightness>

Set the brightness expression. The value must be a float value in
range C<-1.0> to C<1.0>. The default value is "0".


=item B<saturation>

Set the saturation expression. The value must be a float in
range C<0.0> to C<3.0>. The default value is "1".


=item B<gamma>

Set the gamma expression. The value must be a float in range
C<0.1> to C<10.0>.  The default value is "1".


=item B<gamma_r>

Set the gamma expression for red. The value must be a float in
range C<0.1> to C<10.0>. The default value is "1".


=item B<gamma_g>

Set the gamma expression for green. The value must be a float in range
C<0.1> to C<10.0>. The default value is "1".


=item B<gamma_b>

Set the gamma expression for blue. The value must be a float in range
C<0.1> to C<10.0>. The default value is "1".


=item B<gamma_weight>

Set the gamma weight expression. It can be used to reduce the effect
of a high gamma value on bright image areas, e.g. keep them from
getting overamplified and just plain white. The value must be a float
in range C<0.0> to C<1.0>. A value of C<0.0> turns the
gamma correction all the way down while C<1.0> leaves it at its
full strength. Default is "1".


=item B<eval>

Set when the expressions for brightness, contrast, saturation and
gamma expressions are evaluated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<init>

only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
when a command is processed


=item B<frame>

evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

=back


Default value is B<init>.

=back


The expressions accept the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<n>

frame count of the input frame starting from 0


=item B<pos>

byte position of the corresponding packet in the input file, NAN if
unspecified; deprecated, do not use


=item B<r>

frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown

=back



=head3 Commands

The filter supports the following commands:


=over 4


=item B<contrast>

Set the contrast expression.


=item B<brightness>

Set the brightness expression.


=item B<saturation>

Set the saturation expression.


=item B<gamma>

Set the gamma expression.


=item B<gamma_r>

Set the gamma_r expression.


=item B<gamma_g>

Set gamma_g expression.


=item B<gamma_b>

Set gamma_b expression.


=item B<gamma_weight>

Set gamma_weight expression.

The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=back




=head2 erosion


Apply erosion effect to the video.

This filter replaces the pixel by the local(3x3) minimum.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold0>


=item B<threshold1>


=item B<threshold2>


=item B<threshold3>

Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is 65535.
If 0, plane will remain unchanged.


=item B<coordinates>

Flag which specifies the pixel to refer to. Default is 255 i.e. all eight
pixels are used.

Flags to local 3x3 coordinates maps like this:

    1 2 3
    4   5
    6 7 8

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 estdif


Deinterlace the input video ("estdif" stands for "Edge Slope
Tracing Deinterlacing Filter").

Spatial only filter that uses edge slope tracing algorithm
to interpolate missing lines.
It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<field>

Output one frame for each field.

=back


The default value is C<field>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following
values:


=over 4


=item B<all>

Deinterlace all frames.

=item B<interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


The default value is C<all>.


=item B<rslope>

Specify the search radius for edge slope tracing. Default value is 1.
Allowed range is from 1 to 15.


=item B<redge>

Specify the search radius for best edge matching. Default value is 2.
Allowed range is from 0 to 15.


=item B<ecost>

Specify the edge cost for edge matching. Default value is 2.
Allowed range is from 0 to 50.


=item B<mcost>

Specify the middle cost for edge matching. Default value is 1.
Allowed range is from 0 to 50.


=item B<dcost>

Specify the distance cost for edge matching. Default value is 1.
Allowed range is from 0 to 50.


=item B<interp>

Specify the interpolation used. Default is 4-point interpolation. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<2p>

Two-point interpolation.

=item B<4p>

Four-point interpolation.

=item B<6p>

Six-point interpolation.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 exposure

Adjust exposure of the video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<exposure>

Set the exposure correction in EV. Allowed range is from -3.0 to 3.0 EV
Default value is 0 EV.


=item B<black>

Set the black level correction. Allowed range is from -1.0 to 1.0.
Default value is 0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 extractplanes


Extract color channel components from input video stream into
separate grayscale video streams.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set plane(s) to extract.

Available values for planes are:

=over 4


=item B<y>


=item B<u>


=item B<v>


=item B<a>


=item B<r>


=item B<g>


=item B<b>


=back


Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
That means you cannot select C<r>, C<g>, C<b> planes
with C<y>, C<u>, C<v> planes at same time.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
into 3 grayscale outputs:
	
	ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi


=back



=head2 fade


Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<type, t>

The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
effect.
Default is C<in>.


=item B<start_frame, s>

Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
effect at. Default is 0.


=item B<nb_frames, n>

The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
selected B<color>.
Default is 25.


=item B<alpha>

If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
Default value is 0.


=item B<start_time, st>

Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
whichever comes last.  Default is 0.


=item B<duration, d>

The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
selected B<color>.
If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0
(nb_frames is used by default).


=item B<color, c>

Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Fade in the first 30 frames of video:
	
	fade=in:0:30


The command above is equivalent to:
	
	fade=t=in:s=0:n=30



=item *

Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
	
	fade=out:155:45
	fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45



=item *

Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
	
	fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25



=item *

Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
	
	fade=in:5:20:color=yellow



=item *

Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
	
	fade=in:0:25:alpha=1



=item *

Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
	
	fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5



=back



=head2 feedback

Apply feedback video filter.

This filter pass cropped input frames to 2nd output.
From there it can be filtered with other video filters.
After filter receives frame from 2nd input, that frame
is combined on top of original frame from 1st input and passed
to 1st output.

The typical usage is filter only part of frame.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Set the top left crop position.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Set the crop size.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Blur only top left rectangular part of video frame size 100x100 with gblur filter.
	
	[in][blurin]feedback=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=100[out][blurout];[blurout]gblur=8[blurin]



=item *

Draw black box on top left part of video frame of size 100x100 with drawbox filter.
	
	[in][blurin]feedback=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=100[out][blurout];[blurout]drawbox=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=100:t=100[blurin]



=item *

Pixelize rectangular part of video frame of size 100x100 with pixelize filter.
	
	[in][blurin]feedback=x=320:y=240:w=100:h=100[out][blurout];[blurout]pixelize[blurin]


=back



=head2 fftdnoiz

Denoise frames using 3D FFT (frequency domain filtering).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sigma>

Set the noise sigma constant. This sets denoising strength.
Default value is 1. Allowed range is from 0 to 30.
Using very high sigma with low overlap may give blocking artifacts.


=item B<amount>

Set amount of denoising. By default all detected noise is reduced.
Default value is 1. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.


=item B<block>

Set size of block in pixels, Default is 32, can be 8 to 256.


=item B<overlap>

Set block overlap. Default is 0.5. Allowed range is from 0.2 to 0.8.


=item B<method>

Set denoising method. Default is C<wiener>, can also be C<hard>.


=item B<prev>

Set number of previous frames to use for denoising. By default is set to 0.


=item B<next>

Set number of next frames to to use for denoising. By default is set to 0.


=item B<planes>

Set planes which will be filtered, by default are all available filtered
except alpha.

=back



=head2 fftfilt

Apply arbitrary expressions to samples in frequency domain


=over 4


=item B<dc_Y>

Adjust the dc value (gain) of the luma plane of the image. The filter
accepts an integer value in range C<0> to C<1000>. The default
value is set to C<0>.


=item B<dc_U>

Adjust the dc value (gain) of the 1st chroma plane of the image. The
filter accepts an integer value in range C<0> to C<1000>. The
default value is set to C<0>.


=item B<dc_V>

Adjust the dc value (gain) of the 2nd chroma plane of the image. The
filter accepts an integer value in range C<0> to C<1000>. The
default value is set to C<0>.


=item B<weight_Y>

Set the frequency domain weight expression for the luma plane.


=item B<weight_U>

Set the frequency domain weight expression for the 1st chroma plane.


=item B<weight_V>

Set the frequency domain weight expression for the 2nd chroma plane.


=item B<eval>

Set when the expressions are evaluated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<init>

Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization.


=item B<frame>

Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.

=back


Default value is B<init>.

The filter accepts the following variables:

=item B<X>


=item B<Y>

The coordinates of the current sample.


=item B<W>


=item B<H>

The width and height of the image.


=item B<N>

The number of input frame, starting from 0.


=item B<WS>


=item B<HS>

The size of FFT array for horizontal and vertical processing.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

High-pass:
	
	fftfilt=dc_Y=128:weight_Y='squish(1-(Y+X)/100)'



=item *

Low-pass:
	
	fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='squish((Y+X)/100-1)'



=item *

Sharpen:
	
	fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='1+squish(1-(Y+X)/100)'



=item *

Blur:
	
	fftfilt=dc_Y=0:weight_Y='exp(-4 * ((Y+X)/(W+H)))'



=back



=head2 field


Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
non-interlaced.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<type>

Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is C<0> or
C<top>) or the bottom field (if the value is C<1> or
C<bottom>).

=back



=head2 fieldhint


Create new frames by copying the top and bottom fields from surrounding frames
supplied as numbers by the hint file.


=over 4


=item B<hint>

Set file containing hints: absolute/relative frame numbers.

There must be one line for each frame in a clip. Each line must contain two
numbers separated by the comma, optionally followed by C<-> or C<+>.
Numbers supplied on each line of file can not be out of [N-1,N+1] where N
is current frame number for C<absolute> mode or out of [-1, 1] range
for C<relative> mode. First number tells from which frame to pick up top
field and second number tells from which frame to pick up bottom field.

If optionally followed by C<+> output frame will be marked as interlaced,
else if followed by C<-> output frame will be marked as progressive, else
it will be marked same as input frame.
If optionally followed by C<t> output frame will use only top field, or in
case of C<b> it will use only bottom field.
If line starts with C<#> or C<;> that line is skipped.


=item B<mode>

Can be item C<absolute> or C<relative> or C<pattern>. Default is C<absolute>.
The C<pattern> mode is same as C<relative> mode, except at last entry of file if there
are more frames to process than C<hint> file is seek back to start.

=back


Example of first several lines of C<hint> file for C<relative> mode:
	
	0,0 - # first frame
	1,0 - # second frame, use third's frame top field and second's frame bottom field
	1,0 - # third frame, use fourth's frame top field and third's frame bottom field
	1,0 -
	0,0 -
	0,0 -
	1,0 -
	1,0 -
	1,0 -
	0,0 -
	0,0 -
	1,0 -
	1,0 -
	1,0 -
	0,0 -



=head2 fieldmatch


Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine C<fieldmatch> needs to be
followed by a decimation filter such as B<decimate> in the filtergraph.

The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
C<fieldmatch> will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
de-interlaced by a later filter such as B<yadif> before decimation.

In addition to the various configuration options, C<fieldmatch> can take an
optional second stream, activated through the B<ppsrc> option. If
enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
(assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.

Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
which C<fieldmatch> is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
close, some behaviour and options names can differ.

The B<decimate> filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
If your input has mixed telecined (30fps) and progressive content with a lower
framerate like 24fps use the following filterchain to produce the necessary cfr
stream: C<dejudder,fps=30000/1001,fieldmatch,decimate>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<order>

Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).

=item B<bff>

Assume bottom field first.

=item B<tff>

Assume top field first.

=back


Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
stream.

Default value is I<auto>.


=item B<mode>

Set the matching mode or strategy to use. B<pc> mode is the safest in the
sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
hand, B<pcn_ub> mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
all somewhere in between B<pc> and B<pcn_ub> in terms of risking
jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.

More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in B<p/c/n/u/b meaning> section.

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<pc>

2-way matching (p/c)

=item B<pc_n>

2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)

=item B<pc_u>

2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)

=item B<pc_n_ub>

2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
still combed (p/c + n + u/b)

=item B<pcn>

3-way matching (p/c/n)

=item B<pcn_ub>

3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)

=back


The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
mode assuming B<order>=I<tff> (and B<field> on I<auto> or
I<top>).

In terms of speed B<pc> mode is by far the fastest and B<pcn_ub> is
the slowest.

Default value is I<pc_n>.


=item B<ppsrc>

Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
introduction for more details. It is similar to the B<clip2> feature from
VFM/TFM.

Default value is C<0> (disabled).


=item B<field>

Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
B<order> unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
large impact on matching performance. Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Automatic (same value as B<order>).

=item B<bottom>

Match from the bottom field.

=item B<top>

Match from the top field.

=back


Default value is I<auto>.


=item B<mchroma>

Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to C<0>
only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
artifacts. Setting this to C<0> could also be used to speed things up at
the cost of some accuracy.

Default value is C<1>.


=item B<y0>


=item B<y1>

These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between B<y0> and
B<y1> from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
interfere with the matching. B<y0> sets the starting scan line and
B<y1> sets the ending line; all lines in between B<y0> and
B<y1> (including B<y0> and B<y1>) will be ignored. Setting
B<y0> and B<y1> to the same value will disable the feature.
B<y0> and B<y1> defaults to C<0>.


=item B<scthresh>

Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
the luma plane. Good values are in the C<[8.0, 14.0]> range. Scene change
detection is only relevant in case B<combmatch>=I<sc>.  The range for
B<scthresh> is C<[0.0, 100.0]>.

Default value is C<12.0>.


=item B<combmatch>

When B<combatch> is not I<none>, C<fieldmatch> will take into
account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
final match. Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<none>

No final matching based on combed scores.

=item B<sc>

Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.

=item B<full>

Use combed scores all the time.

=back


Default is I<sc>.


=item B<combdbg>

Force C<fieldmatch> to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
print them. This setting is known as B<micout> in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<none>

No forced calculation.

=item B<pcn>

Force p/c/n calculations.

=item B<pcnub>

Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.

=back


Default value is I<none>.


=item B<cthresh>

This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
C<-1> (every pixel will be detected as combed) to C<255> (no pixel will
be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
range is C<[8, 12]>.

Default value is C<9>.


=item B<chroma>

Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision.  Only
disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
using B<chroma>=I<0> is usually more reliable, except for the case
where there is chroma only combing in the source.

Default value is C<0>.


=item B<blockx>


=item B<blocky>

Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
B<combpel> pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
declared combed. See the B<combpel> parameter description for more info.
Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
to 512.

Default value is C<16>.


=item B<combpel>

The number of combed pixels inside any of the B<blocky> by
B<blockx> size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
combed. While B<cthresh> controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
window defined by the B<blockx> and B<blocky> settings) on the
frame. Minimum value is C<0> and maximum is C<blocky x blockx> (at
which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
as B<MI> in TFM/VFM vocabulary.

Default value is C<80>.

=back




=head3 p/c/n/u/b meaning



=head4 p/c/n


We assume the following telecined stream:

	
	Top fields:     1 2 2 3 4
	Bottom fields:  1 2 3 4 4


The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.

When C<fieldmatch> is configured to run a matching from bottom
(B<field>=I<bottom>) this is how this input stream get transformed:

	
	Input stream:
	                T     1 2 2 3 4
	                B     1 2 3 4 4   <-- matching reference
	
	Matches:              c c n n c
	
	Output stream:
	                T     1 2 3 4 4
	                B     1 2 3 4 4


As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
after this operation. See for instance the B<decimate> filter.

The same operation now matching from top fields (B<field>=I<top>)
looks like this:

	
	Input stream:
	                T     1 2 2 3 4   <-- matching reference
	                B     1 2 3 4 4
	
	Matches:              c c p p c
	
	Output stream:
	                T     1 2 2 3 4
	                B     1 2 2 3 4


In these examples, we can see what I<p>, I<c> and I<n> mean;
basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:


=over 4


=item *<I<p> matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame>


=item *<I<c> matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame>


=item *<I<n> matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame>


=back



=head4 u/b


The I<u> and I<b> matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.

With bottom matching (B<field>=I<bottom>):
	
	Match:           c         p           n          b          u
	
	                 x       x               x        x          x
	  Top          1 2 2     1 2 2       1 2 2      1 2 2      1 2 2
	  Bottom       1 2 3     1 2 3       1 2 3      1 2 3      1 2 3
	                 x         x           x        x              x
	
	Output frames:
	                 2          1          2          2          2
	                 2          2          2          1          3


With top matching (B<field>=I<top>):
	
	Match:           c         p           n          b          u
	
	                 x         x           x        x              x
	  Top          1 2 2     1 2 2       1 2 2      1 2 2      1 2 2
	  Bottom       1 2 3     1 2 3       1 2 3      1 2 3      1 2 3
	                 x       x               x        x          x
	
	Output frames:
	                 2          2          2          1          2
	                 2          1          3          2          2



=head3 Examples


Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
	
	fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate


Advanced IVTC, with fallback on B<yadif> for still combed frames:
	
	fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate



=head2 fieldorder


Transform the field order of the input video.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<order>

The output field order. Valid values are I<tff> for top field first or I<bff>
for bottom field first.

=back


The default value is B<tff>.

The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.

If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
not alter the incoming video.

It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
which is bottom field first.

For example:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv



=head2 fillborders


Fill borders of the input video, without changing video stream dimensions.
Sometimes video can have garbage at the four edges and you may not want to
crop video input to keep size multiple of some number.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<left>

Number of pixels to fill from left border.


=item B<right>

Number of pixels to fill from right border.


=item B<top>

Number of pixels to fill from top border.


=item B<bottom>

Number of pixels to fill from bottom border.


=item B<mode>

Set fill mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<smear>

fill pixels using outermost pixels


=item B<mirror>

fill pixels using mirroring (half sample symmetric)


=item B<fixed>

fill pixels with constant value


=item B<reflect>

fill pixels using reflecting (whole sample symmetric)


=item B<wrap>

fill pixels using wrapping


=item B<fade>

fade pixels to constant value


=item B<margins>

fill pixels at top and bottom with weighted averages pixels near borders

=back


Default is I<smear>.


=item B<color>

Set color for pixels in fixed or fade mode. Default is I<black>.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 find_rect


Find a rectangular object in the input video.

The object to search for must be specified as a gray8 image specified with the
B<object> option.

For each possible match, a score is computed. If the score reaches the specified
threshold, the object is considered found.

If the input video contains multiple instances of the object, the filter will
find only one of them.

When an object is found, the following metadata entries are set in the matching
frame:

=over 4


=item B<lavfi.rect.w>

width of object


=item B<lavfi.rect.h>

height of object


=item B<lavfi.rect.x>

x position of object


=item B<lavfi.rect.y>

y position of object


=item B<lavfi.rect.score>

match score of the found object

=back


It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<object>

Filepath of the object image, needs to be in gray8.


=item B<threshold>

Detection threshold, expressed as a decimal number in the range 0-1.

A threshold value of 0.01 means only exact matches, a threshold of 0.99 means
almost everything matches.

Default value is 0.5.


=item B<mipmaps>

Number of mipmaps, default is 3.


=item B<xmin, ymin, xmax, ymax>

Specifies the rectangle in which to search.


=item B<discard>

Discard frames where object is not detected. Default is disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Cover a rectangular object by the supplied image of a given video using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i file.ts -vf find_rect=newref.pgm,cover_rect=cover.jpg:mode=cover new.mkv



=item *

Find the position of an object in each frame using B<ffprobe> and write
it to a log file:
	
	ffprobe -f lavfi movie=test.mp4,find_rect=object=object.pgm:threshold=0.3 \
	  -show_entries frame=pkt_pts_time:frame_tags=lavfi.rect.x,lavfi.rect.y \
	  -of csv -o find_rect.csv



=back



=head2 floodfill


Flood area with values of same pixel components with another values.

It accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<x>

Set pixel x coordinate.


=item B<y>

Set pixel y coordinate.


=item B<s0>

Set source #0 component value.


=item B<s1>

Set source #1 component value.


=item B<s2>

Set source #2 component value.


=item B<s3>

Set source #3 component value.


=item B<d0>

Set destination #0 component value.


=item B<d1>

Set destination #1 component value.


=item B<d2>

Set destination #2 component value.


=item B<d3>

Set destination #3 component value.

=back




=head2 format


Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
the next filter.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<pix_fmts>

A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
"pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".


=item B<color_spaces>

A '|'-separated list of color space names, such as
"color_spaces=bt709|bt470bg|bt2020nc".


=item B<color_ranges>

A '|'-separated list of color range names, such as
"color_spaces=tv|pc".


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Convert the input video to the I<yuv420p> format
	
	format=pix_fmts=yuv420p


Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
	
	format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p


=back




=head2 fps


Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
frames as necessary.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<fps>

The desired output frame rate. It accepts expressions containing the following
constants:


=over 4


=item B<source_fps>

The input's frame rate


=item B<ntsc>

NTSC frame rate of C<30000/1001>


=item B<pal>

PAL frame rate of C<25.0>


=item B<film>

Film frame rate of C<24.0>


=item B<ntsc_film>

NTSC-film frame rate of C<24000/1001>

=back


The default is C<25>.


=item B<start_time>

Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
frames with a negative PTS.


=item B<round>

Timestamp (PTS) rounding method.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item B<zero>

round towards 0

=item B<inf>

round away from 0

=item B<down>

round towards -infinity

=item B<up>

round towards +infinity

=item B<near>

round to nearest

=back

The default is C<near>.


=item B<eof_action>

Action performed when reading the last frame.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item B<round>

Use same timestamp rounding method as used for other frames.

=item B<pass>

Pass through last frame if input duration has not been reached yet.

=back

The default is C<round>.


=back


Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
I<fps>[:I<start_time>[:I<round>]].

See also the B<setpts> filter.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
	
	fps=fps=25



=item *

Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
	
	fps=fps=film:round=near


=back



=head2 framepack


Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the B<scale> and
B<fps> filters.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<format>

The desired packing format. Supported values are:


=over 4



=item B<sbs>

The views are next to each other (default).


=item B<tab>

The views are on top of each other.


=item B<lines>

The views are packed by line.


=item B<columns>

The views are packed by column.


=item B<frameseq>

The views are temporally interleaved.


=back



=back


Some examples:

	
	# Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
	ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
	
	# Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
	ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT



=head2 framerate


Change the frame rate by interpolating new video output frames from the source
frames.

This filter is not designed to function correctly with interlaced media. If
you wish to change the frame rate of interlaced media then you are required
to deinterlace before this filter and re-interlace after this filter.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<fps>

Specify the output frames per second. This option can also be specified
as a value alone. The default is C<50>.


=item B<interp_start>

Specify the start of a range where the output frame will be created as a
linear interpolation of two frames. The range is [C<0>-C<255>],
the default is C<15>.


=item B<interp_end>

Specify the end of a range where the output frame will be created as a
linear interpolation of two frames. The range is [C<0>-C<255>],
the default is C<240>.


=item B<scene>

Specify the level at which a scene change is detected as a value between
0 and 100 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
value means the current frame is more likely to be one.
The default is C<8.2>.


=item B<flags>

Specify flags influencing the filter process.

Available value for I<flags> is:


=over 4


=item B<scene_change_detect, scd>

Enable scene change detection using the value of the option I<scene>.
This flag is enabled by default.

=back


=back



=head2 framestep


Select one frame every N-th frame.

This filter accepts the following option:

=over 4


=item B<step>

Select frame after every C<step> frames.
Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is C<1>.

=back



=head2 freezedetect


Detect frozen video.

This filter logs a message and sets frame metadata when it detects that the
input video has no significant change in content during a specified duration.
Video freeze detection calculates the mean average absolute difference of all
the components of video frames and compares it to a noise floor.

The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds. The
C<lavfi.freezedetect.freeze_start> metadata key is set on the first frame
whose timestamp equals or exceeds the detection duration and it contains the
timestamp of the first frame of the freeze. The
C<lavfi.freezedetect.freeze_duration> and
C<lavfi.freezedetect.freeze_end> metadata keys are set on the first frame
after the freeze.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<noise, n>

Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
specified value) or as a difference ratio between 0 and 1. Default is -60dB, or
0.001.


=item B<duration, d>

Set freeze duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).

=back



=head2 freezeframes


Freeze video frames.

This filter freezes video frames using frame from 2nd input.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<first>

Set number of first frame from which to start freeze.


=item B<last>

Set number of last frame from which to end freeze.


=item B<replace>

Set number of frame from 2nd input which will be used instead of replaced frames.

=back




=head2 frei0r


Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.

To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
header and configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-frei0r>.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<filter_name>

The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
B<FREI0R_PATH> is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
directories specified by the colon-separated list in B<FREI0R_PATH>.
Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
F<HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/>, F</usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/>,
F</usr/lib/frei0r-1/>.


=item B<filter_params>

A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.


=back


A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
"y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
I<R>/I<G>/I<B>, where I<R>, I<G>, and I<B> are floating point
numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or a color description as specified in the
B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>,
a position (specified as I<X>/I<Y>, where
I<X> and I<Y> are floating point numbers) and/or a string.

The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
	
	frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01



=item *

Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
	
	frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
	frei0r=colordistance:violet
	frei0r=colordistance:0x112233



=item *

Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
positions:
	
	frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2


=back


For more information, see
E<lt>B<http://frei0r.dyne.org>E<gt>


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the B<filter_params> option as B<commands>.


=head2 fspp


Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of B<spp>.

It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
This allows for much higher speed.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<quality>

Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is C<4>.


=item B<qp>

Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).


=item B<strength>

Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
but also blurrier. Default value is C<0> − PSNR optimal.


=item B<use_bframe_qp>

Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to C<1>. Using this
option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
C<0> (not enabled).


=back




=head2 fsync


Synchronize video frames with an external mapping from a file.

For each input PTS given in the map file it either drops or creates as many
frames as necessary to recreate the sequence of output frames given in the
map file.

This filter is useful to recreate the output frames of a framerate conversion
by the B<fps> filter, recorded into a map file using the ffmpeg option
C<-stats_mux_pre>, and do further processing to the corresponding frames
e.g. quality comparison.

Each line of the map file must contain three items per input frame, the input
PTS (decimal), the output PTS (decimal) and the
output TIMEBASE (decimal/decimal), seperated by a space.
This file format corresponds to the output
of C<-stats_mux_pre_fmt="{ptsi} {pts} {tb}">.

The filter assumes the map file is sorted by increasing input PTS.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4



=item B<file, f>

The filename of the map file to be used.

=back


Example:
	
	# Convert a video to 25 fps and record a MAP_FILE file with the default format of this filter
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf fps=fps=25 -stats_mux_pre MAP_FILE -stats_mux_pre_fmt "{ptsi} {pts} {tb}" OUTPUT
	
	# Sort MAP_FILE by increasing input PTS
	sort -n MAP_FILE
	
	# Use INPUT, OUTPUT and the MAP_FILE from above to compare the corresponding frames in INPUT and OUTPUT via SSIM
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -i OUTPUT -filter_complex '[0:v]fsync=file=MAP_FILE[ref];[1:v][ref]ssim' -f null -



=head2 gblur


Apply Gaussian blur filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sigma>

Set horizontal sigma, standard deviation of Gaussian blur. Default is C<0.5>.


=item B<steps>

Set number of steps for Gaussian approximation. Default is C<1>.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.


=item B<sigmaV>

Set vertical sigma, if negative it will be same as C<sigma>.
Default is C<-1>.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same commands as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 geq


Apply generic equation to each pixel.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<lum_expr, lum>

Set the luma expression.

=item B<cb_expr, cb>

Set the chrominance blue expression.

=item B<cr_expr, cr>

Set the chrominance red expression.

=item B<alpha_expr, a>

Set the alpha expression.

=item B<red_expr, r>

Set the red expression.

=item B<green_expr, g>

Set the green expression.

=item B<blue_expr, b>

Set the blue expression.

=back


The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
of the B<lum_expr>, B<cb_expr>, or B<cr_expr>
options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
colorspace. If one of the B<red_expr>, B<green_expr>, or
B<blue_expr> options is specified, it will select an RGB
colorspace.

If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
to the luma expression.

The expressions can use the following variables and functions:


=over 4


=item B<N>

The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from C<0>.


=item B<X>


=item B<Y>

The coordinates of the current sample.


=item B<W>


=item B<H>

The width and height of the image.


=item B<SW>


=item B<SH>

Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are C<1,1> for the luma plane, and
C<0.5,0.5> for chroma planes.


=item B<T>

Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.


=item B<p(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the current
plane.


=item B<lum(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the luma
plane.


=item B<cb(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the
blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.


=item B<cr(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the
red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.


=item B<r(x, y)>


=item B<g(x, y)>


=item B<b(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the
red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.


=item B<alpha(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the alpha
plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.


=item B<psum(x,y), lumsum(x, y), cbsum(x,y), crsum(x,y), rsum(x,y), gsum(x,y), bsum(x,y), alphasum(x,y)>

Sum of sample values in the rectangle from (0,0) to (x,y), this allows obtaining
sums of samples within a rectangle. See the functions without the sum postfix.


=item B<interpolation>

Set one of interpolation methods:

=over 4


=item B<nearest, n>


=item B<bilinear, b>


=back

Default is bilinear.

=back


For functions, if I<x> and I<y> are outside the area, the value will be
automatically clipped to the closer edge.

Please note that this filter can use multiple threads in which case each slice
will have its own expression state. If you want to use only a single expression
state because your expressions depend on previous state then you should limit
the number of filter threads to 1.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Flip the image horizontally:
	
	geq=p(W-X\,Y)



=item *

Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle C<PI/3> and a
wavelength of 100 pixels:
	
	geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128



=item *

Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
	
	nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128



=item *

Generate a quick emboss effect:
	
	format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'



=item *

Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
	
	geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'



=item *

Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
the B<vignette> filter):
	
	geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray


=back



=head2 gradfun


Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
regions by truncation to 8-bit color depth.
Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
dither them.

It is designed for playback only.  Do not use it prior to
lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
bring back the bands.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<strength>

The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
.51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
valid range.


=item B<radius>

The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
values will be clipped to the valid range.


=back


Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
I<strength>[:I<radius>]


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply the filter with a C<3.5> strength and radius of C<8>:
	
	gradfun=3.5:8



=item *

Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
value):
	
	gradfun=radius=8



=back




=head2 graphmonitor

Show various filtergraph stats.

With this filter one can debug complete filtergraph.
Especially issues with links filling with queued frames.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set video output size. Default is I<hd720>.


=item B<opacity, o>

Set video opacity. Default is I<0.9>. Allowed range is from I<0> to I<1>.


=item B<mode, m>

Set output mode flags.

Available values for flags are:

=over 4


=item B<full>

No any filtering. Default.

=item B<compact>

Show only filters with queued frames.

=item B<nozero>

Show only filters with non-zero stats.

=item B<noeof>

Show only filters with non-eof stat.

=item B<nodisabled>

Show only filters that are enabled in timeline.

=back



=item B<flags, f>

Set flags which enable which stats are shown in video.

Available values for flags are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

All flags turned off.


=item B<all>

All flags turned on.


=item B<queue>

Display number of queued frames in each link.


=item B<frame_count_in>

Display number of frames taken from filter.


=item B<frame_count_out>

Display number of frames given out from filter.


=item B<frame_count_delta>

Display delta number of frames between above two values.


=item B<pts>

Display current filtered frame pts.


=item B<pts_delta>

Display pts delta between current and previous frame.


=item B<time>

Display current filtered frame time.


=item B<time_delta>

Display time delta between current and previous frame.


=item B<timebase>

Display time base for filter link.


=item B<format>

Display used format for filter link.


=item B<size>

Display video size or number of audio channels in case of audio used by filter link.


=item B<rate>

Display video frame rate or sample rate in case of audio used by filter link.


=item B<eof>

Display link output status.


=item B<sample_count_in>

Display number of samples taken from filter.


=item B<sample_count_out>

Display number of samples given out from filter.


=item B<sample_count_delta>

Display delta number of samples between above two values.


=item B<disabled>

Show the timeline filter status.

=back



=item B<rate, r>

Set upper limit for video rate of output stream, Default value is I<25>.
This guarantee that output video frame rate will not be higher than this value.

=back



=head2 grayworld

A color constancy filter that applies color correction based on the grayworld assumption

See: E<lt>B<https://www.researchgate.net/publication/275213614_A_New_Color_Correction_Method_for_Underwater_Imaging>E<gt>

The algorithm  uses linear light, so input
data should be linearized beforehand (and possibly correctly tagged).

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf zscale=transfer=linear,grayworld,zscale=transfer=bt709,format=yuv420p OUTPUT



=head2 greyedge

A color constancy variation filter which estimates scene illumination via grey edge algorithm
and corrects the scene colors accordingly.

See: E<lt>B<https://staff.science.uva.nl/th.gevers/pub/GeversTIP07.pdf>E<gt>

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<difford>

The order of differentiation to be applied on the scene. Must be chosen in the range
[0,2] and default value is 1.


=item B<minknorm>

The Minkowski parameter to be used for calculating the Minkowski distance. Must
be chosen in the range [0,20] and default value is 1. Set to 0 for getting
max value instead of calculating Minkowski distance.


=item B<sigma>

The standard deviation of Gaussian blur to be applied on the scene. Must be
chosen in the range [0,1024.0] and default value = 1. floor( I<sigma> * break_off_sigma(3) )
can't be equal to 0 if I<difford> is greater than 0.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4



=item *

Grey Edge:
	
	greyedge=difford=1:minknorm=5:sigma=2



=item *

Max Edge:
	
	greyedge=difford=1:minknorm=0:sigma=2



=back



=head2 guided

Apply guided filter for edge-preserving smoothing, dehazing and so on.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<radius>

Set the box radius in pixels.
Allowed range is 1 to 20. Default is 3.


=item B<eps>

Set regularization parameter (with square).
Allowed range is 0 to 1. Default is 0.01.


=item B<mode>

Set filter mode. Can be C<basic> or C<fast>.
Default is C<basic>.


=item B<sub>

Set subsampling ratio for C<fast> mode.
Range is 2 to 64. Default is 4.
No subsampling occurs in C<basic> mode.


=item B<guidance>

Set guidance mode. Can be C<off> or C<on>. Default is C<off>.
If C<off>, single input is required.
If C<on>, two inputs of the same resolution and pixel format are required.
The second input serves as the guidance.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter. Default is first only.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Edge-preserving smoothing with guided filter:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.png -vf guided out.png



=item *

Dehazing, structure-transferring filtering, detail enhancement with guided filter.
For the generation of guidance image, refer to paper "Guided Image Filtering".
See: E<lt>B<http://kaiminghe.com/publications/pami12guidedfilter.pdf>E<gt>.
	
	ffmpeg -i in.png -i guidance.png -filter_complex guided=guidance=on out.png



=back




=head2 haldclut


Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.

First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<clut>

Set which CLUT video frames will be processed from second input stream,
can be I<first> or I<all>. Default is I<all>.


=item B<shortest>

Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is C<0>.

=item B<repeatlast>

Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
C<0> disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
Default is C<1>.

=back


C<haldclut> also has the same interpolation options as B<lut3d> (both
filters share the same internals).

This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
(Hald CLUT author) at E<lt>B<http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html>E<gt>.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the C<interp> option as B<commands>.


=head3 Workflow examples



=head4 Hald CLUT video stream


Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i B<haldclutsrc>=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut


Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.

Then use it with C<haldclut> to apply it on some random stream:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv


The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
F<clut.nut>), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
to the remaining frames of the C<mandelbrot> stream.


=head4 Hald CLUT with preview


A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of C<Level*Level*Level> by
C<Level*Level*Level> pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
a preview of the Hald CLUT.

Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
C<haldclut> filter:

	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i B<haldclutsrc>=8 -vf "
	   pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
	   smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
	   [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
	   [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png


It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
the color changes.

Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
	
	ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"



=head2 hflip


Flip the input video horizontally.

For example, to horizontally flip the input video with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi



=head2 histeq

This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
per-frame basis.

It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
intensities.  The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
video.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<strength>

Determine the amount of equalization to be applied.  As the strength
is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.


=item B<intensity>

Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
values appropriately.  The strength should be set as desired and then
the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.


=item B<antibanding>

Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
the histogram. Possible values are C<none>, C<weak> or
C<strong>. It defaults to C<none>.

=back




=head2 histogram


Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.

The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
distribution in an image.

Standard histogram displays the color components distribution in an image.
Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<level_height>

Set height of level. Default value is C<200>.
Allowed range is [50, 2048].


=item B<scale_height>

Set height of color scale. Default value is C<12>.
Allowed range is [0, 40].


=item B<display_mode>

Set display mode.
It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<stack>

Per color component graphs are placed below each other.


=item B<parade>

Per color component graphs are placed side by side.


=item B<overlay>

Presents information identical to that in the C<parade>, except
that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
over one another.

=back

Default is C<stack>.


=item B<levels_mode>

Set mode. Can be either C<linear>, or C<logarithmic>.
Default is C<linear>.


=item B<components>

Set what color components to display.
Default is C<7>.


=item B<fgopacity>

Set foreground opacity. Default is C<0.7>.


=item B<bgopacity>

Set background opacity. Default is C<0.5>.


=item B<colors_mode>

Set colors mode.
It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<whiteonblack>


=item B<blackonwhite>


=item B<whiteongray>


=item B<blackongray>


=item B<coloronblack>


=item B<coloronwhite>


=item B<colorongray>


=item B<blackoncolor>


=item B<whiteoncolor>


=item B<grayoncolor>


=back

Default is C<whiteonblack>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Calculate and draw histogram:
	
	ffplay -i input -vf histogram



=back




=head2 hqdn3d


This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
still. It should enhance compressibility.

It accepts the following optional parameters:


=over 4


=item B<luma_spatial>

A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
It defaults to 4.0.


=item B<chroma_spatial>

A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
It defaults to 3.0*I<luma_spatial>/4.0.


=item B<luma_tmp>

A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
6.0*I<luma_spatial>/4.0.


=item B<chroma_tmp>

A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
I<luma_tmp>*I<chroma_spatial>/I<luma_spatial>.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.



=head2 hwdownload


Download hardware frames to system memory.

The input must be in hardware frames, and the output a non-hardware format.
Not all formats will be supported on the output - it may be necessary to insert
an additional B<format> filter immediately following in the graph to get
the output in a supported format.


=head2 hwmap


Map hardware frames to system memory or to another device.

This filter has several different modes of operation; which one is used depends
on the input and output formats:

=over 4


=item *

Hardware frame input, normal frame output

Map the input frames to system memory and pass them to the output.  If the
original hardware frame is later required (for example, after overlaying
something else on part of it), the B<hwmap> filter can be used again
in the next mode to retrieve it.

=item *

Normal frame input, hardware frame output

If the input is actually a software-mapped hardware frame, then unmap it -
that is, return the original hardware frame.

Otherwise, a device must be provided.  Create new hardware surfaces on that
device for the output, then map them back to the software format at the input
and give those frames to the preceding filter.  This will then act like the
B<hwupload> filter, but may be able to avoid an additional copy when
the input is already in a compatible format.

=item *

Hardware frame input and output

A device must be supplied for the output, either directly or with the
B<derive_device> option.  The input and output devices must be of
different types and compatible - the exact meaning of this is
system-dependent, but typically it means that they must refer to the same
underlying hardware context (for example, refer to the same graphics card).

If the input frames were originally created on the output device, then unmap
to retrieve the original frames.

Otherwise, map the frames to the output device - create new hardware frames
on the output corresponding to the frames on the input.

=back


The following additional parameters are accepted:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Set the frame mapping mode.  Some combination of:

=over 4


=item I<read>

The mapped frame should be readable.

=item I<write>

The mapped frame should be writeable.

=item I<overwrite>

The mapping will always overwrite the entire frame.

This may improve performance in some cases, as the original contents of the
frame need not be loaded.

=item I<direct>

The mapping must not involve any copying.

Indirect mappings to copies of frames are created in some cases where either
direct mapping is not possible or it would have unexpected properties.
Setting this flag ensures that the mapping is direct and will fail if that is
not possible.

=back

Defaults to I<read+write> if not specified.


=item B<derive_device> I<type>

Rather than using the device supplied at initialisation, instead derive a new
device of type I<type> from the device the input frames exist on.


=item B<reverse>

In a hardware to hardware mapping, map in reverse - create frames in the sink
and map them back to the source.  This may be necessary in some cases where
a mapping in one direction is required but only the opposite direction is
supported by the devices being used.

This option is dangerous - it may break the preceding filter in undefined
ways if there are any additional constraints on that filter's output.
Do not use it without fully understanding the implications of its use.

=back




=head2 hwupload


Upload system memory frames to hardware surfaces.

The device to upload to must be supplied when the filter is initialised.  If
using ffmpeg, select the appropriate device with the B<-filter_hw_device>
option or with the B<derive_device> option.  The input and output devices
must be of different types and compatible - the exact meaning of this is
system-dependent, but typically it means that they must refer to the same
underlying hardware context (for example, refer to the same graphics card).

The following additional parameters are accepted:


=over 4


=item B<derive_device> I<type>

Rather than using the device supplied at initialisation, instead derive a new
device of type I<type> from the device the input frames exist on.

=back




=head2 hwupload_cuda


Upload system memory frames to a CUDA device.

It accepts the following optional parameters:


=over 4


=item B<device>

The number of the CUDA device to use

=back



=head2 hqx


Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
was originally created by Maxim Stepin.

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<n>

Set the scaling dimension: C<2> for C<hq2x>, C<3> for
C<hq3x> and C<4> for C<hq4x>.
Default is C<3>.

=back




=head2 hstack

Stack input videos horizontally.

All streams must be of same pixel format and of same height.

Note that this filter is faster than using B<overlay> and B<pad> filter
to create same output.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

Set number of input streams. Default is 2.


=item B<shortest>

If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
terminates. Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 hsvhold

Turns a certain HSV range into gray values.

This filter measures color difference between set HSV color in options
and ones measured in video stream. Depending on options, output
colors can be changed to be gray or not.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<hue>

Set the hue value which will be used in color difference calculation.
Allowed range is from -360 to 360. Default value is 0.


=item B<sat>

Set the saturation value which will be used in color difference calculation.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 0.


=item B<val>

Set the value which will be used in color difference calculation.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 0.


=item B<similarity>

Set similarity percentage with the key color.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.01.

0.00001 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.


=item B<blend>

Blend percentage.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.

0.0 makes pixels either fully gray, or not gray at all.

Higher values result in more gray pixels, with a higher gray pixel
the more similar the pixels color is to the key color.

=back



=head2 hsvkey

Turns a certain HSV range into transparency.

This filter measures color difference between set HSV color in options
and ones measured in video stream. Depending on options, output
colors can be changed to transparent by adding alpha channel.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<hue>

Set the hue value which will be used in color difference calculation.
Allowed range is from -360 to 360. Default value is 0.


=item B<sat>

Set the saturation value which will be used in color difference calculation.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 0.


=item B<val>

Set the value which will be used in color difference calculation.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1. Default value is 0.


=item B<similarity>

Set similarity percentage with the key color.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.01.

0.00001 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.


=item B<blend>

Blend percentage.
Allowed range is from 0 to 1. Default value is 0.

0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent, or not transparent at all.

Higher values result in semi-transparent pixels, with a higher transparency
the more similar the pixels color is to the key color.

=back



=head2 hue


Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<h>

Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
and defaults to "0".


=item B<s>

Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
defaults to "1".


=item B<H>

Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
expression, and defaults to "0".


=item B<b>

Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
defaults to "0".

=back


B<h> and B<H> are mutually exclusive, and can't be
specified at the same time.

The B<b>, B<h>, B<H> and B<s> option values are
expressions containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<n>

frame count of the input frame starting from 0


=item B<pts>

presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units


=item B<r>

frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown


=item B<tb>

time base of the input video

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
	
	hue=h=90:s=1



=item *

Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
	
	hue=H=PI/2:s=1



=item *

Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
and 2 over a period of 1 second:
	
	hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"



=item *

Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
	
	hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"


The general fade-in expression can be written as:
	
	hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"



=item *

Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
	
	hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"


The general fade-out expression can be written as:
	
	hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"



=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<b>


=item B<s>


=item B<h>


=item B<H>

Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back



=head2 huesaturation

Apply hue-saturation-intensity adjustments to input video stream.

This filter operates in RGB colorspace.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<hue>

Set the hue shift in degrees to apply. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -180 to 180.


=item B<saturation>

Set the saturation shift. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<intensity>

Set the intensity shift. Default is 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<colors>

Set which primary and complementary colors are going to be adjusted.
This options is set by providing one or multiple values.
This can select multiple colors at once. By default all colors are selected.

=over 4


=item B<r>

Adjust reds.

=item B<y>

Adjust yellows.

=item B<g>

Adjust greens.

=item B<c>

Adjust cyans.

=item B<b>

Adjust blues.

=item B<m>

Adjust magentas.

=item B<a>

Adjust all colors.

=back



=item B<strength>

Set strength of filtering. Allowed range is from 0 to 100.
Default value is 1.


=item B<rw, gw, bw>

Set weight for each RGB component. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
By default is set to 0.333, 0.334, 0.333.
Those options are used in saturation and lightess processing.


=item B<lightness>

Set preserving lightness, by default is disabled.
Adjusting hues can change lightness from original RGB triplet,
with this option enabled lightness is kept at same value.

=back



=head2 hysteresis


Grow first stream into second stream by connecting components.
This makes it possible to build more robust edge masks.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be
copied from first stream.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<threshold>

Set threshold which is used in filtering. If pixel component value is higher than
this value filter algorithm for connecting components is activated.
By default value is 0.

=back


The C<hysteresis> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head2 iccdetect


Detect the colorspace  from an embedded ICC profile (if present), and update
the frame's tags accordingly.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<force>

If true, the frame's existing colorspace tags will always be overridden by
values detected from an ICC profile. Otherwise, they will only be assigned if
they contain C<unknown>. Enabled by default.

=back



=head2 iccgen


Generate ICC profiles and attach them to frames.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<color_primaries>


=item B<color_trc>

Configure the colorspace that the ICC profile will be generated for. The
default value of C<auto> infers the value from the input frame's metadata,
defaulting to BT.709/sRGB as appropriate.

See the B<setparams> filter for a list of possible values, but note that
C<unknown> are not valid values for this filter.


=item B<force>

If true, an ICC profile will be generated even if it would overwrite an
already existing ICC profile. Disabled by default.

=back



=head2 identity


Obtain the identity score between two input videos.

This filter takes two input videos.

Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format for
this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.

The obtained per component, average, min and max identity score is printed through
the logging system.

The filter stores the calculated identity scores of each frame in frame metadata.

This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

In the below example the input file F<main.mpg> being processed is compared
with the reference file F<ref.mpg>.

	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi identity -f null -



=head2 idet


Detect video interlacing type.

This filter tries to detect if the input frames are interlaced, progressive,
top or bottom field first. It will also try to detect fields that are
repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).

Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.

The filter will log these metadata values:


=over 4


=item B<single.current_frame>

Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
``progressive'', or ``undetermined''


=item B<single.tff>

Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.


=item B<multiple.tff>

Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.


=item B<single.bff>

Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.


=item B<multiple.current_frame>

Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
``progressive'', or ``undetermined''


=item B<multiple.bff>

Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.


=item B<single.progressive>

Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.


=item B<multiple.progressive>

Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.


=item B<single.undetermined>

Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.


=item B<multiple.undetermined>

Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.


=item B<repeated.current_frame>

Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of ``neither'', ``top'', or ``bottom''.


=item B<repeated.neither>

Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.


=item B<repeated.top>

Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame's top field.


=item B<repeated.bottom>

Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame's bottom field.

=back


The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<intl_thres>

Set interlacing threshold.

=item B<prog_thres>

Set progressive threshold.

=item B<rep_thres>

Threshold for repeated field detection.

=item B<half_life>

Number of frames after which a given frame's contribution to the
statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to its
classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
full weight of 1.0 forever.

=item B<analyze_interlaced_flag>

When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine
if the interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.
If the flag is found to be accurate it will be used without any further
computations, if it is found to be inaccurate it will be cleared without any
further computations. This allows inserting the idet filter as a low computational
method to clean up the interlaced flag

=back



=head3 Examples


Inspect the field order of the first 360 frames in a video, in verbose detail:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter:v idet,metadata=mode=print -frames:v 360 -an -f null -

The idet filter will add analysis metadata to each frame, which will then be
discarded. At the end, the filter will also print a final report with statistics.


=head2 il


Deinterleave or interleave fields.

This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<luma_mode, l>


=item B<chroma_mode, c>


=item B<alpha_mode, a>

Available values for I<luma_mode>, I<chroma_mode> and
I<alpha_mode> are:


=over 4


=item B<none>

Do nothing.


=item B<deinterleave, d>

Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.


=item B<interleave, i>

Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.

=back

Default value is C<none>.


=item B<luma_swap, ls>


=item B<chroma_swap, cs>


=item B<alpha_swap, as>

Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is C<0>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 inflate


Apply inflate effect to the video.

This filter replaces the pixel by the local(3x3) average by taking into account
only values higher than the pixel.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold0>


=item B<threshold1>


=item B<threshold2>


=item B<threshold3>

Limit the maximum change for each plane, default is 65535.
If 0, plane will remain unchanged.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 interlace


Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
halving the frame rate and preserving image height.

	
	   Original        Original             New Frame
	   Frame 'j'      Frame 'j+1'             (tff)
	  ==========      ===========       ==================
	    Line 0  -------------------->    Frame 'j' Line 0
	    Line 1          Line 1  ---->   Frame 'j+1' Line 1
	    Line 2 --------------------->    Frame 'j' Line 2
	    Line 3          Line 3  ---->   Frame 'j+1' Line 3
	     ...             ...                   ...
	New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on


It accepts the following optional parameters:


=over 4


=item B<scan>

This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
(tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.


=item B<lowpass>

Vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter interlacing and
reduce moire patterns.


=over 4


=item B<0, off>

Disable vertical lowpass filter


=item B<1, linear>

Enable linear filter (default)


=item B<2, complex>

Enable complex filter. This will slightly less reduce twitter and moire
but better retain detail and subjective sharpness impression.


=back


=back



=head2 kerndeint


Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
progressive frames.

The description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<thresh>

Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
applying the process on every pixels.


=item B<map>

Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
Default is 0.


=item B<order>

Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
0. Default is 0.


=item B<sharp>

Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.


=item B<twoway>

Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply default values:
	
	kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0



=item *

Enable additional sharpening:
	
	kerndeint=sharp=1



=item *

Paint processed pixels in white:
	
	kerndeint=map=1


=back



=head2 kirsch

Apply kirsch operator to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 lagfun


Slowly update darker pixels.

This filter makes short flashes of light appear longer.
This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<decay>

Set factor for decaying. Default is .95. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 lenscorrection


Correct radial lens distortion

This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.

Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
Digikam from the KDE project.

In contrast to the B<vignette> filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas B<vignette> corrects the
brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
be applied before or after lens correction.


=head3 Options


The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<cx>

Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
width. Default is 0.5.

=item B<cy>

Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
height. Default is 0.5.

=item B<k1>

Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. This value has a range [-1,1]. 0 means
no correction. Default is 0.

=item B<k2>

Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. This value has a range [-1,1].
0 means no correction. Default is 0.

=item B<i>

Set interpolation type. Can be C<nearest> or C<bilinear>.
Default is C<nearest>.

=item B<fc>

Specify the color of the unmapped pixels. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>. Default color is C<black@0>.

=back


The formula that generates the correction is:

I<r_src> = I<r_tgt> * (1 + I<k1> * (I<r_tgt> / I<r_0>)^2 + I<k2> * (I<r_tgt> / I<r_0>)^4)

where I<r_0> is halve of the image diagonal and I<r_src> and I<r_tgt> are the
distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 lensfun


Apply lens correction via the lensfun library (E<lt>B<http://lensfun.sourceforge.net/>E<gt>).

The C<lensfun> filter requires the camera make, camera model, and lens model
to apply the lens correction. The filter will load the lensfun database and
query it to find the corresponding camera and lens entries in the database. As
long as these entries can be found with the given options, the filter can
perform corrections on frames. Note that incomplete strings will result in the
filter choosing the best match with the given options, and the filter will
output the chosen camera and lens models (logged with level "info"). You must
provide the make, camera model, and lens model as they are required.

To obtain a list of available makes and models, leave out one or both of C<make> and
C<model> options. The filter will send the full list to the log with level C<INFO>.
The first column is the make and the second column is the model.
To obtain a list of available lenses, set any values for make and model and leave out the
C<lens_model> option. The filter will send the full list of lenses in the log with level
C<INFO>. The ffmpeg tool will exit after the list is printed.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<make>

The make of the camera (for example, "Canon"). This option is required.


=item B<model>

The model of the camera (for example, "Canon EOS 100D"). This option is
required.


=item B<lens_model>

The model of the lens (for example, "Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM"). This
option is required.


=item B<db_path>

The full path to the lens database folder. If not set, the filter will attempt to
load the database from the install path when the library was built. Default is unset.


=item B<mode>

The type of correction to apply. The following values are valid options:


=over 4


=item B<vignetting>

Enables fixing lens vignetting.


=item B<geometry>

Enables fixing lens geometry. This is the default.


=item B<subpixel>

Enables fixing chromatic aberrations.


=item B<vig_geo>

Enables fixing lens vignetting and lens geometry.


=item B<vig_subpixel>

Enables fixing lens vignetting and chromatic aberrations.


=item B<distortion>

Enables fixing both lens geometry and chromatic aberrations.


=item B<all>

Enables all possible corrections.


=back


=item B<focal_length>

The focal length of the image/video (zoom; expected constant for video). For
example, a 18--55mm lens has focal length range of [18--55], so a value in that
range should be chosen when using that lens. Default 18.


=item B<aperture>

The aperture of the image/video (expected constant for video). Note that
aperture is only used for vignetting correction. Default 3.5.


=item B<focus_distance>

The focus distance of the image/video (expected constant for video). Note that
focus distance is only used for vignetting and only slightly affects the
vignetting correction process. If unknown, leave it at the default value (which
is 1000).


=item B<scale>

The scale factor which is applied after transformation. After correction the
video is no longer necessarily rectangular. This parameter controls how much of
the resulting image is visible. The value 0 means that a value will be chosen
automatically such that there is little or no unmapped area in the output
image. 1.0 means that no additional scaling is done. Lower values may result
in more of the corrected image being visible, while higher values may avoid
unmapped areas in the output.


=item B<target_geometry>

The target geometry of the output image/video. The following values are valid
options:


=over 4


=item B<rectilinear (default)>


=item B<fisheye>


=item B<panoramic>


=item B<equirectangular>


=item B<fisheye_orthographic>


=item B<fisheye_stereographic>


=item B<fisheye_equisolid>


=item B<fisheye_thoby>


=back


=item B<reverse>

Apply the reverse of image correction (instead of correcting distortion, apply
it).


=item B<interpolation>

The type of interpolation used when correcting distortion. The following values
are valid options:


=over 4


=item B<nearest>


=item B<linear (default)>


=item B<lanczos>


=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply lens correction with make "Canon", camera model "Canon EOS 100D", and lens
model "Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM" with focal length of "18" and
aperture of "8.0".

	
	ffmpeg -i input.mov -vf lensfun=make=Canon:model="Canon EOS 100D":lens_model="Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM":focal_length=18:aperture=8 -c:v h264 -b:v 8000k output.mov



=item *

Apply the same as before, but only for the first 5 seconds of video.

	
	ffmpeg -i input.mov -vf lensfun=make=Canon:model="Canon EOS 100D":lens_model="Canon EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM":focal_length=18:aperture=8:enable='lte(t\,5)' -c:v h264 -b:v 8000k output.mov



=back



=head2 libplacebo


Flexible GPU-accelerated processing filter based on libplacebo
(E<lt>B<https://code.videolan.org/videolan/libplacebo>E<gt>).


=head3 Options


The options for this filter are divided into the following sections:


=head4 Output mode

These options control the overall output mode. By default, libplacebo will try
to preserve the source colorimetry and size as best as it can, but it will
apply any embedded film grain, dolby vision metadata or anamorphic SAR present
in source frames.

=over 4


=item B<inputs>

Set the number of inputs. This can be used, alongside the C<idx> variable,
to allow placing/blending multiple inputs inside the output frame. This
effectively enables functionality similar to B<hstack>, B<overlay>, etc.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Set the output video dimension expression. Default values are C<iw> and
C<ih>.

Allows for the same expressions as the B<scale> filter.


=item B<crop_x>


=item B<crop_y>

Set the input crop x/y expressions, default values are C<(iw-cw)/2> and
C<(ih-ch)/2>.


=item B<crop_w>


=item B<crop_h>

Set the input crop width/height expressions, default values are C<iw> and
C<ih>.


=item B<pos_x>


=item B<pos_y>

Set the output placement x/y expressions, default values are C<(ow-pw)/2>
and C<(oh-ph)/2>.


=item B<pos_w>


=item B<pos_h>

Set the output placement width/height expressions, default values are C<ow>
and C<oh>.


=item B<fps>

Set the output frame rate. This can be rational, e.g. C<60000/1001>. If
set to the special string C<none> (the default), input timestamps will
instead be passed through to the output unmodified. Otherwise, the input video
frames will be interpolated as necessary to rescale the video to the specified
target framerate, in a manner as determined by the B<frame_mixer> option.


=item B<format>

Set the output format override. If unset (the default), frames will be output
in the same format as the respective input frames. Otherwise, format conversion
will be performed.


=item B<force_original_aspect_ratio>


=item B<force_divisible_by>

Work the same as the identical B<scale> filter options.


=item B<normalize_sar>

If enabled, output frames will always have a pixel aspect ratio of 1:1. This
will introduce additional padding/cropping as necessary. If disabled (the
default), any aspect ratio mismatches, including those from e.g. anamorphic
video sources, are forwarded to the output pixel aspect ratio.


=item B<pad_crop_ratio>

Specifies a ratio (between C<0.0> and C<1.0>) between padding and
cropping when the input aspect ratio does not match the output aspect ratio and
B<normalize_sar> is in effect. The default of C<0.0> always pads the
content with black borders, while a value of C<1.0> always crops off parts
of the content. Intermediate values are possible, leading to a mix of the two
approaches.


=item B<fillcolor>

Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the output image, for
example as a result of B<normalize_sar>. For the general syntax of this
option, check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>. Defaults to C<black>.


=item B<corner_rounding>

Render frames with rounded corners. The value, given as a float ranging from
C<0.0> to C<1.0>, indicates the relative degree of rounding, from fully
square to fully circular. In other words, it gives the radius divided by half
the smaller side length. Defaults to C<0.0>.


=item B<extra_opts>

Pass extra libplacebo internal configuration options. These can be specified
as a list of I<key>=I<value> pairs separated by ':'. The following example
shows how to configure a custom filter kernel ("EWA LanczosSharp") and use it
to double the input image resolution:

	
	-vf "libplacebo=w=iw*2:h=ih*2:extra_opts='upscaler=custom\:upscaler_preset=ewa_lanczos\:upscaler_blur=0.9812505644269356'"



=item B<colorspace>


=item B<color_primaries>


=item B<color_trc>


=item B<range>

Configure the colorspace that output frames will be delivered in. The default
value of C<auto> outputs frames in the same format as the input frames,
leading to no change. For any other value, conversion will be performed.

See the B<setparams> filter for a list of possible values.


=item B<apply_filmgrain>

Apply film grain (e.g. AV1 or H.274) if present in source frames, and strip
it from the output. Enabled by default.


=item B<apply_dolbyvision>

Apply Dolby Vision RPU metadata if present in source frames, and strip it from
the output. Enabled by default. Note that Dolby Vision will always output
BT.2020+PQ, overriding the usual input frame metadata. These will also be
picked as the values of C<auto> for the respective frame output options.

=back


In addition to the expression constants documented for the B<scale> filter,
the B<crop_w>, B<crop_h>, B<crop_x>, B<crop_y>,
B<pos_w>, B<pos_h>, B<pos_x> and B<pos_y> options can
also contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<in_idx, idx>

The (0-based) numeric index of the currently active input stream.

=item B<crop_w, cw>


=item B<crop_h, ch>

The computed values of B<crop_w> and B<crop_h>.


=item B<pos_w, pw>


=item B<pos_h, ph>

The computed values of B<pos_w> and B<pos_h>.


=item B<in_t, t>

The input frame timestamp, in seconds. NAN if input timestamp is unknown.


=item B<out_t, ot>

The input frame timestamp, in seconds. NAN if input timestamp is unknown.


=item B<n>

The input frame number, starting with 0.

=back



=head4 Scaling

The options in this section control how libplacebo performs upscaling and (if
necessary) downscaling. Note that libplacebo will always internally operate on
4:4:4 content, so any sub-sampled chroma formats such as C<yuv420p> will
necessarily be upsampled and downsampled as part of the rendering process. That
means scaling might be in effect even if the source and destination resolution
are the same.

=over 4


=item B<upscaler>


=item B<downscaler>

Configure the filter kernel used for upscaling and downscaling. The respective
defaults are C<spline36> and C<mitchell>. For a full list of possible
values, pass C<help> to these options. The most important values are:

=over 4



=item B<none>

Forces the use of built-in GPU texture sampling (typically bilinear). Extremely
fast but poor quality, especially when downscaling.


=item B<bilinear>

Bilinear interpolation. Can generally be done for free on GPUs, except when
doing so would lead to aliasing. Fast and low quality.


=item B<nearest>

Nearest-neighbour interpolation. Sharp but highly aliasing.


=item B<oversample>

Algorithm that looks visually similar to nearest-neighbour interpolation but
tries to preserve pixel aspect ratio. Good for pixel art, since it results in
minimal distortion of the artistic appearance.


=item B<lanczos>

Standard sinc-sinc interpolation kernel.


=item B<spline36>

Cubic spline approximation of lanczos. No difference in performance, but has
very slightly less ringing.


=item B<ewa_lanczos>

Elliptically weighted average version of lanczos, based on a jinc-sinc kernel.
This is also popularly referred to as just "Jinc scaling". Slow but very high
quality.


=item B<gaussian>

Gaussian kernel. Has certain ideal mathematical properties, but subjectively
very blurry.


=item B<mitchell>

Cubic BC spline with parameters recommended by Mitchell and Netravali. Very
little ringing.

=back



=item B<frame_mixer>

Controls the kernel used for mixing frames temporally. The default value is
C<none>, which disables frame mixing. For a full list of possible values,
pass C<help> to this option. The most important values are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disables frame mixing, giving a result equivalent to "nearest neighbour"
semantics.


=item B<oversample>

Oversamples the input video to create a "Smooth Motion"-type effect: if an
output frame would exactly fall on the transition between two video frames, it
is blended according to the relative overlap. This is the recommended option
whenever preserving the original subjective appearance is desired.


=item B<mitchell_clamp>

Larger filter kernel that smoothly interpolates multiple frames in a manner
designed to eliminate ringing and other artefacts as much as possible. This is
the recommended option wherever maximum visual smoothness is desired.


=item B<linear>

Linear blend/fade between frames. Especially useful for constructing e.g.
slideshows.

=back



=item B<lut_entries>

Configures the size of scaler LUTs, ranging from C<1> to C<256>. The
default of C<0> will pick libplacebo's internal default, typically
C<64>.


=item B<antiringing>

Enables anti-ringing (for non-EWA filters). The value (between C<0.0> and
C<1.0>) configures the strength of the anti-ringing algorithm. May increase
aliasing if set too high. Disabled by default.


=item B<sigmoid>

Enable sigmoidal compression during upscaling. Reduces ringing slightly.
Enabled by default.

=back



=head4 Debanding

Libplacebo comes with a built-in debanding filter that is good at counteracting
many common sources of banding and blocking. Turning this on is highly
recommended whenever quality is desired.

=over 4


=item B<deband>

Enable (fast) debanding algorithm. Disabled by default.


=item B<deband_iterations>

Number of deband iterations of the debanding algorithm. Each iteration is
performed with progressively increased radius (and diminished threshold).
Recommended values are in the range C<1> to C<4>. Defaults to C<1>.


=item B<deband_threshold>

Debanding filter strength. Higher numbers lead to more aggressive debanding.
Defaults to C<4.0>.


=item B<deband_radius>

Debanding filter radius. A higher radius is better for slow gradients, while
a lower radius is better for steep gradients. Defaults to C<16.0>.


=item B<deband_grain>

Amount of extra output grain to add. Helps hide imperfections. Defaults to
C<6.0>.

=back



=head4 Color adjustment

A collection of subjective color controls. Not very rigorous, so the exact
effect will vary somewhat depending on the input primaries and colorspace.

=over 4


=item B<brightness>

Brightness boost, between C<-1.0> and C<1.0>. Defaults to C<0.0>.


=item B<contrast>

Contrast gain, between C<0.0> and C<16.0>. Defaults to C<1.0>.


=item B<saturation>

Saturation gain, between C<0.0> and C<16.0>. Defaults to C<1.0>.


=item B<hue>

Hue shift in radians, between C<-3.14> and C<3.14>. Defaults to
C<0.0>. This will rotate the UV subvector, defaulting to BT.709
coefficients for RGB inputs.


=item B<gamma>

Gamma adjustment, between C<0.0> and C<16.0>. Defaults to C<1.0>.


=item B<cones>

Cone model to use for color blindness simulation. Accepts any combination of
C<l>, C<m> and C<s>. Here are some examples:

=over 4


=item B<m>

Deuteranomaly / deuteranopia (affecting 3%-4% of the population)

=item B<l>

Protanomaly / protanopia (affecting 1%-2% of the population)

=item B<l+m>

Monochromacy (very rare)

=item B<l+m+s>

Achromatopsy (complete loss of daytime vision, extremely rare)

=back



=item B<cone-strength>

Gain factor for the cones specified by C<cones>, between C<0.0> and
C<10.0>. A value of C<1.0> results in no change to color vision. A
value of C<0.0> (the default) simulates complete loss of those cones. Values
above C<1.0> result in exaggerating the differences between cones, which
may help compensate for reduced color vision.

=back



=head4 Peak detection

To help deal with sources that only have static HDR10 metadata (or no tagging
whatsoever), libplacebo uses its own internal frame analysis compute shader to
analyze source frames and adapt the tone mapping function in realtime. If this
is too slow, or if exactly reproducible frame-perfect results are needed, it's
recommended to turn this feature off.

=over 4


=item B<peak_detect>

Enable HDR peak detection. Ignores static MaxCLL/MaxFALL values in favor of
dynamic detection from the input. Note that the detected values do not get
written back to the output frames, they merely guide the internal tone mapping
process. Enabled by default.


=item B<smoothing_period>

Peak detection smoothing period, between C<0.0> and C<1000.0>. Higher
values result in peak detection becoming less responsive to changes in the
input. Defaults to C<100.0>.


=item B<minimum_peak>

Lower bound on the detected peak (relative to SDR white), between C<0.0>
and C<100.0>. Defaults to C<1.0>.


=item B<scene_threshold_low>


=item B<scene_threshold_high>

Lower and upper thresholds for scene change detection. Expressed in a
logarithmic scale between C<0.0> and C<100.0>. Default to C<5.5>
and C<10.0>, respectively. Setting either to a negative value disables
this functionality.


=item B<percentile>

Which percentile of the frame brightness histogram to use as the source peak
for tone-mapping. Defaults to C<99.995>, a fairly conservative value.
Setting this to C<100.0> disables frame histogram measurement and instead
uses the true peak brightness for tone-mapping.

=back



=head4 Tone mapping

The options in this section control how libplacebo performs tone-mapping and
gamut-mapping when dealing with mismatches between wide-gamut or HDR content.
In general, libplacebo relies on accurate source tagging and mastering display
gamut information to produce the best results.

=over 4


=item B<gamut_mode>

How to handle out-of-gamut colors that can occur as a result of colorimetric
gamut mapping.

=over 4


=item B<clip>

Do nothing, simply clip out-of-range colors to the RGB volume. Low quality but
extremely fast.

=item B<perceptual>

Perceptually soft-clip colors to the gamut volume. This is the default.

=item B<relative>

Relative colorimetric hard-clip. Similar to C<perceptual> but without
the soft knee.

=item B<saturation>

Saturation mapping, maps primaries directly to primaries in RGB space.
Not recommended except for artificial computer graphics for which a bright,
saturated display is desired.

=item B<absolute>

Absolute colorimetric hard-clip. Performs no adjustment of the white point.

=item B<desaturate>

Hard-desaturates out-of-gamut colors towards white, while preserving the
luminance. Has a tendency to distort the visual appearance of bright objects.

=item B<darken>

Linearly reduces content brightness to preserves saturated details, followed by
clipping the remaining out-of-gamut colors.

=item B<warn>

Highlight out-of-gamut pixels (by inverting/marking them).

=item B<linear>

Linearly reduces chromaticity of the entire image to make it fit within the
target color volume. Be careful when using this on BT.2020 sources without
proper mastering metadata, as doing so will lead to excessive desaturation.

=back



=item B<tonemapping>

Tone-mapping algorithm to use. Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Automatic selection based on internal heuristics. This is the default.

=item B<clip>

Performs no tone-mapping, just clips out-of-range colors. Retains perfect color
accuracy for in-range colors but completely destroys out-of-range information.
Does not perform any black point adaptation. Not configurable.

=item B<st2094-40>

EETF from SMPTE ST 2094-40 Annex B, which applies the Bezier curves from HDR10+
dynamic metadata based on Bezier curves to perform tone-mapping. The OOTF used
is adjusted based on the ratio between the targeted and actual display peak
luminances.

=item B<st2094-10>

EETF from SMPTE ST 2094-10 Annex B.2, which takes into account the input signal
average luminance in addition to the maximum/minimum. The configurable contrast
parameter influences the slope of the linear output segment, defaulting to
C<1.0> for no increase/decrease in contrast. Note that this does not
currently include the subjective gain/offset/gamma controls defined in Annex
B.3.

=item B<bt.2390>

EETF from the ITU-R Report BT.2390, a hermite spline roll-off with linear
segment. The knee point offset is configurable. Note that this parameter
defaults to C<1.0>, rather than the value of C<0.5> from the ITU-R
spec.

=item B<bt.2446a>

EETF from ITU-R Report BT.2446, method A. Designed for well-mastered HDR
sources. Can be used for both forward and inverse tone mapping. Not
configurable.

=item B<spline>

Simple spline consisting of two polynomials, joined by a single pivot point.
The parameter gives the pivot point (in PQ space), defaulting to C<0.30>.
Can be used for both forward and inverse tone mapping.

=item B<reinhard>

Simple non-linear, global tone mapping algorithm. The parameter specifies the
local contrast coefficient at the display peak. Essentially, a parameter of
C<0.5> implies that the reference white will be about half as bright as
when clipping. Defaults to C<0.5>, which results in the simplest
formulation of this function.

=item B<mobius>

Generalization of the reinhard tone mapping algorithm to support an additional
linear slope near black. The tone mapping parameter indicates the trade-off
between the linear section and the non-linear section. Essentially, for a given
parameter I<x>, every color value below I<x> will be mapped linearly,
while higher values get non-linearly tone-mapped. Values near C<1.0> make
this curve behave like C<clip>, while values near C<0.0> make this
curve behave like C<reinhard>. The default value is C<0.3>, which
provides a good balance between colorimetric accuracy and preserving
out-of-gamut details.

=item B<hable>

Piece-wise, filmic tone-mapping algorithm developed by John Hable for use in
Uncharted 2, inspired by a similar tone-mapping algorithm used by Kodak.
Popularized by its use in video games with HDR rendering. Preserves both dark
and bright details very well, but comes with the drawback of changing the
average brightness quite significantly. This is sort of similar to
C<reinhard> with parameter C<0.24>.

=item B<gamma>

Fits a gamma (power) function to transfer between the source and target color
spaces, effectively resulting in a perceptual hard-knee joining two roughly
linear sections. This preserves details at all scales fairly accurately, but
can result in an image with a muted or dull appearance. The parameter is used
as the cutoff point, defaulting to C<0.5>.

=item B<linear>

Linearly stretches the input range to the output range, in PQ space. This will
preserve all details accurately, but results in a significantly different
average brightness. Can be used for inverse tone-mapping in addition to regular
tone-mapping. The parameter can be used as an additional linear gain
coefficient (defaulting to C<1.0>).

=back



=item B<tonemapping_param>

For tunable tone mapping functions, this parameter can be used to fine-tune the
curve behavior. Refer to the documentation of C<tonemapping>. The default
value of C<0.0> is replaced by the curve's preferred default setting.


=item B<inverse_tonemapping>

If enabled, this filter will also attempt stretching SDR signals to fill HDR
output color volumes. Disabled by default.


=item B<tonemapping_lut_size>

Size of the tone-mapping LUT, between C<2> and C<1024>. Defaults to
C<256>. Note that this figure is squared when combined with
C<peak_detect>.


=item B<contrast_recovery>

Contrast recovery strength. If set to a value above C<0.0>, the source
image will be divided into high-frequency and low-frequency components, and a
portion of the high-frequency image is added back onto the tone-mapped output.
May cause excessive ringing artifacts for some HDR sources, but can improve the
subjective sharpness and detail left over in the image after tone-mapping.
Defaults to C<0.30>.


=item B<contrast_smoothness>

Contrast recovery lowpass kernel size. Defaults to C<3.5>. Increasing or
decreasing this will affect the visual appearance substantially. Has no effect
when C<contrast_recovery> is disabled.

=back



=head4 Dithering

By default, libplacebo will dither whenever necessary, which includes rendering
to any integer format below 16-bit precision. It's recommended to always leave
this on, since not doing so may result in visible banding in the output, even
if the C<debanding> filter is enabled. If maximum performance is needed,
use C<ordered_fixed> instead of disabling dithering.

=over 4


=item B<dithering>

Dithering method to use. Accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disables dithering completely. May result in visible banding.

=item B<blue>

Dither with pseudo-blue noise. This is the default.

=item B<ordered>

Tunable ordered dither pattern.

=item B<ordered_fixed>

Faster ordered dither with a fixed size of C<6>. Texture-less.

=item B<white>

Dither with white noise. Texture-less.

=back



=item B<dither_lut_size>

Dither LUT size, as log base2 between C<1> and C<8>. Defaults to
C<6>, corresponding to a LUT size of C<64x64>.


=item B<dither_temporal>

Enables temporal dithering. Disabled by default.

=back



=head4 Custom shaders

libplacebo supports a number of custom shaders based on the mpv .hook GLSL
syntax. A collection of such shaders can be found here:
E<lt>B<https://github.com/mpv-player/mpv/wiki/User-Scripts#user-shaders>E<gt>

A full description of the mpv shader format is beyond the scope of this
section, but a summary can be found here:
E<lt>B<https://mpv.io/manual/master/#options-glsl-shader>E<gt>

=over 4


=item B<custom_shader_path>

Specifies a path to a custom shader file to load at runtime.


=item B<custom_shader_bin>

Specifies a complete custom shader as a raw string.

=back



=head4 Debugging / performance

All of the options in this section default off. They may be of assistance when
attempting to squeeze the maximum performance at the cost of quality.

=over 4


=item B<skip_aa>

Disable anti-aliasing when downscaling.


=item B<polar_cutoff>

Truncate polar (EWA) scaler kernels below this absolute magnitude, between
C<0.0> and C<1.0>.


=item B<disable_linear>

Disable linear light scaling.


=item B<disable_builtin>

Disable built-in GPU sampling (forces LUT).


=item B<disable_fbos>

Forcibly disable FBOs, resulting in loss of almost all functionality, but
offering the maximum possible speed.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports almost all of the above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Tone-map input to standard gamut BT.709 output:
	
	libplacebo=colorspace=bt709:color_primaries=bt709:color_trc=bt709:range=tv



=item *

Rescale input to fit into standard 1080p, with high quality scaling:
	
	libplacebo=w=1920:h=1080:force_original_aspect_ratio=decrease:normalize_sar=true:upscaler=ewa_lanczos:downscaler=ewa_lanczos



=item *

Interpolate low FPS / VFR input to smoothed constant 60 fps output:
	
	libplacebo=fps=60:frame_mixer=mitchell_clamp



=item *

Convert input to standard sRGB JPEG:
	
	libplacebo=format=yuv420p:colorspace=bt470bg:color_primaries=bt709:color_trc=iec61966-2-1:range=pc



=item *

Use higher quality debanding settings:
	
	libplacebo=deband=true:deband_iterations=3:deband_radius=8:deband_threshold=6



=item *

Run this filter on the CPU, on systems with Mesa installed (and with the most
expensive options disabled):
	
	ffmpeg ... -init_hw_device vulkan:llvmpipe ... -vf libplacebo=upscaler=none:downscaler=none:peak_detect=false



=item *

Suppress CPU-based AV1/H.274 film grain application in the decoder, in favor of
doing it with this filter. Note that this is only a gain if the frames are
either already on the GPU, or if you're using libplacebo for other purposes,
since otherwise the VRAM roundtrip will more than offset any expected speedup.
	
	ffmpeg -export_side_data +film_grain ... -vf libplacebo=apply_filmgrain=true



=item *

Interop with VAAPI hwdec to avoid round-tripping through RAM:
	
	ffmpeg -init_hw_device vulkan -hwaccel vaapi -hwaccel_output_format vaapi ... -vf libplacebo


=back




=head2 libvmaf


Calculate the VMAF (Video Multi-Method Assessment Fusion) score for a
reference/distorted pair of input videos.

The first input is the distorted video, and the second input is the reference video.

The obtained VMAF score is printed through the logging system.

It requires Netflix's vmaf library (libvmaf) as a pre-requisite.
After installing the library it can be enabled using:
C<./configure --enable-libvmaf>.

The filter has following options:


=over 4


=item B<model>

A `|` delimited list of vmaf models. Each model can be configured with a number of parameters.
Default value: C<"version=vmaf_v0.6.1">


=item B<feature>

A `|` delimited list of features. Each feature can be configured with a number of parameters.


=item B<log_path>

Set the file path to be used to store log files.


=item B<log_fmt>

Set the format of the log file (xml, json, csv, or sub).


=item B<pool>

Set the pool method to be used for computing vmaf.
Options are C<min>, C<harmonic_mean> or C<mean> (default).


=item B<n_threads>

Set number of threads to be used when initializing libvmaf.
Default value: C<0>, no threads.


=item B<n_subsample>

Set frame subsampling interval to be used.

=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

In the examples below, a distorted video F<distorted.mpg> is
compared with a reference file F<reference.mpg>.


=item *

Basic usage:
	
	ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mpg -lavfi libvmaf=log_path=output.xml -f null -



=item *

Example with multiple models:
	
	ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mpg -lavfi libvmaf='model=version=vmaf_v0.6.1\\:name=vmaf|version=vmaf_v0.6.1neg\\:name=vmaf_neg' -f null -



=item *

Example with multiple additional features:
	
	ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mpg -lavfi libvmaf='feature=name=psnr|name=ciede' -f null -



=item *

Example with options and different containers:
	
	ffmpeg -i distorted.mpg -i reference.mkv -lavfi "[0:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[main];[1:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[ref];[main][ref]libvmaf=log_fmt=json:log_path=output.json" -f null -


=back



=head2 libvmaf_cuda


This is the CUDA variant of the B<libvmaf> filter. It only accepts CUDA frames.

It requires Netflix's vmaf library (libvmaf) as a pre-requisite.
After installing the library it can be enabled using:
C<./configure --enable-nonfree --enable-ffnvcodec --enable-libvmaf>.


=head3 Examples


=over 4



=item *

Basic usage showing CUVID hardware decoding and CUDA scaling with B<scale_cuda>:
	
	ffmpeg \
	    -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -codec:v av1_cuvid -i dis.obu \
	    -hwaccel cuda -hwaccel_output_format cuda -codec:v av1_cuvid -i ref.obu \
	    -filter_complex "
	        [0:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv420p[dis]; \
	        [1:v]scale_cuda=format=yuv420p[ref]; \
	        [dis][ref]libvmaf_cuda=log_fmt=json:log_path=output.json
	    " \
	    -f null -


=back



=head2 limitdiff

Apply limited difference filter using second and optionally third video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold>

Set the threshold to use when allowing certain differences between video streams.
Any absolute difference value lower or exact than this threshold will pick pixel components from
first video stream.


=item B<elasticity>

Set the elasticity of soft thresholding when processing video streams.
This value multiplied with first one sets second threshold.
Any absolute difference value greater or exact than second threshold will pick pixel components
from second video stream. For values between those two threshold
linear interpolation between first and second video stream will be used.


=item B<reference>

Enable the reference (third) video stream processing. By default is disabled.
If set, this video stream will be used for calculating absolute difference with first video
stream.


=item B<planes>

Specify which planes will be processed. Defaults to all available.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands> except option B<reference>.


=head2 limiter


Limits the pixel components values to the specified range [min, max].

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<min>

Lower bound. Defaults to the lowest allowed value for the input.


=item B<max>

Upper bound. Defaults to the highest allowed value for the input.


=item B<planes>

Specify which planes will be processed. Defaults to all available.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 loop


Loop video frames.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<loop>

Set the number of loops. Setting this value to -1 will result in infinite loops.
Default is 0.


=item B<size>

Set maximal size in number of frames. Default is 0.


=item B<start>

Set first frame of loop. Default is 0.


=item B<time>

Set the time of loop start in seconds.
Only used if option named I<start> is set to C<-1>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Loop single first frame infinitely:
	
	loop=loop=-1:size=1:start=0



=item *

Loop single first frame 10 times:
	
	loop=loop=10:size=1:start=0



=item *

Loop 10 first frames 5 times:
	
	loop=loop=5:size=10:start=0


=back



=head2 lut1d


Apply a 1D LUT to an input video.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<file>

Set the 1D LUT file name.

Currently supported formats:

=over 4


=item B<cube>

Iridas

=item B<csp>

cineSpace

=back



=item B<interp>

Select interpolation mode.

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<nearest>

Use values from the nearest defined point.

=item B<linear>

Interpolate values using the linear interpolation.

=item B<cosine>

Interpolate values using the cosine interpolation.

=item B<cubic>

Interpolate values using the cubic interpolation.

=item B<spline>

Interpolate values using the spline interpolation.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.



=head2 lut3d


Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<file>

Set the 3D LUT file name.

Currently supported formats:

=over 4


=item B<3dl>

AfterEffects

=item B<cube>

Iridas

=item B<dat>

DaVinci

=item B<m3d>

Pandora

=item B<csp>

cineSpace

=back


=item B<interp>

Select interpolation mode.

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<nearest>

Use values from the nearest defined point.

=item B<trilinear>

Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.

=item B<tetrahedral>

Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.

=item B<pyramid>

Interpolate values using a pyramid.

=item B<prism>

Interpolate values using a prism.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the C<interp> option as B<commands>.


=head2 lumakey


Turn certain luma values into transparency.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold>

Set the luma which will be used as base for transparency.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<tolerance>

Set the range of luma values to be keyed out.
Default value is C<0.01>.


=item B<softness>

Set the range of softness. Default value is C<0>.
Use this to control gradual transition from zero to full transparency.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.





=head2 lut, lutrgb, lutyuv


Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
to an output value, and apply it to the input video.

I<lutyuv> applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, I<lutrgb>
to an RGB input video.

These filters accept the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<c0>

set first pixel component expression

=item B<c1>

set second pixel component expression

=item B<c2>

set third pixel component expression

=item B<c3>

set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component


=item B<r>

set red component expression

=item B<g>

set green component expression

=item B<b>

set blue component expression

=item B<a>

alpha component expression


=item B<y>

set Y/luma component expression

=item B<u>

set U/Cb component expression

=item B<v>

set V/Cr component expression

=back


Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
the corresponding pixel component values.

The exact component associated to each of the I<c*> options depends on the
format in input.

The I<lut> filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
I<lutrgb> requires RGB pixel formats in input, and I<lutyuv> requires YUV.

The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:


=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The input width and height.


=item B<val>

The input value for the pixel component.


=item B<clipval>

The input value, clipped to the I<minval>-I<maxval> range.


=item B<maxval>

The maximum value for the pixel component.


=item B<minval>

The minimum value for the pixel component.


=item B<negval>

The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
I<minval>-I<maxval> range; it corresponds to the expression
"maxval-clipval+minval".


=item B<clip(val)>

The computed value in I<val>, clipped to the
I<minval>-I<maxval> range.


=item B<gammaval(gamma)>

The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
clipped to the I<minval>-I<maxval> range. It corresponds to the
expression
"pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,I<gamma>)*(maxval-minval)+minval"


=back


All expressions default to "clipval".


=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Negate input video:
	
	lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
	lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"


The above is the same as:
	
	lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
	lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"



=item *

Negate luma:
	
	lutyuv=y=negval



=item *

Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:
	
	lutyuv="u=128:v=128"



=item *

Apply a luma burning effect:
	
	lutyuv="y=2*val"



=item *

Remove green and blue components:
	
	lutrgb="g=0:b=0"



=item *

Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
	
	format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"



=item *

Correct luma gamma by a factor of 0.5:
	
	lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)



=item *

Discard least significant bits of luma:
	
	lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'



=item *

Technicolor like effect:
	
	lutyuv=u='(val-maxval/2)*2+maxval/2':v='(val-maxval/2)*2+maxval/2'


=back



=head2 lut2, tlut2


The C<lut2> filter takes two input streams and outputs one
stream.

The C<tlut2> (time lut2) filter takes two consecutive frames
from one single stream.

This filter accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<c0>

set first pixel component expression

=item B<c1>

set second pixel component expression

=item B<c2>

set third pixel component expression

=item B<c3>

set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component


=item B<d>

set output bit depth, only available for C<lut2> filter. By default is 0,
which means bit depth is automatically picked from first input format.

=back


The C<lut2> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
the corresponding pixel component values.

The exact component associated to each of the I<c*> options depends on the
format in inputs.

The expressions can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The input width and height.


=item B<x>

The first input value for the pixel component.


=item B<y>

The second input value for the pixel component.


=item B<bdx>

The first input video bit depth.


=item B<bdy>

The second input video bit depth.

=back


All expressions default to "x".


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands> except option C<d>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Highlight differences between two RGB video streams:
	
	lut2='ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1)'



=item *

Highlight differences between two YUV video streams:
	
	lut2='ifnot(x-y,0,pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,pow(2,bdx-1),pow(2,bdx)-1):ifnot(x-y,pow(2,bdx-1),pow(2,bdx)-1)'



=item *

Show max difference between two video streams:
	
	lut2='if(lt(x,y),0,if(gt(x,y),pow(2,bdx)-1,pow(2,bdx-1))):if(lt(x,y),0,if(gt(x,y),pow(2,bdx)-1,pow(2,bdx-1))):if(lt(x,y),0,if(gt(x,y),pow(2,bdx)-1,pow(2,bdx-1)))'


=back



=head2 maskedclamp


Clamp the first input stream with the second input and third input stream.

Returns the value of first stream to be between second input
stream - C<undershoot> and third input stream + C<overshoot>.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<undershoot>

Default value is C<0>.


=item B<overshoot>

Default value is C<0>.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be
copied from first stream.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 maskedmax


Merge the second and third input stream into output stream using absolute differences
between second input stream and first input stream and absolute difference between
third input stream and first input stream. The picked value will be from second input
stream if second absolute difference is greater than first one or from third input stream
otherwise.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be
copied from first stream.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 maskedmerge


Merge the first input stream with the second input stream using per pixel
weights in the third input stream.

A value of 0 in the third stream pixel component means that pixel component
from first stream is returned unchanged, while maximum value (eg. 255 for
8-bit videos) means that pixel component from second stream is returned
unchanged. Intermediate values define the amount of merging between both
input stream's pixel components.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be
copied from first stream.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 maskedmin


Merge the second and third input stream into output stream using absolute differences
between second input stream and first input stream and absolute difference between
third input stream and first input stream. The picked value will be from second input
stream if second absolute difference is less than first one or from third input stream
otherwise.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be
copied from first stream.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 maskedthreshold

Pick pixels comparing absolute difference of two video streams with fixed
threshold.

If absolute difference between pixel component of first and second video
stream is equal or lower than user supplied threshold than pixel component
from first video stream is picked, otherwise pixel component from second
video stream is picked.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<threshold>

Set threshold used when picking pixels from absolute difference from two input
video streams.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed as bitmap, unprocessed planes will be
copied from second stream.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<mode>

Set mode of filter operation. Can be C<abs> or C<diff>.
Default is C<abs>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 maskfun

Create mask from input video.

For example it is useful to create motion masks after C<tblend> filter.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<low>

Set low threshold. Any pixel component lower or exact than this value will be set to 0.


=item B<high>

Set high threshold. Any pixel component higher than this value will be set to max value
allowed for current pixel format.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter, by default all available planes are filtered.


=item B<fill>

Fill all frame pixels with this value.


=item B<sum>

Set max average pixel value for frame. If sum of all pixel components is higher that this
average, output frame will be completely filled with value set by I<fill> option.
Typically useful for scene changes when used in combination with C<tblend> filter.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 mcdeint


Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.

It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<mode>

Set the deinterlacing mode.

It accepts one of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<fast>


=item B<medium>


=item B<slow>

use iterative motion estimation

=item B<extra_slow>

like B<slow>, but use multiple reference frames.

=back

Default value is B<fast>.


=item B<parity>

Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, tff>

assume top field first

=item B<1, bff>

assume bottom field first

=back


Default value is B<bff>.


=item B<qp>

Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
encoder.

Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.

=back



=head2 median


Pick median pixel from certain rectangle defined by radius.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<radius>

Set horizontal radius size. Default value is C<1>.
Allowed range is integer from 1 to 127.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process. Default is C<15>, which is all available planes.


=item B<radiusV>

Set vertical radius size. Default value is C<0>.
Allowed range is integer from 0 to 127.
If it is 0, value will be picked from horizontal C<radius> option.


=item B<percentile>

Set median percentile. Default value is C<0.5>.
Default value of C<0.5> will pick always median values, while C<0> will pick
minimum values, and C<1> maximum values.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head2 mergeplanes


Merge color channel components from several video streams.

The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
planes to the output video.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<mapping>

Set input to output plane mapping. Default is C<0>.

The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.


=item B<format>

Set output pixel format. Default is C<yuva444p>.


=item B<map0s>


=item B<map1s>


=item B<map2s>


=item B<map3s>

Set input to output stream mapping for output Nth plane. Default is C<0>.


=item B<map0p>


=item B<map1p>


=item B<map2p>


=item B<map3p>

Set input to output plane mapping for output Nth plane. Default is C<0>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
	
	[a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p



=item *

Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
	
	[a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p



=item *

Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
	
	format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p



=item *

Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
	
	format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p



=item *

Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
	
	format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p


=back



=head2 mestimate


Estimate and export motion vectors using block matching algorithms.
Motion vectors are stored in frame side data to be used by other filters.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<method>

Specify the motion estimation method. Accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<esa>

Exhaustive search algorithm.

=item B<tss>

Three step search algorithm.

=item B<tdls>

Two dimensional logarithmic search algorithm.

=item B<ntss>

New three step search algorithm.

=item B<fss>

Four step search algorithm.

=item B<ds>

Diamond search algorithm.

=item B<hexbs>

Hexagon-based search algorithm.

=item B<epzs>

Enhanced predictive zonal search algorithm.

=item B<umh>

Uneven multi-hexagon search algorithm.

=back

Default value is B<esa>.


=item B<mb_size>

Macroblock size. Default C<16>.


=item B<search_param>

Search parameter. Default C<7>.

=back



=head2 midequalizer


Apply Midway Image Equalization effect using two video streams.

Midway Image Equalization adjusts a pair of images to have the same
histogram, while maintaining their dynamics as much as possible. It's
useful for e.g. matching exposures from a pair of stereo cameras.

This filter has two inputs and one output, which must be of same pixel format, but
may be of different sizes. The output of filter is first input adjusted with
midway histogram of both inputs.

This filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process. Default is C<15>, which is all available planes.

=back



=head2 minterpolate


Convert the video to specified frame rate using motion interpolation.

This filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<fps>

Specify the output frame rate. This can be rational e.g. C<60000/1001>. Frames are dropped if I<fps> is lower than source fps. Default C<60>.


=item B<mi_mode>

Motion interpolation mode. Following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<dup>

Duplicate previous or next frame for interpolating new ones.

=item B<blend>

Blend source frames. Interpolated frame is mean of previous and next frames.

=item B<mci>

Motion compensated interpolation. Following options are effective when this mode is selected:


=over 4


=item B<mc_mode>

Motion compensation mode. Following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<obmc>

Overlapped block motion compensation.

=item B<aobmc>

Adaptive overlapped block motion compensation. Window weighting coefficients are controlled adaptively according to the reliabilities of the neighboring motion vectors to reduce oversmoothing.

=back

Default mode is B<obmc>.


=item B<me_mode>

Motion estimation mode. Following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<bidir>

Bidirectional motion estimation. Motion vectors are estimated for each source frame in both forward and backward directions.

=item B<bilat>

Bilateral motion estimation. Motion vectors are estimated directly for interpolated frame.

=back

Default mode is B<bilat>.


=item B<me>

The algorithm to be used for motion estimation. Following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<esa>

Exhaustive search algorithm.

=item B<tss>

Three step search algorithm.

=item B<tdls>

Two dimensional logarithmic search algorithm.

=item B<ntss>

New three step search algorithm.

=item B<fss>

Four step search algorithm.

=item B<ds>

Diamond search algorithm.

=item B<hexbs>

Hexagon-based search algorithm.

=item B<epzs>

Enhanced predictive zonal search algorithm.

=item B<umh>

Uneven multi-hexagon search algorithm.

=back

Default algorithm is B<epzs>.


=item B<mb_size>

Macroblock size. Default C<16>.


=item B<search_param>

Motion estimation search parameter. Default C<32>.


=item B<vsbmc>

Enable variable-size block motion compensation. Motion estimation is applied with smaller block sizes at object boundaries in order to make them less blurry. Default is C<0> (disabled).

=back


=back



=item B<scd>

Scene change detection method. Scene change leads motion vectors to be in random direction. Scene change detection replace interpolated frames by duplicate ones. May not be needed for other modes. Following values are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disable scene change detection.

=item B<fdiff>

Frame difference. Corresponding pixel values are compared and if it satisfies I<scd_threshold> scene change is detected.

=back

Default method is B<fdiff>.


=item B<scd_threshold>

Scene change detection threshold. Default is C<10.>.

=back



=head2 mix


Mix several video input streams into one video stream.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.


=item B<weights>

Specify weight of each input video stream as sequence.
Each weight is separated by space. If number of weights
is smaller than number of I<frames> last specified
weight will be used for all remaining unset weights.


=item B<scale>

Specify scale, if it is set it will be multiplied with sum
of each weight multiplied with pixel values to give final destination
pixel value. By default I<scale> is auto scaled to sum of weights.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.


=item B<duration>

Specify how end of stream is determined.

=over 4


=item B<longest>

The duration of the longest input. (default)


=item B<shortest>

The duration of the shortest input.


=item B<first>

The duration of the first input.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<weights>


=item B<scale>


=item B<planes>

Syntax is same as option with same name.

=back



=head2 monochrome

Convert video to gray using custom color filter.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<cb>

Set the chroma blue spot. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.
Default value is 0.


=item B<cr>

Set the chroma red spot. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.
Default value is 0.


=item B<size>

Set the color filter size. Allowed range is from .1 to 10.
Default value is 1.


=item B<high>

Set the highlights strength. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is 0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 morpho


This filter allows to apply main morphological grayscale transforms,
erode and dilate with arbitrary structures set in second input stream.

Unlike naive implementation and much slower performance in B<erosion>
and B<dilation> filters, when speed is critical C<morpho> filter
should be used instead.

A description of accepted options follows,


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Set morphological transform to apply, can be:


=over 4


=item B<erode>


=item B<dilate>


=item B<open>


=item B<close>


=item B<gradient>


=item B<tophat>


=item B<blackhat>


=back

Default is C<erode>.


=item B<planes>

Set planes to filter, by default all planes except alpha are filtered.


=item B<structure>

Set which structure video frames will be processed from second input stream,
can be I<first> or I<all>. Default is I<all>.

=back


The C<morpho> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 mpdecimate


Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
order to reduce frame rate.

The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
(e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<max>

Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped disregarding the
number of previous sequentially dropped frames.

Default value is 0.


=item B<keep>

Set the maximum number of consecutive similar frames to ignore before to start dropping them.
If the value is 0, the frame is dropped disregarding the
number of previous sequentially similar frames.

Default value is 0.


=item B<hi>


=item B<lo>


=item B<frac>

Set the dropping threshold values.

Values for B<hi> and B<lo> are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
out differently over the block.

A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
than a threshold of B<hi>, and if no more than B<frac> blocks (1
meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of B<lo>.

Default value for B<hi> is 64*12, default value for B<lo> is
64*5, and default value for B<frac> is 0.33.

=back



=head2 msad


Obtain the MSAD (Mean Sum of Absolute Differences) between two input videos.

This filter takes two input videos.

Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format for
this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.

The obtained per component, average, min and max MSAD is printed through
the logging system.

The filter stores the calculated MSAD of each frame in frame metadata.

This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

In the below example the input file F<main.mpg> being processed is compared
with the reference file F<ref.mpg>.

	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi msad -f null -



=head2 multiply

Multiply first video stream pixels values with second video stream pixels values.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<scale>

Set the scale applied to second video stream. By default is C<1>.
Allowed range is from C<0> to C<9>.


=item B<offset>

Set the offset applied to second video stream. By default is C<0.5>.
Allowed range is from C<-1> to C<1>.


=item B<planes>

Specify planes from input video stream that will be processed.
By default all planes are processed.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 negate


Negate (invert) the input video.

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<components>

Set components to negate.

Available values for components are:

=over 4


=item B<y>


=item B<u>


=item B<v>


=item B<a>


=item B<r>


=item B<g>


=item B<b>


=back



=item B<negate_alpha>

With value 1, it negates the alpha component, if present. Default value is 0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.



=head2 nlmeans


Denoise frames using Non-Local Means algorithm.

Each pixel is adjusted by looking for other pixels with similar contexts. This
context similarity is defined by comparing their surrounding patches of size
B<p>xB<p>. Patches are searched in an area of B<r>xB<r>
around the pixel.

Note that the research area defines centers for patches, which means some
patches will be made of pixels outside that research area.

The filter accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<s>

Set denoising strength. Default is 1.0. Must be in range [1.0, 30.0].


=item B<p>

Set patch size. Default is 7. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].


=item B<pc>

Same as B<p> but for chroma planes.

The default value is I<0> and means automatic.


=item B<r>

Set research size. Default is 15. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].


=item B<rc>

Same as B<r> but for chroma planes.

The default value is I<0> and means automatic.

=back



=head2 nnedi


Deinterlace video using neural network edge directed interpolation.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<weights>

Mandatory option, without binary file filter can not work.
Currently file can be found here:
https://github.com/dubhater/vapoursynth-nnedi3/blob/master/src/nnedi3_weights.bin


=item B<deint>

Set which frames to deinterlace, by default it is C<all>.
Can be C<all> or C<interlaced>.


=item B<field>

Set mode of operation.

Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<af>

Use frame flags, both fields.

=item B<a>

Use frame flags, single field.

=item B<t>

Use top field only.

=item B<b>

Use bottom field only.

=item B<tf>

Use both fields, top first.

=item B<bf>

Use both fields, bottom first.

=back



=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process, by default filter process all frames.


=item B<nsize>

Set size of local neighborhood around each pixel, used by the predictor neural
network.

Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<s8x6>


=item B<s16x6>


=item B<s32x6>


=item B<s48x6>


=item B<s8x4>


=item B<s16x4>


=item B<s32x4>


=back



=item B<nns>

Set the number of neurons in predictor neural network.
Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<n16>


=item B<n32>


=item B<n64>


=item B<n128>


=item B<n256>


=back



=item B<qual>

Controls the number of different neural network predictions that are blended
together to compute the final output value. Can be C<fast>, default or
C<slow>.


=item B<etype>

Set which set of weights to use in the predictor.
Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<a, abs>

weights trained to minimize absolute error

=item B<s, mse>

weights trained to minimize squared error

=back



=item B<pscrn>

Controls whether or not the prescreener neural network is used to decide
which pixels should be processed by the predictor neural network and which
can be handled by simple cubic interpolation.
The prescreener is trained to know whether cubic interpolation will be
sufficient for a pixel or whether it should be predicted by the predictor nn.
The computational complexity of the prescreener nn is much less than that of
the predictor nn. Since most pixels can be handled by cubic interpolation,
using the prescreener generally results in much faster processing.
The prescreener is pretty accurate, so the difference between using it and not
using it is almost always unnoticeable.

Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<none>


=item B<original>


=item B<new>


=item B<new2>


=item B<new3>


=back


Default is C<new>.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options, excluding I<weights> option.


=head2 noformat


Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
input to the next filter.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4



=item B<pix_fmts>

A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Force libavfilter to use a format different from I<yuv420p> for the
input to the vflip filter:
	
	noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip



=item *

Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
	
	noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p


=back



=head2 noise


Add noise on video input frame.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<all_seed>


=item B<c0_seed>


=item B<c1_seed>


=item B<c2_seed>


=item B<c3_seed>

Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
of I<all_seed>. Default value is C<123457>.


=item B<all_strength, alls>


=item B<c0_strength, c0s>


=item B<c1_strength, c1s>


=item B<c2_strength, c2s>


=item B<c3_strength, c3s>

Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
I<all_strength>. Default value is C<0>. Allowed range is [0, 100].


=item B<all_flags, allf>


=item B<c0_flags, c0f>


=item B<c1_flags, c1f>


=item B<c2_flags, c2f>


=item B<c3_flags, c3f>

Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if I<all_flags>.
Available values for component flags are:

=over 4


=item B<a>

averaged temporal noise (smoother)

=item B<p>

mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern

=item B<t>

temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)

=item B<u>

uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)

=back


=back



=head3 Examples


Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
	
	noise=alls=20:allf=t+u



=head2 normalize


Normalize RGB video (aka histogram stretching, contrast stretching).
See: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normalization_(image_processing)

For each channel of each frame, the filter computes the input range and maps
it linearly to the user-specified output range. The output range defaults
to the full dynamic range from pure black to pure white.

Temporal smoothing can be used on the input range to reduce flickering (rapid
changes in brightness) caused when small dark or bright objects enter or leave
the scene. This is similar to the auto-exposure (automatic gain control) on a
video camera, and, like a video camera, it may cause a period of over- or
under-exposure of the video.

The R,G,B channels can be normalized independently, which may cause some
color shifting, or linked together as a single channel, which prevents
color shifting. Linked normalization preserves hue. Independent normalization
does not, so it can be used to remove some color casts. Independent and linked
normalization can be combined in any ratio.

The normalize filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<blackpt>


=item B<whitept>

Colors which define the output range. The minimum input value is mapped to
the I<blackpt>. The maximum input value is mapped to the I<whitept>.
The defaults are black and white respectively. Specifying white for
I<blackpt> and black for I<whitept> will give color-inverted,
normalized video. Shades of grey can be used to reduce the dynamic range
(contrast). Specifying saturated colors here can create some interesting
effects.


=item B<smoothing>

The number of previous frames to use for temporal smoothing. The input range
of each channel is smoothed using a rolling average over the current frame
and the I<smoothing> previous frames. The default is 0 (no temporal
smoothing).


=item B<independence>

Controls the ratio of independent (color shifting) channel normalization to
linked (color preserving) normalization. 0.0 is fully linked, 1.0 is fully
independent. Defaults to 1.0 (fully independent).


=item B<strength>

Overall strength of the filter. 1.0 is full strength. 0.0 is a rather
expensive no-op. Defaults to 1.0 (full strength).


=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options, excluding I<smoothing> option.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head3 Examples


Stretch video contrast to use the full dynamic range, with no temporal
smoothing; may flicker depending on the source content:
	
	normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=0


As above, but with 50 frames of temporal smoothing; flicker should be
reduced, depending on the source content:
	
	normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=50


As above, but with hue-preserving linked channel normalization:
	
	normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=50:independence=0


As above, but with half strength:
	
	normalize=blackpt=black:whitept=white:smoothing=50:independence=0:strength=0.5


Map the darkest input color to red, the brightest input color to cyan:
	
	normalize=blackpt=red:whitept=cyan



=head2 null


Pass the video source unchanged to the output.


=head2 ocr

Optical Character Recognition

This filter uses Tesseract for optical character recognition. To enable
compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libtesseract>.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<datapath>

Set datapath to tesseract data. Default is to use whatever was
set at installation.


=item B<language>

Set language, default is "eng".


=item B<whitelist>

Set character whitelist.


=item B<blacklist>

Set character blacklist.

=back


The filter exports recognized text as the frame metadata C<lavfi.ocr.text>.
The filter exports confidence of recognized words as the frame metadata C<lavfi.ocr.confidence>.


=head2 ocv


Apply a video transform using libopencv.

To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libopencv>.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<filter_name>

The name of the libopencv filter to apply.


=item B<filter_params>

The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
values are assumed.


=back


Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
information:
E<lt>B<http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html>E<gt>

Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.



=head3 dilate


Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
It corresponds to the libopencv function C<cvDilate>.

It accepts the parameters: I<struct_el>|I<nb_iterations>.

I<struct_el> represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
I<cols>xI<rows>+I<anchor_x>xI<anchor_y>/I<shape>

I<cols> and I<rows> represent the number of columns and rows of
the structuring element, I<anchor_x> and I<anchor_y> the anchor
point, and I<shape> the shape for the structuring element. I<shape>
must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".

If the value for I<shape> is "custom", it must be followed by a
string of the form "=I<filename>". The file with name
I<filename> is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
I<shape> is used, I<cols> and I<rows> are ignored, the number
or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.

The default value for I<struct_el> is "3x3+0x0/rect".

I<nb_iterations> specifies the number of times the transform is
applied to the image, and defaults to 1.

Some examples:
	
	# Use the default values
	ocv=dilate
	
	# Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
	ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
	
	# Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
	# The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
	#   *
	#  ***
	# *****
	#  ***
	#   *
	# The specified columns and rows are ignored
	# but the anchor point coordinates are not
	ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2



=head3 erode


Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
It corresponds to the libopencv function C<cvErode>.

It accepts the parameters: I<struct_el>:I<nb_iterations>,
with the same syntax and semantics as the B<dilate> filter.


=head3 smooth


Smooth the input video.

The filter takes the following parameters:
I<type>|I<param1>|I<param2>|I<param3>|I<param4>.

I<type> is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".

The meaning of I<param1>, I<param2>, I<param3>, and I<param4>
depends on the smooth type. I<param1> and
I<param2> accept integer positive values or 0. I<param3> and
I<param4> accept floating point values.

The default value for I<param1> is 3. The default value for the
other parameters is 0.

These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
libopencv function C<cvSmooth>.


=head2 oscilloscope


2D Video Oscilloscope.

Useful to measure spatial impulse, step responses, chroma delays, etc.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<x>

Set scope center x position.


=item B<y>

Set scope center y position.


=item B<s>

Set scope size, relative to frame diagonal.


=item B<t>

Set scope tilt/rotation.


=item B<o>

Set trace opacity.


=item B<tx>

Set trace center x position.


=item B<ty>

Set trace center y position.


=item B<tw>

Set trace width, relative to width of frame.


=item B<th>

Set trace height, relative to height of frame.


=item B<c>

Set which components to trace. By default it traces first three components.


=item B<g>

Draw trace grid. By default is enabled.


=item B<st>

Draw some statistics. By default is enabled.


=item B<sc>

Draw scope. By default is enabled.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Inspect full first row of video frame.
	
	oscilloscope=x=0.5:y=0:s=1



=item *

Inspect full last row of video frame.
	
	oscilloscope=x=0.5:y=1:s=1



=item *

Inspect full 5th line of video frame of height 1080.
	
	oscilloscope=x=0.5:y=5/1080:s=1



=item *

Inspect full last column of video frame.
	
	oscilloscope=x=1:y=0.5:s=1:t=1



=back




=head2 overlay


Overlay one video on top of another.

It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
video on which the second input is overlaid.

It accepts the following parameters:

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).


=item B<eof_action>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<eval>

Set when the expressions for B<x>, and B<y> are evaluated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<init>

only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
when a command is processed


=item B<frame>

evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

=back


Default value is B<frame>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<format>

Set the format for the output video.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<yuv420>

force YUV 4:2:0 8-bit planar output


=item B<yuv420p10>

force YUV 4:2:0 10-bit planar output


=item B<yuv422>

force YUV 4:2:2 8-bit planar output


=item B<yuv422p10>

force YUV 4:2:2 10-bit planar output


=item B<yuv444>

force YUV 4:4:4 8-bit planar output


=item B<yuv444p10>

force YUV 4:4:4 10-bit planar output


=item B<rgb>

force RGB 8-bit packed output


=item B<gbrp>

force RGB 8-bit planar output


=item B<auto>

automatically pick format

=back


Default value is B<yuv420>.


=item B<repeatlast>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<alpha>

Set format of alpha of the overlaid video, it can be I<straight> or
I<premultiplied>. Default is I<straight>.

=back


The B<x>, and B<y> expressions can contain the following
parameters.


=over 4


=item B<main_w, W>


=item B<main_h, H>

The main input width and height.


=item B<overlay_w, w>


=item B<overlay_h, h>

The overlay input width and height.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The computed values for I<x> and I<y>. They are evaluated for
each new frame.


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and
I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<n>

the number of input frame, starting from 0


=item B<pos>

the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated,
do not use


=item B<t>

The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.


=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

Note that the I<n>, I<t> variables are available only
when evaluation is done I<per frame>, and will evaluate to NAN
when B<eval> is set to B<init>.

Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
to pass the two inputs through a I<setpts=PTS-STARTPTS> filter to
have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
the I<movie> filter does.

You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
efficiency of such approach.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
video:
	
	overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10


Using named options the example above becomes:
	
	overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10



=item *

Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
using the B<ffmpeg> tool with the C<-filter_complex> option:
	
	ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output



=item *

Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
right corner) using the B<ffmpeg> tool:
	
	ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output



=item *

Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video; C<WxH>
must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
	
	color=color=red@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]



=item *

Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
filter) side by side using the B<ffplay> tool:
	
	ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'


The above command is the same as:
	
	ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'



=item *

Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
screen starting since time 2:
	
	overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0



=item *

Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
	
	ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
	nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
	[0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
	[1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
	[background][left]       overlay=shortest=1       [background+left];
	[background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
	"



=item *

Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
	
	ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
	-vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
	masked.avi



=item *

Chain several overlays in cascade:
	
	nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
	testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
	[in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg]   overlay=0:0     [mid0];
	[in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0   [mid1];
	[in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100   [mid2];
	[in3] null,       [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]



=back




=head2 overlay_cuda


Overlay one video on top of another.

This is the CUDA variant of the B<overlay> filter.
It only accepts CUDA frames. The underlying input pixel formats have to match.

It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
video on which the second input is overlaid.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Set expressions for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
on the main video.

They can contain the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<main_w, W>


=item B<main_h, H>

The main input width and height.


=item B<overlay_w, w>


=item B<overlay_h, h>

The overlay input width and height.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The computed values for I<x> and I<y>. They are evaluated for
each new frame.


=item B<n>

The ordinal index of the main input frame, starting from 0.


=item B<pos>

The byte offset position in the file of the main input frame, NAN if unknown.
Deprecated, do not use.


=item B<t>

The timestamp of the main input frame, expressed in seconds, NAN if unknown.


=back


Default value is "0" for both expressions.


=item B<eval>

Set when the expressions for B<x> and B<y> are evaluated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<init>

Evaluate expressions once during filter initialization or
when a command is processed.


=item B<frame>

Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

=back


Default value is B<frame>.


=item B<eof_action>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<repeatlast>

See B<framesync>.


=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head2 owdenoise


Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<depth>

Set depth.

Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
slow down filtering.

Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is C<8>.


=item B<luma_strength, ls>

Set luma strength.

Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is C<1.0>.


=item B<chroma_strength, cs>

Set chroma strength.

Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is C<1.0>.

=back




=head2 pad


Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
provided I<x>, I<y> coordinates.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
paddings added. If the value for I<width> or I<height> is 0, the
corresponding input size is used for the output.

The I<width> expression can reference the value set by the
I<height> expression, and vice versa.

The default value of I<width> and I<height> is 0.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
with respect to the top/left border of the output image.

The I<x> expression can reference the value set by the I<y>
expression, and vice versa.

The default value of I<x> and I<y> is 0.

If I<x> or I<y> evaluate to a negative number, they'll be changed
so the input image is centered on the padded area.


=item B<color>

Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>.

The default value of I<color> is "black".


=item B<eval>

Specify when to evaluate  I<width>, I<height>, I<x> and I<y> expression.

It accepts the following values:


=over 4


=item B<init>

Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when
a command is processed.


=item B<frame>

Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.


=back


Default value is B<init>.


=item B<aspect>

Pad to aspect instead to a resolution.


=back


The value for the I<width>, I<height>, I<x>, and I<y>
options are expressions containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<in_w>


=item B<in_h>

The input video width and height.


=item B<iw>


=item B<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item B<out_w>


=item B<out_h>

The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
specified by the I<width> and I<height> expressions.


=item B<ow>


=item B<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The x and y offsets as specified by the I<x> and I<y>
expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.


=item B<a>

same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item B<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<iw> / I<ih>) * I<sar>


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Add paddings with the color "violet" to the input video. The output video
size is 640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
column 0, row 40
	
	pad=640:480:0:40:violet


The example above is equivalent to the following command:
	
	pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet



=item *

Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
	
	pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"



=item *

Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
the center of the padded area:
	
	pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"



=item *

Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
	
	pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"



=item *

In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
correctly, it is necessary to use I<sar> in the expression,
according to the relation:
	
	(ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
	X = output_dar / sar


Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
	
	pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"



=item *

Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
corner of the output padded area:
	
	pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"


=back




=head2 palettegen


Generate one palette for a whole video stream.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<max_colors>

Set the maximum number of colors to quantize in the palette.
Note: the palette will still contain 256 colors; the unused palette entries
will be black.


=item B<reserve_transparent>

Create a palette of 255 colors maximum and reserve the last one for
transparency. Reserving the transparency color is useful for GIF optimization.
If not set, the maximum of colors in the palette will be 256. You probably want
to disable this option for a standalone image.
Set by default.


=item B<transparency_color>

Set the color that will be used as background for transparency.


=item B<stats_mode>

Set statistics mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<full>

Compute full frame histograms.

=item B<diff>

Compute histograms only for the part that differs from previous frame. This
might be relevant to give more importance to the moving part of your input if
the background is static.

=item B<single>

Compute new histogram for each frame.

=back


Default value is I<full>.

=back


The filter also exports the frame metadata C<lavfi.color_quant_ratio>
(C<nb_color_in / nb_color_out>) which you can use to evaluate the degree of
color quantization of the palette. This information is also visible at
I<info> logging level.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Generate a representative palette of a given video using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf palettegen palette.png


=back



=head2 paletteuse


Use a palette to downsample an input video stream.

The filter takes two inputs: one video stream and a palette. The palette must
be a 256 pixels image.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dither>

Select dithering mode. Available algorithms are:

=over 4


=item B<bayer>

Ordered 8x8 bayer dithering (deterministic)

=item B<heckbert>

Dithering as defined by Paul Heckbert in 1982 (simple error diffusion).
Note: this dithering is sometimes considered "wrong" and is included as a
reference.

=item B<floyd_steinberg>

Floyd and Steingberg dithering (error diffusion)

=item B<sierra2>

Frankie Sierra dithering v2 (error diffusion)

=item B<sierra2_4a>

Frankie Sierra dithering v2 "Lite" (error diffusion)

=item B<sierra3>

Frankie Sierra dithering v3 (error diffusion)

=item B<burkes>

Burkes dithering (error diffusion)

=item B<atkinson>

Atkinson dithering by Bill Atkinson at Apple Computer (error diffusion)

=item B<none>

Disable dithering.

=back


Default is I<sierra2_4a>.


=item B<bayer_scale>

When I<bayer> dithering is selected, this option defines the scale of the
pattern (how much the crosshatch pattern is visible). A low value means more
visible pattern for less banding, and higher value means less visible pattern
at the cost of more banding.

The option must be an integer value in the range [0,5]. Default is I<2>.


=item B<diff_mode>

If set, define the zone to process


=over 4


=item B<rectangle>

Only the changing rectangle will be reprocessed. This is similar to GIF
cropping/offsetting compression mechanism. This option can be useful for speed
if only a part of the image is changing, and has use cases such as limiting the
scope of the error diffusal B<dither> to the rectangle that bounds the
moving scene (it leads to more deterministic output if the scene doesn't change
much, and as a result less moving noise and better GIF compression).

=back


Default is I<none>.


=item B<new>

Take new palette for each output frame.


=item B<alpha_threshold>

Sets the alpha threshold for transparency. Alpha values above this threshold
will be treated as completely opaque, and values below this threshold will be
treated as completely transparent.

The option must be an integer value in the range [0,255]. Default is I<128>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use a palette (generated for example with B<palettegen>) to encode a GIF
using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv -i palette.png -lavfi paletteuse output.gif


=back



=head2 perspective


Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<x0>


=item B<y0>


=item B<x1>


=item B<y1>


=item B<x2>


=item B<y2>


=item B<x3>


=item B<y3>

Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
Default values are C<0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H> with which perspective will remain unchanged.
If the C<sense> option is set to C<source>, then the specified points will be sent
to the corners of the destination. If the C<sense> option is set to C<destination>,
then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.

The expressions can use the following variables:


=over 4


=item B<W>


=item B<H>

the width and height of video frame.

=item B<in>

Input frame count.

=item B<on>

Output frame count.

=back



=item B<interpolation>

Set interpolation for perspective correction.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<linear>


=item B<cubic>


=back


Default value is B<linear>.


=item B<sense>

Set interpretation of coordinate options.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<0, source>


Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
the corners of the destination.


=item B<1, destination>


Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
by the given coordinates.

Default value is B<source>.

=back



=item B<eval>

Set when the expressions for coordinates B<x0,y0,...x3,y3> are evaluated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<init>

only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
when a command is processed


=item B<frame>

evaluate expressions for each incoming frame

=back


Default value is B<init>.

=back



=head2 phase


Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.

The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.

A description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Set phase mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<t>

Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
Filter will delay the bottom field.


=item B<b>

Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
Filter will delay the top field.


=item B<p>

Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.


=item B<a>

Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
opposite.
Filter selects among B<t> and B<b> modes on a frame by frame
basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
then this works just like B<u>.


=item B<u>

Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
Filter selects among B<t> and B<b> on a frame by frame basis by
analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
match between the fields.


=item B<T>

Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
Filter selects among B<t> and B<p> using image analysis.


=item B<B>

Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
Filter selects among B<b> and B<p> using image analysis.


=item B<A>

Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
Filter selects among B<t>, B<b> and B<p> using field flags and
image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
like B<U>. This is the default mode.


=item B<U>

Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
Filter selects among B<t>, B<b> and B<p> using image analysis only.

=back


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 photosensitivity

Reduce various flashes in video, so to help users with epilepsy.

It accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<frames, f>

Set how many frames to use when filtering. Default is 30.


=item B<threshold, t>

Set detection threshold factor. Default is 1.
Lower is stricter.


=item B<skip>

Set how many pixels to skip when sampling frames. Default is 1.
Allowed range is from 1 to 1024.


=item B<bypass>

Leave frames unchanged. Default is disabled.

=back



=head2 pixdesctest


Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.

For example:
	
	format=monow, pixdesctest


can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.


=head2 pixelize

Apply pixelization to video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Set block dimensions that will be used for pixelization.
Default value is C<16>.


=item B<mode, m>

Set the mode of pixelization used.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item B<avg>


=item B<min>


=item B<max>


=back

Default value is C<avg>.


=item B<planes, p>

Set what planes to filter. Default is to filter all planes.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports all options as B<commands>.


=head2 pixscope


Display sample values of color channels. Mainly useful for checking color
and levels. Minimum supported resolution is 640x480.

The filters accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<x>

Set scope X position, relative offset on X axis.


=item B<y>

Set scope Y position, relative offset on Y axis.


=item B<w>

Set scope width.


=item B<h>

Set scope height.


=item B<o>

Set window opacity. This window also holds statistics about pixel area.


=item B<wx>

Set window X position, relative offset on X axis.


=item B<wy>

Set window Y position, relative offset on Y axis.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 pp


Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (C<--enable-gpl>).
Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.

The filters accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<subfilters>

Set postprocessing subfilters string.

=back


All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:


=over 4


=item B<a/autoq>

Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.


=item B<c/chrom>

Do chrominance filtering, too (default).


=item B<y/nochrom>

Do luma filtering only (no chrominance).


=item B<n/noluma>

Do chrominance filtering only (no luma).

=back


These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.

Available subfilters are:


=over 4


=item B<hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]>

Horizontal deblocking filter

=over 4


=item B<difference>

Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: C<32>).

=item B<flatness>

Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: C<39>).

=back



=item B<vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]>

Vertical deblocking filter

=over 4


=item B<difference>

Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: C<32>).

=item B<flatness>

Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: C<39>).

=back



=item B<ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]>

Accurate horizontal deblocking filter

=over 4


=item B<difference>

Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: C<32>).

=item B<flatness>

Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: C<39>).

=back



=item B<va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]>

Accurate vertical deblocking filter

=over 4


=item B<difference>

Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: C<32>).

=item B<flatness>

Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: C<39>).

=back


=back


The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
thresholds.


=over 4


=item B<h1/x1hdeblock>

Experimental horizontal deblocking filter


=item B<v1/x1vdeblock>

Experimental vertical deblocking filter


=item B<dr/dering>

Deringing filter


=item B<tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer>


=over 4


=item B<threshold1>

larger -E<gt> stronger filtering

=item B<threshold2>

larger -E<gt> stronger filtering

=item B<threshold3>

larger -E<gt> stronger filtering

=back



=item B<al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction>


=over 4


=item B<f/fullyrange>

Stretch luma to C<0-255>.

=back



=item B<lb/linblenddeint>

Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
filtering all lines with a C<(1 2 1)> filter.


=item B<li/linipoldeint>

Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
linearly interpolating every second line.


=item B<ci/cubicipoldeint>

Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
cubically interpolating every second line.


=item B<md/mediandeint>

Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
median filter to every second line.


=item B<fd/ffmpegdeint>

FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
second line with a C<(-1 4 2 4 -1)> filter.


=item B<l5/lowpass5>

Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
block by filtering all lines with a C<(-1 2 6 2 -1)> filter.


=item B<fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]>

Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
specify.

=over 4


=item B<quantizer>

Quantizer to use

=back



=item B<de/default>

Default pp filter combination (C<hb|a,vb|a,dr|a>)


=item B<fa/fast>

Fast pp filter combination (C<h1|a,v1|a,dr|a>)


=item B<ac>

High quality pp filter combination (C<ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a>)

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
brightness/contrast:
	
	pp=hb/vb/dr/al



=item *

Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
	
	pp=de/-al



=item *

Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
	
	pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3



=item *

Apply deblocking on luma only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
automatically depending on available CPU time:
	
	pp=hb|y/vb|a


=back



=head2 pp7

Apply Postprocessing filter 7. It is variant of the B<spp> filter,
similar to spp = 6 with 7 point DCT, where only the center sample is
used after IDCT.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<qp>

Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range
0 to 63. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream
(if available).


=item B<mode>

Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:


=over 4


=item B<hard>

Set hard thresholding.

=item B<soft>

Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).

=item B<medium>

Set medium thresholding (good results, default).

=back


=back



=head2 premultiply

Apply alpha premultiply effect to input video stream using first plane
of second stream as alpha.

Both streams must have same dimensions and same pixel format.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<inplace>

Do not require 2nd input for processing, instead use alpha plane from input stream.

=back



=head2 prewitt

Apply prewitt operator to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 pseudocolor


Alter frame colors in video with pseudocolors.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<c0>

set pixel first component expression


=item B<c1>

set pixel second component expression


=item B<c2>

set pixel third component expression


=item B<c3>

set pixel fourth component expression, corresponds to the alpha component


=item B<index, i>

set component to use as base for altering colors


=item B<preset, p>

Pick one of built-in LUTs. By default is set to none.

Available LUTs:

=over 4


=item B<magma>


=item B<inferno>


=item B<plasma>


=item B<viridis>


=item B<turbo>


=item B<cividis>


=item B<range1>


=item B<range2>


=item B<shadows>


=item B<highlights>


=item B<solar>


=item B<nominal>


=item B<preferred>


=item B<total>


=item B<spectral>


=item B<cool>


=item B<heat>


=item B<fiery>


=item B<blues>


=item B<green>


=item B<helix>


=back



=item B<opacity>

Set opacity of output colors. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.
Default value is set to 1.

=back


Each of the expression options specifies the expression to use for computing
the lookup table for the corresponding pixel component values.

The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:


=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The input width and height.


=item B<val>

The input value for the pixel component.


=item B<ymin, umin, vmin, amin>

The minimum allowed component value.


=item B<ymax, umax, vmax, amax>

The maximum allowed component value.

=back


All expressions default to "val".


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Change too high luma values to gradient:
	
	pseudocolor="'if(between(val,ymax,amax),lerp(ymin,ymax,(val-ymax)/(amax-ymax)),-1):if(between(val,ymax,amax),lerp(umax,umin,(val-ymax)/(amax-ymax)),-1):if(between(val,ymax,amax),lerp(vmin,vmax,(val-ymax)/(amax-ymax)),-1):-1'"


=back




=head2 psnr


Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
Ratio) between two input videos.

This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
the PSNR.

Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.

The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.

The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:

	
	PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)


Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
image.

The description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<stats_file, f>

If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
each individual frame. When filename equals "-" the data is sent to
standard output.


=item B<stats_version>

Specifies which version of the stats file format to use. Details of
each format are written below.
Default value is 1.


=item B<stats_add_max>

Determines whether the max value is output to the stats log.
Default value is 0.
Requires stats_version E<gt>= 2. If this is set and stats_version E<lt> 2,
the filter will return an error.

=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

The file printed if I<stats_file> is selected, contains a sequence of
key/value pairs of the form I<key>:I<value> for each compared
couple of frames.

If a I<stats_version> greater than 1 is specified, a header line precedes
the list of per-frame-pair stats, with key value pairs following the frame
format with the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<psnr_log_version>

The version of the log file format. Will match I<stats_version>.


=item B<fields>

A comma separated list of the per-frame-pair parameters included in
the log.

=back


A description of each shown per-frame-pair parameter follows:


=over 4


=item B<n>

sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1


=item B<mse_avg>

Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
frames, averaged over all the image components.


=item B<mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_b, mse_a>

Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
frames for the component specified by the suffix.


=item B<psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a>

Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
specified by the suffix.


=item B<max_avg, max_y, max_u, max_v>

Maximum allowed value for each channel, and average over all
channels.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

For example:
	
	movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
	[main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]


On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
reference file F<ref_movie.mpg>. The PSNR of each individual frame
is stored in F<stats.log>.


=item *

Another example with different containers:
	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mkv -lavfi  "[0:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[main];[1:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[ref];[main][ref]psnr" -f null -


=back




=head2 pullup


Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
content.

The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.

To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
pullup, use C<fps=24000/1001> if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
C<fps=24> for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<jl>


=item B<jr>


=item B<jt>


=item B<jb>

These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
The default is 8 pixels on each side.


=item B<sb>

Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<mp>

Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<l>

Use luma plane.


=item B<u>

Use chroma blue plane.


=item B<v>

Use chroma red plane.

=back


This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
The main purpose of setting B<mp> to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.

=back


For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
telecine NTSC input:
	
	ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...



=head2 qp


Change video quantization parameters (QP).

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<qp>

Set expression for quantization parameter.

=back


The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others,
the following constants:


=over 4


=item I<known>

1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.


=item I<qp>

Sequential index starting from -129 to 128.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Some equation like:
	
	qp=2+2*sin(PI*qp)


=back



=head2 qrencode

Generate a QR code using the libqrencode library (see
E<lt>B<https://fukuchi.org/works/qrencode/>E<gt>), and overlay it on top of the current
frame.

To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libqrencode>.

The QR code is generated from the provided text or text pattern. The
corresponding QR code is scaled and overlayed into the video output according to
the specified options.

In case no text is specified, no QR code is overlaied.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<qrcode_width, q>


=item B<padded_qrcode_width, Q>

Specify an expression for the width of the rendered QR code, with and without
padding. The I<qrcode_width> expression can reference the value set by the
I<padded_qrcode_width> expression, and vice versa.
By default I<padded_qrcode_width> is set to I<qrcode_width>, meaning that
there is no padding.

These expressions are evaluated for each new frame.

See the B<qrencode Expressions> section for details.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Specify an expression for positioning the padded QR code top-left corner.  The
I<x> expression can reference the value set by the I<y> expression, and
vice.

By default I<x> and I<y> are set set to I<0>, meaning that the QR code
is placed in the top left corner of the input.

These expressions are evaluated for each new frame.

See the B<qrencode Expressions> section for details.


=item B<case_sensitive, cs>

Instruct libqrencode to use case sensitive encoding. This is enabled by
default. This can be disabled to reduce the QR encoding size.


=item B<level, l>

Specify the QR encoding error correction level. With an higher correction level,
the encoding size will increase but the code will be more robust to corruption.
Lower level is I<L>.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<L>


=item B<M>


=item B<Q>


=item B<H>


=back



=item B<expansion>

Select how the input text is expanded. Can be either C<none>, or
C<normal> (default). See the B<qrencode Text expansion>
section below for details.


=item B<text>


=item B<textfile>

Define the text to be rendered. In case neither is specified, no QR is encoded
(just an empty colored frame).

In case expansion is enabled, the text is treated as a text template, using the
qrencode expansion mechanism. See the B<qrencode
Text expansion> section below for details.


=item B<background_color, bc>


=item B<foreground_color, fc>

Set the QR code and background color. The default value of
I<foreground_color> is "black", the default value of I<background_color>
is "white".

For the syntax of the color options, check the B<"Color"
section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

=back




=head3 qrencode Expressions


The expressions set by the options contain the following constants and functions.


=over 4


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<w> / I<h>) * I<sar>


=item B<duration>

the current frame's duration, in seconds


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<main_h, H>

the input height


=item B<main_w, W>

the input width


=item B<n>

the number of input frame, starting from 0


=item B<pict_type>

a number representing the picture type


=item B<qr_w, w>

the width of the encoded QR code


=item B<rendered_qr_w, q>


=item B<rendered_padded_qr_w, Q>

the width of the rendered QR code, without and without padding.

These parameters allow the I<q> and I<Q> expressions to refer to each
other, so you can for example specify C<q=3/4*Q>.


=item B<rand(min, max)>

return a random number included between I<min> and I<max>


=item B<sar>

the input sample aspect ratio


=item B<t>

timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.

These parameters allow the I<x> and I<y> expressions to refer to each
other, so you can for example specify C<y=x/dar>.

=back




=head3 qrencode Text expansion


If B<expansion> is set to C<none>, the text is printed verbatim.

If B<expansion> is set to C<normal> (which is the default),
the following expansion mechanism is used.

The backslash character B<\>, followed by any character, always expands to
the second character.

Sequences of the form C<%{...}> are expanded. The text between the
braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '}'),
they should be escaped.

Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the B<text>
option in the filter argument string and as the filter argument in the
filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell, that makes up to four
levels of escaping; using a text file with the B<textfile> option avoids
these problems.

The following functions are available:


=over 4


=item B<n, frame_num>

return the frame number


=item B<pts>

Return the presentation timestamp of the current frame.

It can take up to two arguments.

The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to C<flt> for
seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; C<hms> stands for a
formatted I<[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm> timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
C<gmtime> stands for the timestamp of the frame formatted as UTC time;
C<localtime> stands for the timestamp of the frame formatted as local time
zone time. If the format is set to C<hms24hh>, the time is formatted in 24h
format (00-23).

The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.

If the format is set to C<localtime> or C<gmtime>, a third argument may
be supplied: a C<strftime> C function format string. By default,
I<YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS> format will be used.


=item B<expr, e>

Evaluate the expression's value and output as a double.

It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated, accepting
the constants and functions defined in B<qrencode_expressions>.


=item B<expr_formatted, ef>

Evaluate the expression's value and output as a formatted string.

The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the I<expr> function.
The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are B<x>,
B<X>, B<d> and B<u>. They are treated exactly as in the
C<printf> function.
The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.


=item B<gmtime>

The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
It can accept an argument: a C<strftime> C function format string.
The format string is extended to support the variable I<%[1-6]N>
which prints fractions of the second with optionally specified number of digits.


=item B<localtime>

The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
It can accept an argument: a C<strftime> C function format string.
The format string is extended to support the variable I<%[1-6]N>
which prints fractions of the second with optionally specified number of digits.


=item B<metadata>

Frame metadata. Takes one or two arguments.

The first argument is mandatory and specifies the metadata key.

The second argument is optional and specifies a default value, used when the
metadata key is not found or empty.

Available metadata can be identified by inspecting entries starting with TAG
included within each frame section printed by running C<ffprobe
-show_frames>.

String metadata generated in filters leading to the qrencode filter are also
available.


=item B<rand(min, max)>

return a random number included between I<min> and I<max>

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the specified text with the default size, overalaid
in the top left corner of the input video, with the default size:
	
	qrencode=text=www.ffmpeg.org



=item *

Same as below, but select blue on pink colors:
	
	qrencode=text=www.ffmpeg.org:bc=pink@0.5:fc=blue



=item *

Place the QR code in the bottom right corner of the input video:
	
	qrencode=text=www.ffmpeg.org:x=W-Q:y=H-Q



=item *

Generate a QR code with width of 200 pixels and padding, making the padded width
4/3 of the QR code width:
	
	qrencode=text=www.ffmpeg.org:q=200:Q=4/3*q



=item *

Generate a QR code with padded width of 200 pixels and padding, making the QR
code width 3/4 of the padded width:
	
	qrencode=text=www.ffmpeg.org:Q=200:q=3/4*Q



=item *

Make the QR code a fraction of the input video width:
	
	qrencode=text=www.ffmpeg.org:q=W/5



=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the frame number:
	
	qrencode=text=%{n}



=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the GMT timestamp:
	
	qrencode=text=%{gmtime}



=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the timestamp expressed as a float:
	
	qrencode=text=%{pts}



=back



=head2 quirc


Identify and decode a QR code using the libquirc library (see
E<lt>B<https://github.com/dlbeer/quirc/>E<gt>), and print the identified QR codes
positions and payload as metadata.

To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libquirc>.

For each found QR code in the input video, some metadata entries are added with
the prefix I<lavfi.quirc.N>, where I<N> is the index, starting from 0,
associated to the QR code.

A description of each metadata value follows:


=over 4


=item B<lavfi.quirc.count>

the number of found QR codes, it is not set in case none was found


=item B<lavfi.quirc.N.corner.M.x>


=item B<lavfi.quirc.N.coreer.M.y>

the x/y positions of the four corners of the square containing the QR code,
where I<M> is the index of the corner starting from 0


=item B<lavfi.quirc.N.payload>

the payload of the QR code

=back



=head2 random


Flush video frames from internal cache of frames into a random order.
No frame is discarded.
Inspired by B<frei0r> nervous filter.


=over 4


=item B<frames>

Set size in number of frames of internal cache, in range from C<2> to
C<512>. Default is C<30>.


=item B<seed>

Set seed for random number generator, must be an integer included between
C<0> and C<UINT32_MAX>. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
less than C<0>, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a
best effort basis.

=back



=head2 readeia608


Read closed captioning (EIA-608) information from the top lines of a video frame.

This filter adds frame metadata for C<lavfi.readeia608.X.cc> and
C<lavfi.readeia608.X.line>, where C<X> is the number of the identified line
with EIA-608 data (starting from 0). A description of each metadata value follows:


=over 4


=item B<lavfi.readeia608.X.cc>

The two bytes stored as EIA-608 data (printed in hexadecimal).


=item B<lavfi.readeia608.X.line>

The number of the line on which the EIA-608 data was identified and read.

=back


This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<scan_min>

Set the line to start scanning for EIA-608 data. Default is C<0>.


=item B<scan_max>

Set the line to end scanning for EIA-608 data. Default is C<29>.


=item B<spw>

Set the ratio of width reserved for sync code detection.
Default is C<0.27>. Allowed range is C<[0.1 - 0.7]>.


=item B<chp>

Enable checking the parity bit. In the event of a parity error, the filter will output
C<0x00> for that character. Default is false.


=item B<lp>

Lowpass lines prior to further processing. Default is enabled.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Output a csv with presentation time and the first two lines of identified EIA-608 captioning data.
	
	ffprobe -f lavfi -i movie=captioned_video.mov,readeia608 -show_entries frame=pts_time:frame_tags=lavfi.readeia608.0.cc,lavfi.readeia608.1.cc -of csv


=back



=head2 readvitc


Read vertical interval timecode (VITC) information from the top lines of a
video frame.

The filter adds frame metadata key C<lavfi.readvitc.tc_str> with the
timecode value, if a valid timecode has been detected. Further metadata key
C<lavfi.readvitc.found> is set to 0/1 depending on whether
timecode data has been found or not.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<scan_max>

Set the maximum number of lines to scan for VITC data. If the value is set to
C<-1> the full video frame is scanned. Default is C<45>.


=item B<thr_b>

Set the luma threshold for black. Accepts float numbers in the range [0.0,1.0],
default value is C<0.2>. The value must be equal or less than C<thr_w>.


=item B<thr_w>

Set the luma threshold for white. Accepts float numbers in the range [0.0,1.0],
default value is C<0.6>. The value must be equal or greater than C<thr_b>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Detect and draw VITC data onto the video frame; if no valid VITC is detected,
draw C<--:--:--:--> as a placeholder:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.avi -filter:v 'readvitc,drawtext=fontfile=FreeMono.ttf:text=%{metadata\\:lavfi.readvitc.tc_str\\:--\\\\\\:--\\\\\\:--\\\\\\:--}:x=(w-tw)/2:y=400-ascent'


=back



=head2 remap


Remap pixels using 2nd: Xmap and 3rd: Ymap input video stream.

Destination pixel at position (X, Y) will be picked from source (x, y) position
where x = Xmap(X, Y) and y = Ymap(X, Y). If mapping values are out of range, zero
value for pixel will be used for destination pixel.

Xmap and Ymap input video streams must be of same dimensions. Output video stream
will have Xmap/Ymap video stream dimensions.
Xmap and Ymap input video streams are 16bit depth, single channel.


=over 4


=item B<format>

Specify pixel format of output from this filter. Can be C<color> or C<gray>.
Default is C<color>.


=item B<fill>

Specify the color of the unmapped pixels. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>. Default color is C<black>.

=back



=head2 removegrain


The removegrain filter is a spatial denoiser for progressive video.


=over 4


=item B<m0>

Set mode for the first plane.


=item B<m1>

Set mode for the second plane.


=item B<m2>

Set mode for the third plane.


=item B<m3>

Set mode for the fourth plane.

=back


Range of mode is from 0 to 24. Description of each mode follows:


=over 4


=item I<0>

Leave input plane unchanged. Default.


=item I<1>

Clips the pixel with the minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.


=item I<2>

Clips the pixel with the second minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.


=item I<3>

Clips the pixel with the third minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.


=item I<4>

Clips the pixel with the fourth minimum and maximum of the 8 neighbour pixels.
This is equivalent to a median filter.


=item I<5>

Line-sensitive clipping giving the minimal change.


=item I<6>

Line-sensitive clipping, intermediate.


=item I<7>

Line-sensitive clipping, intermediate.


=item I<8>

Line-sensitive clipping, intermediate.


=item I<9>

Line-sensitive clipping on a line where the neighbours pixels are the closest.


=item I<10>

Replaces the target pixel with the closest neighbour.


=item I<11>

[1 2 1] horizontal and vertical kernel blur.


=item I<12>

Same as mode 11.


=item I<13>

Bob mode, interpolates top field from the line where the neighbours
pixels are the closest.


=item I<14>

Bob mode, interpolates bottom field from the line where the neighbours
pixels are the closest.


=item I<15>

Bob mode, interpolates top field. Same as 13 but with a more complicated
interpolation formula.


=item I<16>

Bob mode, interpolates bottom field. Same as 14 but with a more complicated
interpolation formula.


=item I<17>

Clips the pixel with the minimum and maximum of respectively the maximum and
minimum of each pair of opposite neighbour pixels.


=item I<18>

Line-sensitive clipping using opposite neighbours whose greatest distance from
the current pixel is minimal.


=item I<19>

Replaces the pixel with the average of its 8 neighbours.


=item I<20>

Averages the 9 pixels ([1 1 1] horizontal and vertical blur).


=item I<21>

Clips pixels using the averages of opposite neighbour.


=item I<22>

Same as mode 21 but simpler and faster.


=item I<23>

Small edge and halo removal, but reputed useless.


=item I<24>

Similar as 23.

=back



=head2 removelogo


Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<filename, f>

Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
video stream being processed.

=back


Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
filter once or twice.

If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
pixels will slow things down on a large logo.


=head2 repeatfields


This filter uses the repeat_field flag from the Video ES headers and hard repeats
fields based on its value.


=head2 reverse


Reverse a video clip.

Warning: This filter requires memory to buffer the entire clip, so trimming
is suggested.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Take the first 5 seconds of a clip, and reverse it.
	
	trim=end=5,reverse


=back



=head2 rgbashift

Shift R/G/B/A pixels horizontally and/or vertically.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<rh>

Set amount to shift red horizontally.

=item B<rv>

Set amount to shift red vertically.

=item B<gh>

Set amount to shift green horizontally.

=item B<gv>

Set amount to shift green vertically.

=item B<bh>

Set amount to shift blue horizontally.

=item B<bv>

Set amount to shift blue vertically.

=item B<ah>

Set amount to shift alpha horizontally.

=item B<av>

Set amount to shift alpha vertically.

=item B<edge>

Set edge mode, can be I<smear>, default, or I<warp>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 roberts

Apply roberts cross operator to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 rotate


Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.

The filter accepts the following options:

A description of the optional parameters follows.

=over 4


=item B<angle, a>

Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".

This expression is evaluated for each frame.


=item B<out_w, ow>

Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.


=item B<out_h, oh>

Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.


=item B<bilinear>

Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
it. Default value is 1.


=item B<fillcolor, c>

Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
image. For the general syntax of this option, check the
B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
If the special value "none" is selected then no
background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).

Default value is "black".

=back


The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
following constants and functions:


=over 4


=item B<n>

sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
before the first frame is filtered.


=item B<t>

time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item B<in_w, iw>


=item B<in_h, ih>

the input video width and height


=item B<out_w, ow>


=item B<out_h, oh>

the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
specified by the I<width> and I<height> expressions


=item B<rotw(a)>


=item B<roth(a)>

the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
video rotated by I<a> radians.

These are only available when computing the B<out_w> and
B<out_h> expressions.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
	
	rotate=PI/6



=item *

Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
	
	rotate=-PI/6



=item *

Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
	
	rotate=45*PI/180



=item *

Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
	
	rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T



=item *

Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
	
	rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)



=item *

Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
input video is always completely contained in the output:
	
	rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'



=item *

Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
shown:
	
	rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none


=back



=head3 Commands


The filter supports the following commands:


=over 4


=item B<a, angle>

Set the angle expression.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back



=head2 sab


Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<luma_radius, lr>

Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
in slower processing.


=item B<luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr>

Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
value is 1.0.


=item B<luma_strength, ls>

Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.


=item B<chroma_radius, cr>

Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range -0.9-4.0. A
greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
processing.


=item B<chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr>

Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the -0.9-2.0 range.


=item B<chroma_strength, cs>

Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
must be a value in the -0.9-100.0 range.

=back


Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
corresponding luma option value.



=head2 scale


Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.

The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.

If the input image format is different from the format requested by
the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
requested format.


=head3 Options

The filter accepts the following options, any of the options supported
by the libswscale scaler, as well as any of the B<framesync> options.

See B<the ffmpeg-scaler manual> for
the complete list of scaler options.


=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
dimension.

If the I<width> or I<w> value is 0, the input width is used for
the output. If the I<height> or I<h> value is 0, the input height
is used for the output.

If one and only one of the values is -n with n E<gt>= 1, the scale filter
will use a value that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image,
calculated from the other specified dimension. After that it will,
however, make sure that the calculated dimension is divisible by n and
adjust the value if necessary.

If both values are -n with n E<gt>= 1, the behavior will be identical to
both values being set to 0 as previously detailed.

See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
expression.


=item B<eval>

Specify when to evaluate I<width> and I<height> expression. It accepts the following values:


=over 4


=item B<init>

Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command is processed.


=item B<frame>

Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.


=back


Default value is B<init>.



=item B<interl>

Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:


=over 4


=item B<1>

Force interlaced aware scaling.


=item B<0>

Do not apply interlaced scaling.


=item B<-1>

Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
are flagged as interlaced or not.

=back


Default value is B<0>.


=item B<flags>

Set libswscale scaling flags. See
B<the ffmpeg-scaler manual> for the
complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
the default flags.



=item B<param0, param1>

Set libswscale input parameters for scaling algorithms that need them. See
B<the ffmpeg-scaler manual> for the
complete documentation. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
empty parameters.




=item B<size, s>

Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<in_color_matrix>


=item B<out_color_matrix>

Set in/output YCbCr color space type.

This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
a specific value used for the output and encoder.

If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.

Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Choose automatically.


=item B<bt709>

Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
Recommendation BT.709.


=item B<fcc>

Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).


=item B<bt601>


=item B<bt470>


=item B<smpte170m>

Set color space conforming to:


=over 4


=item *

ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601


=item *

ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G


=item *

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004


=back



=item B<smpte240m>

Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.


=item B<bt2020>

Set color space conforming to ITU-R BT.2020 non-constant luminance system.

=back



=item B<in_range>


=item B<out_range>

Set in/output YCbCr sample range.

This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<auto/unknown>

Choose automatically.


=item B<jpeg/full/pc>

Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).


=item B<mpeg/limited/tv>

Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).

=back



=item B<in_chroma_loc>


=item B<out_chroma_loc>

Set in/output chroma sample location. If not specified, center-sited chroma
is used by default. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<auto, unknown>


=item B<left>


=item B<center>


=item B<topleft>


=item B<top>


=item B<bottomleft>


=item B<bottom>


=back



=item B<force_original_aspect_ratio>

Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<disable>

Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.


=item B<decrease>

The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.


=item B<increase>

The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.


=back


One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
1280x533.

Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for B<w>
or B<h>, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
to work.


=item B<force_divisible_by>

Ensures that both the output dimensions, width and height, are divisible by the
given integer when used together with B<force_original_aspect_ratio>. This
works similar to using C<-n> in the B<w> and B<h> options.

This option respects the value set for B<force_original_aspect_ratio>,
increasing or decreasing the resolution accordingly. The video's aspect ratio
may be slightly modified.

This option can be handy if you need to have a video fit within or exceed
a defined resolution using B<force_original_aspect_ratio> but also have
encoder restrictions on width or height divisibility.


=back


The values of the B<w> and B<h> options are expressions
containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item I<in_w>


=item I<in_h>

The input width and height


=item I<iw>


=item I<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item I<out_w>


=item I<out_h>

The output (scaled) width and height


=item I<ow>


=item I<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>


=item I<a>

The same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item I<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item I<dar>

The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from C<(iw / ih) * sar>.


=item I<hsub>


=item I<vsub>

horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item I<ohsub>


=item I<ovsub>

horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item I<n>

The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
Only available with C<eval=frame>.


=item I<t>

The presentation timestamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
seconds. Only available with C<eval=frame>.


=item I<pos>

The position (byte offset) of the frame in the input stream, or NaN if
this information is unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
Only available with C<eval=frame>.
Deprecated, do not use.


=item I<ref_w, rw>


=item I<ref_h, rh>


=item I<ref_a>


=item I<ref_dar, rdar>


=item I<ref_n>


=item I<ref_t>


=item I<ref_pos>

Eqvuialent to the above, but for a second reference input. If any of these
variables are present, this filter accepts two inputs.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Scale the input video to a size of 200x100
	
	scale=w=200:h=100


This is equivalent to:
	
	scale=200:100


or:
	
	scale=200x100



=item *

Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
	
	scale=qcif


which can also be written as:
	
	scale=size=qcif



=item *

Scale the input to 2x:
	
	scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih



=item *

The above is the same as:
	
	scale=2*in_w:2*in_h



=item *

Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
	
	scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1



=item *

Scale the input to half size:
	
	scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2



=item *

Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
	
	scale=3/2*iw:ow



=item *

Seek Greek harmony:
	
	scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
	scale=ih*PHI:ih



=item *

Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
	
	scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih



=item *

Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma
subsample values:
	
	scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"



=item *

Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels,
keeping the same aspect ratio as the input:
	
	scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'



=item *

Make pixels square by combining scale and setsar:
	
	scale='trunc(ih*dar):ih',setsar=1/1



=item *

Make pixels square by combining scale and setsar,
making sure the resulting resolution is even (required by some codecs):
	
	scale='trunc(ih*dar/2)*2:trunc(ih/2)*2',setsar=1/1



=item *

Scale a subtitle stream (sub) to match the main video (main) in size before
overlaying. ("scale2ref")
	
	'[main]split[a][b]; [ref][a]scale=rw:rh[c]; [b][c]overlay'



=item *

Scale a logo to 1/10th the height of a video, while preserving its display
aspect ratio.
	
	[logo-in][video-in]scale=w=oh*dar:h=rh/10[logo-out]


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Set the output video dimension expression.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back




=head2 scale_cuda


Scale (resize) and convert (pixel format) the input video, using accelerated CUDA kernels.
Setting the output width and height works in the same way as for the B<scale> filter.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input dimension.

Allows for the same expressions as the B<scale> filter.


=item B<interp_algo>

Sets the algorithm used for scaling:


=over 4


=item I<nearest>

Nearest neighbour

Used by default if input parameters match the desired output.


=item I<bilinear>

Bilinear


=item I<bicubic>

Bicubic

This is the default.


=item I<lanczos>

Lanczos


=back



=item B<format>

Controls the output pixel format. By default, or if none is specified, the input
pixel format is used.

The filter does not support converting between YUV and RGB pixel formats.


=item B<passthrough>

If set to 0, every frame is processed, even if no conversion is necessary.
This mode can be useful to use the filter as a buffer for a downstream
frame-consumer that exhausts the limited decoder frame pool.

If set to 1, frames are passed through as-is if they match the desired output
parameters. This is the default behaviour.


=item B<param>

Algorithm-Specific parameter.

Affects the curves of the bicubic algorithm.


=item B<force_original_aspect_ratio>


=item B<force_divisible_by>

Work the same as the identical B<scale> filter options.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Scale input to 720p, keeping aspect ratio and ensuring the output is yuv420p.
	
	scale_cuda=-2:720:format=yuv420p



=item *

Upscale to 4K using nearest neighbour algorithm.
	
	scale_cuda=4096:2160:interp_algo=nearest



=item *

Don't do any conversion or scaling, but copy all input frames into newly allocated ones.
This can be useful to deal with a filter and encode chain that otherwise exhausts the
decoders frame pool.
	
	scale_cuda=passthrough=0


=back




=head2 scale_npp


Use the NVIDIA Performance Primitives (libnpp) to perform scaling and/or pixel
format conversion on CUDA video frames. Setting the output width and height
works in the same way as for the I<scale> filter.

The following additional options are accepted:

=over 4


=item B<format>

The pixel format of the output CUDA frames. If set to the string "same" (the
default), the input format will be kept. Note that automatic format negotiation
and conversion is not yet supported for hardware frames


=item B<interp_algo>

The interpolation algorithm used for resizing. One of the following:

=over 4


=item B<nn>

Nearest neighbour.


=item B<linear>


=item B<cubic>


=item B<cubic2p_bspline>

2-parameter cubic (B=1, C=0)


=item B<cubic2p_catmullrom>

2-parameter cubic (B=0, C=1/2)


=item B<cubic2p_b05c03>

2-parameter cubic (B=1/2, C=3/10)


=item B<super>

Supersampling


=item B<lanczos>


=back



=item B<force_original_aspect_ratio>

Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<disable>

Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.


=item B<decrease>

The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.


=item B<increase>

The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.


=back


One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
1280x533.

Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for B<w>
or B<h>, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
to work.


=item B<force_divisible_by>

Ensures that both the output dimensions, width and height, are divisible by the
given integer when used together with B<force_original_aspect_ratio>. This
works similar to using C<-n> in the B<w> and B<h> options.

This option respects the value set for B<force_original_aspect_ratio>,
increasing or decreasing the resolution accordingly. The video's aspect ratio
may be slightly modified.

This option can be handy if you need to have a video fit within or exceed
a defined resolution using B<force_original_aspect_ratio> but also have
encoder restrictions on width or height divisibility.


=item B<eval>

Specify when to evaluate I<width> and I<height> expression. It accepts the following values:


=over 4


=item B<init>

Only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or when a command is processed.


=item B<frame>

Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame.


=back



=back


The values of the B<w> and B<h> options are expressions
containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item I<in_w>


=item I<in_h>

The input width and height


=item I<iw>


=item I<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item I<out_w>


=item I<out_h>

The output (scaled) width and height


=item I<ow>


=item I<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>


=item I<a>

The same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item I<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item I<dar>

The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from C<(iw / ih) * sar>.


=item I<n>

The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
Only available with C<eval=frame>.


=item I<t>

The presentation timestamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
seconds. Only available with C<eval=frame>.


=item I<pos>

The position (byte offset) of the frame in the input stream, or NaN if
this information is unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
Only available with C<eval=frame>.
Deprecated, do not use.

=back



=head2 scale2ref_npp


Use the NVIDIA Performance Primitives (libnpp) to scale (resize) the input
video, based on a reference video.

See the B<scale_npp> filter for available options, scale2ref_npp supports the same
but uses the reference video instead of the main input as basis. scale2ref_npp
also supports the following additional constants for the B<w> and
B<h> options:


=over 4


=item I<main_w>


=item I<main_h>

The main input video's width and height


=item I<main_a>

The same as I<main_w> / I<main_h>


=item I<main_sar>

The main input video's sample aspect ratio


=item I<main_dar, mdar>

The main input video's display aspect ratio. Calculated from
C<(main_w / main_h) * main_sar>.


=item I<main_n>

The (sequential) number of the main input frame, starting from 0.
Only available with C<eval=frame>.


=item I<main_t>

The presentation timestamp of the main input frame, expressed as a number of
seconds. Only available with C<eval=frame>.


=item I<main_pos>

The position (byte offset) of the frame in the main input stream, or NaN if
this information is unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
Only available with C<eval=frame>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Scale a subtitle stream (b) to match the main video (a) in size before overlaying
	
	'scale2ref_npp[b][a];[a][b]overlay_cuda'



=item *

Scale a logo to 1/10th the height of a video, while preserving its display aspect ratio.
	
	[logo-in][video-in]scale2ref_npp=w=oh*mdar:h=ih/10[logo-out][video-out]


=back



=head2 scale_vt


Scale and convert the color parameters using VTPixelTransferSession.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input dimension.


=item B<color_matrix>

Set the output colorspace matrix.


=item B<color_primaries>

Set the output color primaries.


=item B<color_transfer>

Set the output transfer characteristics.


=back



=head2 scharr

Apply scharr operator to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 scroll

Scroll input video horizontally and/or vertically by constant speed.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<horizontal, h>

Set the horizontal scrolling speed. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.
Negative values changes scrolling direction.


=item B<vertical, v>

Set the vertical scrolling speed. Default is 0. Allowed range is from -1 to 1.
Negative values changes scrolling direction.


=item B<hpos>

Set the initial horizontal scrolling position. Default is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.


=item B<vpos>

Set the initial vertical scrolling position. Default is 0. Allowed range is from 0 to 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following B<commands>:

=over 4


=item B<horizontal, h>

Set the horizontal scrolling speed.

=item B<vertical, v>

Set the vertical scrolling speed.

=back




=head2 scdet


Detect video scene change.

This filter sets frame metadata with mafd between frame, the scene score, and
forward the frame to the next filter, so they can use these metadata to detect
scene change or others.

In addition, this filter logs a message and sets frame metadata when it detects
a scene change by B<threshold>.

C<lavfi.scd.mafd> metadata keys are set with mafd for every frame.

C<lavfi.scd.score> metadata keys are set with scene change score for every frame
to detect scene change.

C<lavfi.scd.time> metadata keys are set with current filtered frame time which
detect scene change with B<threshold>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold, t>

Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change. Good
values are in the C<[8.0, 14.0]> range. The range for B<threshold> is
C<[0., 100.]>.

Default value is C<10.>.


=item B<sc_pass, s>

Set the flag to pass scene change frames to the next filter. Default value is C<0>
You can enable it if you want to get snapshot of scene change frames only.

=back




=head2 selectivecolor


Adjust cyan, magenta, yellow and black (CMYK) to certain ranges of colors (such
as "reds", "yellows", "greens", "cyans", ...). The adjustment range is defined
by the "purity" of the color (that is, how saturated it already is).

This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop Selective Color tool.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<correction_method>

Select color correction method.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<absolute>

Specified adjustments are applied "as-is" (added/subtracted to original pixel
component value).

=item B<relative>

Specified adjustments are relative to the original component value.

=back

Default is C<absolute>.

=item B<reds>

Adjustments for red pixels (pixels where the red component is the maximum)

=item B<yellows>

Adjustments for yellow pixels (pixels where the blue component is the minimum)

=item B<greens>

Adjustments for green pixels (pixels where the green component is the maximum)

=item B<cyans>

Adjustments for cyan pixels (pixels where the red component is the minimum)

=item B<blues>

Adjustments for blue pixels (pixels where the blue component is the maximum)

=item B<magentas>

Adjustments for magenta pixels (pixels where the green component is the minimum)

=item B<whites>

Adjustments for white pixels (pixels where all components are greater than 128)

=item B<neutrals>

Adjustments for all pixels except pure black and pure white

=item B<blacks>

Adjustments for black pixels (pixels where all components are lesser than 128)

=item B<psfile>

Specify a Photoshop selective color file (C<.asv>) to import the settings from.

=back


All the adjustment settings (B<reds>, B<yellows>, ...) accept up to
4 space separated floating point adjustment values in the [-1,1] range,
respectively to adjust the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow and black for the
pixels of its range.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Increase cyan by 50% and reduce yellow by 33% in every green areas, and
increase magenta by 27% in blue areas:
	
	selectivecolor=greens=.5 0 -.33 0:blues=0 .27



=item *

Use a Photoshop selective color preset:
	
	selectivecolor=psfile=MySelectiveColorPresets/Misty.asv


=back




=head2 separatefields


The C<separatefields> takes a frame-based video input and splits
each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.

This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
If it gets it wrong use B<setfield> filter before C<separatefields> filter.


=head2 setdar, setsar


The C<setdar> filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
output video.

This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
Ratio, according to the following equation:
	
	<DAR> = <HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION> / <VERTICAL_RESOLUTION> * <SAR>


Keep in mind that the C<setdar> filter does not modify the pixel
dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
applied.

The C<setsar> filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
the filter output video.

Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
above.

Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the C<setsar>
filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<r, ratio, dar (C<setdar> only), sar (C<setsar> only)>

Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.

The parameter can be a floating point number string, or an expression. If the
parameter is not specified, the value "0" is assumed, meaning that the same
input value is used.


=item B<max>

Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
Default value is C<100>.


=back


The parameter I<sar> is an expression containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<w, h>

The input width and height.


=item B<a>

Same as I<w> / I<h>.


=item B<sar>

The input sample aspect ratio.


=item B<dar>

The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
(I<w> / I<h>) * I<sar>.


=item B<hsub, vsub>

Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
	
	setdar=dar=1.77777
	setdar=dar=16/9



=item *

To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
	
	setsar=sar=10/11



=item *

To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
	
	setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000



=back




=head2 setfield


Force field for the output video frame.

The C<setfield> filter marks the interlace type field for the
output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
following filters (e.g. C<fieldorder> or C<yadif>).

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<mode>

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same field property.


=item B<bff>

Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.


=item B<tff>

Mark the frame as top-field-first.


=item B<prog>

Mark the frame as progressive.

=back


=back




=head2 setparams


Force frame parameter for the output video frame.

The C<setparams> filter marks interlace and color range for the
output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
filters/encoders.


=over 4


=item B<field_mode>

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same field property (default).


=item B<bff>

Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.


=item B<tff>

Mark the frame as top-field-first.


=item B<prog>

Mark the frame as progressive.

=back



=item B<range>

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same color range property (default).


=item B<unspecified, unknown>

Mark the frame as unspecified color range.


=item B<limited, tv, mpeg>

Mark the frame as limited range.


=item B<full, pc, jpeg>

Mark the frame as full range.

=back



=item B<color_primaries>

Set the color primaries.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same color primaries property (default).


=item B<bt709>


=item B<unknown>


=item B<bt470m>


=item B<bt470bg>


=item B<smpte170m>


=item B<smpte240m>


=item B<film>


=item B<bt2020>


=item B<smpte428>


=item B<smpte431>


=item B<smpte432>


=item B<jedec-p22>


=back



=item B<color_trc>

Set the color transfer.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same color trc property (default).


=item B<bt709>


=item B<unknown>


=item B<bt470m>


=item B<bt470bg>


=item B<smpte170m>


=item B<smpte240m>


=item B<linear>


=item B<log100>


=item B<log316>


=item B<iec61966-2-4>


=item B<bt1361e>


=item B<iec61966-2-1>


=item B<bt2020-10>


=item B<bt2020-12>


=item B<smpte2084>


=item B<smpte428>


=item B<arib-std-b67>


=back



=item B<colorspace>

Set the colorspace.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same colorspace property (default).


=item B<gbr>


=item B<bt709>


=item B<unknown>


=item B<fcc>


=item B<bt470bg>


=item B<smpte170m>


=item B<smpte240m>


=item B<ycgco>


=item B<bt2020nc>


=item B<bt2020c>


=item B<smpte2085>


=item B<chroma-derived-nc>


=item B<chroma-derived-c>


=item B<ictcp>


=back



=item B<chroma_location>

Set the chroma sample location.
Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same chroma location (default).


=item B<unspecified, unknown>


=item B<left>


=item B<center>


=item B<topleft>


=item B<top>


=item B<bottomleft>


=item B<bottom>


=back


=back



=head2 sharpen_npp

Use the NVIDIA Performance Primitives (libnpp) to perform image sharpening with
border control.

The following additional options are accepted:

=over 4



=item B<border_type>

Type of sampling to be used ad frame borders. One of the following:

=over 4



=item B<replicate>

Replicate pixel values.


=back


=back



=head2 shear

Apply shear transform to input video.

This filter supports the following options:


=over 4


=item B<shx>

Shear factor in X-direction. Default value is 0.
Allowed range is from -2 to 2.


=item B<shy>

Shear factor in Y-direction. Default value is 0.
Allowed range is from -2 to 2.


=item B<fillcolor, c>

Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the transformed
video. For the general syntax of this option, check the
B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
If the special value "none" is selected then no
background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).

Default value is "black".


=item B<interp>

Set interpolation type. Can be C<bilinear> or C<nearest>. Default is C<bilinear>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 showinfo


Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
The input video is not modified.

This filter supports the following options:


=over 4


=item B<checksum>

Calculate checksums of each plane. By default enabled.


=item B<udu_sei_as_ascii>

Try to print user data unregistered SEI as ascii character when possible,
in hex format otherwise.

=back


The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
I<key>:I<value>.

The following values are shown in the output:


=over 4


=item B<n>

The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.


=item B<pts>

The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.


=item B<pts_time>

The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
seconds.


=item B<fmt>

The pixel format name.


=item B<sar>

The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
I<num>/I<den>.


=item B<s>

The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<i>

The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
for bottom field first).


=item B<iskey>

This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.


=item B<type>

The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
Also refer to the documentation of the C<AVPictureType> enum and of
the C<av_get_picture_type_char> function defined in
F<libavutil/avutil.h>.


=item B<checksum>

The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.


=item B<plane_checksum>

The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
expressed in the form "[I<c0> I<c1> I<c2> I<c3>]".


=item B<mean>

The mean value of pixels in each plane of the input frame, expressed in the form
"[I<mean0> I<mean1> I<mean2> I<mean3>]".


=item B<stdev>

The standard deviation of pixel values in each plane of the input frame, expressed
in the form "[I<stdev0> I<stdev1> I<stdev2> I<stdev3>]".


=back



=head2 showpalette


Displays the 256 colors palette of each frame. This filter is only relevant for
I<pal8> pixel format frames.

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<s>

Set the size of the box used to represent one palette color entry. Default is
C<30> (for a C<30x30> pixel box).

=back



=head2 shuffleframes


Reorder and/or duplicate and/or drop video frames.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mapping>

Set the destination indexes of input frames.
This is space or '|' separated list of indexes that maps input frames to output
frames. Number of indexes also sets maximal value that each index may have.
'-1' index have special meaning and that is to drop frame.

=back


The first frame has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Swap second and third frame of every three frames of the input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "shuffleframes=0 2 1" OUTPUT



=item *

Swap 10th and 1st frame of every ten frames of the input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "shuffleframes=9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 shufflepixels


Reorder pixels in video frames.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<direction, d>

Set shuffle direction. Can be forward or inverse direction.
Default direction is forward.


=item B<mode, m>

Set shuffle mode. Can be horizontal, vertical or block mode.


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Set shuffle block_size. In case of horizontal shuffle mode only width
part of size is used, and in case of vertical shuffle mode only height
part of size is used.


=item B<seed, s>

Set random seed used with shuffling pixels. Mainly useful to set to be able
to reverse filtering process to get original input.
For example, to reverse forward shuffle you need to use same parameters
and exact same seed and to set direction to inverse.

=back



=head2 shuffleplanes


Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<map0>

The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.


=item B<map1>

The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.


=item B<map2>

The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.


=item B<map3>

The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.


=back


The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Swap the second and third planes of the input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT


=back




=head2 signalstats

Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
with the digitization of analog video media.

By default the filter will log these metadata values:


=over 4


=item B<YMIN>

Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<YLOW>

Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<YAVG>

Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
[0-255].


=item B<YHIGH>

Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<YMAX>

Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<UMIN>

Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<ULOW>

Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<UAVG>

Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
[0-255].


=item B<UHIGH>

Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<UMAX>

Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<VMIN>

Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<VLOW>

Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<VAVG>

Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
[0-255].


=item B<VHIGH>

Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<VMAX>

Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
range of [0-255].


=item B<SATMIN>

Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].


=item B<SATLOW>

Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].


=item B<SATAVG>

Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
of [0-~181.02].


=item B<SATHIGH>

Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].


=item B<SATMAX>

Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].


=item B<HUEMED>

Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
[0-360].


=item B<HUEAVG>

Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
[0-360].


=item B<YDIF>

Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-255].


=item B<UDIF>

Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-255].


=item B<VDIF>

Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
Expressed in range of [0-255].


=item B<YBITDEPTH>

Display bit depth of Y plane in current frame.
Expressed in range of [0-16].


=item B<UBITDEPTH>

Display bit depth of U plane in current frame.
Expressed in range of [0-16].


=item B<VBITDEPTH>

Display bit depth of V plane in current frame.
Expressed in range of [0-16].

=back


The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<stat>


=item B<out>


B<stat> specify an additional form of image analysis.
B<out> output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.

Both options accept the following values:


=over 4


=item B<tout>

Identify I<temporal outliers> pixels. A I<temporal outlier> is a pixel
unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.


=item B<vrep>

Identify I<vertical line repetition>. Vertical line repetition includes
similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.


=item B<brng>

Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.

=back



=item B<color, c>

Set the highlight color for the B<out> option. The default color is
yellow.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Output data of various video metrics:
	
	ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats="stat=tout+vrep+brng" -show_frames



=item *

Output specific data about the minimum and maximum values of the Y plane per frame:
	
	ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats -show_entries frame_tags=lavfi.signalstats.YMAX,lavfi.signalstats.YMIN



=item *

Playback video while highlighting pixels that are outside of broadcast range in red.
	
	ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats="out=brng:color=red"



=item *

Playback video with signalstats metadata drawn over the frame.
	
	ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats=stat=brng+vrep+tout,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=signalstat_drawtext.txt


The contents of signalstat_drawtext.txt used in the command are:
	
	time %{pts:hms}
	Y (%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMIN}-%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMAX})
	U (%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMIN}-%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMAX})
	V (%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMIN}-%{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMAX})
	saturation maximum: %{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.SATMAX}
	


=back




=head2 signature


Calculates the MPEG-7 Video Signature. The filter can handle more than one
input. In this case the matching between the inputs can be calculated additionally.
The filter always passes through the first input. The signature of each stream can
be written into a file.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<detectmode>

Enable or disable the matching process.

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<off>

Disable the calculation of a matching (default).

=item B<full>

Calculate the matching for the whole video and output whether the whole video
matches or only parts.

=item B<fast>

Calculate only until a matching is found or the video ends. Should be faster in
some cases.

=back



=item B<nb_inputs>

Set the number of inputs. The option value must be a non negative integer.
Default value is 1.


=item B<filename>

Set the path to which the output is written. If there is more than one input,
the path must be a prototype, i.e. must contain %d or %0nd (where n is a positive
integer), that will be replaced with the input number. If no filename is
specified, no output will be written. This is the default.


=item B<format>

Choose the output format.

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<binary>

Use the specified binary representation (default).

=item B<xml>

Use the specified xml representation.

=back



=item B<th_d>

Set threshold to detect one word as similar. The option value must be an integer
greater than zero. The default value is 9000.


=item B<th_dc>

Set threshold to detect all words as similar. The option value must be an integer
greater than zero. The default value is 60000.


=item B<th_xh>

Set threshold to detect frames as similar. The option value must be an integer
greater than zero. The default value is 116.


=item B<th_di>

Set the minimum length of a sequence in frames to recognize it as matching
sequence. The option value must be a non negative integer value.
The default value is 0.


=item B<th_it>

Set the minimum relation, that matching frames to all frames must have.
The option value must be a double value between 0 and 1. The default value is 0.5.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

To calculate the signature of an input video and store it in signature.bin:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf signature=filename=signature.bin -map 0:v -f null -



=item *

To detect whether two videos match and store the signatures in XML format in
signature0.xml and signature1.xml:
	
	ffmpeg -i input1.mkv -i input2.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] signature=nb_inputs=2:detectmode=full:format=xml:filename=signature%d.xml" -map :v -f null -



=back




=head2 siti


Calculate Spatial Information (SI) and Temporal Information (TI) scores for a video,
as defined in ITU-T Rec. P.910 (11/21): Subjective video quality assessment methods
for multimedia applications. Available PDF at E<lt>B<https://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-P.910-202111-S/en>E<gt>.
Note that this is a legacy implementation that corresponds to a superseded recommendation.
Refer to ITU-T Rec. P.910 (07/22) for the latest version: E<lt>B<https://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-P.910-202207-I/en>E<gt>

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<print_summary>

If set to 1, Summary statistics will be printed to the console. Default 0.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

To calculate SI/TI metrics and print summary:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -vf siti=print_summary=1 -f null -


=back




=head2 smartblur


Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<luma_radius, lr>

Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.


=item B<luma_strength, ls>

Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.


=item B<luma_threshold, lt>

Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.


=item B<chroma_radius, cr>

Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is B<luma_radius>.


=item B<chroma_strength, cs>

Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is B<luma_strength>.


=item B<chroma_threshold, ct>

Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is B<luma_threshold>.


=item B<alpha_radius, ar>

Set the alpha radius. The option value must be a float number in
the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is B<luma_radius>.


=item B<alpha_strength, as>

Set the alpha strength. The option value must be a float number
in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is B<luma_strength>.


=item B<alpha_threshold, at>

Set the alpha threshold used as a coefficient to determine
whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is B<luma_threshold>.

=back


If a chroma or alpha option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
is set.


=head2 sobel

Apply sobel operator to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.



=head2 spp


Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
at several (or - in the case of B<quality> level C<6> - all) shifts
and average the results.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<quality>

Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
an integer in the range 0-6. If set to C<0>, the filter will have no
effect. A value of C<6> means the higher quality. For each increment of
that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2.  Default value is
C<3>.


=item B<qp>

Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
from the video stream (if available).


=item B<mode>

Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:


=over 4


=item B<hard>

Set hard thresholding (default).

=item B<soft>

Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).

=back



=item B<use_bframe_qp>

Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to C<1>. Using this
option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
C<0> (not enabled).

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<quality, level>

Set quality level. The value C<max> can be used to set the maximum level,
currently C<6>.

=back




=head2 sr


Scale the input by applying one of the super-resolution methods based on
convolutional neural networks. Supported models:


=over 4


=item *

Super-Resolution Convolutional Neural Network model (SRCNN).
See E<lt>B<https://arxiv.org/abs/1501.00092>E<gt>.


=item *

Efficient Sub-Pixel Convolutional Neural Network model (ESPCN).
See E<lt>B<https://arxiv.org/abs/1609.05158>E<gt>.

=back


Training scripts as well as scripts for model file (.pb) saving can be found at
E<lt>B<https://github.com/XueweiMeng/sr/tree/sr_dnn_native>E<gt>. Original repository
is at E<lt>B<https://github.com/HighVoltageRocknRoll/sr.git>E<gt>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dnn_backend>

Specify which DNN backend to use for model loading and execution. This option accepts
the following values:


=over 4


=item B<tensorflow>

TensorFlow backend. To enable this backend you
need to install the TensorFlow for C library (see
E<lt>B<https://www.tensorflow.org/install/lang_c>E<gt>) and configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libtensorflow>

=back



=item B<model>

Set path to model file specifying network architecture and its parameters.
Note that different backends use different file formats. TensorFlow, OpenVINO backend
can load files for only its format.


=item B<scale_factor>

Set scale factor for SRCNN model. Allowed values are C<2>, C<3> and C<4>.
Default value is C<2>. Scale factor is necessary for SRCNN model, because it accepts
input upscaled using bicubic upscaling with proper scale factor.

=back


To get full functionality (such as async execution), please use the B<dnn_processing> filter.


=head2 ssim


Obtain the SSIM (Structural SImilarity Metric) between two input videos.

This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
the SSIM.

Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.

The filter stores the calculated SSIM of each frame.

The description of the accepted parameters follows.


=over 4


=item B<stats_file, f>

If specified the filter will use the named file to save the SSIM of
each individual frame. When filename equals "-" the data is sent to
standard output.

=back


The file printed if I<stats_file> is selected, contains a sequence of
key/value pairs of the form I<key>:I<value> for each compared
couple of frames.

A description of each shown parameter follows:


=over 4


=item B<n>

sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1


=item B<Y, U, V, R, G, B>

SSIM of the compared frames for the component specified by the suffix.


=item B<All>

SSIM of the compared frames for the whole frame.


=item B<dB>

Same as above but in dB representation.

=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

For example:
	
	movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
	[main][ref] ssim="stats_file=stats.log" [out]


On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
reference file F<ref_movie.mpg>. The SSIM of each individual frame
is stored in F<stats.log>.


=item *

Another example with both psnr and ssim at same time:
	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi  "ssim;[0:v][1:v]psnr" -f null -



=item *

Another example with different containers:
	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mkv -lavfi  "[0:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[main];[1:v]settb=AVTB,setpts=PTS-STARTPTS[ref];[main][ref]ssim" -f null -


=back



=head2 stereo3d


Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.

The filters accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<in>

Set stereoscopic image format of input.

Available values for input image formats are:

=over 4


=item B<sbsl>

side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)


=item B<sbsr>

side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)


=item B<sbs2l>

side by side parallel with half width resolution
(left eye left, right eye right)


=item B<sbs2r>

side by side crosseye with half width resolution
(right eye left, left eye right)


=item B<abl>


=item B<tbl>

above-below (left eye above, right eye below)


=item B<abr>


=item B<tbr>

above-below (right eye above, left eye below)


=item B<ab2l>


=item B<tb2l>

above-below with half height resolution
(left eye above, right eye below)


=item B<ab2r>


=item B<tb2r>

above-below with half height resolution
(right eye above, left eye below)


=item B<al>

alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)


=item B<ar>

alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)


=item B<irl>

interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)


=item B<irr>

interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)


=item B<icl>

interleaved columns, left eye first


=item B<icr>

interleaved columns, right eye first

Default value is B<sbsl>.

=back



=item B<out>

Set stereoscopic image format of output.


=over 4


=item B<sbsl>

side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)


=item B<sbsr>

side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)


=item B<sbs2l>

side by side parallel with half width resolution
(left eye left, right eye right)


=item B<sbs2r>

side by side crosseye with half width resolution
(right eye left, left eye right)


=item B<abl>


=item B<tbl>

above-below (left eye above, right eye below)


=item B<abr>


=item B<tbr>

above-below (right eye above, left eye below)


=item B<ab2l>


=item B<tb2l>

above-below with half height resolution
(left eye above, right eye below)


=item B<ab2r>


=item B<tb2r>

above-below with half height resolution
(right eye above, left eye below)


=item B<al>

alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)


=item B<ar>

alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)


=item B<irl>

interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)


=item B<irr>

interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)


=item B<arbg>

anaglyph red/blue gray
(red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)


=item B<argg>

anaglyph red/green gray
(red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)


=item B<arcg>

anaglyph red/cyan gray
(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)


=item B<arch>

anaglyph red/cyan half colored
(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)


=item B<arcc>

anaglyph red/cyan color
(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)


=item B<arcd>

anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)


=item B<agmg>

anaglyph green/magenta gray
(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)


=item B<agmh>

anaglyph green/magenta half colored
(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)


=item B<agmc>

anaglyph green/magenta colored
(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)


=item B<agmd>

anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)


=item B<aybg>

anaglyph yellow/blue gray
(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)


=item B<aybh>

anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)


=item B<aybc>

anaglyph yellow/blue colored
(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)


=item B<aybd>

anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)


=item B<ml>

mono output (left eye only)


=item B<mr>

mono output (right eye only)


=item B<chl>

checkerboard, left eye first


=item B<chr>

checkerboard, right eye first


=item B<icl>

interleaved columns, left eye first


=item B<icr>

interleaved columns, right eye first


=item B<hdmi>

HDMI frame pack

=back


Default value is B<arcd>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
	
	stereo3d=sbsl:aybd



=item *

Convert input video from above below (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
	
	stereo3d=abl:sbsr


=back



=head2 streamselect, astreamselect

Select video or audio streams.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

Set number of inputs. Default is 2.


=item B<map>

Set input indexes to remap to outputs.

=back



=head3 Commands


The C<streamselect> and C<astreamselect> filter supports the following
commands:


=over 4


=item B<map>

Set input indexes to remap to outputs.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Select first 5 seconds 1st stream and rest of time 2nd stream:
	
	sendcmd='5.0 streamselect map 1',streamselect=inputs=2:map=0



=item *

Same as above, but for audio:
	
	asendcmd='5.0 astreamselect map 1',astreamselect=inputs=2:map=0


=back




=head2 subtitles


Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libass>. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
Alpha) subtitles format.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<filename, f>

Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.


=item B<original_size>

Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic, this is necessary to
correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been changed.


=item B<fontsdir>

Set a directory path containing fonts that can be used by the filter.
These fonts will be used in addition to whatever the font provider uses.


=item B<alpha>

Process alpha channel, by default alpha channel is untouched.


=item B<charenc>

Set subtitles input character encoding. C<subtitles> filter only. Only
useful if not UTF-8.


=item B<stream_index, si>

Set subtitles stream index. C<subtitles> filter only.


=item B<force_style>

Override default style or script info parameters of the subtitles. It accepts a
string containing ASS style format C<KEY=VALUE> couples separated by ",".


=item B<wrap_unicode>

Break lines according to the Unicode Line Breaking Algorithm. Availability requires
at least libass release 0.17.0 (or LIBASS_VERSION 0x01600010), I<and> libass must
have been built with libunibreak.

The option is enabled by default except for native ASS.

=back


If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
specifies the B<filename>.

For example, to render the file F<sub.srt> on top of the input
video, use the command:
	
	subtitles=sub.srt


which is equivalent to:
	
	subtitles=filename=sub.srt


To render the default subtitles stream from file F<video.mkv>, use:
	
	subtitles=video.mkv


To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
	
	subtitles=video.mkv:si=1


To make the subtitles stream from F<sub.srt> appear in 80% transparent blue
C<DejaVu Serif>, use:
	
	subtitles=sub.srt:force_style='Fontname=DejaVu Serif,PrimaryColour=&HCCFF0000'



=head2 super2xsai


Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.

Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.


=head2 swaprect


Swap two rectangular objects in video.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<w>

Set object width.


=item B<h>

Set object height.


=item B<x1>

Set 1st rect x coordinate.


=item B<y1>

Set 1st rect y coordinate.


=item B<x2>

Set 2nd rect x coordinate.


=item B<y2>

Set 2nd rect y coordinate.

All expressions are evaluated once for each frame.

=back


The all options are expressions containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The input width and height.


=item B<a>

same as I<w> / I<h>


=item B<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<w> / I<h>) * I<sar>


=item B<n>

The number of the input frame, starting from 0.


=item B<t>

The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.


=item B<pos>

the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown; deprecated,
do not use

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 swapuv

Swap U & V plane.


=head2 tblend

Blend successive video frames.

See B<blend>


=head2 telecine


Apply telecine process to the video.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<first_field>


=over 4


=item B<top, t>

top field first

=item B<bottom, b>

bottom field first
The default value is C<top>.

=back



=item B<pattern>

A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
The default value is C<23>.

=back


	
	Some typical patterns:
	
	NTSC output (30i):
	27.5p: 32222
	24p: 23 (classic)
	24p: 2332 (preferred)
	20p: 33
	18p: 334
	16p: 3444
	
	PAL output (25i):
	27.5p: 12222
	24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
	16.67p: 33
	16p: 33333334



=head2 thistogram


Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video across time.

Unlike B<histogram> video filter which only shows histogram of single input frame
at certain time, this filter shows also past histograms of number of frames defined
by C<width> option.

The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
distribution in an image.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<width, w>

Set width of single color component output. Default value is C<0>.
Value of C<0> means width will be picked from input video.
This also set number of passed histograms to keep.
Allowed range is [0, 8192].


=item B<display_mode, d>

Set display mode.
It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<stack>

Per color component graphs are placed below each other.


=item B<parade>

Per color component graphs are placed side by side.


=item B<overlay>

Presents information identical to that in the C<parade>, except
that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
over one another.

=back

Default is C<stack>.


=item B<levels_mode, m>

Set mode. Can be either C<linear>, or C<logarithmic>.
Default is C<linear>.


=item B<components, c>

Set what color components to display.
Default is C<7>.


=item B<bgopacity, b>

Set background opacity. Default is C<0.9>.


=item B<envelope, e>

Show envelope. Default is disabled.


=item B<ecolor, ec>

Set envelope color. Default is C<gold>.


=item B<slide>

Set slide mode.

Available values for slide is:

=over 4


=item B<frame>

Draw new frame when right border is reached.


=item B<replace>

Replace old columns with new ones.


=item B<scroll>

Scroll from right to left.


=item B<rscroll>

Scroll from left to right.


=item B<picture>

Draw single picture.

=back


Default is C<replace>.

=back



=head2 threshold


Apply threshold effect to video stream.

This filter needs four video streams to perform thresholding.
First stream is stream we are filtering.
Second stream is holding threshold values, third stream is holding min values,
and last, fourth stream is holding max values.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

=back


For example if first stream pixel's component value is less then threshold value
of pixel component from 2nd threshold stream, third stream value will picked,
otherwise fourth stream pixel component value will be picked.

Using color source filter one can perform various types of thresholding:


=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Binary threshold, using gray color as threshold:
	
	ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -f lavfi -i color=black -f lavfi -i color=white -lavfi threshold output.avi



=item *

Inverted binary threshold, using gray color as threshold:
	
	ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -f lavfi -i color=white -f lavfi -i color=black -lavfi threshold output.avi



=item *

Truncate binary threshold, using gray color as threshold:
	
	ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -lavfi threshold output.avi



=item *

Threshold to zero, using gray color as threshold:
	
	ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -f lavfi -i color=white -i 320x240.avi -lavfi threshold output.avi



=item *

Inverted threshold to zero, using gray color as threshold:
	
	ffmpeg -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=gray -i 320x240.avi -f lavfi -i color=white -lavfi threshold output.avi


=back



=head2 thumbnail

Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<n>

Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of I<n> frames, the filter
will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of I<n> frames until
the end. Default is C<100>.


=item B<log>

Set the log level to display picked frame stats.
Default is C<info>.

=back


Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger I<n>
value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Extract one picture each 50 frames:
	
	thumbnail=50



=item *

Complete example of a thumbnail creation with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png


=back




=head2 tile


Tile several successive frames together.

The B<untile> filter can do the reverse.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<layout>

Set the grid size in the form C<COLUMNSxROWS>. Range is up to UINT_MAX cells.
Default is C<6x5>.


=item B<nb_frames>

Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
than or equal to I<w>xI<h>. The default value is C<0>, meaning all
the area will be used.


=item B<margin>

Set the outer border margin in pixels. Range is 0 to 1024. Default is C<0>.


=item B<padding>

Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
refer to the pad video filter. Range is 0 to 1024. Default is C<0>.


=item B<color>

Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
The default value of I<color> is "black".


=item B<overlap>

Set the number of frames to overlap when tiling several successive frames together.
The value must be between C<0> and I<nb_frames - 1>. Default is C<0>.


=item B<init_padding>

Set the number of frames to initially be empty before displaying first output frame.
This controls how soon will one get first output frame.
The value must be between C<0> and I<nb_frames - 1>. Default is C<0>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (B<-skip_frame nokey>) in a movie:
	
	ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png

The B<-vsync 0> is necessary to prevent B<ffmpeg> from
duplicating each output frame to accommodate the originally detected frame
rate.


=item *

Display C<5> pictures in an area of C<3x2> frames,
with C<7> pixels between them, and C<2> pixels of initial margin, using
mixed flat and named options:
	
	tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2


=back



=head2 tiltandshift

Apply tilt-and-shift effect.

What happens when you invert time and space?

Normally a video is composed of several frames that represent a different
instant of time and shows a scene that evolves in the space captured by the
frame. This filter is the antipode of that concept, taking inspiration from
tilt and shift photography.

A filtered frame contains the whole timeline of events composing the sequence,
and this is obtained by placing a slice of pixels from each frame into a single
one. However, since there are no infinite-width frames, this is done up the
width of the input frame, and a video is recomposed by shifting away one
column for each subsequent frame. In order to map space to time, the filter
tilts each input frame as well, so that motion is preserved. This is accomplished
by progressively selecting a different column from each input frame.

The end result is a sort of inverted parallax, so that far away objects move
much faster that the ones in the front. The ideal conditions for this video
effect are when there is either very little motion and the backgroud is static,
or when there is a lot of motion and a very wide depth of field (e.g. wide
panorama, while moving on a train).

The filter accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<tilt>

Tilt video while shifting (default). When unset, video will be sliding a
static image, composed of the first column of each frame.


=item B<start>

What to do at the start of filtering (see below).


=item B<end>

What to do at the end of filtering (see below).


=item B<hold>

How many columns should pass through before start of filtering.


=item B<pad>

How many columns should be inserted before end of filtering.


=back


Normally the filter shifts and tilts from the very first frame, and stops when
the last one is received. However, before filtering starts, normal video may
be preseved, so that the effect is slowly shifted in its place. Similarly,
the last video frame may be reconstructed at the end. Alternatively it is
possible to just start and end with black.


=over 4


=item B<none>

Filtering starts immediately and ends when the last frame is received.


=item B<frame>

The first frames or the very last frame are kept intact during processing.


=item B<black>

Black is padded at the beginning or at the end of filtering.


=back



=head2 tinterlace


Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.

Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
considered odd.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<mode>

Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<merge, 0>

Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	
	Output:
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444



=item B<drop_even, 1>

Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
unchanged height at half frame rate.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	
	Output:
	11111                           33333
	11111                           33333
	11111                           33333
	11111                           33333



=item B<drop_odd, 2>

Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
unchanged height at half frame rate.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	
	Output:
	                22222                           44444
	                22222                           44444
	                22222                           44444
	                22222                           44444



=item B<pad, 3>

Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	
	Output:
	11111           .....           33333           .....
	.....           22222           .....           44444
	11111           .....           33333           .....
	.....           22222           .....           44444
	11111           .....           33333           .....
	.....           22222           .....           44444
	11111           .....           33333           .....
	.....           22222           .....           44444




=item B<interleave_top, 4>

Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
	11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
	11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
	11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
	
	Output:
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444




=item B<interleave_bottom, 5>

Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
	11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
	11111           22222<-         33333           44444<-
	11111<-         22222           33333<-         44444
	
	Output:
	22222                           44444
	11111                           33333
	22222                           44444
	11111                           33333




=item B<interlacex2, 6>

Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
field synchronisation.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	 11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	 11111           22222           33333           44444
	
	Output:
	11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444   44444
	 11111   11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444
	11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444   44444
	 11111   11111   22222   22222   33333   33333   44444




=item B<mergex2, 7>

Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
generating a double height frame at same frame rate.

	
	 ------> time
	Input:
	Frame 1         Frame 2         Frame 3         Frame 4
	
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	11111           22222           33333           44444
	
	Output:
	11111           33333           33333           55555
	22222           22222           44444           44444
	11111           33333           33333           55555
	22222           22222           44444           44444
	11111           33333           33333           55555
	22222           22222           44444           44444
	11111           33333           33333           55555
	22222           22222           44444           44444



=back


Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
compatibility reasons.

Default mode is C<merge>.


=item B<flags>

Specify flags influencing the filter process.

Available value for I<flags> is:


=over 4


=item B<low_pass_filter, vlpf>

Enable linear vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
patterning.


=item B<complex_filter, cvlpf>

Enable complex vertical low-pass filtering.
This will slightly less reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
patterning but better retain detail and subjective sharpness impression.


=item B<bypass_il>

Bypass already interlaced frames, only adjust the frame rate.

=back


Vertical low-pass filtering and bypassing already interlaced frames can only be
enabled for B<mode> I<interleave_top> and I<interleave_bottom>.


=back



=head2 tmedian

Pick median pixels from several successive input video frames.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<radius>

Set radius of median filter.
Default is 1. Allowed range is from 1 to 127.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<15>, by which all planes are processed.


=item B<percentile>

Set median percentile. Default value is C<0.5>.
Default value of C<0.5> will pick always median values, while C<0> will pick
minimum values, and C<1> maximum values.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports all above options as B<commands>, excluding option C<radius>.


=head2 tmidequalizer


Apply Temporal Midway Video Equalization effect.

Midway Video Equalization adjusts a sequence of video frames to have the same
histograms, while maintaining their dynamics as much as possible. It's
useful for e.g. matching exposures from a video frames sequence.

This filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<radius>

Set filtering radius. Default is C<5>. Allowed range is from 1 to 127.


=item B<sigma>

Set filtering sigma. Default is C<0.5>. This controls strength of filtering.
Setting this option to 0 effectively does nothing.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process. Default is C<15>, which is all available planes.

=back



=head2 tmix


Mix successive video frames.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<frames>

The number of successive frames to mix. If unspecified, it defaults to 3.


=item B<weights>

Specify weight of each input video frame.
Each weight is separated by space. If number of weights is smaller than
number of I<frames> last specified weight will be used for all remaining
unset weights.


=item B<scale>

Specify scale, if it is set it will be multiplied with sum
of each weight multiplied with pixel values to give final destination
pixel value. By default I<scale> is auto scaled to sum of weights.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default is all. Allowed range is from 0 to 15.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Average 7 successive frames:
	
	tmix=frames=7:weights="1 1 1 1 1 1 1"



=item *

Apply simple temporal convolution:
	
	tmix=frames=3:weights="-1 3 -1"



=item *

Similar as above but only showing temporal differences:
	
	tmix=frames=3:weights="-1 2 -1":scale=1


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<weights>


=item B<scale>


=item B<planes>

Syntax is same as option with same name.

=back




=head2 tonemap

Tone map colors from different dynamic ranges.

This filter expects data in single precision floating point, as it needs to
operate on (and can output) out-of-range values. Another filter, such as
B<zscale>, is needed to convert the resulting frame to a usable format.

The tonemapping algorithms implemented only work on linear light, so input
data should be linearized beforehand (and possibly correctly tagged).

	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf zscale=transfer=linear,tonemap=clip,zscale=transfer=bt709,format=yuv420p OUTPUT



=head3 Options

The filter accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<tonemap>

Set the tone map algorithm to use.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<none>

Do not apply any tone map, only desaturate overbright pixels.


=item I<clip>

Hard-clip any out-of-range values. Use it for perfect color accuracy for
in-range values, while distorting out-of-range values.


=item I<linear>

Stretch the entire reference gamut to a linear multiple of the display.


=item I<gamma>

Fit a logarithmic transfer between the tone curves.


=item I<reinhard>

Preserve overall image brightness with a simple curve, using nonlinear
contrast, which results in flattening details and degrading color accuracy.


=item I<hable>

Preserve both dark and bright details better than I<reinhard>, at the cost
of slightly darkening everything. Use it when detail preservation is more
important than color and brightness accuracy.


=item I<mobius>

Smoothly map out-of-range values, while retaining contrast and colors for
in-range material as much as possible. Use it when color accuracy is more
important than detail preservation.

=back


Default is none.


=item B<param>

Tune the tone mapping algorithm.

This affects the following algorithms:

=over 4


=item I<none>

Ignored.


=item I<linear>

Specifies the scale factor to use while stretching.
Default to 1.0.


=item I<gamma>

Specifies the exponent of the function.
Default to 1.8.


=item I<clip>

Specify an extra linear coefficient to multiply into the signal before clipping.
Default to 1.0.


=item I<reinhard>

Specify the local contrast coefficient at the display peak.
Default to 0.5, which means that in-gamut values will be about half as bright
as when clipping.


=item I<hable>

Ignored.


=item I<mobius>

Specify the transition point from linear to mobius transform. Every value
below this point is guaranteed to be mapped 1:1. The higher the value, the
more accurate the result will be, at the cost of losing bright details.
Default to 0.3, which due to the steep initial slope still preserves in-range
colors fairly accurately.

=back



=item B<desat>

Apply desaturation for highlights that exceed this level of brightness. The
higher the parameter, the more color information will be preserved. This
setting helps prevent unnaturally blown-out colors for super-highlights, by
(smoothly) turning into white instead. This makes images feel more natural,
at the cost of reducing information about out-of-range colors.

The default of 2.0 is somewhat conservative and will mostly just apply to
skies or directly sunlit surfaces. A setting of 0.0 disables this option.

This option works only if the input frame has a supported color tag.


=item B<peak>

Override signal/nominal/reference peak with this value. Useful when the
embedded peak information in display metadata is not reliable or when tone
mapping from a lower range to a higher range.

=back



=head2 tpad


Temporarily pad video frames.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<start>

Specify number of delay frames before input video stream. Default is 0.


=item B<stop>

Specify number of padding frames after input video stream.
Set to -1 to pad indefinitely. Default is 0.


=item B<start_mode>

Set kind of frames added to beginning of stream.
Can be either I<add> or I<clone>.
With I<add> frames of solid-color are added.
With I<clone> frames are clones of first frame.
Default is I<add>.


=item B<stop_mode>

Set kind of frames added to end of stream.
Can be either I<add> or I<clone>.
With I<add> frames of solid-color are added.
With I<clone> frames are clones of last frame.
Default is I<add>.


=item B<start_duration, stop_duration>

Specify the duration of the start/stop delay. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.
These options override I<start> and I<stop>. Default is 0.


=item B<color>

Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>.

The default value of I<color> is "black".

=back




=head2 transpose


Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<dir>

Specify the transposition direction.

Can assume the following values:

=over 4


=item B<0, 4, cclock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
	
	L.R     L.l
	. . ->  . .
	l.r     R.r



=item B<1, 5, clock>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
	
	L.R     l.L
	. . ->  . .
	l.r     r.R



=item B<2, 6, cclock>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
	
	L.R     R.r
	. . ->  . .
	l.r     L.l



=item B<3, 7, clock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
	
	L.R     r.R
	. . ->  . .
	l.r     l.L


=back


For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
deprecated, the C<passthrough> option should be used instead.

Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
symbolic constants.


=item B<passthrough>

Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Always apply transposition.

=item B<portrait>

Preserve portrait geometry (when I<height> E<gt>= I<width>).

=item B<landscape>

Preserve landscape geometry (when I<width> E<gt>= I<height>).

=back


Default value is C<none>.

=back


For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
layout:
	
	transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait


The command above can also be specified as:
	
	transpose=1:portrait



=head2 transpose_npp


Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
For more in depth examples see the B<transpose> video filter, which shares mostly the same options.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<dir>

Specify the transposition direction.

Can assume the following values:

=over 4


=item B<cclock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip. (default)


=item B<clock>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.


=item B<cclock>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.


=item B<clock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip.

=back



=item B<passthrough>

Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Always apply transposition. (default)

=item B<portrait>

Preserve portrait geometry (when I<height> E<gt>= I<width>).

=item B<landscape>

Preserve landscape geometry (when I<width> E<gt>= I<height>).

=back



=back



=head2 trim

Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.

It accepts the following parameters:

=over 4


=item B<start>

Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
timestamp I<start> will be the first frame in the output.


=item B<end>

Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
immediately preceding the one with the timestamp I<end> will be the last
frame in the output.


=item B<start_pts>

This is the same as I<start>, except this option sets the start timestamp
in timebase units instead of seconds.


=item B<end_pts>

This is the same as I<end>, except this option sets the end timestamp
in timebase units instead of seconds.


=item B<duration>

The maximum duration of the output in seconds.


=item B<start_frame>

The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.


=item B<end_frame>

The number of the first frame that should be dropped.

=back


B<start>, B<end>, and B<duration> are expressed as time
duration specifications; see
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the B<duration>
option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
setpts filter after the trim filter.

If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
filters.

The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.

Examples:

=over 4


=item *

Drop everything except the second minute of input:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120



=item *

Keep only the first second:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1



=back



=head2 unpremultiply

Apply alpha unpremultiply effect to input video stream using first plane
of second stream as alpha.

Both streams must have same dimensions and same pixel format.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes will be processed, unprocessed planes will be copied.
By default value 0xf, all planes will be processed.

If the format has 1 or 2 components, then luma is bit 0.
If the format has 3 or 4 components:
for RGB formats bit 0 is green, bit 1 is blue and bit 2 is red;
for YUV formats bit 0 is luma, bit 1 is chroma-U and bit 2 is chroma-V.
If present, the alpha channel is always the last bit.


=item B<inplace>

Do not require 2nd input for processing, instead use alpha plane from input stream.

=back




=head2 unsharp


Sharpen or blur the input video.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<luma_msize_x, lx>

Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
3 and 23. The default value is 5.


=item B<luma_msize_y, ly>

Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
and 23. The default value is 5.


=item B<luma_amount, la>

Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.

Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.

Default value is 1.0.


=item B<chroma_msize_x, cx>

Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
between 3 and 23. The default value is 5.


=item B<chroma_msize_y, cy>

Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
between 3 and 23. The default value is 5.


=item B<chroma_amount, ca>

Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.

Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.

Default value is 0.0.


=item B<alpha_msize_x, ax>

Set the alpha matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
between 3 and 23. The default value is 5.


=item B<alpha_msize_y, ay>

Set the alpha matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
between 3 and 23. The default value is 5.


=item B<alpha_amount, aa>

Set the alpha effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.

Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.

Default value is 0.0.


=back


All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
	
	unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5



=item *

Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
	
	unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2


=back




=head2 untile


Decompose a video made of tiled images into the individual images.

The frame rate of the output video is the frame rate of the input video
multiplied by the number of tiles.

This filter does the reverse of B<tile>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<layout>

Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Produce a 1-second video from a still image file made of 25 frames stacked
vertically, like an analogic film reel:
	
	ffmpeg -r 1 -i image.jpg -vf untile=1x25 movie.mkv


=back



=head2 uspp


Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
the image at several (or - in the case of B<quality> level C<8> - all)
shifts and average the results.

The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
DCT similar to MJPEG.

This filter is not available in ffmpeg versions between 5.0 and 6.0.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<quality>

Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
an integer in the range 0-8. If set to C<0>, the filter will have no
effect. A value of C<8> means the higher quality. For each increment of
that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2.  Default value is
C<3>.


=item B<qp>

Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
from the video stream (if available).


=item B<codec>

Use specified codec instead of snow.

=back



=head2 v360


Convert 360 videos between various formats.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<input>


=item B<output>

Set format of the input/output video.

Available formats:


=over 4



=item B<e>


=item B<equirect>

Equirectangular projection.


=item B<c3x2>


=item B<c6x1>


=item B<c1x6>

Cubemap with 3x2/6x1/1x6 layout.

Format specific options:


=over 4


=item B<in_pad>


=item B<out_pad>

Set padding proportion for the input/output cubemap. Values in decimals.

Example values:

=over 4


=item B<0>

No padding.

=item B<0.01>

1% of face is padding. For example, with 1920x1280 resolution face size would be 640x640 and padding would be 3 pixels from each side. (640 * 0.01 = 6 pixels)

=back


Default value is B<@samp{0>}.
Maximum value is B<@samp{0.1>}.


=item B<fin_pad>


=item B<fout_pad>

Set fixed padding for the input/output cubemap. Values in pixels.

Default value is B<@samp{0>}. If greater than zero it overrides other padding options.


=item B<in_forder>


=item B<out_forder>

Set order of faces for the input/output cubemap. Choose one direction for each position.

Designation of directions:

=over 4


=item B<r>

right

=item B<l>

left

=item B<u>

up

=item B<d>

down

=item B<f>

forward

=item B<b>

back

=back


Default value is B<@samp{rludfb>}.


=item B<in_frot>


=item B<out_frot>

Set rotation of faces for the input/output cubemap. Choose one angle for each position.

Designation of angles:

=over 4


=item B<0>

0 degrees clockwise

=item B<1>

90 degrees clockwise

=item B<2>

180 degrees clockwise

=item B<3>

270 degrees clockwise

=back


Default value is B<@samp{000000>}.

=back



=item B<eac>

Equi-Angular Cubemap.


=item B<flat>


=item B<gnomonic>


=item B<rectilinear>

Regular video.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<dfisheye>

Dual fisheye.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<barrel>


=item B<fb>


=item B<barrelsplit>

Facebook's 360 formats.


=item B<sg>

Stereographic format.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<mercator>

Mercator format.


=item B<ball>

Ball format, gives significant distortion toward the back.


=item B<hammer>

Hammer-Aitoff map projection format.


=item B<sinusoidal>

Sinusoidal map projection format.


=item B<fisheye>

Fisheye projection.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<pannini>

Pannini projection.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>

Set output pannini parameter.


=item B<ih_fov>

Set input pannini parameter.

=back



=item B<cylindrical>

Cylindrical projection.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<perspective>

Perspective projection. I<(output only)>

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<v_fov>

Set perspective parameter.

=back



=item B<tetrahedron>

Tetrahedron projection.


=item B<tsp>

Truncated square pyramid projection.


=item B<he>


=item B<hequirect>

Half equirectangular projection.


=item B<equisolid>

Equisolid format.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<og>

Orthographic format.

Format specific options:

=over 4


=item B<h_fov>


=item B<v_fov>


=item B<d_fov>

Set output horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.


=item B<ih_fov>


=item B<iv_fov>


=item B<id_fov>

Set input horizontal/vertical/diagonal field of view. Values in degrees.

If diagonal field of view is set it overrides horizontal and vertical field of view.

=back



=item B<octahedron>

Octahedron projection.


=item B<cylindricalea>

Cylindrical Equal Area projection.

=back



=item B<interp>

Set interpolation method.I<Note: more complex interpolation methods require much more memory to run.>

Available methods:


=over 4


=item B<near>


=item B<nearest>

Nearest neighbour.

=item B<line>


=item B<linear>

Bilinear interpolation.

=item B<lagrange9>

Lagrange9 interpolation.

=item B<cube>


=item B<cubic>

Bicubic interpolation.

=item B<lanc>


=item B<lanczos>

Lanczos interpolation.

=item B<sp16>


=item B<spline16>

Spline16 interpolation.

=item B<gauss>


=item B<gaussian>

Gaussian interpolation.

=item B<mitchell>

Mitchell interpolation.

=back


Default value is B<@samp{line>}.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Set the output video resolution.

Default resolution depends on formats.


=item B<in_stereo>


=item B<out_stereo>

Set the input/output stereo format.


=over 4


=item B<2d>

2D mono

=item B<sbs>

Side by side

=item B<tb>

Top bottom

=back


Default value is B<@samp{2d>} for input and output format.


=item B<yaw>


=item B<pitch>


=item B<roll>

Set rotation for the output video. Values in degrees.


=item B<rorder>

Set rotation order for the output video. Choose one item for each position.


=over 4


=item B<y, Y>

yaw

=item B<p, P>

pitch

=item B<r, R>

roll

=back


Default value is B<@samp{ypr>}.


=item B<h_flip>


=item B<v_flip>


=item B<d_flip>

Flip the output video horizontally(swaps left-right)/vertically(swaps up-down)/in-depth(swaps back-forward). Boolean values.


=item B<ih_flip>


=item B<iv_flip>

Set if input video is flipped horizontally/vertically. Boolean values.


=item B<in_trans>

Set if input video is transposed. Boolean value, by default disabled.


=item B<out_trans>

Set if output video needs to be transposed. Boolean value, by default disabled.


=item B<h_offset>


=item B<v_offset>

Set output horizontal/vertical off-axis offset. Default is set to 0.
Allowed range is from -1 to 1.


=item B<alpha_mask>

Build mask in alpha plane for all unmapped pixels by marking them fully transparent. Boolean value, by default disabled.


=item B<reset_rot>

Reset rotation of output video. Boolean value, by default disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Convert equirectangular video to cubemap with 3x2 layout and 1% padding using bicubic interpolation:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf v360=e:c3x2:cubic:out_pad=0.01 output.mkv


=item *

Extract back view of Equi-Angular Cubemap:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.mkv -vf v360=eac:flat:yaw=180 output.mkv


=item *

Convert transposed and horizontally flipped Equi-Angular Cubemap in side-by-side stereo format to equirectangular top-bottom stereo format:
	
	v360=eac:equirect:in_stereo=sbs:in_trans=1:ih_flip=1:out_stereo=tb


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports subset of above options as B<commands>.


=head2 vaguedenoiser


Apply a wavelet based denoiser.

It transforms each frame from the video input into the wavelet domain,
using Cohen-Daubechies-Feauveau 9/7. Then it applies some filtering to
the obtained coefficients. It does an inverse wavelet transform after.
Due to wavelet properties, it should give a nice smoothed result, and
reduced noise, without blurring picture features.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold>

The filtering strength. The higher, the more filtered the video will be.
Hard thresholding can use a higher threshold than soft thresholding
before the video looks overfiltered. Default value is 2.


=item B<method>

The filtering method the filter will use.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<hard>

All values under the threshold will be zeroed.


=item B<soft>

All values under the threshold will be zeroed. All values above will be
reduced by the threshold.


=item B<garrote>

Scales or nullifies coefficients - intermediary between (more) soft and
(less) hard thresholding.

=back


Default is garrote.


=item B<nsteps>

Number of times, the wavelet will decompose the picture. Picture can't
be decomposed beyond a particular point (typically, 8 for a 640x480
frame - as 2^9 = 512 E<gt> 480). Valid values are integers between 1 and 32. Default value is 6.


=item B<percent>

Partial of full denoising (limited coefficients shrinking), from 0 to 100. Default value is 85.


=item B<planes>

A list of the planes to process. By default all planes are processed.


=item B<type>

The threshold type the filter will use.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<universal>

Threshold used is same for all decompositions.


=item B<bayes>

Threshold used depends also on each decomposition coefficients.

=back


Default is universal.

=back



=head2 varblur

Apply variable blur filter by using 2nd video stream to set blur radius.
The 2nd stream must have the same dimensions.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<min_r>

Set min allowed radius. Allowed range is from 0 to 254. Default is 0.

=item B<max_r>

Set max allowed radius. Allowed range is from 1 to 255. Default is 8.

=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process. By default, all are used.

=back


The C<varblur> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head3 Commands


This filter supports all the above options as B<commands>.


=head2 vectorscope


Display 2 color component values in the two dimensional graph (which is called
a vectorscope).

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<mode, m>

Set vectorscope mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<gray>


=item B<tint>

Gray values are displayed on graph, higher brightness means more pixels have
same component color value on location in graph. This is the default mode.


=item B<color>

Gray values are displayed on graph. Surrounding pixels values which are not
present in video frame are drawn in gradient of 2 color components which are
set by option C<x> and C<y>. The 3rd color component is static.


=item B<color2>

Actual color components values present in video frame are displayed on graph.


=item B<color3>

Similar as color2 but higher frequency of same values C<x> and C<y>
on graph increases value of another color component, which is luminance by
default values of C<x> and C<y>.


=item B<color4>

Actual colors present in video frame are displayed on graph. If two different
colors map to same position on graph then color with higher value of component
not present in graph is picked.


=item B<color5>

Gray values are displayed on graph. Similar to C<color> but with 3rd color
component picked from radial gradient.

=back



=item B<x>

Set which color component will be represented on X-axis. Default is C<1>.


=item B<y>

Set which color component will be represented on Y-axis. Default is C<2>.


=item B<intensity, i>

Set intensity, used by modes: gray, color, color3 and color5 for increasing brightness
of color component which represents frequency of (X, Y) location in graph.


=item B<envelope, e>


=over 4


=item B<none>

No envelope, this is default.


=item B<instant>

Instant envelope, even darkest single pixel will be clearly highlighted.


=item B<peak>

Hold maximum and minimum values presented in graph over time. This way you
can still spot out of range values without constantly looking at vectorscope.


=item B<peak+instant>

Peak and instant envelope combined together.

=back



=item B<graticule, g>

Set what kind of graticule to draw.

=over 4


=item B<none>


=item B<green>


=item B<color>


=item B<invert>


=back



=item B<opacity, o>

Set graticule opacity.


=item B<flags, f>

Set graticule flags.


=over 4


=item B<white>

Draw graticule for white point.


=item B<black>

Draw graticule for black point.


=item B<name>

Draw color points short names.

=back



=item B<bgopacity, b>

Set background opacity.


=item B<lthreshold, l>

Set low threshold for color component not represented on X or Y axis.
Values lower than this value will be ignored. Default is 0.
Note this value is multiplied with actual max possible value one pixel component
can have. So for 8-bit input and low threshold value of 0.1 actual threshold
is 0.1 * 255 = 25.


=item B<hthreshold, h>

Set high threshold for color component not represented on X or Y axis.
Values higher than this value will be ignored. Default is 1.
Note this value is multiplied with actual max possible value one pixel component
can have. So for 8-bit input and high threshold value of 0.9 actual threshold
is 0.9 * 255 = 230.


=item B<colorspace, c>

Set what kind of colorspace to use when drawing graticule.

=over 4


=item B<auto>


=item B<601>


=item B<709>


=back

Default is auto.


=item B<tint0, t0>


=item B<tint1, t1>

Set color tint for gray/tint vectorscope mode. By default both options are zero.
This means no tint, and output will remain gray.

=back




=head2 vidstabdetect


Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
B<vidstabtransform> for pass 2.

This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
the B<vidstabtransform> filter.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libvidstab>.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<result>

Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
Default value is F<transforms.trf>.


=item B<shakiness>

Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.


=item B<accuracy>

Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
accuracy. Default value is 15.


=item B<stepsize>

Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.


=item B<mincontrast>

Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
value is 0.3.


=item B<tripod>

Set reference frame number for tripod mode.

If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
the camera view absolutely still.

If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.


=item B<show>

Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
visualization.


=item B<fileformat>

Format for the transforms data file to be written.
Acceptable values are


=over 4


=item B<ascii>

Human-readable plain text


=item B<binary>

Binary format, roughly 40% smaller than C<ascii>. (I<default>)

=back



=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use default values:
	
	vidstabdetect



=item *

Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
F<mytransforms.trf>:
	
	vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"



=item *

Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
video:
	
	vidstabdetect=show=1



=item *

Analyze a video with medium shakiness using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi


=back




=head2 vidstabtransform


Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
see B<vidstabdetect> for pass 1.

Read a file with transform information for each frame and
apply/compensate them. Together with the B<vidstabdetect>
filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
E<lt>B<http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab>E<gt>. It is important to also use
the B<unsharp> filter, see below.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libvidstab>.


=head3 Options



=over 4


=item B<input>

Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
F<transforms.trf>.


=item B<smoothing>

Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
camera movements. Default value is 10.

For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
camera is simulated.


=item B<optalgo>

Set the camera path optimization algorithm.

Accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<gauss>

gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)

=item B<avg>

averaging on transformations

=back



=item B<maxshift>

Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
meaning no limit.


=item B<maxangle>

Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
value is -1, meaning no limit.


=item B<crop>

Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
compensation.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<keep>

keep image information from previous frame (default)

=item B<black>

fill the border black

=back



=item B<invert>

Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.


=item B<relative>

Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.


=item B<zoom>

Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
zoom).


=item B<optzoom>

Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.

Accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<0>

disabled

=item B<1>

optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
will lead to visible borders) (default)

=item B<2>

optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
visible), see B<zoomspeed>

=back


Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.


=item B<zoomspeed>

Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
B<optzoom> is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
0.25.


=item B<interpol>

Specify type of interpolation.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<no>

no interpolation

=item B<linear>

linear only horizontal

=item B<bilinear>

linear in both directions (default)

=item B<bicubic>

cubic in both directions (slow)

=back



=item B<tripod>

Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
C<relative=0:smoothing=0>. Default value is 0.

Use also C<tripod> option of B<vidstabdetect>.


=item B<debug>

Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
are written to the temporary file F<global_motions.trf>. Default
value is 0.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Use B<ffmpeg> for a typical stabilization with default values:
	
	ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg


Note the use of the B<unsharp> filter which is always recommended.


=item *

Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
	
	vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"



=item *

Smoothen the video even more:
	
	vidstabtransform=smoothing=30


=back



=head2 vflip


Flip the input video vertically.

For example, to vertically flip a video with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi



=head2 vfrdet


Detect variable frame rate video.

This filter tries to detect if the input is variable or constant frame rate.

At end it will output number of frames detected as having variable delta pts,
and ones with constant delta pts.
If there was frames with variable delta, than it will also show min, max and
average delta encountered.


=head2 vibrance


Boost or alter saturation.

The filter accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<intensity>

Set strength of boost if positive value or strength of alter if negative value.
Default is 0. Allowed range is from -2 to 2.


=item B<rbal>

Set the red balance. Default is 1. Allowed range is from -10 to 10.


=item B<gbal>

Set the green balance. Default is 1. Allowed range is from -10 to 10.


=item B<bbal>

Set the blue balance. Default is 1. Allowed range is from -10 to 10.


=item B<rlum>

Set the red luma coefficient.


=item B<glum>

Set the green luma coefficient.


=item B<blum>

Set the blue luma coefficient.


=item B<alternate>

If C<intensity> is negative and this is set to 1, colors will change,
otherwise colors will be less saturated, more towards gray.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 vif


Obtain the average VIF (Visual Information Fidelity) between two input videos.

This filter takes two input videos.

Both input videos must have the same resolution and pixel format for
this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.

The obtained average VIF score is printed through the logging system.

The filter stores the calculated VIF score of each frame.

This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

In the below example the input file F<main.mpg> being processed is compared
with the reference file F<ref.mpg>.

	
	ffmpeg -i main.mpg -i ref.mpg -lavfi vif -f null -




=head2 vignette


Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<angle, a>

Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.

The value is clipped in the C<[0,PI/2]> range.

Default value: C<"PI/5">


=item B<x0>


=item B<y0>

Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively C<"w/2"> and C<"h/2">
by default.


=item B<mode>

Set forward/backward mode.

Available modes are:

=over 4


=item B<forward>

The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.


=item B<backward>

The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
detection to extract the lens B<angle> and other settings (yet). It can
also be used to create a burning effect.

=back


Default value is B<forward>.


=item B<eval>

Set evaluation mode for the expressions (B<angle>, B<x0>, B<y0>).

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<init>

Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.


=item B<frame>

Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
B<init> mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
allows advanced dynamic expressions.

=back


Default value is B<init>.


=item B<dither>

Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is C<1>
(enabled).


=item B<aspect>

Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
following the dimensions of the video.

Default is C<1/1>.

=back



=head3 Expressions


The B<alpha>, B<x0> and B<y0> expressions can contain the
following parameters.


=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

input width and height


=item B<n>

the number of input frame, starting from 0


=item B<pts>

the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
I<TB> units, NAN if undefined


=item B<r>

frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown


=item B<t>

the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined


=item B<tb>

time base of the input video

=back




=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
	
	vignette=PI/4



=item *

Make a flickering vignetting:
	
	vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame



=back



=head2 vmafmotion


Obtain the average VMAF motion score of a video.
It is one of the component metrics of VMAF.

The obtained average motion score is printed through the logging system.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<stats_file>

If specified, the filter will use the named file to save the motion score of
each frame with respect to the previous frame.
When filename equals "-" the data is sent to standard output.

=back


Example:
	
	ffmpeg -i ref.mpg -vf vmafmotion -f null -




=head2 vstack

Stack input videos vertically.

All streams must be of same pixel format and of same width.

Note that this filter is faster than using B<overlay> and B<pad> filter
to create same output.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

Set number of input streams. Default is 2.


=item B<shortest>

If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
terminates. Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 w3fdif


Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
Deinterlacing Filter").

Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.

This filter uses field-dominance information in frame to decide which
of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
If it gets it wrong use B<setfield> filter before C<w3fdif> filter.

There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple"
and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
be set by passing an optional parameter:


=over 4


=item B<filter>

Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<simple>

Simple filter coefficient set.

=item B<complex>

More-complex filter coefficient set.

=back

Default value is B<complex>.


=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<field>

Output one frame for each field.

=back


The default value is C<field>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<all>

Deinterlace all frames,

=item B<interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


Default value is B<all>.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 waveform

Video waveform monitor.

The waveform monitor plots color component intensity. By default luma
only. Each column of the waveform corresponds to a column of pixels in the
source video.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<mode, m>

Can be either C<row>, or C<column>. Default is C<column>.
In row mode, the graph on the left side represents color component value 0 and
the right side represents value = 255. In column mode, the top side represents
color component value = 0 and bottom side represents value = 255.


=item B<intensity, i>

Set intensity. Smaller values are useful to find out how many values of the same
luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
Default value is C<0.04>. Allowed range is [0, 1].


=item B<mirror, r>

Set mirroring mode. C<0> means unmirrored, C<1> means mirrored.
In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
side for C<row> mode and at the top for C<column> mode. Default is
C<1> (mirrored).


=item B<display, d>

Set display mode.
It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<overlay>

Presents information identical to that in the C<parade>, except
that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
over one another.

This display mode makes it easier to spot relative differences or similarities
in overlapping areas of the color components that are supposed to be identical,
such as neutral whites, grays, or blacks.


=item B<stack>

Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
C<row> mode or one below the other in C<column> mode.


=item B<parade>

Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
C<column> mode or one below the other in C<row> mode.

Using this display mode makes it easy to spot color casts in the highlights
and shadows of an image, by comparing the contours of the top and the bottom
graphs of each waveform. Since whites, grays, and blacks are characterized
by exactly equal amounts of red, green, and blue, neutral areas of the picture
should display three waveforms of roughly equal width/height. If not, the
correction is easy to perform by making level adjustments the three waveforms.

=back

Default is C<stack>.


=item B<components, c>

Set which color components to display. Default is 1, which means only luma
or red color component if input is in RGB colorspace. If is set for example to
7 it will display all 3 (if) available color components.


=item B<envelope, e>


=over 4


=item B<none>

No envelope, this is default.


=item B<instant>

Instant envelope, minimum and maximum values presented in graph will be easily
visible even with small C<step> value.


=item B<peak>

Hold minimum and maximum values presented in graph across time. This way you
can still spot out of range values without constantly looking at waveforms.


=item B<peak+instant>

Peak and instant envelope combined together.

=back



=item B<filter, f>


=over 4


=item B<lowpass>

No filtering, this is default.


=item B<flat>

Luma and chroma combined together.


=item B<aflat>

Similar as above, but shows difference between blue and red chroma.


=item B<xflat>

Similar as above, but use different colors.


=item B<yflat>

Similar as above, but again with different colors.


=item B<chroma>

Displays only chroma.


=item B<color>

Displays actual color value on waveform.


=item B<acolor>

Similar as above, but with luma showing frequency of chroma values.

=back



=item B<graticule, g>

Set which graticule to display.


=over 4


=item B<none>

Do not display graticule.


=item B<green>

Display green graticule showing legal broadcast ranges.


=item B<orange>

Display orange graticule showing legal broadcast ranges.


=item B<invert>

Display invert graticule showing legal broadcast ranges.

=back



=item B<opacity, o>

Set graticule opacity.


=item B<flags, fl>

Set graticule flags.


=over 4


=item B<numbers>

Draw numbers above lines. By default enabled.


=item B<dots>

Draw dots instead of lines.

=back



=item B<scale, s>

Set scale used for displaying graticule.


=over 4


=item B<digital>


=item B<millivolts>


=item B<ire>


=back

Default is digital.


=item B<bgopacity, b>

Set background opacity.


=item B<tint0, t0>


=item B<tint1, t1>

Set tint for output.
Only used with lowpass filter and when display is not overlay and input
pixel formats are not RGB.


=item B<fitmode, fm>

Set sample aspect ratio of video output frames.
Can be used to configure waveform so it is not
streched too much in one of directions.


=over 4


=item B<none>

Set sample aspect ration to 1/1.

=item B<size>

Set sample aspect ratio to match input size of video

=back

Default is B<none>.


=item B<input>

Set input formats for filter to pick from.
Can be B<all>, for selecting from all available formats,
or B<first>, for selecting first available format.
Default is B<first>.

=back



=head2 weave, doubleweave


The C<weave> takes a field-based video input and join
each two sequential fields into single frame, producing a new double
height clip with half the frame rate and half the frame count.

The C<doubleweave> works same as C<weave> but without
halving frame rate and frame count.

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<first_field>

Set first field. Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<top, t>

Set the frame as top-field-first.


=item B<bottom, b>

Set the frame as bottom-field-first.

=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Interlace video using B<select> and B<separatefields> filter:
	
	separatefields,select=eq(mod(n,4),0)+eq(mod(n,4),3),weave


=back



=head2 xbr

Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
E<lt>B<https://forums.libretro.com/t/xbr-algorithm-tutorial/123>E<gt>.

It accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<n>

Set the scaling dimension: C<2> for C<2xBR>, C<3> for
C<3xBR> and C<4> for C<4xBR>.
Default is C<3>.

=back



=head2 xcorrelate

Apply normalized cross-correlation between first and second input video stream.

Second input video stream dimensions must be lower than first input video stream.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to process.


=item B<secondary>

Set which secondary video frames will be processed from second input video stream,
can be I<first> or I<all>. Default is I<all>.

=back


The C<xcorrelate> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head2 xfade


Apply cross fade from one input video stream to another input video stream.
The cross fade is applied for specified duration.

Both inputs must be constant frame-rate and have the same resolution, pixel format,
frame rate and timebase.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<transition>

Set one of available transition effects:


=over 4


=item B<custom>


=item B<fade>


=item B<wipeleft>


=item B<wiperight>


=item B<wipeup>


=item B<wipedown>


=item B<slideleft>


=item B<slideright>


=item B<slideup>


=item B<slidedown>


=item B<circlecrop>


=item B<rectcrop>


=item B<distance>


=item B<fadeblack>


=item B<fadewhite>


=item B<radial>


=item B<smoothleft>


=item B<smoothright>


=item B<smoothup>


=item B<smoothdown>


=item B<circleopen>


=item B<circleclose>


=item B<vertopen>


=item B<vertclose>


=item B<horzopen>


=item B<horzclose>


=item B<dissolve>


=item B<pixelize>


=item B<diagtl>


=item B<diagtr>


=item B<diagbl>


=item B<diagbr>


=item B<hlslice>


=item B<hrslice>


=item B<vuslice>


=item B<vdslice>


=item B<hblur>


=item B<fadegrays>


=item B<wipetl>


=item B<wipetr>


=item B<wipebl>


=item B<wipebr>


=item B<squeezeh>


=item B<squeezev>


=item B<zoomin>


=item B<fadefast>


=item B<fadeslow>


=item B<hlwind>


=item B<hrwind>


=item B<vuwind>


=item B<vdwind>


=item B<coverleft>


=item B<coverright>


=item B<coverup>


=item B<coverdown>


=item B<revealleft>


=item B<revealright>


=item B<revealup>


=item B<revealdown>


=back

Default transition effect is fade.


=item B<duration>

Set cross fade duration in seconds.
Range is 0 to 60 seconds.
Default duration is 1 second.


=item B<offset>

Set cross fade start relative to first input stream in seconds.
Default offset is 0.


=item B<expr>

Set expression for custom transition effect.

The expressions can use the following variables and functions:


=over 4


=item B<X>


=item B<Y>

The coordinates of the current sample.


=item B<W>


=item B<H>

The width and height of the image.


=item B<P>

Progress of transition effect.


=item B<PLANE>

Currently processed plane.


=item B<A>

Return value of first input at current location and plane.


=item B<B>

Return value of second input at current location and plane.


=item B<a0(x, y)>


=item B<a1(x, y)>


=item B<a2(x, y)>


=item B<a3(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the
first/second/third/fourth component of first input.


=item B<b0(x, y)>


=item B<b1(x, y)>


=item B<b2(x, y)>


=item B<b3(x, y)>

Return the value of the pixel at location (I<x>,I<y>) of the
first/second/third/fourth component of second input.

=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Cross fade from one input video to another input video, with fade transition and duration of transition
of 2 seconds starting at offset of 5 seconds:
	
	ffmpeg -i first.mp4 -i second.mp4 -filter_complex xfade=transition=fade:duration=2:offset=5 output.mp4


=back



=head2 xmedian

Pick median pixels from several input videos.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

Set number of inputs.
Default is 3. Allowed range is from 3 to 255.
If number of inputs is even number, than result will be mean value between two median values.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<15>, by which all planes are processed.


=item B<percentile>

Set median percentile. Default value is C<0.5>.
Default value of C<0.5> will pick always median values, while C<0> will pick
minimum values, and C<1> maximum values.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports all above options as B<commands>, excluding option C<inputs>.



=head2 xpsnr


Obtain the average (across all input frames) and minimum (across all color plane averages)
eXtended Perceptually weighted peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio (XPSNR) between two input videos.

The XPSNR is a low-complexity psychovisually motivated distortion measurement algorithm for
assessing the difference between two video streams or images. This is especially useful for
objectively quantifying the distortions caused by video and image codecs, as an alternative
to a formal subjective test. The logarithmic XPSNR output values are in a similar range as
those of traditional B<psnr> assessments but better reflect human impressions of visual
coding quality. More details on the XPSNR measure, which essentially represents a blockwise
weighted variant of the PSNR measure, can be found in the following freely available papers:


=over 4


=item *

C. R. Helmrich, M. Siekmann, S. Becker, S. Bosse, D. Marpe, and T. Wiegand, "XPSNR: A
Low-Complexity Extension of the Perceptually Weighted Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio for
High-Resolution Video Quality Assessment," in Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoustics, Speech,
Sig. Process. (ICASSP), virt./online, May 2020. E<lt>B<www.ecodis.de/xpsnr.htm>E<gt>


=item *

C. R. Helmrich, S. Bosse, H. Schwarz, D. Marpe, and T. Wiegand, "A Study of the
Extended Perceptually Weighted Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio (XPSNR) for Video Compression
with Different Resolutions and Bit Depths," ITU Journal: ICT Discoveries, vol. 3, no.
1, pp. 65 - 72, May 2020. E<lt>B<http://handle.itu.int/11.1002/pub/8153d78b-en>E<gt>

=back


When publishing the results of XPSNR assessments obtained using, e.g., this FFmpeg filter, a
reference to the above papers as a means of documentation is strongly encouraged. The filter
requires two input videos. The first input is considered a (usually not distorted) reference
source and is passed unchanged to the output, whereas the second input is a (distorted) test
signal. Except for the bit depth, these two video inputs must have the same pixel format. In
addition, for best performance, both compared input videos should be in YCbCr color format.

The obtained overall XPSNR values mentioned above are printed through the logging system. In
case of input with multiple color planes, we suggest reporting of the minimum XPSNR average.

The following parameter, which behaves like the one for the B<psnr> filter, is accepted:


=over 4


=item B<stats_file, f>

If specified, the filter will use the named file to save the XPSNR value of each individual
frame and color plane. When the file name equals "-", that data is sent to standard output.

=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.


=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

XPSNR analysis of two 1080p HD videos, ref_source.yuv and test_video.yuv, both at 24 frames
per second, with color format 4:2:0, bit depth 8, and output of a logfile named "xpsnr.log":
	
	ffmpeg -s 1920x1080 -framerate 24 -pix_fmt yuv420p -i ref_source.yuv -s 1920x1080 -framerate
	24 -pix_fmt yuv420p -i test_video.yuv -lavfi xpsnr="stats_file=xpsnr.log" -f null -



=item *

XPSNR analysis of two 2160p UHD videos, ref_source.yuv with bit depth 8 and test_video.yuv
with bit depth 10, both at 60 frames per second with color format 4:2:0, no logfile output:
	
	ffmpeg -s 3840x2160 -framerate 60 -pix_fmt yuv420p -i ref_source.yuv -s 3840x2160 -framerate
	60 -pix_fmt yuv420p10le -i test_video.yuv -lavfi xpsnr="stats_file=-" -f null -


=back




=head2 xstack

Stack video inputs into custom layout.

All streams must be of same pixel format.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

Set number of input streams. Default is 2.


=item B<layout>

Specify layout of inputs.
This option requires the desired layout configuration to be explicitly set by the user.
This sets position of each video input in output. Each input
is separated by '|'.
The first number represents the column, and the second number represents the row.
Numbers start at 0 and are separated by '_'. Optionally one can use wX and hX,
where X is video input from which to take width or height.
Multiple values can be used when separated by '+'. In such
case values are summed together.

Note that if inputs are of different sizes gaps may appear, as not all of
the output video frame will be filled. Similarly, videos can overlap each
other if their position doesn't leave enough space for the full frame of
adjoining videos.

For 2 inputs, a default layout of C<0_0|w0_0> (equivalent to
C<grid=2x1>) is set. In all other cases, a layout or a grid must be set by
the user. Either C<grid> or C<layout> can be specified at a time.
Specifying both will result in an error.


=item B<grid>

Specify a fixed size grid of inputs.
This option is used to create a fixed size grid of the input streams. Set the
grid size in the form C<COLUMNSxROWS>. There must be C<ROWS * COLUMNS>
input streams and they will be arranged as a grid with C<ROWS> rows and
C<COLUMNS> columns. When using this option, each input stream within a row
must have the same height and all the rows must have the same width.

If C<grid> is set, then C<inputs> option is ignored and is implicitly
set to C<ROWS * COLUMNS>.

For 2 inputs, a default grid of C<2x1> (equivalent to
C<layout=0_0|w0_0>) is set. In all other cases, a layout or a grid must be
set by the user. Either C<grid> or C<layout> can be specified at a time.
Specifying both will result in an error.


=item B<shortest>

If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
terminates. Default value is 0.


=item B<fill>

If set to valid color, all unused pixels will be filled with that color.
By default fill is set to none, so it is disabled.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Display 4 inputs into 2x2 grid.

Layout:
	
	input1(0, 0)  | input3(w0, 0)
	input2(0, h0) | input4(w0, h0)


	
	xstack=inputs=4:layout=0_0|0_h0|w0_0|w0_h0


Note that if inputs are of different sizes, gaps or overlaps may occur.


=item *

Display 4 inputs into 1x4 grid.

Layout:
	
	input1(0, 0)
	input2(0, h0)
	input3(0, h0+h1)
	input4(0, h0+h1+h2)


	
	xstack=inputs=4:layout=0_0|0_h0|0_h0+h1|0_h0+h1+h2


Note that if inputs are of different widths, unused space will appear.


=item *

Display 9 inputs into 3x3 grid.

Layout:
	
	input1(0, 0)       | input4(w0, 0)      | input7(w0+w3, 0)
	input2(0, h0)      | input5(w0, h0)     | input8(w0+w3, h0)
	input3(0, h0+h1)   | input6(w0, h0+h1)  | input9(w0+w3, h0+h1)


	
	xstack=inputs=9:layout=0_0|0_h0|0_h0+h1|w0_0|w0_h0|w0_h0+h1|w0+w3_0|w0+w3_h0|w0+w3_h0+h1


Note that if inputs are of different sizes, gaps or overlaps may occur.


=item *

Display 16 inputs into 4x4 grid.

Layout:
	
	input1(0, 0)       | input5(w0, 0)       | input9 (w0+w4, 0)       | input13(w0+w4+w8, 0)
	input2(0, h0)      | input6(w0, h0)      | input10(w0+w4, h0)      | input14(w0+w4+w8, h0)
	input3(0, h0+h1)   | input7(w0, h0+h1)   | input11(w0+w4, h0+h1)   | input15(w0+w4+w8, h0+h1)
	input4(0, h0+h1+h2)| input8(w0, h0+h1+h2)| input12(w0+w4, h0+h1+h2)| input16(w0+w4+w8, h0+h1+h2)


	
	xstack=inputs=16:layout=0_0|0_h0|0_h0+h1|0_h0+h1+h2|w0_0|w0_h0|w0_h0+h1|w0_h0+h1+h2|w0+w4_0|
	w0+w4_h0|w0+w4_h0+h1|w0+w4_h0+h1+h2|w0+w4+w8_0|w0+w4+w8_h0|w0+w4+w8_h0+h1|w0+w4+w8_h0+h1+h2


Note that if inputs are of different sizes, gaps or overlaps may occur.


=back




=head2 yadif


Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
filter").

It accepts the following parameters:



=over 4



=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, send_frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<1, send_field>

Output one frame for each field.

=item B<2, send_frame_nospatial>

Like C<send_frame>, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

=item B<3, send_field_nospatial>

Like C<send_field>, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

=back


The default value is C<send_frame>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<1, bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<-1, auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following
values:


=over 4


=item B<0, all>

Deinterlace all frames.

=item B<1, interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


The default value is C<all>.

=back



=head2 yadif_cuda


Deinterlace the input video using the B<yadif> algorithm, but implemented
in CUDA so that it can work as part of a GPU accelerated pipeline with nvdec
and/or nvenc.

It accepts the following parameters:



=over 4



=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, send_frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<1, send_field>

Output one frame for each field.

=item B<2, send_frame_nospatial>

Like C<send_frame>, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

=item B<3, send_field_nospatial>

Like C<send_field>, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.

=back


The default value is C<send_frame>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<1, bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<-1, auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following
values:


=over 4


=item B<0, all>

Deinterlace all frames.

=item B<1, interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


The default value is C<all>.

=back



=head2 yaepblur


Apply blur filter while preserving edges ("yaepblur" means "yet another edge preserving blur filter").
The algorithm is described in
"J. S. Lee, Digital image enhancement and noise filtering by use of local statistics, IEEE Trans. Pattern Anal. Mach. Intell. PAMI-2, 1980."

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<radius, r>

Set the window radius. Default value is 3.


=item B<planes, p>

Set which planes to filter. Default is only the first plane.


=item B<sigma, s>

Set blur strength. Default value is 128.

=back



=head3 Commands

This filter supports same B<commands> as options.


=head2 zoompan


Apply Zoom & Pan effect.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<zoom, z>

Set the zoom expression. Range is 1-10. Default is 1.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.


=item B<d>

Set the duration expression in number of frames.
This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
single input image. Default is 90.


=item B<s>

Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.


=item B<fps>

Set the output frame rate, default is '25'.

=back


Each expression can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<in_w, iw>

Input width.


=item B<in_h, ih>

Input height.


=item B<out_w, ow>

Output width.


=item B<out_h, oh>

Output height.


=item B<in>

Input frame count.


=item B<on>

Output frame count.


=item B<in_time, it>

The input timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.


=item B<out_time, time, ot>

The output timestamp expressed in seconds.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression
for current input frame.


=item B<px>


=item B<py>

'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
not yet such frame (first input frame).


=item B<zoom>

Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.


=item B<pzoom>

Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.


=item B<duration>

Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression
for each input frame.


=item B<pduration>

number of output frames created for previous input frame


=item B<a>

Rational number: input width / input height


=item B<sar>

sample aspect ratio


=item B<dar>

display aspect ratio


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Zoom in up to 1.5x and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
	
	zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360



=item *

Zoom in up to 1.5x and pan always at center of picture:
	
	zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='iw/2-(iw/zoom/2)':y='ih/2-(ih/zoom/2)'



=item *

Same as above but without pausing:
	
	zoompan=z='min(max(zoom,pzoom)+0.0015,1.5)':d=1:x='iw/2-(iw/zoom/2)':y='ih/2-(ih/zoom/2)'



=item *

Zoom in 2x into center of picture only for the first second of the input video:
	
	zoompan=z='if(between(in_time,0,1),2,1)':d=1:x='iw/2-(iw/zoom/2)':y='ih/2-(ih/zoom/2)'



=back




=head2 zscale

Scale (resize) the input video, using the z.lib library:
E<lt>B<https://github.com/sekrit-twc/zimg>E<gt>. To enable compilation of this
filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libzimg>.

The zscale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
as the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.

If the input image format is different from the format requested by
the next filter, the zscale filter will convert the input to the
requested format.


=head3 Options

The filter accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
dimension.

If the I<width> or I<w> value is 0, the input width is used for
the output. If the I<height> or I<h> value is 0, the input height
is used for the output.

If one and only one of the values is -n with n E<gt>= 1, the zscale filter
will use a value that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image,
calculated from the other specified dimension. After that it will,
however, make sure that the calculated dimension is divisible by n and
adjust the value if necessary.

If both values are -n with n E<gt>= 1, the behavior will be identical to
both values being set to 0 as previously detailed.

See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
expression.


=item B<size, s>

Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<dither, d>

Set the dither type.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<none>


=item I<ordered>


=item I<random>


=item I<error_diffusion>


=back


Default is none.


=item B<filter, f>

Set the resize filter type.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<point>


=item I<bilinear>


=item I<bicubic>


=item I<spline16>


=item I<spline36>


=item I<lanczos>


=back


Default is bilinear.


=item B<range, r>

Set the color range.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<limited>


=item I<full>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<primaries, p>

Set the color primaries.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<709>


=item I<unspecified>


=item I<170m>


=item I<240m>


=item I<2020>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<transfer, t>

Set the transfer characteristics.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<709>


=item I<unspecified>


=item I<601>


=item I<linear>


=item I<2020_10>


=item I<2020_12>


=item I<smpte2084>


=item I<iec61966-2-1>


=item I<arib-std-b67>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<matrix, m>

Set the colorspace matrix.

Possible value are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<709>


=item I<unspecified>


=item I<470bg>


=item I<170m>


=item I<2020_ncl>


=item I<2020_cl>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<rangein, rin>

Set the input color range.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<limited>


=item I<full>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<primariesin, pin>

Set the input color primaries.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<709>


=item I<unspecified>


=item I<170m>


=item I<240m>


=item I<2020>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<transferin, tin>

Set the input transfer characteristics.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<709>


=item I<unspecified>


=item I<601>


=item I<linear>


=item I<2020_10>


=item I<2020_12>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<matrixin, min>

Set the input colorspace matrix.

Possible value are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<709>


=item I<unspecified>


=item I<470bg>


=item I<170m>


=item I<2020_ncl>


=item I<2020_cl>


=back



=item B<chromal, c>

Set the output chroma location.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<left>


=item I<center>


=item I<topleft>


=item I<top>


=item I<bottomleft>


=item I<bottom>


=back



=item B<chromalin, cin>

Set the input chroma location.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<input>


=item I<left>


=item I<center>


=item I<topleft>


=item I<top>


=item I<bottomleft>


=item I<bottom>


=back



=item B<npl>

Set the nominal peak luminance.


=item B<param_a>

Parameter A for scaling filters. Parameter "b" for bicubic, and the number of
filter taps for lanczos.


=item B<param_b>

Parameter B for scaling filters. Parameter "c" for bicubic.

=back


The values of the B<w> and B<h> options are expressions
containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item I<in_w>


=item I<in_h>

The input width and height


=item I<iw>


=item I<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item I<out_w>


=item I<out_h>

The output (scaled) width and height


=item I<ow>


=item I<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>


=item I<a>

The same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item I<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item I<dar>

The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from C<(iw / ih) * sar>.


=item I<hsub>


=item I<vsub>

horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.


=item I<ohsub>


=item I<ovsub>

horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
pixel format "yuv422p" I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.

=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Set the output video dimension expression.
The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.

If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
value.

=back




=head1 OPENCL VIDEO FILTERS


Below is a description of the currently available OpenCL video filters.

To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-opencl>.

Running OpenCL filters requires you to initialize a hardware device and to pass that device to all filters in any filter graph.

=over 4



=item B<-init_hw_device opencl[=>I<name>B<][:>I<device>B<[,>I<key=value>B<...]]>

Initialise a new hardware device of type I<opencl> called I<name>, using the
given device parameters.


=item B<-filter_hw_device> I<name>

Pass the hardware device called I<name> to all filters in any filter graph.


=back


For more detailed information see E<lt>B<https://www.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html#Advanced-Video-options>E<gt>


=over 4


=item *

Example of choosing the first device on the second platform and running avgblur_opencl filter with default parameters on it.
	
	-init_hw_device opencl=gpu:1.0 -filter_hw_device gpu -i INPUT -vf "hwupload, avgblur_opencl, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back


Since OpenCL filters are not able to access frame data in normal memory, all frame data needs to be uploaded(B<hwupload>) to hardware surfaces connected to the appropriate device before being used and then downloaded(B<hwdownload>) back to normal memory. Note that B<hwupload> will upload to a surface with the same layout as the software frame, so it may be necessary to add a B<format> filter immediately before to get the input into the right format and B<hwdownload> does not support all formats on the output - it may be necessary to insert an additional B<format> filter immediately following in the graph to get the output in a supported format.


=head2 avgblur_opencl


Apply average blur filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sizeX>

Set horizontal radius size.
Range is C<[1, 1024]> and default value is C<1>.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<0xf>, by which all planes are processed.


=item B<sizeY>

Set vertical radius size. Range is C<[1, 1024]> and default value is C<0>. If zero, C<sizeX> value will be used.

=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Apply average blur filter with horizontal and vertical size of 3, setting each pixel of the output to the average value of the 7x7 region centered on it in the input. For pixels on the edges of the image, the region does not extend beyond the image boundaries, and so out-of-range coordinates are not used in the calculations.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, avgblur_opencl=3, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 boxblur_opencl


Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<luma_radius, lr>


=item B<luma_power, lp>


=item B<chroma_radius, cr>


=item B<chroma_power, cp>


=item B<alpha_radius, ar>


=item B<alpha_power, ap>



=back


A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<luma_radius, lr>


=item B<chroma_radius, cr>


=item B<alpha_radius, ar>

Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
corresponding input plane.

The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
greater than the value of the expression C<min(w,h)/2> for the
luma and alpha planes, and of C<min(cw,ch)/2> for the chroma
planes.

Default value for B<luma_radius> is "2". If not specified,
B<chroma_radius> and B<alpha_radius> default to the
corresponding value set for B<luma_radius>.

The expressions can contain the following constants:

=over 4


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The input width and height in pixels.


=item B<cw>


=item B<ch>

The input chroma image width and height in pixels.


=item B<hsub>


=item B<vsub>

The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
pixel format "yuv422p", I<hsub> is 2 and I<vsub> is 1.

=back



=item B<luma_power, lp>


=item B<chroma_power, cp>


=item B<alpha_power, ap>

Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
corresponding plane.

Default value for B<luma_power> is 2. If not specified,
B<chroma_power> and B<alpha_power> default to the
corresponding value set for B<luma_power>.

A value of 0 will disable the effect.

=back



=head3 Examples


Apply boxblur filter, setting each pixel of the output to the average value of box-radiuses I<luma_radius>, I<chroma_radius>, I<alpha_radius> for each plane respectively. The filter will apply I<luma_power>, I<chroma_power>, I<alpha_power> times onto the corresponding plane. For pixels on the edges of the image, the radius does not extend beyond the image boundaries, and so out-of-range coordinates are not used in the calculations.


=over 4


=item *

Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radius
set to 2 and luma, chroma, and alpha power set to 3. The filter will run 3 times with box-radius set to 2 for every plane of the image.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, boxblur_opencl=luma_radius=2:luma_power=3, hwdownload" OUTPUT
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, boxblur_opencl=2:3, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply a boxblur filter with luma radius set to 2, luma_power to 1, chroma_radius to 4, chroma_power to 5, alpha_radius to 3 and alpha_power to 7.

For the luma plane, a 2x2 box radius will be run once.

For the chroma plane, a 4x4 box radius will be run 5 times.

For the alpha plane, a 3x3 box radius will be run 7 times.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, boxblur_opencl=2:1:4:5:3:7, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 colorkey_opencl

RGB colorspace color keying.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<color>

The color which will be replaced with transparency.


=item B<similarity>

Similarity percentage with the key color.

0.01 matches only the exact key color, while 1.0 matches everything.


=item B<blend>

Blend percentage.

0.0 makes pixels either fully transparent, or not transparent at all.

Higher values result in semi-transparent pixels, with a higher transparency
the more similar the pixels color is to the key color.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Make every semi-green pixel in the input transparent with some slight blending:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, colorkey_opencl=green:0.3:0.1, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 convolution_opencl


Apply convolution of 3x3, 5x5, 7x7 matrix.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<0m>


=item B<1m>


=item B<2m>


=item B<3m>

Set matrix for each plane.
Matrix is sequence of 9, 25 or 49 signed numbers.
Default value for each plane is C<0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0>.


=item B<0rdiv>


=item B<1rdiv>


=item B<2rdiv>


=item B<3rdiv>

Set multiplier for calculated value for each plane.
If unset or 0, it will be sum of all matrix elements.
The option value must be a float number greater or equal to C<0.0>. Default value is C<1.0>.


=item B<0bias>


=item B<1bias>


=item B<2bias>


=item B<3bias>

Set bias for each plane. This value is added to the result of the multiplication.
Useful for making the overall image brighter or darker.
The option value must be a float number greater or equal to C<0.0>. Default value is C<0.0>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply sharpen:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply blur:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:1/9:1/9:1/9:1/9, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply edge enhance:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:0 0 0 -1 1 0 0 0 0:5:1:1:1:0:128:128:128, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply edge detect:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:128, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply laplacian edge detector which includes diagonals:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:1 1 1 1 -8 1 1 1 1:5:5:5:1:0:128:128:0, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply emboss:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, convolution_opencl=-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2:-2 -1 0 -1 1 1 0 1 2, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 erosion_opencl


Apply erosion effect to the video.

This filter replaces the pixel by the local(3x3) minimum.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold0>


=item B<threshold1>


=item B<threshold2>


=item B<threshold3>

Limit the maximum change for each plane. Range is C<[0, 65535]> and default value is C<65535>.
If C<0>, plane will remain unchanged.


=item B<coordinates>

Flag which specifies the pixel to refer to.
Range is C<[0, 255]> and default value is C<255>, i.e. all eight pixels are used.

Flags to local 3x3 coordinates region centered on C<x>:

    1 2 3

    4 x 5

    6 7 8

=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Apply erosion filter with threshold0 set to 30, threshold1 set 40, threshold2 set to 50 and coordinates set to 231, setting each pixel of the output to the local minimum between pixels: 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 of the 3x3 region centered on it in the input. If the difference between input pixel and local minimum is more then threshold of the corresponding plane, output pixel will be set to input pixel - threshold of corresponding plane.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, erosion_opencl=30:40:50:coordinates=231, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 deshake_opencl

Feature-point based video stabilization filter.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<tripod>

Simulates a tripod by preventing any camera movement whatsoever from the original frame. Defaults to C<0>.


=item B<debug>

Whether or not additional debug info should be displayed, both in the processed output and in the console.

Note that in order to see console debug output you will also need to pass C<-v verbose> to ffmpeg.

Viewing point matches in the output video is only supported for RGB input.

Defaults to C<0>.


=item B<adaptive_crop>

Whether or not to do a tiny bit of cropping at the borders to cut down on the amount of mirrored pixels.

Defaults to C<1>.


=item B<refine_features>

Whether or not feature points should be refined at a sub-pixel level.

This can be turned off for a slight performance gain at the cost of precision.

Defaults to C<1>.


=item B<smooth_strength>

The strength of the smoothing applied to the camera path from C<0.0> to C<1.0>.

C<1.0> is the maximum smoothing strength while values less than that result in less smoothing.

C<0.0> causes the filter to adaptively choose a smoothing strength on a per-frame basis.

Defaults to C<0.0>.


=item B<smooth_window_multiplier>

Controls the size of the smoothing window (the number of frames buffered to determine motion information from).

The size of the smoothing window is determined by multiplying the framerate of the video by this number.

Acceptable values range from C<0.1> to C<10.0>.

Larger values increase the amount of motion data available for determining how to smooth the camera path,
potentially improving smoothness, but also increase latency and memory usage.

Defaults to C<2.0>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Stabilize a video with a fixed, medium smoothing strength:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, deshake_opencl=smooth_strength=0.5, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Stabilize a video with debugging (both in console and in rendered video):
	
	-i INPUT -filter_complex "[0:v]format=rgba, hwupload, deshake_opencl=debug=1, hwdownload, format=rgba, format=yuv420p" -v verbose OUTPUT


=back



=head2 dilation_opencl


Apply dilation effect to the video.

This filter replaces the pixel by the local(3x3) maximum.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<threshold0>


=item B<threshold1>


=item B<threshold2>


=item B<threshold3>

Limit the maximum change for each plane. Range is C<[0, 65535]> and default value is C<65535>.
If C<0>, plane will remain unchanged.


=item B<coordinates>

Flag which specifies the pixel to refer to.
Range is C<[0, 255]> and default value is C<255>, i.e. all eight pixels are used.

Flags to local 3x3 coordinates region centered on C<x>:

    1 2 3

    4 x 5

    6 7 8

=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Apply dilation filter with threshold0 set to 30, threshold1 set 40, threshold2 set to 50 and coordinates set to 231, setting each pixel of the output to the local maximum between pixels: 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 of the 3x3 region centered on it in the input. If the difference between input pixel and local maximum is more then threshold of the corresponding plane, output pixel will be set to input pixel + threshold of corresponding plane.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, dilation_opencl=30:40:50:coordinates=231, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back




=head2 nlmeans_opencl


Non-local Means denoise filter through OpenCL, this filter accepts same options as B<nlmeans>.


=head2 overlay_opencl


Overlay one video on top of another.

It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main" video on which the second input is overlaid.
This filter requires same memory layout for all the inputs. So, format conversion may be needed.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<x>

Set the x coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<y>

Set the y coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.
Default value is C<0>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Overlay an image LOGO at the top-left corner of the INPUT video. Both inputs are yuv420p format.
	
	-i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuv420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_opencl, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=item *

The inputs have same memory layout for color channels , the overlay has additional alpha plane, like INPUT is yuv420p, and the LOGO is yuva420p.
	
	-i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuva420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_opencl, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=back



=head2 pad_opencl


Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
provided I<x>, I<y> coordinates.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
paddings added. If the value for I<width> or I<height> is 0, the
corresponding input size is used for the output.

The I<width> expression can reference the value set by the
I<height> expression, and vice versa.

The default value of I<width> and I<height> is 0.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
with respect to the top/left border of the output image.

The I<x> expression can reference the value set by the I<y>
expression, and vice versa.

The default value of I<x> and I<y> is 0.

If I<x> or I<y> evaluate to a negative number, they'll be changed
so the input image is centered on the padded area.


=item B<color>

Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>.


=item B<aspect>

Pad to an aspect instead to a resolution.

=back


The value for the I<width>, I<height>, I<x>, and I<y>
options are expressions containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<in_w>


=item B<in_h>

The input video width and height.


=item B<iw>


=item B<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item B<out_w>


=item B<out_h>

The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
specified by the I<width> and I<height> expressions.


=item B<ow>


=item B<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The x and y offsets as specified by the I<x> and I<y>
expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.


=item B<a>

same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item B<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<iw> / I<ih>) * I<sar>

=back



=head2 prewitt_opencl


Apply the Prewitt operator (E<lt>B<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Prewitt_operator>E<gt>) to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<0xf>, by which all planes are processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.
Range is C<[0.0, 65535]> and default value is C<1.0>.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.
Range is C<[-65535, 65535]> and default value is C<0.0>.

=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Apply the Prewitt operator with scale set to 2 and delta set to 10.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, prewitt_opencl=scale=2:delta=10, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back




=head2 program_opencl


Filter video using an OpenCL program.


=over 4



=item B<source>

OpenCL program source file.


=item B<kernel>

Kernel name in program.


=item B<inputs>

Number of inputs to the filter.  Defaults to 1.


=item B<size, s>

Size of output frames.  Defaults to the same as the first input.


=back


The C<program_opencl> filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

The program source file must contain a kernel function with the given name,
which will be run once for each plane of the output.  Each run on a plane
gets enqueued as a separate 2D global NDRange with one work-item for each
pixel to be generated.  The global ID offset for each work-item is therefore
the coordinates of a pixel in the destination image.

The kernel function needs to take the following arguments:

=over 4


=item *

Destination image, I<__write_only image2d_t>.

This image will become the output; the kernel should write all of it.

=item *

Frame index, I<unsigned int>.

This is a counter starting from zero and increasing by one for each frame.

=item *

Source images, I<__read_only image2d_t>.

These are the most recent images on each input.  The kernel may read from
them to generate the output, but they can't be written to.

=back


Example programs:


=over 4


=item *

Copy the input to the output (output must be the same size as the input).
	
	__kernel void copy(__write_only image2d_t destination,
	                   unsigned int index,
	                   __read_only  image2d_t source)
	{
	    const sampler_t sampler = CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE;
	
	    int2 location = (int2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	
	    float4 value = read_imagef(source, sampler, location);
	
	    write_imagef(destination, location, value);
	}



=item *

Apply a simple transformation, rotating the input by an amount increasing
with the index counter.  Pixel values are linearly interpolated by the
sampler, and the output need not have the same dimensions as the input.
	
	__kernel void rotate_image(__write_only image2d_t dst,
	                           unsigned int index,
	                           __read_only  image2d_t src)
	{
	    const sampler_t sampler = (CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE |
	                               CLK_FILTER_LINEAR);
	
	    float angle = (float)index / 100.0f;
	
	    float2 dst_dim = convert_float2(get_image_dim(dst));
	    float2 src_dim = convert_float2(get_image_dim(src));
	
	    float2 dst_cen = dst_dim / 2.0f;
	    float2 src_cen = src_dim / 2.0f;
	
	    int2   dst_loc = (int2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	
	    float2 dst_pos = convert_float2(dst_loc) - dst_cen;
	    float2 src_pos = {
	        cos(angle) * dst_pos.x - sin(angle) * dst_pos.y,
	        sin(angle) * dst_pos.x + cos(angle) * dst_pos.y
	    };
	    src_pos = src_pos * src_dim / dst_dim;
	
	    float2 src_loc = src_pos + src_cen;
	
	    if (src_loc.x < 0.0f      || src_loc.y < 0.0f ||
	        src_loc.x > src_dim.x || src_loc.y > src_dim.y)
	        write_imagef(dst, dst_loc, 0.5f);
	    else
	        write_imagef(dst, dst_loc, read_imagef(src, sampler, src_loc));
	}



=item *

Blend two inputs together, with the amount of each input used varying
with the index counter.
	
	__kernel void blend_images(__write_only image2d_t dst,
	                           unsigned int index,
	                           __read_only  image2d_t src1,
	                           __read_only  image2d_t src2)
	{
	    const sampler_t sampler = (CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE |
	                               CLK_FILTER_LINEAR);
	
	    float blend = (cos((float)index / 50.0f) + 1.0f) / 2.0f;
	
	    int2  dst_loc = (int2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	    int2 src1_loc = dst_loc * get_image_dim(src1) / get_image_dim(dst);
	    int2 src2_loc = dst_loc * get_image_dim(src2) / get_image_dim(dst);
	
	    float4 val1 = read_imagef(src1, sampler, src1_loc);
	    float4 val2 = read_imagef(src2, sampler, src2_loc);
	
	    write_imagef(dst, dst_loc, val1 * blend + val2 * (1.0f - blend));
	}



=back



=head2 remap_opencl


Remap pixels using 2nd: Xmap and 3rd: Ymap input video stream.

Destination pixel at position (X, Y) will be picked from source (x, y) position
where x = Xmap(X, Y) and y = Ymap(X, Y). If mapping values are out of range, zero
value for pixel will be used for destination pixel.

Xmap and Ymap input video streams must be of same dimensions. Output video stream
will have Xmap/Ymap video stream dimensions.
Xmap and Ymap input video streams are 32bit float pixel format, single channel.


=over 4


=item B<interp>

Specify interpolation used for remapping of pixels.
Allowed values are C<near> and C<linear>.
Default value is C<linear>.


=item B<fill>

Specify the color of the unmapped pixels. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>. Default color is C<black>.

=back



=head2 roberts_opencl

Apply the Roberts cross operator (E<lt>B<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roberts_cross>E<gt>) to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<0xf>, by which all planes are processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.
Range is C<[0.0, 65535]> and default value is C<1.0>.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.
Range is C<[-65535, 65535]> and default value is C<0.0>.

=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Apply the Roberts cross operator with scale set to 2 and delta set to 10
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, roberts_opencl=scale=2:delta=10, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 sobel_opencl


Apply the Sobel operator (E<lt>B<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sobel_operator>E<gt>) to input video stream.

The filter accepts the following option:


=over 4


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<0xf>, by which all planes are processed.


=item B<scale>

Set value which will be multiplied with filtered result.
Range is C<[0.0, 65535]> and default value is C<1.0>.


=item B<delta>

Set value which will be added to filtered result.
Range is C<[-65535, 65535]> and default value is C<0.0>.

=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Apply sobel operator with scale set to 2 and delta set to 10
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, sobel_opencl=scale=2:delta=10, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 tonemap_opencl


Perform HDR(PQ/HLG) to SDR conversion with tone-mapping.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<tonemap>

Specify the tone-mapping operator to be used. Same as tonemap option in B<tonemap>.


=item B<param>

Tune the tone mapping algorithm. same as param option in B<tonemap>.


=item B<desat>

Apply desaturation for highlights that exceed this level of brightness. The
higher the parameter, the more color information will be preserved. This
setting helps prevent unnaturally blown-out colors for super-highlights, by
(smoothly) turning into white instead. This makes images feel more natural,
at the cost of reducing information about out-of-range colors.

The default value is 0.5, and the algorithm here is a little different from
the cpu version tonemap currently. A setting of 0.0 disables this option.


=item B<threshold>

The tonemapping algorithm parameters is fine-tuned per each scene. And a threshold
is used to detect whether the scene has changed or not. If the distance between
the current frame average brightness and the current running average exceeds
a threshold value, we would re-calculate scene average and peak brightness.
The default value is 0.2.


=item B<format>

Specify the output pixel format.

Currently supported formats are:

=over 4


=item I<p010>


=item I<nv12>


=back



=item B<range, r>

Set the output color range.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<tv/mpeg>


=item I<pc/jpeg>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<primaries, p>

Set the output color primaries.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<bt709>


=item I<bt2020>


=back


Default is same as input.


=item B<transfer, t>

Set the output transfer characteristics.

Possible values are:

=over 4


=item I<bt709>


=item I<bt2020>


=back


Default is bt709.


=item B<matrix, m>

Set the output colorspace matrix.

Possible value are:

=over 4


=item I<bt709>


=item I<bt2020>


=back


Default is same as input.


=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Convert HDR(PQ/HLG) video to bt2020-transfer-characteristic p010 format using linear operator.
	
	-i INPUT -vf "format=p010,hwupload,tonemap_opencl=t=bt2020:tonemap=linear:format=p010,hwdownload,format=p010" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 unsharp_opencl


Sharpen or blur the input video.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<luma_msize_x, lx>

Set the luma matrix horizontal size.
Range is C<[1, 23]> and default value is C<5>.


=item B<luma_msize_y, ly>

Set the luma matrix vertical size.
Range is C<[1, 23]> and default value is C<5>.


=item B<luma_amount, la>

Set the luma effect strength.
Range is C<[-10, 10]> and default value is C<1.0>.

Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.


=item B<chroma_msize_x, cx>

Set the chroma matrix horizontal size.
Range is C<[1, 23]> and default value is C<5>.


=item B<chroma_msize_y, cy>

Set the chroma matrix vertical size.
Range is C<[1, 23]> and default value is C<5>.


=item B<chroma_amount, ca>

Set the chroma effect strength.
Range is C<[-10, 10]> and default value is C<0.0>.

Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.


=back


All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, unsharp_opencl=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5, hwdownload" OUTPUT



=item *

Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
	
	-i INPUT -vf "hwupload, unsharp_opencl=7:7:-2:7:7:-2, hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back



=head2 xfade_opencl


Cross fade two videos with custom transition effect by using OpenCL.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<transition>

Set one of possible transition effects.


=over 4


=item B<custom>

Select custom transition effect, the actual transition description
will be picked from source and kernel options.


=item B<fade>


=item B<wipeleft>


=item B<wiperight>


=item B<wipeup>


=item B<wipedown>


=item B<slideleft>


=item B<slideright>


=item B<slideup>


=item B<slidedown>


Default transition is fade.

=back



=item B<source>

OpenCL program source file for custom transition.


=item B<kernel>

Set name of kernel to use for custom transition from program source file.


=item B<duration>

Set duration of video transition.


=item B<offset>

Set time of start of transition relative to first video.

=back


The program source file must contain a kernel function with the given name,
which will be run once for each plane of the output.  Each run on a plane
gets enqueued as a separate 2D global NDRange with one work-item for each
pixel to be generated.  The global ID offset for each work-item is therefore
the coordinates of a pixel in the destination image.

The kernel function needs to take the following arguments:

=over 4


=item *

Destination image, I<__write_only image2d_t>.

This image will become the output; the kernel should write all of it.


=item *

First Source image, I<__read_only image2d_t>.
Second Source image, I<__read_only image2d_t>.

These are the most recent images on each input.  The kernel may read from
them to generate the output, but they can't be written to.


=item *

Transition progress, I<float>. This value is always between 0 and 1 inclusive.

=back


Example programs:


=over 4


=item *

Apply dots curtain transition effect:
	
	__kernel void blend_images(__write_only image2d_t dst,
	                           __read_only  image2d_t src1,
	                           __read_only  image2d_t src2,
	                           float progress)
	{
	    const sampler_t sampler = (CLK_NORMALIZED_COORDS_FALSE |
	                               CLK_FILTER_LINEAR);
	    int2  p = (int2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	    float2 rp = (float2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	    float2 dim = (float2)(get_image_dim(src1).x, get_image_dim(src1).y);
	    rp = rp / dim;
	
	    float2 dots = (float2)(20.0, 20.0);
	    float2 center = (float2)(0,0);
	    float2 unused;
	
	    float4 val1 = read_imagef(src1, sampler, p);
	    float4 val2 = read_imagef(src2, sampler, p);
	    bool next = distance(fract(rp * dots, &unused), (float2)(0.5, 0.5)) < (progress / distance(rp, center));
	
	    write_imagef(dst, p, next ? val1 : val2);
	}



=back




=head1 VAAPI VIDEO FILTERS


VAAPI Video filters are usually used with VAAPI decoder and VAAPI encoder. Below is a description of VAAPI video filters.

To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-vaapi>.

To use vaapi filters, you need to setup the vaapi device correctly. For more information, please read E<lt>B<https://trac.ffmpeg.org/wiki/Hardware/VAAPI>E<gt>


=head2 overlay_vaapi


Overlay one video on the top of another.

It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main" video on which the second input is overlaid.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Set expressions for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
on the main video.

Default value is "0" for both expressions.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

Set expressions for the width and height the overlaid video
on the main video.

Default values are 'overlay_iw' for 'w' and 'overlay_ih*w/overlay_iw' for 'h'.

The expressions can contain the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<main_w, W>


=item B<main_h, H>

The main input width and height.


=item B<overlay_iw>


=item B<overlay_ih>

The overlay input width and height.


=item B<overlay_w, w>


=item B<overlay_h, h>

The overlay output width and height.


=item B<overlay_x, x>


=item B<overlay_y, y>

Position of the overlay layer inside of main


=back



=item B<alpha>

Set transparency of overlaid video. Allowed range is 0.0 to 1.0.
Higher value means lower transparency.
Default value is C<1.0>.


=item B<eof_action>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<framesync>.


=item B<repeatlast>

See B<framesync>.


=back


This filter also supports the B<framesync> options.

=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Overlay an image LOGO at the top-left corner of the INPUT video. Both inputs for this filter are yuv420p format.
	
	-i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuv420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_vaapi" OUTPUT


=item *

Overlay an image LOGO at the offset (200, 100) from the top-left corner of the INPUT video.
The inputs have same memory layout for color channels, the overlay has additional alpha plane, like INPUT is yuv420p, and the LOGO is yuva420p.
	
	-i INPUT -i LOGO -filter_complex "[0:v]hwupload[a], [1:v]format=yuva420p, hwupload[b], [a][b]overlay_vaapi=x=200:y=100:w=400:h=300:alpha=1.0, hwdownload, format=nv12" OUTPUT



=back



=head2 tonemap_vaapi


Perform HDR-to-SDR or HDR-to-HDR tone-mapping.
It currently only accepts HDR10 as input.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<format>

Specify the output pixel format.

Default is nv12 for HDR-to-SDR tone-mapping and p010 for HDR-to-HDR
tone-mapping.


=item B<primaries, p>

Set the output color primaries.

Default is bt709 for HDR-to-SDR tone-mapping and same as input for HDR-to-HDR
tone-mapping.


=item B<transfer, t>

Set the output transfer characteristics.

Default is bt709 for HDR-to-SDR tone-mapping and same as input for HDR-to-HDR
tone-mapping.


=item B<matrix, m>

Set the output colorspace matrix.

Default is bt709 for HDR-to-SDR tone-mapping and same as input for HDR-to-HDR
tone-mapping.


=item B<display>

Set the output mastering display colour volume. It is given by a '|'-separated
list of two values, two values are space separated. It set display primaries
x & y in G, B, R order, then white point x & y, the nominal minimum & maximum
display luminances.

HDR-to-HDR tone-mapping will be performed when this option is set.


=item B<light>

Set the output content light level information. It accepts 2 space-separated
values, the first input is the maximum light level and the second input is
the maximum average light level.

It is ignored for HDR-to-SDR tone-mapping, and optional for HDR-to-HDR
tone-mapping.


=back



=head3 Example



=over 4


=item *

Convert HDR(HDR10) video to bt2020-transfer-characteristic p010 format
	
	tonemap_vaapi=format=p010:t=bt2020-10


=item *

Convert HDR video to HDR video
	
	tonemap_vaapi=display=7500\ 3000|34000\ 16000|13250\ 34500|15635\ 16450|500\ 10000000


=back



=head2 hstack_vaapi

Stack input videos horizontally.

This is the VA-API variant of the B<hstack> filter, each input stream may
have different height, this filter will scale down/up each input stream while
keeping the original aspect.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

See B<hstack>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<hstack>.


=item B<height>

Set height of output. If set to 0, this filter will set height of output to
height of the first input stream. Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 vstack_vaapi

Stack input videos vertically.

This is the VA-API variant of the B<vstack> filter, each input stream may
have different width, this filter will scale down/up each input stream while
keeping the original aspect.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

See B<vstack>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<vstack>.


=item B<width>

Set width of output. If set to 0, this filter will set width of output to
width of the first input stream. Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 xstack_vaapi

Stack video inputs into custom layout.

This is the VA-API variant of the B<xstack> filter,  each input stream may
have different size, this filter will scale down/up each input stream to the
given output size, or the size of the first input stream.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

See B<xstack>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<xstack>.


=item B<layout>

See B<xstack>.
Moreover, this permits the user to supply output size for each input stream.
	
	xstack_vaapi=inputs=4:layout=0_0_1920x1080|0_h0_1920x1080|w0_0_1920x1080|w0_h0_1920x1080



=item B<grid>

See B<xstack>.


=item B<grid_tile_size>

Set output size for each input stream when B<grid> is set. If this option
is not set, this filter will set output size by default to the size of the
first input stream. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<fill>

See B<xstack>.

=back



=head2 pad_vaapi


Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
provided I<x>, I<y> coordinates.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
paddings added. If the value for I<width> or I<height> is 0, the
corresponding input size is used for the output.

The I<width> expression can reference the value set by the
I<height> expression, and vice versa.

The default value of I<width> and I<height> is 0.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
with respect to the top/left border of the output image.

The I<x> expression can reference the value set by the I<y>
expression, and vice versa.

The default value of I<x> and I<y> is 0.

If I<x> or I<y> evaluate to a negative number, they'll be changed
so the input image is centered on the padded area.


=item B<color>

Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils
manual>.


=item B<aspect>

Pad to an aspect instead to a resolution.

=back


The value for the I<width>, I<height>, I<x>, and I<y>
options are expressions containing the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<in_w>


=item B<in_h>

The input video width and height.


=item B<iw>


=item B<ih>

These are the same as I<in_w> and I<in_h>.


=item B<out_w>


=item B<out_h>

The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
specified by the I<width> and I<height> expressions.


=item B<ow>


=item B<oh>

These are the same as I<out_w> and I<out_h>.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The x and y offsets as specified by the I<x> and I<y>
expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.


=item B<a>

same as I<iw> / I<ih>


=item B<sar>

input sample aspect ratio


=item B<dar>

input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (I<iw> / I<ih>) * I<sar>

=back



=head2 drawbox_vaapi


Draw a colored box on the input image.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.


=item B<width, w>


=item B<height, h>

The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
the input width and height. It defaults to 0.


=item B<color, c>

Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
check the B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<thickness, t>

The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge.
A value of C<fill> will create a filled box. Default value is C<3>.

See below for the list of accepted constants.


=item B<replace>

With value C<1>, the pixels of the painted box will overwrite the video's color and alpha pixels.
Default is C<0>, which composites the box onto the input video.

=back


The parameters for I<x>, I<y>, I<w> and I<h> and I<t> are expressions containing the
following constants:


=over 4


=item B<in_h, ih>


=item B<in_w, iw>

The input width and height.


=item B<x>


=item B<y>

The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.


=item B<w>


=item B<h>

The width and height of the drawn box.


=item B<t>

The thickness of the drawn box.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
	
	drawbox



=item *

Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
	
	drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@0.5


The previous example can be specified as:
	
	drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@0.5



=item *

Fill the box with pink color:
	
	drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@0.5:t=fill



=item *

Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
	
	drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red


=back




=head1 VULKAN VIDEO FILTERS


Below is a description of the currently available Vulkan video filters.

To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-vulkan> and either C<--enable-libglslang> or C<--enable-libshaderc>.

Running Vulkan filters requires you to initialize a hardware device and to pass that device to all filters in any filter graph.

=over 4



=item B<-init_hw_device vulkan[=>I<name>B<][:>I<device>B<[,>I<key=value>B<...]]>

Initialise a new hardware device of type I<vulkan> called I<name>, using the
given device parameters and options in I<key=value>. The following options
are supported:


=over 4


=item B<debug>

Switches validation layers on if set to 1.


=item B<linear_images>

Allocates linear images. Does not apply to decoding.


=item B<disable_multiplane>

Disables multiplane images. Does not apply to decoding.

=back



=item B<-filter_hw_device> I<name>

Pass the hardware device called I<name> to all filters in any filter graph.


=back


For more detailed information see E<lt>B<https://www.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.html#Advanced-Video-options>E<gt>


=over 4


=item *

Example of choosing the first device and running nlmeans_vulkan filter with default parameters on it.
	
	-init_hw_device vulkan=vk:0 -filter_hw_device vk -i INPUT -vf "hwupload,nlmeans_vulkan,hwdownload" OUTPUT


=back


As Vulkan filters are not able to access frame data in normal memory, all frame data needs to be uploaded (B<hwupload>) to hardware surfaces connected to the appropriate device before being used and then downloaded (B<hwdownload>) back to normal memory. Note that B<hwupload> will upload to a frame with the same layout as the software frame, so it may be necessary to add a B<format> filter immediately before to get the input into the right format and B<hwdownload> does not support all formats on the output - it is usually necessary to insert an additional B<format> filter immediately following in the graph to get the output in a supported format.


=head2 avgblur_vulkan


Apply an average blur filter, implemented on the GPU using Vulkan.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sizeX>

Set horizontal radius size.
Range is C<[1, 32]> and default value is C<3>.


=item B<sizeY>

Set vertical radius size. Range is C<[1, 32]> and default value is C<3>.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. Default value is C<0xf>, by which all planes are processed.

=back



=head2 blend_vulkan


Blend two Vulkan frames into each other.

The C<blend> filter takes two input streams and outputs one
stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
"bottom" layer.  By default, the output terminates when the longest input terminates.

A description of the accepted options follows.


=over 4


=item B<c0_mode>


=item B<c1_mode>


=item B<c2_mode>


=item B<c3_mode>


=item B<all_mode>

Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
of I<all_mode>. Default value is C<normal>.

Available values for component modes are:

=over 4


=item B<normal>


=item B<multiply>


=back



=back



=head2 bwdif_vulkan


Deinterlacer using B<bwdif>, the "Bob Weaver Deinterlacing Filter" algorithm, implemented
on the GPU using Vulkan.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, send_frame>

Output one frame for each frame.

=item B<1, send_field>

Output one frame for each field.

=back


The default value is C<send_field>.


=item B<parity>

The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
of the following values:


=over 4


=item B<0, tff>

Assume the top field is first.

=item B<1, bff>

Assume the bottom field is first.

=item B<-1, auto>

Enable automatic detection of field parity.

=back


The default value is C<auto>.
If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
top field first will be assumed.


=item B<deint>

Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accepts one of the following
values:


=over 4


=item B<0, all>

Deinterlace all frames.

=item B<1, interlaced>

Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.

=back


The default value is C<all>.

=back



=head2 chromaber_vulkan


Apply an effect that emulates chromatic aberration. Works best with RGB inputs,
but provides a similar effect with YCbCr inputs too.


=over 4


=item B<dist_x>

Horizontal displacement multiplier. Each chroma pixel's position will be multiplied
by this amount, starting from the center of the image. Default is C<0>.


=item B<dist_y>

Similarly, this sets the vertical displacement multiplier. Default is C<0>.


=back



=head2 color_vulkan


Video source that creates a Vulkan frame of a solid color.
Useful for benchmarking, or overlaying.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<color>

The color to use. Either a name, or a hexadecimal value.
The default value is C<black>.


=item B<size>

The size of the output frame. Default value is C<1920x1080>.


=item B<rate>

The framerate to output at. Default value is C<60> frames per second.


=item B<duration>

The video duration. Default value is C<-0.000001>.


=item B<sar>

The video signal aspect ratio. Default value is C<1/1>.


=item B<format>

The pixel format of the output Vulkan frames. Default value is C<yuv444p>.


=item B<out_range>

Set the output YCbCr sample range.

This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:


=over 4


=item B<auto/unknown>

Choose automatically.


=item B<jpeg/full/pc>

Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).


=item B<mpeg/limited/tv>

Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).

=back



=back



=head2 vflip_vulkan


Flips an image vertically.


=head2 hflip_vulkan


Flips an image horizontally.


=head2 flip_vulkan


Flips an image along both the vertical and horizontal axis.


=head2 gblur_vulkan


Apply Gaussian blur filter on Vulkan frames.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sigma>

Set horizontal sigma, standard deviation of Gaussian blur. Default is C<0.5>.


=item B<sigmaV>

Set vertical sigma, if negative it will be same as C<sigma>.
Default is C<-1>.


=item B<planes>

Set which planes to filter. By default all planes are filtered.


=item B<size>

Set the kernel size along the horizontal axis. Default is C<19>.


=item B<sizeV>

Set the kernel size along the vertical axis. Default is C<0>,
which sets to use the same value as I<size>.


=back



=head2 nlmeans_vulkan


Denoise frames using Non-Local Means algorithm, implemented on the GPU using
Vulkan.
Supports more pixel formats than B<nlmeans> or B<nlmeans_opencl>, including
alpha channel support.

The filter accepts the following options.


=over 4


=item B<s>

Set denoising strength for all components. Default is 1.0. Must be in range [1.0, 100.0].


=item B<p>

Set patch size for all planes. Default is 7. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].


=item B<r>

Set research size. Default is 15. Must be odd number in range [0, 99].


=item B<t>

Set parallelism. Default is 36. Must be a number in the range [1, 168].
Larger values may speed up processing, at the cost of more VRAM.
Lower values will slow it down, reducing VRAM usage.
Only supported on GPUs with atomic float operations (RDNA3+, Ampere+).


=item B<s0>


=item B<s1>


=item B<s2>


=item B<s3>

Set denoising strength for a specific component. Default is I<1>, equal to B<s>.
Must be odd number in range [1, 100].


=item B<p0>


=item B<p1>


=item B<p2>


=item B<p3>

Set patch size for a specific component. Default is I<7>, equal to B<p>.
Must be odd number in range [0, 99].


=back



=head2 overlay_vulkan


Overlay one video on top of another.

It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main" video on which the second input is overlaid.
This filter requires all inputs to use the same pixel format. So, format conversion may be needed.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<x>

Set the x coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<y>

Set the y coordinate of the overlaid video on the main video.
Default value is C<0>.


=back



=head2 transpose_vt


Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
For more in depth examples see the B<transpose> video filter, which shares mostly the same options.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<dir>

Specify the transposition direction.

Can assume the following values:

=over 4


=item B<cclock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip. (default)


=item B<clock>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.


=item B<cclock>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.


=item B<clock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip.


=item B<hflip>

Flip the input video horizontally.


=item B<vflip>

Flip the input video vertically.


=back



=item B<passthrough>

Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Always apply transposition. (default)

=item B<portrait>

Preserve portrait geometry (when I<height> E<gt>= I<width>).

=item B<landscape>

Preserve landscape geometry (when I<width> E<gt>= I<height>).

=back



=back



=head2 transpose_vulkan


Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
For more in depth examples see the B<transpose> video filter, which shares mostly the same options.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<dir>

Specify the transposition direction.

Can assume the following values:

=over 4


=item B<cclock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip. (default)


=item B<clock>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise.


=item B<cclock>

Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise.


=item B<clock_flip>

Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip.

=back



=item B<passthrough>

Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Always apply transposition. (default)

=item B<portrait>

Preserve portrait geometry (when I<height> E<gt>= I<width>).

=item B<landscape>

Preserve landscape geometry (when I<width> E<gt>= I<height>).

=back



=back




=head1 QSV VIDEO FILTERS


Below is a description of the currently available QSV video filters.

To enable compilation of these filters you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libmfx> or C<--enable-libvpl>.

To use QSV filters, you need to setup the QSV device correctly. For more information, please read E<lt>B<https://trac.ffmpeg.org/wiki/Hardware/QuickSync>E<gt>


=head2 hstack_qsv

Stack input videos horizontally.

This is the QSV variant of the B<hstack> filter, each input stream may
have different height, this filter will scale down/up each input stream while
keeping the original aspect.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

See B<hstack>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<hstack>.


=item B<height>

Set height of output. If set to 0, this filter will set height of output to
height of the first input stream. Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 vstack_qsv

Stack input videos vertically.

This is the QSV variant of the B<vstack> filter, each input stream may
have different width, this filter will scale down/up each input stream while
keeping the original aspect.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

See B<vstack>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<vstack>.


=item B<width>

Set width of output. If set to 0, this filter will set width of output to
width of the first input stream. Default value is 0.

=back



=head2 xstack_qsv

Stack video inputs into custom layout.

This is the QSV variant of the B<xstack> filter.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<inputs>

See B<xstack>.


=item B<shortest>

See B<xstack>.


=item B<layout>

See B<xstack>.
Moreover, this permits the user to supply output size for each input stream.
	
	xstack_qsv=inputs=4:layout=0_0_1920x1080|0_h0_1920x1080|w0_0_1920x1080|w0_h0_1920x1080



=item B<grid>

See B<xstack>.


=item B<grid_tile_size>

Set output size for each input stream when B<grid> is set. If this option
is not set, this filter will set output size by default to the size of the
first input stream. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<fill>

See B<xstack>.

=back




=head1 VIDEO SOURCES


Below is a description of the currently available video sources.


=head2 buffer


Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.

This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
through the interface defined in F<libavfilter/buffersrc.h>.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<video_size>

Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<width>

The input video width.


=item B<height>

The input video height.


=item B<pix_fmt>

A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
name.


=item B<time_base>

Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.


=item B<frame_rate>

Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.


=item B<colorspace>

A string representing the color space of the buffered video frames.
It may be a number corresponding to a color space, or a color space
name.


=item B<range>

A string representing the color range of the buffered video frames.
It may be a number corresponding to a color range, or a color range
name.


=item B<pixel_aspect, sar>

The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.


=item B<hw_frames_ctx>

When using a hardware pixel format, this should be a reference to an
AVHWFramesContext describing input frames.

=back


For example:
	
	buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1


will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
(check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in F<libavutil/pixfmt.h>),
this example corresponds to:
	
	buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1


Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
syntax is deprecated:

I<width>:I<height>:I<pix_fmt>:I<time_base.num>:I<time_base.den>:I<pixel_aspect.num>:I<pixel_aspect.den>


=head2 cellauto


Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.

The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
B<filename> and B<pattern> options. If such options are
not specified an initial state is created randomly.

At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
frame is filled is defined by the B<scroll> option.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<filename, f>

Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
the specified file.
In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
file will be ignored.


=item B<pattern, p>

Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
the specified string.

Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
string will be ignored.


=item B<rate, r>

Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
Default is 25.


=item B<random_fill_ratio, ratio>

Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
1/PHI.

This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.


=item B<random_seed, seed>

Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
effort basis.


=item B<rule>

Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
Default value is 110.


=item B<size, s>

Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

If B<filename> or B<pattern> is specified, the size is set
by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
height is set to I<width> * PHI.

If B<size> is set, it must contain the width of the specified
pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
larger row.

If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).


=item B<scroll>

If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
Defaults to 1.


=item B<start_full, full>

If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
outputting the first frame.
This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.


=item B<stitch>

If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Read the initial state from F<pattern>, and specify an output of
size 200x400.
	
	cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400



=item *

Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
ratio of 2/3:
	
	cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200



=item *

Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
centered on an initial row with width 100:
	
	cellauto=p=@s=100x400:full=0:rule=18



=item *

Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
	
	cellauto=p='@@ @ @@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18



=back




=head2 coreimagesrc

Video source generated on GPU using Apple's CoreImage API on OSX.

This video source is a specialized version of the B<coreimage> video filter.
Use a core image generator at the beginning of the applied filterchain to
generate the content.

The coreimagesrc video source accepts the following options:

=over 4


=item B<list_generators>

List all available generators along with all their respective options as well as
possible minimum and maximum values along with the default values.
	
	list_generators=true



=item B<size, s>

Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
The default value is C<320x240>.


=item B<rate, r>

Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
I<frame_rate_num>/I<frame_rate_den>, an integer number, a floating point
number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
"25".


=item B<sar>

Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.


=item B<duration, d>

Set the duration of the sourced video. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
supposed to be generated forever.

=back


Additionally, all options of the B<coreimage> video filter are accepted.
A complete filterchain can be used for further processing of the
generated input without CPU-HOST transfer. See B<coreimage> documentation
and examples for details.


=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Use CIQRCodeGenerator to create a QR code for the FFmpeg homepage,
given as complete and escaped command-line for Apple's standard bash shell:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i coreimagesrc=s=100x100:filter=CIQRCodeGenerator@inputMessage=https\\\\\://FFmpeg.org/@inputCorrectionLevel=H -frames:v 1 QRCode.png

This example is equivalent to the QRCode example of B<coreimage> without the
need for a nullsrc video source.

=back




=head2 ddagrab


Captures the Windows Desktop via Desktop Duplication API.

The filter exclusively returns D3D11 Hardware Frames, for on-gpu encoding
or processing. So an explicit B<hwdownload> is needed for any kind of
software processing.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<output_idx>

DXGI Output Index to capture.

Usually corresponds to the index Windows has given the screen minus one,
so it's starting at 0.

Defaults to output 0.


=item B<draw_mouse>

Whether to draw the mouse cursor.

Defaults to true.

Only affects hardware cursors. If a game or application renders its own cursor,
it'll always be captured.


=item B<framerate>

Maximum framerate at which the desktop will be captured - the interval between
successive frames will not be smaller than the inverse of the framerate. When
I<dup_frames> is true (the default) and the desktop is not being updated
often enough, the filter will duplicate a previous frame. Note that there is no
background buffering going on, so when the filter is not polled often enough
then the actual inter-frame interval may be significantly larger.

Defaults to 30 FPS.


=item B<video_size>

Specify the size of the captured video.

Defaults to the full size of the screen.

Cropped from the bottom/right if smaller than screen size.


=item B<offset_x>

Horizontal offset of the captured video.


=item B<offset_y>

Vertical offset of the captured video.


=item B<output_fmt>

Desired filter output format.
Defaults to 8 Bit BGRA.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<auto>

Passes all supported output formats to DDA and returns what DDA decides to use.

=item B<8bit>


=item B<bgra>

8 Bit formats always work, and DDA will convert to them if necessary.

=item B<10bit>


=item B<x2bgr10>

Filter initialization will fail if 10 bit format is requested but unavailable.

=back



=item B<dup_frames>

When this option is set to true (the default), the filter will duplicate frames
when the desktop has not been updated in order to maintain approximately
constant target framerate. When this option is set to false, the filter will
wait for the desktop to be updated (inter-frame intervals may vary significantly
in this case).


=back



=head3 Examples


Capture primary screen and encode using nvenc:
	
	ffmpeg -f lavfi -i ddagrab -c:v h264_nvenc -cq 18 output.mp4


You can also skip the lavfi device and directly use the filter.
Also demonstrates downloading the frame and encoding with libx264.
Explicit output format specification is required in this case:
	
	ffmpeg -filter_complex ddagrab=output_idx=1:framerate=60,hwdownload,format=bgra -c:v libx264 -crf 18 output.mp4


If you want to capture only a subsection of the desktop, this can be achieved
by specifying a smaller size and its offsets into the screen:
	
	ddagrab=video_size=800x600:offset_x=100:offset_y=100




=head2 gradients

Generate several gradients.


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the B<"Video
size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>. Default value is "640x480".


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<c0, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, c7>

Set 8 colors. Default values for colors is to pick random one.


=item B<x0, y0, y0, y1>

Set gradient line source and destination points. If negative or out of range, random ones
are picked.


=item B<nb_colors, n>

Set number of colors to use at once. Allowed range is from 2 to 8. Default value is 2.


=item B<seed>

Set seed for picking gradient line points.


=item B<duration, d>

Set the duration of the sourced video. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
supposed to be generated forever.


=item B<speed>

Set speed of gradients rotation.


=item B<type, t>

Set type of gradients.
Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<linear>


=item B<radial>


=item B<circular>


=item B<spiral>


=item B<square>


=back


Default type is I<linear>.

=back



=head3 Commands


This source supports the some above options as B<commands>.


=head2 mandelbrot


Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
point specified with I<start_x> and I<start_y>.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<end_pts>

Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.


=item B<end_scale>

Set the terminal scale value.
Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.


=item B<inner>

Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
Mandelbrot fractal internal region.

It shall assume one of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<black>

Set black mode.

=item B<convergence>

Show time until convergence.

=item B<mincol>

Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.

=item B<period>

Set period mode.

=back


Default value is I<mincol>.


=item B<bailout>

Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.


=item B<maxiter>

Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
algorithm. Default value is 7189.


=item B<outer>

Set outer coloring mode.
It shall assume one of following values:

=over 4


=item B<iteration_count>

Set iteration count mode.

=item B<normalized_iteration_count>

set normalized iteration count mode.

=back

Default value is I<normalized_iteration_count>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<size, s>

Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the B<"Video
size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>. Default value is "640x480".


=item B<start_scale>

Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.


=item B<start_x>

Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
-100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.


=item B<start_y>

Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
-100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.

=back



=head2 mptestsrc


Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.

The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<rate, r>

Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
I<frame_rate_num>/I<frame_rate_den>, an integer number, a floating point
number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
"25".


=item B<duration, d>

Set the duration of the sourced video. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
supposed to be generated forever.


=item B<test, t>


Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:

=over 4


=item B<dc_luma>


=item B<dc_chroma>


=item B<freq_luma>


=item B<freq_chroma>


=item B<amp_luma>


=item B<amp_chroma>


=item B<cbp>


=item B<mv>


=item B<ring1>


=item B<ring2>


=item B<all>



=item B<max_frames, m>

Set the maximum number of frames generated for each test, default value is 30.


=back


Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.

=back


Some examples:
	
	mptestsrc=t=dc_luma


will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.


=head2 frei0r_src


Provide a frei0r source.

To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
header and configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-frei0r>.

This source accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<size>

The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<framerate>

The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
I<num>/I<den> or a frame rate abbreviation.


=item B<filter_name>

The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
how to set the parameters, read the B<frei0r> section in the video filters
documentation.


=item B<filter_params>

A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.


=back


For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
	
	frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay



=head2 life


Generate a life pattern.

This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.

The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.

At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
cell stay alive or born. The B<rule> option allows one to specify
the rule to adopt.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<filename, f>

Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
is used to delimit the end of each row.

If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
randomly.


=item B<rate, r>

Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
Default is 25.


=item B<random_fill_ratio, ratio>

Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
It is ignored when a file is specified.


=item B<random_seed, seed>

Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
effort basis.


=item B<rule>

Set the life rule.

A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "SI<NS>/BI<NB>",
where I<NS> and I<NB> are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
I<NS> specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
live cell stay alive, and I<NB> the number of alive neighbor cells
which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
"s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.

Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
higher number of neighbor cells.
For example the number 6153 = C<(12E<lt>E<lt>9)+9> specifies a stay alive
rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".

Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
a dead cell.


=item B<size, s>

Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

If B<filename> is specified, the size is set by default to the
same size of the input file. If B<size> is set, it must contain
the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
that file is centered in the larger resulting area.

If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
(used for a randomly generated initial grid).


=item B<stitch>

If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.


=item B<mold>

Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from B<death_color> to
B<mold_color> with a step of B<mold>. B<mold> can have a
value from 0 to 255.


=item B<life_color>

Set the color of living (or new born) cells.


=item B<death_color>

Set the color of dead cells. If B<mold> is set, this is the first color
used to represent a dead cell.


=item B<mold_color>

Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.

For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the B<"Color" section in the
ffmpeg-utils manual>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Read a grid from F<pattern>, and center it on a grid of size
300x300 pixels:
	
	life=f=pattern:s=300x300



=item *

Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
	
	life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200



=item *

Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
	
	life=rule=S14/B34



=item *

Full example with slow death effect (mold) using B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16


=back



=head2 perlin

Generate Perlin noise.

Perlin noise is a kind of noise with local continuity in space. This
can be used to generate patterns with continuity in space and time,
e.g. to simulate smoke, fluids, or terrain.

In case more than one octave is specified through the B<octaves>
option, Perlin noise is generated as a sum of components, each one
with doubled frequency. In this case the B<persistence> option
specify the ratio of the amplitude with respect to the previous
component. More octave components enable to specify more high
frequency details in the generated noise (e.g. small size variations
due to boulders in a generated terrain).


=head3 Options


=over 4



=item B<size, s>

Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<320x240>.


=item B<rate, r>

Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream, expressed as a
number of frames per second. Default value is C<25>.


=item B<octaves>

Specify the total number of components making up the noise, each one
with doubled frequency. Default value is C<1>.


=item B<persistence>

Set the ratio used to compute the amplitude of the next octave
component with respect to the previous component amplitude. Default
value is C<1>.


=item B<xscale>


=item B<yscale>

Define a scale factor used to multiple the x, y coordinates. This can
be useful to define an effect with a pattern stretched along the x or
y axis. Default value is C<1>.


=item B<tscale>

Define a scale factor used to multiple the time coordinate. This can
be useful to change the time variation speed. Default value is C<1>.


=item B<random_mode>

Set random mode used to compute initial pattern.

Supported values are:

=over 4


=item B<random>

Compute and use random seed.


=item B<ken>

Use the predefined initial pattern defined by Ken Perlin in the
original article, can be useful to compare the output with other
sources.


=item B<seed>

Use the value specified by B<random_seed> option.

=back


Default value is C<random>.


=item B<random_seed, seed>

When B<random_mode> is set to I<random_seed>, use this value
to compute the initial pattern. Default value is C<0>.

=back



=head3 Examples


=over 4


=item *

Generate single component:
	
	perlin



=item *

Use Perlin noise with 7 components, each one with a halved contribution
to total amplitude:
	
	perlin=octaves=7:persistence=0.5



=item *

Chain Perlin noise with the B<lutyuv> to generate a black&white
effect:
	
	perlin=octaves=3:tscale=0.3,lutyuv=y='if(lt(val\,128)\,255\,0)'



=item *

Stretch noise along the y axis, and convert gray level to red-only
signal:
	
	perlin=octaves=7:tscale=0.4:yscale=0.3,lutrgb=r=val:b=0:g=0


=back



=head2 qrencodesrc


Generate a QR code using the libqrencode library (see
E<lt>B<https://fukuchi.org/works/qrencode/>E<gt>).

To enable the compilation of this source, you need to configure FFmpeg with
C<--enable-libqrencode>.

The QR code is generated from the provided text or text pattern. The
corresponding QR code is scaled and put in the video output according to the
specified output size options.

In case no text is specified, the QR code is not generated, but an empty colored
output is returned instead.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<qrcode_width, q>


=item B<padded_qrcode_width, Q>

Specify an expression for the width of the rendered QR code, with and without
padding. The I<qrcode_width> expression can reference the value set by the
I<padded_qrcode_width> expression, and vice versa.
By default I<padded_qrcode_width> is set to I<qrcode_width>, meaning that
there is no padding.

These expressions are evaluated only once, when initializing the source.
See the B<qrencode Expressions> section for details.

Note that some of the constants are missing for the source (for example the
I<x> or I<t> or ¸I<n>), since they only makes sense when evaluating the
expression for each frame rather than at initialization time.


=item B<rate, r>

Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
I<frame_rate_num>/I<frame_rate_den>, an integer number, a floating point
number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
"25".


=item B<case_sensitive, cs>

Instruct libqrencode to use case sensitive encoding. This is enabled by
default. This can be disabled to reduce the QR encoding size.


=item B<level, l>

Specify the QR encoding error correction level. With an higher correction level,
the encoding size will increase but the code will be more robust to corruption.
Lower level is I<L>.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<L>


=item B<M>


=item B<Q>


=item B<H>


=back



=item B<expansion>

Select how the input text is expanded. Can be either C<none>, or
C<normal> (default). See the B<qrencode Text expansion>
section for details.


=item B<text>


=item B<textfile>

Define the text to be rendered. In case neither is specified, no QR is encoded
(just an empty colored frame).

In case expansion is enabled, the text is treated as a text template, using the
qrencode expansion mechanism. See the B<qrencode
Text expansion> section for details.


=item B<background_color, bc>


=item B<foreground_color, fc>

Set the QR code and background color. The default value of
I<foreground_color> is "black", the default value of I<background_color>
is "white".

For the syntax of the color options, check the B<"Color"
section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the specified text with the default size:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=www.ffmpeg.org



=item *

Same as below, but select blue on pink colors:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=www.ffmpeg.org:bc=pink:fc=blue



=item *

Generate a QR code with width of 200 pixels and padding, making the padded width
4/3 of the QR code width:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=www.ffmpeg.org:q=200:Q=4/3*q



=item *

Generate a QR code with padded width of 200 pixels and padding, making the QR
code width 3/4 of the padded width:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=www.ffmpeg.org:Q=200:q=3/4*Q



=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the frame number:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=%{n}



=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the GMT timestamp:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=%{gmtime}



=item *

Generate a QR code encoding the timestamp expressed as a float:
	
	qrencodesrc=text=%{pts}



=back


















=head2 allrgb, allyuv, color, colorchart, colorspectrum, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, pal75bars, pal100bars, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc, testsrc2, yuvtestsrc


The C<allrgb> source returns frames of size 4096x4096 of all rgb colors.

The C<allyuv> source returns frames of size 4096x4096 of all yuv colors.

The C<color> source provides an uniformly colored input.

The C<colorchart> source provides a colors checker chart.

The C<colorspectrum> source provides a color spectrum input.

The C<haldclutsrc> source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
B<haldclut> filter.

The C<nullsrc> source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
source for filters which ignore the input data.

The C<pal75bars> source generates a color bars pattern, based on
EBU PAL recommendations with 75% color levels.

The C<pal100bars> source generates a color bars pattern, based on
EBU PAL recommendations with 100% color levels.

The C<rgbtestsrc> source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
stripe from top to bottom.

The C<smptebars> source generates a color bars pattern, based on
the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.

The C<smptehdbars> source generates a color bars pattern, based on
the SMPTE RP 219-2002.

The C<testsrc> source generates a test video pattern, showing a
color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
intended for testing purposes.

The C<testsrc2> source is similar to testsrc, but supports more
pixel formats instead of just C<rgb24>. This allows using it as an
input for other tests without requiring a format conversion.

The C<yuvtestsrc> source generates an YUV test pattern. You should
see a y, cb and cr stripe from top to bottom.

The sources accept the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<level>

Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the C<haldclutsrc>
source. A level of C<N> generates a picture of C<N*N*N> by C<N*N*N>
pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
coded on a C<1/(N*N)> scale.


=item B<color, c>

Specify the color of the source, only available in the C<color>
source. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.


=item B<size, s>

Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
The default value is C<320x240>.

This option is not available with the C<allrgb>, C<allyuv>, and
C<haldclutsrc> filters.


=item B<rate, r>

Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
I<frame_rate_num>/I<frame_rate_den>, an integer number, a floating point
number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
"25".


=item B<duration, d>

Set the duration of the sourced video. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
supposed to be generated forever.

Since the frame rate is used as time base, all frames including the last one
will have their full duration. If the specified duration is not a multiple
of the frame duration, it will be rounded up.


=item B<sar>

Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.


=item B<alpha>

Specify the alpha (opacity) of the background, only available in the
C<testsrc2> source. The value must be between 0 (fully transparent) and
255 (fully opaque, the default).


=item B<decimals, n>

Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
C<testsrc> source.

The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
value. Default value is 0.


=item B<type>

Set the type of the color spectrum, only available in the
C<colorspectrum> source. Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<black>


=item B<white>


=item B<all>


=back



=item B<patch_size>

Set patch size of single color patch, only available in the
C<colorchart> source. Default is C<64x64>.


=item B<preset>

Set colorchecker colors preset, only available in the
C<colorchart> source.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<reference>


=item B<skintones>


=back


Default value is C<reference>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second:
	
	testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10



=item *

The following graph description will generate a red source
with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
frames per second:
	
	color=c=red@0.2:s=qcif:r=10



=item *

If the input content is to be ignored, C<nullsrc> can be used. The
following command generates noise in the luma plane by employing
the C<geq> filter:
	
	nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128


=back



=head3 Commands


The C<color> source supports the following commands:


=over 4


=item B<c, color>

Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
corresponding B<color> option.

=back



=head2 openclsrc


Generate video using an OpenCL program.


=over 4



=item B<source>

OpenCL program source file.


=item B<kernel>

Kernel name in program.


=item B<size, s>

Size of frames to generate.  This must be set.


=item B<format>

Pixel format to use for the generated frames.  This must be set.


=item B<rate, r>

Number of frames generated every second.  Default value is '25'.


=back


For details of how the program loading works, see the B<program_opencl>
filter.

Example programs:


=over 4


=item *

Generate a colour ramp by setting pixel values from the position of the pixel
in the output image.  (Note that this will work with all pixel formats, but
the generated output will not be the same.)
	
	__kernel void ramp(__write_only image2d_t dst,
	                   unsigned int index)
	{
	    int2 loc = (int2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	
	    float4 val;
	    val.xy = val.zw = convert_float2(loc) / convert_float2(get_image_dim(dst));
	
	    write_imagef(dst, loc, val);
	}



=item *

Generate a Sierpinski carpet pattern, panning by a single pixel each frame.
	
	__kernel void sierpinski_carpet(__write_only image2d_t dst,
	                                unsigned int index)
	{
	    int2 loc = (int2)(get_global_id(0), get_global_id(1));
	
	    float4 value = 0.0f;
	    int x = loc.x + index;
	    int y = loc.y + index;
	    while (x > 0 || y > 0) {
	        if (x % 3 == 1 && y % 3 == 1) {
	            value = 1.0f;
	            break;
	        }
	        x /= 3;
	        y /= 3;
	    }
	
	    write_imagef(dst, loc, value);
	}



=back



=head2 sierpinski


Generate a Sierpinski carpet/triangle fractal, and randomly pan around.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the B<"Video
size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>. Default value is "640x480".


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<seed>

Set seed which is used for random panning.


=item B<jump>

Set max jump for single pan destination. Allowed range is from 1 to 10000.


=item B<type>

Set fractal type, can be default C<carpet> or C<triangle>.

=back



=head2 zoneplate

Generate a zoneplate test video pattern.

This source accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the B<"Video
size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>. Default value is "320x240".


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<duration, d>

Set the duration of the sourced video. See
B<the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual>
for the accepted syntax.

If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
supposed to be generated forever.


=item B<sar>

Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.


=item B<precision>

Set precision in bits for look-up table for sine calculations. Default value is 10.
Allowed range is from 4 to 16.


=item B<xo>

Set horizontal axis offset for output signal. Default value is 0.


=item B<yo>

Set vertical axis offset for output signal. Default value is 0.


=item B<to>

Set time axis offset for output signal. Default value is 0.


=item B<k0>

Set 0-order, constant added to signal phase. Default value is 0.


=item B<kx>

Set 1-order, phase factor multiplier for horizontal axis. Default value is 0.


=item B<ky>

Set 1-order, phase factor multiplier for vertical axis. Default value is 0.


=item B<kt>

Set 1-order, phase factor multiplier for time axis. Default value is 0.


=item B<kxt, kyt, kxy>

Set phase factor multipliers for combination of spatial and temporal axis.
Default value is 0.


=item B<kx2>

Set 2-order, phase factor multiplier for horizontal axis. Default value is 0.


=item B<ky2>

Set 2-order, phase factor multiplier for vertical axis. Default value is 0.


=item B<kt2>

Set 2-order, phase factor multiplier for time axis. Default value is 0.


=item B<ku>

Set the constant added to final phase to produce chroma-blue component of signal.
Default value is 0.


=item B<kv>

Set the constant added to final phase to produce chroma-red component of signal.
Default value is 0.

=back



=head3 Commands


This source supports the some above options as B<commands>.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Generate horizontal color sine sweep:
	
	zoneplate=ku=512:kv=0:kt2=0:kx2=256:s=wvga:xo=-426:kt=11



=item *

Generate vertical color sine sweep:
	
	zoneplate=ku=512:kv=0:kt2=0:ky2=156:s=wvga:yo=-240:kt=11



=item *

Generate circular zone-plate:
	
	zoneplate=ku=512:kv=100:kt2=0:ky2=256:kx2=556:s=wvga:yo=0:kt=11


=back




=head1 VIDEO SINKS


Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.


=head2 buffersink


Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
graph.

This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
through the interface defined in F<libavfilter/buffersink.h>
or the options system.

It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
parameter to C<avfilter_init_filter> for initialization.


=head2 nullsink


Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
tools.



=head1 MULTIMEDIA FILTERS


Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.


=head2 a3dscope


Convert input audio to 3d scope video output.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<hd720>.


=item B<fov>

Set the camera field of view. Default is 90 degrees.
Allowed range is from 40 to 150.


=item B<roll>

Set the camera roll.


=item B<pitch>

Set the camera pitch.


=item B<yaw>

Set the camera yaw.


=item B<xzoom>

Set the camera zoom on X-axis.


=item B<yzoom>

Set the camera zoom on Y-axis.


=item B<zzoom>

Set the camera zoom on Z-axis.


=item B<xpos>

Set the camera position on X-axis.


=item B<ypos>

Set the camera position on Y-axis.


=item B<zpos>

Set the camera position on Z-axis.


=item B<length>

Set the length of displayed audio waves in number of frames.

=back



=head3 Commands


Filter supports the some above options as B<commands>.


=head2 abitscope


Convert input audio to a video output, displaying the audio bit scope.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<1024x256>.


=item B<colors>

Specify list of colors separated by space or by '|' which will be used to
draw channels. Unrecognized or missing colors will be replaced
by white color.


=item B<mode, m>

Set output mode. Can be C<bars> or C<trace>. Default is C<bars>.

=back



=head2 adrawgraph

Draw a graph using input audio metadata.

See B<drawgraph>


=head2 agraphmonitor


See B<graphmonitor>.


=head2 ahistogram


Convert input audio to a video output, displaying the volume histogram.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<dmode>

Specify how histogram is calculated.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<single>

Use single histogram for all channels.

=item B<separate>

Use separate histogram for each channel.

=back

Default is C<single>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
value is "25".


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<hd720>.


=item B<scale>

Set display scale.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<log>

logarithmic

=item B<sqrt>

square root

=item B<cbrt>

cubic root

=item B<lin>

linear

=item B<rlog>

reverse logarithmic

=back

Default is C<log>.


=item B<ascale>

Set amplitude scale.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<log>

logarithmic

=item B<lin>

linear

=back

Default is C<log>.


=item B<acount>

Set how much frames to accumulate in histogram.
Default is 1. Setting this to -1 accumulates all frames.


=item B<rheight>

Set histogram ratio of window height.


=item B<slide>

Set sonogram sliding.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<replace>

replace old rows with new ones.

=item B<scroll>

scroll from top to bottom.

=back

Default is C<replace>.


=item B<hmode>

Set histogram mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<abs>

Use absolute values of samples.

=item B<sign>

Use untouched values of samples.

=back

Default is C<abs>.

=back



=head2 aphasemeter


Measures phase of input audio, which is exported as metadata C<lavfi.aphasemeter.phase>,
representing mean phase of current audio frame. A video output can also be produced and is
enabled by default. The audio is passed through as first output.

Audio will be rematrixed to stereo if it has a different channel layout. Phase value is in
range C<[-1, 1]> where C<-1> means left and right channels are completely out of phase
and C<1> means channels are in phase.

The filter accepts the following options, all related to its video output:


=over 4


=item B<rate, r>

Set the output frame rate. Default value is C<25>.


=item B<size, s>

Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<800x400>.


=item B<rc>


=item B<gc>


=item B<bc>

Specify the red, green, blue contrast. Default values are C<2>,
C<7> and C<1>.
Allowed range is C<[0, 255]>.


=item B<mpc>

Set color which will be used for drawing median phase. If color is
C<none> which is default, no median phase value will be drawn.


=item B<video>

Enable video output. Default is enabled.

=back



=head3 phasing detection


The filter also detects out of phase and mono sequences in stereo streams.
It logs the sequence start, end and duration when it lasts longer or as long as the minimum set.

The filter accepts the following options for this detection:


=over 4


=item B<phasing>

Enable mono and out of phase detection. Default is disabled.


=item B<tolerance, t>

Set phase tolerance for mono detection, in amplitude ratio. Default is C<0>.
Allowed range is C<[0, 1]>.


=item B<angle, a>

Set angle threshold for out of phase detection, in degree. Default is C<170>.
Allowed range is C<[90, 180]>.


=item B<duration, d>

Set mono or out of phase duration until notification, expressed in seconds. Default is C<2>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Complete example with B<ffmpeg> to detect 1 second of mono with 0.001 phase tolerance:
	
	ffmpeg -i stereo.wav -af aphasemeter=video=0:phasing=1:duration=1:tolerance=0.001 -f null -


=back



=head2 avectorscope


Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
scope.

The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
audio stream. A monaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<mode, m>

Set the vectorscope mode.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<lissajous>

Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.


=item B<lissajous_xy>

Same as above but not rotated.


=item B<polar>

Shape resembling half of circle.

=back


Default value is B<lissajous>.


=item B<size, s>

Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<400x400>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set the output frame rate. Default value is C<25>.


=item B<rc>


=item B<gc>


=item B<bc>


=item B<ac>

Specify the red, green, blue and alpha contrast. Default values are C<40>,
C<160>, C<80> and C<255>.
Allowed range is C<[0, 255]>.


=item B<rf>


=item B<gf>


=item B<bf>


=item B<af>

Specify the red, green, blue and alpha fade. Default values are C<15>,
C<10>, C<5> and C<5>.
Allowed range is C<[0, 255]>.


=item B<zoom>

Set the zoom factor. Default value is C<1>. Allowed range is C<[0, 10]>.
Values lower than I<1> will auto adjust zoom factor to maximal possible value.


=item B<draw>

Set the vectorscope drawing mode.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<dot>

Draw dot for each sample.


=item B<line>

Draw line between previous and current sample.


=item B<aaline>

Draw anti-aliased line between previous and current sample.

=back


Default value is B<dot>.


=item B<scale>

Specify amplitude scale of audio samples.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

Linear.


=item B<sqrt>

Square root.


=item B<cbrt>

Cubic root.


=item B<log>

Logarithmic.

=back



=item B<swap>

Swap left channel axis with right channel axis.


=item B<mirror>

Mirror axis.


=over 4


=item B<none>

No mirror.


=item B<x>

Mirror only x axis.


=item B<y>

Mirror only y axis.


=item B<xy>

Mirror both axis.

=back



=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Complete example using B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
	             [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the all above options as commands except options C<size> and C<rate>.


=head2 bench, abench


Benchmark part of a filtergraph.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<action>

Start or stop a timer.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<start>

Get the current time, set it as frame metadata (using the key
C<lavfi.bench.start_time>), and forward the frame to the next filter.


=item B<stop>

Get the current time and fetch the C<lavfi.bench.start_time> metadata from
the input frame metadata to get the time difference. Time difference, average,
maximum and minimum time (respectively C<t>, C<avg>, C<max> and
C<min>) are then printed. The timestamps are expressed in seconds.

=back


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Benchmark B<selectivecolor> filter:
	
	bench=start,selectivecolor=reds=-.2 .12 -.49,bench=stop


=back



=head2 concat


Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
other.

The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
also be the number of streams at output.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<n>

Set the number of segments. Default is 2.


=item B<v>

Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
streams in each segment. Default is 1.


=item B<a>

Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
streams in each segment. Default is 0.


=item B<unsafe>

Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.


=back


The filter has I<v>+I<a> outputs: first I<v> video outputs, then
I<a> audio outputs.

There are I<n>x(I<v>+I<a>) inputs: first the inputs for the first
segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
segment, etc.

Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
audio streams with silence.

For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.

All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
explicitly by the user.

Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
(video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
	
	ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
	  '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
	   concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
	  -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv



=item *

Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
(a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
	
	movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
	movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
	[v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]

Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.


=back



=head3 Commands


This filter supports the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<next>

Close the current segment and step to the next one

=back




=head2 ebur128


EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream and analyzes its loudness
level. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
Momentary loudness (identified by C<M>), Short-term loudness (C<S>),
Integrated loudness (C<I>) and Loudness Range (C<LRA>).

The filter can only analyze streams which have
sample format is double-precision floating point. The input stream will be converted to
this specification, if needed. Users may need to insert aformat and/or aresample filters
after this filter to obtain the original parameters.

The filter also has a video output (see the I<video> option) with a real
time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds), but can optionally be configured
to instead display short-term loudness (see I<gauge>).

The green area marks a  +/- 1LU target range around the target loudness
(-23LUFS by default, unless modified through I<target>).

More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
E<lt>B<http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness>E<gt>.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<video>

Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
activated. Default is C<0>.


=item B<size>

Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default and minimum resolution is C<640x480>.


=item B<meter>

Set the EBU scale meter. Default is C<9>. Common values are C<9> and
C<18>, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
other integer value between this range is allowed.


=item B<metadata>

Set metadata injection. If set to C<1>, the audio input will be segmented
into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
in metadata.  All the metadata keys are prefixed with C<lavfi.r128.>.

Default is C<0>.


=item B<framelog>

Force the frame logging level.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<quiet>

logging disabled

=item B<info>

information logging level

=item B<verbose>

verbose logging level

=back


By default, the logging level is set to I<info>. If the B<video> or
the B<metadata> options are set, it switches to I<verbose>.


=item B<peak>

Set peak mode(s).

Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a C<flag> type). Possible
values are:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Disable any peak mode (default).

=item B<sample>

Enable sample-peak mode.

Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
for sample-peak (identified by C<SPK>).

=item B<true>

Enable true-peak mode.

If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
(identified by C<TPK>) and true-peak per frame (identified by C<FTPK>).
This mode requires a build with C<libswresample>.

=back



=item B<dualmono>

Treat mono input files as "dual mono". If a mono file is intended for playback
on a stereo system, its EBU R128 measurement will be perceptually incorrect.
If set to C<true>, this option will compensate for this effect.
Multi-channel input files are not affected by this option.


=item B<panlaw>

Set a specific pan law to be used for the measurement of dual mono files.
This parameter is optional, and has a default value of -3.01dB.


=item B<target>

Set a specific target level (in LUFS) used as relative zero in the visualization.
This parameter is optional and has a default value of -23LUFS as specified
by EBU R128. However, material published online may prefer a level of -16LUFS
(e.g. for use with podcasts or video platforms).


=item B<gauge>

Set the value displayed by the gauge. Valid values are C<momentary> and s
C<shortterm>. By default the momentary value will be used, but in certain
scenarios it may be more useful to observe the short term value instead (e.g.
live mixing).


=item B<scale>

Sets the display scale for the loudness. Valid parameters are C<absolute>
(in LUFS) or C<relative> (LU) relative to the target. This only affects the
video output, not the summary or continuous log output.


=item B<integrated>

Read-only exported value for measured integrated loudness, in LUFS.


=item B<range>

Read-only exported value for measured loudness range, in LU.


=item B<lra_low>

Read-only exported value for measured LRA low, in LUFS.


=item B<lra_high>

Read-only exported value for measured LRA high, in LUFS.


=item B<sample_peak>

Read-only exported value for measured sample peak, in dBFS.


=item B<true_peak>

Read-only exported value for measured true peak, in dBFS.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Real-time graph using B<ffplay>, with a EBU scale meter +18:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"



=item *

Run an analysis with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -


=back



=head2 interleave, ainterleave


Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.

C<interleave> works with video inputs, C<ainterleave> with audio.

These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
queued frame to the output.

Input streams must have well defined, monotonically increasing frame
timestamp values.

In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.

For example consider the case when one input is a C<select> filter
which always drops input frames. The C<interleave> filter will keep
reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
to output until the input sends an end-of-stream signal.

Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
the queue is already filled.

These filters accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<nb_inputs, n>

Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.


=item B<duration>

How to determine the end-of-stream.


=over 4


=item B<longest>

The duration of the longest input. (default)


=item B<shortest>

The duration of the shortest input.


=item B<first>

The duration of the first input.

=back



=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Interleave frames belonging to different streams using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi



=item *

Add flickering blur effect:
	
	select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave


=back



=head2 latency, alatency

Measure filtering latency.

Report previous filter filtering latency, delay in number of audio samples for audio filters
or number of video frames for video filters.

On end of input stream, filter will report min and max measured latency for previous running filter
in filtergraph.


=head2 metadata, ametadata


Manipulate frame metadata.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Set mode of operation of the filter.

Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<select>

If both C<value> and C<key> is set, select frames
which have such metadata. If only C<key> is set, select
every frame that has such key in metadata.


=item B<add>

Add new metadata C<key> and C<value>. If key is already available
do nothing.


=item B<modify>

Modify value of already present key.


=item B<delete>

If C<value> is set, delete only keys that have such value.
Otherwise, delete key. If C<key> is not set, delete all metadata values in
the frame.


=item B<print>

Print key and its value if metadata was found. If C<key> is not set print all
metadata values available in frame.

=back



=item B<key>

Set key used with all modes. Must be set for all modes except C<print> and C<delete>.


=item B<value>

Set metadata value which will be used. This option is mandatory for
C<modify> and C<add> mode.


=item B<function>

Which function to use when comparing metadata value and C<value>.

Can be one of following:


=over 4


=item B<same_str>

Values are interpreted as strings, returns true if metadata value is same as C<value>.


=item B<starts_with>

Values are interpreted as strings, returns true if metadata value starts with
the C<value> option string.


=item B<less>

Values are interpreted as floats, returns true if metadata value is less than C<value>.


=item B<equal>

Values are interpreted as floats, returns true if C<value> is equal with metadata value.


=item B<greater>

Values are interpreted as floats, returns true if metadata value is greater than C<value>.


=item B<expr>

Values are interpreted as floats, returns true if expression from option C<expr>
evaluates to true.


=item B<ends_with>

Values are interpreted as strings, returns true if metadata value ends with
the C<value> option string.

=back



=item B<expr>

Set expression which is used when C<function> is set to C<expr>.
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
constants:


=over 4


=item B<VALUE1, FRAMEVAL>

Float representation of C<value> from metadata key.


=item B<VALUE2, USERVAL>

Float representation of C<value> as supplied by user in C<value> option.

=back



=item B<file>

If specified in C<print> mode, output is written to the named file. Instead of
plain filename any writable url can be specified. Filename ``-'' is a shorthand
for standard output. If C<file> option is not set, output is written to the log
with AV_LOG_INFO loglevel.


=item B<direct>

Reduces buffering in print mode when output is written to a URL set using I<file>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Print all metadata values for frames with key C<lavfi.signalstats.YDIF> with values
between 0 and 1.
	
	signalstats,metadata=print:key=lavfi.signalstats.YDIF:value=0:function=expr:expr='between(VALUE1,0,1)'


=item *

Print silencedetect output to file F<metadata.txt>.
	
	silencedetect,ametadata=mode=print:file=metadata.txt


=item *

Direct all metadata to a pipe with file descriptor 4.
	
	metadata=mode=print:file='pipe\:4'


=back



=head2 perms, aperms


Set read/write permissions for the output frames.

These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
following filter in the filtergraph.

The filters accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Select the permissions mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<none>

Do nothing. This is the default.

=item B<ro>

Set all the output frames read-only.

=item B<rw>

Set all the output frames directly writable.

=item B<toggle>

Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.

=item B<random>

Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.

=back



=item B<seed>

Set the seed for the I<random> mode, must be an integer included between
C<0> and C<UINT32_MAX>. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
C<-1>, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
basis.

=back


Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
following filter. Inserting a B<format> or B<aformat> filter before the
perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.


=head2 realtime, arealtime


Slow down filtering to match real time approximately.

These filters will pause the filtering for a variable amount of time to
match the output rate with the input timestamps.
They are similar to the B<re> option to C<ffmpeg>.

They accept the following options:


=over 4


=item B<limit>

Time limit for the pauses. Any pause longer than that will be considered
a timestamp discontinuity and reset the timer. Default is 2 seconds.

=item B<speed>

Speed factor for processing. The value must be a float larger than zero.
Values larger than 1.0 will result in faster than realtime processing,
smaller will slow processing down. The I<limit> is automatically adapted
accordingly. Default is 1.0.

A processing speed faster than what is possible without these filters cannot
be achieved.

=back



=head3 Commands


Both filters supports the all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 segment, asegment


Split single input stream into multiple streams.

This filter does opposite of concat filters.

C<segment> works on video frames, C<asegment> on audio samples.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<timestamps>

Timestamps of output segments separated by '|'. The first segment will run
from the beginning of the input stream. The last segment will run until
the end of the input stream


=item B<frames, samples>

Exact frame/sample count to split the segments.

=back


In all cases, prefixing an each segment with '+' will make it relative to the
previous segment.


=head3 Examples



=over 4



=item *

Split input audio stream into three output audio streams, starting at start of input audio stream
and storing that in 1st output audio stream, then following at 60th second and storing than in 2nd
output audio stream, and last after 150th second of input audio stream store in 3rd output audio stream:
	
	asegment=timestamps="60|150"



=back




=head2 select, aselect


Select frames to pass in output.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<expr, e>

Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.

If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.

If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
C<ceil(val)-1>, assuming that the input index starts from 0.

For example a value of C<1.2> corresponds to the output with index
C<ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1>, that is the second output.


=item B<outputs, n>

Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.

=back


The expression can contain the following constants:


=over 4


=item B<n>

The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.


=item B<selected_n>

The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.


=item B<prev_selected_n>

The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.


=item B<TB>

The timebase of the input timestamps.


=item B<pts>

The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered frame,
expressed in I<TB> units. It's NAN if undefined.


=item B<t>

The PTS of the filtered frame,
expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.


=item B<prev_pts>

The PTS of the previously filtered frame. It's NAN if undefined.


=item B<prev_selected_pts>

The PTS of the last previously filtered frame. It's NAN if undefined.


=item B<prev_selected_t>

The PTS of the last previously selected frame, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.


=item B<start_pts>

The first PTS in the stream which is not NAN. It remains NAN if not found.


=item B<start_t>

The first PTS, in seconds, in the stream which is not NAN. It remains NAN if not found.


=item B<pict_type> I<(video only)>

The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
values:

=over 4


=item B<I>


=item B<P>


=item B<B>


=item B<S>


=item B<SI>


=item B<SP>


=item B<BI>


=back



=item B<interlace_type> I<(video only)>

The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:

=over 4


=item B<PROGRESSIVE>

The frame is progressive (not interlaced).

=item B<TOPFIRST>

The frame is top-field-first.

=item B<BOTTOMFIRST>

The frame is bottom-field-first.

=back



=item B<consumed_sample_n> I<(audio only)>

the number of selected samples before the current frame


=item B<samples_n> I<(audio only)>

the number of samples in the current frame


=item B<sample_rate> I<(audio only)>

the input sample rate


=item B<key>

This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.


=item B<pos>

the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
is not available (e.g. for synthetic video); deprecated, do not use


=item B<scene> I<(video only)>

value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)


=item B<concatdec_select>

The concat demuxer can select only part of a concat input file by setting an
inpoint and an outpoint, but the output packets may not be entirely contained
in the selected interval. By using this variable, it is possible to skip frames
generated by the concat demuxer which are not exactly contained in the selected
interval.

This works by comparing the frame pts against the I<lavf.concat.start_time>
and the I<lavf.concat.duration> packet metadata values which are also
present in the decoded frames.

The I<concatdec_select> variable is -1 if the frame pts is at least
start_time and either the duration metadata is missing or the frame pts is less
than start_time + duration, 0 otherwise, and NaN if the start_time metadata is
missing.

That basically means that an input frame is selected if its pts is within the
interval set by the concat demuxer.


=item B<iw> I<(video only)>

Represents the width of the input video frame.


=item B<ih> I<(video only)>

Represents the height of the input video frame.


=item B<view> I<(video only)>

View ID for multi-view video.


=back


The default value of the select expression is "1".


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Select all frames in input:
	
	select


The example above is the same as:
	
	select=1



=item *

Skip all frames:
	
	select=0



=item *

Select only I-frames:
	
	select='eq(pict_type\,I)'



=item *

Select one frame every 100:
	
	select='not(mod(n\,100))'



=item *

Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
	
	select=between(t\,10\,20)



=item *

Select only I-frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
	
	select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)



=item *

Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
	
	select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'



=item *

Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number E<gt> 100:
	
	aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'



=item *

Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
	
	ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png


Comparing I<scene> against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
choice.


=item *

Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
	
	select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h



=item *

Select useful frames from an ffconcat file which is using inpoints and
outpoints but where the source files are not intra frame only.
	
	ffmpeg -copyts -vsync 0 -segment_time_metadata 1 -i input.ffconcat -vf select=concatdec_select -af aselect=concatdec_select output.avi


=back



=head2 sendcmd, asendcmd


Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.

These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
filtergraph.

C<sendcmd> must be inserted between two video filters,
C<asendcmd> must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
from that they act the same way.

The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
with the I<commands> option, or in a file specified by the
I<filename> option.

These filters accept the following options:

=over 4


=item B<commands, c>

Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.

=item B<filename, f>

Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
filters.

=back



=head3 Commands syntax


A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
interval.

An interval is specified by the following syntax:
	
	<START>[-<END>] <COMMANDS>;


The time interval is specified by the I<START> and I<END> times.
I<END> is optional and defaults to the maximum time.

The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
it is included in the interval [I<START>, I<END>), that is when
the time is greater or equal to I<START> and is lesser than
I<END>.

I<COMMANDS> consists of a sequence of one or more command
specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval.  The
syntax of a command specification is given by:
	
	[<FLAGS>] <TARGET> <COMMAND> <ARG>


I<FLAGS> is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
enclosed between "[" and "]".

The following flags are recognized:

=over 4


=item B<enter>

The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
current is.


=item B<leave>

The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
current is not.


=item B<expr>

The command I<ARG> is interpreted as expression and result of
expression is passed as I<ARG>.

The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
constants:


=over 4


=item B<POS>

Original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
for the current frame. Deprecated, do not use.


=item B<PTS>

The presentation timestamp in input.


=item B<N>

The count of the input frame for video or audio, starting from 0.


=item B<T>

The time in seconds of the current frame.


=item B<TS>

The start time in seconds of the current command interval.


=item B<TE>

The end time in seconds of the current command interval.


=item B<TI>

The interpolated time of the current command interval, TI = (T - TS) / (TE - TS).


=item B<W>

The video frame width.


=item B<H>

The video frame height.

=back



=back


If I<FLAGS> is not specified, a default value of C<[enter]> is
assumed.

I<TARGET> specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
the filter class or a specific filter instance name.

I<COMMAND> specifies the name of the command for the target filter.

I<ARG> is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
the given I<COMMAND>.

Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
sequences of characters starting with C<#> until the end of line,
are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.

A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
follows:
	
	<COMMAND_FLAG>  ::= "enter" | "leave"
	<COMMAND_FLAGS> ::= <COMMAND_FLAG> [(+|"|")<COMMAND_FLAG>]
	<COMMAND>       ::= ["[" <COMMAND_FLAGS> "]"] <TARGET> <COMMAND> [<ARG>]
	<COMMANDS>      ::= <COMMAND> [,<COMMANDS>]
	<INTERVAL>      ::= <START>[-<END>] <COMMANDS>
	<INTERVALS>     ::= <INTERVAL>[;<INTERVALS>]



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
	
	asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo



=item *

Target a specific filter instance:
	
	asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo@my tempo 1.5',atempo@my



=item *

Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
	
	# show text in the interval 5-10
	5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
	         [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
	
	# desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
	15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
	          [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
	          [leave] hue s 1,
	          [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
	
	# apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
	25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)


A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
stored in a file F<test.cmd>, can be specified with:
	
	sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue


=back




=head2 setpts, asetpts


Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.

C<setpts> works on video frames, C<asetpts> on audio frames.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<expr>

The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.


=back


The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
constants:


=over 4


=item B<FRAME_RATE, FR>

frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video


=item B<PTS>

The presentation timestamp in input


=item B<N>

The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.


=item B<NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES>

The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
audio)


=item B<NB_SAMPLES, S>

The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)


=item B<SAMPLE_RATE, SR>

The audio sample rate.


=item B<STARTPTS>

The PTS of the first frame.


=item B<STARTT>

the time in seconds of the first frame


=item B<INTERLACED>

State whether the current frame is interlaced.


=item B<T>

the time in seconds of the current frame


=item B<POS>

original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
for the current frame; deprecated, do not use


=item B<PREV_INPTS>

The previous input PTS.


=item B<PREV_INT>

previous input time in seconds


=item B<PREV_OUTPTS>

The previous output PTS.


=item B<PREV_OUTT>

previous output time in seconds


=item B<RTCTIME>

The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
instead.


=item B<RTCSTART>

The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.


=item B<TB>

The timebase of the input timestamps.


=item B<T_CHANGE>

Time of the first frame after command was applied or time of the first frame if no commands.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Start counting PTS from zero
	
	setpts=PTS-STARTPTS



=item *

Apply fast motion effect:
	
	setpts=0.5*PTS



=item *

Apply slow motion effect:
	
	setpts=2.0*PTS



=item *

Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
	
	setpts=N/(25*TB)



=item *

Apply a random jitter effect of +/-100 TB units:
	
	setpts=PTS+randomi(0, -100\,100)



=item *

Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
	
	setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'



=item *

Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
	
	setpts=PTS+10/TB



=item *

Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
	
	setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'



=item *

Generate timestamps by counting samples:
	
	asetpts=N/SR/TB



=back



=head3 Commands


Both filters support all above options as B<commands>.


=head2 setrange


Force color range for the output video frame.

The C<setrange> filter marks the color range property for the
output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
following filters.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4



=item B<range>

Available values are:


=over 4


=item B<auto>

Keep the same color range property.


=item B<unspecified, unknown>

Set the color range as unspecified.


=item B<limited, tv, mpeg>

Set the color range as limited.


=item B<full, pc, jpeg>

Set the color range as full.

=back


=back



=head2 settb, asettb


Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4



=item B<expr, tb>

The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.


=back


The value for B<tb> is an arithmetic expression representing a
rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
audio only). Default value is "intb".


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Set the timebase to 1/25:
	
	settb=expr=1/25



=item *

Set the timebase to 1/10:
	
	settb=expr=0.1



=item *

Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
	
	settb=1+0.001



=item *

Set the timebase to 2*intb:
	
	settb=2*intb



=item *

Set the default timebase value:
	
	settb=AVTB


=back



=head2 showcqt

Convert input audio to a video output representing frequency spectrum
logarithmically using Brown-Puckette constant Q transform algorithm with
direct frequency domain coefficient calculation (but the transform itself
is not really constant Q, instead the Q factor is actually variable/clamped),
with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. It must be even. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<1920x1080>.


=item B<fps, rate, r>

Set the output frame rate. Default value is C<25>.


=item B<bar_h>

Set the bargraph height. It must be even. Default value is C<-1> which
computes the bargraph height automatically.


=item B<axis_h>

Set the axis height. It must be even. Default value is C<-1> which computes
the axis height automatically.


=item B<sono_h>

Set the sonogram height. It must be even. Default value is C<-1> which
computes the sonogram height automatically.


=item B<fullhd>

Set the fullhd resolution. This option is deprecated, use I<size>, I<s>
instead. Default value is C<1>.


=item B<sono_v, volume>

Specify the sonogram volume expression. It can contain variables:

=over 4


=item B<bar_v>

the I<bar_v> evaluated expression

=item B<frequency, freq, f>

the frequency where it is evaluated

=item B<timeclamp, tc>

the value of I<timeclamp> option

=back

and functions:

=over 4


=item B<a_weighting(f)>

A-weighting of equal loudness

=item B<b_weighting(f)>

B-weighting of equal loudness

=item B<c_weighting(f)>

C-weighting of equal loudness.

=back

Default value is C<16>.


=item B<bar_v, volume2>

Specify the bargraph volume expression. It can contain variables:

=over 4


=item B<sono_v>

the I<sono_v> evaluated expression

=item B<frequency, freq, f>

the frequency where it is evaluated

=item B<timeclamp, tc>

the value of I<timeclamp> option

=back

and functions:

=over 4


=item B<a_weighting(f)>

A-weighting of equal loudness

=item B<b_weighting(f)>

B-weighting of equal loudness

=item B<c_weighting(f)>

C-weighting of equal loudness.

=back

Default value is C<sono_v>.


=item B<sono_g, gamma>

Specify the sonogram gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast,
higher gamma makes the spectrum having more range. Default value is C<3>.
Acceptable range is C<[1, 7]>.


=item B<bar_g, gamma2>

Specify the bargraph gamma. Default value is C<1>. Acceptable range is
C<[1, 7]>.


=item B<bar_t>

Specify the bargraph transparency level. Lower value makes the bargraph sharper.
Default value is C<1>. Acceptable range is C<[0, 1]>.


=item B<timeclamp, tc>

Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
(such as bass guitar). Acceptable range is C<[0.002, 1]>. Default value is C<0.17>.


=item B<attack>

Set attack time in seconds. The default is C<0> (disabled). Otherwise, it
limits future samples by applying asymmetric windowing in time domain, useful
when low latency is required. Accepted range is C<[0, 1]>.


=item B<basefreq>

Specify the transform base frequency. Default value is C<20.01523126408007475>,
which is frequency 50 cents below E0. Acceptable range is C<[10, 100000]>.


=item B<endfreq>

Specify the transform end frequency. Default value is C<20495.59681441799654>,
which is frequency 50 cents above D#10. Acceptable range is C<[10, 100000]>.


=item B<coeffclamp>

This option is deprecated and ignored.


=item B<tlength>

Specify the transform length in time domain. Use this option to control accuracy
trade-off between time domain and frequency domain at every frequency sample.
It can contain variables:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, freq, f>

the frequency where it is evaluated

=item B<timeclamp, tc>

the value of I<timeclamp> option.

=back

Default value is C<384*tc/(384+tc*f)>.


=item B<count>

Specify the transform count for every video frame. Default value is C<6>.
Acceptable range is C<[1, 30]>.


=item B<fcount>

Specify the transform count for every single pixel. Default value is C<0>,
which makes it computed automatically. Acceptable range is C<[0, 10]>.


=item B<fontfile>

Specify font file for use with freetype to draw the axis. If not specified,
use embedded font. Note that drawing with font file or embedded font is not
implemented with custom I<basefreq> and I<endfreq>, use I<axisfile>
option instead.


=item B<font>

Specify fontconfig pattern. This has lower priority than I<fontfile>. The
C<:> in the pattern may be replaced by C<|> to avoid unnecessary
escaping.


=item B<fontcolor>

Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
integer value 0xRRGGBB. It can contain variables:

=over 4


=item B<frequency, freq, f>

the frequency where it is evaluated

=item B<timeclamp, tc>

the value of I<timeclamp> option

=back

and functions:

=over 4


=item B<midi(f)>

midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)

=item B<r(x), g(x), b(x)>

red, green, and blue value of intensity x.

=back

Default value is C<st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))>.


=item B<axisfile>

Specify image file to draw the axis. This option override I<fontfile> and
I<fontcolor> option.


=item B<axis, text>

Enable/disable drawing text to the axis. If it is set to C<0>, drawing to
the axis is disabled, ignoring I<fontfile> and I<axisfile> option.
Default value is C<1>.


=item B<csp>

Set colorspace. The accepted values are:

=over 4


=item B<unspecified>

Unspecified (default)


=item B<bt709>

BT.709


=item B<fcc>

FCC


=item B<bt470bg>

BT.470BG or BT.601-6 625


=item B<smpte170m>

SMPTE-170M or BT.601-6 525


=item B<smpte240m>

SMPTE-240M


=item B<bt2020ncl>

BT.2020 with non-constant luminance


=back



=item B<cscheme>

Set spectrogram color scheme. This is list of floating point values with format
C<left_r|left_g|left_b|right_r|right_g|right_b>.
The default is C<1|0.5|0|0|0.5|1>.


=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'



=item *

Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'



=item *

Playing at 1280x720:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=s=1280x720:count=4 [out0]'



=item *

Disable sonogram display:
	
	sono_h=0



=item *

A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
	                 asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'



=item *

Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
	                 asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'



=item *

Custom volume:
	
	bar_v=10:sono_v=bar_v*a_weighting(f)



=item *

Custom gamma, now spectrum is linear to the amplitude.
	
	bar_g=2:sono_g=2



=item *

Custom tlength equation:
	
	tc=0.33:tlength='st(0,0.17); 384*tc / (384 / ld(0) + tc*f /(1-ld(0))) + 384*tc / (tc*f / ld(0) + 384 /(1-ld(0)))'



=item *

Custom fontcolor and fontfile, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue:
	
	fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))':fontfile=myfont.ttf



=item *

Custom font using fontconfig:
	
	font='Courier New,Monospace,mono|bold'



=item *

Custom frequency range with custom axis using image file:
	
	axisfile=myaxis.png:basefreq=40:endfreq=10000


=back



=head2 showcwt


Convert input audio to video output representing frequency spectrum
using Continuous Wavelet Transform and Morlet wavelet.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option,
check the B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<640x512>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set the output frame rate. Default value is C<25>.


=item B<scale>

Set the frequency scale used. Allowed values are:


=over 4


=item B<linear>


=item B<log>


=item B<bark>


=item B<mel>


=item B<erbs>


=item B<sqrt>


=item B<cbrt>


=item B<qdrt>


=item B<fm>


=back

Default value is C<linear>.


=item B<iscale>

Set the intensity scale used. Allowed values are:


=over 4


=item B<linear>


=item B<log>


=item B<sqrt>


=item B<cbrt>


=item B<qdrt>


=back

Default value is C<log>.


=item B<min>

Set the minimum frequency that will be used in output.
Default is C<20> Hz.


=item B<max>

Set the maximum frequency that will be used in output.
Default is C<20000> Hz. The real frequency upper limit
depends on input audio's sample rate and such will be enforced
on this value when it is set to value greater than Nyquist frequency.


=item B<imin>

Set the minimum intensity that will be used in output.


=item B<imax>

Set the maximum intensity that will be used in output.


=item B<logb>

Set the logarithmic basis for brightness strength when
mapping calculated magnitude values to pixel values.
Allowed range is from C<0> to C<1>.
Default value is C<0.0001>.


=item B<deviation>

Set the frequency deviation.
Lower values than C<1> are more frequency oriented,
while higher values than C<1> are more time oriented.
Allowed range is from C<0> to C<10>.
Default value is C<1>.


=item B<pps>

Set the number of pixel output per each second in one row.
Allowed range is from C<1> to C<1024>.
Default value is C<64>.


=item B<mode>

Set the output visual mode. Allowed values are:


=over 4


=item B<magnitude>

Show magnitude.

=item B<phase>

Show only phase.

=item B<magphase>

Show combination of magnitude and phase.
Magnitude is mapped to brightness and phase to color.

=item B<channel>

Show unique color per channel magnitude.

=item B<stereo>

Show unique color per stereo difference.

=back


Default value is C<magnitude>.


=item B<slide>

Set the output slide method. Allowed values are:


=over 4


=item B<replace>


=item B<scroll>


=item B<frame>


=back



=item B<direction>

Set the direction method for output slide method. Allowed values are:


=over 4


=item B<lr>

Direction from left to right.

=item B<rl>

Direction from right to left.

=item B<ud>

Direction from up to down.

=item B<du>

Direction from down to up.

=back



=item B<bar>

Set the ratio of bargraph display to display size. Default is 0.


=item B<rotation>

Set color rotation, must be in [-1.0, 1.0] range.
Default value is C<0>.

=back



=head2 showfreqs


Convert input audio to video output representing the audio power spectrum.
Audio amplitude is on Y-axis while frequency is on X-axis.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify size of video. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default is C<1024x512>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set video rate. Default is C<25>.


=item B<mode>

Set display mode.
This set how each frequency bin will be represented.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<line>


=item B<bar>


=item B<dot>


=back

Default is C<bar>.


=item B<ascale>

Set amplitude scale.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

Linear scale.


=item B<sqrt>

Square root scale.


=item B<cbrt>

Cubic root scale.


=item B<log>

Logarithmic scale.

=back

Default is C<log>.


=item B<fscale>

Set frequency scale.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

Linear scale.


=item B<log>

Logarithmic scale.


=item B<rlog>

Reverse logarithmic scale.

=back

Default is C<lin>.


=item B<win_size>

Set window size. Allowed range is from 16 to 65536.

Default is C<2048>


=item B<win_func>

Set windowing function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back

Default is C<hanning>.


=item B<overlap>

Set window overlap. In range C<[0, 1]>. Default is C<1>,
which means optimal overlap for selected window function will be picked.


=item B<averaging>

Set time averaging. Setting this to 0 will display current maximal peaks.
Default is C<1>, which means time averaging is disabled.


=item B<colors>

Specify list of colors separated by space or by '|' which will be used to
draw channel frequencies. Unrecognized or missing colors will be replaced
by white color.


=item B<cmode>

Set channel display mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<combined>


=item B<separate>


=back

Default is C<combined>.


=item B<minamp>

Set minimum amplitude used in C<log> amplitude scaler.


=item B<data>

Set data display mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<magnitude>


=item B<phase>


=item B<delay>


=back

Default is C<magnitude>.


=item B<channels>

Set channels to use when processing audio. By default all are processed.

=back



=head2 showspatial


Convert stereo input audio to a video output, representing the spatial relationship
between two channels.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<512x512>.


=item B<win_size>

Set window size. Allowed range is from I<1024> to I<65536>. Default size is I<4096>.


=item B<win_func>

Set window function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hann>


=item B<hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back


Default value is C<hann>.


=item B<rate, r>

Set output framerate.

=back




=head2 showspectrum


Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
spectrum.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<640x512>.


=item B<slide>

Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<replace>

the samples start again on the left when they reach the right

=item B<scroll>

the samples scroll from right to left

=item B<fullframe>

frames are only produced when the samples reach the right

=item B<rscroll>

the samples scroll from left to right

=item B<lreplace>

the samples start again on the right when they reach the left

=back


Default value is C<replace>.


=item B<mode>

Specify display mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<combined>

all channels are displayed in the same row

=item B<separate>

all channels are displayed in separate rows

=back


Default value is B<combined>.


=item B<color>

Specify display color mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<channel>

each channel is displayed in a separate color

=item B<intensity>

each channel is displayed using the same color scheme

=item B<rainbow>

each channel is displayed using the rainbow color scheme

=item B<moreland>

each channel is displayed using the moreland color scheme

=item B<nebulae>

each channel is displayed using the nebulae color scheme

=item B<fire>

each channel is displayed using the fire color scheme

=item B<fiery>

each channel is displayed using the fiery color scheme

=item B<fruit>

each channel is displayed using the fruit color scheme

=item B<cool>

each channel is displayed using the cool color scheme

=item B<magma>

each channel is displayed using the magma color scheme

=item B<green>

each channel is displayed using the green color scheme

=item B<viridis>

each channel is displayed using the viridis color scheme

=item B<plasma>

each channel is displayed using the plasma color scheme

=item B<cividis>

each channel is displayed using the cividis color scheme

=item B<terrain>

each channel is displayed using the terrain color scheme

=back


Default value is B<channel>.


=item B<scale>

Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

linear

=item B<sqrt>

square root, default

=item B<cbrt>

cubic root

=item B<log>

logarithmic

=item B<4thrt>

4th root

=item B<5thrt>

5th root

=back


Default value is B<sqrt>.


=item B<fscale>

Specify frequency scale.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

linear

=item B<log>

logarithmic

=back


Default value is B<lin>.


=item B<saturation>

Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
alternative color scheme. C<0> is no saturation at all.
Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
Default value is C<1>.


=item B<win_func>

Set window function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hann>


=item B<hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back


Default value is C<hann>.


=item B<orientation>

Set orientation of time vs frequency axis. Can be C<vertical> or
C<horizontal>. Default is C<vertical>.


=item B<overlap>

Set ratio of overlap window. Default value is C<0>.
When value is C<1> overlap is set to recommended size for specific
window function currently used.


=item B<gain>

Set scale gain for calculating intensity color values.
Default value is C<1>.


=item B<data>

Set which data to display. Can be C<magnitude>, default or C<phase>,
or unwrapped phase: C<uphase>.


=item B<rotation>

Set color rotation, must be in [-1.0, 1.0] range.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<start>

Set start frequency from which to display spectrogram. Default is C<0>.


=item B<stop>

Set stop frequency to which to display spectrogram. Default is C<0>.


=item B<fps>

Set upper frame rate limit. Default is C<auto>, unlimited.


=item B<legend>

Draw time and frequency axes and legends. Default is disabled.


=item B<drange>

Set dynamic range used to calculate intensity color values. Default is 120 dBFS.
Allowed range is from 10 to 200.


=item B<limit>

Set upper limit of input audio samples volume in dBFS. Default is 0 dBFS.
Allowed range is from -100 to 100.


=item B<opacity>

Set opacity strength when using pixel format output with alpha component.

=back


The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
section.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
	
	showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log



=item *

Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using B<ffplay>:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
	             [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'


=back



=head2 showspectrumpic


Convert input audio to a single video frame, representing the audio frequency
spectrum.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<4096x2048>.


=item B<mode>

Specify display mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<combined>

all channels are displayed in the same row

=item B<separate>

all channels are displayed in separate rows

=back

Default value is B<combined>.


=item B<color>

Specify display color mode.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<channel>

each channel is displayed in a separate color

=item B<intensity>

each channel is displayed using the same color scheme

=item B<rainbow>

each channel is displayed using the rainbow color scheme

=item B<moreland>

each channel is displayed using the moreland color scheme

=item B<nebulae>

each channel is displayed using the nebulae color scheme

=item B<fire>

each channel is displayed using the fire color scheme

=item B<fiery>

each channel is displayed using the fiery color scheme

=item B<fruit>

each channel is displayed using the fruit color scheme

=item B<cool>

each channel is displayed using the cool color scheme

=item B<magma>

each channel is displayed using the magma color scheme

=item B<green>

each channel is displayed using the green color scheme

=item B<viridis>

each channel is displayed using the viridis color scheme

=item B<plasma>

each channel is displayed using the plasma color scheme

=item B<cividis>

each channel is displayed using the cividis color scheme

=item B<terrain>

each channel is displayed using the terrain color scheme

=back

Default value is B<intensity>.


=item B<scale>

Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

linear

=item B<sqrt>

square root, default

=item B<cbrt>

cubic root

=item B<log>

logarithmic

=item B<4thrt>

4th root

=item B<5thrt>

5th root

=back

Default value is B<log>.


=item B<fscale>

Specify frequency scale.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

linear

=item B<log>

logarithmic

=back


Default value is B<lin>.


=item B<saturation>

Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
alternative color scheme. C<0> is no saturation at all.
Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
Default value is C<1>.


=item B<win_func>

Set window function.

It accepts the following values:

=over 4


=item B<rect>


=item B<bartlett>


=item B<hann>


=item B<hanning>


=item B<hamming>


=item B<blackman>


=item B<welch>


=item B<flattop>


=item B<bharris>


=item B<bnuttall>


=item B<bhann>


=item B<sine>


=item B<nuttall>


=item B<lanczos>


=item B<gauss>


=item B<tukey>


=item B<dolph>


=item B<cauchy>


=item B<parzen>


=item B<poisson>


=item B<bohman>


=item B<kaiser>


=back

Default value is C<hann>.


=item B<orientation>

Set orientation of time vs frequency axis. Can be C<vertical> or
C<horizontal>. Default is C<vertical>.


=item B<gain>

Set scale gain for calculating intensity color values.
Default value is C<1>.


=item B<legend>

Draw time and frequency axes and legends. Default is enabled.


=item B<rotation>

Set color rotation, must be in [-1.0, 1.0] range.
Default value is C<0>.


=item B<start>

Set start frequency from which to display spectrogram. Default is C<0>.


=item B<stop>

Set stop frequency to which to display spectrogram. Default is C<0>.


=item B<drange>

Set dynamic range used to calculate intensity color values. Default is 120 dBFS.
Allowed range is from 10 to 200.


=item B<limit>

Set upper limit of input audio samples volume in dBFS. Default is 0 dBFS.
Allowed range is from -100 to 100.


=item B<opacity>

Set opacity strength when using pixel format output with alpha component.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Extract an audio spectrogram of a whole audio track
in a 1024x1024 picture using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i audio.flac -lavfi showspectrumpic=s=1024x1024 spectrogram.png


=back



=head2 showvolume


Convert input audio volume to a video output.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<rate, r>

Set video rate.


=item B<b>

Set border width, allowed range is [0, 5]. Default is 1.


=item B<w>

Set channel width, allowed range is [80, 8192]. Default is 400.


=item B<h>

Set channel height, allowed range is [1, 900]. Default is 20.


=item B<f>

Set fade, allowed range is [0, 1]. Default is 0.95.


=item B<c>

Set volume color expression.

The expression can use the following variables:


=over 4


=item B<VOLUME>

Current max volume of channel in dB.


=item B<PEAK>

Current peak.


=item B<CHANNEL>

Current channel number, starting from 0.

=back



=item B<t>

If set, displays channel names. Default is enabled.


=item B<v>

If set, displays volume values. Default is enabled.


=item B<o>

Set orientation, can be horizontal: C<h> or vertical: C<v>,
default is C<h>.


=item B<s>

Set step size, allowed range is [0, 5]. Default is 0, which means
step is disabled.


=item B<p>

Set background opacity, allowed range is [0, 1]. Default is 0.


=item B<m>

Set metering mode, can be peak: C<p> or rms: C<r>,
default is C<p>.


=item B<ds>

Set display scale, can be linear: C<lin> or log: C<log>,
default is C<lin>.


=item B<dm>

In second.
If set to E<gt> 0., display a line for the max level
in the previous seconds.
default is disabled: C<0.>


=item B<dmc>

The color of the max line. Use when C<dm> option is set to E<gt> 0.
default is: C<orange>

=back



=head2 showwaves


Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<600x240>.


=item B<mode>

Set display mode.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<point>

Draw a point for each sample.


=item B<line>

Draw a vertical line for each sample.


=item B<p2p>

Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.


=item B<cline>

Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.

=back


Default value is C<point>.


=item B<n>

Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
integer. This option can be set only if the value for I<rate>
is not explicitly specified.


=item B<rate, r>

Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
option I<n>. Default value is "25".


=item B<split_channels>

Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.


=item B<colors>

Set colors separated by '|' which are going to be used for drawing of each channel.


=item B<scale>

Set amplitude scale.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

Linear.


=item B<log>

Logarithmic.


=item B<sqrt>

Square root.


=item B<cbrt>

Cubic root.

=back


Default is linear.


=item B<draw>

Set the draw mode. This is mostly useful to set for high I<n>.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<scale>

Scale pixel values for each drawn sample.


=item B<full>

Draw every sample directly.

=back


Default value is C<scale>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
at the same time:
	
	amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]



=item *

Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
frame rate of 30 frames per second:
	
	aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]


=back



=head2 showwavespic


Convert input audio to a single video frame, representing the samples waves.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the
B<"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual>.
Default value is C<600x240>.


=item B<split_channels>

Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.


=item B<colors>

Set colors separated by '|' which are going to be used for drawing of each channel.


=item B<scale>

Set amplitude scale.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<lin>

Linear.


=item B<log>

Logarithmic.


=item B<sqrt>

Square root.


=item B<cbrt>

Cubic root.

=back


Default is linear.


=item B<draw>

Set the draw mode.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<scale>

Scale pixel values for each drawn sample.


=item B<full>

Draw every sample directly.

=back


Default value is C<scale>.


=item B<filter>

Set the filter mode.

Available values are:

=over 4


=item B<average>

Use average samples values for each drawn sample.


=item B<peak>

Use peak samples values for each drawn sample.

=back


Default value is C<average>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Extract a channel split representation of the wave form of a whole audio track
in a 1024x800 picture using B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i audio.flac -lavfi showwavespic=split_channels=1:s=1024x800 waveform.png


=back



=head2 sidedata, asidedata


Delete frame side data, or select frames based on it.

This filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<mode>

Set mode of operation of the filter.

Can be one of the following:


=over 4


=item B<select>

Select every frame with side data of C<type>.


=item B<delete>

Delete side data of C<type>. If C<type> is not set, delete all side
data in the frame.


=back



=item B<type>

Set side data type used with all modes. Must be set for C<select> mode. For
the list of frame side data types, refer to the C<AVFrameSideDataType> enum
in F<libavutil/frame.h>. For example, to choose
C<AV_FRAME_DATA_PANSCAN> side data, you must specify C<PANSCAN>.


=back



=head2 spectrumsynth


Synthesize audio from 2 input video spectrums, first input stream represents
magnitude across time and second represents phase across time.
The filter will transform from frequency domain as displayed in videos back
to time domain as presented in audio output.

This filter is primarily created for reversing processed B<showspectrum>
filter outputs, but can synthesize sound from other spectrograms too.
But in such case results are going to be poor if the phase data is not
available, because in such cases phase data need to be recreated, usually
it's just recreated from random noise.
For best results use gray only output (C<channel> color mode in
B<showspectrum> filter) and C<log> scale for magnitude video and
C<lin> scale for phase video. To produce phase, for 2nd video, use
C<data> option. Inputs videos should generally use C<fullframe>
slide mode as that saves resources needed for decoding video.

The filter accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<sample_rate>

Specify sample rate of output audio, the sample rate of audio from which
spectrum was generated may differ.


=item B<channels>

Set number of channels represented in input video spectrums.


=item B<scale>

Set scale which was used when generating magnitude input spectrum.
Can be C<lin> or C<log>. Default is C<log>.


=item B<slide>

Set slide which was used when generating inputs spectrums.
Can be C<replace>, C<scroll>, C<fullframe> or C<rscroll>.
Default is C<fullframe>.


=item B<win_func>

Set window function used for resynthesis.


=item B<overlap>

Set window overlap. In range C<[0, 1]>. Default is C<1>,
which means optimal overlap for selected window function will be picked.


=item B<orientation>

Set orientation of input videos. Can be C<vertical> or C<horizontal>.
Default is C<vertical>.

=back



=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

First create magnitude and phase videos from audio, assuming audio is stereo with 44100 sample rate,
then resynthesize videos back to audio with spectrumsynth:
	
	ffmpeg -i input.flac -lavfi showspectrum=mode=separate:scale=log:overlap=0.875:color=channel:slide=fullframe:data=magnitude -an -c:v rawvideo magnitude.nut
	ffmpeg -i input.flac -lavfi showspectrum=mode=separate:scale=lin:overlap=0.875:color=channel:slide=fullframe:data=phase -an -c:v rawvideo phase.nut
	ffmpeg -i magnitude.nut -i phase.nut -lavfi spectrumsynth=channels=2:sample_rate=44100:win_func=hann:overlap=0.875:slide=fullframe output.flac


=back



=head2 split, asplit


Split input into several identical outputs.

C<asplit> works with audio input, C<split> with video.

The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
unspecified, it defaults to 2.


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Create two separate outputs from the same input:
	
	[in] split [out0][out1]



=item *

To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
outputs, like in:
	
	[in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]



=item *

Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
one padded:
	
	[in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
	[splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0    [cropout];
	[splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];



=item *

Create 5 copies of the input audio with B<ffmpeg>:
	
	ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT


=back



=head2 zmq, azmq


Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
filters in the filtergraph.

C<zmq> and C<azmq> work as a pass-through filters. C<zmq>
must be inserted between two video filters, C<azmq> between two
audio filters. Both are capable to send messages to any filter type.

To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
headers and configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-libzmq>.

For more information about libzmq see:
E<lt>B<http://www.zeromq.org/>E<gt>

The C<zmq> and C<azmq> filters work as a libzmq server, which
receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
B<bind_address> (or the abbreviation "B<b>") option.
Default value of this option is F<tcp://localhost:5555>. You may
want to alter this value to your needs, but do not forget to escape any
':' signs (see B<filtergraph escaping>).

The received message must be in the form:
	
	<TARGET> <COMMAND> [<ARG>]


I<TARGET> specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
the filter class or a specific filter instance name. The default
filter instance name uses the pattern B<Parsed_E<lt>filter_nameE<gt>_E<lt>indexE<gt>>,
but you can override this by using the B<filter_name@id> syntax
(see B<Filtergraph syntax>).

I<COMMAND> specifies the name of the command for the target filter.

I<ARG> is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
given I<COMMAND>.

Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
	
	<ERROR_CODE> <ERROR_REASON>
	<MESSAGE>


I<MESSAGE> is optional.


=head3 Examples


Look at F<tools/zmqsend> for an example of a zmq client which can
be used to send commands processed by these filters.

Consider the following filtergraph generated by B<ffplay>.
In this example the last overlay filter has an instance name. All other
filters will have default instance names.

	
	ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
	color=s=100x100:c=red  [l];
	color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
	nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
	[bg][l]   overlay     [bg+l];
	[bg+l][r] overlay@my=x=100 "


To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
command can be used:
	
	echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend


To change the right side:
	
	echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend


To change the position of the right side:
	
	echo overlay@my x 150 | tools/zmqsend





=head1 MULTIMEDIA SOURCES


Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.


=head2 amovie


This is the same as B<movie> source, except it selects an audio
stream by default.


=head2 avsynctest

Generate an Audio/Video Sync Test.

Generated stream periodically shows flash video frame and emits beep in audio.
Useful to inspect A/V sync issues.

It accepts the following options:


=over 4


=item B<size, s>

Set output video size. Default value is C<hd720>.


=item B<framerate, fr>

Set output video frame rate. Default value is C<30>.


=item B<samplerate, sr>

Set output audio sample rate. Default value is C<44100>.


=item B<amplitude, a>

Set output audio beep amplitude. Default value is C<0.7>.


=item B<period, p>

Set output audio beep period in seconds. Default value is C<3>.


=item B<delay, dl>

Set output video flash delay in number of frames. Default value is C<0>.


=item B<cycle, c>

Enable cycling of video delays, by default is disabled.


=item B<duration, d>

Set stream output duration. By default duration is unlimited.


=item B<fg, bg, ag>

Set foreground/background/additional color.

=back



=head3 Commands


This source supports the some above options as B<commands>.



=head2 movie


Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.

It accepts the following parameters:


=over 4


=item B<filename>

The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
device or a stream accessed through some protocol).


=item B<format_name, f>

Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
format is guessed from I<movie_name> or by probing.


=item B<seek_point, sp>

Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
C<av_strtod>, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
postfix. The default value is "0".


=item B<streams, s>

Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
same order. The syntax is explained in the B<"Stream specifiers"
section in the ffmpeg manual>. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".


=item B<stream_index, si>

Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
audio instead of video.


=item B<loop>

Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
If the value is 0, the stream will be looped infinitely.
Default value is "1".

Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.


=item B<discontinuity>

Specifies the time difference between frames above which the point is
considered a timestamp discontinuity which is removed by adjusting the later
timestamps.


=item B<dec_threads>

Specifies the number of threads for decoding


=item B<format_opts>

Specify format options for the opened file. Format options can be specified
as a list of I<key>=I<value> pairs separated by ':'. The following example
shows how to add protocol_whitelist and protocol_blacklist options:
	
	ffplay -f lavfi
	"movie=filename='1.sdp':format_opts='protocol_whitelist=file,rtp,udp\:protocol_blacklist=http'"


=back


It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
	
	input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
	                                    ^
	                                    |
	movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+


=head3 Examples



=over 4


=item *

Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
on top of the input labelled "in":
	
	movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
	[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
	[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]



=item *

Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
labelled "in":
	
	movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
	[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
	[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]



=item *

Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
connected to the pad named "audio":
	
	movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]


=back



=head3 Commands


Both movie and amovie support the following commands:

=over 4


=item B<seek>

Perform seek using "av_seek_frame".
The syntax is: seek I<stream_index>|I<timestamp>|I<flags>

=over 4


=item *

I<stream_index>: If stream_index is -1, a default
stream is selected, and I<timestamp> is automatically converted
from AV_TIME_BASE units to the stream specific time_base.

=item *

I<timestamp>: Timestamp in AVStream.time_base units
or, if no stream is specified, in AV_TIME_BASE units.

=item *

I<flags>: Flags which select direction and seeking mode.

=back



=item B<get_duration>

Get movie duration in AV_TIME_BASE units.


=back



=head1 EXTERNAL LIBRARIES


FFmpeg can be hooked up with a number of external libraries to add support
for more formats. None of them are used by default, their use has to be
explicitly requested by passing the appropriate flags to
B<./configure>.


=head2 Alliance for Open Media (AOM)


FFmpeg can make use of the AOM library for AV1 decoding and encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://aomedia.org/>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libaom> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 AMD AMF/VCE


FFmpeg can use the AMD Advanced Media Framework library
for accelerated H.264 and HEVC(only windows) encoding on hardware with Video Coding Engine (VCE).

To enable support you must obtain the AMF framework header files(version 1.4.9+) from
E<lt>B<https://github.com/GPUOpen-LibrariesAndSDKs/AMF.git>E<gt>.

Create an C<AMF/> directory in the system include path.
Copy the contents of C<AMF/amf/public/include/> into that directory.
Then configure FFmpeg with C<--enable-amf>.

Initialization of amf encoder occurs in this order:
1) trying to initialize through dx11(only windows)
2) trying to initialize through dx9(only windows)
3) trying to initialize through vulkan

To use h.264(AMD VCE) encoder on linux amdgru-pro version 19.20+ and amf-amdgpu-pro
package(amdgru-pro contains, but does not install automatically) are required.

This driver can be installed using amdgpu-pro-install script in official amd driver archive.


=head2 AviSynth


FFmpeg can read AviSynth scripts as input. To enable support, pass
C<--enable-avisynth> to configure after installing the headers
provided by E<lt>B<https://github.com/AviSynth/AviSynthPlus>E<gt>.
AviSynth+ can be configured to install only the headers by either
passing C<-DHEADERS_ONLY:bool=on> to the normal CMake-based build
system, or by using the supplied C<GNUmakefile>.

For Windows, supported AviSynth variants are
E<lt>B<http://avisynth.nl>E<gt> for 32-bit builds and
E<lt>B<http://avisynth.nl/index.php/AviSynth+>E<gt> for 32-bit and 64-bit builds.

For Linux, macOS, and BSD, the only supported AviSynth variant is
E<lt>B<https://github.com/AviSynth/AviSynthPlus>E<gt>, starting with version 3.5.


=over 4

In 2016, AviSynth+ added support for building with GCC. However, due to
the eccentricities of Windows' calling conventions, 32-bit GCC builds
of AviSynth+ are not compatible with typical 32-bit builds of FFmpeg.

By default, FFmpeg assumes compatibility with 32-bit MSVC builds of
AviSynth+ since that is the most widely-used and entrenched build
configuration.  Users can override this and enable support for 32-bit
GCC builds of AviSynth+ by passing C<-DAVSC_WIN32_GCC32> to
C<--extra-cflags> when configuring FFmpeg.

64-bit builds of FFmpeg are not affected, and can use either MSVC or
GCC builds of AviSynth+ without any special flags.

=back



=over 4

AviSynth(+) is loaded dynamically.  Distributors can build FFmpeg
with C<--enable-avisynth>, and the binaries will work regardless
of the end user having AviSynth installed.  If/when an end user
would like to use AviSynth scripts, then they can install AviSynth(+)
and FFmpeg will be able to find and use it to open scripts.

=back



=head2 Chromaprint


FFmpeg can make use of the Chromaprint library for generating audio fingerprints.
Pass C<--enable-chromaprint> to configure to
enable it. See E<lt>B<https://acoustid.org/chromaprint>E<gt>.


=head2 codec2


FFmpeg can make use of the codec2 library for codec2 decoding and encoding.
There is currently no native decoder, so libcodec2 must be used for decoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://freedv.org/>E<gt>, download "Codec 2 source archive".
Build and install using CMake. Debian users can install the libcodec2-dev package instead.
Once libcodec2 is installed you can pass C<--enable-libcodec2> to configure to enable it.

The easiest way to use codec2 is with .c2 files, since they contain the mode information required for decoding.
To encode such a file, use a .c2 file extension and give the libcodec2 encoder the -mode option:
C<ffmpeg -i input.wav -mode 700C output.c2>.
Playback is as simple as C<ffplay output.c2>.
For a list of supported modes, run C<ffmpeg -h encoder=libcodec2>.
Raw codec2 files are also supported.
To make sense of them the mode in use needs to be specified as a format option:
C<ffmpeg -f codec2raw -mode 1300 -i input.raw output.wav>.


=head2 dav1d


FFmpeg can make use of the dav1d library for AV1 video decoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://code.videolan.org/videolan/dav1d>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libdav1d> to configure to enable it.


=head2 davs2


FFmpeg can make use of the davs2 library for AVS2-P2/IEEE1857.4 video decoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/pkuvcl/davs2>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libdavs2> to configure to
enable it.


=over 4

libdavs2 is under the GNU Public License Version 2 or later
(see E<lt>B<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html>E<gt> for
details), you must upgrade FFmpeg's license to GPL in order to use it.

=back



=head2 uavs3d


FFmpeg can make use of the uavs3d library for AVS3-P2/IEEE1857.10 video decoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/uavs3/uavs3d>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libuavs3d> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 Game Music Emu


FFmpeg can make use of the Game Music Emu library to read audio from supported video game
music file formats. Pass C<--enable-libgme> to configure to
enable it. See E<lt>B<https://bitbucket.org/mpyne/game-music-emu/overview>E<gt>.


=head2 Intel QuickSync Video


FFmpeg can use Intel QuickSync Video (QSV) for accelerated decoding and encoding
of multiple codecs. To use QSV, FFmpeg must be linked against the C<libmfx>
dispatcher, which loads the actual decoding libraries.

The dispatcher is open source and can be downloaded from
E<lt>B<https://github.com/lu-zero/mfx_dispatch.git>E<gt>. FFmpeg needs to be configured
with the C<--enable-libmfx> option and C<pkg-config> needs to be able to
locate the dispatcher's C<.pc> files.


=head2 Kvazaar


FFmpeg can make use of the Kvazaar library for HEVC encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/ultravideo/kvazaar>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the library. Then pass
C<--enable-libkvazaar> to configure to enable it.


=head2 LAME


FFmpeg can make use of the LAME library for MP3 encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://lame.sourceforge.net/>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the library.
Then pass C<--enable-libmp3lame> to configure to enable it.


=head2 LCEVCdec


FFmpeg can make use of the liblcevc_dec library for LCEVC enhacement layer
decoding on supported bitstreams.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/v-novaltd/LCEVCdec>E<gt> and follow the instructions
for installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-liblcevc-dec> to configure to
enable it.


=over 4

LCEVCdec is under the BSD-3-Clause-Clear License.

=back



=head2 libilbc


iLBC is a narrowband speech codec that has been made freely available
by Google as part of the WebRTC project. libilbc is a packaging friendly
copy of the iLBC codec. FFmpeg can make use of the libilbc library for
iLBC decoding and encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/TimothyGu/libilbc>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libilbc> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 libjxl


JPEG XL is an image format intended to fully replace legacy JPEG for an extended
period of life. See E<lt>B<https://jpegxl.info/>E<gt> for more information, and see
E<lt>B<https://github.com/libjxl/libjxl>E<gt> for the library source. You can pass
C<--enable-libjxl> to configure in order enable the libjxl wrapper.


=head2 libvpx


FFmpeg can make use of the libvpx library for VP8/VP9 decoding and encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://www.webmproject.org/>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libvpx> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 ModPlug


FFmpeg can make use of this library, originating in Modplug-XMMS, to read from MOD-like music files.
See E<lt>B<https://github.com/Konstanty/libmodplug>E<gt>. Pass C<--enable-libmodplug> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 OpenCORE, VisualOn, and Fraunhofer libraries


Spun off Google Android sources, OpenCore, VisualOn and Fraunhofer
libraries provide encoders for a number of audio codecs.


=over 4

OpenCORE and VisualOn libraries are under the Apache License 2.0
(see E<lt>B<http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0>E<gt> for details), which is
incompatible to the LGPL version 2.1 and GPL version 2. You have to
upgrade FFmpeg's license to LGPL version 3 (or if you have enabled
GPL components, GPL version 3) by passing C<--enable-version3> to configure in
order to use it.

The license of the Fraunhofer AAC library is incompatible with the GPL.
Therefore, for GPL builds, you have to pass C<--enable-nonfree> to
configure in order to use it. To the best of our knowledge, it is
compatible with the LGPL.

=back



=head3 OpenCORE AMR


FFmpeg can make use of the OpenCORE libraries for AMR-NB
decoding/encoding and AMR-WB decoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the libraries.
Then pass C<--enable-libopencore-amrnb> and/or
C<--enable-libopencore-amrwb> to configure to enable them.


=head3 VisualOn AMR-WB encoder library


FFmpeg can make use of the VisualOn AMR-WBenc library for AMR-WB encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the library.
Then pass C<--enable-libvo-amrwbenc> to configure to enable it.


=head3 Fraunhofer AAC library


FFmpeg can make use of the Fraunhofer AAC library for AAC decoding & encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the library.
Then pass C<--enable-libfdk-aac> to configure to enable it.


=head3 LC3 library


FFmpeg can make use of the Google LC3 library for LC3 decoding & encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/google/liblc3/>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library.
Then pass C<--enable-liblc3> to configure to enable it.


=head2 OpenH264


FFmpeg can make use of the OpenH264 library for H.264 decoding and encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://www.openh264.org/>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libopenh264> to configure to
enable it.

For decoding, this library is much more limited than the built-in decoder
in libavcodec; currently, this library lacks support for decoding B-frames
and some other main/high profile features. (It currently only supports
constrained baseline profile and CABAC.) Using it is mostly useful for
testing and for taking advantage of Cisco's patent portfolio license
(E<lt>B<http://www.openh264.org/BINARY_LICENSE.txt>E<gt>).


=head2 OpenJPEG


FFmpeg can use the OpenJPEG libraries for decoding/encoding J2K videos.  Go to
E<lt>B<http://www.openjpeg.org/>E<gt> to get the libraries and follow the installation
instructions.  To enable using OpenJPEG in FFmpeg, pass C<--enable-libopenjpeg> to
F<./configure>.


=head2 rav1e


FFmpeg can make use of rav1e (Rust AV1 Encoder) via its C bindings to encode videos.
Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/xiph/rav1e/>E<gt> and follow the instructions to build
the C library. To enable using rav1e in FFmpeg, pass C<--enable-librav1e>
to F<./configure>.


=head2 SVT-AV1


FFmpeg can make use of the Scalable Video Technology for AV1 library for AV1 encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://gitlab.com/AOMediaCodec/SVT-AV1/>E<gt> and follow the instructions
for installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libsvtav1> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 TwoLAME


FFmpeg can make use of the TwoLAME library for MP2 encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://www.twolame.org/>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the library.
Then pass C<--enable-libtwolame> to configure to enable it.


=head2 VapourSynth


FFmpeg can read VapourSynth scripts as input. To enable support, pass
C<--enable-vapoursynth> to configure. Vapoursynth is detected via
C<pkg-config>. Versions 42 or greater supported.
See E<lt>B<http://www.vapoursynth.com/>E<gt>.

Due to security concerns, Vapoursynth scripts will not
be autodetected so the input format has to be forced. For ff* CLI tools,
add C<-f vapoursynth> before the input C<-i yourscript.vpy>.


=head2 x264


FFmpeg can make use of the x264 library for H.264 encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://www.videolan.org/developers/x264.html>E<gt> and follow the
instructions for installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libx264> to
configure to enable it.


=over 4

x264 is under the GNU Public License Version 2 or later
(see E<lt>B<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html>E<gt> for
details), you must upgrade FFmpeg's license to GPL in order to use it.

=back



=head2 x265


FFmpeg can make use of the x265 library for HEVC encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://x265.org/developers.html>E<gt> and follow the instructions
for installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libx265> to configure
to enable it.


=over 4

x265 is under the GNU Public License Version 2 or later
(see E<lt>B<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html>E<gt> for
details), you must upgrade FFmpeg's license to GPL in order to use it.

=back



=head2 xavs


FFmpeg can make use of the xavs library for AVS encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<http://xavs.sf.net/>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libxavs> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 xavs2


FFmpeg can make use of the xavs2 library for AVS2-P2/IEEE1857.4 video encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/pkuvcl/xavs2>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libxavs2> to configure to
enable it.


=over 4

libxavs2 is under the GNU Public License Version 2 or later
(see E<lt>B<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html>E<gt> for
details), you must upgrade FFmpeg's license to GPL in order to use it.

=back



=head2 eXtra-fast Essential Video Encoder (XEVE)


FFmpeg can make use of the XEVE library for EVC video encoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/mpeg5/xeve>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the XEVE library. Then pass C<--enable-libxeve> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 eXtra-fast Essential Video Decoder (XEVD)


FFmpeg can make use of the XEVD library for EVC video decoding.

Go to E<lt>B<https://github.com/mpeg5/xevd>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the XEVD library. Then pass C<--enable-libxevd> to configure to
enable it.


=head2 ZVBI


ZVBI is a VBI decoding library which can be used by FFmpeg to decode DVB
teletext pages and DVB teletext subtitles.

Go to E<lt>B<http://sourceforge.net/projects/zapping/>E<gt> and follow the instructions for
installing the library. Then pass C<--enable-libzvbi> to configure to
enable it.


=head1 SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS


You can use the C<-formats> and C<-codecs> options to have an exhaustive list.


=head2 File Formats


FFmpeg supports the following file formats through the C<libavformat>
library:


=over 4


=item B<Name  :  Encoding @tab Decoding @tab Comments>


=item B<3dostr                     :    @tab X>


=item B<4xm                        :    @tab X>

    @tab 4X Technologies format, used in some games.

=item B<8088flex TMV               :    @tab X>


=item B<AAX                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audible Enhanced Audio format, used in audiobooks.

=item B<AA                         :    @tab X>

    @tab Audible Format 2, 3, and 4, used in audiobooks.

=item B<ACT Voice                  :    @tab X>

    @tab contains G.729 audio

=item B<Adobe Filmstrip            :  X @tab X>


=item B<Audio IFF (AIFF)           :  X @tab X>


=item B<American Laser Games MM    :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used in games like Mad Dog McCree.

=item B<3GPP AMR                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<Amazing Studio Packed Animation File   :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used in game Heart Of Darkness.

=item B<Apple HTTP Live Streaming  :    @tab X>


=item B<Artworx Data Format        :    @tab X>


=item B<Interplay ACM              :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio only format used in some Interplay games.

=item B<ADP                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the Nintendo Gamecube.

=item B<AFC                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the Nintendo Gamecube.

=item B<ADS/SS2                    :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the PS2.

=item B<APNG                       :  X @tab X>


=item B<ASF                        :  X @tab X>

    @tab Advanced / Active Streaming Format.

=item B<AST                        :  X @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the Nintendo Wii.

=item B<AVI                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<AviSynth                   :    @tab X>


=item B<AVR                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on Mac.

=item B<AVS                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used by the Creature Shock game.

=item B<Beam Software SIFF         :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio and video format used in some games by Beam Software.

=item B<Bethesda Softworks VID     :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in some games from Bethesda Softworks.

=item B<Binary text                :    @tab X>


=item B<Bink                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used by many games.

=item B<Bink Audio                 :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio only multimedia format used by some games.

=item B<Bitmap Brothers JV         :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in Z and Z95 games.

=item B<BRP                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Argonaut Games format.

=item B<Brute Force & Ignorance    :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in the game Flash Traffic: City of Angels.

=item B<BFSTM                      :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the Nintendo WiiU (based on BRSTM).

=item B<BRSTM                      :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the Nintendo Wii.

=item B<BW64                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Broadcast Wave 64bit.

=item B<BWF                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<codec2 (raw)               :  X @tab X>

    @tab Must be given -mode format option to decode correctly.

=item B<codec2 (.c2 files)         :  X @tab X>

    @tab Contains header with version and mode info, simplifying playback.

=item B<CRI ADX                    :  X @tab X>

    @tab Audio-only format used in console video games.

=item B<CRI AIX                    :    @tab X>


=item B<CRI HCA                    :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio-only format used in console video games.

=item B<Discworld II BMV           :    @tab X>


=item B<Interplay C93              :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in the game Cyberia from Interplay.

=item B<Delphine Software International CIN  :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used by Delphine Software games.

=item B<Digital Speech Standard (DSS)  :    @tab X>


=item B<CD+G                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Video format used by CD+G karaoke disks

=item B<Phantom Cine               :    @tab X>


=item B<Commodore CDXL             :    @tab X>

    @tab Amiga CD video format

=item B<Core Audio Format          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Apple Core Audio Format

=item B<CRC testing format         :  X @tab>


=item B<Creative Voice             :  X @tab X>

    @tab Created for the Sound Blaster Pro.

=item B<CRYO APC                   :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used in some games by CRYO Interactive Entertainment.

=item B<D-Cinema audio             :  X @tab X>


=item B<Deluxe Paint Animation     :    @tab X>


=item B<DCSTR                      :    @tab X>


=item B<DFA                        :    @tab X>

    @tab This format is used in Chronomaster game

=item B<DirectDraw Surface         :    @tab X>


=item B<DSD Stream File (DSF)      :    @tab X>


=item B<DV video                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<DXA                        :    @tab X>

    @tab This format is used in the non-Windows version of the Feeble Files
         game and different game cutscenes repacked for use with ScummVM.

=item B<Electronic Arts cdata   :     @tab X>


=item B<Electronic Arts Multimedia   :     @tab X>

    @tab Used in various EA games; files have extensions like WVE and UV2.

=item B<Ensoniq Paris Audio File   :    @tab X>


=item B<FFM (FFserver live feed)   :  X @tab X>


=item B<Flash (SWF)                :  X @tab X>


=item B<Flash 9 (AVM2)             :  X @tab X>

    @tab Only embedded audio is decoded.

=item B<FLI/FLC/FLX animation      :    @tab X>

    @tab .fli/.flc files

=item B<Flash Video (FLV)          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Macromedia Flash video files

=item B<framecrc testing format    :  X @tab>


=item B<FunCom ISS                 :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used in various games from FunCom like The Longest Journey.

=item B<G.723.1                    :  X @tab X>


=item B<G.726                      :    @tab X @tab Both left- and right-justified.>


=item B<G.729 BIT                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<G.729 raw                  :    @tab X>


=item B<GENH                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format for various games.

=item B<GIF Animation              :  X @tab X>


=item B<GXF                        :  X @tab X>

    @tab General eXchange Format SMPTE 360M, used by Thomson Grass Valley
         playout servers.

=item B<HNM  :    @tab X>

    @tab Only version 4 supported, used in some games from Cryo Interactive

=item B<iCEDraw File               :    @tab X>


=item B<ICO                        :  X @tab X>

    @tab Microsoft Windows ICO

=item B<id Quake II CIN video      :    @tab X>


=item B<id RoQ                     :  X @tab X>

    @tab Used in Quake III, Jedi Knight 2 and other computer games.

=item B<IEC61937 encapsulation  :  X @tab X>


=item B<IFF                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Interchange File Format

=item B<IFV                        :    @tab X>

    @tab A format used by some old CCTV DVRs.

=item B<iLBC                       :  X @tab X>


=item B<Interplay MVE              :    @tab X>

    @tab Format used in various Interplay computer games.

=item B<Iterated Systems ClearVideo  :      @tab  X>

    @tab I-frames only

=item B<IV8                        :    @tab X>

    @tab A format generated by IndigoVision 8000 video server.

=item B<IVF (On2)                  :  X @tab X>

    @tab A format used by libvpx

=item B<Internet Video Recording   :    @tab X>


=item B<IRCAM                      :  X @tab X>


=item B<LAF                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Limitless Audio Format

=item B<LATM                       :  X @tab X>


=item B<LMLM4                      :    @tab X>

    @tab Used by Linux Media Labs MPEG-4 PCI boards

=item B<LOAS                       :    @tab X>

    @tab contains LATM multiplexed AAC audio

=item B<LRC                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<LVF                        :    @tab X>


=item B<LXF                        :    @tab X>

    @tab VR native stream format, used by Leitch/Harris' video servers.

=item B<Magic Lantern Video (MLV)  :    @tab X>


=item B<Matroska                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<Matroska audio             :  X @tab>


=item B<FFmpeg metadata            :  X @tab X>

    @tab Metadata in text format.

=item B<MAXIS XA                   :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in Sim City 3000; file extension .xa.

=item B<MCA                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in some games from Capcom; file extension .mca.

=item B<MD Studio                  :    @tab X>


=item B<Metal Gear Solid: The Twin Snakes  :  @tab X>


=item B<Megalux Frame              :    @tab X>

    @tab Used by Megalux Ultimate Paint

=item B<MobiClip MODS              :    @tab X>


=item B<MobiClip MOFLEX            :    @tab X>


=item B<Mobotix .mxg               :    @tab X>


=item B<Monkey's Audio             :    @tab X>


=item B<Motion Pixels MVI          :    @tab X>


=item B<MOV/QuickTime/MP4          :  X @tab X>

    @tab 3GP, 3GP2, PSP, iPod variants supported

=item B<MP2                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<MP3                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<MPEG-1 System              :  X @tab X>

    @tab muxed audio and video, VCD format supported

=item B<MPEG-PS (program stream)   :  X @tab X>

    @tab also known as C<VOB> file, SVCD and DVD format supported

=item B<MPEG-TS (transport stream)  :  X @tab X>

    @tab also known as DVB Transport Stream

=item B<MPEG-4                     :  X @tab X>

    @tab MPEG-4 is a variant of QuickTime.

=item B<MSF                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the PS3.

=item B<Mirillis FIC video         :    @tab X>

    @tab No cursor rendering.

=item B<MIDI Sample Dump Standard  :    @tab X>


=item B<MIME multipart JPEG        :  X @tab>


=item B<MSN TCP webcam             :    @tab X>

    @tab Used by MSN Messenger webcam streams.

=item B<MTV                        :    @tab X>


=item B<Musepack                   :    @tab X>


=item B<Musepack SV8               :    @tab X>


=item B<Material eXchange Format (MXF)  :  X @tab X>

    @tab SMPTE 377M, used by D-Cinema, broadcast industry.

=item B<Material eXchange Format (MXF), D-10 Mapping  :  X @tab X>

    @tab SMPTE 386M, D-10/IMX Mapping.

=item B<NC camera feed             :    @tab X>

    @tab NC (AVIP NC4600) camera streams

=item B<NIST SPeech HEader REsources  :    @tab X>


=item B<Computerized Speech Lab NSP  :    @tab X>


=item B<NTT TwinVQ (VQF)           :    @tab X>

    @tab Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation TwinVQ.

=item B<Nullsoft Streaming Video   :    @tab X>


=item B<NuppelVideo                :    @tab X>


=item B<NUT                        :  X @tab X>

    @tab NUT Open Container Format

=item B<Ogg                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<Playstation Portable PMP   :    @tab X>


=item B<Portable Voice Format      :    @tab X>


=item B<RK Audio (RKA)             :    @tab X>


=item B<TechnoTrend PVA            :    @tab X>

    @tab Used by TechnoTrend DVB PCI boards.

=item B<QCP                        :    @tab X>


=item B<raw ADTS (AAC)             :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw AC-3                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw AMR-NB                 :    @tab X>


=item B<raw AMR-WB                 :    @tab X>


=item B<raw APAC                   :    @tab X>


=item B<raw aptX                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw aptX HD                :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw Bonk                   :    @tab X>


=item B<raw Chinese AVS video      :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw DFPWM                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw Dirac                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw DNxHD                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw DTS                    :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw DTS-HD                 :    @tab X>


=item B<raw E-AC-3                 :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw EVC                    :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw FLAC                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw GSM                    :    @tab X>


=item B<raw H.261                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw H.263                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw H.264                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw HEVC                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw Ingenient MJPEG        :    @tab X>


=item B<raw MJPEG                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw MLP                    :    @tab X>


=item B<raw MPEG                   :    @tab X>


=item B<raw MPEG-1                 :    @tab X>


=item B<raw MPEG-2                 :    @tab X>


=item B<raw MPEG-4                 :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw NULL                   :  X @tab>


=item B<raw video                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw id RoQ                 :  X @tab>


=item B<raw OBU                    :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw OSQ                    :    @tab X>


=item B<raw SBC                    :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw Shorten                :    @tab X>


=item B<raw TAK                    :    @tab X>


=item B<raw TrueHD                 :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw VC-1                   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM A-law              :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM mu-law             :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM Archimedes VIDC    :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 8 bit       :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 16 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 16 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 24 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 24 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 32 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 32 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 64 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM signed 64 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 8 bit     :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 16 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 16 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 24 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 24 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 32 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM unsigned 32 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM 16.8 floating point little-endian  :    @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM 24.0 floating point little-endian  :    @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM floating-point 32 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM floating-point 32 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM floating-point 64 bit big-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<raw PCM floating-point 64 bit little-endian   :  X @tab X>


=item B<RDT                        :    @tab X>


=item B<REDCODE R3D                :    @tab X>

    @tab File format used by RED Digital cameras, contains JPEG 2000 frames and PCM audio.

=item B<RealMedia                  :  X @tab X>


=item B<Redirector                 :    @tab X>


=item B<RedSpark                   :    @tab X>


=item B<Renderware TeXture Dictionary  :    @tab X>


=item B<Resolume DXV               :  X @tab X>

    @tab Encoding is only supported for the DXT1 (Normal Quality, No Alpha) texture format.

=item B<RF64                       :    @tab X>


=item B<RL2                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio and video format used in some games by Entertainment Software Partners.

=item B<RPL/ARMovie                :    @tab X>


=item B<Lego Mindstorms RSO        :  X @tab X>


=item B<RSD                        :    @tab X>


=item B<RTMP                       :  X @tab X>

    @tab Output is performed by publishing stream to RTMP server

=item B<RTP                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<RTSP                       :  X @tab X>


=item B<Sample Dump eXchange       :    @tab X>


=item B<SAP                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<SBG                        :    @tab X>


=item B<SDNS                       :    @tab X>


=item B<SDP                        :    @tab X>


=item B<SER                        :    @tab X>


=item B<Digital Pictures SGA       :    @tab X>


=item B<Sega FILM/CPK              :  X @tab X>

    @tab Used in many Sega Saturn console games.

=item B<Silicon Graphics Movie     :    @tab X>


=item B<Sierra SOL                 :    @tab X>

    @tab .sol files used in Sierra Online games.

=item B<Sierra VMD                 :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in Sierra CD-ROM games.

=item B<Smacker                    :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used by many games.

=item B<SMJPEG                     :  X @tab X>

    @tab Used in certain Loki game ports.

=item B<SMPTE 337M encapsulation   :    @tab X>


=item B<Smush                      :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used in some LucasArts games.

=item B<Sony OpenMG (OMA)          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used in Sony Sonic Stage and Sony Vegas.

=item B<Sony PlayStation STR       :    @tab X>


=item B<Sony Wave64 (W64)          :  X @tab X>


=item B<SoX native format          :  X @tab X>


=item B<SUN AU format              :  X @tab X>


=item B<SUP raw PGS subtitles      :  X @tab X>


=item B<SVAG                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used in Konami PS2 games.

=item B<TDSC                       :    @tab X>


=item B<Text files                 :    @tab X>


=item B<THP                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Used on the Nintendo GameCube.

=item B<Tiertex Limited SEQ        :    @tab X>

    @tab Tiertex .seq files used in the DOS CD-ROM version of the game Flashback.

=item B<True Audio                 :  X @tab X>


=item B<VAG                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used in many Sony PS2 games.

=item B<VC-1 test bitstream        :  X @tab X>


=item B<Vidvox Hap                 :  X @tab X>


=item B<Vivo                       :    @tab X>


=item B<VPK                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used in Sony PS games.

=item B<Marble WADY                :    @tab X>


=item B<WAV                        :  X @tab X>


=item B<Waveform Archiver          :    @tab X>


=item B<WavPack                    :  X @tab X>


=item B<WebM                       :  X @tab X>


=item B<Windows Televison (WTV)    :  X @tab X>


=item B<Wing Commander III movie   :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used in Origin's Wing Commander III computer game.

=item B<Westwood Studios audio     :  X @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used in Westwood Studios games.

=item B<Westwood Studios VQA       :    @tab X>

    @tab Multimedia format used in Westwood Studios games.

=item B<Wideband Single-bit Data (WSD)  :    @tab X>


=item B<WVE                        :    @tab X>


=item B<Konami XMD                 :    @tab X>


=item B<XMV                        :    @tab X>

    @tab Microsoft video container used in Xbox games.

=item B<XVAG                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Audio format used on the PS3.

=item B<xWMA                       :    @tab X>

    @tab Microsoft audio container used by XAudio 2.

=item B<eXtended BINary text (XBIN)  :  @tab X>


=item B<YUV4MPEG pipe              :  X @tab X>


=item B<Psygnosis YOP              :    @tab X>


=back


C<X> means that the feature in that column (encoding / decoding) is supported.


=head2 Image Formats


FFmpeg can read and write images for each frame of a video sequence. The
following image formats are supported:


=over 4


=item B<Name  :  Encoding @tab Decoding @tab Comments>


=item B<.Y.U.V        :  X @tab X>

    @tab one raw file per component

=item B<Alias PIX     :  X @tab X>

    @tab Alias/Wavefront PIX image format

=item B<animated GIF  :  X @tab X>


=item B<APNG          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Animated Portable Network Graphics

=item B<BMP           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Microsoft BMP image

=item B<BRender PIX   :    @tab X>

    @tab Argonaut BRender 3D engine image format.

=item B<CRI           :    @tab X>

    @tab Cintel RAW

=item B<DPX           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Digital Picture Exchange

=item B<EXR           :    @tab X>

    @tab OpenEXR

=item B<FITS          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Flexible Image Transport System

=item B<HDR           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Radiance HDR RGBE Image format

=item B<IMG           :    @tab X>

    @tab GEM Raster image

=item B<JPEG          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Progressive JPEG is not supported.

=item B<JPEG 2000     :  X @tab X>


=item B<JPEG-LS       :  X @tab X>


=item B<LJPEG         :  X @tab>

    @tab Lossless JPEG

=item B<Media 100     :    @tab X>


=item B<MSP           :    @tab X>

    @tab Microsoft Paint image

=item B<PAM           :  X @tab X>

    @tab PAM is a PNM extension with alpha support.

=item B<PBM           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Portable BitMap image

=item B<PCD           :    @tab X>

    @tab PhotoCD

=item B<PCX           :  X @tab X>

    @tab PC Paintbrush

=item B<PFM           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Portable FloatMap image

=item B<PGM           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Portable GrayMap image

=item B<PGMYUV        :  X @tab X>

    @tab PGM with U and V components in YUV 4:2:0

=item B<PGX           :    @tab X>

    @tab PGX file decoder

=item B<PHM           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Portable HalfFloatMap image

=item B<PIC           :  @tab X>

    @tab Pictor/PC Paint

=item B<PNG           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Portable Network Graphics image

=item B<PPM           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Portable PixelMap image

=item B<PSD           :    @tab X>

    @tab Photoshop

=item B<PTX           :    @tab X>

    @tab V.Flash PTX format

=item B<QOI           :  X @tab X>

    @tab Quite OK Image format

=item B<SGI           :  X @tab X>

    @tab SGI RGB image format

=item B<Sun Rasterfile   :  X @tab X>

    @tab Sun RAS image format

=item B<TIFF          :  X @tab X>

    @tab YUV, JPEG and some extension is not supported yet.

=item B<Truevision Targa   :  X @tab X>

    @tab Targa (.TGA) image format

=item B<VBN   :  X @tab X>

    @tab Vizrt Binary Image format

=item B<WBMP          :  X @tab X>

    @tab Wireless Application Protocol Bitmap image format

=item B<WebP          :  E @tab X>

    @tab WebP image format, encoding supported through external library libwebp

=item B<XBM   :  X @tab X>

    @tab X BitMap image format

=item B<XFace  :  X @tab X>

    @tab X-Face image format

=item B<XPM   :    @tab X>

    @tab X PixMap image format

=item B<XWD   :  X @tab X>

    @tab X Window Dump image format

=back


C<X> means that the feature in that column (encoding / decoding) is supported.

C<E> means that support is provided through an external library.


=head2 Video Codecs



=over 4


=item B<Name  :  Encoding @tab Decoding @tab Comments>


=item B<4X Movie                :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in certain computer games.

=item B<8088flex TMV            :      @tab  X>


=item B<A64 multicolor          :   X  @tab>

    @tab Creates video suitable to be played on a commodore 64 (multicolor mode).

=item B<Amazing Studio PAF Video  :      @tab  X>


=item B<American Laser Games MM   :     @tab X>

    @tab Used in games like Mad Dog McCree.

=item B<Amuse Graphics Movie    :      @tab  X>


=item B<AMV Video               :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Chinese MP3 players.

=item B<ANSI/ASCII art          :      @tab  X>


=item B<Apple Intermediate Codec  :      @tab  X>


=item B<Apple MJPEG-B           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Apple Pixlet            :      @tab  X>


=item B<Apple ProRes            :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: apch,apcn,apcs,apco,ap4h,ap4x

=item B<Apple QuickDraw         :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: qdrw

=item B<Argonaut Video          :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in some Argonaut games.

=item B<Asus v1                 :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: ASV1

=item B<Asus v2                 :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: ASV2

=item B<ATI VCR1                :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VCR1

=item B<ATI VCR2                :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VCR2

=item B<Auravision Aura         :      @tab  X>


=item B<Auravision Aura 2       :      @tab  X>


=item B<Autodesk Animator Flic video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Autodesk RLE            :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: AASC

=item B<AV1                     :   E  @tab  E>

    @tab Supported through external libraries libaom, libdav1d, librav1e and libsvtav1

=item B<Avid 1:1 10-bit RGB Packer   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: AVrp

=item B<AVS (Audio Video Standard) video   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Video encoding used by the Creature Shock game.

=item B<AVS2-P2/IEEE1857.4      :   E  @tab  E>

    @tab Supported through external libraries libxavs2 and libdavs2

=item B<AVS3-P2/IEEE1857.10     :      @tab  E>

    @tab Supported through external library libuavs3d

=item B<AYUV                    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Microsoft uncompressed packed 4:4:4:4

=item B<Beam Software VB        :      @tab  X>


=item B<Bethesda VID video      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in some games from Bethesda Softworks.

=item B<Bink Video              :      @tab  X>


=item B<BitJazz SheerVideo      :      @tab  X>


=item B<Bitmap Brothers JV video   :    @tab X>


=item B<y41p Brooktree uncompressed 4:1:1 12-bit      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Brooktree ProSumer Video   :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: BT20

=item B<Brute Force & Ignorance    :    @tab X>

    @tab Used in the game Flash Traffic: City of Angels.

=item B<C93 video               :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in Cyberia game.

=item B<CamStudio               :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: CSCD

=item B<CD+G                    :      @tab  X>

    @tab Video codec for CD+G karaoke disks

=item B<CDXL                    :      @tab  X>

    @tab Amiga CD video codec

=item B<Chinese AVS video       :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab AVS1-P2, JiZhun profile, encoding through external library libxavs

=item B<Delphine Software International CIN video   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in Delphine Software International games.

=item B<Discworld II BMV Video  :      @tab  X>


=item B<CineForm HD             :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Canopus HQ              :      @tab  X>


=item B<Canopus HQA             :      @tab  X>


=item B<Canopus HQX             :      @tab  X>


=item B<Canopus Lossless Codec  :      @tab  X>


=item B<CDToons                 :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in various Broderbund games.

=item B<Cinepak                 :      @tab  X>


=item B<Cirrus Logic AccuPak    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: CLJR

=item B<CPiA Video Format       :      @tab  X>


=item B<Creative YUV (CYUV)     :      @tab  X>


=item B<DFA                     :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in Chronomaster game.

=item B<Dirac                   :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab supported though the native vc2 (Dirac Pro) encoder

=item B<Deluxe Paint Animation  :      @tab  X>


=item B<DNxHD                   :    X @tab  X>

    @tab aka SMPTE VC3

=item B<Duck TrueMotion 1.0    :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: DUCK

=item B<Duck TrueMotion 2.0     :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: TM20

=item B<Duck TrueMotion 2.0 RT  :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: TR20

=item B<DV (Digital Video)      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Dxtory capture format   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Feeble Files/ScummVM DXA   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec originally used in Feeble Files game.

=item B<Electronic Arts CMV video   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in NHL 95 game.

=item B<Electronic Arts Madcow video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Electronic Arts TGV video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Electronic Arts TGQ video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Electronic Arts TQI video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Escape 124              :      @tab  X>


=item B<Escape 130              :      @tab  X>


=item B<EVC / MPEG-5 Part 1     :   E  @tab  E>

    @tab encoding and decoding supported through external libraries libxeve and libxevd

=item B<FFmpeg video codec #1   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab lossless codec (fourcc: FFV1)

=item B<Flash Screen Video v1   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: FSV1

=item B<Flash Screen Video v2   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Flash Video (FLV)       :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Sorenson H.263 used in Flash

=item B<FM Screen Capture Codec   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Forward Uncompressed    :      @tab  X>


=item B<Fraps                   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Go2Meeting              :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: G2M2, G2M3

=item B<Go2Webinar              :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: G2M4

=item B<Gremlin Digital Video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<H.261                   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<H.263 / H.263-1996      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<H.263+ / H.263-1998 / H.263 version 2   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<H.264 / AVC / MPEG-4 AVC / MPEG-4 part 10   :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libx264 and OpenH264

=item B<HEVC                    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libx265 and libkvazaar

=item B<HNM version 4           :      @tab  X>


=item B<HuffYUV                 :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<HuffYUV FFmpeg variant  :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<IBM Ultimotion          :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: ULTI

=item B<id Cinematic video      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Quake II.

=item B<id RoQ video            :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Quake III, Jedi Knight 2, other computer games.

=item B<IFF ILBM                :      @tab  X>

    @tab IFF interleaved bitmap

=item B<IFF ByteRun1            :      @tab  X>

    @tab IFF run length encoded bitmap

=item B<Infinity IMM4           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Intel H.263             :      @tab  X>


=item B<Intel Indeo 2           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Intel Indeo 3           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Intel Indeo 4           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Intel Indeo 5           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Interplay C93           :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in the game Cyberia from Interplay.

=item B<Interplay MVE video     :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Interplay .MVE files.

=item B<J2K  :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Karl Morton's video codec   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in Worms games.

=item B<Kega Game Video (KGV1)  :       @tab  X>

    @tab Kega emulator screen capture codec.

=item B<Lagarith                :      @tab  X>


=item B<LCEVC / MPEG-5 LCEVC / MPEG-5 Part 2  :      @tab  E>

    @tab decoding supported through external library liblcevc-dec

=item B<LCL (LossLess Codec Library) MSZH   :      @tab  X>


=item B<LCL (LossLess Codec Library) ZLIB   :   E  @tab  E>


=item B<LEAD MCMP               :      @tab  X>


=item B<LOCO                    :      @tab  X>


=item B<LucasArts SANM/Smush    :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in LucasArts games / SMUSH animations.

=item B<lossless MJPEG          :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<MagicYUV Video          :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Mandsoft Screen Capture Codec   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Microsoft ATC Screen    :      @tab  X>

    @tab Also known as Microsoft Screen 3.

=item B<Microsoft Expression Encoder Screen   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Also known as Microsoft Titanium Screen 2.

=item B<Microsoft RLE           :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Microsoft Screen 1      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Also known as Windows Media Video V7 Screen.

=item B<Microsoft Screen 2      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Also known as Windows Media Video V9 Screen.

=item B<Microsoft Video 1       :      @tab  X>


=item B<Mimic                   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in MSN Messenger Webcam streams.

=item B<Miro VideoXL            :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VIXL

=item B<MJPEG (Motion JPEG)     :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Mobotix MxPEG video     :      @tab  X>


=item B<Motion Pixels video     :      @tab  X>


=item B<MPEG-1 video            :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<MPEG-2 video            :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<MPEG-4 part 2           :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab libxvidcore can be used alternatively for encoding.

=item B<MPEG-4 part 2 Microsoft variant version 1   :      @tab  X>


=item B<MPEG-4 part 2 Microsoft variant version 2   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<MPEG-4 part 2 Microsoft variant version 3   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Newtek SpeedHQ                :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Nintendo Gamecube THP video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<NotchLC                 :      @tab  X>


=item B<NuppelVideo/RTjpeg      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Video encoding used in NuppelVideo files.

=item B<On2 VP3                 :      @tab  X>

    @tab still experimental

=item B<On2 VP4                 :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VP40

=item B<On2 VP5                 :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VP50

=item B<On2 VP6                 :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VP60,VP61,VP62

=item B<On2 VP7                 :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VP70,VP71

=item B<VP8                     :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: VP80, encoding supported through external library libvpx

=item B<VP9                     :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libvpx

=item B<Pinnacle TARGA CineWave YUV16  :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: Y216

=item B<Q-team QPEG             :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourccs: QPEG, Q1.0, Q1.1

=item B<QuickTime 8BPS video    :      @tab  X>


=item B<QuickTime Animation (RLE) video   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: 'rle '

=item B<QuickTime Graphics (SMC)   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: 'smc '

=item B<QuickTime video (RPZA)  :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: rpza

=item B<R10K AJA Kona 10-bit RGB Codec      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<R210 Quicktime Uncompressed RGB 10-bit      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Raw Video               :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<RealVideo 1.0           :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<RealVideo 2.0           :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<RealVideo 3.0           :      @tab  X>

    @tab still far from ideal

=item B<RealVideo 4.0           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Renderware TXD (TeXture Dictionary)   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Texture dictionaries used by the Renderware Engine.

=item B<RivaTuner Video         :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: 'RTV1'

=item B<RL2 video               :      @tab  X>

    @tab used in some games by Entertainment Software Partners

=item B<ScreenPressor           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Screenpresso            :      @tab  X>


=item B<Screen Recorder Gold Codec   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Sierra VMD video        :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Sierra VMD files.

=item B<Silicon Graphics Motion Video Compressor 1 (MVC1)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Silicon Graphics Motion Video Compressor 2 (MVC2)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Silicon Graphics RLE 8-bit video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Smacker video           :      @tab  X>

    @tab Video encoding used in Smacker.

=item B<SMPTE VC-1              :      @tab  X>


=item B<Snow                    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab experimental wavelet codec (fourcc: SNOW)

=item B<Sony PlayStation MDEC (Motion DECoder)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Sorenson Vector Quantizer 1   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: SVQ1

=item B<Sorenson Vector Quantizer 3   :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: SVQ3

=item B<Sunplus JPEG (SP5X)     :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: SP5X

=item B<TechSmith Screen Capture Codec   :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: TSCC

=item B<TechSmith Screen Capture Codec 2   :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: TSC2

=item B<Theora                  :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libtheora

=item B<Tiertex Limited SEQ video   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in DOS CD-ROM FlashBack game.

=item B<Ut Video                :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<v210 QuickTime uncompressed 4:2:2 10-bit      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<v308 QuickTime uncompressed 4:4:4             :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<v408 QuickTime uncompressed 4:4:4:4           :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<v410 QuickTime uncompressed 4:4:4 10-bit      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<VBLE Lossless Codec     :      @tab  X>


=item B<vMix Video              :      @tab  X>

    @tab fourcc: 'VMX1'

=item B<VMware Screen Codec / VMware Video   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in videos captured by VMware.

=item B<Westwood Studios VQA (Vector Quantized Animation) video   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Image     :      @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Video 7   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Video 8   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Video 9   :      @tab  X>

    @tab not completely working

=item B<Wing Commander III / Xan   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Wing Commander III .MVE files.

=item B<Wing Commander IV / Xan   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Wing Commander IV.

=item B<Winnov WNV1             :      @tab  X>


=item B<WMV7                    :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<YAMAHA SMAF             :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Psygnosis YOP Video     :      @tab  X>


=item B<yuv4                    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab libquicktime uncompressed packed 4:2:0

=item B<ZeroCodec Lossless Video  :      @tab  X>


=item B<ZLIB                    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab part of LCL, encoder experimental

=item B<Zip Motion Blocks Video   :    X @tab  X>

    @tab Encoder works only in PAL8.

=back


C<X> means that the feature in that column (encoding / decoding) is supported.

C<E> means that support is provided through an external library.


=head2 Audio Codecs



=over 4


=item B<Name  :  Encoding @tab Decoding @tab Comments>


=item B<8SVX exponential        :      @tab  X>


=item B<8SVX fibonacci          :      @tab  X>


=item B<AAC                     :  EX  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through internal encoder and external library libfdk-aac

=item B<AAC+                    :   E  @tab  IX>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libfdk-aac

=item B<AC-3                    :  IX  @tab  IX>


=item B<ACELP.KELVIN            :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM 4X Movie          :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Yamaha AICA       :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM AmuseGraphics Movie  :     @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Argonaut Games    :  X   @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM CDROM XA          :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Creative Technology  :      @tab  X>

    @tab 16 -E<gt> 4, 8 -E<gt> 4, 8 -E<gt> 3, 8 -E<gt> 2

=item B<ADPCM Electronic Arts   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in various EA titles.

=item B<ADPCM Electronic Arts Maxis CDROM XS   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Sim City 3000.

=item B<ADPCM Electronic Arts R1   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Electronic Arts R2   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Electronic Arts R3   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Electronic Arts XAS  :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM G.722             :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM G.726             :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Acorn Replay  :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA AMV           :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in AMV files

=item B<ADPCM IMA Cunning Developments   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Electronic Arts EACS   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Electronic Arts SEAD   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Funcom        :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA High Voltage Software ALP       :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Mobiclip MOFLEX   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA QuickTime     :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Simon & Schuster Interactive    :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Ubisoft APM   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Loki SDL MJPEG   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA WAV           :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Westwood      :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM ISS IMA           :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in FunCom games.

=item B<ADPCM IMA Dialogic      :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM IMA Duck DK3      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in some Sega Saturn console games.

=item B<ADPCM IMA Duck DK4      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in some Sega Saturn console games.

=item B<ADPCM IMA Radical       :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Microsoft         :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM MS IMA            :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Nintendo Gamecube AFC   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Nintendo Gamecube DTK   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Nintendo THP   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Playstation       :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM QT IMA            :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM SEGA CRI ADX      :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Sega Dreamcast games.

=item B<ADPCM Shockwave Flash   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Sound Blaster Pro 2-bit   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Sound Blaster Pro 2.6-bit   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Sound Blaster Pro 4-bit   :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM VIMA              :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in LucasArts SMUSH animations.

=item B<ADPCM Konami XMD        :      @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Westwood Studios IMA       :   X @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Westwood Studios games like Command and Conquer.

=item B<ADPCM Yamaha            :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<ADPCM Zork              :      @tab  X>


=item B<AMR-NB                  :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libopencore-amrnb

=item B<AMR-WB                  :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libvo-amrwbenc

=item B<Amazing Studio PAF Audio  :      @tab  X>


=item B<Apple lossless audio    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab QuickTime fourcc 'alac'

=item B<aptX                    :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Bluetooth A2DP

=item B<aptX HD                 :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Bluetooth A2DP

=item B<ATRAC1                  :      @tab  X>


=item B<ATRAC3                  :      @tab  X>


=item B<ATRAC3+                 :      @tab  X>


=item B<ATRAC9                  :      @tab  X>


=item B<Bink Audio              :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Bink and Smacker files in many games.

=item B<Bonk audio              :      @tab  X>


=item B<CELT                    :      @tab  E>

    @tab decoding supported through external library libcelt

=item B<codec2                  :   E  @tab  E>

    @tab en/decoding supported through external library libcodec2

=item B<CRI HCA                 :      @tab X>


=item B<Delphine Software International CIN audio   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Codec used in Delphine Software International games.

=item B<DFPWM                   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Digital Speech Standard - Standard Play mode (DSS SP)  :      @tab  X>


=item B<Discworld II BMV Audio  :      @tab  X>


=item B<COOK                    :      @tab  X>

    @tab All versions except 5.1 are supported.

=item B<DCA (DTS Coherent Acoustics)   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab supported extensions: XCh, XXCH, X96, XBR, XLL, LBR (partially)

=item B<Dolby E   :      @tab  X>


=item B<DPCM Cuberoot-Delta-Exact  :   @tab  X>

    @tab Used in few games.

=item B<DPCM Gremlin            :      @tab  X>


=item B<DPCM id RoQ             :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Quake III, Jedi Knight 2 and other computer games.

=item B<DPCM Marble WADY        :      @tab  X>


=item B<DPCM Interplay          :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in various Interplay computer games.

=item B<DPCM Squareroot-Delta-Exact   :   @tab  X>

    @tab Used in various games.

=item B<DPCM Sierra Online      :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Sierra Online game audio files.

=item B<DPCM Sol                :      @tab  X>


=item B<DPCM Xan                :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Origin's Wing Commander IV AVI files.

=item B<DPCM Xilam DERF         :      @tab  X>


=item B<DSD (Direct Stream Digital), least significant bit first   :   @tab  X>


=item B<DSD (Direct Stream Digital), most significant bit first    :   @tab  X>


=item B<DSD (Direct Stream Digital), least significant bit first, planar   :   @tab  X>


=item B<DSD (Direct Stream Digital), most significant bit first, planar    :   @tab  X>


=item B<DSP Group TrueSpeech    :      @tab  X>


=item B<DST (Direct Stream Transfer)  :   @tab  X>


=item B<DV audio                :      @tab  X>


=item B<Enhanced AC-3           :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<EVRC (Enhanced Variable Rate Codec)  :      @tab  X>


=item B<FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)   :   X  @tab  IX>


=item B<FTR Voice               :      @tab  X>


=item B<G.723.1                 :  X   @tab  X>


=item B<G.729                   :      @tab  X>


=item B<GSM                     :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libgsm

=item B<GSM Microsoft variant   :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libgsm

=item B<IAC (Indeo Audio Coder)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<iLBC (Internet Low Bitrate Codec)  :   E  @tab  EX>

    @tab encoding and decoding supported through external library libilbc

=item B<IMC (Intel Music Coder)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Interplay ACM             :      @tab  X>


=item B<LC3                     :  E  @tab  E>

    @tab supported through external library liblc3

=item B<MACE (Macintosh Audio Compression/Expansion) 6:1   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Marian's A-pac audio      :      @tab  X>


=item B<MI-SC4 (Micronas SC-4 Audio)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<MLP (Meridian Lossless Packing)   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in DVD-Audio discs.

=item B<Monkey's Audio          :      @tab  X>


=item B<MP1 (MPEG audio layer 1)   :      @tab IX>


=item B<MP2 (MPEG audio layer 2)   :  IX  @tab IX>

    @tab encoding supported also through external library TwoLAME

=item B<MP3 (MPEG audio layer 3)   :   E  @tab IX>

    @tab encoding supported through external library LAME, ADU MP3 and MP3onMP4 also supported

=item B<MPEG-4 Audio Lossless Coding (ALS)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<MobiClip FastAudio      :      @tab  X>


=item B<Musepack SV7            :      @tab  X>


=item B<Musepack SV8            :      @tab  X>


=item B<Nellymoser Asao         :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<On2 AVC (Audio for Video Codec)  :      @tab  X>


=item B<Opus                    :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab encoding supported through external library libopus

=item B<OSQ (Original Sound Quality)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<PCM A-law               :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM mu-law              :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM Archimedes VIDC     :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 8-bit planar   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 16-bit big-endian planar   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 16-bit little-endian planar   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 24-bit little-endian planar   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 32-bit little-endian planar   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM 32-bit floating point big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM 32-bit floating point little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM 64-bit floating point big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM 64-bit floating point little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM D-Cinema audio signed 24-bit    :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 8-bit        :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 16-bit big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 16-bit little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 24-bit big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 24-bit little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 32-bit big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 32-bit little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM signed 16/20/24-bit big-endian in MPEG-TS   :      @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 8-bit      :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 16-bit big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 16-bit little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 24-bit big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 24-bit little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 32-bit big-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM unsigned 32-bit little-endian   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<PCM SGA                 :      @tab  X>


=item B<QCELP / PureVoice       :      @tab  X>


=item B<QDesign Music Codec 1   :      @tab  X>


=item B<QDesign Music Codec 2   :      @tab  X>

    @tab There are still some distortions.

=item B<RealAudio 1.0 (14.4K)   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Real 14400 bit/s codec

=item B<RealAudio 2.0 (28.8K)   :      @tab  X>

    @tab Real 28800 bit/s codec

=item B<RealAudio 3.0 (dnet)    :  IX  @tab  X>

    @tab Real low bitrate AC-3 codec

=item B<RealAudio Lossless      :      @tab  X>


=item B<RealAudio SIPR / ACELP.NET  :      @tab  X>


=item B<RK Audio (RKA)          :      @tab  X>


=item B<SBC (low-complexity subband codec)  :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Bluetooth A2DP

=item B<Shorten                 :      @tab  X>


=item B<Sierra VMD audio        :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in Sierra VMD files.

=item B<Smacker audio           :      @tab  X>


=item B<SMPTE 302M AES3 audio   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Sonic                   :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab experimental codec

=item B<Sonic lossless          :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab experimental codec

=item B<Speex                   :   E  @tab  EX>

    @tab supported through external library libspeex

=item B<TAK (Tom's lossless Audio Kompressor)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<True Audio (TTA)        :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<TrueHD                  :   X  @tab  X>

    @tab Used in HD-DVD and Blu-Ray discs.

=item B<TwinVQ (VQF flavor)     :      @tab  X>


=item B<VIMA                    :      @tab  X>

    @tab Used in LucasArts SMUSH animations.

=item B<ViewQuest VQC           :      @tab  X>


=item B<Vorbis                  :   E  @tab  X>

    @tab A native but very primitive encoder exists.

=item B<Voxware MetaSound       :      @tab  X>


=item B<Waveform Archiver       :      @tab  X>


=item B<WavPack                 :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Westwood Audio (SND1)   :      @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Audio 1   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Audio 2   :   X  @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Audio Lossless  :   @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Audio Pro  :     @tab  X>


=item B<Windows Media Audio Voice  :   @tab  X>


=item B<Xbox Media Audio 1      :      @tab  X>


=item B<Xbox Media Audio 2      :      @tab  X>


=back


C<X> means that the feature in that column (encoding / decoding) is supported.

C<E> means that support is provided through an external library.

C<I> means that an integer-only version is available, too (ensures high
performance on systems without hardware floating point support).


=head2 Subtitle Formats



=over 4


=item B<Name  :  Muxing @tab Demuxing @tab Encoding @tab Decoding>


=item B<3GPP Timed Text   :    @tab   @tab X @tab X>


=item B<AQTitle           :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<DVB               :  X @tab X @tab X @tab X>


=item B<DVB teletext      :    @tab X @tab   @tab E>


=item B<DVD               :  X @tab X @tab X @tab X>


=item B<JACOsub           :  X @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<MicroDVD          :  X @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<MPL2              :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<MPsub (MPlayer)   :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<PGS               :    @tab   @tab   @tab X>


=item B<PJS (Phoenix)     :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<RealText          :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<SAMI              :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<Spruce format (STL)  :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<SSA/ASS           :  X @tab X @tab X @tab X>


=item B<SubRip (SRT)      :  X @tab X @tab X @tab X>


=item B<SubViewer v1      :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<SubViewer         :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<TED Talks captions  :  @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<TTML              :  X @tab   @tab X @tab>


=item B<VobSub (IDX+SUB)  :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<VPlayer           :    @tab X @tab   @tab X>


=item B<WebVTT            :  X @tab X @tab X @tab X>


=item B<XSUB              :    @tab   @tab X @tab X>


=back


C<X> means that the feature is supported.

C<E> means that support is provided through an external library.


=head2 Network Protocols



=over 4


=item B<Name          :  Support>


=item B<AMQP          :  E>


=item B<file          :  X>


=item B<FTP           :  X>


=item B<Gopher        :  X>


=item B<Gophers       :  X>


=item B<HLS           :  X>


=item B<HTTP          :  X>


=item B<HTTPS         :  X>


=item B<Icecast       :  X>


=item B<MMSH          :  X>


=item B<MMST          :  X>


=item B<pipe          :  X>


=item B<Pro-MPEG FEC  :  X>


=item B<RTMP          :  X>


=item B<RTMPE         :  X>


=item B<RTMPS         :  X>


=item B<RTMPT         :  X>


=item B<RTMPTE        :  X>


=item B<RTMPTS        :  X>


=item B<RTP           :  X>


=item B<SAMBA         :  E>


=item B<SCTP          :  X>


=item B<SFTP          :  E>


=item B<TCP           :  X>


=item B<TLS           :  X>


=item B<UDP           :  X>


=item B<ZMQ           :  E>


=back


C<X> means that the protocol is supported.

C<E> means that support is provided through an external library.



=head2 Input/Output Devices



=over 4


=item B<Name               :  Input  @tab Output>


=item B<ALSA               :  X      @tab X>


=item B<BKTR               :  X      @tab>


=item B<caca               :         @tab X>


=item B<DV1394             :  X      @tab>


=item B<Lavfi virtual device  :  X   @tab>


=item B<Linux framebuffer  :  X      @tab X>


=item B<JACK               :  X      @tab>


=item B<LIBCDIO            :  X>


=item B<LIBDC1394          :  X      @tab>


=item B<OpenAL             :  X>


=item B<OpenGL             :         @tab X>


=item B<OSS                :  X      @tab X>


=item B<PulseAudio         :  X      @tab X>


=item B<SDL                :         @tab X>


=item B<Video4Linux2       :  X      @tab X>


=item B<VfW capture        :  X      @tab>


=item B<X11 grabbing       :  X      @tab>


=item B<Win32 grabbing     :  X      @tab>


=back


C<X> means that input/output is supported.


=head2 Timecode



=over 4


=item B<Codec/format       :  Read   @tab Write>


=item B<AVI                :  X      @tab X>


=item B<DV                 :  X      @tab X>


=item B<GXF                :  X      @tab X>


=item B<MOV                :  X      @tab X>


=item B<MPEG1/2            :  X      @tab X>


=item B<MXF                :  X      @tab X>


=back



=head1 SEE ALSO



ffmpeg(1),
ffplay(1), ffprobe(1),
ffmpeg-utils(1), ffmpeg-scaler(1), ffmpeg-resampler(1),
ffmpeg-codecs(1), ffmpeg-bitstream-filters(1), ffmpeg-formats(1),
ffmpeg-devices(1), ffmpeg-protocols(1), ffmpeg-filters(1)


=head1 AUTHORS


The FFmpeg developers.

For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
(https://git.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
B<git log> in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
online repository at E<lt>B<https://git.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg>E<gt>.

Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
F<MAINTAINERS> in the source code tree.